JP2022082728A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing degradation in amusement.

SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: a specific substrate where electronic components are mounted; and a decorative member to be disposed in front of the specific substrate. The front face of the specific substrate has a specific color. The decorative member has a visibility possible area through which the specific substrate is visible and a visibility difficult area through which the specific substrate is hardly visible or a visibility impossible area through which the specific substrate is invisible. On the basis of a boundary line between the visibility possible area and the visibility difficult area or the visibility impossible area, the external shape of the visibility possible area has a decorative external shape.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 511

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") and a rotating cylinder type game machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a member having a decorative function is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-183066

Generally, when the number of games played on a gaming machine that employs a certain predetermined effect is small, the player feels a certain interest from the novelty when the effect occurs, but the number of games played on the gaming machine increases. As the chances of the production increase, the novelty of the production will be lost, and the interest will decline. Therefore, in the gaming machine industry, there is a problem that the gaming machines that adopt new configurations and functions so that the player can feel a certain interest must be constantly released.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a new configuration in which a printed circuit board itself on which various lamps and the like are mounted is used as one of decorative elements.

The present invention
An effect display device that can display a predetermined image, and
An accessory that is provided in front of the staging display device and exhibits a predetermined external shape, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The accessory includes a printed circuit board whose front surface is colored with a specific color and a cover body provided so as to cover the front of the printed circuit board.
The cover body has a colorless transparent region in which the specific color can be identified in order to use the color of the printed circuit board as a decorative element, and a difficult-to-identify region in which the specific color is difficult to identify.
The transmission region and the difficult-to-identify region are adjacent to each other.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new configuration in which the printed circuit board itself is used as one of the decorative elements.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. be. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the staging operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the staging operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the staging operation unit from the direction which the central axis of an operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut along the DD line in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the staging operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. (A) is a view of the staging operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is sectional drawing which cut at the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from behind by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electric connection between a payout control board constituting a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit and the like of a payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a payout control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Embodiment 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Embodiment 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Embodiment 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure in the case where a plurality of sensor signal input units connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor of the detection circuit unit. (A) is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the magnetic sensor input circuit of another Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the circuit structure which arranged the voltage output part, the voltage raising part, and the detection circuit part on the same board. It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit composition which arranged the voltage raising part and the detection circuit part on the same board, and arranged the voltage output part on another board (sensor board). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit composition which arranged the voltage output part and the voltage raising part on the same board, and arranged the detection circuit part on another board (for example, a main control board). The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected a plurality of sensors in parallel to a voltage output part. It is a figure which shows typically the state that integration is aimed at only the component (discrete component) which has high security performance against fraud in the 1st control part MCG. It is a figure which shows a part region in the base board of the main control board which concerns on a modification. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the acquisition principle of the operation information in the vicinity of an opening window. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119. The figure schematically shows the relationship between the special operation receiving portion when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front and various staging members arranged at positions overlapping with the special operation receiving portion when viewed from the front. be. (A) is a diagram for explaining a first operation control mode for a display unit, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a second operation control mode for a display unit. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. It is a flowchart which shows the control example about the detection information analysis processing of the physical object executed in the peripheral control part steady processing. (A) is a time chart showing control when an effect reception occurs at a plurality of operation parts, and (b) shows a state of occurrence of an effect operation when an effect reception occurs at a plurality of operation parts. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 using a special operation receiving part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S5322). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol ordinary processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the said effect symbol variation start process in a normal gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing procedure about the lottery (the notice lottery performed in the effect symbol change start process) about the advance notice effect appearing in the execution period (the pattern variation time) of the effect pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice determination table T2 which is referred to when the change (the hold to be digested) is not the target of the timer look-ahead effect in a normal game state (the second timer notice lottery). (A) is a diagram showing an example of the first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is performed in the normal game state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the normal game. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd mission effect determination table T3b (second mission effect lottery) which is referred when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed in the state. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice side timer type determination table T4 referred to in the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505). Reach type and processing status (reach type and processing status) when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when it is not decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). In addition to the first to fourth processing statuses, the fifth processing status and the sixth processing status, which will be described later), are shown in comparison with the number of appearance upper limit of timer target candidate effects. Step S5508 in the first processing state in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5a referred to in the process of. Step S5523 in the second processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5b referred to in the process of. Step S5533 in the third processing state in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5532) are made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5c referred to in the process of. Step S5543 is in the fourth processing state in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5d referred to in the process of. The process of step S5508 in the first processing state in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6a-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 (step S5509) as a result of executing. The process of step S5523 in the second processing state in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6b-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 (step S5524) as a result of executing. The process of step S5543 in the fourth processing situation in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6d-2 which is referred to when it is decided to make a notice number 2 as a result of executing (step S5544). Corresponds to the character reach in the second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variation number to be performed is selected. Corresponds to SP reach in the second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number to be performed is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T7a referred to in the 1st timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T7b referred to in the 2nd timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). When the fifth processing status is such that the timer effect on the notice side is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5e referred to in the process of step S5553. In the case of the sixth processing status in which the determination (NO in step S5552) that the timer effect on the notice side is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed is made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5f referred to in the process of step S5563. In the fifth processing situation in which the decision (YES in step S5552) to execute the mission effect (make the conversation advance appear) is made without executing the timer effect on the advance notice side (NO in step S5503), step S5553. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-1 which is referred to when it is decided to make a notice number 1 as a result of executing the process of (step S5554). In the fifth processing situation in which the decision (YES in step S5552) to execute the mission effect (make the conversation advance appear) is made without executing the timer effect on the advance notice side (NO in step S5503), step S5553. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-2 which is referred to when it is decided to make a notice number 2 as a result of executing the process of (step S5554). In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 (step S5564) as a result of executing the process of. In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-2 which is referred to when it is decided to make a notice number 2 as a result of executing the process of (step S5564). In (a), the reserved information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and the three reserved information (all are the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not executed are stored. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7a which is referred in the 1st special figure look-ahead process when a new prize (the 1st special symbol) occurs in a state. Further, in (b), the reserved information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and the two reserved information (both are the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not executed are stored. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7b referred to in the 1st special figure look-ahead process when a new prize (the 1st special symbol) occurs in the state of being. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 referred to when the execution mode of the timer look-ahead effect is determined in the situation where the look-ahead variable number is 4. .. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 referred to when the execution mode of the timer look-ahead effect is determined in the situation where the look-ahead variable number is 3. .. It is usually referred to when there is no jackpot symbol appearing among the hold information in which the variable display is running and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the time hold change table T9a. Special that is referred to when there is a jackpot symbol that appears between the hold information in which the variable display is running and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the time hold change table T9b. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing procedure about the processing performed to realize a change effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. (A) is a mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the timer target exclusion effect to be performed. (B) is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the timer target exclusion effect to be performed. The timer target first-out is performed in the second processing state in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the production. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process about whether the timer target first-out effect is generated, and further, at what timing the timer target first-out effect is generated. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process about which type of the effect mode to generate at the timing when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process about which type of the effect mode to generate at those timings when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process about which type of the effect mode to generate at the timing when the timer target first-out effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3. In the second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507), the number of notices is 2. Resurrection timer effect performed when it is determined to be one (step S523), and when it is determined to perform "conversation notice" at the earlier timing and "feature A operation 1" at the later timing. It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of. (A) is a mode of the single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the timer target suppression control to be performed. (B) is a figure which shows an example of the table referred to in the timer target suppression control when the rate at which the suppression period occurs varies depending on the type of the effect mode appearing as the effect of the timer target. (A) is a mode of the single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the timer effect which made the new timer to be performed the effect target. (B) is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the timer effect which made the new timer to be performed the effect target. The timer mode effect is performed in the second processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of. The second (a) to (c) is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506), and the determination that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S507) is made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the count output stop control performed in the processing situation of. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the processing procedure at the time of realizing the count output stop control. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of a timer plus effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer stagnation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of the progress effect leading to a timer target effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of the operation effect in a timer. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer concealment effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by a fixed channel system. It shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a staging time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship with a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a staging time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or the combination thereof. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a free channel search process in the case of executing the control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the condition which selects the channel which exchanges a sound output (stops a sound reproduction) when a channel is not vacant at the time of output of a new sound in this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the production example for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing when a sound effect is reproduced, (B) shows the channel which each sound effect is output. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of a sound effect in the first half variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of a staging sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each staging sound effect. It is a figure which shows the screen composition example of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each channel group which shows the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs the sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling a volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each effect sound which shows the volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of a sound in this embodiment. This is the first half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control process for controlling the sound based on the parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. This is the latter half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control process for controlling the sound based on the parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling a volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification is terminated, for each type of the notification sound exemplified in FIG. 244. (A) is an example of processing when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. Is a diagram. (B) is an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It is a figure which shows. (C) is an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It is a figure which shows. (A) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. Is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (C) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (D) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. Is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of an effect separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process which concerns on setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content which is determined separately for each channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the restriction content which is determined separately for each channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when a channel special opening process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the operation sound output processing under suppression is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the processing related to the channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. An example of the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decoration body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. It is a time chart showing. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in a process other than this process, not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the movable body. It is a time chart which shows an example of the situation on the decoration side. It is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorations at a specific timing during the period when the design changes. .. A time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs in multiple movable decorations at two different timings during the period when the design changes. be. It is a time chart which shows an example about the control contents for realizing the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example about the display contents when the operation is performed a plurality of times. It is a time chart which shows an example about the control contents for realizing the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect using an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect using an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword staging operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword staging operation unit. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect pattern selection table in the effect mode which can execute a sword withdrawal effect, (A) an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect according to the type of a variation pattern, (B). ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body when the aura member is provided in the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and is (A) the sword delivery state, (B) the first sword pulling state, (C) the second. Indicates the state of sword withdrawal. It is a vertical sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) the sword delivery state, (B) the first sword pulling state, and (C) the second sword pulling state. It is a vertical sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword decoration body and the operation validity period related to the operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body of the modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the staging display device and the motion transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the staging display device and the motion transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the staging display device and the motion transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button used from various aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button used from various aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button used from various aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration body used for the pseudo-ream production. It is a figure which shows the production transition example of the pseudo continuous production common to all the production patterns. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the post-operation effect (drop effect of a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) of the sword decoration body in the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which becomes a feature of a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the type of the staging pattern which can be selected based on a variation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo-continuous production, and shows a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo-continuous production, and shows a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo-continuous production, and shows a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo-continuous production, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo-continuous production, and shows a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the transition example. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button is once enabled without the sword decoration being effective, and then the sword decoration is activated. It is a figure which shows the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect when "specific operation-related effect" is set as the effect target of the timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the effect content for each type about the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect about the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the button image BTG is displayed in the mode (the specific effect mode) to which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the production example when the first precursor production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the staging that the expectation degree is shown by the automatic staging function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the staging that the expectation degree is shown by the automatic staging function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the staging that the expectation degree is shown by the automatic staging function. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing when it is in an automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing when it is in an automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing when it is in an automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the operation is performed a plurality of times in a single-shot operation mode when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and (b) is a time chart showing an effect example when the operation is performed a plurality of times, and (b) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect when it is operated in the mode of long-pressing when it is not done. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the effect example when the operation is started in an aspect. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, the symbol change is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set". It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation (release operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state and the operation (setting operation) for setting are performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of hold is 3 effect status, the design is "2nd effect pattern (loss fluctuation) in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set". A time chart showing a processing example when the fluctuation is started and an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (cancellation operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation. be. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol change is started in the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period (specific valid period) in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set, and the execution period of the symbol change is executed. It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation for setting to the automatic button effect state is performed in. It is a figure which shows the production example when the production progresses in the 3rd production pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period to affect "the specific process which concerns the effect such as an effect setting". It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period to affect "the specific process which concerns the effect such as an effect setting". It is a time chart which shows an example about the production process regarding the special production reception period. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decorative body when a specific condition is satisfied. It is a time chart which shows the modification example with respect to the example shown in FIG. 374. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 which a new symbol change is started arrives in the situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 which a special effect pattern is started arrives in the situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the original position. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in a series of operation confirmation periods. (A) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button other than the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and (B) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the sword decoration during the operation acceptance period, and (B) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword decoration and abnormality detection outside the operation acceptance period. (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament and the abnormality detection during the operation acceptance period. (A) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button, and (B) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the game board. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the effect when the button is projected in the normal state, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the effect when the button is projected when an abnormality occurs. .. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button normal time effect, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the button normal time effect when an abnormality occurs. .. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs during the operation acceptance period, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the automatic operation confirmation period. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the operation state and the notification mode. It is a time chart showing the flow of the effect when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button during the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the non-time saving state, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the time saving state. It is a time chart showing an operating state. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline of the function for executing the staging control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module composition in the peripheral control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of the staging control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure until the data necessary for the staging control of the gaming machine of this embodiment is acquired. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in the staging control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of a lamp and a sound in the staging control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function such as a sound and a motor in the staging control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the advance notice effect which is executed in the series of variation display from the variation start to stop of a special symbol in this embodiment, and shows an example of the scheduler and the scheduler data used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which controls lighting / blinking of a lamp in the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls a lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow and the left star character in the star character notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls a right-handed star character in the star character advance notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a middle star character in the star character notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs the motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a drawing explaining the scheduler data which is executed when the power of the gaming machine of this embodiment is turned on. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing the command and the scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the relationship between these configurations. It is a figure explaining the process of executing the scheduler data at the time of power-on of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice effect in a series of variation display from the change start to stop of a special symbol in this embodiment, (A) is the effect executed from the change start to the end, and executes the said effect. The scheduler data for the purpose and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hatchet in the hatchet fall notice. It is a figure explaining the content of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which controls a motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice which is the first half part of the hatchet role fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the hatchet character latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the hatchet character second half fall notice which is the latter half part of the hatchet character fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the hatchet character latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the hatchet character latter half fall notice which is the latter half part of the hatchet character fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the staging control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure of executing the advance notice effect in the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) is the timing to execute the advance notice effect and execution time of the advance notice effect, (B) is The scheduler data driven by each scheduler for executing the advance notice effect is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal display block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the drawing data file in the step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) with the image composition / motion creation graphic tool of the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, (B) is the structure of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal display in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal display in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the staging SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect SW activation command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage which a step-up notice effect is executed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. .. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, and (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect. A drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing category in this embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and in particular, shows the evaluation procedure which sets the effect SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the details of the structure of the staging SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines staging SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of staging SW control information, (C). Is a diagram showing an example of a staging SW group. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the effect SW flag and effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows effect SW flag, (B) shows effect SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect SW replacement table information and the program data which defines the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is effect SW replacement table information, (B) is effect SW. Shows the replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of a layer information table (for background). Is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 2). show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) shows the liquid crystal layer table of a step-up notice effect, (B) shows the structure of the liquid crystal effect common block. .. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal display block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the button mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal display effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing classification which can be determined in the callback function at the time of the callback execution by the effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of each layer and the drawing result of all layers at the time of execution of the advance notice effect of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the common block over a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) shows the execution timing of a symbol display and a notice effect, (B) shows the structure of the liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image to a frame buffer by writing the image written to each layer respectively. It is a figure explaining the procedure of converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer in this embodiment and then writing it into a frame buffer. It is a figure explaining the procedure which the display list command group in this embodiment is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM, and then is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure of transferring a display list command group in this embodiment to a sound source built-in VDP without storing in a peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of the configuration which has a plurality of display areas which display the identification symbol variable in this embodiment, (A) is the configuration example which has the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol on one display screen, (A). B) is a configuration example in which the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol are provided on each display screen when the two display screens are provided. It is a figure explaining the emphasis mode of the display area which performs the variation display of the identification symbol in this embodiment, (A) is the normal mode which displays the display area A and the display area B in a standard mode (the specified size). , (B) is an emphasis mode A for displaying the display area A in the emphasis mode, and (C) is an emphasis mode B for displaying the display area B in the emphasis mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the screen transition of the configuration which performs the variation display of the identification symbol of this embodiment in the display area A and the display area B respectively, and is interlocked with the case where the variation of a part of the identification symbol is stopped in the display area A. An example is shown in which the variation of the identification symbol stops in the display area B. It is a figure explaining an example of the screen transition of the configuration which performs the variation display of the identification symbol of this embodiment in the display area A and the display area B respectively, and is shown in the display area B when the variation is stopped, regardless of the display mode of the display area A. An example of displaying all the stop symbols is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the effect block of the timer effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the timer effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the effect block of the background effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the background effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example which the identification symbol fluctuates and displays in each of the plurality of display areas of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which the identification symbol is variable display independently in each of the plurality of display areas of this embodiment, and is variable display in the same mode at a predetermined timing. It is a figure which shows the example which the identification symbol fluctuates display in each of the plurality of display areas of this embodiment, and stops at a different symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game board of the game machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the character accessory in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the snowman accessory in this embodiment, (A) is the figure which was seen from the front, (B) is the figure which was seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which looked at the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment from the back surface side. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship between a light emitting body and a transmissive portion and a non-transmissive portion of a cover member in the character accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from a light emitting body in the character accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship between a light emitting body and a transmissive part and a non-transmissive part of a cover member in the character accessory of the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment of this embodiment, and shows the state which the character accessory substrate and the light guide member overlap. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment to a game board. It is a figure which shows the cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the snowman substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side of the snowman substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the horizontal section of the snowman accessory of this embodiment from the top. It is the figure which looked at the horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory in the modification of this embodiment from the top. It is a figure which showed the whole of the game board of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the front view and the back view of the face substrate of the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the face cover part of the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a perspective view which showed the state which the rabbit accessory of this embodiment is in a standby position. It is a figure which showed an example about the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example about the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example about the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the whole of the game board in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the stump box part of this embodiment and its exploded view, the front view of the rear wall cover, and the front view of the rear wall substrate. It is a figure which showed the stump box part and its exploded view, the front view of the rear wall cover, and the front view of the rear wall substrate in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the Example about the mountain accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the board back grass role of this embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the 20 to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 having a front-rear outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through port of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and a player according to a game state that is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and changes as a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. The effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and the door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the discharge unit base 801 and the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the lower part for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having the speaker 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed inside. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the gaming board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a into which the gaming ball is driven, and the gaming ball launched from the ball launching device 680 is placed on the upper portion of the gaming area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to be guided to the above, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the payout of the game ball can enhance the interest of the player, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front after being disassembled. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. It is provided with a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It includes an upper part on the left end side of the front view of the curtain plate member 50 and a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position left and right from the center of the left and right on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Are prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step portion 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness are the same as the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surface of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that a game ball can pass through. The vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and the vertical wall portion 54 bulging forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 and the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. It is provided with a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned in a grid pattern by a plurality of ribs to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has a flat plate shape extending horizontally and a quadrangular outer shape of the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and the lateral fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, under normal conditions, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, is formed in the portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 behind the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be opened and closed in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the cloaca and the cloaca gradually narrows, the cloaca is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the cloaca 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower lateral fixing portions 88 are provided apart from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. To.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for the upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 show the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 17B is an outer upper side view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. It is in a state.

In this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the front end surface having an arc shape, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. Because the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side and the component force F1 face the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the bearing groove 63 is placed on the main body frame from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the part of the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which a game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. It includes a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that is a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Lock between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be rotated according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

Although the details of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the dish unit 320 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The staging operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 has an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball lending / returning display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although the details of the effect operation unit 400 will be described later, the large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player and the door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display the effect image. It is equipped with a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although the details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 having a rectangular shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth in front view. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left end side of the front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the view and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably mounted. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the purpose of the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the tubular handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461). , The upper speaker 573, etc., and the door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrating back and forth on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The hinge member 140 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of protruding pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the flange member 143 and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame are interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144, which urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame, a mounting piece connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end thereof is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end thereof is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the flange member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, or is pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the front view of the door frame 3 can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. It is provided with a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end thereof narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height of the door frame base 110 below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The decorative substrate 161 on the left side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 162 on the lower left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protrusion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted at a portion outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 on the lower side of the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protrusion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in a rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the movement of the glass unit 190 to the rear, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flanges that project into the cylinder portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the cylinder portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 by screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylinder portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylinder portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners of the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thereby, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side of the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing plate metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side of the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the staging operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. 34 (a) is a front view of the staging operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 (b) is a right side view of the staging operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and FIG. 39 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and the player can perform a pressing operation and present an effect image to the player. Is.

The staging operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, so that the player can press and operate the operation button 410, and the staging operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 mounted on the mounting portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the base unit 430. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult for light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in a cross-sectional arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are arranged in a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b, which are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than the center.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to unevenness having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and a main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which are arranged in a columnar shape rearward along the outer circumference of the flange and are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in a strip shape and arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outside of the main body portion 413a in the front-rear direction and having a predetermined length along the outer circumference. The base openings 413e (six) extending in the circumferential direction and the base opening 413e and the main body 413a extend forward from the front end in a cylindrical shape, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the front side of the outer peripheral edge abutting on the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against it, it moves backward until the rear end abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 toward the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided with the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A transparent portion whose rear is visible with respect to the outer diameter of 410 is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the staging operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner side of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being decorated with light emission other than the portion targeted for light emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and the center opening 416a penetrating back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c having a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of attachment portions 416e and the left and right portions of the notch portions 416c are attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side and a plurality of first LEDs 422a radially outside the first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. It comprises a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The decorative substrate 423 on the right side of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It comprises a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 is attached with a weight 424a eccentric to the rotating shaft, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the staging operation unit 400, the cylindrical main body portion 413a rear end side of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire staging operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Action effect of the staging operation unit]
The operation and effect of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45A shows a view of the staging operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which a part of the operation button is cut out and is intended to be hidden by a first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the staging operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through port 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the overall width of the staging operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The staging operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the staging operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the staging operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the staging operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the staging operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the staging operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the staging operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the staging operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 of the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the staging operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , Projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for staging provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. 44, The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation buttons are enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the staging to operate.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the staging operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting part 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the staging operation unit 400 is restricted, and the staging operation unit mounting of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent the staging operation unit 400 or the like from being damaged. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the staging operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the staging operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. Although a gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, the gap on the outer periphery of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button is opened from the front side (player side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the staging operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decorative member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a are separated from each other. With the decoration part 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern with a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. Since the overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

As described above, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of the player, and it can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of them emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since it is arranged inside the tubular main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative board 422 of the decorative board unit 420 is provided. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are emitted and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. It is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the left side of the front view of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower front part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) have a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through opening 111. ing. In the left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. The reflective surface may be provided by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall portion 33.

The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a front-view circular circular lens portion 532a corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a front-view quadrangular square shape corresponding to the square opening 531a. It is provided with a lens unit 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is concave rearward in a conical shape in the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. The input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole toward the front as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel to the front, and the input light is refracted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 532c (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160). It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in the square lens portion 532b reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b divides a plurality of concentric grooves into a plurality of radially extending lines, and then divides the plurality of concentric grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Since the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light radiated from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly luminescently decorated.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multi-faceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-faceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light that the circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted by the light.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square cylinder shape extending back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface of the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U-shape with the front view open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so as to move backward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left. It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535, the lower end of the upper dogleg-shaped part, and the upper end of the lower dogleg-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 has a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The right side decorative board 552 of the door frame and the right side decorative board 552 of the door frame are mounted on the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffuser lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It is provided with a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffuser lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and the right are open. A box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a right-hand unit right-diffusing lens member 556 left-sided, the right-hand unit left light-shielding member 559 is attached so as to close the open right side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit and a right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end portion. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It comprises a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through opening 111. ing. In the right-side reflective vertical wall portion 568, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As for the reflective surface, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is provided from a reflective material such as metal or resin as well as the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the reflective surface is reflected to the inner surface thereof. It can also be provided by attaching a seal. As will be described later, the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and is a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective vertical wall portion 33.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame is connected to the relay board of the door body of the door frame base unit 100, and the decorative substrate 552A on the upper right side of the door frame is the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-back directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens unit 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and each of the main body 553a on the right side of the front view. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical divisions when the left diffuser lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 553e as the center. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light so as to spread the light from the left LED 552a, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially toward the front centering on.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f to the left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body portion 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 can be visually recognized. Can be decorated by the side reflective portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b, the notch portions 556c which are notched in a square shape from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a on the right side of the front view. Front view of the main body 556a, the accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a and is provided in the vertical direction. On the left side, a plurality of side reflection portions 556f are provided so that each input lens portion 556e is arranged in the vertical direction so as to be the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of notches 556c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. These plurality of notched portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed substantially in the center of each of the right diffuser lens members when the right diffuser lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as the center. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially toward the front centering on.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body portion 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arcuate groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the front right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflective portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and the decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. It is provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right of the substantially center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided with three sets of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance, with a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The shape of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body portion 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. It can be light-emitting and decorated only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be designated. , Each can be independently luminescently decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each of them.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron composed of a plurality of triangles is arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape of a cuboid.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and the multi-faceted decoration is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends vertically shortly and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward from the door frame left side unit 530 in a large plate shape, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be decorated with light emission.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing with this pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 greatly protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. FIG. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speaker 573s attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, and a pair of upper speakers 573 that extend to the left and right and the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear of the cage open and penetrate back and forth at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of (three left and right) slits 574b that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated vertically, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit main body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown here, the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the above-mentioned outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from the outer outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the inner periphery of the opening window. The structure is such that an outer peripheral light detection unit 35 (left outer peripheral outer light detection unit 35a, right outer outer light detection unit 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery thereof is provided.

That is, as will be described later, according to such a structure, the outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 and the outer peripheral light detecting unit 35 are arranged outside the outer periphery of the opening window, so that the opening is viewed from the front. Almost the entire area of the window can be made to function as a part (operation receiving part) to be operated by the player. Further, the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 is not arranged in an exposed state, but is arranged in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 which is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. Therefore, when the light is detected by the outer peripheral external light detection unit 35, it becomes possible to suitably exclude the directing light that may cause disturbance.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has transparency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of the plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the outer ends in the left and right direction. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front of each pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the front side of the unit body 271 respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. It is provided with a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are mounted obliquely so that the front surface of each of the door frame top unit 570 is moved rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portions near the left and right ends of the quadrangle extending to the left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right directions on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with an opening 574a penetrating back and forth at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in the diagonally extending portion of the portion protruding forward in a trapezoid on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion diagonally extending forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The front surface of the top right decorative portion 574f is formed so as to be located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a modified pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central portion in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the modified pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 is behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state where the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the variable pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light and decorate.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 close to both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side to the center side. It is composed of a 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It is equipped with.

In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused in the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the unevenness of the square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emitting decorated by LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, unevenness of a square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emitting decorated by LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 in the top left decorative lens member 579 via the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the direct portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescently decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing to the left. In the door frame top right decorative board 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 in the top right decorative lens member 580 by means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 via the direct portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescently decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a side view substantially square having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting halfway to the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the abbreviation that connects the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a lower wall of a right triangle and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 mounted on the rear side on the right side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state where a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower parts of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is a partition. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the relay board of the door body of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are hollowed out backward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the vicinity of both ends in the left-right direction in which the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in good condition, and high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by means of a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Action effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left-right direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through opening 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed (dish unit). It is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 400 are positioned rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the staging operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the staging operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the staging operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the staging operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the staging operation unit 400 arranged in front of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to display the staging operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the dish unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move a hand for a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from either side or from the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the staging operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the staging operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and it is an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game ball from the upper plate 321 is discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game ball of the lower plate 322 to a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The dish ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outer side of the lower dish opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper plate 321 full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, the door frame 3 arranges the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and also stands the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by reflecting on the right wall portion. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 can be discharged without showing the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so that the main body frame 4 The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand in or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e to the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is doord. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around you.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emission on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the side along the island equipment, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the upper door frame top unit 570 of the through opening 111, and also has front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasize it. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the presence of the machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player. At the same time, the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided on the lower side and the upper side of the through port 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration with a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, since the door frame 3 projects the top middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction to the front, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 shows the game board of FIG. 63. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after disassembling. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the gaming board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 having a substantially square shape in front view and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is partitioned, and the rear end of the game area 5a attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that a game ball driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, the table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a large winning opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a gate portion 2003 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially vertically from the lower ends, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. In this security recess 1008, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the mounting bosses 1010 and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , Is equipped. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through port 1122 that penetrates into the.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120. It is almost the same surface as the front surface. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 in the panel plate 1110, and is forward from the front of the holding step 1121. It projects toward it and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engaging piece 1125 is on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It extends by a predetermined amount toward the center). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is connected to the front component 1000. The 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 of the embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front, and is opened downward to have a notch portion 1152 having the same shape as the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000 and a notch portion 1152 above the notch portion 1152 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and rear so that the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000. It is provided with a fixing hole 1154. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel can be mounted between the front component 1000 and the game panel 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for mounting the table unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the outer side of the game area 5a in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status display 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. The number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. When the second special hold number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the big winning opening 2005 It mainly includes a round display 1407 composed of three LEDs that display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface of the front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface of the front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010 into the 3010c, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lock the lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate unit 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening opening 1126.

Further, the table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a large winning opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. The upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to a substantially center in the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6) It extends to the left and right with an acceptable size, and is formed so that it can be opened and closed according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 capable of always accepting a game ball.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a. In the state where the side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf portion is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). Can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of.

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls a game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges the game ball into the game area 5a. The start port unit 2100 is arranged directly under the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending to the left and right along the axis and houses the effect drive board.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which a lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached up and down on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable staging units and the like at appropriate positions.

As the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, and the like are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , Passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, the player is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the striking can be. , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes the obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When the game ball is discharged from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that it is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), On the downstream side thereof, the area provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 will flow down.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it will be in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". There are "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the large prize opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game balls to be accepted, by accepting the game balls in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lighting LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and suggests the special lottery result as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the lottery special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. In the window portion of the door frame 3, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is in the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation buttons 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are used in the second decorative body of the present invention in the present embodiment. The second button inner decorative portion 432 g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention, respectively. ..

Further, each LED and subscreen decorative board mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 in the present embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is used as a light emitting body of the present invention, and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present invention is used as a back decoration means of the present invention. The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the staging operation unit 400 (or the second staging operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A). 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped, the first button decorative portion 411a and the door frame side staging display device 460 overlapped, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decorative decoration with no perspective, it is possible to attract the player's attention strongly and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Further, a decorative member 432 (or a door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), a door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). At the same time, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the operation of the player, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move the button lens 411. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) come close to each other or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a due to the change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the subscreen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the decorative portion 432 g inside the button (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) by the decoration portion 432g in the second button (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be changed. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) inside the operation button, it is referred to as the first decorative body. Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the second decorative body, the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will be significantly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the player is not in the position, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) Since the crossing mode (overlapping condition) with the lens changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side where the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411 is not provided. Through the operation button on the back side, the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized well, and the first button decoration unit 411a is radially arranged. The decoration can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame inside the operation button can be directed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. It is possible to strongly direct the player's attention to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button is provided with a decorative portion 432 g inside the second button having a plurality of polygonal decorations concentrically centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g The perspective of the decoration can be surely exhibited, and the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g is provided. By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Further, each LED (or subscreen decorative board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436. When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) in the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the light emitting decoration can also entertain the player. At this time, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the lower operation button lower by the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the decorative portion 432 g inside the second button, the decorative board 433 on the left side of the operation button, the decorative board 434 on the right side of the operation button, and the operation button are on. In contrast to the direct light emitted from each LED (or LED477a) of the inner decorative substrate 435 and the inner decorative substrate 436 under the operation button, the first button decorative portion 411a is decorated inside the second button. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for light-emitting decoration, whereas the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminescent-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emittingly decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. (Or, when the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a emitted from the outside, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention can be obtained.

Further, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door) are arranged. It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move in a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame) inside the operation button do not need to be secured. The side second effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward to make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device) 460A) can be made to stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the outside of the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 on the outside portion of the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal, which can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent some players from feeling frustrated and deteriorating their interest, and at the same time, the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, under the through hole 111. The outer diameter is 10 cm on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side. The operation button 410 that can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within the range of ~ 30 cm, and the decoration inside the operation button that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, it is conventional. In the pachinko machine, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen at the position where the storage plate of the game ball stands out. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is provided with a translucent second button decoration so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b, which are provided with the part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for illuminating the frame side lens 417. It is provided with an inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that separates the second button decorative portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extending portion 413f, or the second LED 422b. , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently emitted and decorated. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly luminescent and decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescent effect can be produced. In addition, various patterns of light emission can be produced by appropriately combining extinguishing, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for light-emitting decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for light-emitting decoration of the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated on the left outside of one operation button. Since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the second button decorative portion. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away as possible from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diverted. The second button decorative portion 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button does not bend or extend, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The luminescent decoration can be entertained by the player without any problem, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration unit 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparently. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-emitting decorated in various patterns, so that the player's interest can be focused on the operation button 410 and the operation button 410. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). It is possible to entertain the staging image or the like by the staging display device 460A) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 is used by the player during the execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate the operation button 410, the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation-type staging) can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, at the time of executing the player participation type effect, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, since it is provided with a translucent main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f in which only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 413f in the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged behind by brightening the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411). It is possible to prevent the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitting decorated in a good state, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button behind and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect) can be decorated by emitting light through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be completely separated from the portion 411b by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized in which the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not dive into the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light from the operation button 410 is completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411. Can be done. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a can make the second button decoration portion 411b emit light and decorate in a good state, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) inside the operation button is opened from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) inside the operation button. The member outside the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be obscured by the second button decorative portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is light-emitting decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the decoration member 432 in the operation button (the second effect on the door frame side) is compared with the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the appearance of the player can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 is formed in an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light, a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and a light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect, the light emission effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make the player less bored with various light emission effects, and the player is entertained. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is driven into the game area 5a by the stored game ball in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3. Along with mounting, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 to attach a predetermined size to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is arranged from that portion. Since the portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 is extended to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing the game ball, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player. can.

Further, at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate second region A2 extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer circumference, and extends upward from the upper end to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball are provided, the game ball in the lower plate 322 is prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball to the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable when the game ball invades the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely exhibited. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate main body 325 on the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening). When a hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can restrict the fingertips and the like from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and thus the fingertips. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be done.

Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened because the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. In this state, the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the vertical wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), reduce interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A surely restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are used as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side in which 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction on the front surface bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed such that a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like. After being prepared for the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that has been taken out, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. A storage plate capable of storing a game ball composed of a lower plate 322 and a lower plate 322 is provided, and the storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are placed outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. It has a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage dishes (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) that stands out in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible in the conventional pachinko machine can be seen, the gaming machine different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is open. Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Since the extension unit 325B, the second extension unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 in a range that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second area A2). can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the first expansion portion 325B, and the second expansion portion having the lower plate second region A2 are added to the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. having different sizes are prepared in advance. By installing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, which are sized according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacement) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first expansion unit 325B, and the second expansion unit 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the space in the rear part depends on the amount of protrusion to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second) having different amounts of protrusion to the rear. The lower plate 322 that can be used for the staging operation unit 400A) can be used, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward and is a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (mounting) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, which have shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, various forms can be supported. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game ball is placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where a large amount of the game ball is loaded due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even if a large number of game balls are stored, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate capable of storing the game ball is below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to receive the game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided with the lower plate 321 and the lower plate 322, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, which is of interest to the player. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract. Further, since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the game in the lower plate 322 is made difficult for the player. It is possible to prevent the ball from being distracted by making it difficult to notice the flow of the ball, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 that guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to visually recognize the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the cushioning portion 322d, it is assumed that the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open. , The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, it is probable that more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is difficult to see from the front by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 are transferred to the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball. Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guide portion 322c, and the buffer portion 322d, and can be discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the game ball from circulating in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to make sure that the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 is difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately noticed by the ball guide portion 322c or the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is illusion that the game ball is discharged downward (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 from the front, the lower plate can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice the visible size with respect to the size of 322, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game ball as in the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward below the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A large-scale staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the staging unit cover 326 is attached to the center of the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction. In addition to being provided with a portion 326a, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped backward. Due to the shape, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) attached to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a can be made to appear as if it greatly protrudes forward, and the staging operation unit 400 (second staging) can be seen. The operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in a position where the large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is wrapped around to the rear, and the storage amount of the game ball (volume of the lower plate 322) in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and the player can concentrate on the game, and the game can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, his / her fingertips are on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game ball is sufficiently secured even by tactile sensation, and in the state where the game ball is stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322. Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest. Further, since the fingertips of the hands placed in the lower plate 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reassure the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game ball even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. It is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be used. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player can enter the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) and injuring the player when the hand is put in. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be installed from the player side. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be made more conspicuous and can strongly attract the attention of the player, and the decoration by the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is easy to see. Then, the decoration and the staging of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates up and down, it is a conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in the above, a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. You can play the game with a feeling like that, and you can let the player concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are arranged when viewed from the front. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer to improve the appearance, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 that bulges forward at the lower side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting an effect to a player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The outer diameter of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside is attached, and the outer diameter of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 that is about 15 cm in length and whose center bulges away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 having a one-button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Therefore, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) inside the operation button is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, or the like. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative member 432 provided inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between the lens and the 470) is relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decoration part 411a or the like, so that the appearance is prevented from being deteriorated, and a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm is prevented. The 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strong. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts and has high appeal.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a cylindrical shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the outside of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) and make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), it is near the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the advancing / retreating direction of the operation button 410. Since it is in an inclined state with respect to (a plane orthogonal to), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button can be made difficult to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the decorative member 432 and the door frame inside the operation button arranged in the operation button 410 are arranged. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player with the operation button 410. The 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be realized.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative property). Therefore, the operation button 410 is made to stand out in the pachinko machine 1 and is of interest to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button is formed at the portion of the button frame 412. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation can be performed. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

Further, a button frame 412 that is opaque over the entire circumference from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside with a predetermined width is provided, and the player cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button on the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body 413a and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Can be moved well.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer circumference has no directionality as compared with the case of having a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect for the player to operate the operation button 410. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). In addition to being able to entertain the production, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation button 410 by the production image or the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). By actively participating and entertaining the player in the player participation type production, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by performing the production in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 raise expectations for the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The button lens 411 in which the first button decorative portion 411a is not formed may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button is not attached to the button frame 412. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed on the portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first) so as to surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. (2) A button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the base unit 450) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround only a part of the entire circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have at least decoration (flat decoration by sticking a sticker, printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or translucent. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed from the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) to the rear, and is connected to each other behind the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). It may be 322, or it may be dented rearward only from the right outer part of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and a part of it wraps around to the rear of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). You may be there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape (shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example of denting in a shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be dented in a polygonal prismatic shape or a polyhedral shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation dial, touch panel, etc." "With an operating device", "With a rotating body with decoration on the surface", "With a decorative body with decoration and a movable device that moves the decorative body", "Game Characters, items, logos, and decorations that imitate scenes (dioramas) in three dimensions according to the concept of the machine "," Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns according to the concept of the gaming machine , Etc. are decorated by a seal, printing, etc. ”, etc., and a member such as a unit or a panel may be attached. Further, the member to be mounted in the mounting space 326j (staging operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be mounted. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is shown with the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a opened forward for mounting the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). The dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. It is desirable that the front surface of such a dish unit cover be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine by sealing, printing, attaching decorative members, and the like. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). An example of covering the lower plate with difficulty in viewing from the front is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area of less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided with respect to the circumferential direction. The second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the staging operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 432 g inside the second button may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the display device 460A or the like is shown so that the rear member can always be visually recognized, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front-rear (or upper and lower) is specified as a predetermined condition. A configuration having a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible by satisfying the above may be used. Here, as the variable light transmission means, "a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side" and "a liquid crystal film that is transparent by turning the power on / off". It becomes opaque or becomes opaque so that the rear side can be seen. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, only the front member or the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized in a normal state. The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen, so that the front member can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, the rear side of the front member is darkened to decorate only the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. The decoration by the surface of the can be shown to the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member, and the front member and the rear side can be visually recognized. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and the front member and the rear member can be shown. When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or, the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. As a result, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, and various decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened, so that it is on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as something like a magic mirror, but even if it is made like a liquid crystal film, the same effect can be obtained. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so that it can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or after. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light emission) by the light of a light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of light emission effects and decoration effects. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a game ball rental device connection terminal plate that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As its control configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the generation processing of the control power supply (for example, + 5V). A second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to a game advanced by the first control unit MCG is provided.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Among the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. 69. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various control programs such as the main control program that is executed after the game is executed and controls various commands, and RAM that temporarily stores data, and various types. A main control input circuit 1310b for inputting a detection signal from a detection switch, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage is mainly provided.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "built-in main control") that updates a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is preset). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and inputs a clock signal to the main control MPU 1310a ( Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function that has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. And, it is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output from the various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information for outputting the various signals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 4002 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 for detecting the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and the general, as shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball entered in the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered in. Further, the gate sensor 4003 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 attached and detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or its predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , 2nd special symbol display 1405, 1st special hold number display 1404, 2nd special hold number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status display 1401, and round display 1407. do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning openings 2001, 2201 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides a bus 1310ah. Circuits are connected via (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec issues a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310ea and transmission is started to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is provided with BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Among the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. .) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed at the time of turning on the power, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of turning on the power. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various control programs including payout control programs that control operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. It includes a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 and the 952d. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program is to be paid out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. And, it is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output from the various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information for outputting various signals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball out detection sensor 827 that detects the out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 use the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full in the stored game ball, first receives the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, thereby performing payout control without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cc to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). In When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). (Specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 is output via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error content or error related to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal plate 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hole. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending / returning display unit 330. It is output to the equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending return display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power cutoff process even when the power is cut off. As for various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the operation signal is sent to the predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and is triggered by the payout control MPU952a from the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay. The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the lending balance display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

In the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the rental device such as a game ball. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

The ball return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method in which one digit of the three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for specifying the contents to be displayed by turning on are the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input via the board 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the device can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit 330 through the current limiting resistance mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, and is used as a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal to output to the CR unit 6 or to convey that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, among the first control unit MCG, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island facility and capable of electrically connecting or electrically disconnecting an alternating current 24 volt (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , The launch control unit 953 that controls the launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power ratio of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improving circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improving circuit 935b, and various alternating currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various boards. It is equipped with a power supply creating circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of a game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control on the first control unit MCG based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is shown in FIG. The effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data), the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. While controlling the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and hour / minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and a knob that rotates the volume of music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. It is equipped with a volume adjusting volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operating.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emission modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of big hit game states and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e"). It is described as.) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d because the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board to a lamp via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decorative drive amplifier board motor to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for the frame decorative drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal of is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , It is input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system goes out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. It is diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various serials I for peripheral control, centering on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Peripheral control Various data are read / written to / from the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to independently transfer data between devices without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae for peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the input / output devices such as the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decorative drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control. It has become. That is, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is reset. Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of a big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as a substrate volume 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 may be produced as more powerful, or it may be announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume of the sound can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume of the sound, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or the game will be in a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are schedule data for sound generation that generates sound effects and the like, and schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in a time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on for the first time. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. And the game state is instructed (for example, it is instructed to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is an effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object, and Bank0 (1 ms). Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". Subsequent "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a is used for "(1fr)". Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and the like, since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai. A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak or the like is provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decorative drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cia is a detection signal from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. Dial created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). It is a storage area in which the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are set. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

In addition, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of Bank0 (1fr), the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, and the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of Bank0 (1ms). And the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, the peripheral area of the previous time is executed. When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. LED. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. -The DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is generated in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). As the effect backup information (1 ms), every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is applied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr), and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit is used for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed, and are stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as the effect backup information (1 ms), every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is used to copy at high speed, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in this embodiment, the staging information (1fr) and the staging information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and special effect flags), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". Subsequent "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is to be backed up in "(RAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3". , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. The 1511dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source for control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various music and sound effects. To the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and heads toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal. And, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. A forced switching circuit 1512f that connects the circuit so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input while the circuit is connected so as to transmit. It is equipped with. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display image data used to display at least one selection display item described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player's point of view. The service mode screen image data used for, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal display and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the staging operation unit 400 should be operated.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various peripheral control RAMs 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to 1511cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transferred from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a staging display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display is arranged near the lower part of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d is used by THine Electronics Inc. for "V-by-One (V-by-One). By adopting a differential communication method called "registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a serial interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes. Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 for the image data for the effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. No peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" is to hold the drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP1512a has music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data of the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the staging sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a include a plurality of in the sound source built-in VDP1512a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. By synthesizing the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a, the volume of the combined production sound is actually the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Amplifies to the master volume value, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. ..

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound is simple in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined at the bottom. It is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and the notification sound are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the staging sound is muted, the staging sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the staging sound is proceeding according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound generation forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400). If the setting mode is entered and adjusted by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It is designed to flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1. Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period because the muted production sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b draw the character data on the game board side for drawing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and the character data on the door frame side in the display area of the effect display device 460 on the door frame side. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a relay around the frame as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of a difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, it is possible to take measures against noise.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side staging transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronization signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is integrated into a unit is arranged. In this way, various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment that receives noise that has invaded the machine.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires provided in parallel. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential 1-pair cable for electrically connecting between a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, Zain Electronics in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Even if it is a mechanism that is not easily affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., the configuration with such hardware alone is due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data in the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side shall be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Therefore, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 and removing various wirings, the door frame 3 can be removed from the main body frame 4 to maintain the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 is used. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the board.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are connected to each other. Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively, separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminals 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. Of the twisted pair cables, one of the wires is red and the other is gray, and of the harness, the wire that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is differentially input to a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input, a circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so that the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the staging display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and is serialized in various ways. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to a door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image to convey that when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is used. It can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side" to convey the problem. Please call the clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. ” By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. The effect based on the effect can be developed by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa as the date, hour, minute and second information. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen of is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the game board side effect is produced. The decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minute and second, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a 1024-step value from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-step value is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player. The notification sound for, etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and are muted. The volume from to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen of is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 can be operated within a predetermined time, or a customer waiting state is set and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. If the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect operation unit 400 is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the staging operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to the desired level, and if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the staging operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, he / she sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game is the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The ground (GND) of various boards and the ground (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931 and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a emission control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a via the power supply board 931. The synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V), and supplies the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create a direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as “+37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple of + 37V to be supplied, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the firing solenoid 682 and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply making circuit 935d has DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is forwarded by the diode PD0. Current flows toward the positive terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns from the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is obstructed by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creating circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and peripherally via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. The + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e supplies + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative board of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared to the case of monitoring the voltage to be applied, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, and main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 77, the main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and the main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), so that the ripple (alternating current component folded by the voltage) is first removed. Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being connected to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus end of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is used. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU1310a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to each of the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground, and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. In addition to the signal, the circuit is such that an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and a process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 951. The operation signal with HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistance MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistance MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the transistor MTR0 is turned on by inputting the operation signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistance MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded over the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) is used. , + 12V is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when + 24V starts to drop from + 24V when the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24, MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when + 12V starts to drop from + 12V when the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, the D type flip flop MIC22 releases the latch state when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, and transfers the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is the same. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D type flip flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal is used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 for monitoring a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is not connected.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is reset. No function The main control output circuit 1310cc outputs the payout power failure warning signal to the payout control board 951 and outputs the peripheral power failure warning signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistance MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR 20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 to the payout control board 951 as a payout failure warning signal, is open as shown in FIG. 78. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistance MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is wired. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 on the payout control board 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. 70. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. By doing so, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage is turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. In, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. There is one transistor in each of the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal, and the power failure warning signal and peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is delivered to the payout control board 951. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of the 951 and the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 is received as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal, and do not have a reset function. No reset function by transmitting to the circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal indicating that the normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is completed is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main pay ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69 are displayed. Drive signals are output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the noise.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310 bb without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 contains a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU1310a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main-circle serial data from the shift register 1310ea, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also to connect the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistance MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistance MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 has the negative terminal as ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to be the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 ensures that the data is received without any omission or omission.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. Therefore, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the voltage is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be disrupted and to prevent the command from being omitted, so that the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the omission of a command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main circuit serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 as the main circuit serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cc. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the functionless main control output circuit 1310cc, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt and omits a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit and the like, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly comprises the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each of them, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. If a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 will be power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a result, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 in the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, but the payout control MPU952a does not operate, but the payout control MPU952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying the backup power supply to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
In addition to the payout control MPU952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 resets as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are each negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
In the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, and the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) while the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 via the resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR 21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR 22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame open switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. To. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 21 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 22 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input]
The main body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) while the 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR 24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29, PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 24 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 to make the logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are in the present embodiment. Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which is a state that does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer uses the outer end frame door opening information output signal to transmit the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame is turned on. 4 is in a state of being released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR42, and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. The payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 kb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V. When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is transmitted to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal that is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the accommodation space is full with the stored game ball. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR 41, the transistor PTR 41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full with the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 passes through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board. When the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side in 951 and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR 41, the transistor PTR 41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball burnout detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the payout motor 834 is driven. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the dispenser motor 834, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body fails. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. When the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front stage and the rear stage are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage changes, and the signal is used as the RWMCLR signal and the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50, and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53, and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56, and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). In the function of canceling the error in), it becomes an error clearing signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42 to turn on the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistance PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44, in which the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistance MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42 to turn off the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation that the output terminal of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is instructed to perform RAM clear that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the terminal 3 and the terminal 10 which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952da and input to the voltage switching input terminal, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 has the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal, via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869 from the CR unit 6. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 connects to the rental device such as a game ball. An XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, via the terminal board 869. And is output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71 and also to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via the ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is a pull-up resistor (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. To.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72, PR76, and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 931. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 kb to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 kb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a terminal plate 869 for renting a game ball or the like. It is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is possible or impossible is transmitted to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 kb is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a terminal plate 869 for renting a game ball or the like. It is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function as the payer serial data transmission signal. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

The RWMCLR signal, the payout power failure warning signal, the door open signal, the full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) described above are connected to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. In addition to each of the signals 1) and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 may be input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. It can be output, or the payout motor drive signal can be output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function can output the payout motor drive signal to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to this, for example, the payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power failure warning signal, and the like related to the above are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the jackpot information of the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. A game information signal such as an output signal, an information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer shall perform the number of jackpots in which the round is twice (two-round jackpot). The number of big hits of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of times of big hits in 15 rounds) and the number of big hits. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only the two-round jackpot occurs. It may be difficult to get a big hit for 15 rounds. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. do not have.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting an output signal to a hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 has an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to convey the fact, and the main prize ball number information output signal is various winning openings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2,201, and the large winning openings 2005. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in is 10 balls, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal generates a 15-round jackpot. The two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the signal is being displayed, and the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that the variation display is finished (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. This is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal board 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball of the ball is paid out as a prize ball, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. It is a signal to convey that, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, and the hall computer receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to count the number of times to count the number of times to perform the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal to notify each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the start port 2004, and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is generated. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT6, the two-round jackpot information output signal is used. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input and grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer is the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is red and outputs a time-saving and medium-time information output signal. As described above, the time-saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time-saving state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time saving state is generated in the pachinko machine 1 when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. At the same time, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time saving and to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. It is possible to grasp that there is, and it is possible to count the number of times that the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times that the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning openings 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify every time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the ball has reached 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of the game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to be output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having the connector provided in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection from being targeted. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a row from the center left side to the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is, for example, a game ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If a big hit of 15 rounds happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining number is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, as described above, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 balls of the game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. For example, a clerk in the hall checks a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying a game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball jam (also, it occurs in the payout device 830). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball squeeze) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working on the game, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall after the 15-round big hit is completed because the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress. When the game returns to the above state, the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in the period when the 15 round big hit is finished and the 15 round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of gaming balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2,201, and the large winning openings 2005 shown in FIG. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the above, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are used. Through this, we adopted a mechanism to convey information to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of gaming balls to be released and the number of balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of staging display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the positive signal and the negative signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is restored to three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, it is restored to a parallel signal before serialization). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to do so. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , While being transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the difference. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, so that the door is connected. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored from the peripheral control board 1510 in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 or the period of demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display. In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460. It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side directing transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. 76, respectively, and the door. The GND terminal, GND terminal, LVDSGND application paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded to the ground.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and the + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In a normal operating mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, is abnormal for some reason. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2 which is a damping resistance, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. It is input to the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a is a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d in order to convey to that effect to the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image is provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 for the door frame side effect. It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is peripheral. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that tells that the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 terminal to the D17 terminal, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal have three video signals (18), which are a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs (bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 terminal to D17 terminal, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
By the way, it is generally known that when an electronic component is surface-mounted, it is advantageous in that the hardware circuit can be suitably miniaturized by integration. However, for integrated circuit components among electronic components (components in which multiple types of single-function elements (resistive elements, diode elements, capacitor elements, etc.) are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package), the components are not included. Due to its nature, the package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which one single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package), which creates a relatively large space on the back side of the package. The space on the back side of such a package becomes a place that is difficult to visually confirm (a place where electronic parts (illegal parts) are easily mounted) in the state of surface mounting. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (so-called base board or the like) instead of surface mounting for many years.

That is, the electronic components to be inserted and mounted tend to create a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting electronic components, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place that can be easily visually confirmed even in the mounted state, which may cause unauthorized components to be mounted. It is made to be suitably suppressed.

However, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the space used for staging has become even larger, and while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components, the hardware circuit has been downsized. There is an increasing demand for planning.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69, the second control unit that only controls the effect of the game. Considering that the SCG is not directly related to the privilege obtained by the player and is unlikely to be the target of fraud, first, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment is configured to include the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 69. Then, the second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit parts and various discrete parts mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 to perform the progress processing of the effect according to the result of the progress processing of the game. Is feasible.

Here, examples of various integrated circuit components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 include the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the like. Further, as various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, there are resistors AR10 and AR11 shown in FIG. 79, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 and the like.

In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510). Only the surface mount area that is mounted in the form is formed. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMDs) are also used as the above-mentioned various electronic components of the peripheral control board 1510. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and are not easily targeted for fraud, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic components is not deteriorated. It becomes possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. Then, the first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base boards of the boards 1310, 951, 931 to supply the control power supply (for example, + 5V). It is said that the generation process and the process related to the game including the payout of the prize ball can be executed. However, since such processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the granting of benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG is likely to be subject to fraud. Therefore, although it is required to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced, and the game will be enjoyed. The fact is that the decline is inevitable.

However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on the base plate (the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931). Discrete components among various electronic components have smaller packages than integrated circuit components, and even if electronic components are illegally mounted on the back side, they can be easily visually confirmed. It can be said that it is a component with relatively high performance as a security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

That is, the inventor has found that the electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG include a mixture of components having high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components having low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components). Focusing on this, if further integration as a hardware circuit is attempted only with components with high security performance against fraud (discrete components), even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is easily subject to fraud, We have found that it is possible to reduce the size of hardware circuits while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated only with parts (discrete parts) having high security performance against fraud. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 117, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side, which is easily subject to fraud. Explain that.

As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. .. Note that FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technique according to the present application. For example, the base plate BB is actually a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate. It is configured to have three base boards, that is, a base board of 951 and a base board of a power supply board 931. An example in which the characteristic technique according to the present application is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. Here, for convenience of explanation, an example in which they are composed of one base substrate will be described first.

Here, on the base plate BB,
The insert mounting area TH, in which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB and is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance,
-The lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the surface mount area SM is excellent in integration performance due to multi-stage stacking of wiring patterns, but is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Both are provided in the form of being divided.

With such a configuration, electronic components that are difficult to be fraudulent can be mounted on the surface mount area SM, but electronic components that should pursue fraud suppression rather than integration are mounted on the through-hole mounting area TH side. Since it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, it is possible to suitably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D described above,
-Integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance against unauthorized mounting, which is enclosed in a relatively large package in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated.
-The single-function element is only enclosed in a relatively small package, and is equipped with a discrete component D2 having high security performance against unauthorized mounting.

In this regard, as a characteristic first technique according to the present application, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance is referred to as the through-hole mounting region TH and the surface. It is mounted only in the insertion mounting area TH which is excellent in fraud suppression performance among the mounting areas SM, and only the discrete parts having high security performance are mounted in the surface mounting area SM which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. As a result, even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is liable to be the target of fraud, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the fraudulent mounting of electronic components.

Further, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, as the discrete component D2 having high security performance, the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the surface mount area SM and the discrete component D2a. It has an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH.

That is, as described above, with respect to electronic components, it is generally possible to achieve integration by using a surface mount type rather than a through-hole mount type. However, when both the through-hole mount area TH and the surface mount area SM are separately provided as the base plate BB, for example, in terms of circuit design, the position where the electrically connected integrated circuit component D1 is provided. In consideration of the space where the wiring pattern related to this is provided, it is better to arrange the electronic components in the through-hole mounting area TH instead of the surface mounting area SM so that the integration can be reversed. Cases can occur.

In this respect, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, not all of the discrete parts D2 are used as surface mount type discrete parts D2a, but the most suitable mode for integration is achieved. The insertion mount type discrete component D2b is intentionally used for a part. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be made more suitable for miniaturization while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

As shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting region TH having excellent fraud suppression performance is not formed on one side (back side) surface of the substrate and is formed on the other side (front side) surface to be a discrete component. And integrated circuit components are both mounted. On the other hand, the surface mount area SM, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, is not formed on one side (back side) surface of the substrate and is formed on the other side (front side) surface of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component. It is desirable that our integrated circuit components are not mounted and only discrete components are mounted. That is, in this case, first, the mounting of the mounting electronic component on the back surface side, which tends to be a blind spot when confirming whether or not the illegal component is mounted, is eliminated. On top of this, in the insertion mounting area TH, which has excellent fraud suppression performance, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted, while improving fraud suppression performance. Since it was decided to mount only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulently targeted in the inferior surface mount area SM, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. Will be.

Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even if the discrete component D2 has high security performance, the capacitor element having a large capacitance value (backup). For power supplies, etc.), the surface mount area is relatively larger than other elements (resistor elements, diode elements, capacitor elements with small capacitance values (for filter circuits, etc.), etc.). It is not used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM, but is prepared only as the insert mount type discrete component D2b-C mounted on the insert mounting area TH. As a result, it becomes possible to more preferably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components in order to reduce the size of the hardware circuit.

However, even though the capacitor element with a large capacitance value is larger than other elements (discrete components), there is not a large gap between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit component D1. .. Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM, and even in this case, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components is maintained. Is possible.

Moreover, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment contains a characteristic second technique based on a viewpoint different from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, one hardware circuit aimed at exerting a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). Is provided as a discrete circuit (hardware circuit without integrated circuit component D1) DHC electrically configured by the discrete component D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure composed of a plurality of discrete components D2 mounted in a form divided into an insertion mounting region TH and a surface mounting region SM.

That is, in this case, although it is a discrete circuit DHC intended to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), it is mounted on the base plate BB in the insertion mounting area TH. The electronic component D2b having a shape that makes it possible and the electronic component D2a that has a shape that makes it possible to mount the surface mount region SM will be mixed. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have a close electrical role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It will be possible to make it difficult to recall the fact that there is a problem, and it will be possible to expect suppression of fraud by increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic component on the surface mount area SM, miniaturization of the hardware circuit can be expected.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing fraudulent use of electronic components.

However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principle of the two characteristic techniques according to the present application. Therefore, next, the example in which each of the above techniques is applied to the embodiment of the present application will be described. explain.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base plate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. It is configured to have three base boards of. Then, both the through-hole mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM are provided on these base boards in a separated manner.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the three base boards, only the through-hole mounting region TH is formed on the base board of the power supply board 931, and the base of the main control board 1310 is formed. In the board and the base board of the payout control board 951, both the through-hole mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately.

Then, among the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 in the above-mentioned "backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM" (FIG. 75). (See) is mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2a on the surface mount region SM of the base board of the main control board 1310. Similarly to this, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) in the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the RAM with built-in payout control” is surface-mounted in the base board of the above-mentioned payout control board 951. It is intended to be mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2a on the region SM.

According to such a configuration, among the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance and the discrete component D2 having high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a. It will be mounted on the surface mount area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951), respectively. As a result, even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is liable to be the target of fraud, it becomes possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the fraudulent mounting of electronic components (). The first characteristic technique of the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, in the surface mount region SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, a specific type of discrete component (here, the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are both Schottky). Only a plurality of diode elements) will be mounted. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted on the surface mount area SM, which are inferior in fraud suppression performance, have the same shape, it is expected that the labor required for fraud confirmation can be saved.

Further, in the above configuration, discrete components (electronic components that play a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 should originally have are mounted on a board (main control board 1310) different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space to form the surface mount region SM on the power supply board 931, the surface mount region SM is formed on another board and mounted there as a surface mount type discrete component D2. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, a capacitor element and a Schottky diode element) for the purpose of exerting a backup power supply function. However, the plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are separately mounted in the insertion mounting region TH (capacitor element) and the surface mounting region SM (Schottky diode element), respectively. It is supposed to be.

According to such a configuration, although it is one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of demonstrating the backup power supply function, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply board) is on the base plate BB. The electronic component D2b having a shape that enables mounting on 931) and the electronic component D2a having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mount area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951) are mixed. become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have a close electrical role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recall the fact that there is a problem, and it is possible to expect suppression of fraud by increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit (the second characteristic technique according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of demonstrating the backup power supply function are inserted into the insertion mounting region TH (capacitor element). Not only is it mounted separately from the surface mount area SM (shot key diode element), but these discrete components D2 are mounted on two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (shot key diode element), and power supply board. It is supposed to be mounted separately on 931 (capacitor element). That is, in this case, the electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and through-hole mounting are mounted on different base boards, respectively. Therefore, the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be further increased, and the suppression of fraud can be further expected.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting area SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the insertion mounting area TH in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so that the area is smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mount area SM having inferior fraud suppression performance is provided, and suppression of fraudulent activity can be expected.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mount region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is determined by the number of types of electronic components mounted on the base plate of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in the BB. Therefore, the types of electronic components to be visually checked to see if any illegal acts have been performed on the electronic components mounted in the surface mount area SM, which is relatively inferior in security performance, are relatively reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to facilitate the visual check.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted on the surface mount region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the through-hole mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components to be visually checked to see if any illegal acts have been performed on the electronic components mounted in the surface mount area, which is relatively inferior in security performance, is relatively reduced. , The load on the visual check can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mount area SM is provided on the base board of the main control board 1310 and the base board of the payout control board 951, respectively, but on the base board of the power supply board 931. It may be formed.

Further, the surface mount region SM is formed only on a specific base board, and the surface mount type discrete component D2 which should be originally mounted on another base board is also arranged together on the specific base board. May be good. With such a configuration, when confirming whether or not improper mounting is performed, it is only necessary to focus on the surface mount area SM formed on a specific base board, so that fraud confirmation can be performed. It is expected that the time and effort required will be saved.

However, considering that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the above three base boards, at least the through-hole mounting region TH must be formed in any of the three base boards in order to appropriately suppress fraud. Must be.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is a base plate of the main control board 1310, a base board of the payout control board 951, and a base board of the power supply board 931. Although it is assumed that it is composed of three base substrates, as shown schematically in FIG. 117, they may be configured together on one base substrate.

Further, the "base plate BB of the first control unit MCG" according to the present application may be any one in which the surface mount area SM and the insert mount area TH are separated, and this is provided by a plurality of base boards. It may be provided by one base substrate.

For example, as the base board of the main control board 1310, a first base board on which only the through-hole mounting region TH is formed and a second base board on which only the surface mounting area SM is formed are provided, and the second base is provided. By inserting and mounting the board in the through-hole mounting area TH of the first base board, the electrons mounted on the first base board are inserted and mounted while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It can be assumed that a structure is adopted in which the components and the electronic components surface-mounted on the second base board are electrically connected to each other. In this case, the "base of the first control unit MCG" The "plate BB" is a concept including at least both a first base substrate in which only the through-hole mounting region TH is formed and a second base substrate in which only the surface mounting region SM is formed. That is, such an aspect is also one of the aspects such as "the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is provided with both the through-hole mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM separately". It is included as an embodiment.

When the first base board on which only the insert mounting area TH is formed and the second base board on which only the surface mount area SM is formed are provided, the insert mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided. It is desirable to dispose the first base substrate and the second base substrate so as to face different directions (preferably orthogonal directions).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is an electronic component enclosed in a relatively small package as a component (surface mount component) mounted in the surface mount region SM inferior in fraud suppression performance. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting illegal components (reducing the space on the back side).

However, even if it is a discrete component (surface mount component) with excellent security performance, there is a small space behind it, but it is difficult to visually confirm it when it is mounted in the surface mount area SM. Still left. Therefore, on the hall side that operates and manages the pachinko machine 1, it is understood that "there is no space left on the back side of the discrete parts (surface mount parts) for mounting illegal parts". However, in a situation where it is difficult to visually confirm the anxiety such as "a very small fraudulent part may be created and it may be mounted fraudulently". There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 will be complicated, such as being forced to confirm.

Therefore, it is more desirable that the base boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are provided in the following modes instead of the above-mentioned modes.

[Modification example of each base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a part of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to the modified example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. Although the description of the modification of the base board of the payout control board 951 is omitted, it is possible to deform the base board MB of the main control board 1310 described below with the same contents.

As shown in FIG. 118, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least an insertion mounting board THB which is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance.

Also, in the through-hole mounting board THB according to this modification, a plurality of types of electronic components (through-hole mounting components) are mounted in the same manner as in the insertion-mounting board TH of the above embodiment. Similarly, the electronic components (insertion mounting components) include both the integrated circuit component D1 having the low security performance and the discrete component D2b having the high security performance.

However, as is clear from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the through-hole mounting board THB and the through-hole mounting lead portion are inserted into the through-hole mounting board THB. Only electronic components that are mounted in the form of being provided are provided. That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification has a surface mount region and a surface mount component mounted on the region, any of them can be seen at first glance. It is decided to adopt a special mounting structure that does not seem to be provided.

More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is the integrated circuit component D1 and the discrete component D2b as the insert mounting component, as well as the special mounting component D3 (in the figure, the special mounting component). It has D3a and a special mounting component D3b). Although this special mounting component D3 contains an electronic component (surface mount component) mounted in a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, it is concealed with respect to the through-hole mounting board THB. It is inserted and mounted via a lead portion TL for special insertion mounting, which will be described later.

According to such a special mounting component D3, fraud suppression is performed even though the surface mount region described later and the electronic component (surface mount component) mounted in the surface mount region are provided inside the surface mount region. Since it will have an appearance shape that looks as if it is a single through-hole mount component mounted on a high-performance through-hole mount board THB, it is expected that it will be excluded from the target components for fraudulent purposes by malicious persons. Will be able to be. In the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the portion of the insert mounting board THB in which such a special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted is surface mounted on which the surface mount component is mounted. It will function as an area.

Moreover, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not collectively (adjacently) arranged in one place, but are placed in a plurality of places on the base board MB. In addition to being dispersed, at least one of the special mounting components D3 (special mounting component D3a in the figure) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large area (insertion mounting area) in which the insert mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. It is supposed to be set up.

That is, in this case, the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance and the electronic components (surface mount components) mounted in the surface mount area are subdivided and inconspicuous, and in combination with the above-mentioned appearance shape, the fraud suppression performance is improved. The surface mount area exists when a malicious person sees the base board MB of the main control board 1310 because it is excellently mixed in the insert mounting area provided as a relatively large area. This makes it even more difficult to notice, and it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining more suitable suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

Further, as will be described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as a surface mount type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is enclosed inside the special mounting component D3a according to this modification. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exerting a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, even in this modification, the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and surface mounting area (shotkey diode element) are used for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit). (Diode MD0)) and each are to be mounted separately. Moreover, the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) to be inserted and mounted in the through-hole mounting area is located in the insertion-mounting area not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a containing the shotkey diode element (diode MD0) (power supply board 931 or the like). It is implemented in.

In this way, it is difficult to recall that the electronic component built in the special mounting component D3a exerts a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), and the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased. As a result, even if it is noticed that there is a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, fraud suppression can be expected.

Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. In addition, in FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, the portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is partially omitted to expose the internal structure thereof. The figure (the part surrounded by the dotted line) is included.

As shown in the explanatory diagram, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification is a special surface mount board SMB as a surface mount board on which a surface mount type electronic component (surface mount component) is mounted, and the above. A surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the special surface mount board SMB, and a lead part for special insertion mounting as a lead part for insertion mounting inserted into a through hole (specific insertion hole) of the above insertion mounting board THB. It includes a TL and an outer package OP that molds each of these parts with a mold resin.

Here, the special surface mount board SMB electrically connects the surface mount lead portion SL provided on the electronic component (surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the board and the special insert mount lead portion TL. It has a wiring pattern HP formed so as to be connected to each other, and is provided so that the mounting surface thereof is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface in the through-hole mounting board THB.

The surface area of the special surface mount board SMB on the mounting surface is limited to a size sufficient for mounting the surface mount type discrete component D2a, and is required, for example, when the integrated circuit component constituting the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. It is designed to have only a mounting surface with an area smaller than the area considered to be. That is, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required for operating the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there is a margin space for further mounting other electronic components, whereas it is special. In the surface mount board SMB, in order to reduce the size, when the electronic component to be mounted (surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted, there is enough space to mount other electronic components. Not left.

With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to perform some kind of fraud on the special surface mount board SMB. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing the mounting of fraudulent parts. It will be expected.

Further, the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) that is molded by a molding resin. Inside, the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mount lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mount lead portion SL formed so as to be pulled out to the outside of the inner package (mold resin), and the surface mount lead portion SL is provided. By being electrically connected to the special insertion mounting lead portion TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mount board SMB, it can be connected to other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. The shotkey diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected so that processing can be performed in cooperation with each other.

Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with a flat appearance shape (package shape), and is soldered so that the flat surface faces the special surface mount substrate SMB. It is surface-mounted. However, as described above, the special surface mount board SMB on which the surface mount type discrete component D2a is mounted has a relationship in which the mounting surface thereof is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a provided in the special mounting component D3 is not a flat surface thereof but faces a thin surface (thin surface) with respect to the insertion mounting substrate THB. It will be implemented in a form.

In such a configuration, a thin surface having a relatively small area rather than a flat surface having a relatively large area faces the through-hole mounting substrate THB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, only a small area (two through holes) is left in the insertion mounting board THB so that one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in such a situation, the special mounting component D3 can be arranged in the small area (for two through holes).

The size (horizontal length in the figure) of the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself according to this modification is when the special mounting component D3a is mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB. It is smaller than the pitch between the through holes into which the lead portion TL for special insertion mounting is inserted (installation interval of specific insertion holes).

Further, the lead portion TL for special insertion mounting has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mount board SMB from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP of the special surface mount board SMB is formed. By being soldered at a certain location, it is fixed to the special surface mount board SMB and is electrically connected to the surface mount lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. .. On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being soldered while being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB, and is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB side. It is electrically connected to various electronic components via the wiring pattern of.

Further, although the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded by the mold resin, the mold resin is different from the mold resin. Therefore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double molded) together with the special surface mount substrate SMB to be mounted.

With such a configuration, it becomes extremely difficult to perform some kind of fraud on the surface mount board which is inferior in fraud suppression performance.

In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the external shape created by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the external shape of the specific type of surface mount component itself surface-mounted internally. .. That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a itself can be mounted in a concealed state, it seems that a specific type of surface mount component built in the special mounting component D3a is not mounted. The difficulty of understanding the circuit will be increased, and it will be possible to expect the suppression of fraud.

Moreover, in the outer package OP, of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL and the surface mounting lead portion SL provided inside, only the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface mount type discrete component D2a is integrally molded together with the special surface mount board SMB so as to be pulled out to the outside of the above, whereby the special mount component D3a is a lead portion for insertion mounting (special insertion mounting). It is mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB as one electronic component having a lead portion TL).

According to such a configuration, the special mounting component D3a is provided even though the surface mount board having poor fraud suppression performance and the electronic component (surface mount component) mounted on the board are provided inside. Since it will be possible to function as if it were a single insert mounting component mounted in an insert mounting area with excellent fraud suppression performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from the targets of fraudulent purposes by malicious persons. Will be able to be. In addition, since it can be handled in the same way as a single insertion-mounting type discrete component in terms of distribution and mounting, it can be said that it is also excellent in terms of such ease of handling.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By molding integrally with the target special surface mount substrate SMB, it is also possible to have an appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is left in an external shape smaller than the pitch (installation interval of insertion holes) between through holes in the insertion mounting region, the main control board is used. It becomes easy for a third party to notice that a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the base board MB of 1310, which may promote fraudulent activity.

In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes is regarded as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes. It is designed to be mounted after having an external shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, there are no electronic components having an external shape having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes on the base board MB of the main control board 1310, and the electronic components are inserted and mounted. Since it is possible to make it appear as if only the type of electronic component (through-hole mounting component) is mounted, it is possible to improve the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal components.

Furthermore, the external shape created by such an outer package OP is different from the external shape of the electronic components surface-mounted inside, and all the through-hole mounting components (special) mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB. It has a unique appearance shape that is different from any of the electronic components except the mounting component D3). That is, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification has excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin against a mere discrete component D2a which has only a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing device or the like. After giving it, it is designed to have a unique and relatively large appearance shape as an appearance shape that intentionally attracts the attention of malicious persons.

With such a configuration, the excessive security performance applied on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 can be shown to a third party, so that the motivation to commit fraud is reduced. Can be expected.

Further, the outer package OP is assigned an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a. In this modification, the content (○ 3213) of the identification number is described in the inner package (○ 3213). It is designed to be different from the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount board SMB.

With such a configuration, the content (SD) of the identification number assigned to a specific type of surface mount component does not appear, so that the external shape created by the outer package OP and the surface mount inside are mounted. Coupled with the fact that the appearance shape of the surface mount component of a specific type is different (combined with the structure of the double mold), it becomes possible to make it appear that the surface mount component of a specific type is not mounted. In addition, it becomes possible to make it appear as if only the through-hole mounting type electronic components (through-hole mounting components) are mounted, and it becomes possible to improve the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal components.

Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the length of the special surface mount board SMB in the thickness direction is made smaller than the length of the surface mount type discrete component D2a in the thickness direction. On top of this, a mounting surface on which electronic components and wiring patterns are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mount board SMB, and the mold resin is directly attached to the back surface side thereof. It has become.

That is, by adopting such a configuration, not only the unique and asymmetrical appearance shape is formed, but also the length in the thickness direction of the special mounting component D3a is mounted in the through-hole mounting area TH. It is smaller than the length of the discrete component D2b in the thickness direction. This eliminates the need to secure a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the through-hole mounting board THB, in combination with the above-mentioned structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other. The special mounting component D3a can be mixed in while the insert mounting component is mounted.

As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification looks like a single insertion mounting type discrete component, but in reality, it is a special surface mount board SMB and a surface mount type discrete component. D2a and D2a are included in each of them. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the lead portion TL for special insertion mounting is fixed to the special surface mount board SMB inside thereof and electrically connected to the lead portion SL for surface mounting via the wiring pattern HP. In contrast to the structure of the through-hole mount component, the lead portion for insert mount is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire inside the lead portion.

Further, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 118, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the surface mount special mounting component D3a, a special mounting component D3b for internally surface mounting a capacitor element having a small capacitance value is provided.

That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modification is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete component D2b of the insertion mounting type mounted in the insertion mounting area TH and the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element. It forms a circuit. Recall that even with such a configuration related to a filter circuit, the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrically close role in exerting a specific electrical function (filter function). It is possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it becomes possible to expect suppression of fraud.

Regarding the special mounting component D3b, both the resistance element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be internally surface-mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB. However, in this case, the tallest electronic components (insertion-mounting components) are at least inserted and mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB, such as arranging the electronic components side by side in a row. For example, it is desirable to keep the appearance shape lower than that of the capacitor element omitted in the drawing) in order to reduce the size of the base board MB of the main control board 1310.

Further, the special mounting component D3 may include a plurality of types of electronic components as described above, or may include a plurality of one type of electronic components. In any case, when a plurality of electronic components are built-in, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted horizontally and in a row on one special surface mount substrate SMB, and their electrons are mounted. It is desirable to package the components and the special surface mount board SMB together by molding with a mold resin.

However, if a plurality of electronic components are built in the special mounting component D3, the appearance shape will naturally become large, and "because it is a type of electronic component that is inserted and mounted in this size and shape, one. There is a concern that it will not be possible to expect a dazzling effect that utilizes prejudice, such as "I think it is a discrete component of the insertion mounting type." Therefore, in order to suitably obtain the dazzling effect utilizing such prejudice, one surface mount type discrete component is used alone, and its appearance shape is made different by the above-mentioned double mold structure, and its thinness is obtained. It is desirable to mount the surface so that it faces the through-hole mounting board TH.

In addition to forming the outer package OP of the above-mentioned double mold with a non-transparent material such as mold resin, the outer package has an identification number different from the identification number attached to one surface mount type discrete component itself. It can be said that it is also important to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit by attaching it to the OP.

The special mounting component D3 according to this modification has a structure having a "one surface mount type discrete component" smaller than the "one insertion mounting type discrete component" inside the special mounting component D3. The size when double-molded is about the same as that of "one insertion-mount type discrete component", which can be expected to exert the above-mentioned excellent effects. .. Therefore, in a configuration in which "one insert-hole mounting type discrete component" is provided and double-molded, the size becomes larger than that of "one insertion-mount type discrete component". Since it is clear, it cannot be expected to exert the above-mentioned excellent action and effect.

Hereinafter, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized. Unless otherwise specified, the contents described below can be adopted by any of the techniques described with reference to FIG. 117 and other examples thereof, and the techniques described with reference to FIG. 118 and other examples thereof. It is a structure that can be played.

As described above, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 are
-It has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using those electronic components, in addition to the generation processing of a control power supply (for example, + 5V), the progress processing of the game including the payout of prize balls. It has a first control unit MCG that controls the above, and a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, an effect related to a game advanced by the first control unit MCG is performed. 2nd control unit SCG
The purpose of this game machine is to solve the problem of "miniaturizing the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting". ..

More specifically, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, first, "out of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69, the effect control related to the game is performed. The second control unit SCG, which is only performed, is not directly related to the privilege obtained by the player and is not easily targeted for fraud. " It is one of the technical features that this is configured only by surface mounting. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMDs) are also used as the various mounting electronic components described above of the peripheral control board 1510, but the player obtains these mounting electronic components. Since it is not directly related to the privilege and is not easily targeted for fraud, the hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 without degrading the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting. It will be possible to reduce the size of the.

On the other hand, since the processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the granting of the player's privilege, the first control unit MCG is likely to be the target of fraud. Therefore, although miniaturization of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting is significantly reduced. The fact is that it is inevitable that the taste of games will decline.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, on the substrate of the first control unit MCG,
-Insert-hole mounting area where the lead part provided in the electronic component for mounting is mounted in the base plate BB, and the integration performance is inferior but the fraud suppression performance is excellent.
-A surface mount area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting is mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the integration performance is excellent due to the multi-stage stacking of wiring patterns, but the fraud suppression performance is inferior. First of all, it is decided to provide both. On top of this, the technical feature is that the following two types of electronic components for mounting, which have different properties, are sorted and mounted in a through-hole mounting area or a surface mounting area having the above-mentioned properties so as to be able to solve the above-mentioned problems. It is one of.

-Multiple types of single-function elements are integrated in a relatively large package, and integrated circuit components with low security performance against unauthorized mounting-Single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package. Discrete parts with high security performance against unauthorized mounting

More specifically, in the first control unit MCG, the integrated circuit component having low security performance is mounted only in the through-hole mounting area TH of the insertion-mounting area TH and the surface-mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance. At the same time, in the surface mount area where the fraud suppression performance is inferior, only the discrete components having high security performance are mounted. As a result, even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is liable to be subject to fraud, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the fraudulent mounting of the electronic components for mounting.

However, even when the mounting electronic components are configured to maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting in this way, the substrate of the first control unit MCG is likely to be subject to unauthorized mounting. There is no change. Therefore, the substrate of the first control unit MCG is basically a transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) as shown in FIGS. 4, 7, 62 and the like. ), It is desirable to dispose of the pachinko machine 1 so that its mounting surface (flat surface) faces the rear side. That is, in this case, not only can the transparent cover member make it difficult to cheat on the mounting surface (flat surface), but also the operation of opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 is enough to make the first control unit MCG. Since it will be possible to monitor (visually) whether or not an unauthorized component is mounted on the board, an illegal component can be used as a board (first board) on which an integrated circuit component that is likely to be an unauthorized target is mounted. It will be possible to appropriately secure the suppression performance and the ease of monitoring for mounting.

In order to obtain such an effect, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the mounting electronic components are mounted on one side surface (back side surface) of the substrate of the first control unit MCG. Instead, the mounting electronic components are mounted only on the other side surface (front side surface), and the mounting electronic components are covered with the above-mentioned transparent cover member (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.). Needless to say, the pachinko machine 1 should be arranged so that the other side surface (front side surface) faces the rear side.

Further, in view of the fact that the main control board 1310 is a part of the first control unit MCG that is directly linked to the privilege granting of the player, the first control unit MCG has each of the above configurations. It can be said that it is particularly desirable to apply the substrate to the substrate of the main control substrate 1310.

Furthermore, in order to more preferably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting, first, as the board of the main control board 1310, an insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed to form an integrated circuit component. At least prepare a first board in which both discrete components are inserted and mounted, and a second board in which a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed and integrated circuit components are not mounted and discrete components are surface mounted. To. Then, among those substrates, the first substrate is covered with the transparent cover members (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.), and one of the surfaces (electronic components are not mounted). The second substrate is arranged so that the other side of the back side surface) and the other side surface (front side surface on which electronic components are mounted) faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Both the one side surface (the back side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are orthogonal to the rear side. It is desirable to arrange it so that it faces the direction in which it is used. That is, in this case, since the existence of the surface mount area (second board), which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, can be made difficult to see from the rear side, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting is more preferable. Will be expected to be maintained.

However, even with such a configuration, if a malicious person is obsessed with "whether a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed somewhere", the surface inferior in fraud suppression performance. There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting area is formed will be noticed. In this case, although only the discrete components having high security performance among the integrated circuit components and the discrete components are mounted in the surface mount area of the second board, the hole side has not yet recalled the fraudulent activity. If (for example, a very small fraudulent chip is developed) is used, a loss may occur.

Therefore, regarding the other side surface (front side surface) of the first board in which both integrated circuit components and discrete components are inserted and mounted in an insert mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance, not only the insert mounting area but also fraud suppression is performed. The surface mount area, which is inferior in performance, is intentionally formed on the same surface (front side surface). Then, no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mount area, and the other side surface (front side surface) of the first board is covered with the pachinko machine while the pattern wiring as the surface mount area is exposed. It is desirable to arrange it so as to face the rear side of 1. That is, in this case, the surface mount area of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate arranged so as to face the rear side is when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It plays a role as an advertising tower that appeals to "The surface mount area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, is not mounted with any electronic components for mounting, and has high fraud suppression performance as a pachinko machine 1." As a result, it becomes possible for a malicious person to lose the energy to find the second substrate on which the surface mount area inferior in the fraud suppression performance is formed. It is desirable that the surface mount area formed on the first substrate is provided at a position (such as the end of the first substrate) where the existence of the surface mount region can be easily noticed when the first substrate is viewed.

Further, regarding the pattern wiring as the surface mount region formed on the first substrate, is it an independent shape that is not electrically connected between the surface mount region and the insert mount region formed on the same surface? Although it is electrically connected to the through-hole mounting area, it is formed so that even if an unauthorized component is mounted on the surface mount area, the insertion-mounting area side is not affected (the game is advanced). It is important to form it on an output signal that does not need to be used above). On the other hand, in the second substrate according to this explanatory example, unlike the first substrate, only the surface mount region having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed among the insert mount region and the surface mount region. Electronic components for mounting (here, discrete components) are surface-mounted on the surface mount area.

Even when each of the above configurations is adopted, it is possible that a malicious person may find out "a second board on which discrete components are surface-mounted on a surface-mounted area inferior in fraud suppression performance". Sex cannot be completely excluded. Therefore, among the surface mount areas of the main control board 1310, the "surface mount area formed only on the other surface of the first board and on which no electronic components for mounting are mounted" is the surface mount area. While the pattern wiring is arranged so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 with the pattern wiring exposed as described above, the "surface mount area formed only on the other side surface of the second substrate" Is a surface-mounted state in which only the discrete parts, which are difficult to be illegally targeted, out of the discrete parts and the integrated circuit parts are surface-mounted, and the second substrate is molded together with the second substrate by a mold member (impermeable member), and the one side surface (the above-mentioned one side (non-transmissive member) is used. Both the back side surface (the back side surface) on which no electronic component is mounted and the other side surface (front side surface) are arranged so as not to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 but to face a direction orthogonal to the rear side thereof. Is desirable. That is, in this case, it is possible to conceal that the surface mount area is formed on the second substrate and which type of discrete component is surface-mounted with respect to the surface mount area. Not to mention, the mold member makes it difficult to cheat on the mounting surface (the surface mount area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, functions as a special area where it is virtually impossible to mount fraudulent parts, so that fraudulent parts can be used. Since it will be possible to exclude it from the targets that require monitoring of mounting), "We will reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected that problems such as "things" will be solved appropriately.

However, more preferably, as for the mounted parts (here, discrete parts) surface-mounted in the surface-mounted region, as shown in FIG. 118 as an example of the mold structure, the mold member (here, the second substrate) is combined with the mold member (the second substrate). It should be inserted and mounted in the insertion and mounting region TH of the first substrate in a state of being molded by the non-transmissive member). According to such a configuration, a first substrate arranged so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (a surface mount area that gives an impression that "a surface mount component is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1" and electronic components. Of the board in which the insert mounting area on which is mounted is formed), the insert mounting area includes the "discrete component", the "integrated circuit component", and the "mold member (non-permeable member) together with the second substrate). The surface mount areas molded by the above are inserted and mounted respectively, and are electrically connected between each electronic component. That is, in this case, when the first board is visually recognized from the rear side, both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted in the insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance, and the surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance (the first). 2 The board) is difficult to see due to the mold member, and it can be mixed in as if it were an insert mounting component and function electrically. Therefore, "maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting". At the same time, it is expected that the problem of "miniaturizing the hardware circuit" will be solved more preferably.

Further, the second board on which the surface mount components are mounted is inserted and mounted on the first board so that the thin-walled surface of the board faces the rear side (the board surfaces are orthogonal to each other with respect to the first board). Since it is inserted and mounted in the form of a through-hole, it becomes possible to mount the second substrate in the molded state without creating a large blind spot between the first substrate and the first substrate.

Here, even when each of the above configurations is adopted, "the second substrate itself, which is in a state of being molded by the mold member (non-transparent member), is used together with the illegal parts as the mold member (non-transparent member). ) Is required to periodically check whether any fraudulent activity such as "replace with another substrate in the molded state" has been performed. In this regard, if the above-mentioned mold structure is simply adopted, the above-mentioned fraudulent act is performed when the above-mentioned fraudulent act is performed in which the color and material of the mold member are replaced with another substrate having the same configuration. It becomes difficult to detect that it is in a damaged state, and the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the surface mount area of the second substrate to be molded, only a specific type of discrete component (electronic component for mounting) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control board 1310 is available. It is desirable to mount it on the surface, and for other types, do not surface mount it on the second substrate, but mount it only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, only discrete parts having a specific shape are surface-mounted in the surface mount area of the second substrate, so that the shape of the undulating portion in the mold member ( The degree of swelling of the mold member (see, for example, FIG. 118) at the mounting position of the discrete component becomes unified. That is, when another substrate on which a specific type of discrete component and an illegal component is further mounted is molded by a mold member, the degree of swelling of the molded member at the mounting position of the illegal component is the mounting position of the specific type of discrete component. Since the degree of swelling of the mold member is different from that of the above-mentioned fraudulent activity, the difference in shape (the degree of swelling is not single) that appears in the mold member facilitates the monitoring of the above-mentioned fraudulent activity, and the illegal mounting of the electronic component for mounting is prevented. It is expected that the security performance will be maintained favorably.

In this case, in the substrate of at least the main control board 1310 of the first control unit MCG, the discrete components of a specific type are collectively mounted only in the surface mount area of the second substrate. It can be said that it is more desirable to prevent the hardware circuit from being mounted on a board different from the two boards in order to reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit.

However, since the "discrete component of a specific type" is required to be an electronic component for mounting having the same shape in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for example, as a "discrete component of a specific type". If the "shotkey barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second board, the "PN diode" is a "discrete component different from the specific type" and is not mounted on the second board and is a different board. Will be required to be implemented in. Strictly speaking, when a "Schottky barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second board as a "specific type of discrete component", the "Schottky barrier diode" of the same product is mounted on the second board. It is required that the "Schottky barrier diode" of a different product be mounted on the surface, and it is desirable that the "Schottky barrier diode" is not mounted on the second board but mounted on a different board.

However, in the board of the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific types of discrete components. Therefore, in order to make the hardware circuit smaller (integrated) more preferably, only the types of surface-mounted discrete components are different, and other structures (insertion mounting areas are not formed). , Being mounted on only one side, mold structure, etc.) prepare a third board that is the same as the above-mentioned second board, and only one type of discrete component different from the specific type is surface-mounted. It is desirable that the third board is inserted and mounted in the through-hole mounting area of the first board so as to be electrically connected to other mounting electronic components. According to such a configuration, the boards (second board, third board) having the above-mentioned mold structure for each type of discrete component are different electronic components (in the example of FIG. 118, the special mounting component D3a, special). It will be prepared as a mounting component (corresponding to D3b), and the shape to be monitored (the degree of swelling in the mold member) will be unified for each board having a mold structure, and monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (on the corresponding board). Since it will be possible to facilitate (checking whether electronic components of a type that should not be mounted are not mounted), "hardware while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting". It becomes possible to suitably solve the problem of "miniaturizing the circuit". In addition to the second substrate and the third substrate, a substrate on which only discrete components of a type different from the discrete components mounted on these boards are surface-mounted may be similarly prepared.

If only one discrete component is surface-mounted on the second substrate or the third substrate as shown in FIG. 118, monitoring can be further facilitated and the double mold structure described above can be obtained. Combined with this, it becomes possible to more preferably solve the problem of "miniaturizing the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting".

Further, when a plurality of boards thus molded (here, a second board and a third board (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) are provided, the boards are used. It is desirable that each surface mount surface (the other surface described above) is arranged so as to face a specific direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to collectively check the swelling condition of the mold member of each substrate from the same direction. Therefore, monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (a type that should not be mounted on the corresponding substrate). It will be possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not electronic components are mounted.

Furthermore, each member (molding member) that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component-side identification display according to the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted on each of the substrates. In addition, it is desirable that the surfaces to which the component side identification labels are attached are arranged so as to face the same direction. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make a one-to-one correspondence between the "type of identification display on the component side" and the "shape that should appear on the mold member" attached to the second substrate and the third substrate, respectively. , It becomes possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether or not replacement of parts has occurred. At this time, the component side identification display should be attached to the mold surface (the surface on the side where the mold member does not bulge) opposite to the side where the surface mount area is formed. It is desirable to eliminate the distortion as the identification display and prevent the confirmation error from occurring.

Further, according to the above configuration, for the second substrate and the third substrate on which a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, one electron molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate. It is provided as a component and is inserted and mounted so that the board surfaces are orthogonal to each other with respect to the insertion and mounting area formed on the first substrate. That is, in this case, the second board and the third board on which the discrete parts originally provided as surface mount parts are mounted are as if they are insert-mounting parts without creating a large space between them and the first board. Since it can be inserted and mounted on the first board, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

However, in order to suitably maintain the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts, the appearance as "electronic parts that are inserted and mounted on the first board as if they were through-hole mounting parts" is given to the above-mentioned second board or the like. It is required to have each of the third substrates so that they cannot be seen by the substrate on which the surface mount region is formed. Therefore, with respect to the second board and the third board, it is necessary to prevent a plurality of types of discrete components from being surface-mounted, to prevent integrated circuit components from being surface-mounted, and further, as shown in FIG. 118, 1 By making only one discrete component surface mountable, the size of the board can be reduced and this can be combined with one through-hole mounting component (a structure in which the electric element is connected to the lead portion for insertion mounting by a bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important to make it look as if it is a general electronic component (discrete component) that it has. That is, the surface mount area formed on the second board and the third board is at least an insertion mounting area formed on the first board and a vacant state formed on the first board but nothing is mounted. The area is required to be smaller than the surface mount area.

Further, after making the second substrate and the third substrate compact in this way, the first substrate has one electron each of the second substrate and the third substrate with respect to the first substrate. Insert mounting components that are mounted at a lower mounting height than those electronic components when they are inserted and mounted as components (discrete components (general electronic components with a structure in which electrical elements are connected to insertion mounting leads by bonding wires). (Parts)) and insert-mounting parts that are mounted at a higher mounting height than those electronic parts (discrete parts (general electronic parts with a structure in which electrical elements are connected to insert-mounting leads by bonding wires)) It is more desirable that and are arranged respectively. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is inserted and mounted in the insert mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance formed in the first substrate. It will be possible to make it look more suitable as if it were one electronic component. In this sense, the second board and the third board should be provided as electronic parts (molded parts) smaller than any of the integrated circuit parts inserted and mounted on the first board, or inserted into the first board. It can be said that it is also important to provide it as an electronic component (molded component) smaller than the largest discrete component to be mounted.

Further, in general, including the substrate (first substrate) on which the through-hole mounting region according to this embodiment is formed, the substrate corresponding to the type of the electronic component to be mounted is also on the substrate on which the electronic component is mounted. A side identification display is often attached. For example, an electrical diagram symbol corresponding to the shotkey barrier diode is given in the vicinity of the place where the shotkey barrier diode is mounted. However, with respect to the second board and the third board according to this embodiment, it is possible to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit by concealing which type of electronic component functions as the electronic component. It can be said that it is desirable to suitably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal parts.

Therefore, on the through-hole mounting surface of the first board, different board-side identification indications are attached to the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component. However, all of these board-side identification displays include any board-side identification display in the through-hole mounting region of the first control unit MCG, including the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. It is desirable to have a unique mode different from the display (for example, a special display mode such as "?" Or "*"). That is, in this case, even if the board-side identification display (mounting surface of the first board) attached near the position where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted is confirmed, the embodiment is the same type of mounting electron. Since it has a unique aspect that is different from the board-side identification display attached to the component, which type is mounted as a discrete component surface-mounted on the second board or the third board, respectively. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize.

However, when a structure is adopted in which it is concealed which type of electronic component the second board or the third board functions as an electronic component in this way to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding, the type is adopted. In order to understand the above, there is a concern that a malicious person may scrape the mold member and try to confirm the internal element.

Therefore, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate, first, the substrate side identification display should not be attached to the surface mount surface (surface mount surface in the molded state) formed on the substrates. However, even if a malicious person tries to check the inside of the molded member by scraping it, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component. Is desirable.

Furthermore, with respect to each discrete component surface-mounted in the surface mount area formed on the second board and the third board, many of the discrete components are inserted and mounted in the insert-hole mounting area formed on the first board. Is formed by molding with a first mold member having a different color, and then using a second mold member having the same or similar color as the specific color on both the second substrate or the third substrate to be mounted. Further, it is desirable that the molded electronic component is inserted and mounted in the through-hole mounting region formed on the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in the fraud suppression performance is formed are molded in the same form as other through-hole mounting components with respect to the first substrate. Even in the case of through-hole mounting, the administrator on the hole side can easily find out where the second and third boards are, and the second and third boards are fraudulent. It will be possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not it is present.

In this case, even a malicious person will be assisted in grasping information on which surface mount area (second board or third board) is provided, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. It could be. In this respect, in the above configuration, the discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface mount area is molded together with the second substrate or the third substrate by the second mold member to conceal the type as the electronic component. In addition to increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, the second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface. ing. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounted area, an act is performed in which the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside thereof. Even if it is, it is difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate or the third substrate is being scraped or the first mold member inside thereof is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of electronic component will be concealed and the difficulty of circuit understanding will be suitably maintained.

Further, as described above, in this explanatory example, among the through-hole mounting surfaces of the first substrate, the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are inserted and mounted as one electronic component is on the same mounting surface. A board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as "?" Or "*") different from any board-side identification display is attached. However, if only the board-side identification display with such a unique aspect is attached, it is not possible for the hall side to grasp which type of electronic component it functions as, and maintenance / maintenance is performed. There is a concern that it will adversely affect management. Therefore, among the through-hole mounting surfaces of the first substrate, a substrate having a unique aspect in a position that is relatively easy to see in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component. In addition to providing a side identification display, the same type of mounting electronic component (or different) that is on the same mounting surface at a position that is relatively difficult to see (such as directly under the molded second board or third board). It is desirable that the board-side identification display having the same aspect as the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component on the board is also secretly attached.

Further, as described above, in this explanatory example, in the surface mount region of the second substrate, a specific type (for example, a shot key barrier diode) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control board 1310 is used. Only discrete components (electronic components for mounting) are surface-mounted. Further, in the surface mount area of the third board, one type (for example, a relatively small specific capacity) different from the specific type among various discrete components mounted on the board of the main control board 1310 is provided. Only the discrete parts (electronic parts for mounting) of the capacitor) are surface-mounted. According to these configurations, it is clear that the second board and the third board alone cannot function as a discrete circuit having a specific function (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit). That is, the mounting electronic components surface-mounted in the surface mount area formed on the molded board (second board or third board) and the board different from the board (second board or third board) (here). Then, by forming a specific discrete circuit with mounting electronic components surface-mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first board), it is possible to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding or to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding or to mold the board. (2nd board or 3rd board) It is difficult to replace itself (because the structure inside the mold is concealed and it is necessary to make a mold part that does not have a specific circuit function) and it is illegal. It will be expected to be used for countermeasures.

As described above, in summarizing the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the configurations having some technical features have been described in the order in which synergistic effects can be expected. Each configuration is only described as the best embodiment, and it is not always necessary to use all of the configurations in the implementation, and the configurations are appropriately combined regardless of the order in which they are described. It is possible to carry out.

Next, the technical idea that can be grasped from the above-described embodiment and modification is described below.

[Technical Thought 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is equipped with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
A through-hole mounting area in which lead portions provided in electronic components are inserted into the base plate.
It has a surface mount area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
Of the plurality of electronic components, at least one of the surface mount components mounted in the surface mount region is the surface mount component itself, even though the surface mount component itself is molded by the mold resin. Is a gaming machine characterized in that it is molded together with the surface mount area to be mounted by another mold resin.

[Technical Thought 1-2]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and can execute a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
A gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the second control unit has an insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided in an electronic component is inserted into the base plate, and a lead portion provided in the electronic component is the base plate. Of the surface mount area mounted on the surface of the above surface, only the surface mount area is provided.
The base plate of the first control unit is provided with both the through-hole mounting area and the surface mounting area.
Of the plurality of electronic components, the first side surface mount component mounted on the surface mount region provided on the base plate of the first control unit and the surface mount region provided on the base plate of the second control unit. Of the first side surface mount component and the second side surface mount component, although the second side surface mount component to be mounted is itself molded by a mold resin. The game machine is characterized in that the first side surface mount component is further molded together with the surface mount area by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the first side surface mount component itself.

In such technical ideas 1-1 and 1-2, the surface mount components mounted in the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance are molded by the mold resin, though they themselves are molded. Since it is molded integrally with the surface mount area to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin, some fraud can be applied to the surface mount area having poor fraud suppression performance. It will be extremely difficult.

[Technical Thought 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and has a specific control unit capable of executing a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted in such a way that lead parts for through-hole mounting provided in the through-hole mounting parts of the electronic components are inserted,
It has a surface mount plate on which the surface mount lead portion provided on the surface mount component of the electronic components is placed on the surface.
The surface mount plate has
At least a special surface mount plate having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mount plate and be insertable into the through-hole mount plate is included.
On the special surface mount plate,
A wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the surface mount lead portion of the surface mount component mounted on the special surface mount plate and the special insert mount lead portion is provided.
The surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount plate are
Of the surface mount lead portion and the special insert mount lead portion, only the special insert mount lead portion is integrally molded together with the special surface mount plate so as to be pulled out to the outside of the mold resin. A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted on the insertion mounting plate as one electronic component having a lead portion for special insertion mounting.

In such technical idea 2, the surface mount component mounted in the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance functions as if it is one insert mount component mounted in the insert mount area excellent in fraud suppression performance. Being able to do so can be expected to be excluded from the fraudulent purposes of malicious individuals.

[Technical Thought 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is equipped with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted in such a way that the lead parts for through-hole mounting provided in the through-hole mounting parts of the electronic components are inserted,
It has a surface mount plate on which the surface mount lead portion provided on the surface mount component of the electronic components is placed on the surface.
For the surface mount component,
It contains at least discrete surface mount components in which single-function elements are molded with mold resin.
The discrete surface mount component is
The discrete surface mount component itself has a relatively large appearance shape by being integrally molded with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin itself, and is the base of the specific control unit. A gaming machine characterized by having an appearance shape different from that of all electronic components mounted on a board.

In such a technical idea 3, an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin is given to a mere discrete surface mount component which has only a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing device or the like. It is designed to have a unique and relatively large appearance shape as an appearance shape that intentionally attracts the attention of malicious persons. That is, in this case, since the excessive security performance performed in the specific control unit can be shown to a third party, it can be expected that the willingness to commit fraudulent acts will decrease.

[Technical Thought 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and has a specific control unit capable of executing a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
A through-hole mounting area in which lead portions provided in electronic components are inserted into the base plate.
It has a surface mount area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mount region is dispersedly provided at a plurality of locations so that each region is a relatively small region, whereas the insert mounting region is dispersed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the surface mount areas provided.

In such a technical idea 4, the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is not grouped in one place, but is dispersed to subdivide the surface mount area into small pieces to make it inconspicuous, and then the fraud suppression performance is excellent and relatively large. It is arranged in such a way that it is mixed in the insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a malicious person to notice the existence of the surface mount area when looking at the base plate of the specific control unit, and while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts, It is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized.

[Technical Thought 5]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and is equipped with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic circuits.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of electronic circuits are included in the plurality of electronic circuits.
A backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off is included as a discrete circuit having at least a capacitor and a diode, which are electronic components of a single-function element. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
A through-hole mounting area in which lead portions provided in electronic components are inserted into the base plate.
It has a surface mount area in which a lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
The through-hole mounting area is
The electronic components mounted in the surface mount area are provided as a relatively large area surrounding the surface mount area so as to be adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the through-hole mount area.
The backup power supply circuit is
Although it is provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function of supplying backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off, the capacitor and the diode of the discrete circuit have the same. One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mount region surrounded by the insert mount region, and the other electronic component is one of the insert mount regions mounted on the surface mount region. A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted at a position not adjacent to a component.

In such technical idea 5, although it is one discrete circuit aimed at exerting a specific electric function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted on the base plate in the insertion mounting area. Electronic components with a shape that allows them to be smoothed and electronic components that have a shape that allows them to be mounted on the surface mount area will be mixed. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of the specific control unit, it is recalled that they have a close electrical role to exert a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it becomes possible to expect suppression of fraud.

Moreover, after arranging the surface mount area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, into the insertion mounting area, which is provided as a relatively large area with excellent fraud suppression performance, a specific electrical function (backup power supply) is provided. The capacitors and diodes included in one discrete circuit for the purpose of exhibiting the supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, and even if the existence is noticed, the electronic component mounted in the surface mount area cooperates with other electronic components. As a result, it becomes difficult to recall what kind of electrical function is mounted to exert, and by further increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it is preferable to suppress fraud. You can expect it.

[Technical Thought 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and has a specific control unit capable of executing a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted in such a way that lead parts for insertion and mounting provided in electronic components are inserted,
It has a surface mount plate on which surface mount leads provided on electronic components are placed on the surface.
The surface mount plate has
At least a special surface mount plate having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mount plate and be insertable into the through-hole mount plate is included.
The special surface mount plate is
It has a wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the surface mount lead portion of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mount plate and the special insert mount lead portion, and also has a wiring portion for the insert mount plate. The special insertion mounting lead portion is inserted into the insertion mounting plate and arranged so that the mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.

A gaming machine characterized by that.

In general, the components mounted on the surface mount plate often have a flat shape. In this regard, in the technical idea 6, the special surface mount plate is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insert mounting plates are substantially orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, the electronic component is mounted as the through-hole mounting plate because the thin surface having only a relatively small area is opposed to the through-hole mounting plate instead of the flat surface having a relatively large area. The special surface mount plate can be arranged even in a situation where only a small possible area (surface area) is left.

[Technical Thought 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and has a specific control unit capable of executing a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted in such a way that lead parts for insertion and mounting provided in electronic components are inserted,
It has a surface mount plate on which a surface mount lead portion provided on an electronic component is placed on the surface of the base plate.
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mount component mounted on the surface mount plate includes a specific surface mount component having a size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion holes provided in the insertion mount plate. And
The specific surface mount component is
Despite the size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, it is integrated with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. A gaming machine characterized by having an external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole by being molded.

That is, when a specific surface mount component is left in an appearance shape smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the insertion mounting plate, a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. It can be easily noticed by a third party, which in turn can encourage fraud.

In this regard, in the above technical idea 7, a specific surface mount component is integrally molded together with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. Since the appearance of an electronic component with a size that does not fit within the installation interval of a specific insertion hole appears, a surface mount area with inferior fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. It will be possible to make things less noticeable to third parties.

[Technical Thought 8]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The base plate of the first control unit is
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided in an electronic component for mounting is inserted into the base plate, and an insertion mounting area.
It has a surface mount area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting is placed on the surface of the base plate.
The base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as substrates on which the surface mount region is formed.
The first substrate is
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted on the surface mount area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mount area is left exposed and faces the rear side of the gaming machine. Arranged in,
The second substrate is
The integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the surface mount area, but only the discrete component is mounted, and the integrated circuit component faces in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged.

In such a technical idea 8, a first board on which a surface mount area is formed in which no mounting electronic component is mounted and is vacant is intentionally prepared, and this first board is used as the surface mount area. The pattern wiring is arranged so as to face the rear side of the game machine while being exposed. That is, in this case, when a malicious person tries to commit fraud from the rear side of the gaming machine, "No mounting electronic components are mounted in the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, and the fraud is high as a gaming machine. It will play a role as an advertising tower that appeals that it has suppression performance, and it is expected that it will prevent unauthorized parts from being mounted.

On the other hand, on the second board, the game machine is arranged so as to face a direction different from the rear side of the game machine so that its existence is hard to be noticed, and then an integrated circuit is provided for the surface mount area. Of the components and discrete components, integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent targets are not mounted, and only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent targets are mounted. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the second substrate itself in combination with the existence of the first substrate, and even if the existence is noticed, the fraud suppression performance is inferior. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent targets are mounted in the surface mount area, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. Become.

[Technical Thought 9]
A first control unit that has a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board on which the insertion mounting area is formed in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting is inserted into the substrate, and the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting are the surfaces of the substrate. It has a second board in which a surface mount area mounted on top and a lead portion for special insert mounting that extends outward and can be inserted into the insert mount area of the first board are formed. And
On the first substrate,
The insert mounting area that can be mounted by inserting the insert mounting lead portion provided in the insert mounting component and the surface mounting lead portion provided in the surface mount component are placed on the surface. Both a surface mount area that can be mounted are formed, but no mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface mount area formed on the first substrate, and pattern wiring as the surface mount area is formed. It is supposed to remain exposed and
On the second substrate,
Of the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area, only the surface mounting area is formed, and of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, only the discrete component is the mounting target of the second substrate. By inserting the lead portion for special insertion and mounting into the insertion and mounting area of the first board as one electronic component molded into the above, various insertion and mounting parts mounted on the first board can be used. A game machine characterized by being electrically connected between them.

In such a technical idea 9, as a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance, no mounting electronic component is mounted and the pattern wiring as the surface mount region is exposed. The first board) and the surface mount area (second board) in which only the discrete parts, which are difficult to be tampered with, among the discrete parts and the integrated circuit parts, are surface-mounted and molded together with the boards. It is equipped with. That is, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the game machine, the surface mount area on which the electronic components for mounting are mounted is difficult to see, and any mounting is used. Since only the surface mount area on which no electronic components are mounted can be visually recognized, the surface mount area is "no mounting electronic components are mounted on the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance. It will play a role as an advertising tower that appeals that it has high fraud suppression performance as a game machine, and it is expected that it will prevent fraudulent parts from being mounted.

Moreover, in addition to the surface mount area, an insert mount area having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed on the first substrate on which the surface mount area that plays the role of the advertising tower is formed. Therefore, the surface mount area (second board) that is molded together with the above boards is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, among the insertion mounting areas having excellent fraud suppression performance in the board (first board) that gave the impression that "surface mount components are not mounted", the surface mounting area (first) having inferior fraud suppression performance. Since the 2 boards) are made to be mixed in in a form that is difficult to see by the mold, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts. Become.

[Technical Thought 10]
A first control unit that has a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board on which the insertion mounting area is formed in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting is inserted into the substrate, and the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting are the surfaces of the substrate. It has a second substrate with a surface mount area formed on which it is mounted.
In the first substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on one side surface, and both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted on the other side surface, and the other side surface is behind the gaming machine. While it is arranged facing sideways,
In the second substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on one side surface, and the integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the other surface, and only the discrete component is mounted on the mold member. In the state of being molded by the above, both the one side surface and the other side surface are mounted on the first substrate so as to face a direction different from the rear side of the game machine. A game machine to be.

In such a technical idea 10, the mounting electronic components are not mounted on one side of the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed, and the discrete components are integrated on the other side. Since both the circuit components and the circuit components are mounted and the other surface is arranged so as to face the rear side of the gaming machine, the integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud are mounted. As the substrate (first substrate), it becomes possible to appropriately secure the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts and the ease of monitoring.

Further, for the second board in which the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, mounting electronic components are not mounted on one side surface, and integrated circuit components that are easily subject to fraud are mounted on the other side surface. Since only discrete components that are not likely to be fraudulent targets are mounted, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. Become.

Moreover, in the second substrate, both the one-sided surface and the other-sided surface of the gaming machine are in a state where the surface mounting area on which the discrete components are mounted is molded together with the substrate by a molding member. It is arranged so as to face a different direction from the rear side of the. That is, in this case, the surface mount area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, is made to function as a special area where it is practically impossible to mount fraudulent parts, and it is necessary to monitor the mounting of fraudulent parts (game machine). It will be possible to remove it from the confirmation target from the rear side).

Further, with respect to the surface mount area (second board) thus excluded from the monitoring target for mounting of unauthorized parts, the thin-walled portion of the board faces the rear side (both one side surface and the other side surface are concerned). Since it is mounted on the first board so as to face a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine), it is in the molded state without creating a large space between the first board and the first board. It becomes possible to mount the second board.

[Technical Thought 11]
A first control unit that has a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first board having an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, respectively.
A second board in which the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and a surface mount region is formed in which a specific type of mounting electronic component is surface-mounted among the discrete components, and the above. Of the discrete components and the integrated circuit components, the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and a surface mount region is formed in which a mounting electronic component of a type different from the specific type is surface-mounted among the discrete components. Have and
The second substrate and the third substrate are
By being provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on each of these boards, and by being inserted and mounted in the insertion-mounting region formed on the first board. It is possible to electrically connect to various through-hole mount components mounted on the first board.
Each member that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification display according to the type of discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, respectively, and the component side. A gaming machine characterized in that all surfaces with identification marks are arranged so as to face a specific direction.

In such a technical idea 11, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first board on which an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, on the second and third boards in which the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, only the discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent targets are mounted in different types for each board.

Therefore, for mounting electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting area side, which has excellent fraud suppression performance, the fraud suppression function as before is maintained, and mounting is mounted on the surface mounting area side, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. As for the electronic components for mounting, check whether the electronic components for mounting having the shapes of the types corresponding to them are mounted on each of the second and third boards (the types of electronic components that should not be mounted on the corresponding board). It will be easier to check if it is not implemented), so even if fraud is made, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized while making it easy to detect. become.

Moreover, the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed are provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on those substrates. In addition, by inserting and mounting each of them in the through-hole mounting area formed on the first board, it is possible to electrically connect to various through-hole mount components mounted on the first board. There is. That is, in this case, a specific type of discrete component originally provided as a surface mount component and a discrete component of a type different from the specific type are inserted and mounted on the first board as if they were insert mounting components. Therefore, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts.

Furthermore, each member that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is each provided with a component-side identification display according to the type of discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate. All the surfaces with the side identification display are arranged so as to face a specific direction. That is, in this case, the "type of component-side identification display" and the "shape that should appear on the mold member" attached to the second board and the third board, which are inserted and mounted on the first board, respectively, are one-to-one. Since it becomes possible to make a correspondence, it becomes possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether or not replacement of parts has occurred.

[Technical Thought 12]
A first control unit that has a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board in which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed, and the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. It has a second board with a surface mount area on which discrete components are surface mounted.
The second substrate is
It is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the board, and is inserted and mounted so that the board surfaces are orthogonal to the insertion-mounting region formed on the first board. By doing so, it is possible to electrically connect to various through-hole mount components mounted on the first board.
On the first substrate,
Through-hole mounting components that are mounted with a lower mounting height than the electronic components when the second board is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the board, and mounting heights higher than the electronic components. A gaming machine characterized in that each of the insertion mounting parts is arranged.

In such a technical idea 12, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first board on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the second board on which the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, the hardware is suitable for suppressing fraudulent component mounting. It is expected that the circuit will be downsized.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. The board surfaces are inserted and mounted so as to be orthogonal to each other with respect to the inserted and mounted areas. That is, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component originally provided as a surface mount component is mounted is the first board as if it were an insert mounting component without creating a large space between the second board and the first board. Since it becomes possible to insert and mount the hardware circuit, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts.

Further, on the first board, a through-hole mounting component mounted at a lower mounting height than the electronic component when the second board is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the board, and the electronic component. Since the through-hole mounting components mounted at a higher mounting height are respectively arranged, the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is the fraud formed on the first board. It becomes difficult to recognize that the component is mounted in the through-hole mounting area having excellent suppression performance.

[Technical Thought 13]
A first control unit that has a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board in which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed, and the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. It has a second board with a surface mount area on which discrete components are surface mounted.
The discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate is formed by being molded by a first mold member having a specific color different from most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the first substrate. And
The second substrate is
An insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate and provided as one electronic component molded by a second mold member having the same or similar color as the specific color together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be electrically connected to various through-hole mounting components mounted on the first board by being inserted and mounted on the first board.

In such a technical idea 13, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first board on which an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the second board on which the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, the hardware is suitable for suppressing fraudulent component mounting. It is expected that the circuit will be downsized.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. It is made to be inserted and mounted for the inserted and mounted area. That is, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insert mount component. It is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized parts.

Further, regarding the discrete components surface-mounted in the surface mount area formed on the second substrate, the first mold member having a color different from that of many of the discrete components inserted and mounted in the insert mounting area formed on the first substrate. Then, it is configured as one electronic component further molded by a second mold member having the same or similar color as the specific color together with the second substrate to be mounted. I have to.

Therefore, even when the second board having the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is molded in the same form as other through-hole mounting components and inserted and mounted on the first board, the holes are formed. The administrator on the side can easily find out where the second board is, and can easily confirm whether or not the second board is fraudulent. However, in this case, even a malicious person may help to grasp information on which surface mount area (second board) is provided, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance.

In this respect, in the above configuration, it is difficult to understand the circuit by concealing the type as the electronic component by molding the discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface mount region together with the second substrate by the second mold member. In addition to enhancing the properties, the second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounted area, an act is performed in which the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside thereof. Even if it is, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate is being scraped or the first mold member inside thereof is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of electronic component will be concealed and the difficulty of circuit understanding will be suitably maintained.

[Technical Thought 14]
A first control unit that has a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board in which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed, and the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. It has a second board with a surface mount area on which discrete components are surface mounted.
The second substrate is
The first substrate is provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. It is possible to electrically connect to various through-hole mount components mounted on the
The mounting surface of the second board is not provided with any board-side identification display corresponding to the discrete components surface-mounted on the board, and the mounting surface of the first board is the one electronic component. A specific board-side identification display is attached corresponding to the position where the second board is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification display is attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a unique aspect different from any of the board-side identification indications attached in the insertion mounting area of the gaming machine, including the substrate-side identification indication.

In such a technical idea 14, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first board on which an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the second board on which the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, the hardware is suitable for suppressing fraudulent component mounting. It is expected that the circuit will be downsized.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. It is made to be inserted and mounted for the inserted and mounted area. That is, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insert mount component. It is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized parts.

Furthermore, the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second board is not provided with any board-side identification display corresponding to the discrete components surface-mounted on the board, and the mounting surface of the first board is Is attached with a specific board-side identification display corresponding to the position where the second board as one electronic component is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification display is the same type of mounting electronic component. Including the substrate-side identification display attached in response to the above, the unique mode is set to be different from any of the substrate-side identification indications attached in the first control unit and the second control unit. That is, in this case, even if a specific board-side identification display attached to the mounting surface of the first substrate is confirmed, the embodiment is different from the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. Since it is a unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as a discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate. In addition, even if a malicious person scrapes the mold member and tries to check the inside of the discrete component in order to grasp the type of discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface mount area. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technical Thought 15]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed and can execute a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic circuits.
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic circuits.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit include
It consists of electronic components for mounting single-function elements, and includes specific discrete circuits aimed at exerting specific electrical functions.
The base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting region and a surface mounting region formed on different substrates.
In the specific board on which the surface mount region is formed in the base plate, only the specific type of mounting electronic components among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit are surface-mounted and the specific type is used. Various types of electronic components mounted on a different substrate by being provided as one electronic component molded together with the electronic components for mounting and being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. It is possible to electrically connect to the insert mounting component of
Among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit, other mounting electronic components different from the specific type are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on a board different from the specific board. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

In such a technical idea 15, only discrete components (mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit) that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on a specific board on which a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts.

Moreover, in a specific board on which a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, only the specific type of mounting electronic components among a plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit are surface-mounted, and the specific types are mounted. Various types of electronic components mounted on a different substrate by being provided as one electronic component molded together with the electronic components for mounting and being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. It is designed to be electrically connectable to the insert mounting component of.

That is, in this case, since the specific board on which the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insert mount component, it is possible to suppress the mounting of illegal components. It is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the optimum value. Further, since only the specific type of mounting electronic components among the mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit are surface-mounted on the specific board, it is confirmed whether or not the surface mounting area is fraudulent. It will be possible to facilitate. In addition, since the above-mentioned specific board is molded together with a specific type of electronic component for mounting and then inserted and mounted on another board into which other electronic components for mounting are inserted and mounted, the molded specific board is specified. To increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit for a specific discrete circuit formed over the surface mount area formed in the board and the insert mount area formed on a board different from the specific board, and to be used as a countermeasure against fraud. Will be expected.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69. When the signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communication with the pachinko machine 1 and driving the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out a game ball as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), a main control board. The prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number), and command 10H specifies one prize ball and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the payout control board 951 is used from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to Command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH wins. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the special figure 2 tuning effect, the jackpot related, the power on, the normal electric role effect related, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1403. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as a status and "** H" as a mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is instructed to end the special drawing 1 tuning effect, and the variable time state designation command is to instruct the probability and the time saving state. The probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state, a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state, and a low probability time saving state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time for variable display of the symbol compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later at a predetermined time can be displayed. In addition to increasing the number of stops displayed compared to the non-time saving state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is longer than that in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), as shown in FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls held (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state). The second starting port 2004 It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 entrainment production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 tuning effect end regarding the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 89, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). (Opening or opening start of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command between the rounds starts while the large winning opening 1 is closed (large starting port unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or the closing is started), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command indicates the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is the jackpot. It instructs the display of symbol information.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is the start during the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit, or The small hit count display command is used to indicate the start of opening), and the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command indicates the start of the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100). It is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of the big winning opening 2005), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the time of closing the big winning opening 1 (starting closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005). Is transmitted by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot symbol display command is opened (when the jackpot unit 2100 opens the jackpot 2005). ) Is sent.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is sent. , Sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands named power-on state and power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. In), the information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored. , Information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, and. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and Amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation occurs). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to specify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the above occurs.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Also sent to.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal symbol tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the device 1402, which are named as the start of the normal map synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command specifies the miss, the specific big hit, and the non-specific big hit. The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure tuning effect, and the variable time state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually). As the gaming state, a low-probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the command for specifying the variable state is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service effect-related is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the division thereof is as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Hit Opening, Solenoid Open Display, and Solenoid Ending. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107. The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per drawing is transmitted at the start of the opening per drawing, and the opening display command is sent when the opening is open (a pair of movable pieces are left and right by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit (even though it is not a big hit) other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, electrical in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When an electrical connection with 4005 or the like is broken or short-circuited, the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed to start, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69. This is to instruct the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when the above occurs.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the door is in the closed state. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 is directed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. This is to instruct the end of the main body frame opening notification when it is in the closed state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Of these, it is transmitted when any of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in a state of being opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to an error cancellation command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. Set it as a status and set the received command as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7 * H" is added to these received commands. Formates the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The formatted frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned "8 * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the execution and main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command indicates the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively, and the variable shortening operation end designation command is variable. The state transition from the shortened operation state to the variable shortened non-operation state is instructed, and the high-probability end designation command is instructed to shift the state from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is such that 0 to 4 special symbols 2 are held (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 The number of balls (the number of balls (reserved number) that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. Yes, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Based on the first special symbol display 1403, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command has the function of holding the special symbol 2 to display the second special symbol of the display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or the second When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 are mainly voiced. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent to notify the effect, and the command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end designation command is sent. , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after digesting the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times", and the special symbol 1 storage command changes the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1. When (the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first start is further performed. It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol by the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of holdings decreases). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 2 operation changes (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays a change in the special symbol. When there is a hold number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it for display, and the normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the number of reserved balls is reduced), the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the normal symbol display 1402 When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation is increased (the game ball is placed at the first start port 2002). It is sent when the number of reserved balls has increased after entering the ball), and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation increases (when the number of reserved balls enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls is increased). When it increases), it will be sent. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the first starting opening, or the second starting opening. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 transmit to that effect mainly by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 consists of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection error and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when out of ball. Represents a bit.) Is set to a value 1, a value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, a value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in stock of 50 or more, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball ball, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1 and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is defective. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game balls are repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error clear navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process, which will be described later.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol shown in FIG. 69, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405. A random number for the display pattern, a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the jackpot game state is generated, and this jackpot. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game. A random number for a small hit symbol to be used for determining a small hit symbol, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of this random number for a small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is used to determine a random number for determining whether to open and close the movable piece, and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece is used to determine the initial value. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the random numbers for jackpot determination are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69. As described above, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, first, the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is set to one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or in the process of turning on the power on the main control side, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total is stored in the main control side power cutoff process (power down). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is the main control MPU1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and performs the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number based on the extracted ID code. It is a mechanism to execute and set this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided with the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed to perform the second operation. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “ It is described as "WDT control register"), the timer set value is set, the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU1310a is reached until the time measured by the main control built-in WDT1310af reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT1310af with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, the timer clear setting value is set. The time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time by the WDT1310af with built-in main control by the time set by the timer set value and starting the time again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC 21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC 22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, so that the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning signal. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done. The determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop MIC 22, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop the output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with its logic as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. Is entered in. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, when the state in which the logic is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is latched as LOW.

Following step S14, the main control program is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It is in a state (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is shown in FIG. 72, is activated (boot). I'm waiting until). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. When there is an input of the power failure warning signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure warning signal continues. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S28, in the main control program, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off time processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When they match, this main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, checksum value (sum value), backup flag BK-FLG value, and other game backup information in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the power is turned off, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "recovery" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a. ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a to update the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state by hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hardware random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for determining a big hit.

Following step S48, the main control program makes reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. 89 The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt enable (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to input the detection signal that accompanies the operation of the operation switch 954 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted). (Game control side normal operation control means), it is handled as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error generated in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. Functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after the lapse of the predetermined time, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S54, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process in which the output of the power failure clear signal is started is performed in the power failure clear process in step S14. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2107, an attacker solenoid 2108, a first special symbol indicator 1403, a second special symbol indicator 1405, and a first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. 69. , The second special hold number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island facility can be supplied. The main control side power cutoff process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms from the time when the power is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the pachinko island equipment is used. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. The waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the device 460 starts (boots) is started to be timed, and immediately before the waiting time is reached. If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, but within a period of about 7ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Therefore, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the power-off processing on the main control side in the power-on processing. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is completed in step S28. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power restoration and there is no intention indication by the hall clerk to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ) There is a problem that it will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process is provided. The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, the game can be advanced. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the backup process for storing the game information due to the progress of this game by supplying the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power cutoff processing composed of the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a is main. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the check sum calculation result in step S28 and the check sum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the check sum in step S64) are in agreement. Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in RAM is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af to reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff process can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the process of turning on the power of the main control side at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a is used. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeatedly performing the determination of, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared again. By making it impossible to start the time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. The main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the timer interrupt process on the main control side is started, which will be described later. I adopted the mechanism. When the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure in this way, the part covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) can be divided into two parts, one is the part covered by hardware so that the disconnection process is surely completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey the information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. There is. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. In other words, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the main control return destination command at power-on is turned on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or a power failure when the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 is stepped. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The drive of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the large winning opening 2005 shifts from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing member 2107.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and restored according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from. It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is issued. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) in the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 to indicate the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing between the rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmission to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 start the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. A command to indicate the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Will be.

Further, for example, a screen (for example, that the movable piece is expanded) telling the second starting port 2004 that the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player. The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the display (screen to be transmitted to the player) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the start port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The movable piece will shift from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it is expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the game state is possible, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot know what kind of game the player should play.

As described above, in the above two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state shifts to the current state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, the screen showing the number of rounds). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. A screen that tells you that there is a message (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It's a big hit. The big prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big prize opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to enter the game ball into the grand prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, in a state where the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game returns. When electricity is turned on, a screen telling that the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "movable pieces" The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the screen that conveys the message "The game is being expanded. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start port." It is possible to instruct the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored thereafter, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes, steps S58 to S68, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power cutoff process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on as shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in a state of being memorized in. In these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is generated. (Including the recovery time), any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving states, high-probability time-saving states, low-probability non-time-saving states, and high-probability non-time-saving states (probability and time-saving states) is restored. It is composed of information indicating whether to do so and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of changes in the special symbol is limited (for example,). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of being performed 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. Therefore, the worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the operator of the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And a series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which is the routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the power-on process on the main control side is used. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later is the normal time described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the signal has been normally received is input. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001,2201 shown in FIG. Detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 and the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. Detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 to detect a game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. , The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. Input information by reading the detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and the detection from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 90, which is classified into the other, is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2001, 2, 201, and the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game balls entered in the large winning openings 2005. Detection signal from, detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start port 2002, second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start port 2004 When the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time, respectively, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After that, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing a total of two readings, one for the first to third readings to be compared and the other for the second to fourth readings, a total of two readings will be performed due to the effects of chattering and noise. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 It can increase reliability.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining an initial value for a jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The random number is updated in the random number update process and the random number update process in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created and paid out as the prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or mainly. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 may be created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to send to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, the number of balls to be paid out will be added to the next number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls by reading input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area is added, and the number of balls of the added game balls is added. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command reception process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005). , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and a random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. It is determined (determined whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. A value of 32767 is set, and the value is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the main control built-in. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a). Is included in the jackpot judgment range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit, various commands classified as related to the big hit shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) the large winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2, the figure is shown in the figure. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a is set so as to turn on the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10. The output information is stored in the output information storage area, or the round is performed 15 times. At one time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to turn on the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status display 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color, and the lighting signal is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified to be related to the normal symbol tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. In addition to storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and normally according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is sent to the starting port solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as time-saving and medium-time information output information and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in FIG. 1 related to the synchronization effect and various commands classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 89, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. A big prize is won based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected by various commands classified into commands and big hits. Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric power production, Fig. 90 Various commands classified into notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) and various commands classified into status display (frame state 1 command, error cancellation) shown in Navi commands and frame status 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configure various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310a a to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. It can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as main peripheral serial data. When the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the power is restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the power-on processing on the main control side shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, as shown in FIG. , Status, status, which configures the power-on status command, sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the main control return destination command when power-on. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process of turning on the power of the main control side, and the game information is accommodated. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error generation command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit). ) Is sent a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control). A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control). A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af, the main control MPU1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is a backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, the peripheral control board 1510 issues the main control return destination command at power-on in FIG. 89, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine. It can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power-on recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power-on state command and the power-on main A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value to configure the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. The effect can be displayed in the display area of. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is restored immediately after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by being seen by the player in such a state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 92. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on as shown in FIG. And the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to the inspection device of the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process constitutes information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the staging control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the staging control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310 in, for example, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is backed up by Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), are compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), is copied back and used as a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a mismatch), the value 0 is forcibly written to each of the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), to make a cold start.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is also backed up by Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the staging control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. The processing of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. It lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the staging control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the staging control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the staging control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the staging control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the staging control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to and write to the transmit buffer register of. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to synchronize with 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the staging control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73. Door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmission data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). The 1-byte data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the 1-byte data is exhausted in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is divided into 1 byte each, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, etc. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the staging control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. It is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but although so-called frame dropping occurs, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by music and sound effects according to.

Following step S1016, the staging control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time as transmitting, the left side audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the staging control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the staging control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the screen data from the first screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate whether it is an aspect.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data is to be output. Electrical drive source The drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that constitutes the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the staging control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. A normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, and a large prize opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command,) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc. The various commands are classified into, as shown in FIG. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric function production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the staging control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90, various commands are included. Peripheral control unit 1511 sets the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and that one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands such as an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode accompanying the effect operation, for example, the game board side. The effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (the effect device). Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the staging control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. Update the saved calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the staging control program performs pre-reading staging control processing (step S1027). The look-ahead effect control process executes the process related to the look-ahead effect based on the effect command analyzed in the receive command analysis process in step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or a special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command (hereinafter, “look-ahead effect command”) is received, the look-ahead effect is executed. Make settings. The details of the look-ahead staging control process will be described later.

The look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 when the game ball wins in the start ports 2101, 1022. In the present embodiment, when the peripheral control board 4140 receives the look-ahead effect command, the look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the receive command analysis process in step S1022. In the look-ahead effect control process, if the look-ahead effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the content of the look-ahead effect command. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the pre-reading effect command is received from the main control board 4100, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect is actually executed on the peripheral control board 4140.

Then, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the mode of the hold display of the start storage is changed as the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect). In addition, after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed in which the mode of the hold display is changed every time the start memory in which the variable display is executed in advance is exhausted. do. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect is performed, and at the same time, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect. The predetermined condition is, for example, a case where the number of undigested start memories is a certain number or more, and there is a high expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory to be read ahead will be a big hit. You may.

The content of the look-ahead effect is not only to change the display mode of the start memory, but also to display the display effect on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 such as changing the character display and the background, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output from the speaker. , It may be an effect such as the movement of a movable body.

Following step S1027, the staging control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Based on the light emission data to be output, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. At the same time, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is provided to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the staging control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and creates a game board side effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the staging control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a 1024-step value from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volume 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the staging control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in the Bank 0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and specify the copy from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 kb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc. All the contents are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is used at high speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and specify the copy from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the terminal address are copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db in succession of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies the copy to the Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 1511dc. All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc (Bunk4). All copies are made in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 96 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). End this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is executed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since it is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 95 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the execution of peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether it is completed or not. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so that the processing fails.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time that the above-mentioned processing failed exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 97. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, in which the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in a time series constituting the schedule data. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame-decorated drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data instructed by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the amplifier board side. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The 1-byte data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the 1-byte data is exhausted in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. Of the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a series, a motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is also shown in the figure. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511cag on the motor drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the staging operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 73 are created. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Drawing state information acquisition From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the effect display device on the door frame side. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively, and backed up.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cab by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and use Bank0 (1ms) from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the terminal address are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 kb in succession of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95, various processes related to the above-mentioned effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[16-1--4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the receive buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total is used. Is assigned the calculated sum value.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3 in step S1206, that is, a mode in which the status is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the receive buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a slingshot environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data on the peripheral control unit 1511 side are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is affected by noise and changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main peripheral serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. (Step S1216), and the routine is terminated. This receive command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 75, is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning) is started. It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while power failure warning is given. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is started. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is peripheral. Specify the copy of the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, from the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example). 1 byte) continuously backed up All copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc, which is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core. The content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank 0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy, and specify the contents from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one of the drawing state information acquisition processes in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511c as the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data), and predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is used as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. Shifts bit by bit from to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 toward the least significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process to be executed as one of the warning processes in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, in this LOCKN signal, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. It is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. And, that is, a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits have a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match, the peripheral control board 1510 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times in the determination of step S1522 that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem each time this routine is executed. (Counting the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. It is designed to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, it is determined that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set in the communication error flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG is the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It is a flag indicating whether or not a problem has definitely occurred. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. At times, it is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one of the warning processes of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101. The door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that fact.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step). S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, the number of screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is instructed to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. To determine if the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is running, while the screen generation schedule. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state are performed. It is possible to determine whether or not it is during the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the player is waiting for customers or during the period during which the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. When it is not the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating in the customer waiting state (when it is simply in the customer waiting state). It is designed to end this routine as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side staging provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Counting the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred even once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is the case as it is. While terminating the routine, even once it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT and the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective, and the transmitter and the transmitter. It is a flag indicating whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection of the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If the value is not reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the door frame side directing. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and is for the door frame side effect. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Perform (step S1548) and end this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs the process of drawing to. For example, the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Further, in the communication error display processing, a period during which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU1511a as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is LOCKN in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is a game. Along with performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.") Is repeatedly emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform flow processing. At this time, the process of turning on all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 103.

First, a decorative pattern that is variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady processing or the like, and the main control side of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process, the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. 94, or the second shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the start opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. In each round, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). The round is digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is from the main control board 1310. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command, the left decorative symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative symbol is in the center. , And the variable display of the right decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is stopped. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 can be recognized by the player. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reel rotates from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative symbol from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped by the variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable display start and stop display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized with each other.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is shown as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit for the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is steady. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Because the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is output from the data to the VDP1512a with built-in sound source, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the screen generation schedule data is followed. Since the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed. Even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the determination of step S1540 in this connection recovery process, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT can be used until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the receiver even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not performed. The process of recovering the connection with the player is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. Since the message "There was a problem with the side LCD display device. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, it tells that the drawing data received from the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 is an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the steady process, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data has not been started and the screen generation schedule data has not been started in the scheduler update process, the power of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery processing shown in FIG. 102 executed as one processing of the warning processing of step S1024 in the steady processing, the process proceeds to the processing of step S1542 in the same processing, and the communication check counter CC-. When the CNT value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter is used. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the process of step S1544 in the same process is performed. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it has not reached, the process proceeds to the process of step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1). That is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to the process of step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a problem with the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk. ”Is displayed and notified, and the drawing data received from the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the data is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is displayed again. During the interval period until the start of, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, as described above. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect are used. A state in which there is a problem in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be the above does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the signal is reached (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication error display process is always performed so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. The message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed and notified.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is activated, the left decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol are activated. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side staging provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if it is a number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the connection recovery process is performed. The communication error display process of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device is used. The 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. During the interval period until the variation display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled. On the other hand, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is displayed. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is information that the player is most interested in the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol being stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which is given is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect and recovering to the correct drawing state. By stopping and displaying the decoration pattern on the right side, the drawing of the player's most interesting information is completed.

In this respect, the period during which the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the customer waiting state. During the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case of transmitting the LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, it is differential as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is, in the first place, the LOCKN signal output request data. As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to the control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a tells the effect display drive board 4450 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the effect display drive board 4450 has a problem. The notification image (for example, "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk.") Is controlled by the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to display the effect on the game board side. By outputting to 1600 and outputting a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is played from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The LOCKN signal output request data is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can output the LOCKN signal as a response signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN. When no signal is input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Then, when the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. The clerk in the hall can check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without any trouble. ing. Therefore, it is possible to find a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, it is for the door frame side effect. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the receiver ICSDIC0 receives the image. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to convey that the drawn drawing data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a connection confirmation signal to inform that the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is started to be transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side staging transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage and eliminate the defect. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by discovering and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the effect control microprocessor outputs the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which conveys that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication problem. Generates the message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk." It can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a detects a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall or directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall has a problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by detecting and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications. Is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not started and stopped, the communication problem can be resolved.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the above state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and solving a communication problem between image communications is performed. A connection confirmation signal for transmitting from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is sent to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. While the output is continuously repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the game is played. When the progress of the above is started again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is predetermined when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input. It is possible to stop transmitting the data pattern (SYNC pattern) of the above to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It has become like. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the progress of the game is not executed. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion (distortion of the image) of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 is still present. Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the progress of the game again (every time the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2 is reached), the game can be directed to be resolved.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 and a second start, which is a start area in which a game ball launched by a ball launching device 650 toward a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU952a of 70 is implemented.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the process when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. 92 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM is used. The RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as the RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information regarding the payout, and the main control side power supply of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the turn-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time when the power is turned on) has elapsed, the error generated for the payout device 830 is cleared. As an error canceling signal for this purpose, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is not output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor, but is output to the payout control MPU952a which is a payout control microprocessor. ..

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on side process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information related to the above is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit power is turned on. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on) has elapsed, the payout device 830 is operated. As an error release signal for canceling the generated error, an error release function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor 952a without outputting it to the main control MPU1310a which is the game control microprocessor. Since it is provided in combination, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clear function, by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error clear function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 has various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit in which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. do.

In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought closer to a gaming ball driven into the gaming area to manipulate the flowing state of the gaming ball as desired and to obtain an unreasonable profit. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such an illegal game act and suppress the illegal act by a light emitting means, a voice alarm, or the like, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area. There is.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit installed in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive effect element and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, + 5V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. It is designed not to (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the non-detection state where the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. Further, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

In addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. , + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

In addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which + 12V is applied. Further, the detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied while being connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Applies to.

Further, in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of a circuit composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistance IR1 and the transistor ITR0. As described above, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which magnetic detection is not performed, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table format in FIG. 108. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, as in the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. ..

By the way, when the signal is transmitted by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion. There are two types of connector members, pin contact type and bellows contact, depending on the shape of the contact terminal of the connector member. In the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, pin contact is made. Gap is easier to open than the type. When a gap is opened, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down while playing with a right-handed strike, when vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, slight sliding wear occurs. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR is generated in a connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. The operation of is explained. For example, in FIG. 104, when a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is shown by a chain line. The magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where magnetism is not detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistance RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, and the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Will be lifted. In FIG. 104, the connection point between the pull-up resistance IR0 and the resistance IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. .. Then, when the voltage lifted by the contact resistance RR reaches the specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 deployed on the panel relay board 4161, there is a possibility that the sensor signal may be erroneously detected when the contact resistance RR is generated.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the first embodiment in the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shall be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the large winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, and the like. become.

The difference between the magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment and the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit is that when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164, it is in a non-detection state. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) pulled down to the ground side by the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR and lower than the first voltage is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 The voltage raising unit 4166 is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising unit 4166.

In the first embodiment, the voltage raising portion 4166 is an example composed of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistance IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. It is connected.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected. It is connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which magnetic detection is not performed, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conducting state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS unit is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is determined to be HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a is peripheral. An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and a process for outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. The peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the alarm lamp, the voice, or the like in response to the error command.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which magnetic detection is not performed, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistance RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, and the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Is lifted. In FIG. 105, the connection point between the pull-up resistance IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 by flowing a current through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is transmitted. False positives can be prevented.

As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a sends an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command with a magnet. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the warning display, voice, etc. are notified that an illegal game act using the above has been performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has a disconnection. do. Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has a first resistance IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and one end connected to the other end of the first resistance IR1 and the other end is grounded. It is configured to include a second resistance IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 104, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged after the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage raising portion 4166 is an example configured by the resistance IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground and drops when the predetermined voltage is applied.

One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which magnetic detection is not performed, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage lowered to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising section 4166, and a second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising section 4166 have a voltage of + 12V. A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistance IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistance IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which magnetic detection is not performed, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistance (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, and the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Is lifted. In FIG. 106, the connection point between the pull-up resistance IR0 and the first resistance IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistance. It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistance, a current flows through the first resistance IR1 and further this current flows to the ground through the second resistance IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistance IR3 is grounded, the current due to the predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage almost drops to the ground, and the second resistance Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is maintained in the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is transmitted. False positives can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 comprises two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. And the resistors IR1, IR4, IR5 are included. Compared with the above-mentioned Example 2, in the third embodiment, the resistance IR4 and the resistance IR5 connected in series instead of the resistance IR3 whose other end is grounded are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting the Darlington circuit, respectively. You are connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage raising portion 4166 is an example composed of a resistance IR4 and a resistance IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

Further, the other end of the resistance IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and is also connected to one end of the resistance IR4, and the other end of the resistance IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. Further, one end of the resistance IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistance IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage. Further, the collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are set to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which magnetic detection is not performed, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). By connecting the base terminal of the transistor to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistance IR1 of the voltage raising section 4166, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5, and a pull-up resistor IR0 and a resistance IR1 of the voltage raising section 4166 are applied. A current flows to the ground via the resistance IR4 and the resistance IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is turned on.

When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which magnetic detection is not performed, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistance RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, and the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Is lifted. In FIG. 107, the connection point between the pull-up resistance IR0 and the resistance IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistance IR1. .. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistance IR1, a current flows through the resistance IR1 and further this current flows to the ground through the resistance IR4 and the resistance IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistance IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and most of the current is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the rear stage of the resistance IR1. It does not flow. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Also, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit are kept off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is transmitted. False positives can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns it on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 turns off.

Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is disconnected, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on to detect the detection circuit unit 4164. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. When there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and each of the voltage output units 4163 is provided as a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, "TD62083AP" (commercially available product, TOSHIBA). Can be used by connecting to (manufactured).

Although the sensor signal input unit 4162 deployed on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the connector member. It suffices as long as it transmits a sensor signal from the detection sensor, and various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, and a contact are used. It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

[Application example to which the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the panel relay board 4161 can be applied]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments described above has been described as preventing erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance generated when the contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable portion of the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

As described above, in a gaming machine, there is a situation in which detection sensors are installed at a plurality of locations in the gaming area (for example, they are arranged in the vicinity of a starting port, a winning opening, a large winning opening, an out opening, etc.). .. Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit (for example, the transistor of the panel relay board) that detects the detection signal from the detection sensor has various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. The length of is selected as appropriate. Regarding this point, various forms will be taken depending on the model of the gaming machine.

By the way, it is designed that the current flowing through the detection sensor changes due to the change in resistance value due to the secular change of the electric parts (for example, connector and detection sensor) and wiring pattern used, and the length of the wiring (harness). If it is different from the value, the circuit may not operate normally. Further, due to a specification change during development, the resistance value also changes, for example, when the type of detection sensor, the arrangement location, and the length of the wiring (harness) are changed in design. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. In addition, there may be places where noise can be easily picked up by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the location where the harness is routed, and the degree of influence of noise also changes.

If a current flows through the resistance value that changes due to such a cause, the current flowing through the detection sensor may differ from the original design value. That is, there is a risk of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor. Further, due to the influence of noise, the circuit may not operate normally and the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided with the voltage raising unit 4166 of the first to third embodiments is of the electrical components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) used, the secular change of the wiring pattern, and the wiring (harness). Even when the resistance value changes depending on the length, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In addition, in the conventional example of FIG. 104 and the embodiment of FIG. 105, the changing resistance value is shown by the two-dot chain line.

In the following, the case where noise is placed on the harness will be described as an example. Further, FIG. 110A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 110 (A) is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when there is noise.

As shown in FIG. 110A, in the conventional example, when there is no noise, the level is low (0.4V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 104 is turned on. It is possible to maintain a level lower than the voltage (0.8V). When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the level is high (12V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is present, even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform is the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on as shown in the hatched portion. ) Is exceeded, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

Further, not limited to noise, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), when overshoot occurs, false detection does not occur in the state where magnetism is detected, but when undershoot occurs, transistor ITR0 is turned on. And I can't keep it off. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the embodiment, the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of FIG. 105 is raised to 2V as an example of the voltage higher than 0.8V by the voltage raising unit 4166. Has been done. In the absence of noise, the detection operation is low level (0.4V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, which is lower than the raised voltage of 2V, so the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on. A lower level than (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12V) and is higher than the raised voltage of 2V. Therefore, the voltage raising unit 4166 is turned on and the transistor ITR0 is turned on (0. The level becomes higher than 8V), and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. However, since the voltage is lower than the raised voltage of 2V, the voltage raising portion 4166 is maintained in the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in the resistance value due to secular variation will be described as an example. Further, FIG. 111A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 111A is a signal waveform input in a normal case, and the right side is a signal waveform input when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular variation.

In the conventional example, when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in the resistance value due to aging, the input voltage is a transistor as shown in the hatched portion even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Since the voltage (0.8V) at which ITR0 is turned on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when the voltage rises due to the increase in the resistance value due to aging, the transistor ITR0 is turned on for the input voltage when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Even if the voltage (0.8V) is exceeded, the voltage is lower than the raised voltage of 2V, so that the voltage raising portion 4166 is maintained in the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

As described above, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to secular variation or noise. Further, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 includes a voltage raising unit 4166, noise may occur depending on the location of the detection sensor, the extension of the length of the harness, or the location of the harness. The sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise even if there is a place where it is easy to pick up. Therefore, the circuit unit (sensor signal input unit 4162 and detection circuit unit 4164) provided on the panel relay board 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it is possible to have a margin for design changes during development.

[Sensor signal input unit 4162'in another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Examples 1 to 3 described above includes a built-in transistor STR, and the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is not detected, while the built-in magnetometer STR is turned on when magnetism is detected. The one in which the transistor STR is turned off is used. In other words, in the sensor signal input unit 4162, the one in which the input is low when magnetism is not detected and the input is high when magnetism is detected is used. Instead, a magnetic sensor where the input is high when no magnetism is detected and low when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetometer that turns off when no magnetism is detected and turns on when magnetism is detected. It is also possible to use.

FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and turns on when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value.

The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Further, the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

As the voltage raising unit 4166, those of Examples 1 to 3 described above can be used. In this other embodiment, the voltage raising portion 4166 is an example configured by the Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit unit 4164'is composed of the transistor ITR0. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and + 12V is connected to the pull-up resistor NR applied to one end. There is. Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as that of the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 constitute the sensor signal winning unit 4162', and the transistor ITR0 constitutes the detection circuit unit 4164'.

[Detection operation in normal case]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the Langista ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164', and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistance IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[Detection operation in case of abnormality due to change in resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0.

At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, so that the Zener diode ZD0 There is no effect on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the above, and the transistor ITR0 is still turned on. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164'.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistance IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

At this time, even if the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS has noise, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. It is a predetermined voltage, and this predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[Example of arranging a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 on the panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which the same board (on the panel relay board 4161), the voltage output unit 4163, the voltage raising unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the voltage raising unit 4166, the voltage output unit 4163, and the detection circuit unit 4166 may be arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which the voltage raising unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay board 4161), and the voltage output unit 4163 is arranged on another substrate (for example, a sensor substrate). It is a figure which shows an example.

Further, in FIG. 115, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay board 4161), and the detection circuit unit 4164 is arranged on another substrate (for example, the main control board 1310). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit configuration. As described above, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be changed in various ways.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with aging and the wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is composed of the magnetic detection sensors 4024 of Examples 1 to 3 in FIG. 113.

The voltage output unit 4163 outputs the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, while the second voltage is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, a low level voltage (for example, 0.4V) is output, while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism. At the time, a high level voltage (for example, 12V) is output.

The detection circuit unit 4164 switches the output of the detection signal on and off in response to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. Since the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 113 uses the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to + 12V is connected to the front stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

Then, with respect to the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (for example, 12V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (for example, 0.4V in each embodiment). Even if a predetermined voltage lower than the predetermined voltage (as an example, a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111) is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided. A voltage raising section 4166 is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163, and a plurality of voltage raising units 4166 are arranged on the same substrate (on the panel relay board 4161). .. In this example, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 arranged after the voltage output unit 4163. Further, a plurality of voltage raising units 4166, ... Each of which is electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS are the bases of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

In FIG. 113, when any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off, whereby the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on. Is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneous detection for any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 provided with the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to consider the resistance value that changes as shown in the figure. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) for various types of gaming machines. Is possible. Therefore, it contributes to design changes during development and reduction of man-hours related to manufacturing.

FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS of another embodiment described with reference to FIG. 112 are provided, and the plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected to the voltage output unit 4163 in parallel. Further, in FIG. 116, the magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is configured. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4V), while the magnetic sensor. When the MGS does not detect magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high level voltage (for example, 12V).

On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit unit 4164'described in another embodiment is used, the difference is that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to + 12V, and + 12V is formed at one end of the main control input circuit 1310a. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 to which is applied.

In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164'is turned off, whereby the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on. Is.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control related to the game progress and the production will be summarized.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 has a display mode (design, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310. It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the effect operation unit 400 and the movable member) that contribute to the effect.

In particular, in the main control board 1310, a special symbol process process is performed each time the interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning processes are performed. In this first / second start opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning has been won, a process of increasing the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed. Will be done.

If the processing flag is 0 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variable start process is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of pending hits is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored. , Update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the result of the jackpot determination memorized above and the current gaming state, etc. After determining and setting the fluctuation time of the special symbol (variation time from the start of the variation display to the stop display, etc.) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variable process is executed. In this variable processing, the timer monitors the variable time determined and set in the variable pattern setting process, and based on the time-out, the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed. To stop. After that, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (loss). The process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second start opening winning processing is completed, the big hit game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game determined based on the type of the winning jackpot. Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, a process is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the winning jackpot type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. After updating the game status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect appearing on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for missed reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuation. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined by the reach determination based on the reach random number that the reach is to be performed. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. The loss variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is to be performed. In the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is not performed. , An effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. Further, the fluctuation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is the fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to it, it is possible to appear such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 makes the effect display device 1600 appear the variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the acquired game information, and also changes the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation. Controls such as changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the movable staging unit 3100 after the backside are executed.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the operation information for the operation button 410 and the operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window, and can execute the control related to the effect according to the information.

Here, the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window, omitting members that are not related to explaining the principle of acquiring operation information, and also for related members. These are schematically shown. Further, FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5 and the game area 5a, which are housed in the main body frame 4 and in which the game area 5a through which the game ball flows down, are visible. It has an opening window and is provided with a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Then, as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflective vertical wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the opening window and is formed so as to be able to reflect light at least on the inner surface thereof. Has been done. The opening window is a portion of the through-hole 111 that is on the front side (front side) of the glass plate 192.

Here, the reflective vertical wall portion 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflective vertical wall portion 33 is formed by the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338 formed by the lower plate unit base 323, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538 formed by the left unit base 531 and the right unit base 551. It is provided with a right-side reflective vertical wall portion 568, and these members are arranged in a substantially U-shape (a mode in which the reflective vertical wall portion is not installed on the upper side of the opening window) along the outer peripheral peripheral edge of the opening window. It is composed by doing. Then, in the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, the inner surfaces thereof are all substantially perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). It is provided so as to be a light reflecting surface.

According to such a configuration, among the reflective vertical wall portions 33 formed in a substantially U shape, none of the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is provided. The portion (upper side of the opening window) is "the light from the predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the specific virtual plane P described above and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, and eventually the reflective vertical wall portion. It functions as the first part that makes it possible to "reflect at 33", and "the light reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 travels on the specific virtual plane P described above and outside the outer periphery of the opening window." It will also function as the second part that makes it possible to "make it detected".

Furthermore, in the reflective vertical wall portion 33 according to this embodiment, one reflection is performed across the inner side surfaces of each of the three separate members (lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and right reflective vertical wall portion 568). A structure is adopted in which a member 36 (for example, a reflection seal) is attached, whereby the reflection performance of the reflection standing wall portion 33 including the joint of three separate members is suitably ensured.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the left side base 572a (see FIG. 23) provided on the upper left side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window. In the internal space 3435a of the above, the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the left outer peripheral outer light detecting unit 35a are provided. The left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having an extremely low (or 0) light transmittance.

Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P that intersects the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, respectively, and is provided with an opening window. It is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side so that light can travel toward the opening window side and that light from the opening window side can be taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an internal space 3435a is provided behind the left upper speaker 573, and is placed between the pachinko machine 1 and the opening window in order to suppress fraudulent activities from the back of the speaker 573. The transmission member 3436a designed to have extremely high transparency and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is arranged.

Further, the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is unitized with the left outer outer light detecting unit 35a, and the light is directed toward at least a wide range on the specific virtual plane P on the side where the opening window is provided. Is provided so that it can proceed.

Further, the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a is unitized with the left outer outer light emitting unit 34a, and light from the side where the opening window is provided can be detected at least on the specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be done.

According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a travels to the opening window side and is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, becomes the reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435a. Incorporated in. In this regard, in the internal space 3435a, since only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the left side side base 572a, the disturbance is suitably suppressed from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a. The light emitted and reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the right side base 572b (see FIG. 23) provided on the upper right side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window. In the internal space 3435b of the above, a right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b and a right outer outer light detecting unit 35b are provided. The right side base 572b itself is also provided by a member having an extremely low (or 0) light transmittance.

Here, the internal space 3435b is a space including the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P at a position where the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, respectively, like the internal space 3435a. Moreover, it is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided so that the light can travel toward the opening window side and the light from the opening window side is taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an internal space 3435b is provided behind the right upper speaker 573, and is placed between the pachinko machine 1 and the opening window in order to suppress fraudulent activity from the back of the speaker 573. A transmission member 3436b designed to have extremely high transmittance and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is arranged.

Further, the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is unitized with the right outer outer light detecting unit 35b, and the light is directed toward at least a wide range on the specific virtual plane P on the side where the opening window is provided. Is provided so that it can proceed.

Further, the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b is unitized with the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b, and light from the side where the opening window is provided can be detected at least on the specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be done.

According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b travels to the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, becomes the reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435b. Incorporated in. In this regard, in the internal space 3435b, since only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the right side base 572b, the disturbance is suitably suppressed, and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b The light emitted and reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a region surrounded by the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 from three directions by their height and width (that is, Areas marked with dots in FIG. 120) function as a special operation receiving unit 3333 capable of detecting an operation by the player, and the operation mode of the player with respect to the special operation receiving unit 3333 is determined. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect control according to the determination.

For example, when the player does not operate the special operation receiving unit 3333, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and the reflected vertical wall unit 33. It becomes reflected light from various angles (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P) and heads toward the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a. That is, the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a uses an optical lens or the like to transmit reflected light from such various angles to a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). Has a structure that can be detected separately, and outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 that no physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on the separate detection signal.

At this time, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 34b outside the outer periphery of the right side in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and various angles (at least one specific virtual plane P) on the reflective vertical wall portion 33. It becomes the reflected light from the angle) and heads toward the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b. That is, the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b also uses an optical lens or the like to transmit reflected light from such various angles to a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). Has a structure that can be detected separately, and outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 that no physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on the separate detection signal.

On the other hand, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is operated by the player in the manner shown in FIG. 119, a part of the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a in a wide angle range is the player's finger ( It is blocked by the physical object), and only the light other than the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range) becomes the reflected light in the reflective vertical wall portion 33 and heads toward the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a. That is, in this case, in the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a, the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is based on the information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the blocked direction (angle) and its magnitude (angle range) of the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, in which direction and how large the physics is when viewed from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a. Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

At this time, a part of the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range). Only the light other than the above becomes the reflected light in the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and heads toward the right outer peripheral light detecting portion 35b. That is, in this case, the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b has the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b based on the information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the blocked direction (angle) and its magnitude (angle range) of the light emitted from the right side outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b, in which direction and how large the physics is when viewed from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the peripheral control board 1510, the information from the left outer peripheral external light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer peripheral external light detection unit 35b are acquired and analyzed, respectively, and the special operation receiving unit 3333 is physically used. Information on whether or not an object exists (whether an operation was performed on the special operation receiving unit 3333), as well as its coordinate position (x, y) and size when a physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333. You will be able to obtain information related to this. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment periodically acquires such information, whereby the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the size of the physical object can be obtained. It is possible to determine an operation gesture such as a change, and the effect control according to the determination is executed.

It should be noted that these analysis processes do not necessarily have to be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, but may be performed by an external means for acquiring information from the left outer peripheral external light detection unit 35a and the right outer peripheral external light detection unit 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may acquire the analysis result from the external means, or the external means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share the analysis.

Further, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light emitted from the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b are set to blink, respectively, and the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b is turned off. A certain period and a period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b is in the light emitting state may be alternately generated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected on the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is detected on the right outer peripheral side. If the external light detection unit 35b detects and analyzes based on these information, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b will not interfere with each other. It is expected that more accurate detection information will be obtained by that amount.

Further, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light emitted from the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b are in a blinking mode, respectively, the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in a light emitting state, and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b is extinguished. The period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is in the light emitting state, and the period in which the left outer outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is also in the light emitting state. One cycle in which the period in which the light is turned off and the period in which the light is turned off may occur in sequence may be repeated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected on the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is detected on the right outer peripheral side. If the detection is performed on the external light detection unit 35b side, the offset portion when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a are in the off state is also detected and analyzed based on these information. The light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b no longer interfere with each other, and the detected offset portion can be excluded before making a judgment. It is expected that high detection information will be obtained.

Further, visible light may be used as the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b. However, in the pachinko machine 1, considering that the effect is produced by light in various places, it is possible to use invisible light such as infrared rays to disturb the disturbance from these effect lights and the effect light. It is more desirable to suitably suppress the adverse effect on the light.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the specific virtual plane P described above and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, and thus is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. The first part that makes it possible to "make it reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33" and "the light reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33 travels on the specific virtual plane P described above and outside the outer periphery of the opening window". It was decided to provide a second portion that enables "to be detected" as the same portion of the reflective vertical wall portion 33 formed in a substantially U shape. However, a plurality of regions where light is allowed to travel between the inside and outside of the outer periphery of the opening window are provided for the reflective vertical wall portion 33, and the outer peripheral light emitting portion and the outer peripheral light detecting portion are separately provided in those regions. And may be arranged respectively.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflective vertical wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an upper opening, but the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b of the upper part of the opening window are formed. A reflective standing wall portion 33 may also be formed on the peripheral edge between them. However, it is desirable to provide the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b so that the opening direction is a downward direction in order to prevent direct light from lighting or the like from being taken in and causing disturbance. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the left outer peripheral external light detecting unit 35a, and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b and the right outer peripheral external light detecting unit 35b are used. The operation in the operation receiving unit 3333 is made to be detectable, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, any structure may be used as long as it can detect the operation in the special operation receiving unit 3333. It may be detected by a light detection unit, and the coordinates (x, y) and size of the physical object may be determined from the detection result.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided outside the outer peripheral of the opening window is emitted from the opening window. External light detection unit 35 (left outer periphery) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window as reflected light from the reflective vertical wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the window and is formed so as to be able to reflect light at least on the inner side surface thereof. By detecting with the external light detection unit 35a and the right outer peripheral external light detection unit 35b), the vicinity of the opening window functions as the special operation receiving unit 3333, and the effect according to the operation mode of the player in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is produced. It is feasible.

Then, the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 is not arranged in an exposed state, but is arranged in the internal space 3435 of the side base 572 opened toward the side where the opening window is provided, thereby detecting the outer peripheral light. As described above, when the light is detected by the unit 35, the effect light that may be disturbed can be suitably excluded.

However, even with such a configuration, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 is reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 from the portion of the internal space 3435 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. Since the structure is such that not only the light but also the directing light can be taken in, there is a concern that such directing light may become a disturbance and adversely affect the detection accuracy by the outer peripheral external light detecting unit 35.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the frame-side light emitting portion L1 provided on the right unit base 551 of the main body frame 4 is first on the specific virtual plane P described above. It is arranged at a position where it cannot be irradiated with the traveling light. More specifically, the frame-side light emitting unit L1 is provided at a position on the front side of the special operation receiving unit 3333, and is in front of the base unit BL1 having extremely low (or 0) light transmittance. It is attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 has a wider shape than the frame-side light emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the rear side (the side where the opening window is provided). As a result, the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 is less likely to be taken into the internal space 3435.

Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decorative base portion 551a provided with a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side. It has a second right decorative base portion 551b provided with a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or zero transmittance) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L1. The first right side decoration base portion 551a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L1 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 can contribute as the directing light, while the second right side decoration. The base portion 551b is formed between the frame-side light emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

In particular, the second right decorative base portion 551b according to this embodiment is the first, while allowing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to proceed to the player side through the first right decorative base portion 551a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front surface side of the right side decorative base portion 551a, whereby the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 is suitably suppressed from advancing to the opening window. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 is provided with both the base portion BL1 and the second right decorative base portion 551b, but only one of these is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

On the other hand, the frame-side light emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base portion BL2 having extremely low (or 0) light transmittance. It is in a position where it can irradiate light traveling on the specific virtual plane P of. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflection member 36 is provided between the frame-side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 is provided in the opening window. It is difficult to travel to the side, which makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

However, since the height and width of the reflection member 36 are low, there is a concern that the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 is reflected by another member or the like and heads toward the opening window. Therefore, even in the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment, the first left decorative base portion 531a provided with a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side. It has a second left decorative base portion 531b provided with a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or zero transmittance) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left side decoration base portion 531a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 can contribute as the directing light, while the second left side decoration. The base portion 531b is formed between the frame-side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window so that the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

In particular, the second left decorative base portion 531b according to this embodiment is the first, while allowing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel to the player side through the first left decorative base portion 531a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front surface side of the left side decorative base portion 531a, whereby the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 is suitably suppressed from traveling to the opening window. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decorative base portion 531b, and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decorative base portion 551b. It is not always necessary to provide these members, and even in this case, it is difficult for the staging light to be taken into the internal space 3435 as described above. When the second left side decoration base portion 531b and the second right side decoration base part 551b are not provided, the reflection member 36 may be the first left side decoration base part 531a or the first right side decoration base part 551a. If it is attached to the inner surface (the surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left decorative base portion 531a and the first right decorative base portion 551a, instead of being attached to the outer surface (the surface that can be contacted from the outside), it is attached from the outside. It is expected that the direct physical contact of the material will prevent the reflection performance from deteriorating. In this case, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer outer light emitting portion 34b) passes through the first left side decorative base portion 531a and the first right side decorative base portion 551a, and then the above. It is reflected by the reflection member 36, passes through the first left decorative base portion 531a and the first right decorative base portion 551a again, and then is taken into the internal space 3435.

Further, when the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decorative base portion 531b and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decorative base portion 551b, the reflection member 36 is omitted and the second is provided. The left side decorative base portion 531b and the second right side decorative base portion 551b themselves may also function as a reflective member using a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, the directing light from the frame-side light emitting portions L1 and L2 becomes disturbed only by providing the reflection member (second left side decorative base portion 531b, second right decorative base portion 551b). The detection accuracy by the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 can be suitably ensured by the reflected light from the reflection member (second left side decorative base portion 531b, second right side decorative base portion 551b) while appropriately suppressing the light. Become.

In the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, it is possible to obtain information such as the coordinates and size of the physical object located in the vicinity of the opening window by using the acquisition principle of the operation information in the vicinity of the opening window. This makes it possible to use the substantially entire area of the opening window (approximately the entire area that can be seen from the front of the glass plate 192) as the special operation receiving unit 3333, resulting in more dynamic and highly flexible operability. It is possible to realize a directing property suitable for this.

Hereinafter, the operability and the staging that can be realized by using such a special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described. 121 to 127 are schematic views for explaining the operability and the staging that can be realized by using the special operation receiving unit 3333, and are related in explaining the operability and the staging. In addition to omitting the parts that are not available, these are also schematically shown for the related parts.

FIG. 121 shows a special operation receiving unit 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and various staging members A to E arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the front view. Is schematically shown. The arrows in the figure simply indicate the movable range of various movable bodies among the staging members A to E.

As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this explanatory example is viewed from the front, the back side of the glass plate 192 may contribute to the effect according to the result of the jackpot determination. As members, movable bodies A1, A2, B, C, a display unit D, and a board surface light emitting unit E provided so as to be able to emit light in a portion where a game ball can flow down or a portion other than that can be arranged. .. The arrows in FIG. 121 schematically show the movable range of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C.

It should be noted that these members are shown as an example for explaining the technical aspects of the present application, and do not necessarily correspond to the examples described above with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. However, basically, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are "the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, and the back. The lower front movable effect unit 3500 and other movable members correspond to the display unit D, the display unit D corresponds to the effect display device 1600, and the board light emitting unit E corresponds to various decorations provided in the game board 5. It corresponds to "various LEDs mounted on a board". The board surface light emitting unit E does not necessarily have to be provided on the game board 5, and may be, for example, a member (light guide plate or the like) provided on the front side of the game board 5.

Here, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, the display unit D in which the effect display according to the result of the big hit determination is performed is positioned as the target of the operation effect, and the display unit D of the special operation receiving unit 3333 is viewed from the front. When the player performs an operation on the overlapping coordinate areas and this is detected as a physical object, it is possible to control so that the effect change corresponding to the operation appears on the display unit D.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect control in the case where the display unit D causes the effect change by the operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described.

[First operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 (a), when the first effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, the first coordinate area Z1 facing the first display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted and displayed. The specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of the part D. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking)) is performed on any part of the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the first coordinate region Z1. It suffices to have a finger or the like in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it))), and when this is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. The effect reception for the first coordinate region Z1 is terminated, and the effect change is caused in the display unit D, and it is possible to execute control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination depending on the type of the effect change.

At this time, in order to generate an effect change based on the operation being performed on any part of the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the first coordinate region Z1, the effect change is at least displayed on the display unit D. It is desirable to generate it in the first display area facing the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player makes it difficult to visually recognize the first display area with his / her finger or the like, the effect changes at least in the first display area, so that the player can change the effect. In the first display area until the first display area is visually recognized (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) from an oblique direction (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) instead of shifting one's finger or looking straight ahead. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize the changes in the production that are appearing. Alternatively, the player may proceed with the game without confirming the change in the effect in the first display area while keeping his / her finger on the first coordinate area Z1, or is located in front of the pachinko machine 1. It will be possible to select a way of enjoying such as having a third party who does not have the effect confirm the change in the effect in the first display area, and it is expected that the game will be improved.

If the operation by the player is not detected during the period from the appearance of the specific operation instruction image S1 to the elapse of a predetermined period (the arrival of a specific timing), the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. At the same time, the reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated. At this time, the effect change that appears when there is an effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may be caused, or the effect change that appears when there is an effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may not occur. The effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may be terminated.

[Second operation control mode for display unit D]
Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 (b), when the second effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, "the second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display unit D" and "the third display of the display unit D". Both the "third coordinate area Z3 facing the area" are set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted, and the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display unit D to display the third display area. The third operation instruction image S3 is displayed in. Then, in the predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 of the special operation receiving unit 3333 is displayed. An operation is performed on somewhere (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a finger or the like is required in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it)), and this is a physical object. When it is detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, the production reception of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated, and the display unit D is described. In, a specific effect (an effect corresponding to the selected side (the side of the coordinate area where the physical object is detected)) is generated, and it is possible to execute a control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect. ..

It should be noted that no operation by the player was detected from the appearance of both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 until a predetermined period elapses (a specific timing arrives). In that case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated. ing. At this time, the specific effect that appears when the effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 may be generated, or the specific effect may not be generated. However, in the case of causing a specific effect that appears when the effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, the operation for the second operation instruction image S2 is accepted prior to the execution of the specific effect. It is desirable to display a display (effect, etc.) generated when the image is generated, or a display (effect, etc.) generated when an operation on the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the effect on the side where the effect is generated is forcibly executed while neither the second coordinate area Z2 nor the third coordinate area Z3 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment without knowing what kind of production is being executed.

Further, in the first operation control mode and the second operation control mode for the display unit D, not only the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 is allowed, but also the same. Within the period, the same effect reception may be allowed for other operation means such as the operation button 410.

For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first effect condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 can receive the effect, and the specific operation instruction image S1 Is displayed, even when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 (detection of the button switch) is performed instead of the operation on the first coordinate area Z1 (detection of the physical object), the above-mentioned specific The operation instruction image S1 is hidden, the effect reception of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated, and the effect change is caused in the display unit D. Enables control that may suggest a degree.

Even when there is an operation (detection of a physical object) on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden, the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 are terminated, and the above-mentioned effect reception is terminated. The display unit D causes an effect change, and it is possible to execute a control in which the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination can be suggested depending on the type of the generated effect change.

Further, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 can all receive the effect. do. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the operation is not an operation (detection of a physical object) for any of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3. When the pressing operation on the button 410 (detection of the button switch) is performed, the second selection image indicating that the specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and the specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. A switching display is performed between the image and the third-selected image indicating that the image is in the present state. Then, when a predetermined period after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed while either the second selection image or the third selection image is displayed, the selection image is displayed. A display (effect, etc.) that can be grasped that the operation for the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side where is appearing is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are selected. Both the images (second selection image and third selection image) are hidden, and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 is terminated. After that, the display unit D generates a specific effect (effect on the selected side), and the generated specific effect enables control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination.

It should be noted that, within the predetermined period, it is possible to accept an operation for another operation means (an operation for accepting one of the decisions), and when there is an operation for the other operation means, the selected image appears. A display (effect) that can be grasped that the operation for the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side is accepted is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection) are generated. Both the image and the third selection image) may be hidden so that the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and yet another operation means may be terminated. After that, the display unit D generates a specific effect (effect on the selected side), and the generated specific effect enables control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination.

Further, as long as it is within the above-mentioned predetermined period until the specific effect appears, the second coordinate region Z2 and the third coordinate are used regardless of whether the second selection image or the third selection image appears. Area Z3 can be used for staging. When an operation on any of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is detected, it does not matter whether the second selection image or the third selection image is in the state of appearing. The display (effect, etc.) on the side where the reception was made appears, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection image, third selection image) are all hidden. Then, the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and yet another operation means is terminated. At this time, the operation is detected prior to hiding the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected image (second selection image, third selection image). The switching display may be performed so that the selected image (second selected image, third selected image) on the other side appears. After that, the display unit D generates a specific effect (effect on the selected side), and the generated specific effect enables control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination.

According to such a configuration, not only the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 is allowed, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410. The same production reception is possible. In this respect, in the second operation control mode, when the operation for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is performed while enabling the same effect reception, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate Only one operation (detection of a physical object) is accepted for the area Z3, and it is possible to generate an effect on the side according to the preference of the player. That is, when another operation means is used, "the side according to the preference of the player until a predetermined period elapses after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed". Is required to "cannot generate the effect of" or "perform at least two or more operations using a plurality of operating means", whereas when a specific operation receiving unit 3333 is used, it is more than this. Since it is possible to make the display mode appear according to the player's preference with only a small number of operations (in this production example, once), it is possible to realize more complicated production with simple operability. It will be expected.

In addition, while providing such efficient operability, when operability capable of achieving a desired operation by performing at least two or more operations using a plurality of operating means is also provided at the same time. The player becomes able to worry about which operation should be selected as the desired operation while performing the operation in the process stage leading to the desired operation. That is, in this case, it becomes easier to imagine the production situation after selection while performing the operation in the process stage up to the desired operation, and it is difficult to decide which operation should be performed with a margin within a predetermined period. You will be able to. In this way, since the player can selectively use the operation means having a different required number of operations depending on whether he / she is in a state where he / she can make a prompt decision or is in a state where he / she is worried, the hobby of the game can be maintained. It will be like.

As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, by setting the display unit D as the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, it is possible to realize an unprecedented interesting effect. However, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the special operation receiving unit 3333 has a larger operation receiving range when viewed from the front than the display unit D (the coordinate range to be detected is the glass plate 192. It is provided to have (almost the entire area), and by realizing the production using such a special relationship, it is possible to realize more dynamic and highly flexible operability and production suitable for this. ..

[Third operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 123 (a), when the third effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, the fourth coordinate area Z4 facing the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted and displayed. A specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the unit D, and a specific image urging that the specific operation target image S4 should be operated to move to the movable body B in another display area of the display unit D is displayed. indicate.

Then, in a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation is performed on any part of the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the fourth coordinate region Z4 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192). Strictly speaking, it suffices if there is a finger or the like in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it)), and when this is detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. 123 (b). , The coordinate area that can accept the effect is not the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display unit D, but a large fifth coordinate area including at least the coordinate area facing the movable body B provided outside the display unit D. Change the setting to Z5. The fifth coordinate area Z5 of this explanatory example faces the movable body B provided outside the display unit D from the coordinate area facing the fourth display area (it does not necessarily have to coincide with the fourth coordinate area Z). It includes up to the coordinate area to be used, and is set so as to straddle the movable body B, the display unit D, and the board light emitting unit E.

At this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the operation on somewhere in the fourth coordinate region Z4 of the special operation receiving unit 3333. It may be made to move or displayed in a vibration mode) so that it can be recognized that the specific operation target image S4 is in a movable state by the operation by the player.

That is, in this third operation control mode, the physical object is held in the special operation receiving unit 3333 with a physical object such as a finger, and the physical object is placed at a coordinate position facing the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5. When it is moved to, the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display unit D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display unit D, as if the effect on the movable body B is started. Realizes the production.

Therefore, when the physical object such as a finger is fastened in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the physical object is moved in the fifth coordinate region Z5, the peripheral control board 1510 detects the movement of the physical object and the movement of the physical object is detected. It is possible to execute control to move the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D so as to follow the movement of the detected physical object. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 is in the special operation receiving unit 3333 of the physical object from the time when the physical object is in the middle of moving to the coordinate position facing the movable body B. It moves in the display unit D so as to follow the movement in the front view.

More specifically, with the physical object such as a finger fastened in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the physical object is moved from the position shown in FIG. 123 (b) in the fifth coordinate region Z5 to FIG. 124 (a). When the peripheral control board 1510 is moved to the position shown in the above, the specific operation target image S4 is moved in the display unit D so as to follow the movement of such a physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is at the position shown in FIG. 124 (a) and an attempt is made to display the specific operation target image S4 in the display area facing the position, the specific operation target image S4 A part of the display unit D protrudes from the display unit D, and the entire display unit cannot be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed only in the portion that can be displayed in the display unit D, and the portion protruding from the display unit D is present. Is controlled to emit light from the corresponding portion of the board surface light emitting unit E so that the above can be recognized. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display unit D, the portion of the specific operation target image S4 displayed on the display unit D is reduced, and the board surface light emitting unit E It is controlled to increase the number of corresponding parts as the light emitting region of.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to express a state in which the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D is about to jump out of the display unit D by the operation by the player, and the display unit D can be expressed. More dynamic and more flexible operability that does not fit into this single unit and suitable directing performance will be realized.

In particular, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), a physical object such as a player's finger is located at a coordinate position facing the display unit D in the fifth coordinate region Z5. Despite being placed, the effect control is performed not only on the display unit D but also on a member (board surface light emitting unit E) different from the display unit D. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate region facing the plurality of members of the special operation receiving unit 3333, it becomes easy to recognize that the effect corresponding to the movement appears. It becomes possible to suitably realize the effectability suitable for the dynamic operability.

When a physical object such as a player's finger is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. 124 (a) in the fifth coordinate region Z5, the physical object is not the display unit D but the game board 5. (Here, it is in a state of being placed at a coordinate position facing the board surface light emitting unit E). However, also in this case as well, instead of suddenly hiding all of the specific operation target image S4 and causing only the board surface light emitting unit E to emit light, a specific operation is performed as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D. It is controlled so that the portion of the target image S4 displayed on the display unit D is reduced and the portion corresponding to the light emitting region of the board surface light emitting unit E is increased. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated from the coordinate position facing the display unit D by a specific distance, the effect (here, light emission) is produced only on the board surface light emitting unit E of the display unit D and the board surface light emitting unit E. This makes it possible to express an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 has moved out of the display unit D.

Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate region Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 124 (b), the peripheral control board 1510 faces the position facing the physical object. Control is performed so that both the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B in the above light are emitted. That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the same control as the above-mentioned effect control performed between the display unit D and the board surface light emitting unit E is performed between the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B. I try to do it. More specifically, when the physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board surface light emitting unit E) approaches the coordinate area facing the movable body B to a predetermined distance, the physical object Even though it is in the coordinate region facing the board surface light emitting unit E, the effect control is performed not only on the board surface light emitting unit E but also on a member (movable body B) different from the board surface light emitting unit E. I have to. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved within the coordinate region facing both the board surface light emitting portion E and the movable body B of the special operation receiving portion 3333, the effect corresponding to the movement (here, the display is displayed). It becomes easy to recognize that the specific operation target image S4) that has moved to the outside of the part D appears (moves), and thereby it becomes possible to suitably realize the staging property suitable for the dynamic operability. ..

Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate region Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 125, the peripheral control board 1510 moves the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B. It is determined that the operation as if the movement was properly performed, and it is assumed that the condition in the third operation control mode is satisfied, and the effect reception for the fifth coordinate area Z5 is terminated. Further, a display recognizable that the condition (moving the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B) in the third operation control mode is satisfied appears on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. The control to start the production is executed. The effect using the movable body B can be realized, for example, as an effect of causing the movable body B to emit light in a predetermined mode, an effect of operating the movable body B in a predetermined mode, and the like, and a big hit determination is made through such an effect. To be able to suggest the degree of expectation for the result of.

In the third operation control mode, when the physical object is moving in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the physical object is out of the fifth coordinate region Z5 (a finger is moved from the special operation receiving unit 3333). (Including the case of separation), it is desirable to start over from the state shown in FIG. 123 (a). That is, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 basically periodically acquires the position information of the physical object regardless of the execution status of the effect, whereby the physical object moves within the fifth coordinate region Z5. Information indicating that the object has moved, information indicating that the object has moved outside the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like can be obtained.

Further, the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow only the movement of the specific direction component of the physical object. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

Further, the fifth coordinate area Z5 may be the entire coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. In addition, if there is no part that can be expressed as an effect suggesting that the specific operation target image S4 exists on the side opposite to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, it is close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed. An effect expression suggesting that a specific operation target image S4 exists at the site may be performed.

Further, in this explanatory example, a board surface light emitting unit E capable of producing an effect expression (light emission) is placed between the display unit D and the movable body B, but the board surface light emitting unit E is not always required. good. That is, in this case, the player from the time when the specific operation target image S4 is no longer displayed on the display unit D until the physical object is moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B (or the coordinate position in the vicinity). Will continue the operation while holding the moving image of the specific operation target image S4 in the head.

Further, the display unit D displays a map capable of grasping the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B, and indicates in the map at which position the specific operation target image S4 exists according to the movement of the physical object. It is also possible to perform the effect display suggested by.

In the drawings of FIGS. 122 to 125, the coordinate areas Z1 to Z5 are shown, but they are not actually visible to the player.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various effect members shown in FIG. 121, the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in which the effect operation is performed according to the result of the jackpot determination are also positioned as the target of the operation effect, and are special. When the player operates the coordinate area of the operation receiving unit 3333 that overlaps with the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in front view and this is detected as a physical object, the effect operation corresponding to the operation appears. It is controllable. Therefore, the player can operate in an appropriate manner (speed, movement amount) while selecting any one of the plurality of movable bodies.

[Fourth operation control mode for the movable body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 126 (a), when the fourth effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, the sixth coordinate area Z6 facing a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted. At this time, in order for the player to be able to recognize that the sixth coordinate region Z6 is capable of accepting the effect in order to operate the movable body C, a specific display image may appear on the display unit D or the movable body may be displayed. It is desirable to make C emit light (for example, emit light in a blinking mode) or vibrate in the first aspect.

Then, in a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate region Z6 is set so that the effect can be accepted, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, special)) is performed on somewhere in the sixth coordinate region Z6. It suffices to have a finger or the like in the operation receiving unit 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it)), and when this is detected as a physical object, it is possible to accept the effect as shown in FIG. 126 (b). The coordinate area is changed from the sixth coordinate area Z6 to a large seventh coordinate area Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C. Here, the 7th coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the 6th coordinate area Z6.

That is, in this fourth operation control mode, the physical object such as a finger is fastened in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and the physical object is placed at the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate region Z7. When the movable body C is moved to the coordinate position facing the portion, the movable body C can be moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object.

Therefore, when the state shown in FIG. 126 (b) is reached, a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate region Z7, and the movable body C is in a state of being moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to control so that the object can be recognized. In the example shown in FIG. 126 (b), the movable body C is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, light emission in the constant mode).

However, from the player's side, it is not known what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, and the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate region Z6. Even if an attempt is made to move the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C, there is a concern that this cannot be done properly. As a result, when a physical object such as a player's finger deviates from the 7th coordinate area Z7 even though he / she intends to operate along the movable range CT of the movable body C (special operation receiving unit). (Including the case where the finger is released from 3333), the player has to start over from the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) against the intention of the player, which may reduce the interest in the game.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the seventh coordinate region Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is set as the control target. The movable range C of the movable body C is set in a range in which the sixth coordinate region Z6 is expanded by at least the first distance over all directions in the front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side where the CT extends. It is supposed to be.

According to such a configuration, even if the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, the direction deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C. When the finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move even though the effect reception is done (despite the fact that the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) cannot be redone). Since the phenomenon occurs, it becomes possible to estimate the movable range CT of the movable body C and perform the operation by confirming such a phenomenon.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the movable range CT set for the movable body C, the movable body C is placed at a plurality of predetermined positions (first position shown in FIG. 126 (b)). Position), the second position shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third position shown in FIG. 127 (a), and the fourth position (terminal position) shown in FIG. 127 (b)). Makes it possible to execute control. Then, on this, the seventh coordinate region Z7 is the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position), and the second drive coordinate region including the portion facing the second position. It can be classified into Z7-2, a third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including a part facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 including a part facing the fourth position, and driving them. By determining to which of the coordinate regions Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate region Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the drive coordinate region corresponding to the determination. Control is feasible.

Here, the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position) in the movable range CT is the control target as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b). The movable range CT of the movable body C is set as a range extended by at least the first distance from the sixth coordinate region Z6 in the left, right, and downward directions excluding the upper side where the CT extends.

According to such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the setting is changed. Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (movement less than the first distance), the physical object is within a single first driving coordinate region Z7-1. The movable body C does not move and stays in the first position (original position) corresponding to the first driving coordinate region Z7-1 in which the physical object is detected. Become. That is, in this case, the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted for the production (despite the fact that the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) cannot be redone). Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, it becomes possible to estimate the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends and perform the operation.

On the other hand, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the 6th coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the 7th coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the physical object can be moved. When the movable range CT of the body C is moved in the extending direction (movement less than the first distance), the physical object only moves a second distance shorter than the first distance, and is shown in FIG. 126 (b). The first drive coordinate region Z7-1 shown in FIG. 126 (c) reaches the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126 (c). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate region Z7-2, the movable body C is in the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 (FIG. 126 (FIG. 126). It will move from b)) to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate region Z7-2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 including the portion facing the second position in the movable range CT also has the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. The left and right directions orthogonal to the above have a range that extends by the same distance as the first drive coordinate region Z7-1. On the other hand, the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the left-right direction.

According to such a configuration, when the physical object detected in the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 is moved in a direction different from any of the vertical directions in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is moved. , It becomes easier to be detected only in a single second drive coordinate area Z7-2, and the movable body C corresponds to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 in which the physical object is detected without moving. Will continue to stay in the second position. That is, in this case, the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted for the production (despite the fact that the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) cannot be redone). Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, it becomes possible to estimate the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends and perform the operation.

Moreover, by setting the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 to be expanded to the left and right ranges deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C in this way, the sixth coordinate region Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)). After the physical object such as a finger is detected in the above, the criteria judged to be appropriate as an operation when the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C will be relaxed. This makes it possible to alleviate the difficulty of moving a physical object while guessing what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. You will be able to maintain your interest.

When the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is located at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. The light may be emitted in a mode different from the light emission mode (for example, blue) (for example, green). At this time, when a physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C finishes moving to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (movable). If the light emission mode is changed (for example, from blue to green) when the body C starts to move toward the second drive coordinate region Z7-2, the operation by the player is properly received. It becomes possible to recognize from an early stage, and it becomes possible to suppress an irritated feeling due to a delay in the behavior of a movable body that is inevitably generated for a quick operation by a player's finger or the like.

Further, if the physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body cannot be moved so as to follow the physical object, but in this case, the moving speed is predetermined. Control is performed to move to the latest detection position.

Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126 (c)) moves upward by the operation of a finger or the like by the player, and the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (FIG. 127)). When detected in a)), the movable body C corresponds to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate region Z7-2. It will move to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position in the movable range CT is in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. The left and right directions orthogonal to the above have a range extending over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate region Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction in the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the left-right direction.

That is, as described above, when the operation target is a movable object that has no means of instructing the operation direction unlike the display means, this can be done without knowing what kind of movable range is provided. You have to move the physics object while guessing. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the effect is received up to the left and right ranges deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C. It was also mentioned above that by expanding the range, the criteria judged to be appropriate as an operation when moving the movable body C along the movable range CT are relaxed.

However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate region Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and then the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate region Z6 The deviation from the movable range CT tends to increase as the distance from the moving range increases. Therefore, in the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)), the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate region Z7-1 and the second are in the left and right directions orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. By having a range that extends over a longer distance than the drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movement distance of the physical object from the 6th coordinate area Z6 becomes large, and the deviation from the movable range CT gradually increases. However, this can be accepted as an appropriate production operation. This makes it possible to alleviate the difficulty of moving a physical object over a long distance while guessing what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. As a result, it will be possible to maintain the taste of games. For example, even when the physical object moves upward in a coordinate range that does not face the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

When the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3, the light emitting mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position It may be made to emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, red) different from the light emitting mode (for example, green) when it is located in. Further, when a physical object is detected in the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 before the movable body C finishes moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 (movable body C). The light emission mode may be changed (for example, from blue to green) when the object starts to move toward the third drive coordinate region Z7-3.

Then, for the same reason, the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is further left and right orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, more than the third drive coordinate region Z7-3. It has a range that extends over a long distance. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 moves upward by the operation of a finger or the like by the player, and the fourth drive coordinate region Z7- When detected in 4, the movable body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4. It is not always moved to the position (FIG. 127 (b)). Not only that, it is movable when the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by an operation such as a finger by the player. The body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) corresponding to the first drive coordinate region Z7-1. It can be moved.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 based on the result of the jackpot determination. It has been decided, and in the determined decision, such an effect using the movable body C is provided to the player. Then, when the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate region Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 by an operation such as a finger by the player, the movable body C is moved to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (FIG. 127). The degree of expectation (specific results are obtained) depending on whether the effect of moving to b)) appears or the effect of returning to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) without moving to the fourth position appears. It may be a definite indication).

In the peripheral control board 1510, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by an operation such as a finger by the player. In that case, assuming that the conditions in the fourth operation control mode are satisfied, the effect reception for the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. Then, when it is determined that the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the movable body C is not set in the area where the effect can be accepted. Will be controlled to move to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C cannot be moved to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), the movable body is not set in the area where the effect can be accepted. Control is performed to move C to the first position.

However, at this time, even if it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, the movable body C moves once downward (the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127). (B)) Even if it is determined that the movable body C cannot move to the fourth position, the movable body C once moves upward once. It is desirable to show the moving movement (the effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b))) in order to improve the entertainment of the game.

Then, when the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4, the light emitting mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position It is made to emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, rainbow color) different from the light emitting mode (for example, green) when it is located in the position and the light emitting mode (for example, red) when it is located in the third position. However, unlike the case of the first to third positions, the timing may be later than when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 (movable body C). It is desirable to make it appear after the timing when it becomes possible to deterministically grasp the movement from the movement of to the fourth position. Similarly, when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate region Z7-1, it is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4. It is desirable to end the light emission after a later timing (a timing at which it is possible to deterministically grasp that the movable body C does not move to the fourth position).

The peripheral control board 1510 controls to move the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time elapses after moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4. By doing so, the fourth operation control mode is terminated.

By the way, in this fourth operation control mode, the movable body is between the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) and the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of the jackpot. It is possible to move C freely. For example, when the movable body C is moved to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) and then the physical object is operated to return to the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 side, the peripheral control board 1510 is driven first. Based on the fact that the physical object is detected again in the coordinate area Z7-1, the movable body C is controlled to move from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) to the first position (FIG. 126 (b)). .. Further, when the movable body C is moved to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) and then the physical object is operated to return to the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 side, the peripheral control board 1510 is driven second. Based on the fact that the physical object is detected again in the coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is controlled to move from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)). It will be.

According to such a configuration, the player prefers a driving mode in which the movable body C is moved up and down in small steps as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)). Since it will be possible to make it appear according to the player's taste, or to perform it only for the time that suits the player's taste, it will be possible to control the "pause" until the final result appears in the production, and the game interest will be improved. Will be expected. After the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4, the effect reception for the fourth operation control mode is terminated, so that the movable body C cannot be freely manipulated.

It should be noted that the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is set between the sixth coordinate region Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) being set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted and the predetermined period elapses (a specific timing arrives). If the physical object is not properly detected in, the effect reception for the 6th coordinate area Z6 or the 7th coordinate area Z7 is terminated. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C that appears when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 may be caused, or the movable body C may be generated without causing such behavior. , It may be controlled to be positioned at a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126 (b)).

Further, in the fourth operation control mode according to this explanatory example, regardless of the degree of expectation of a big hit, the movable range CT is from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)). It was possible to move the movable body C freely during the period, but instead, within the range of the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)) of the movable range CT. The higher the position, the higher the expectation of the suggested jackpot. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of effect patterns having different jackpot expectations based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the positions (first position to fourth position) determined by the selected effect pattern. ) Will be controlled so that the movable body C can be operated. At this time, when the physical object moves from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, or moves from the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. Occasionally, an effect (behavior of going back and forth) as to whether or not the movable body C moves to the next position may appear.

Further, in the first to third operation control modes for the display unit D, when the images S1 to S4 can be received for staging, the coordinate regions Z1 to 4 larger than those of the images S1 to S4 are generated in the front view. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, it is decided to generate the sixth coordinate region Z6 smaller than the movable body C in the front view when the movable body C can receive the effect. That is, since a movable body often includes a part having a relatively large amount of movement and a part having a relatively small amount of movement, for example, a part having a relatively small amount of movement is produced. It is desirable to exclude it from the reception target in order to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest. On the other hand, in the display unit, if the coordinate area is set according to the size of the image that can be used for staging, it is required to make the image large in order to maintain the operability appropriately. Since there is a concern that the balance with the displayed image may become unbalanced, it is desirable to set the size of the image that can be used for staging separately from the setting range of the coordinate area.

However, when the movement of the physical object is detected in the specific coordinate area (here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) and the control is performed to make the effect corresponding to the movement appear. For example, the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 moves and moves to the fourth drive coordinate area without passing through the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 and the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the Z7-4 is suddenly detected. Such a situation may occur, for example, when the right hand is targeted for detection in the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 and then the left hand is targeted for detection in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 without moving the right hand. Therefore, it should be determined that the physical object is not moving, and the effect corresponding to the movement (movement of the movable body C, etc.) should not be executed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, an interrupt timer process is generated every 4 ms while the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms) is being executed, and this interrupt is performed. In the timer process, the information from the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer outer light detection unit 35b are acquired and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position where the physical object is detected. Then, in the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady processing, a specific coordinate area is analyzed by analyzing a plurality of (8, 9) coordinate information stored every 4 ms since the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. (For example, it is determined whether or not the physical object is moving properly in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4), and the control data for the actuator is determined according to the result of the determination. To set. Then, in the interruption process every 1 ms, the control for driving the movable body C is performed based on the control data set in this way, so that the movable body C can move the physical object up to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4. From the time when the movement is in the middle of the movement, the physical object moves so as to follow the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate region Z6 in the front view. The coordinate information is stored in chronological order in which the coordinate positions are acquired.

For example, even if a physical object is detected in the 4th drive coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the 1st drive coordinate area Z7-1, the physical object is detected in the 4th drive coordinate area Z7-4. Coordinate information indicating that the physical object was detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 and the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 at the timing before the physical object was detected in If there is no coordinate information indicating that the physical object has been detected, it is determined that the physical object has not moved properly, and the movable body C is controlled not to operate.

That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. The case where the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, and in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. It is a case where they are detected in chronological order in 4, for example, if there is no detection in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, only up to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C is designed not to move. As a result, it becomes possible to make an appropriate effect appear only when an appropriate operation is performed on the special operation receiving unit 3333.

Further, in the fourth operation control mode, control is performed to move the movable body C according to whether a physical object is detected in each coordinate region Z7-1 to Z7-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , To control the movement of the movable body C according to whether or not the movement of the physical object having the vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is detected within the movable range CT of the movable body C. You may do it. That is, in this case, the vector component of the physical object is analyzed based on the coordinate positions stored in the acquired time series order.

Regarding the setting control of the coordinate area used in the fourth operation control mode, the movement detection of the physical object, and the effect control of the movable body C, for example, in the third operation control mode described above, the inside of the display unit. It may be applied to the image S4 of.

Further, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (effect reception) regarding the movement of the physical object after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 has not been completed and is still continued. During this period, it was decided to control the movement of the effect target (display image or movable body) in a manner corresponding to at least the movement direction and the movement amount of the already detected physical object. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to create a staging effect as if he / she creates the staging himself / herself, so that the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

By the way, in the first operation control mode, the second operation control mode, the third operation control mode, and the fourth operation control mode, the effect reception for the special operation receiving unit 3333 is the coordinates set at that time. Limited to the area. However, the detection of the physical object itself in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, the position and movement of the physical object are analyzed based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series in the peripheral control unit steady processing (every 33.3 ms). In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, any of a plurality of analysis processes having different analysis contents can be executed, and the special operation receiving unit 3333 can execute any of the plurality of analysis processes. Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the unit 3333, different control can be performed according to the analysis result.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a control example of the detection information analysis process of the physical object executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 first determines whether or not it is in the operation effect acceptance period that occurs based on the satisfaction of the specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination (step S3301). As a result, when the operation effect reception period is in effect, as described above, the physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect reception is possible based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. In addition to analyzing whether or not the physical object is present, if a physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be accepted, the movement mode and size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the analysis results for such effects, control (resetting and termination) regarding the coordinate area that can accept the effects, control that causes changes in the effects such as display images and movable bodies, and the current situation. Control is performed to maintain the effect state of (step S3303). Even if a physical object is not detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be accepted as a result of the processing of step S3302, the control (resetting and resetting) regarding the coordinate area where the effect can be accepted can be performed. (End), control to return the effect target such as the display image or the movable body to the original position (for example, control to move the movable body C to the first position shown in FIG. 126 (a)) may be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S3301, when it is determined that the coordinate area in which the effect reception is possible is not set for the special operation receiving unit 3333, it is determined that the operation effect reception period is not set. The analysis is performed with the content different from that (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving unit 3333 according to this embodiment is provided so as to face the entire game board 5. Therefore, in order to improperly facilitate the winning of the game ball, the act of placing a magnet at the coordinate position facing the various winning openings of the special operation receiving unit 3333, the wire from the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192, etc. It can be assumed that an act such as invading and destroying a speaker that emits an alarm sound at the time of fraud is performed.

Therefore, in the process of step S3312, it is analyzed whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. I am doing it. For example, it is determined whether or not a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and if a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the movement mode and size of the physical object are determined. Analyze whether it matches the movement mode and size that can appear when cheating is being performed. Then, when it is determined that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity as a result of such analysis for fraud countermeasures, an external output indicating that fraudulent activity is being performed is executed, or an alarm sound or alarm light is emitted. It is controlled so that fraud measures such as issuance are taken (step S3313), and if it is not determined that there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are being carried out, it is controlled so that such fraud measures are not taken (step S3313). ).

As an analysis procedure (step S3312) for such fraud countermeasures, for example, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as an analysis reference position (step S3312). Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range that includes the analysis reference position and extends by a predetermined distance from the analysis reference position is set, and the detected physical object is within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) And monitor whether it stays (the physical object hardly moves). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed within the analysis coordinate range. It is possible to adopt a method of determining that there is. At this time, when the size of the physical object is large enough to prevent fraudulent activity (such as having an extremely thin shape), the fraudulent activity is performed even when such a movement mode is detected. It may not be determined that there is a possibility. This makes it possible to prevent erroneous notification when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192.

According to such a configuration, during the operation production acceptance period, even if any act is performed, it is not judged as a fraudulent act, and the analysis is performed only as the production act, and the result of the analysis is performed. While the effect control is performed according to the above, if it is not during the operation effect reception period, all actions are determined as the analysis target of the fraudulent activity, and the control for fraud countermeasures can be performed according to the result of the analysis. become. Therefore, even if one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate region for 30 seconds) occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and this is detected, depending on the effect situation, It may be regarded as a staging act and cause a specific staging change, or it may be regarded as a fraudulent act and may be fraudulently notified. In this way, by using one detection information properly for multiple different purposes (here, the purpose of production and the purpose of countermeasures against fraud) according to the situation of the game or production, more purposes with less detection information. Will be achieved, and an efficient control structure will be realized.

In this explanatory example, when the operation effect acceptance period that occurs based on the satisfaction of the specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination is not reached, the effect is not changed by the operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333. Although it has been described as a thing, even when it is not during the operation effect reception period (always), the display image is changed by the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and the movable body emits light or moves. May be good. However, in this case, when it is not during the operation production acceptance period, all actions are determined as the analysis target of the fraudulent act, and also the analysis target of the production act is determined, and control is performed according to the result of these determinations. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333, both the effect change and the fraudulent notification can appear.

In addition, while monitoring whether the physical object stays within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination is satisfied. When the operation effect acceptance period occurs based on this, the analysis process for countermeasures against fraud is not terminated, and monitoring is performed to see if the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It is desirable to continue to perform the operation effect even after the reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, in addition to performing the analysis processing for the effect and the control according to the result during the operation effect acceptance period, does the physical object continue to stay within the coordinate range for the analysis for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)? The monitoring of the above will be continued, and depending on the result of the monitoring, fraudulent notification will be performed.

By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first effect period in which the effect reception regarding the first effect event (for example, the effect of moving the movable body) is permitted, the operation means different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 (for example). For example, the operation button 410) may be controlled to further generate a second effect period in which the effect reception for the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the displayed image) is allowed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), at timing t1, the special operation receiving unit 3333 allows an effect reception (panel operation reception) related to the first effect event (for example, an effect of moving a movable body). It is assumed that the first production period has occurred. In this first effect period, the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 from the occurrence of the period to the arrival of the timing t2 when the first reception time has elapsed. Control to operate a movable body in a manner corresponding to at least the movement direction and the movement amount of a physical object that has already been detected (analyzed) while the detection (analysis) related to movement is not completed and is still continued. (For example, control to move a specific movable body so as to follow the movement of a physical object) can be executed.

In this regard, when the peripheral control board 1510 determines that a specific effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the first effect period is generated and the process is continued without being terminated. In addition, a second effect (button operation reception) is permitted for an operation means (for example, an operation button 410) different from that of the special operation receiving unit 3333 for a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing a displayed image). It is possible to execute control to set an effect pattern, a notice effect, etc. that are set to generate a period.

That is, in this case, if the timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, the operation button 410 allows the effect reception (button operation reception) for the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the displayed image). Control is performed to generate the second effect period to be performed. Then, when the operation for the operation button 410 is received between the occurrence of the second effect period and the arrival of the timing t12 when the second reception time has elapsed, the second effect period ends at that point. Let me. Alternatively, if the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted until the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period is terminated when the timing t12 arrives.

According to such a configuration, the first effect period in which the effect reception for the first effect event is allowed in the first operation portion (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) and the effect reception for the second effect event are allowed. Will occur simultaneously with the second staging period allowed by the second operation site (here, the operation button 410) (timings t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129 (a)). Moreover, in the above configuration, the end timings of the first effect period and the second effect period are different, and the second effect period generated later than the first effect period ends earlier. That is, in this case, if the second effect period occurs later than the first effect period, whether the operation is interrupted and the second operation portion is operated even if the first operation portion is being operated. , The first operation part and the second operation part are required to be operated in different modes at the same time, and it is possible to provide an unprecedentedly interesting staging operability and suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. It will be expected.

In order to preferably realize such an effect operability, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the effect reception for the second effect event (the effect on the side that is completed in a relatively short time). Regarding the reception), it is produced when it is detected that a predetermined number of times (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operations (a finite amount of operations) have been performed on the second operation site (here, the operation button 410). Assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control to generate a second effect event (for example, an effect operation that changes the displayed image) without requiring any operation thereafter. For example, when one pressing operation is detected for the operation button 410, the second effect period ends before the timing t12 arrives, and no operation is required thereafter, and the effect changes to the displayed image. This corresponds to the control that causes the above.

On the other hand, regarding the production reception related to the first production event (the production reception on the side that ends after a relatively long period of time), at least until the end of the second production period, and even after that, the second production reception. Regardless of the number of operations or the amount of operations for the operation part 1, the effect reception for the first effect event is continued without being terminated, and each time the operation for the first operation part is performed during the continuation, the operation is performed. It is desirable to perform control that reflects changes in the effect according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and this is continued without terminating the effect reception according to the movement mode (movement amount, etc.) of the physical object, and thus the physical object of the physical object. This corresponds to control for repeatedly executing a process of moving a movable object to the latest analyzed coordinate position each time the movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation for the first operation part is interrupted when the second effect period occurs later than the first effect period, the operation opportunity for the first operation part is lost. Since it is possible to suitably guarantee that the game will not be broken, the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the interruption can be suppressed. Further, if the operation for the first operation portion is interrupted and then the second operation portion is operated, the second production period can be ended at a relatively early stage, and thereafter, the operation for the second operation portion is performed. Since the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation occurs without the need for the operation, the operation on the first operation site can be restarted at a relatively early stage. This will be suitably secured for the operation opportunity for the operation site of 1.

In this case, in the situation where the operation for the first operation part is restarted, the effect change (second effect event) according to the operation for the second operation part is about to start, and the first operation It becomes possible to generate a special production situation such that the second production event can be enjoyed while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this regard, "when an operation is performed on the second operation part, an effect event in which the size of the specific display image changes occurs, and when the operation on the first operation part is performed, the specific display image reaches a specific position. If it is set as the first staging event that it affects (changes) the mode of the staging target of the second staging event, such as "to cause a moving staging event", the above In a special production situation, it becomes possible to enjoy the second production event while changing the mode of the production target of the second production event by operating the first operation part, which is more dynamic and flexible. High operability and staging suitable for this will be realized.

Here, as an example of affecting (changing) the aspect of the effect target of the second effect event when the operation for the first operation portion is performed, for example, the effect of the second effect event. To change at least one of the movement amount, movement direction, movement speed, light emission mode (light color, traveling direction, light amount, etc.), size, or shape of an object (display image, moving object, etc.). However, the present invention is not limited to these, and any one that can have some influence on the effect target (display image, sound effect, movable body, etc.) of the second effect event is sufficient. That is, while the target of the operation effect for the first operation part and the target of the operation effect for the second operation part are the same effect target, the mode of the effect caused by the effect target (for example, the first operation part). The size may be changed in the operation effect for the second operation portion, and the display position may be changed in the operation effect for the second operation portion). Further, the first effect period does not necessarily have to be set as a finite time, and even after the end of the second effect period, the operation for the first operation portion is accepted, and the second effect is performed. Anything that can perform an operation on the first operation site when an event is occurring may be used.

Further, in the period in which both the first production period and the second production period occur at the same time, the second production event is related to the production reception related to the first production event and the production reception related to the second production event. Only for the production reception, the display prompting the operation instruction and the display suggesting the maximum remaining time as the second production period preferably prompt the interruption of the operation for the first operation part. Desirable above.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in order to preferably realize the relationship of such effects, even if the control is performed to generate the second effect period later than the first effect period, It is controlled so that the first effect period is not generated after the second effect period.

Further, in the above explanatory example, both the first effect period and the second effect period are made to occur at the same time, but if the second effect period occurs later than the first effect period, the first effect period is set. It may be temporarily terminated and the first effect period may be generated again when the second effect period ends. Even in this case, it is not possible to realize the above-mentioned operability and staging that affect the mode of the staging target of the second staging event when the operation for the first operating portion is performed. It is possible.

Further, in the above explanatory example, it is decided to perform control to reflect the effect change according to the operation each time the operation for the first operation portion is performed, but the operation is performed a plurality of times for the first operation portion. At that time, control may be performed to reflect the change in the effect according to the operation.

Then, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, various operation reception effects such as the following can be realized by appropriately using the control method according to each of the above-described explanatory examples.

[Production example 1 using the special operation receiving unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130A, the effect pattern of the effect example 1 (variation pattern of the effect example 1) is set based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect of the effect example 1 is set on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative pattern SZ is changed by the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, the coordinate regions (not shown) facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 of the special operation receiving unit 3333 are set so that the effect can be received within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears. Generates an operation effect period to be (controlled).

Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 which is determined to operate the movable body A1 and the effect example 1 which is specified to operate the movable body A2. The production pattern A2 of the above is included. However, while the movable body A1 is provided so as to be visible from the player side on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A2 is hard to be seen from the player side behind the game board 5. It is provided at a position where it overlaps with the movable body A1 in front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, in the display unit D, the coordinate region facing the movable body A1 (not shown). In, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed is displayed. Similarly, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to suggest that the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

Then, when such a slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 follows the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130 (b). The movable body A1 is controlled to start moving to the left. Even in this situation, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that the display unit D should perform the slide operation in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific point while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a form of following the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 131 (a). After moving the body A1 to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect reception for the movable body A1 is permitted. In this situation, the display unit D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A1 has succeeded in moving to a specific effect position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is high, and the movable body A1 emits light. It is desirable that an effect such as a change in the mode or shape of the above is performed.

However, even when the slide operation by the player reaches a specific point while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 may show FIG. 131 ( As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the effect reception for the movable body A1 is permitted is terminated so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A1 to the slide operation of the player is interrupted, and the movable body A1 is placed in the original position. Controls the movement so that it returns. In this case, the display unit D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A1 fails to move to a specific effect position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is low, and the movable body A1 ends the light emission. It will be controlled so that it is done.

On the other hand, when the player's slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the slide operation as shown in FIG. 130 (c). The movable body A2 is controlled to start moving to the left in a manner that follows it. Even in this situation, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that the display unit D should perform the slide operation in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled so as to be in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific point while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a form of following the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 131 (c). After moving the body A2 to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect reception for the movable body A2 is permitted. In this situation, the display unit D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A2 has been successfully moved to a specific effect position and the expectation for the jackpot determination is extremely high, and the movable body A2 has a display. It is desirable to make the effect such as changing the mode and shape of light emission.

However, even when the slide operation by the player reaches a specific point while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 may show FIG. 131 ( As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the effect reception for the movable body A2 is permitted is terminated so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A2 to the player's slide operation is interrupted, and the movable body A2 is placed in the original position. Controls the movement so that it returns. In this case, the display unit D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A2 fails to move to a specific effect position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is low, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. Will be controlled to be terminated.

According to such an effect example 1, when the slide operation by the player is performed while the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a), which makes the movable body A1 appear to operate, appears, the movable body A1 Instead, the movable body A2, which was difficult to see, will move in the form of sudden appearance, so the decline in the entertainment interest will be suppressed by the surprising movable production as if such production targets were replaced. Will be able to be.

Further, although the illustration is omitted, according to such an effect example 1, the player operates a slide operation within the period from the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130 (a) to the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130 (c). Although the movable body A2 has started to move, it is still in a position that is difficult to see (behind the game board 5), and from the player's side, it seems that no change in the effect has occurred. It will be possible to appear. That is, in this case, the movable body A2 moves to the front side of the display unit D after causing disappointment that no change in the effect has occurred even though the slide operation by the player is properly performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to more preferably suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment by such a movable effect with a surprise.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to a position overlapping with the decorative symbol SZ in the fluctuating state. , It becomes possible to encourage the player to shift the gaze from the decorative symbol SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the mode of overlapping with the decorative symbol SZ differs depending on whether the movable body A1 appears or the movable body A2 appears, so that the decorative symbol SZ is changed to the movable bodies A1 and A2. Even if the player fails to shift his or her gaze, by checking the size and position of the part where the decorative pattern SZ is difficult to see, it is possible to predict which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when it is overlooked which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

In the above-mentioned production example 1, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side of the game board 5, and the movable body A2 is arranged on the back side of the game board 5, but the front side of the game board 5. The movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged on the back side of the game board 5, or the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged behind the game board 5.

Here, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side of the movable body A2 so as to make it difficult to see the movable body A2. It is desirable to maintain the difficulty in visually recognizing the movable body A2 by keeping the movable base portion (the portion that does not move) or the like on the front side of the movable body A2 even when the A1 moves.

On the other hand, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged behind the game board 5, it is possible to give fun as to which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 appears by the operation by the player. Will be. In this case, the portion of the game board 5 located on the front side of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is made to emit light so as to prompt the operation to the coordinate region (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1, the movable directions (left direction) of the movable bodies A1 and A2 are set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward direction, the game is prompted to the left direction by the operation instruction (suggested image HG1) to suggest the left direction. Despite the slide operation performed by the person, the movable body A2 moves upward, and such a surprise-like movable effect makes it possible to more preferably suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Alternatively, even though the operation on the movable body A1 whose movable direction is set to the left is prompted, the player can slide the movable body upward by displaying an operation instruction suggesting the upward direction. When this is done, the movable body A2, which has been difficult to see, may move upward and appear.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1, when the movable body A2 appears by the operation by the player, the movable body A1 is prevented from operating, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable body A2 is moved by the operation by the player, the movable body A1 is also moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if the movable bodies A1 and A2 are moved by a predetermined distance and then only the movable body A1 is moved so as to return to the original position, the deterioration of the game entertainment is more preferably suppressed by the movable effect with a surprise. You will be able to get it. Alternatively, when moving the movable body A2 by the operation by the player, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if the movable body A1 is moved by a predetermined distance and then the movable body A1 is moved so as to return to the original position and the movable body A2 is moved following the slide operation by the player, it is a surprise. A certain movable effect makes it possible to more preferably suppress the deterioration of the game interest. However, when the operation target by the player is exchanged between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the operation by the player is kept at a predetermined place for a predetermined time (time required for the movable body A2 to move to the predetermined place). It is desirable to perform the production.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1, in the situation where the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c)), the movable body A1 and the movable body A2 are made to emit light, respectively. In this situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily have to emit light. That is, in this case, the timing at which the physical object is detected in the coordinate region (special operation receiving unit 3333) facing the movable body A1 or the movable body A2 starts advancing to the front side of the display unit D and returns to the original position. Control is performed to end the light emission of the movable body A1 at a timing (timing when the movable body A1 is moved to a predetermined position) which is easier to see than at a certain time.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1 and its alternative examples, the movable body A2 is arranged on the rear side where it overlaps with the movable body A1 in front view, but the board surface light emitting portion E is arranged instead of the movable body A1. You may do so. That is, in this case, when the movable body A2 is moved (in the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a)), the board surface light emitting portion E located on the front side of the movable body A2 is made to emit light, so that the movable body is in a state where it is difficult to see. The operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving unit 3333) facing A2 is urged.

Further, in the display unit D according to the above-mentioned effect example 1, in each of the situations shown in FIGS. The situation (the initial situation where none of the movable objects are operating) is shown. However, instead of this, the display mode of the suggested image HG1 is changed according to the location of the movable bodies A1 and A2, and the moving state of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized only by looking at the suggested image HG1. You may do it.

[Production example 2 using the special operation receiving unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the effect pattern of the effect example 2 (variation pattern of the effect example 2) is set based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect of the effect example 2 is set on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative pattern SZ is changed by the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is set (control) so that the effect can be received within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears. ) Generate an operation effect period.

Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 which is defined to operate the movable body A1 and the movable body A1 and the movable body B are defined to operate respectively. The effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 is included. Then, in the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2, the same as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the above-mentioned effect example 1, FIGS. 130 (a) and (b), and FIGS. 131 (a) (or FIG. 131 (b)). The movable body A1 is provided with an opportunity to receive an operation effect for the movable body A1 in the embodiment shown in the above. On the other hand, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, the opportunity to accept the operation effect for the movable body A1 is provided, and then the opportunity to accept the operation effect for the movable body B is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, in the display unit D, the coordinate region facing the movable body A1 (not shown). In, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed is displayed. Similarly, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to suggest that the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

However, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, when an operation on the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is accepted (when a physical object is detected), a specific effect event is given to the movable body A1. First, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the suggestion image HG1 in the display unit D is hidden, and control is performed to interrupt the effect reception in the coordinate region facing the movable body A1. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative symbol SZ in the display unit D be displayed in a manner that is visible but difficult to see (such as translucent display), and the light emitting state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to let them do it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), in the display unit D in which the suggestion image HG1 is hidden in this way, an operation on an operation means (operation button 410 or the like) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 is performed. The operation instruction image SG for prompting is displayed, and an operation acceptance period for a specific effect using the other operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is generated. Then, when an operation for another operation means (operation button 410 or the like) is accepted during the operation acceptance period of the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG in the display unit D is hidden as shown in FIG. 133 (a). At the same time, the movable body B, which is different from the movable body A1 initially shown as the target of production, is controlled to operate. In this effect example 2, the movable body B is advanced to the front side of the display unit D for a predetermined time.

Then, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the movable body B operates in this way, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display unit D is movable in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. A suggestion image HG2 suggesting that the operation of sliding the body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed is displayed, and the coordinate region of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the movable body A1 (not shown). Is set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted. The operation effect period is generated again. At this time, the opportunity for the effect operation of the movable body A1 is given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132 (a) appears, the movable body B does not operate and the movable body A1 operates. It is desirable that the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 in which the movable body A1 operates after the movable body B operates has a higher expectation than the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2. In this case, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display mode of the suggested image HG2 is different from that of the suggested image HG1 shown in FIG. 132 (a), suggesting that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation. It is desirable to make the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 different from the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. 132 (a) to suggest that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation. ..

In addition, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the above-mentioned effect example 1, FIGS. 130 (b) and 131 (b) a) (or, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 131 (b)), the movable body A1 is provided with an opportunity to receive an operation effect for the movable body A1 so that the movable body A1 can move. Further, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, the same as in the case of the effect pattern A2 of the above-mentioned effect example 1, FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c) (or FIG. 131 (b)). ) May be provided as an opportunity to receive an operation effect for the movable body A1 so that an effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves appears.

In particular, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), a suggestion image HG2 suggesting that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation is made to appear, and the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 is displayed. Since they are made different, this is also a movable effect that appears when the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is performed in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. It is desirable to perform the above in a special execution mode different from that of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2.

According to the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, the first effect opportunity using the first operation portion (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is first given (in this situation, the second operation). Despite the fact that the second effect opportunity is not given to the part (for example, the operation button 410), when the first operation part is operated and the effect is received, the first operation part is different from the first operation part. A second effect opportunity is given to the second operation portion (for example, the operation button 410), and the first effect opportunity is temporarily lost. Then, when the second operation portion (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and the effect is received in the situation where the first effect opportunity is once lost, the second effect event (for example) corresponding to the effect reception is received. Here, the operation of the movable body B) will occur. That is, in this case, when the effect reception for the first operation part is made, it becomes possible to generate an effect as to whether or not the second effect opportunity is given to the second operation part. Innovative operability using the operation part of is provided.

In order to preferably realize such a novel operability using a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable that the second operation part is always provided in a manner that is physically difficult to operate. Then, when it is determined that the second effect opportunity is given to the second operation part, it is difficult to physically operate the second operation part based on the fact that the effect reception for the first operation part is made. It is desirable to control the mode from the mode to the mode that is easy to operate, and to allow the effect reception for the second operation portion when the mode is in the mode that is easy to operate. Here, the "mode that is physically difficult to operate" is, for example, a mode in which the second operation portion (for example, the operation button 410) is covered with another member to make the operation difficult, or the second operation portion. Is a mode in which is positioned in the state when it has already been operated, and "controlling from a mode that is physically difficult to operate to a mode that is easy to operate" means, for example, the second operation site itself. Control to operate to a position not covered by other members, control to operate other members covering the second operation part to a position not to cover the second operation part, operation of the second operation part It can be realized as a control to operate to a position different from the state when it is done. Further, in this case, the trigger for controlling the second operation part from a mode that is physically difficult to operate to a mode that is easy to operate does not necessarily have to be when the effect reception for the first operation part is made, and is specified. It may be when a specific time has passed since the effect pattern of was executed. In any case, in order to give a second effect opportunity to the second operation part when the effect reception for the first operation part is made, the second operation part itself or a member provided in the vicinity thereof is operated. It is desirable to do so in order to suggest that the target of the operation has been changed from the first operation site to the second operation site and that the change raises the degree of expectation.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the above-mentioned effect example 2, after the first effect opportunity using the first operation portion (here, the special operation receiving portion 3333) is given, the first operation portion is operated and this is performed. It was decided to give a second production opportunity based on the fact that the production was accepted. However, after the lapse of a predetermined time after giving the first staging opportunity using the first operation site (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) (or after displaying the suggested image HG1), the first A second effect opportunity may be given to a second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) different from the operation part of the above, and the first effect opportunity may be temporarily lost. In this case, the first effect event is generated by the operation on the first operation portion until the predetermined time elapses, but the first effect event ends based on the elapse of the predetermined time. (If the target of the effect is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to return to the original position). Alternatively, the first effect opportunity using the first operation site is not given, and a second operation site different from the first operation site (for example, for example) after a predetermined time has elapsed after displaying the suggested image HG1. A second effect opportunity may be given to the operation button 410). That is, in this case, even though the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the effect reception is not performed by the operation for the first operation portion.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the above-mentioned effect example 2, it is decided to hide the suggestion image HG1 after displaying the suggestion image HG1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, FIG. 132 with the suggestion image HG1 displayed. The operation instruction image SG shown in may be further displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to describe how the suggested image HG1 changes to the suggested image HG2 with a higher degree of expectation, so that the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed. However, at this time, when the suggestion image HG1 is displayed in a state where the effect reception for the first operation portion is not performed, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black and white display, translucent, etc.). It is desirable to make the display mode relatively difficult to see. Furthermore, a timekeeping image showing the remaining time for displaying the suggested image HG1 (the remaining time for which the effect is received for the first operation part) is also displayed, and the effect is not received for the first operation part. By showing the state in which the remaining time does not decrease in the state by the timed image, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining period in which the effect reception for the first operation portion is performed does not decrease. Therefore, it becomes possible to enjoy the game using another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) with peace of mind. In this case, it seems that the remaining time for which the effect reception is performed has decreased by a predetermined amount even though the effect reception for the first operation portion is not performed, and then the remaining time does not decrease. Is shown by the above-mentioned timed image, it becomes possible to provide a more interesting effect.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the above-mentioned effect example 2, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the effect reception for the first operation part is not performed based on the effect reception for the first operation part. A period is generated, and the display mode of the suggested image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black-and-white display, translucent display mode that is relatively difficult to see, etc.) and timekeeping. The image may show how the remaining time does not decrease (for example, the display meter does not decrease and becomes stationary). At this time, it is desirable to change the display mode of the image different from the suggested image HG1 in the display unit D. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second effect opportunity is provided, the display mode of the suggested image HG1 is changed to a mode with higher expectation, and the effect reception for the first operation portion is performed again. You may do so.

Further, in the effect pattern of the above effect example 2, after displaying the suggestion image HG1 for prompting the operation targeting the movable body A1 (or in the state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the movable body B is operated. However, the movable body B does not have to be operated by the operation by the player, and for example, based on the fact that a special result is obtained in the determination of whether a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. It may be a non-operable movable body that operates. When such a non-operable movable body is adopted, even if it is decided to operate (a special result is obtained), the operation instruction for the non-operable movable body is not given and the operation is accepted. Nor. In this regard, if the determination of whether or not the predetermined operating conditions for the non-operated movable body are satisfied is appropriately generated regardless of the execution status of the effect pattern, other effect targets (movable objects and display images) can be appropriately generated. Since it becomes possible to secretly make a decision to operate the non-operated movable body while the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, an operation instruction regarding another effect target appears and the operation is accepted. While it is possible, it is possible to have the possibility that a non-operated movable body that has nothing to do with this will suddenly move, or that the special movable body and other production targets will move at the same time. Therefore, it can be expected that the game entertainment will be improved by such an unexpected operation production.

Further, when the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display unit D, the target operation part (a specific coordinate area in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the operation button 410, etc.) ) Is not limited to the effect reception, but the effect reception is also possible in the coordinate area (special operation receiving unit 3333) facing the portion where the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear. May be good. According to such a configuration, even if the operation portion cannot be recognized, only the specific images (suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image S) appearing in the display unit D are operated. It becomes possible to generate the same effect, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In the above embodiment, at least the physical object that has already been detected while the detection regarding the movement of the physical object has not been completed and is still continued since the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333. Although it is possible to execute control to move the effect target (display image or movable body) in a mode according to the movement direction and the movement amount, the movement speed of the physical object is detected when controlling the movement of the effect target. However, the high or low of the moving speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above embodiment, in realizing the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, the effect is produced in the coordinate region of the special operation receiving unit 3333 facing the portion to be operated. Although the reception is done, it does not necessarily have to be the coordinate area facing the part to be operated, and even if the production reception is done in a specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. good.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the peripheral external light detection unit 35 detects the change in light caused by the operation (physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving unit 3333, and the peripheral control board 1510 detects this. By analyzing, it was decided to determine the operation mode (movement information of a physical object such as a finger) for the special operation receiving unit 3333, but for example, the special operation receiving unit was used using the touch panel installed on the glass plate 192. The operation mode for the unit 3333 (in this case, the mode of the touch operation for the glass plate 192) may be determined. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area and the display area through the glass plate 192 may be adversely affected.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has been shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. 134. (YES in step S5231) on condition that the detection signal by the start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first start port 2002), the random number for determining the first big hit is acquired from the above random number counter. A first start port passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol (YES in step S5233). A second start port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variation jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes the game after opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "16R probability variation jackpot", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "8R probability variation jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times to control the 8R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes after the game is repeated twice is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than left-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and right-handed is more advantageous than right-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a jackpot game that is open for a long time of up to 8 rounds. Only the state (generally 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, there is a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of winning species). ), The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained when the big hit is won, such as the big hit game state of 16 rounds open for a long time (about 2000 game balls can be obtained) is executed. Therefore, when the transition to the right-handed state is controlled, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, in order to start such open control of the big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 140, there is a high probability according to the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that it is in a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 139, which will be described later. Probability change big hit, 8R Probability change big hit B) is set when the game state is finished, and when the next big hit is made, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) Will be reset with.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 140, the time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later, is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is ended, and when the next jackpot is reached. Or, it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the big hit after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 described later will be performed. Or, it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The fluctuation count counter is a counter that indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the fluctuation count counter is reset, and is used in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142, which will be described later. It is a thing, and it is updated (for example, count-up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B). It is reset when starting the jackpot game state based on.

If the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set as the process of step S5236. To determine. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the large winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving are performed. Each set process such as the number of times counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is set. On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, when the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in the pending state is not lost (unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the pending status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second big hit judgment random number will be performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only maintains the driving of the game ball (right-handed) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the random numbers for determining the two big hits can be continuously performed without interruption.

In addition, the special figure game (design variation) using the second special figure (second special symbol) is limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). However, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5322).

Now, assuming that the first start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 in the process of step S5231, as shown in FIG. 135. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S5421, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) Is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" which is (upper limit value) (step S5242). If it is determined in the process of step S5422 that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to make the state of S5243 to S5245, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, information on the symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) are generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5422, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S5233, the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 136. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, for second jackpot symbol). Random numbers, random numbers for the second variation display pattern) are acquired from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to bring the state to the above, the following steps S5253 to S5255 will be performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the second special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing the transformational effect described later can be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). The command to be executed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since it is a program module of the above and only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The big hit judgment random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read big hit judgment random number, lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. 1st special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. 2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the determination process of the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )

3. 3. Execution corresponding to the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 138, first steps S5301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is a change display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variation display pattern). The random number stored in the area is read from the RAM of the same main control. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. First-in, first-out (First-In) random numbers related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) The shift operation is performed in the mode of First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize is given to the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start prize is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). .. Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and responds to the occurrence of a start prize to the second start port 2004. The random numbers extracted by the above are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start prize is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). ..

After that, as the process of step S5305, the big hit determination process, which is the determination process for the hit or miss of the big hit, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will be in the high-probability time shown in FIG. 140 (A). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 140 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state is low probability for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). The jackpot judgment table for low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high used when the gaming state is high probability time (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability. Then, in the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332. The first big hit judgment random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so as to match the deviation judgment value indicating that the first big hit judgment random number of the type is the above loss (big hit probability at low probability; generally). "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the reference big hit judgment table at the time of low probability, 204 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers match the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 65332 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The above-mentioned second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately 1/321).

Further, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are used. The above-mentioned first big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the off-determination value (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating that the above is lost. The random numbers for determining the second big hit are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). The jackpot judgment value (of the jackpot judgment value) set in the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number. The number of big hits may be the same and the big hit judgment values may be different (the big hit probability is the same), or the number of big hit judgment values may be different (the big hit probability is different). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the low probability and the big hit judgment table at the high probability may be different (they may be different). ..

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5315). ), Set the jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot (step S5316), and end the jackpot determination process.

Further, when it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been lost, the random number for jackpot determination read out matches the small hit determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won based on the selected jackpot determination table. Whether or not it is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (a loss determination is made).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the result is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the built-in ROM of the main control, and is used when the gaming state is in the high-probability non-time saving state. It is provided with a reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of the above, and a reach determination table in a low-probability state used when the gaming state is a low-probability state (low-probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. The above reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, it matches the reach judgment value indicating that all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers do not reach. In this way, it may not match the reach determination value indicating reach.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the low probability state than in the high probability time reduction state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the high probability non-time saving state, five types of reach judgment including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the random number for reach is reached and the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating reach is the same as in the low-probability non-time-saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). , The reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S5121).

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 141, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140 (B) and reads out the random number for the first jackpot symbol in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. And the selected symbol determination table are compared with each other to determine the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers) for the determination result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). Random numbers for the first big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 140 (C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) is displayed. Here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other.

In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of the big hit is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big hit symbol. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. .. More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probabilistic jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and production contents for each type of jackpot.

1. 1. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2103 wins nine game balls, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state. Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state. Is controlled by the effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 that is in a relatively advantageous state.

2. 2. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the staging display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state. Controls the variable display of the special symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or wins a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state. An 8R normal jackpot that performs a battle effect in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) and is controlled by the effect mode indicated by the effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time saving state.

3. 3. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the staging display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 16R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 16R big hit game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state (successful production). ) Is performed, and the effect mode is controlled to indicate that the effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect was controlled to the high probability time saving state. 16R probability change jackpot

4. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the staging display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state (failure effect). ) Is performed, and the effect mode is controlled to indicate that the effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect was controlled to the high probability time saving state. 8R Probability change jackpot B

5. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2103 wins nine game balls, the count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 2R big hit game state, it is special. While controlling the variable display of the symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or winning a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), a specific character during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state Performs a defeated battle effect (battle defeat effect), and is controlled by the effect mode indicated by the effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time saving state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol display 1403, and the big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 Only the variation display is executed, and a big hit (16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

Also, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that opens the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated 8 times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

If the 8R probability variation jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 8R probability variation jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot symbol is selected as the jackpot symbol. decide. Although not shown, if the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot symbol. If the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, if the big hit flag is not set in the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of the next step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol (the mode when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped) is set. After determining (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Further, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a lost symbol as an mode when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is one of the above lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, missed reach, missed) as the process of step S5337. (May indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the instruction (may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

The peripheral control MPU1511a displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol →. Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU1511a is determined to be a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it is determined to be a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols). In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; reach loss. (Design), and if the outlier is specified, it is decided to be the outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU1511a makes the effect display (special display mode) of the hit time appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. After the start of the game, the effect display during the big hit game will appear.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 142. If this is done (step S5341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag is selected. If is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S5345) is selected. When (not shown) is selected (step S5346) and none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when the normal loss (the loss without performing the reach effect) occurs, the time of the loss occurs. (Not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example is used as a random number for jackpot determination (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) and a random number for jackpot symbol (random number for first jackpot symbol, random number for second jackpot symbol). Multiple types are provided for each judgment result based on. Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each random number for the first variable display pattern. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a reads out the variable pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variable pattern tables according to the determination result based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the random number for the variable display pattern and acquiring the variable time information associated with the random number for the variable display pattern read out from this table, the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Determine the fluctuation pattern of. As a result, the determination process for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59. Random numbers for different types of variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectation is executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns have high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

The super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game state, the player for the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed. Expectations are increasing. That is, such a super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit, and the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state even if a loss is finally displayed. Will be able to increase. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game state, a high-expected advance notice effect, which is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern, appears during the period when the super reach effect is being executed. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the first jackpot and the random number for the first jackpot symbol and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state are obtained. A fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common with. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the second big hit and the random number for the second symbol and is used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 0.1 seconds or more. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 2004 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time-saving state. At the same time as urging, the player has secured time for the second starting port 2004 to win the game ball.

In addition, when 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol is lost, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) is selected. It will be possible to prevent the waste from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the region directly above the gate portion 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate portion 2003 in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%). The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously accepted (a time saving state in which almost all the game balls driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "about 1/32". It will be possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol coming off based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shows the fluctuation time of the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) extremely. It can be set to a short 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is completed in a time (0.1 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so that 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are accepted into the second starting port 2004 one after another, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being ejected without being subjected to the lottery process. ..

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 143, first steps S5371. As the process of, the variation timer in which the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process for the variation pattern (step S5282) is set is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the fluctuation time timer is not 0 even though the fluctuation timer is subtracted by 1 (step S5371), until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the process of steps S5371 and S5372 is performed.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 144, first steps S5381. As the process of, display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit gaming state (step S5387). The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is set. When the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation count counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step). S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the jackpot game in the above-mentioned jackpot control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variation jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot B) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, and 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game state (battle effect or additional challenge effect) according to the type of the jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the state is in the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) (here). Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is started. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of updating to (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) described above determines that the small hit execution flag is set. The small hit game state will be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is regarded as a loss, and the first special symbol process without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394). That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag and the small hit executing flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is played according to the pending situation. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S5401 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 145, the main As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is the mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S5407) for executing a process for controlling the

The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S5402).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S5401 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 146, the above As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

If it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to put the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols into a new pending state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the normal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5421, as shown in FIG. 147. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S5422, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Random numbers stored in the earliest storage area among random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random numbers and random numbers with variable figures) are read from the same RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) at the time saving time (not shown). In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), a non-time-saving normal figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (not shown). Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU1310a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time-saving normal map hit determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all the 255 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number was won, and the normal figure is used. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating the deviation. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is always won, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. It controls acceptance as much as possible. Not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be made to match the judgment value per normal figure indicating that the normal random numbers have been won.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it may match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that all 255 types of normal random numbers have been won per normal number. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal map, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won in the normal drawing, so that the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting port is opened. There is no possible control over the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as described above, the winning of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that of the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning. At that time, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. (Ii) The acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004 may be disabled.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol per normal symbol as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S5431), while the normal symbol changes when it is determined to be out of order as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to obtain the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing)). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and the effect according to the game situation can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern specification command reception waiting process, effect symbol change start process, effect symbol change process, effect symbol change stop process, jackpot display process , The big hit in-game process, and the big hit end effect process are executed.

Fluctuation pattern specification command reception wait process: During the period from the main control MPU1310a to the reception of the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern, it is applied to the effect (demo effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variable state and the control related to the jackpot is not performed. While performing control, when a fluctuation pattern command related to the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start processing.

Staging symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol variation period are determined based on the variation pattern command, and the decorative symbol variation is started based on the determined effect content. To control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol change.

Processing during effect symbol change: Controls to start various effect contents determined in the effect symbol change start process at each timing during the symbol change period, and when the change time ends, the value of the process flag is set to the effect symbol. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.

Staging symbol fluctuation stop processing: Controls to stop the fluctuation of decorative symbols based on the reception of a command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols, and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, when the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and when the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the value of the process flag is changed to the variable pattern specification command reception waiting process. Update to the value corresponding to.

Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

Process during big hit game: Controls various effects during the period when the big hit game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (display effect for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended, etc.) is controlled during the period from the end of the big hit game state to the variable permissible state. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the process of waiting for the variable pattern specification command reception.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern is determined. It is controlled so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on (variation effect).

The effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variable effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variable effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may try to do it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with a part of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (variation effect) is determined in this way, a notice lottery (determination process of the advance notice effect) is performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By performing control (processing during effect symbol change) to make the advance notice effect won in the advance notice lottery appear at a predetermined timing while the above-determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed, a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. It is designed to suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on the appearance mode of them as a compoundable possibility.

Conventionally, in such a composite effect, a plurality of the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) may be generated and executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. By doing this, it is expected that the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency of executing multiple timer effects while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. , It was considered difficult to fully improve the game entertainment.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" is intended for a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is the first predetermined numerical value. It is executed as a count effect display from (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"), or as a standby display (in preparation, etc.) before starting the count display. Is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A) that causes either a relatively disadvantageous effect (low expectation effect) or an advantageous effect (high expectation effect) for the player appears. , B, etc.) is the target of the timer effect, and it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the timer effect on the advance notice side executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the effect target at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. Further, the "effect target of the timer effect" is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") as the timer effect. Therefore, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the passage of time from the start of counting is displayed up to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count-up or count-down is performed, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to accurately indicate the number of seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (preliminary side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when the user wins the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern determined based on the determination table T1 ( It is possible to execute the timer effect (variable side timer effect) that is built in in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if only the preview side timer effect is executed as the count effect display as "the effect content of the advance notice effect that functions so that the jackpot expectation is added to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, by executing it as "the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command", the expectation level from the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command. It will be possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessary addition (addition of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the notice lottery"). For example, if the jackpot expectation when a specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", the jackpot expectation is increased by the combined effect function when the advance timer effect is further executed. For example, it becomes "40%" and the appearance frequency has to be reduced by that amount, but when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, a big hit is expected. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

The degree of expectation of a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the effect pattern). Basically, the expectation of a big hit as the variation number increases. There is a tendency for the degree to increase. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variable side timer effect in which the "conversation notice" is the effect target is executed as the effect content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 (variation number 9). 10) <Variation number 17 (18) is set. Further, here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state is described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself itself. As a result, an effect pattern (count variation pattern) in which the variable side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variation side timer effect for the conversation notice. It differs from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that. Further, the variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 9 and 10 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 11 and 10. In No. 12, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in A is executed, and in the variable numbers 13 and 14, the conversation notice and the cut-in A are executed, and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. It differs in that it can be done. Further, the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 17 and 18 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variation numbers 19 and 18. In 20, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in B is executed, and in the variable numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. It differs in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice is executed. Is set so that the jackpot expectation tends to be higher when the variable side timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-in A and B is executed.

It should be noted that the "conversation notice" is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and is often added with a relatively low expectation. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and the expectation is relatively high. It is a production that often happens (or a production that always has a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set so that the appearance rate (execution probability) is higher than other effects (cut-in A, B, the character A operation, B, etc. described later) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be done. Further, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable effect is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the advance notice effect in the character reach, whereas the advance notice is performed in the SP reach. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B, not the cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the effect content (effect pattern) is obtained for a plurality of variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as a variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6) such as shortened fluctuation or normal reach effect with low expectation", the count effect display as the timer effect on the notice side is displayed. While the effect is not won (increasing the premium degree) and the expectation level UP when the notice side timer effect appears is appropriately secured, the variation pattern is "a variation pattern that executes the effect side timer effect (increasing the premium degree). In the case of "variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22 and the like count fluctuation patterns)", the fluctuation pattern is of the above-mentioned predetermined type (for example, fluctuation) as compared with the case where it is not such a count fluctuation pattern. The ratio corresponding to numbers 1 to 6 etc.) is set to be low.

Here, 14 fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count fluctuation patterns in which the variable side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0) are prepared. Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) (variation numbers 5 and 6) that may be set to individual) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4,7,8,15,16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns in which the variable side timer effect is not executed, and four of them (variation) are prepared. Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variable side timer effect) (count variation pattern), it is more noticeable than the case where the variation side timer effect is not performed. The rate at which it is determined that the count effect display (timer effect on the advance notice side) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one staging pattern (variable staging) without unnecessarily increasing the degree of expectation and reducing the frequency of appearance.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The rate at which the advance notice side timer effect appears differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern the count fluctuation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice side timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. At that time, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice side timer effect may appear with a low probability. Further, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability is executed, the actual hit is larger than in the case of loss. The effect pattern that has been won in the above can appear with a higher lottery probability, and the variable number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display is announced according to whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio to be executed as the effect content (timer effect on the notice side) will be different. Therefore, among the above-mentioned count fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays is high in one effect pattern (variation effect), the type thereof. Depending on the situation, the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear can be further increased, and it is expected that the game will be maintained in a suitable manner.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect content of the same reach type appears, the variable side timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the advance notice side timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern as compared with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation side timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which the advancer timer effect is determined by the advance notice lottery) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable side timer effect and notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. It will be possible to make it possible, and by extension, it will be possible to realize the production opportunity of the double timer without unnecessary addition of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case, the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "conversation notice" is the effect target and the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "cut-in" is the effect target. The mode of the count display (form, color, etc. of the count number) is different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the mode of the count display of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. By doing so, in combination with "the ratio of the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect to appear is different depending on which count fluctuation pattern is used", the ease of appearance of the advance notice side timer effect is recognized. You will be able to expect.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the advance notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), the variable side timer effect (variable side) regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in). The mode of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display) may be different (or at least different from any one), or may be the same (or at least the same as any one). ..

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the timer effect on the advance notice side (count effect display on the advance notice side) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be the effect. It is useful for making the player aware that the timer effect on the advance notice side, which is set to a high degree, is appearing, and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). Regarding the above-mentioned common aspect as the advance notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of aspects (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) having different expectations are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do so.

Further, in order to make it possible to more preferably recognize that the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the count display when the advance notice side timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable side timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down) different. In such a configuration, even during the period in which the count display is in progress after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is closely watched, and it is relative to the variable side timer effect having a relatively low expectation. It becomes possible to make people interested in which of the timer effects on the advance notice side, which has a high degree of expectation, is being executed, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the timer digestion period.

At this time, in the variable side timer effect, the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed) as the count speed of the advance notice side timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count is displayed in the cut-in) and the mode (conversation notice) in which the count is displayed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the notice side timer effect, whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed. It will be possible to add fun by making the difficulty of judgment different. Further, in the variable side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and erasure of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. By displaying it, the count may be displayed.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is easy to grasp whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and the entertainment of the game will be improved.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a count display is performed for the fluctuation pattern (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the variable side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the variation pattern corresponding to the variation side timer effect is acquired, one of the above-mentioned plurality of effect patterns is determined based on the random number for the effect, etc., and the count display of the variation side timer effect and the advance notice side timer By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed is different. I try to give it some fun

In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect effect target and reach) in which the start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) of the count display is different for one fluctuation pattern. Although it was decided to prepare the same effect content), multiple effect patterns (however, the time required for the total count or the time required to digest all counts) of the count display start timing or end timing are different (however, the effect is targeted for the timer effect). The type of effect and the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern may be the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and made to have a one-to-one correspondence.

In addition, the count display number (total number of counts) when appearing between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect can be made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice By making the selection rate of the specific count display number different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to give fun by making it difficult to judge whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. ..

Further, while the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed in the countdown display, if the timer effect on the variable side is executed in the count-up display, it is deterministically grasped whether or not the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and that the game will be greatly improved. Further, while the notice side timer effect is executed in the countdown display, the variable side timer effect targeting the specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed in the countup display, and the effect different from the specific effect (for example, for example). If the variable side timer effect for cut-in) is executed in the countdown display, it will be interesting to make it difficult to judge whether the notice side timer effect is executed or not depending on the effect target. It will be possible to grant.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is set as the effect target for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are set as the effect target. To control. When the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the effect is different between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Even if the rate at which the jackpot expectation is low is set to be high and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display is displayed. I try to make the end timing different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, one of the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect has a predetermined value first. At this point, it is as if a different effect is being produced (the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) because the count display of the other is continued while the process ends when It looks like it is. After that, the other count display that has been continued will reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of the effect. Even if it is clarified that the conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for the production by the timer production on the finished side, a different production that can appear after that is targeted for the production ( It is expected that the expectation that the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation will be maintained and the game interest will be improved.

Further, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect in this way, the timing at which the variable side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the advance notice side timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to make a display corresponding to the end of counting (for example, "count successful!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear separately at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, which are targeted at the "conversation notice" executed as the effect of the variable side or the advance notice side, appear in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but in the variable side timer effect, as the variable side effect in relation to the "conversation notice". While the count display is advanced according to the variable side specific effect that occurs ("count success!", Effect according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.), in the notice side timer effect, it is related to "conversation notice". The count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect ("Chance UP!", The timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect), etc.) that occurs as the effect on the notice side. By advancing, different count end correspondence displays will appear at different timings.

By the way, each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is required to be executed without fail when it is targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notices and cut-ins are effects that can be executed in multiple modes with different expectations. Therefore, when the target is the effect of the variable side timer effect, it is relative when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is required to appear in a mode with high expectation. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable side timer effect and its effect target are obtained only by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with relatively high expectations) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable side timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the effect target is always selected in the advance notice lottery. ..

If the conversation notice and the cut-in effect are not targeted for the variable side timer effect, it is determined whether or not the conversation notice and the cut-in effect will appear as the effect content of the notice side in the advance notice lottery described later. It is determined in what mode (a mode with a relatively high expectation or a mode with a low expectation) as the effect content on the side, and the control related to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination. ..

Hereinafter, the process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 148 will be summarized.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU1310a, first, the current game is based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation degree) to the probability change expectation degree when a specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the big hit game state. become.

Next, as the effect pattern associated with the variation number, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display appearing in the variable side timer effect) are prepared so as to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the success of the jackpot determination. At this time, if the jackpot judgment is won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is delayed is high, and the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set accordingly. The later it is, the more likely it is that a jackpot symbol will appear.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in this case, among the plurality of effect patterns, the effect pattern set so that the variable side timer effect does not appear is selected.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change) that appears during the symbol change is selected in this way, what kind of advance notice effect is given within the execution period of the effect pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in any manner (notice lottery).

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure for a lottery (notice lottery performed in the effect symbol change start process) related to the advance notice effect that appears within the execution period (design variation time) of the effect pattern. The procedure for processing the advance notice lottery described below is merely an example, and the procedure for processing the advance notice lottery is not limited to this as long as it can achieve the intended purpose as the advance notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 149, at the time of the advance notice lottery, it is first determined whether or not the fluctuation (holding to be digested) waiting to start is subject to the timer look-ahead effect described later (step S5501). ). As a result, the first timer advance notice lottery is performed when the target is the timer look-ahead effect (step S5502), whereas the second timer advance notice lottery is performed when the timer look-ahead effect is not applied (step S5502). S5521).

That is, when the timer is targeted for the timer look-ahead effect (first timer advance notice lottery), the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed as compared with the case where the timer look-ahead effect is not targeted (second timer advance notice lottery). It is set to increase the rate at which decisions are made. The ratio may include a ratio determined by 100%. Further, in both the first timer advance notice lottery and the second timer advance notice lottery, different decision tables are prepared for each game state, and it is decided to execute the advance notice side timer effect according to the game state. It seems that the ratio to be performed (for example, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the determination to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side is made at a ratio lower than that in the normal gaming state (including the ratio determined by 0%)). It has become.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to when the fluctuation (holding to be digested) is not the target of the timer look-ahead effect in the normal gaming state (second timer advance notice lottery). ..

As shown in FIG. 150, in the second timer advance notice lottery according to this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variation pattern command (variation numbers 1 to 6 in this case) is acquired, the advance timer effect is produced. Do not make a decision to do so. This point is the same even in the case of the first timer advance notice lottery or other gaming states.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, in the second timer advance notice lottery, even if the effect pattern (for example, the SP reach corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22) shows the effect content of the same reach type, the variation side. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22) in which the timer effect is included as the effect content, the effect pattern in which the variable side timer effect is not included as the effect content (for example, SP reach corresponding to the variation numbers 15 and 16) is compared. It is set so that the rate at which the decision to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side is made is high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable side timer effect and notice side timer effect) can be made to appear in one effect pattern without winning the double timer effect described later in the advance notice lottery. As a result, it will be possible to realize the opportunity to produce a double timer without wasting the expectation of a big hit (winning the double timer production). This point is the same even in the case of the first timer advance notice lottery or other gaming states.

However, in the first timer advance notice lottery, the ratio of the decision to execute the advance notice side timer effect is generally higher than that of the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in such a second timer advance notice lottery. More specifically, in the first timer advance notice lottery, regardless of which of the variable numbers 7 to 22 is selected, the advance notice side is compared with the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer advance notice lottery. The percentage of decisions to execute timer effects is high.

Further, as will be described later, in the timer look-ahead effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (low expectation mode, high expectation mode, determination) in which the ratio of execution of the advance notice side timer effect is different in the fluctuation targeted for the look-ahead. Aspect) is to be executed. Then, in the first timer advance notice lottery, first, it is determined in which mode the timer look-ahead effect is executed, and even when the look-ahead is executed in the low expectation mode, the second timer advance notice lottery is performed. It is set so that the rate at which the determination to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side is made is generally higher than that of the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in. When the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the high expectation mode, the ratio of the decision to execute the advancer side timer effect is generally higher than in the case where the timer look-ahead effect is executed, and the timer look-ahead effect is increased. When it is executed in the definite mode, it is set so that it is always decided to execute the advance notice side timer effect regardless of the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 1 to 22).

Then, when it is decided to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side as a result of such a timer advance notice lottery (first timer advance notice lottery, second timer advance notice lottery) (YES in step S5503), the process of step S5504 is the first. If it is not decided to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side while the 1 mission effect lottery is performed (NO in step S5503), the second mission effect lottery is performed as the process of step S5551.

That is, as described above, in the timer effect, the larger the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started (the longer the time required for the timer time consumption), the higher the jackpot expectation tends to be. Is set to have. However, in this case, when the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is small, the expectation of big hits tends to be low, so even though the timer effect is executed, the game is played. There was concern that the interest would decline.

Therefore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 displays a "specific display related to the first effect" such as "make the first effect appear", and the specific display is displayed. When the first effect occurs (appears) during the display of, a special display such as "Mission Success" appears, making it possible to execute a mission effect that confirms that the jackpot has been won.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the effect type (here, the conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the effect of the timer effect is set as the first effect. We are going to adopt it. That is, in this case, if the timer effect is executed while the specific display such as "Make the conversation notice (first effect) appear" (while the mission effect is appearing), the count display is displayed. Even if the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) displayed when is started is small, the target of the timer notice is "a conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage" (a big hit due to the success of the mission). It can be expected that it is confirmed and suggested that the winner has been won), and the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display starts is large, and the count display continues even after the conversation notice ends. Even in such a case, it can be expected that the expectation of a big hit will be high, so that the game entertainment when the timer effect is executed can be stably enhanced.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in order to more preferably play the synergistic effect generated by such a timer effect and the mission effect, a specific display (conversation notice) related to the first effect should appear. ) Is displayed, a notice lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Is to be done. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed only by displaying the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), so that the deterioration of the game interest is suitably suppressed. You will be able to. The first effect targeted for the mission display does not have to be a "conversation notice", and may be executed in place of any of the effects shown in FIG. 160, for example.

When the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed, the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Any method may be adopted as a method for increasing the value, but it can be realized by adopting any of the following methods, for example.
a. First of all, it is decided whether to perform the mission effect, and when it is decided to perform the mission effect, the timer effect is set so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when it is not decided to perform the mission effect. Method to determine whether to appear b. First, it is decided whether to perform the timer effect, and when it is decided to perform the timer effect, the mission effect is set so that the appearance rate of the mission effect is higher than when it is not decided to perform the timer effect. Method to decide whether to appear

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment employs the above method b. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) when it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect has been won in the process of step S5503, it is not determined that the advance notice side timer effect has been won in the process of step S5503. In this case, the ratio of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first production is higher than that of the second mission production lottery (step S5551). It is determined whether or not to display the mission within the fluctuation (effect pattern).

It should be noted that the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) and the timer look-ahead effect (1st preceding mode, 2nd preceding mode, 3rd preceding) which will be described later suggesting that the timer effect on the notice side is executed. Aspect) can be displayed at the same time. Further, under predetermined conditions, a predetermined display (mission suggestion display) may be displayed, in which the ratio of the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) increases when it appears.

Further, regarding the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), for example, when the hold information (hold information for generating the mission effect) that is the target of the mission effect is obtained, the hold information is displayed. It may be possible to display over a plurality of variable displays until it is digested. At this time, when the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (the hold information that causes the mission effect) is the hold information that becomes a big hit, the fluctuation that is executed before the hold information that becomes the big hit is digested. A conversation notice may appear in the display to display a special display (mission success). However, when the special display (mission success) is displayed in advance in this way (when the mission success is displayed when the hold information that causes the mission effect has not been digested yet), the loss fluctuation display is executed. It is desirable to limit it when you are. That is, in this case, even though the special display (mission success) is displayed, the loss symbol (loss effect) appears in the variable display in which the special display appears, but the special display (mission success) is displayed in this way. By digesting the hold information that is the target of the mission effect and displaying the jackpot symbol (big hit effect) in the variable display, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

According to such a configuration, while the mission effect and the timer look-ahead effect are executed over multiple fluctuations, even if the mission succeeds before the timer effect count display is started, the variation display will display a lost pattern. By displaying the display, it becomes possible to realize an effect as if the variable display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried over until the variable display in which the count display of the timer effect is started appears.

FIG. 151 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is performed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 151 (b) is a diagram. Is a diagram showing an example of a second mission effect determination table T3b (second mission effect lottery) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed in the normal game state.

As is clear from FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), first, in the first mission effect determination table T3a referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is performed, when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed. Compared to the second mission production decision table T3b that is referred to, the ratio of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first production is set to be higher. There is. The same applies to each table referred to when in another gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, although the variation numbers 5 and 6 correspond to the variation pattern in which the "conversation notice" appears as the variation effect, the variation numbers 5 and 6 are acquired. At this time, it is set not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed in both the first mission effect decision table T3a and the second mission effect decision table T3b. Has been done. That is, since the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are so-called normal reach effects (reach types with low expectations), both timer effects and mission effects occur in such low expectations reach effects, and the mission is successful. In that case, there is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline because the desire such as "I wanted to see such a production with a higher-expected type of reach production" was not satisfied. Therefore, although the variable numbers 5 and 6 are reach effects in which the variable side timer effect is performed with the "conversation notice" as the effect target, in either the first mission effect determination table T3a or the second mission effect determination table T3b. However, it is desirable to set not to execute the effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed. The same applies to each table referred to when in another gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 also correspond to the fluctuation pattern in which the "conversation notice" appears as the fluctuation effect, but these fluctuation numbers are acquired. Even when there is, it is set not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed in both the first mission effect decision table T3a and the second mission effect decision table T3b. Has been done. This is because the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 are fluctuation patterns at the time of loss, and it is not possible to indicate that the mission is successful (suggesting that the jackpot has been won) in terms of staging. The same applies to each table referred to when in another gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 correspond to the hit variation patterns in which the "conversation notice" appears as the variation effect, and these variation numbers 10, 14, When the specific display related to the first production (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed when 18 and 22 are acquired, the message of mission success (confirmation that the jackpot has been won) is displayed. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the timer effect on the advance notice side is performed, the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 10, 14, 18, When 22) is acquired, it is set (tripled) so that the execution probability is significantly higher than that of the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the advance timer effect is not performed. There is. Through such control, it is possible to give the impression that the mission effect is likely to appear when the timer effect appears. The same applies to each table referred to when in another gaming state.

On the other hand, the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) during the execution of the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 16, 20) that does not cause the "conversation notice" to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. Is displayed, a strange production situation such as "The conversation notice cannot be displayed even though the mission is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed after the mission fails" may occur. do not have. Therefore, even in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the timer effect on the advance notice side is performed, the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause the "conversation advance notice" to appear as the variation effect, etc. ) Is acquired, it is set (doubled) so that the execution probability is not so high as compared with the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the advance timer effect is not performed. There is. The same applies to each table referred to when in another gaming state.

However, as will be described later, when it is decided that the mission effect will be executed after the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause the "conversation notice" to appear as the variation effect is acquired, the probability is relatively high. It is controlled so that the probability that the "conversation notice" is executed as the effect content of the notice effect is high (step S5509 and step S5534 described later). Considering that such control is performed, even for a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) in which the "conversation notice" does not appear as the effect content of the variation effect, the "conversation notice" is produced as a variation effect. The mission may be produced with the same execution probability as the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that appears as the content.

On the other hand, the variation numbers 7, 11, 15, and 19 are reach effects at the time of loss so that the "conversation notice" does not appear as the effect content of the variation effect. Since such a reach effect can be performed at the time of loss without causing the "conversation notice" to appear and the mission effect is considered to be a failure, refer to it when the advancer timer effect is performed. In the first mission effect lottery to be performed, the execution probability is set (triple times) to be significantly higher than that of the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the timer effect on the advance notice side is not performed. There is. Through such control, it is possible to give the impression that the mission effect is likely to appear when the timer effect appears. The same applies to each table referred to when in another gaming state.

As will be described later, it has been decided that the reach effect (variation numbers 7, 11, 15, 19, etc.) at the time of loss that does not cause the "conversation notice" to appear as the effect content of the variable effect is acquired and the mission effect is executed. Occasionally, the probability that the "conversation notice" is executed as the effect content of the notice effect is controlled to be zero. This is because it is not possible to indicate that the mission is successful (suggesting that the jackpot has been won) in the reach production at the time of loss.

According to the configuration related to such a mission effect, the effect target of the timer effect (count effect display) is always the second effect (conversation notice) rather than the first effect (conversation notice) (when the mission effect does not appear). It is more desirable to have a higher expectation (for example, cut-in or action of a character described later) in order to obtain a sense of expectation, and the target of the timer effect (count effect display) is the first effect. When it is (conversation notice), it is not possible to obtain a favorable sense of expectation. However, if the timer effect (count effect display) is executed when the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the effect target of the timer effect is the first effect. Regardless of whether it is the (conversation notice) or the second production (cut-in), at least the expectation that exceeds the expectation obtained by the second production (cut-in) can be obtained, so that the timer production can be obtained. You will be able to enjoy with confidence.

Moreover, when such a specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice) in the design effect. Since the appearance rate of the timer effect (count effect display) is higher than when is not displayed, the game is only displayed with the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice). It becomes possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest. In order to realize such an effect control, the variable side timer effect does not necessarily have to be prepared in an executable manner, and this may be realized only by the advance notice side timer effect.

Further, in this embodiment, both the conversation notice and the cut-in (or the role of the character described later) can be executed within one staging pattern, and the conversation notice is the cut-in (or the role described later). It is designed to appear at a timing before the object movement). Therefore, when the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, there is a possibility that the mission will succeed even if the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the timer effect count display is started is small. Being conscious will suppress the decline in expectations. In addition, when the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the timer effect count display is started is large, the expectation can be appropriately maintained by itself, so that the game entertainment when the timer effect appears can be enjoyed. It will be expected to maintain stability.

Further, as will be described later, the timing for displaying (mission display) the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is the period during which the symbol change targeted for the specific display is performed. Not only in the middle, but also during the period when the symbol change targeted for the specific display is still in a pending state, it can appear. In addition, the first effect is displayed in the situation where the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed during the period when the symbol change targeted for the mission effect is still on hold. It will be described later that a special display such as "Mission Success" may appear when it occurs (appears).

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) is performed in this way, the advance notice side timer type lottery is performed to determine the execution mode of the advance notice side timer effect as the process of step S5505. ..

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the advance notice side timer type determination table T4 referred to in the advance notice side timer type lottery (step S5505).

As shown in FIG. 152, in the advance notice side timer type determination table T4, it is acquired whether the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the single timer or the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the form of the double timer. The staging random numbers are assigned according to the variable numbers that are different. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the timer side timer type determination table T4 is referred to based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and the value of the acquired effect random number is the mode of the single timer and the double timer. (Step S5505) is executed by determining which of the modes is allocated.

The "single timer" to be determined in the notice side timer type lottery corresponds to "a mode in which one notice side timer effect is executed in one effect pattern", and is a "double timer". Means "a mode in which two timer effects on the notice side with different effect targets are executed in one effect pattern". In the notice side timer type determination table T4, the effect random numbers are assigned to each variation number so that the jackpot expectation when the "double timer" appears is higher than that of the "single timer".

Further, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned fluctuation side timer effect can be executed depending on the type (variation number) of the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, if it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of a single timer when such a count fluctuation pattern is selected, the change side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect appear in one effect pattern. As a result, the timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer (or triple timer). Similarly, when it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the double timer when the count fluctuation pattern is selected, the change side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect are set in one effect pattern. By appearing, the timer effect is executed in the form of a triple timer (or a quadruple timer).

That is, in this case, if the number of appearances (single, double) of the timer effect on the advance notice side is determined regardless of whether or not the count fluctuation pattern is selected, "the appearance of the timer effect appearing in one effect pattern". The relationship such as "the larger the number, the higher the expectation of big hits" may collapse, and this makes it impossible to understand the meaning of the effect when the timer effect is executed (which mode has the higher expectation). There is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable.

Therefore, in the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, among the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice side timer effect can appear. When a fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 7, 8, 15, 16) that does not execute the variable side timer effect is selected, the reach type (character reach with relatively low expectation, SP reach with relatively high expectation). The SP reach, which has a relatively high expectation, makes it easier to select the mode of the double timer.

On the other hand, among the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear, the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, 22) that execute the two variable side timer effects having different effect targets. When is selected, the mode of the double timer only in the case of SP reach with relatively high expectation according to the reach type (character reach with relatively low expectation, SP reach with relatively high expectation). Is selected. That is, in this case, when the mode of the quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable side timer effects and two notice side timer effects having different effect targets in one effect pattern, the type of SP reach with relatively high expectation. It will be definitively suggested that the staging pattern will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment. However, instead of this, when the mode of the quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable side timer effects and two notice side timer effects with different effect targets in one effect pattern, it is definitely confirmed that the jackpot symbol appears. It may be suggested.

When a variation pattern (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, 22,) for executing two variation side timer effects having different effect targets is selected, the mode of the single timer in the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505). Even when is selected, the mode of the triple timer appears by the appearance of two variable side timer effects and one notice side timer effect having different effect targets in one effect pattern. In order to maintain the degree of expectation when such a triple timer aspect appears, the above-mentioned timer notice lottery (first timer notice lottery, second timer notice lottery) corresponds to a fluctuation pattern with a relatively low degree of expectation. When the variable numbers 13 and 14 to be used are selected, it is determined that the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed only with a relatively low probability as compared with the variable numbers 7 to 12 of the same character reach (decision to make the triple timer). (See the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. 150).

On the other hand, among the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear, the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 9 to 12, 17 to 20) for executing one fluctuation side timer effect is selected. When it is, the selection probability of the double timer mode in the case of the character reach (variation number 9 to 12) having a relatively low expectation is set to be significantly low, and the SP reach (variation number) having a relatively high expectation is set. 17 to 20) are set so that the selection probability of the double timer mode is significantly higher. That is, in this case, in combination with the distribution mode of the variation number 13 in FIG. 150 described above, the mode of the triple timer (one variable side timer effect and two notice side timer effects, or two variable side timers) is included in one effect pattern. When the production and one timer effect on the notice side appear), the ratio of SP reach with relatively high expectations will increase instead of character reach with relatively low expectations, so it is necessary to improve the entertainment of the game. Will be able to.

In the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, only the process of selecting either the single timer or the double timer as the type of the notice side timer effect is performed. However, for the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), the lottery process may be performed so that the notice side timer effect of triple timer or more can be executed, and the mode of the count display of the notice side timer effect is expected. It may be executed as a lottery process as to which of a plurality of different modes (for example, different colors) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, after the advance notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) is performed, as a result of the advance notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), the mode of the single timer and the mode of the double timer Which of the following was decided to perform the advance notice side timer effect (step S5506), and further, as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504), it was decided to perform the mission effect (steps S5507, S532). Production lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543) targeting the timer target candidate production (notice production that can be the production target of the timer production on the notice side) with the contents (table) according to each result of. , S5544).

More specifically, one of the following processes will be executed.
In the case of the first processing status in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (YES in step S5507). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when in the first processing status, how many timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. (Step S5508). Next, a determination process as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect. (Step S5509).

-In the case of the second processing status in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5507). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when in the second processing status, how many timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. (Step S5523). Next, a determination process as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect. (Step S5524).

-When the third processing status is in the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5532). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when in the third processing status, how many timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. (Step S5533). Next, a determination process as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect. (Step S5534).

-In the case of the fourth processing status in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5532) are made. First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when in the fourth processing status, how many timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. (Step S5543). Next, a determination process as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect. (Step S5544).

FIG. 153 shows the reach type when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not made. And the processing status (in addition to the 1st to 4th processing status, the 5th processing status and the 6th processing status described later), etc. be.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). ) Is not determined to be executed, and the upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is controlled to be larger.

That is, whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed, whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of a single timer, and whether or not the reach type is a reach effect with a relatively high degree of expectation. Regardless of the judgment result such as, etc., if it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made. The upper limit of appearance (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is larger than that when is not done.

It should be noted that such processing settings are set when the above-mentioned effect lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543, S5544) when the advance notice side timer effect is executed, or when the advance notice side timer effect is not executed, which will be described later. It is realized through the setting of each table referred to in the staging lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564).

According to such a configuration, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, it is expected that the appearance rate of the notice effect will increase and the average number of appearances will increase, thereby improving the game entertainment. Of course, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that "if the notice production occurs so frequently, a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation may appear among those notice productions and the mission may be successful." become able to. As mentioned above, the production targeted for the mission display is required to be a production with a relatively low expectation such as a conversation notice, but it does not necessarily have to be the one with the lowest expectation, and the notice side. When the types of effects that can be the effect targets of the timer effect are classified into two groups according to the degree of expectation, the effect may be classified into a group on the side with a relatively low degree of expectation. Alternatively, it is a preview effect that appears at a timing before the reach effect is started because the expectation is lower than the specific effect that appears after the reach effect is started and the expectation is relatively high. May be good.

FIG. 154 is the first processing state in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507) are made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5a referred to in the process of step S5508 in the case.

First, as shown in FIG. 154, since the table T5a is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a fluctuation pattern in which the advance notice side timer effect cannot be executed. When the variation numbers 1, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 6 and the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect are acquired, the table concerned. T5a is never referenced.

Further, in the table T5a, since it is referred to when the advancer side timer effect is executed in the mode of a single timer, an effect random number is generated separately for each variation number so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected. Allocated. However, for the variable number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the advance notice effect.

Further, in the table T5a, among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effect of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation numbers 14. Not. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 10 to 12, the effect content of the variable effect is One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) appears, and when the variation number 14 is reached, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) appear as the effect content of the variation effect. It has become like. Therefore, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is substantially assigned to each of the variable numbers 10 to 12, and the variable number 14 has substantially two more notice effects. It is synonymous with being allocated to each.

Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the effect random number of "400" is substantially assigned to the advance notice number 3, and the effect random number of "600" is assigned to the advance notice number 4. Since it has the same meaning as, it can be said that among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, the notice effect is most likely to appear.

By the way, the staging pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears when the variation number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the staging pattern (character reach + cut-in A) that appears when the variation numbers 11 and 12. That is as described above. However, in the table T5a referred to when in the first processing status, the variation number 10 is an effect pattern in which "mission success (special display) is displayed and then stopped by a jackpot symbol". In view of "what is executed", the number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher than in the case of variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). When the mission success (special display) is displayed, the game interest is improved.

On the other hand, even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, almost the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such a character reach is set. .. However, among the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10, and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the variation number is a hit. The number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher in the change number 20 at the time of hit than in the change number 18 (the change number having a higher expectation of big hit is more likely to have a larger number of notices). Further, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

As will be described later, in the character reach in the first processing status, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation) until the symbol change is stopped. , Special timer) is about to appear. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit confirmation effect (special timer), and even when a conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to a successful mission, so it is a timer target. When four or more candidate effects appear, a notice effect for confirming the big hit will appear. Therefore, in the table T5a, in the variation number 7 which is the character reach at the time of loss, only up to three timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number which is the character reach (cut-in A) at the time of loss. In 11, only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects (substantially a maximum of three) can appear.

On the other hand, in the SP reach when in the first processing status, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, until the symbol change is stopped, The timing at which the cut-in B and the accessory B operation) can appear has come. However, when the conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect due to the success of the mission, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmation notice effect appears. Therefore, in the table T5a, in the variation number 15 which is the SP reach at the time of loss, only a maximum of 5 timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number which is the character reach (cut-in B) at the time of loss. In 19, only a maximum of 4 timer target candidate effects (actually, a maximum of 5) can appear.

An example of each effect prepared as the timer target candidate effect is described below.
-Conversation notice: The dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the staging display device 1600, and the jackpot expectation may change depending on the content of the dialogue, but the jackpot expectation when the conversation notice appears is another. It is set lower than the effect (hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation).
-Holding change: Display corresponding to the holding display that is the target of the digestion even during the symbol change performed according to the holding digestion (display corresponding to the holding display when it is in the holding state, although it is not already in the holding state) Is displayed, the display mode (color, etc.) of the hold display that has become the digestion target is changed, and the suggested jackpot expectation may change depending on the display mode after the change. The jackpot expectation at the time when the pending change appears is set lower than the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation.
-Cut-in A: The specific image A is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed for the effect performed during the symbol change, and the jackpot expectation when the cut-in A appears is the character A. It is set lower than the movement, cut-in B, and accessory B movement.
-Character A operation: One of the above-mentioned moving objects for staging is operated, and the jackpot expectation when the accessory A operation appears is set lower than that of the accessory B operation.
-Cut-in B: The specific image B is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed for the effect performed during the symbol change, and the jackpot expectation when the cut-in B appears is the character A. It is set lower than the movement and the movement of the accessory B.
-Character B operation: One of the above-mentioned movable objects for production is operated, and the jackpot expectation when the character B movement appears is the other production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A). , Character A operation, cut-in B) is set higher. The effect movable body operated by the accessory B operation may be different from or the same as the effect movable body used in the accessory A operation, but when the same effect movable body is used, the operation is performed. The mode will be different.

It should be noted that each of these effects can be executed as an effect targeted by the timer, and is a period before, during, or after the count display is executed, or a variable period during which the timer effect is not executed. However, it can be executed as an effect that is not a timer target. Further, each of these effects may be feasible in any of a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, such as a blue cut-in A and a red cut-in A. Further, the pending change may include a premier mode (special mode) in which a big hit is confirmed when it appears. However, in this case, if the premier mode (special mode) appears during the execution of the count display, the hold change will not be executed as the target of the timer effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

FIG. 155 is a second processing state in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5b referred to in the process of step S5523 in the case.

First, as shown in FIG. 155, since the table T5b is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the variation number 1 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the advance notice side timer effect cannot be executed. When ~ 6 is acquired, the table T5b is not referred to. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the variation numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. , 21 is also referenced in the table T5b. Therefore, in the table T5b, the effect random numbers are also assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Further, since the table T5b is also referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of a single timer, at least one timer target candidate effect is selected by the effect random number for each variation number. Is allocated. However, for the variable number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the advance notice effect.

Similarly, in the table T5b, a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variable numbers 7 to 12 among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effects. Only one timer target candidate effect is assigned to the variable numbers 13 and 14 with relatively high expectations. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 9 to 12, the effect content of the variable effect is 1. One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the effect content of the variable effect for variation numbers 13 and 14. It has become. Therefore, it is synonymous with the fact that the variable numbers 9 to 12 are assigned one more notice effect, and the variable numbers 13 and 14 are substantially two more notice effects. It is synonymous with the fact that each production is assigned.

Then, for example, the variation number 14 is substantially synonymous with the effect random number of "1000" being assigned to the notice number 3, so that the variation numbers 7 to correspond to the character reach effect. It can be said that it is allocated so that the most noticeable effects are most likely to appear among the 14.

Even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, substantially the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such a character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance rate (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

In addition, in the table T5b, the effect random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as in the table T5a, but since they are referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the table is referred to when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit of appearance (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is smaller than that of T5a.

FIG. 156 is a third processing state in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5532) are made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5c referred to in the process of step S5533 in the case.

First, as shown in FIG. 156, since the table T5c is also referred to when the advance notice side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a fluctuation pattern in which the advance notice side timer effect cannot be executed. When the variation numbers 1, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 6 and the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect are acquired, the table concerned. T5c is never referenced.

However, in the table T5c, since it is referred to when the advance timer effect is executed in the mode of the double timer, the effect random number is set separately for each variation number so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. Allocated. However, for the variable number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, it is not always necessary to allocate two timer target candidate effects as the effect content of the advance notice effect. Depending on the effect content, one timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9 and 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the advance notice effect, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13 and 21).

Further, in the table T5c, among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of five timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effect of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation numbers 14. Not. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 10 to 12, the effect content of the variable effect is 1. One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and when the variation number 14 is reached, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the effect content of the variation effect. ing. Therefore, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is substantially assigned to each of the variable numbers 10 to 12, and the variable number 14 has substantially two more notice effects. It is synonymous with being allocated to each.

Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the effect random number of "400" is practically assigned to the advance notice number 4, and the effect random number of "600" is assigned to the advance notice number 5. Since it has the same meaning as, it can be said that among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, the notice effect is most likely to appear.

In addition, in the character reach when in the third processing status, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer) until the symbol change is stopped. ) Is about to appear. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit confirmation effect (special timer), and when the conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to the success of the mission. When four or more appear, a notice effect (mission success or special timer) for confirming the big hit will appear. Therefore, in the table T5c, the maximum number of variable numbers at the time of loss is three (the total number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the total number of timer target candidate effects on the advance notice side is up to three). Is not allowed to appear.

Moreover, since one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit confirmation effect (special timer), a notice is given when the notice number 5 is selected when the change number is 8, or when the change numbers 10 and 12 are used. When the number 4 is selected, and when the notice number 3 is selected when the variation number is 14, it is confirmed that the jackpot confirmation effect (special timer) is executed. In this way, when the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, the rate of appearance of the special timer described later is higher than in the case where the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the single timer mode. In addition to winning the jackpot, you will be able to have the expectation that you will move to a high-probability time-saving state and that the 16-round jackpot game will be executed. In particular, when the mission production is executed in the form of a double timer, it becomes possible to have such a feeling of expectation even more, so it is effective to make good use of the mission production with low expectations in the first place. You will be able to create a variety of staging situations.

By the way, the staging pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears when the variation number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the staging pattern (character reach + cut-in) that appears when the variation numbers 11 and 12. That is as described above. However, in the table T5c referred to when in the third processing status, the variation number 10 is an effect pattern in which "mission success (special display) is displayed and then stopped by a jackpot symbol". In view of "what is executed", the number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher than in the case of variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). When the mission success (special display) is displayed, the game interest is improved.

On the other hand, even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, almost the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such a character reach is set. .. However, among the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10, and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the variation number is a hit. The number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher in the change number 20 at the time of hit than in the change number 18 (the change number having a higher expectation of big hit is more likely to have a larger number of notices). Further, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

As will be described later, in the SP reach in the third processing status, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation) until the symbol change is stopped. , Cut-in B, accessory B operation) has come to the timing where it can appear. However, when the conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect due to the success of the mission, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmation notice effect appears. Therefore, in the table T5c, the maximum number of variable numbers corresponding to the SP reach at the time of loss is five (the total number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the advance notice side is up to five). However, the timer target candidate effect can only appear.

FIG. 157 is a fourth processing state in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532) are made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5d referred to in the process of step S5543 in the case.

First, as shown in FIG. 157, since the table T5d is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the variation number 1 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the advance notice side timer effect cannot be executed. When ~ 6 is acquired, the table T5d is not referred to. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the variation numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. , 21 is also referenced in the table T5b. Therefore, in the table T5d, the effect random numbers are also assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Further, since the table T5d is also referred to when the notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the double timer, at least two timer target candidate effects are selected separately for each variation number. Is assigned. However, for the variable number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, it is not always necessary to allocate two timer target candidate effects as the effect content of the advance notice effect. Depending on the effect content, one timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9 and 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the advance notice effect, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13 and 21).

Similarly, in the table T5d, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variation numbers 7 and 8 among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effects. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 10 to 12, and a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 13 and 14. Is only allocated. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 9 to 12, the effect content of the variable effect is 1. One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the effect content of the variable effect for variation numbers 13 and 14. It has become. Therefore, it is synonymous with the fact that the variable numbers 9 to 12 are assigned one more notice effect, and the variable numbers 13 and 14 are substantially two more notice effects. It is synonymous with the fact that each production is assigned.

Then, for example, the variation number 14 is substantially synonymous with the effect random number of "1000" being assigned to the notice number 4, so that the variation numbers 7 to correspond to the character reach effect. It can be said that it is allocated so that the most noticeable effects are most likely to appear among the 14.

Even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, substantially the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such a character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance rate (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

In addition, in the table T5d, the effect random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as in the table T5c, but since they are referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the table is referred to when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit of appearance (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is smaller than that of T5c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), it is determined whether the notice side timer effect is performed in either the single timer mode or the double timer mode (step). S5506), and whether the decision to perform the mission effect is made as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) (steps S5507, S5532), and the contents (tables T5a to d) according to each result are timer target candidates. After determining the number of appearances of the effect (notice effect that can be the effect target of the timer effect on the advance notice side) (steps S5508, S5523, S5533, S5543), any type of advance notice is used as the timer target candidate effect for the determined number. A determination process is performed as to whether the effect is to appear or which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

FIG. 158 is a mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing situation in which the determination to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6a-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 (step S5509) as a result of executing the process of step S5508.

For example, as shown in FIG. 158, this table T6a-1 (step S5509: notice number 1) is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the mode of a single timer. Therefore, one advance notice effect determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effect is naturally set as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect (in the figure, the circles indicate the advance notice side timer effect). It shows that it is executed as a production target). On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5509: number of notices N), N timer target candidate effects are used. Along with determining the advance notice effect, one of them will be determined as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect.

In addition, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects, N-1 of them (1 in the single mode and 2 in the double mode). ) When the following number of effects are targeted for the preview side timer effect (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544), even if N same effect combinations are selected as the timer target candidate effects. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation is different depending on which of these effects is determined as the advancer timer effect. For example, a pre-effect that appears at a relatively early timing in one staging pattern (for example, a conversation notice) and a post-effect that appears at a relatively late timing in one staging pattern (for example, character A). When (operation) is selected as the timer target candidate effect, the post-effect (for example, the character A operation) is performed on the advance side effect than when the earlier effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target of the advancer side effect timer. It is set so that the rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is higher when the timer is set as the effect target (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the variation number for executing "conversation notice" or "cut-in A, B" is acquired as the effect content of the variation effect, the advance notice effect is performed. It is possible to determine "conversation notice" and "cut-in A, B" as the content of the production. However, as a result, if it is decided that the same effect appears in both the effect content of the variable effect and the effect content of the advance notice effect, it is not controlled to appear separately as the effect content of the advance notice effect, and it varies. The process of setting the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A, B) that appears as the effect content of the effect as the effect target of the advancer timer effect is performed (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544).

For example, in the example of the table T6a-1 (notice number 1), when the "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect at the fluctuation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, or the "cut" is performed at the change numbers 11 to 14. If "in A" is determined as the production content of the preview production, or if "cut-in B" is determined as the production content of the preview production in the variation numbers 19 to 22, the production content of the variation production and the production of the preview production. It will be decided that the same production will appear in both the content and the content. However, here, the control to make them appear separately as the effect content of the notice effect is not performed, and the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) that appears as the effect content of the variable effect is set as the effect target of the timer effect on the notice side. Processing is being performed.

If it is decided to make a specific effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) appear in both the effect content of the variable effect and the effect content of the advance notice effect, this is separately set as the effect content of the advance notice effect. It is also possible to set the specific effect of the side to appear separately (the effect content of the advance notice effect) as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect by controlling the appearance of the effect.

Further, since this table T6a-1 (number of notices 1) is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), it is also shown in FIG. 148. As described above, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the "conversation notice" are acquired as the content of the variation effect, or "conversation notice" is selected as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect). In the case (PTN1), a special display (mission success) is displayed and it is definitively suggested that a jackpot symbol appears.

In this regard, in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 at the time when the "conversation notice" is executed as the content of the variation effect, the variation numbers 8, 12, 12 at the time when the "conversation notice" is not executed as the content of the variation effect. Compared to 16 and 20, the ratio of determining "conversation notice" as the effect content of the notice effect is set to be lower. That is, as described above, when the "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect both produce the "conversation notice". However, when two timer effects target the same effect, basically, a big hit is expected compared to the case where two timer effects target different effects. This is because the degree is set to be low. As a result, the appearance rate of the special display (mission success) can be made relatively low when both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect target the "conversation notice".

The same applies to the effect content of the variable effect other than the "conversation notice". For example, among the variable numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach, the variable number that does not execute "cut-in B" as the effect content of the variable effect. Of the 15 and 16, 150 staging random numbers are assigned to the variable number 15 at the time of loss, while 250 staging random numbers are assigned to the variable number 16 at the time of hitting. On the other hand, among the variation numbers 19 and 20 that execute "cut-in B" as the effect content of the variation effect among the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach, the variation number 19 at the time of loss has 250 effect random numbers. While it is allocated, only 200 staging random numbers are allocated to the variation number 20 at the time of hit.

That is, in this case, if "cut-in B" is targeted only by the variable side timer effect at the variable numbers 15 and 16, both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect appear at the variable numbers 19 and 20. In both cases, the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than in the case where "cut-in B" is the target of production. As a result, in a situation where two timer effects are counted and displayed at the same time, whether or not those timer effects reach a predetermined value for the same effect target functions as an important effect element, and during the count display. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

Further, among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach, the variation numbers 8, 10, 12, and 14 at the time of hitting are until the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern (during symbol variation). In the form of a special timer that targets the effect that appears after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is stopped (for example, the probability change suggestion effect during the jackpot game or the high round suggestion effect) in the effect pattern instead of the effect that appears in. It is possible to decide to execute the timer effect on the notice side. This special timer will be described later, but in this embodiment, even if it is determined in the process of step S5509 to generate the special timer, the special timer may not appear, and the execution thereof may not occur. The execution mode of the special timer, including the presence or absence of the above, will be determined in the process of step S5514 later.

Here, in the timer effect on the advance notice side, there is a case where the jackpot expectation is relatively high even if the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small (for example, when the count display is started from the middle of the variable display). On the other hand, in the variable side timer effect, when the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small, the expectation suggested by the timer effect is always lower than when it is large. You may.

As will be described later, such a special timer not only definitively suggests that a jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, but also when it appears, it is in a high-probability time-saving gaming state or a 16-round jackpot. It can be said that it is more useful for the player than the timer effect, which targets other effects, in that the ratio of the game being executed is relatively high. The ratio may include 100%.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the special display (mission success) appears in the mission production, the appearance ratio of the special timer is higher than when the special display (mission success) does not appear. By controlling, the expectation when the special display (when the mission is successful) is more preferably played (steps S5509, S5534). For example, in the table T6a-1 (number of notices 1), among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach where the special timer can appear, the variable side timer effect (mission success) that targets the conversation notice appears. While 100 staging random numbers are assigned to the special timers for the variable numbers 10 and 14 at the time of hitting, the variable side timer staging (mission success) that targets the conversation notice does not appear. Only 50 staging random numbers are assigned to the special timers in the variable numbers 8 and 12.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the special display (mission success) does not appear, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is performed (steps S5509, S5534), the mission effect (conversation). By controlling so that the appearance rate of the special timer is higher than when the notice is not performed (steps S5524, S5544), the expectation when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) appears. Is played more favorably.

Further, when the timer effect is performed in the double mode of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer is higher than that in the case where the timer effect is performed in the double mode of the notice side timer effect only. It is set to be low. Further, even when the timer effect is performed in the triple mode of one variable side timer effect and two notice side timer effects, one of the notice side timer effects targets the same effect as the variable side timer effect. In this case, the appearance ratio of the special timer is set to be lower than when the same effect is not set as the effect target for the advance notice side timer effect and the variable side timer effect.

FIG. 159 is a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6b-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5523 (step S5524).

As shown in FIG. 159, in this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach in which the special timer can appear, the variation numbers 10 and 14 50 staging random numbers are assigned, and 20 staging random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 8 and 12. In this way, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not performed (table T6b-1), the special timer is compared with when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is performed (table T6b-1). It is clear that the appearance rate of is set to be low.

Further, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1) is referred to when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed, the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. The table T6b-1 (number of notices 1) is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), the effect random numbers are also assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Moreover, in the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21 and 22, the variation side timer effect targeting the "conversation notice" appears as the effect content of the variation effect. When "conversation notice" is selected as the effect content, both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are executed with the "conversation notice" as the effect target. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), when "conversation notice" is selected in the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21 and 22, "conversation notice" is selected in the other variation numbers. The production random numbers are distributed so that the expectation of big hits is lower than when "conversation notice" is selected.

The same applies to the contents of the variable effect other than the "conversation notice". For example, the "cut-in B" in which both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect can be the target of the effect in SP reach is also the same. Allocation is made in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned table T6a-1 (preliminary number 1).

Further, similarly, this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1) is also referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the mode of the single timer. One notice effect determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effect is naturally set as the effect target of the advancer side timer effect. On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5524: number of notices N), N timer target candidate effects are used. The same applies to the point that the advance notice effect is determined and one of them is determined as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect.

In contrast to the timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524) when the advance notice side effect timer is performed in such a single mode, the timer target advance notice lottery (step S5534,) when the advance notice side effect timer is performed in the double mode. Also in S5544), when both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are targeted for the same effect, a big hit as compared with the case where the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are different effects. The production random numbers are basically distributed in the same manner, such as the point that the degree of expectation is set to be low.

FIG. 160 shows a fourth processing situation in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6d-2 which is referred to when it is decided to make a notice number 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5543 (step S5544).

As shown in FIG. 160, this table T6d-2f (step S5544: notice number 2) is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the mode of the double timer. Therefore, both of the two advance notice effects determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effects are naturally set as the effect targets of the advance notice side timer effects. On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (3 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5544: number of notices N), N timer target candidate effects are used. Along with determining the advance notice effect, two of them will be determined as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect. Such processing is also executed in the timer target advance notice lottery in other production situations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160, in this table T6d-2f as well, when both the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect are the same effect, the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect are produced. The jackpot expectation is set to be lower than when a different effect is set as the effect target.

If one of the two advance notice effects selected as the advance notice side effect timer is the same effect target as the variable side effect timer, one of the two advance notice effects selected as the special advance notice side effect timer is the variable side. The selection ratio of the special timer is lower than when the target is not the same as the effect timer.

In particular, when both of the two advance notice effects selected as the advance notice side effect timers in the variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22 are the same effect targets as the two variable side effect timers appearing in one effect pattern. Has a significantly lower expectation of a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of such a timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544), which effect of the timer target candidate effect appears, and the effect of the advancer side timer effect. When it is decided which target is to be selected, the count display lottery is then performed as the process of step 510.

In this count display lottery (step 510), each effect for which it is determined to appear as a timer target candidate effect is to appear at which timing in one effect pattern (variable pattern), and further, it is set as an effect target. A decision is made as to which timing within one effect pattern (variation pattern) the timer effect on the advance notice side to be counted and displayed is to be executed. In this decision, when the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the effect of the notice side timer effect is late, the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is compared with the case where the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the effect of the notice side timer effect is early. ) Should be performed so that the appearance rate is high.

FIG. 161 is a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variation number corresponding to the character reach is selected.

For example, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are selected in such a second processing situation, first, as an effect on the variation effect (effect pattern) side, as shown in FIG. 161.
・ During the normal production period, when the normal production is performed,
・ The normal reach production period after the decorative pattern is in the reach mode under the background during the normal production, ・ The character reach production period in which the production is progressed by switching to a background different from the normal production, and ・ The big hit It has been decided that each period, such as the symbol stop period in which the decorative symbol is definitely stopped (big hit symbol, lost symbol), will appear sequentially within the fluctuation time of 50 seconds (the period during which the symbol changes). (Refer to the lines of "Variable time" and "Variable PTN effect" in the figure).

Further, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 14 is acquired, as an effect pattern, a variable side timer effect is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, and this is displayed for 10 seconds, and then "conversation notice". It is also determined that "cut-in A" is made to appear after the variable side timer effect is restarted after a predetermined time has elapsed and this is displayed for 10 seconds.

As described above, even if it is one fluctuation pattern (variation number), the effect pattern is not limited to this, and the variation side timer effect is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, and this is counted and displayed for 5 seconds. It is also possible to select other staging patterns such as making a "conversation notice" appear after the timer. Further, as described above, the selection of such an effect pattern has already been executed before the lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) relating to the advance notice effect.

Then, in the count display lottery (step 510), the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524) is determined while each such effect period appears in sequence and the effect content on the variable side is determined. It is determined at what timing the effect target of the advance notice side effect timer and the advance notice side effect timer that counts and displays toward the effect target appear. In addition to the timer target candidate effect that is the effect target of the timer target effect timer in the timer target advance notice lottery, if the timer target candidate effect that is not the effect target is further determined, the timer target candidate effect that is not the effect target is The appearance timing will also be determined by the count display lottery (step 510).

For example, if "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), any of the conversation notices 1 to 4 as shown in FIG. 161. It is determined whether to execute the conversation notice and the timer effect on the notice side in the mode of. In this embodiment, of the conversation notices 1 to 4 in the figure, the mode of the conversation notice 1 has the lowest expectation of a big hit, and it is selected so that the expectation of a big hit increases as the number increases. Probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 4 is selected based on the winning of the big hit and the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14), and the winning of the big hit is different. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on a different selection table.

However, at this time, when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, and 14 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variation effect are acquired, the advance notice effect is also performed in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524). When "conversation notice" is decided as the production content, the mode of the conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, apart from the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variable effect, the conversation notice does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, and the count display of the timer effect is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variable effect. The control to be performed will be executed (aspect of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524), as the effect content of the advance notice effect, "hold". When "change" is determined, it is determined in which mode of the pending changes 1 to 5 the pending change and the advance notice side timer effect are executed, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect content of the above notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of cut-in A1 to 3 the cut-in A and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed, and the "feature A operation" is determined as the effect content of the above-mentioned advance notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of the accessory A operation 1 to 4 the accessory A operation and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed, and the "special timer" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect. In this case, it is determined in which mode of the special timers 1 and 2 the notice side timer effect is executed.

In this embodiment, in any of the effect selections of the hold change 1 to 5, the cut-in A effect 1 to 3, and the accessory A operation 1 to 4 in the figure, the mode with the smallest number is the highest probability of big hit. The selection probability is set so that the expectation of a big hit increases as the number increases. On the other hand, the special timers 1 and 2 are both effects indicating that the jackpot symbol (special display mode) always appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161 in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, there are three timings at which the advance timer effect can appear while one effect pattern (here, character reach) is performed. Although it is prepared (at the start of fluctuation, shortly before the appearance timing of notice E2, shortly before the appearance timing of notice F), those appearance timings are for multiple types of timer target notices (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in). A, the character A operation, and the special timer) are also used. Then, at such a plurality of appearance timings (at the start of fluctuation, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice F), a plurality of count display totals are prepared as the total number of count displays when the notice side timer effect appears (). 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, etc.), and no matter which of the total count display is displayed, it is predicted which production is the target of the production. It is designed to be difficult to configure.

For example, as shown in FIG. 161 when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, 10 seconds is reached at the timing that arrives shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the above-mentioned plurality of appearance timings. , 20 seconds, 30 seconds, or a timer effect on the notice side having the total number of count displays can appear. However, when the notice side timer effect having the total number of count displays for 10 seconds appears, it is difficult to predict which mode of the conversation notice 3 or the hold change 3 is executed only in the character reach effect pattern. Even when the notice side timer effect having the total number of count displays for 20 seconds appears, either mode of hold change 4 or cut-in A2 is executed only in the character reach effect pattern. It is difficult to predict.

In this regard, when the notice side timer effect having the total number of count displays for 30 seconds appears at the timing that arrives shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the above-mentioned multiple appearance timings, only the character reach effect pattern is displayed. As you can see, only the aspect of the accessory A operation 2 can be executed. However, looking at the SP reach effect pattern (see FIG. 162), which will be described later, the mode of the character A operation 2 can be executed at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation. Even if the notice side timer effect with the total number of count displays for 30 seconds appears at the timing when it arrives before, the notice side timer effect will be displayed in any mode including whether it is character reach or SP reach. It is difficult to predict whether it will be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to leave it unclear which effect is targeted for the effect when the notice side timer effect appears (the jackpot expectation differs depending on the type of effect targeted for the effect). Since it is possible, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained until the count display of the timer effect reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0). In this embodiment, when a timer effect on the notice side with the same total number of count displays appears at the same timing, basically (unless there is a balance with the mission effect, etc.), the effect target is the conversation notice. The time is the lowest expectation of a big hit, and the expectation of a big hit is set to gradually increase in the order of hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, and accessory B operation.

Further, according to the above configuration, when the advance notice side timer effect appears, a plurality of count display total numbers (the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the length of the number of seconds) are prepared at any appearance timing. , When the notice side timer effect appears, it becomes possible to make people interested in which the total number of count displays is, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest when the notice side timer effect appears. ..

In this embodiment, even if the timer effect on the advance notice side appears at any timing, it is difficult to predict the effect target at the time of appearance, but the effect target is one for the total number of count displays. A mode in which the effect target is set as predictable by associating only (for example, a special timer) may be included. Further, as the appearance timing at which the timer effect on the advance notice side may appear, the appearance timing in which only one count display total number appears may be included.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), for convenience of explanation, when the same effect is set for the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, the effect is changed in the figure. It is described as if the count display is performed for the same number of seconds in the side timer effect and the advance timer effect, or the count display is terminated at the same timing. However, as described above, in reality, even if the same effect (for example, conversation advance notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the end timing of each count display is made different. , One of the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) and ends, while the other count display is continued.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), it is described as if the count display of the timer effect is performed in seconds, but the unit of the number appearing in the count display is "seconds". It is not limited to. Therefore, for example, the time required for the numerical change of the count display may be different between the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, and the time required for each numerical value change in the count display appearing in the variable side timer effect is constant. It does not have to be.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), when the "special timer" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect, the advance notice side timer effect is produced in any of the special timers 1 and 2. Is to be decided whether to execute. That is, in this case, when 20 seconds have passed after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (character reach) (during the execution period of the jackpot game), the count display becomes a specific numerical value (here, 0). Will reach. After that, an effect suggesting that the type of jackpot is advantageous to the player (for example, a hit type that shifts to a high-probability time-saving state, a hit type in which a 16-round jackpot game is performed, etc.) is started. However, the mode of such a special timer is set in step S5514 described later.

In this embodiment, it is determined which of the special timers 1 and 2 is selected in the count display lottery (step S5511), but the process related to this determination will be described later. It may be set in step S5514.

Further, when the count display is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, not at the timing when the variable display according to the hold information is started, it is a case where the timer look-ahead effect described later is not executed. Also, an embodiment (for example, in preparation for a timer) displayed in the timer look-ahead effect described later may appear (for example, appear with a predetermined probability) for a predetermined time until the count display is started.

FIG. 162 is a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variation number corresponding to SP reach is selected.

For example, when variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach are selected in such a second processing situation, first, as an effect on the variation effect (effect pattern) side, as shown in FIG. 162.
・ During the normal production period, when the normal production is performed,
-The normal reach production period after the decorative pattern has reached the reach mode under the background during the normal production.-The character reach production period in which the background is switched to a different background from the normal production and the production progresses.
・ The decorative design is not fixed and stopped within the character reach production period, and the SP reach production period that appears in the form of further progress of the production, and ・ The decorative design is fixed and stopped so that the winning of the big hit is shown (big hit design, lost design) It is in the processing status that it has been decided that each period, such as the symbol stop period, appears sequentially within the fluctuation time of 90 seconds (the period during which the symbol changes) (“variable time” in the figure, See the "Variable PTN Staging" line).

Further, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 22 is acquired, as an effect pattern, a variable side timer effect is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, and this is displayed for 10 seconds and then "conversation notice". It is also determined that "cut-in B" is made to appear after the variable side timer effect is restarted after a predetermined time has elapsed and this is displayed for 10 seconds.

In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), as in the case of the example (character reach: number of notices 1) shown in FIG. 161 even if there is one fluctuation pattern (variation number), the effect pattern is Is not limited to this, and other effect patterns such as starting the variable side timer effect after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, counting and displaying this for 5 seconds, and then displaying the "conversation notice" can be selected. ing.

In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), for example, when the "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), the same. As shown in FIG. 162, it is determined in which mode of the conversation notices 1 to 6 the conversation notice and the timer effect on the notice side are to be executed. In this embodiment, of the conversation notices 1 to 6 in the figure, the mode of the conversation notice 1 has the lowest expectation of a big hit, and it is selected so that the expectation of a big hit increases as the number increases. Probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is selected based on the winning of the big hit and the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 15 to 22), and the winning of the big hit is different. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on a different selection table.

However, similarly to this, when the variation numbers 17, 18, 21, 22 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variation effect are acquired, the above notice is also given in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524). When "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the effect, the mode of the conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, apart from the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variable effect, the conversation notice does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, and the count display of the timer effect is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variable effect. The control to be performed will be executed (aspect of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

Further, as shown in FIG. 162, when the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524), as the effect content of the advance notice effect, "hold". When "change" is determined, it is determined in which mode of the pending changes 1 to 7 the pending change and the advance notice side timer effect are executed, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect content of the above notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of cut-in A1 to 5 the cut-in A and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed, and the "feature A operation" is determined as the effect content of the above-mentioned advance notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of the accessory A operation 1 to 4 the accessory A operation and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed, and "cut-in B" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of cut-in B1 to 5 the cut-in B and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed, and the "feature B operation" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect. Determines which mode of the accessory B operation 1 to 4 is to execute the accessory B operation and the advance notice side timer effect, respectively.

Even in this SP reach example, any of the holding changes 1 to 7, cut-in A1 to 5, accessory A operation 1 to 4, cut-in B1 to 5, and accessory B operation 1 to 4 in the figure is selected. Also, the mode with the smallest number is the mode with the lowest expectation of big hit, and the selection probability is set so that the expectation of big hit increases as the number increases.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 162, six timings at which the notice side timer effect can appear while one effect pattern (here, SP reach) is performed are prepared (at the start of fluctuation, the advance notice E2). Shortly before the appearance timing of, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice F, shortly before the end of the normal reach production period, within the character reach production period, the timing when the SP reach production period starts), the timer on the notice side at these timings It is the same as the case of the example shown in FIG. 161 that it is difficult to predict which effect the effect target is when the effect appears.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, the mode in which the effect target is set to be predictable by associating only one effect target with the total number of count displays (for example, the timer 40 seconds of the cut-in B) or the advance notice. The appearance timing at which the side timer effect can appear includes an appearance timing (for example, 10 seconds at the timing when the SP reach effect period starts) in which only one count display total number appears.

In this way, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the appearance time of the advance notice effect and the advance notice side timer effect determined in the timer target advance notice lottery is determined. In this regard, when the number of advance notice effects determined by the timer target advance notice lottery is two or more, in addition to the effects that are targeted for the advance timer effect, the appearance time of the effects that are not the target of the advance timer effect. Etc. are also decided. Further, when the notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the double timer, at what timing each of the two notice side timer effects and the effect to be the effect of them appear (two notice side timer effects). (Including whether or not to execute the count display at the same time) will be further determined.

However, in this count display lottery (step S5510), the number of advance notice effects determined in the timer target advance notice lottery, whether or not the mode is a double timer, and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are executed. It is desirable that the appearance time of the advance notice effect and the advance notice side timer effect determined in the timer target advance notice lottery is determined in different manners depending on the processing status such as whether or not. For example, in the processing situation where the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, if the conversation notice appears at a relatively early stage after the change starts, there is no dramatic excitement, so compare after the change starts. It is desirable to make it easier to select conversation notices that appear at a later stage. Further, in the aspect of the double timer, two timer effects are executed when the situation in which each count display is simultaneously progressed appears, rather than when each count display is executed in a period in which the count displays do not overlap in one effect pattern. Since it is possible to give a feeling of what is being done, the selection ratio will be higher when the situation where each count display is progressing at the same time appears than when the situation where each count display is progressing at the same time does not appear. It is desirable to do. Further, when the number of the advance notice effects determined by the timer target advance notice lottery is two or more, the appearance time of the advance notice effects is determined so that the advance notice effects do not appear at the same time.

It should be noted that the timing at which the timer effect on the notice side can appear (for example, at the start of fluctuation, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice F, shortly before the end of the normal reach effect period, and the character reach effect period. Regarding the timing when the SP reach production period starts), each notice production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation) can be performed within the period. It is desirable to set. That is, in this case, the notice side timer effect is started even if the notice side timer effect does not appear at a specific timing, or the notice side timer effect is performed even if the notice side timer effect does not start at a specific timing. It can be expected that the decline in the game interest will be suppressed. In addition, since the advance notice effect appears at a specific timing and the effect situation in which the advance notice side timer effect is started may occur, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved. In this case, when the advance notice effect is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (at a specific timing), the advance notice effect is not executed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side is started is higher than the time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the count display lottery (step S5510) is performed in this way, the mode of the advance notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery becomes a special timer as the process of the next step S5511. Determine if it is possible.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the timer target candidate effect (notice effect that can be the effect target of the timer effect on the advance notice side) is not targeted. The non-target notices E1, E2, E3 and the non-target notice F can be executed as the notice effect (notice effect that cannot be the effect target of the timer effect on the advance notice side). Of these, the non-target notice E2 is set so that the jackpot expectation is lower than that of the non-target notice F in the situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is not performed, whereas the notice side timer effect is set. In the situation where the count display is performed, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than that of the non-target notice F.

In such a configuration, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the count display is not performed. When the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being performed, the expectation that the big hit symbol (specific symbol mode) will appear is lower than when the count is displayed. The timer effect on the advance notice side (count effect) so that the expectation that the jackpot symbol (specific symbol mode) will appear is higher than when the non-target advance notice F (second effect) is executed while the display is being performed. Display) becomes feasible. Therefore, the timer effect on the notice side (the non-target notice E2 (during the execution period of the count display)) in which the count display is performed in such a way that the expectation when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears is greatly increased. The timer effect) in which the first effect) is started and ended is referred to as a "special timer".

That is, in this case, while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a lower expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect), whereas the count display is displayed. While it is being performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as a highly expected effect than the non-target notice F (second effect). Therefore, although it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) that is not originally related to the effect target of the notice side timer effect (count effect display), the non-target notice E2 (first effect) until the count display is exhausted. It becomes possible to make people interested in whether or not one effect) appears, and by doing so, the game entertainment can be maintained during the period until the count display is digested and the predetermined effect (timer target candidate effect) is performed. It will be expected to be planned.

In addition, when the count display is started with the total number of counts with a small number of timer effects on the notice side, the expectation of big hits tends to be lower than when the count display is started with the total number of counts with a large number of timer effects on the notice side. By realizing the control applied to such a special timer, even if the count display is started with a small total number of counts on the notice side timer effect, the non-target notice E2 is executed while the count display is being executed. It becomes possible to make people aware of the possibility that a timer will appear, and it will be possible to suppress a decline in the interest in playing games. In this sense, if the non-target notice E2 appears while the count display is being executed, the premier mode in which the jackpot is confirmed in the subsequent effects (conversation notice, cut-in, character movement, etc.) that are the targets of the timer effect. It is desirable to control so that the rate of appearance of is high. The ratio may include 100%.

In this embodiment, the non-target notices E1 to E3 are executed as so-called step effects, and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is conditional on the appearance of the non-target notice E1. It is supposed to be able to appear in. Further, the non-target notice E3 can appear on condition that the non-target notices E1 and E2 appear respectively, and in this embodiment, the big hit symbol always appears when the non-target notice E3 appears. I am doing it. According to such a configuration, if the non-target notice E1 (specific effect) appears while the count display of the notice side timer effect is being performed, it is necessary to make people interested in whether the non-target notice E2 appears. Will be able to play, and it will be possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the count digestion period.

However, the non-target notices E1 to E3 do not necessarily have to be executed as so-called step effects, and are not necessary for realizing the above-mentioned effect relationship between the non-target notice E2 and the non-target notice F. Target notices E1 and E3 do not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the order is such that the non-target notice F appears after the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears, but the order is not limited to this, and for example, the non-target notice F (second effect) appears after the non-target notice F (second effect) appears. The target notice E2 (first production) may appear. In short, the non-target notice E2 may be the one that appears first in all the notice effects, or may be the one that appears last in all the notice effects, and the appearance timing thereof. May be set appropriately. Further, the non-target notice E2 may be an image related (suggested) to the type of reach effect executed in the variable display.

Further, when the non-target notice E2 is not realized as a so-called step effect, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 is performed in any one of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations. At this time, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the mode with the highest jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than the non-target notice F even if the count display is not performed. .. However, when comparing the jackpot expectation (expectation including all aspects) that can be expected when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is not performed and the jackpot expectation that can be expected when the non-target notice F appears. , It is required that the jackpot expectation is higher when the non-target notice F appears.

In this regard, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is performed (in the case of the special timer), the non-target notice E2 appears in any of a plurality of modes including the mode in which the jackpot expectation is low. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the non-target notice F regardless of which aspect appears. That is, in this case, even though the non-target notice E2 is executed in a mode with a low jackpot expectation, a production situation in which the jackpot expectation is dramatically increased is created. Even if the appearance may be disappointing for a moment, it is expected that the game will be improved as a surprise by confirming that the count display is being executed. In this sense, the non-target notice E2 can be executed in a mode with a low jackpot expectation even in such a special timer situation, and then the non-target notice E2 is executed in any mode including the low mode. Even if is executed (furthermore, it is desirable that the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is the same regardless of whether or not other notice effects have occurred). The degree of expectation may include 100%. However, even in this case, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is performed, it is desirable to set so that the highly expected aspect among the plurality of aspects is likely to appear.

Further, when the count display straddling the non-target notice E2 is executed, for example, the same number (for example, even if the count display is started by any of different total counts (for example, “10” and “5”)). It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when "1") is set. At this time, among the candidates for the total number of counts (for example, "20", "10", "5") appearing at the start of the count display, less than half of the candidates with the smallest total number of counts (for example, "5"). It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when the number (a number less than 2.5) is reached. In this way, by preventing the non-target notice E2 from appearing until the count display is completely digested, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the period until the count display is completely digested.

The non-target notice F may also be made executable in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, but in the situation of a special timer, the non-target notice F has the highest jackpot expectation. Even if it appears in a mode, it is required to set the non-target notice F so that the jackpot expectation is not higher than that of the non-target notice E2 (for example, the mode with the lowest jackpot expectation).

Further, the non-target notice E2 may be made to be able to appear at any of a plurality of timings from the time when the variable display is started. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears at the same timing and with the same total number of counts, there will be a case where the non-target notice E2 is straddled and a case where the count display is not straddled. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the variable side timer effect, the non-target notice E2 appears in the candidates that can be selected as the execution mode (effect pattern) within the execution period of the count display. It is designed not to include such an aspect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when it is determined in the process of step S5511 that the mode of the advance notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) can be a special timer, step S5512 As the process of, the first timer non-target notice lottery is performed, and when it is determined that the mode of the notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) cannot be a special timer, the process of step S5525 is performed. As a result, the second timer non-target notice lottery will be held.

The case where it is determined that the timer can be a special timer is, for example, in the example shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, an effect mode shown in bold and diagonal characters among a plurality of effect modes (for example, FIG. This is the case when the conversation notices 2 and 3 shown in 161, the pending changes 2 to 4, the cut-in A1 and 2 and the character movements 1 and 2) are selected, and whether or not the effect mode can be a special timer. Is pre-classified.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the table T7a referred to in the first timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512), and FIG. 164 is a diagram referred to in the second timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T7b.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, in the timer non-target advance notice lottery (steps S5512 and S5525), the advance notice side timer effect cannot be the target based on the big hit winning result, the fluctuation pattern (variation number), and the like. A determination process is performed as to which of the non-targeted effects E1 to E3 and F prepared as the effects is to be executed.

Of these, in the table T7a (first timer non-target notice lottery) referred to at the time of the special timer, the notice E2 is compared with the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when the special timer is not. The jackpot expectation when the mode to be executed (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected is significantly high. More specifically, when the mode for executing the notice E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the mode for executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected. ing.

On the other hand, in the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when the timer is not a special timer, the notice F is executed when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. The jackpot expectation is lower than when the embodiment (PTN5, 6) is selected.

In this embodiment, when the table T7a referred to at the time of the special timer and the table T7b referred to at the time of not the special timer are compared, when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. There is a change in the distribution of the staging random numbers and there is a change in the jackpot expectation, but when the mode (PTN5, 6) for executing the notice F is selected, there is no change in the jackpot expectation, and even the distribution of the staging random numbers changes. Is not the same.

According to such an effect by the special timer, when the count display is executed in the mode of straddling the non-target notice E2 (the mode of the special timer), the mode of straddling the non-target notice F without straddling the non-target notice E2 (the mode of straddling the non-target notice E2). Compared to the case where the count display is executed in a mode that is not a special timer), the rate at which a highly expected effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol effect is stopped. The ratio will be increased.

Furthermore, when both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed in one symbol effect in which the count effect is not executed, the count effect is not executed. The non-target notice F (second effect) is not executed in the production, and the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing is higher than when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed. Even if the (second effect) is not executed and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed within one symbol effect, the count effect is performed in the first mode straddling the non-target notice E2 (first effect). Is executed, both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed within one symbol effect, and the non-target notice F (second effect) is straddled. The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when the count effect is executed in the two modes.

That is, in this case, even if the "non-target notice E2 (first effect)" and the "count effect" are executed symbol effects, the count effect is "non-target notice E2 (first effect)". "Non-target notice F (second production)" that is executed to suggest that the expectation level has risen further without straddling "non-target notice E2 (first production)". The degree of expectation is higher when the "non-target notice F (second effect)" is not performed than when the "non-target notice F (second effect)" is performed in one symbol production. Will be high. Therefore, an effect different from any of the effect targets of the count effect (non-target notice E2 (first effect) and non-target notice F (second effect) (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in) Although it is not set to (B, character B movement, etc.) and is not originally related to the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or the non-target notice F (second effect), the "count effect ends". "Does the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appear before?" Or "Even if the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears after the count effect ends, the non-target notice F (first effect) will appear after that. It becomes possible to make people interested in "whether two productions) will be further executed", and this will allow the game to be enjoyed during the period until the count display is digested and the predetermined production (timer target candidate production) is performed. It will be expected to be maintained.

In this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the non-target notice E2 (first effect), which is not executed as the effect target of the count effect, it is not executed as the effect target of the count effect. The relationship between the non-target notice F (second effect) and when the count effect straddles the expectation is reversed from the relationship between the expectation when the count effect does not straddle. However, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) may be able to be executed as the effect target of the count effect. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, the effectability as to whether or not the count effect straddles the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or the non-target notice F (second effect). Will also be added.

Further, either one of the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) can be executed as the effect target of the count effect, and the other is executed as the effect target of the count effect. It may be something that does not happen.

In addition, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the jackpot expectation is higher than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect), which is advantageous to the player. It may be configured so that the rate of transition to a different gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state, etc.) is high. At this time, the ratio of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player (high-probability time-saving gaming state, etc.) may be 100%.

Further, as described above, the counting effect is executed in any one of a plurality of modes (total number of counts, display mode, timing at which counting is started, etc.). In this regard, the count effect of a specific mode may be executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not to straddle the notice F (second effect), or straddle the notice E2 (first effect). Moreover, it is desirable that the execution is performed so that there is at least a case where the execution is performed so as to straddle the notice F (second effect). According to such a configuration, for example, even if the counting effect of the same number of seconds is started, either the case of straddling only the notice E2 (first effect) or the case of straddling only the notice F (second effect). Since it becomes possible to advance the count effect while it is unknown whether the count effect is the same, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the period in which the count effect is being executed.

Furthermore, regarding the counting effect of a specific mode, there are cases where the count effect is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not to straddle the notice F (second effect), and a case where the notice E2 (first effect) is straddled. In addition to the case where it is executed so as to straddle the notice F (second effect), there is also a case where it is executed so that neither the notice E2 (first effect) nor the notice F (second effect) is straddled. It is desirable to have it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) will appear over the entire period from the start to the end of the count effect. become able to. In this case, the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) may appear within the same symbol variation in which the count effect of the specific mode is executed, but within the same symbol variation. It may not appear in.

Further, in this embodiment, when the notice E2 (first effect) is straddled by the count effect, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when the notice F (second effect) is straddled by the count effect. It was configured as follows. However, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), it is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears does not change regardless of which mode the count effect is executed. .. With such a configuration, it became possible to provide a completely independent staging effect that is not affected by the staging effect such as "which mode appears as the counting effect", and the counting effect was executed. It becomes possible to suitably enhance the staging of the time.

On the other hand, when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect), the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears may change depending on which mode the count effect is executed. desirable. According to such a configuration, depending on whether the target to be straddled by the count effect is the notice E2 (first effect) or the notice F (second effect), the mode as the count effect becomes the jackpot expectation degree. Since it becomes possible to make the effect or the effect different, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained during the period during which the count effect is being performed.

However, even if the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is the most expected aspect among the plurality of modes, the expectation level when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect) is exceeded. It is desirable not to have them, for example, to have the same expectations. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Further, among the counting effects of the plurality of modes, at least some of the counting effects are configured so as to straddle the notice F (second effect) but not the notice E2 (first effect). It is desirable to do. In this way, the number of modes as a count effect that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect) is made smaller than the number of modes as a count effect that can straddle the notice F (second effect). By doing so, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility of straddling the notice F (second effect) depending on which mode the count effect is performed. However, it is desirable to prepare at least two or more modes of the count staging that can straddle the notice E2 (first staging).

Further, the notice F (second effect) is executed before the notice E2 (first effect), and the notice E2 (first effect) is performed after the notice F (second effect) is completed. As mentioned above, it may be executed. At this time, when the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is executed, the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is executed, but the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is executed, but the count effect straddles the count effect does not appear. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the count effect that straddles the notice E2 (first effect) appears. According to such a configuration, even if the count effect is terminated across the notice F (second effect) instead of the notice E2 (first effect), the notice E2 (first effect) is performed. It will be possible to expect that the straddling count effect will appear further, and the game entertainment will be able to be maintained favorably.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment executes the effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination. In this respect, even if the effect pattern is such that the advance notice F (second effect) does not appear, it is desirable that the advance notice E2 (first effect) and the count effect straddling the notice E2 (first effect) can appear respectively. With such a configuration, even if the notice F (second effect) does not appear, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the count effect straddling the notice E2 (first effect) will appear. It will be like. However, when the notice F (second effect) does not appear, the notice E2 (first effect) is given as compared with the case where the notice F (second effect) is executed but the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) does not appear. It is desirable to reduce the rate at which the straddling count effect appears.

Further, regarding the provision of a plurality of modes as the mode of the count effect (total number of counts, display mode, timing at which the count is started, etc.) that can straddle the notice F (second effect). As described above, even when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of embodiments, the notice F (second effect) is not necessarily executed within the period in which the count effect is executed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, even when the count effect is executed in a desired mode, whether or not the notice F (second effect) appears within the period during which the count effect is executed is also determined. It becomes possible to have fun, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the counting effect is being performed.

In addition, regarding the provision of multiple modes of counting effects (total number of counts, display mode, timing at which counting starts, etc.) that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect). As described above, when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of embodiments, it is desirable to ensure that the notice E2 (first effect) is executed within the period during which the count effect is executed. .. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed in a desired mode, it is suggested in advance that the count effect greatly increases the degree of expectation across the notice E2 (first effect). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably improve the game entertainment while the count effect is being performed.

Then, when the timer non-target notice lottery (first timer non-target notice lottery, second timer non-target notice lottery) is performed and it is determined which of the non-target notices to be executed is determined, then step S5513. It is determined whether or not the state is determined to execute the above-mentioned special timer as the process of.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in the situation where the reach effect (character reach) of a specific type is selected, the notice side timer is based on the result of the jackpot determination (winning, fluctuation pattern, etc.). It is possible to execute a control that starts the effect (count effect display) and continues the count display even after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (effect display). That is, in this case, the count display will continue even after the effect pattern (effect display) according to the result of the jackpot determination is completed and hidden, so that a special symbol is used from the remaining time of the count display. It has become difficult to predict the fluctuation time (type of reach) of, for example, the production in which the count display started during the symbol fluctuation is involved in the production during the jackpot game state after the symbol is stopped is realized. It will be possible to make the subsequent production development interesting.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, first, the start interval period of the jackpot game and the jackpot game after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, after the symbol is fixed and stopped). In the period), the number of rounds (16 rounds) where the expected value of the amount that can be obtained as a prize is large when it appears and the first special effect where the percentage of winning the type that shifts to the high probability time saving game state increases when it appears. The second special effect, which is executed at a high rate, can be executed. It should be noted that these ratios may include 100%. Then, the timer effect on the advance notice side, which targets the effect started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, is started before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears and is counted. It is decided to control the display to be continuously executed even after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears.

That is, in this case, the count display of the advance notice side timer effect started before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears is not terminated when the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, and the jackpot symbol (special display mode) When a specific numerical value (here, 0) is reached after continuous execution even after the appearance of, the first special effect or the second special effect will appear. Therefore, when such a special timer appears, it definitely suggests that a jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, and when it appears, it is in a high-probability time-saving gaming state or a 16-round jackpot game. Since the rate at which is executed is relatively high, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

However, in order to realize such a special timer, first of all, the big hit is won by the big hit judgment, and the big hit is a specific type (a type that generates a high probability time-saving game state or a 16-round big hit game. It is possible to control so that a special timer appears with a higher execution probability than when it is determined that it is not the specific type. Desired.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the execution of the above-mentioned special timer is determined in the process of step S5513, the execution of whether or not to cause the special timer to appear is executed next as the process of step S5514. The execution mode of the special timer is determined including the presence or absence.

For example, in the process of step S5514, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is a specific type (a type that generates a high-probability time-saving gaming state or a type that generates a 16-round jackpot game). As a result, by determining that the special timer will not appear with a predetermined probability when the jackpot is not a specific type, the expectation that the jackpot will be a specific type is increased by the amount thinned out in this way. You will be able to do it. The degree of expectation may be 100%. Further, when it is decided not to make the special timer appear, another notice effect (timer target candidate effect, non-target advance notice) or the advancer side timer effect may be made to appear instead of the special timer.

In this embodiment, in the process of step S5514 after the determination to execute the special timer is once made in the timer target advance notice lottery, the type of the jackpot is determined and the special timer is executed based on the result. It was decided to re-determine whether or not to do so, but in addition to winning the big hit, by making the timer target advance notice lottery based on the type of the big hit, whether to execute the special timer in the process of step S5514. You may not decide again whether or not to do so.

In addition, for the first special effect or the second special effect after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the start interval period or the big hit game period of the big hit game after the symbol is fixed and stopped), the big hit is It may be executed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations, which is a special type. That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) when the special timer appears, the first special effect or the second special effect is executed in the highly expected mode among the plurality of modes. It will be.

Further, in this embodiment, for the effect (first special effect or second special effect) after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, a predetermined time has elapsed since the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears. Although it was decided to make it appear at the timing (in the example shown in FIG. 161, the timing at which 20 seconds have elapsed), a plurality of timings (for example, the first at which 15 seconds have elapsed) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appeared. It may appear at the timing and the second timing after 30 seconds have passed. That is, in this case, as the special timer, the first mode in which a specific numerical value (here, 0) is reached when 15 seconds have passed (or shortly before) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, and the jackpot symbol. When 30 seconds have passed (or shortly before) after (special display mode) appears, one of the second mode, which reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0), is selected and made to appear.

At this time, it is set so that the ratio of the special type of jackpot being obtained is higher when the effect appears at the second timing than when the effect appears at the first timing, and the jackpot is a specific type. Occasionally, if the ratio of the special timer to appear in the second aspect is higher than that in the first aspect, how long the count display after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears will be continued. It will be possible to have additional fun. It should be noted that these ratios may include 100%. By the way, when the effect does not appear at either the first timing and the second timing, the ratio of the special type of big hit is set lower than the case where the effect appears at the first timing. ..

Further, regarding the special timer, for example, in the execution period of the fluctuation display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, it is displayed as "timer is being prepared" and is displayed as "timer is being prepared". The count display may be started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears while it is still in place. That is, during the jackpot game, the time required for digesting each round game fluctuates according to the progress of the game, so that in the execution period of the variation display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. Once the count display is started, it is difficult to set the count display of the special timer to reach a predetermined value during a specific round game, and further to start the effect to be the effect. In this regard, if the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, the state of "timer preparation" is maintained until a specific round game during the jackpot game is started. Then, by starting the count display when the specific round game is started, the count display reaches a predetermined value during the specific round game and the effect to be the target is executed. It will be possible to set to. At this time, it is possible not to display "timer is being prepared" or the like until the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears.

Further, when the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in this way, it is different even during the execution period of the variable display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. The count display of the timer effect on the advance notice side may be started. Regarding the other notice-side timer effect, the effect that the count display is completely digested and becomes the effect target appears before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, or the jackpot symbol (special display mode) may be displayed. After the appearance of the special display mode), the count display may be completely digested and the effect to be the effect appears (double special timer).

It should be noted that different effects appear between the effect during the variable display and the effect during the big hit game, and usually, an effect at the time of switching the effect (for example, an opening effect) different from any of the effects is executed between them. Often done. In this regard, after setting the count display so that the count display does not reach a predetermined value in any timer effect within the switching period in which the effect at the time of such effect switching is executed, the count display is hidden within the switching period. It is desirable to make the player aware that the two effects (here, the effect during the variable display and the effect during the jackpot game) are not connected to each other. However, in this case, even while the count display of the timer effect is hidden, the count display is digested as much as the time has passed, and when the count display is displayed again, it is hidden. It is desirable to control the value so that it is less than the value of (a value that is large when counting up, not counting down).

Then, when the execution mode of the special timer is determined in this way (step S5514) or the execution of the special timer is not determined (NO in step S5513), the timer target advance notice lottery or count is then performed as the process of step S5515. After setting the notice effect determined by the display lottery or the like in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is terminated. As a result, drawing data or the like corresponding to the effect determined in the advance notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect at the timing when each effect should appear in the process during effect symbol change.

On the other hand, after the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case where it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect has not been won (NO in step S5503), various lottery related to the advance notice side timer effect (notice side). Timer target candidate production (notice) according to the content (table) according to whether it was decided to perform the mission production as a result of the second mission production lottery without performing the timer type lottery, single lottery, etc. A staging lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564) is performed for the staging effect (notice effect that can be the effect target of the side timer effect).

More specifically, one of the following processes will be executed.
-When the fifth processing status is such that the timer effect on the notice side is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5552). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when the fifth processing status is in effect, how many of the timer target candidate effects are used as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process for whether or not to appear is performed (step S5553). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of advance notice effect appears as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined by the determination process (step S5554).

-When the sixth processing status is such that the timer effect on the notice side is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5552). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when the sixth processing status is in effect, how many of the timer target candidate effects are used as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process for whether or not to appear is performed (step S5563). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of advance notice effect appears as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined by the determination process (step S5564).

Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 153, even in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed. When a decision has been made to that effect, the maximum number of appearances (average number of appearances) of timer target candidate effects will be larger than when it has not been decided to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear). I try to control it.

FIG. 165 is a fifth processing state in which it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5e which is referred to in the process of a step S5553 when it is. Further, in FIG. 166, it is determined that the timer effect on the advance notice side is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation advance appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5f which is referred in the process of a step S5563 when it is in a process state.

First, as shown in FIG. 165, since the table T5e is referred to when the mission effect is executed, the loss variation pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect (the mission cannot succeed). The table T5e is not referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the variation pattern) are acquired. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, since the table T5f is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the loss variation pattern (the mission can succeed) in which the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variation effect. The table T5f is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to (no variation pattern) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T5f, the effect random numbers are also assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Further, both the table T5e and the table T5f are referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not executed in the fifth and sixth processing situations, and in these processing states, the advance notice side timer effect effect is produced. It is not essential to select one of the timer target candidate effects that can be the target. Therefore, in both the table T5e and the table T5f, an effect random number is assigned to each variation number so that the timer target candidate effect does not necessarily have to be selected (the number of advance notices is 0).

In addition, among the same reach effects (character reach and SP reach) on the table T5e and table T5f, the variable numbers that do not show the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) as the effect content of the variable effect vary. The ratio of selecting a large number of timer target candidate effects is higher than the variable number where the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the effect, and the character at the time of loss. With variation number 7 which is reach, only up to 3 timer target candidate effects can appear, and with variation number 15 which is SP reach at the time of loss, only up to 5 timer target candidate effects can appear. The points that are not performed are the same as those of the above-mentioned table T5a and the like.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, how many of the timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect when the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice side timer effect is not executed are in effect. After the determination process (steps S5553, S5563) for .. However, if it is determined that none of the timer target candidate effects will appear as a result of the above-mentioned advance notice number determination process (steps S5553, S5563) (notice number 0), the timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) will be performed. Regardless of the variation number, one processing result that does not select any timer target candidate effect is always selected.

FIG. 167 shows a fifth processing state in which it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 (step S5554) as a result of executing the process of step S5553. Further, FIG. 168 shows a fifth determination that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-2 which is referred to when it is decided to make a notice number 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 in the process situation (step S5554).

Further, in FIG. 169, it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 (step S5564) as a result of executing the process of step S5563 in a process situation. Further, in FIG. 170, it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-2 which is referred to when it is decided to make a notice number 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5563 in a process situation (step S5564).

For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, when it is determined that the tables T6e and T6f referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states do not execute the advance timer effect. Since it is a reference, none of the N advance notice effects determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effect is set as the effect target of the advance timer effect, and all of them are normal. It will be executed as an aspect of the advance notice effect (in the figure, x marks indicate that it is executed as an aspect of the normal advance notice effect).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, in the tables T6e and T6f referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states, the same effect is produced by the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect. Since it is not targeted, it is executed when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22 corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect are acquired. A staging random number is assigned to each variable number so that the conversation notice is not selected as the staging. Similarly, in the tables T6e and T6f, the variation numbers 11 to 14, 19 to correspond to the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) in which the cut-ins A and B appear as the effect content of the variation effect. When 22 is acquired, an effect random number is assigned to each variation number so that the cut-ins A and B are not selected as the advance notice effects to be executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states are referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not executed. Therefore, the effect (here, a special timer) on the premise that the advance timer effect is performed is not included in the advance notice effect to be selected.

In addition, in the table T6e referred to when in the fifth processing status, since it is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), it is referred to in FIG. 148. As also shown, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the "conversation notice" are acquired as the content of the variation effect, or as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect), "conversation notice". When "" is selected (PTN1), a special display (mission success) is displayed and it is definitively suggested that a jackpot symbol appears, which is the same as in the case of the above table 6a.

Further, in the table T6f referred to when in the sixth processing status, since the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is referred to when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed, the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. The above-mentioned table 6a shows that the staging random numbers are also assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed). It is the same as the case of.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, even when it is determined not to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side in the process of step S5503, after the timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) is performed in this way, Which of the non-target effects E1 to E3 and F, which is prepared as an effect that cannot be the effect target of the timer effect on the notice side based on the winning result of the big hit and the fluctuation pattern (variation number), is to be executed. The determination process (third timer non-target notice lottery: step S5555) is performed.

Although the table referred to in step S5555 is omitted, it basically has the same mode as the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when it is not a special timer, for example, a notice. When the mode for executing E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the mode for executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected.

Then, after the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5555) is performed in this way, the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) and the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5554, S5564) are then processed as the process of step S5515. After setting the advance notice effect determined in step S5555) or the like in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the advance notice lottery is terminated. As a result, drawing data or the like corresponding to the effect determined in the advance notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect at the timing when each effect should appear in the process during effect symbol change.

In the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side in the process of step S5503, the timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery are processed separately. I decided to do it as. However, if it is decided not to execute the advance notice side timer effect in the process of step S5503, it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effect E1 to E3, F in relation to the advance notice side timer effect. The timer target notice lottery and the third timer non-target notice lottery may be executed within one lottery process.

Further, the mode of the special timer described above (the non-target notice E2 is set so that the jackpot expectation is lower than that of the non-target notice F in the situation where the count display of the timer effect on the notice side is not performed. , In the situation where the count display of the timer effect on the notice side is performed, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than that of the non-target notice F). Since it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F, the timer target notice lottery and the third timer non-target notice lottery may be executed in one lottery process.

Further, in this embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side, it is decided to perform a determination process as to which effect is to be executed as the advance notice effect and in what mode. After deciding in what mode the effect of the above is to be executed, whether or not to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side and the execution mode may be determined.

By the way, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, when a prize (acceptance of a game ball) occurs in the start ports 2002 and 2004, whether to perform a look-ahead effect on the hold information according to the prize. Judgment processing for whether or not is performed (steps S5245, S5255). In this regard, in this determination process, the display mode (color, form, etc.) of the hold display, which is the target of the look-ahead effect, is changed based on the information on the winning / failing of the jackpot judgment and the fluctuation pattern included in the hold information. Lottery for change effects (lottery for presence / absence of execution and display mode), lottery for look-ahead zone effects that span multiple fluctuations (lottery for presence / absence of execution, execution mode (color, number of continuous executions, etc.)), etc. In addition to this, a lottery will be held as to whether or not the variable display according to the reserved information is subject to the "timer look-ahead effect".

Here, the timer look-ahead effect is an effect in which the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side appears within the fluctuation time is high when the variation display (variation display of the effect target) that was in the pending state when it appears is being executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600 or the like, a predetermined image (for example, "timer is being prepared" is set at the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol that is started after the winning timing (timing when the timer look-ahead effect is won). ”, Etc.) is displayed. The reason why a predetermined image (for example, "timer preparation") does not appear at the timing of winning a prize (timing when the timer look-ahead effect is won) is that the player side determines which hold information corresponds to the timer look-ahead effect. This is to make it difficult to recognize.

According to such a timer look-ahead effect, it can be suggested that the rate of appearance of the notice side timer effect is high over a plurality of variable displays while it is unspecified which hold display is supported. Since it will be possible, it is expected that the game will be maintained over multiple variable displays. However, among the preceding effects (look-ahead effects), a type that includes such a timer look-ahead effect and continuously (or continues) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. When executing a production (preceding period production), if the same type of production (preceding period production) and the execution period overlap, the production becomes too complicated and what is the target / purpose. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline because it is not possible to understand whether it is a production.

Therefore, in determining whether or not to execute such a preceding period effect (pre-reading determination at the time of winning), the preceding period effect according to the other pending information that has been won earlier is not executed and is waiting to be executed. Make a judgment as to whether or not it is in the state of. Then, the advance period effect such as the timer look-ahead effect is newly added, at least on condition that the advance period effect according to the other pending information that has been won earlier is not executed and is not in the execution waiting state. It is possible to make a judgment to the effect that it will occur. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the two preceding period effects from being executed in an overlapping manner, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

As the preceding period effect, for example, in addition to the timer look-ahead effect, a homomorphic continuous look-ahead effect in which at least a part of the stop symbol appears in the same mode (color of a number, etc.) over a plurality of fluctuations, and a background image over a plurality of fluctuations. It is possible to adopt a look-ahead zone effect or the like that changes the Then, in the above processing (pre-reading determination at the time of winning), among these preceding period effects, the preceding period effects of the same type do not appear in an overlapping manner, and even if the preceding period effects are different types, these execution periods are executed. Will be controlled so that they do not overlap. Of the look-ahead effects, for the type of effect (for example, hold change effect) that is performed over multiple variable displays by specifying which hold display is supported, the execution status of these preceding period effects. It is desirable to be able to appear regardless of, but if a new prize is generated while the preceding period production is running or waiting to be executed, a new prize will be generated when it is not in that situation. It is desirable to perform the look-ahead determination at the time of winning so that the appearance ratio of the type of effect (for example, hold change effect) is lower as the look-ahead effect according to the prize.

In this way, while a preceding period effect such as a timer look-ahead effect (a type of effect that continuously (or continues) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported) is being executed. Is a game in which even if a new winning of a game ball occurs, the two preceding period effects interfere with each other by performing a prohibition control to prevent this from occurring for the corresponding preceding period effect. It will be possible to suppress the decline in interest. However, if such prohibition control is performed, the frequency of performing the preceding period effect as the above-mentioned preceding effect is reduced by the amount that the preceding period effect is subject to the prohibition control, and there is a concern that the game interest may be reduced. To.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is executed while the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information has not been started yet, a specific effect is first obtained. Set information indicating that the situation is restricted. Then, when the hold information is newly stored while the hold information is set by the previously stored hold information, at least the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information is terminated. Until then, the preceding period effect corresponding to the newly stored hold information is not executed, but it is newly stored after the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information is completed. It is decided to control so that the preceding period effect corresponding to the reserved information can be executed.

That is, in this case, even if it is once determined that the execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to the reserved information is not permitted at the time when the reserved information is newly stored, the game is subsequently advanced and stored first. When the game situation is such that there is no concern that the effect interferes with the preceding period effect corresponding to the pending information, the execution of the above-mentioned preceding period effect once determined that the execution is not permitted is permitted. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the frequency at which the preceding period effect is performed while controlling the prohibition of the preceding period effect, and thereby it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

More specifically, in the first special figure look-ahead process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure look-ahead process (FIG. 136: step S5255) when a new prize is generated, first, the first special hold Based on the number counter or the counter value obtained by the second special hold number counter, it is determined which order the new prize is held (digested order). For example, in the case of the first special symbol look-ahead processing, first, the reserved information corresponding to the new prize is stored in any of the first special symbol reserved storage area a to the first special symbol reserved storage area d. Determine if it is in a state. After that, the pending information that is stored before the new prize and the variable display is in the running state and the pending information in which the variable display is not executed are included in the pending information in which the variable display is not executed, and the above-mentioned preceding period effect is executed. Determine if there is something that is. As a result, even if there is specific pending information that is the target of executing the preceding period effect, the execution of the preceding period effect according to the new prize is not completely prohibited, but the above-mentioned specification is performed. In the period after the variable display according to the hold information of is finished, it is controlled so that the execution of the preceding period effect according to the new prize is allowed.

Hereinafter, a method for realizing such control will be described by taking a more detailed gaming situation as an example.

In FIG. 171 (a), the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variation display is being executed and the three hold information (all are first special symbols) in which the variation display is not executed are stored. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7a which is referred in the 1st special figure look-ahead process when a new prize (the 1st special symbol) occurs in the state of being. Further, in FIG. 171 (b), the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variation display is being executed and the two hold information (both are the first special symbols) in which the variation display is not executed are shown. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7b referred to in the 1st special figure look-ahead process when a new prize (the 1st special symbol) occurs in the stored state.

As shown in FIG. 171 (a), in this table T7a, the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in the executing state and the three hold information in the state in which the variable display is not executed (either of them). Depending on which of the above (1st special symbol) is the target of the preceding period production, or none of them is the target of the preceding period production, a new prize (1st special symbol) will be awarded. It is possible to determine from what timing the corresponding hold information can be targeted for the preceding period effect (pre-readable variation number).

For example, in the table T7a, both the reserved information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and the three reserved information (all are the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not executed are both. If is not the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1 (the first hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area a) and the hold 2 (the first special symbol hold storage) Variable display according to the hold 3 (third hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area b) according to the change display according to the second hold information stored in the area b, and the corresponding change display. The new prize was targeted over four variable display periods with the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize (the fourth hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area d). It is determined that the preceding period effect can be executed (determination that the pre-reading variable number is 4). That is, in this case, the variation display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize is performed at the timing after the variation display in the running state ends and the variation display according to the first hold information is started. It will be allowed to execute the preceding period production for the target.

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold information in which the change display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the change display according to the hold 2 and the change display according to the hold 3 are newly added. It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new prize can be executed over the three variable display periods, that is, the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the winning prize (the number of pre-reading variable numbers is 3). Judgment). That is, in this case, the timing after the variation display corresponding to the running state ends, the variation display corresponding to the first hold information further ends, and the variation display according to the second hold information starts. Therefore, it is permissible to execute the preceding period effect targeting the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize.

Here, even when the hold information in which the change display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the change display according to the hold 1, the change display according to the hold 2, and the hold 3 It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new prize can be executed over the four variable display periods of the variable display according to the new prize and the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize ( It may be determined that the pre-reading variable number is 4). However, in this case, the preceding period effect that appeared in the variable display in the running state and the new preceding period effect that starts in the variable display according to the hold 1 are continuously executed. Is the preceding period production the same production (whether the previous preceding period production is continuing), or is another preceding period production newly started (whether the previous preceding period production has ended)? Since it is difficult to distinguish between the two, a method of setting this as a prohibited period so that a new preceding period effect does not occur in the first variable display after the preceding period effect ends (method adopted in table T7a). It is more desirable to adopt. It should be noted that such a method is adopted not only in the table T7a but also in other tables T7 (in addition to the table T7b, a table (not shown)).

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 1 is the target of the preceding period effect, there are two variable displays, a variable display according to the hold 3 and a variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize. It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new prize can be executed over the period (determination that the pre-reading variable number is 2). That is, in this case, the variation display in the running state ends, the variation display according to the first hold information ends, the variation display according to the second hold information ends, and the third hold information ends. At the timing after the variable display according to the hold information is started, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize is permitted.

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 2 is the target of the preceding period effect, the preceding period for the new prize is only the period of the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize. It is determined that the effect can be executed (determination that the pre-reading variable number is 1). That is, in this case, the variation display in the running state ends, the variation display according to the first hold information ends, the variation display according to the second hold information ends, and the third hold information ends. The preceding period for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize at the timing after the variable display according to the new prize is further finished and the variable display according to the fourth hold information is started. Execution of the production will be allowed.

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 3 is the target of the preceding period effect, it is determined that the preceding period effect targeting the new prize is not feasible (the number of look-ahead variable is 0). Judgment). That is, in this case, it is not permissible to execute the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize.

On the other hand, in the table T7b, the hold 3 is not included as a determination target of whether or not it is the target of the preceding period effect, and the number of pre-readable fluctuations obtained as the determination result is smaller than that of the above table T7a. However, since it is basically the same as the table T7a, the explanation is omitted. In addition, similar tables are prepared at the time of holding 2 winning and holding 1 winning, but the explanation is omitted.

By the way, at the time of winning the hold 4, it is assumed that there are two hold information that are the target of the preceding period production, but in this case, it will be based on the hold information on the side with the slower hold order. Decide whether to make the look-ahead variable number of. For example, at the time of winning the hold 4, if the variable hold and the hold 2 are subject to different preceding period effects in the table T7a, the hold 2 on the later side of the hold order is the target of the preceding period effect. The "look-ahead variable number = 1" at the time of is determined.

Further, as described above, the control related to the prohibited period of such a preceding period effect is a type of effect that is continuously (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. The purpose is to set a prohibition period for this type of effect based on the execution status. Therefore, the prohibition period of the preceding period effect does not occur depending on the execution status of the type of effect (hold change effect) that specifies which hold display is supported, and the execution status of the preceding period effect (look-ahead). Even if the possible variation number = 0), the type of effect (holding change effect) that specifies which hold display is supported is not prohibited.

Further, even in the case of the prohibition period of the preceding period effect, the timer look-ahead effect on the advance notice side is to appear for the timer look-ahead effect performed in the first preceding mode and the second preceding aspect described later among the timer look-ahead effects. Since certainty is not required, this may be made to appear.

In addition, as a prohibition control of the preceding period effect, when the holding information on the second special symbol side is included in the holding information in the state where the variable display has not been executed, the holding information on the second special symbol side precedes. Even if it is not the target of the period effect, even if it is controlled so that the new preceding period effect is not started until the variation display according to the hold information on the second special symbol side is completed. good. Further, at this time, it is not necessary to set the period of the next fluctuation display when the fluctuation display according to the reserved information on the second special symbol side is completed as the prohibited period, and a new preceding period from the time when the next fluctuation display is executed. It is desirable to allow the production to start.

In addition, regarding the process of confirming the status of the look-ahead effect set for hold and determining the pre-reading variable number according to the result, a new prize will be generated each time the hold is exhausted. It is desirable to do it each time.

Then, in the first special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 136: step S5255), when the pre-readable variation number is determined in this way, the determined period (pre-reading is possible). Judgment processing is performed as to what mode of the preceding period effect is to be executed (including the presence or absence of execution) based on the number of fluctuations.

For example, first, it is determined which type of preceding period effect is to be executed for the reserved information corresponding to the new prize. As described above, as the types of preceding period effects, there are a plurality of pre-reading zone effects that display related background images across multiple fluctuations, and a plurality of specific preceding displays that suggest that there is a high possibility that the advance timer effect will be executed. It is possible to prepare a timer look-ahead effect that is displayed across fluctuations as a selection candidate. As a result, when the type of the preceding period effect is determined, the determination process for determining how to execute the determined type of preceding period effect is performed.

FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 referred to when the execution mode of the timer look-ahead effect is determined in the situation where the look-ahead variable number is 4. Is. FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 referred to when the execution mode of the timer look-ahead effect is determined in the situation where the look-ahead variable number is 3. Is.

As described above, the timer look-ahead effect is an effect in which the rate at which the notice-side timer effect appears when the hold information to be read-ahead is exhausted when it appears, and the peripheral aspect of this embodiment is applied. In the control MPU 1511a, the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, the third preceding mode, and the like in which the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side appears is different.

Here, the first preceding embodiment is for displaying a first aspect such as "premonition of timer generation" in the effect display device 1600, and when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the first preceding aspect. The probability that the advance notice side timer effect is executed is set to approximately 20% (step S5502).

Further, the second preceding mode is for displaying a second mode such as "timer generation chance" in the effect display device 1600, and when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the second preceding mode, the advance notice side. The probability that the timer effect is executed is set to approximately 80% (step S5502).

Further, the third preceding mode is for displaying a third mode such as "timer is being prepared" in the effect display device 1600, and when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the third preceding mode, the advance timer side timer. The effect is always executed (not 100%, but may have a higher probability than the second preceding embodiment) (step S5502).

Then, based on the information on the hit of the jackpot for the look-ahead determination, the information on the variation pattern number for the look-ahead determination, and the like, it is decided which execution mode is to be executed as the timer look-ahead effect. For example, in a situation where the pre-reading variable number is 4, referring to the tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), the pre-reading corresponding to the variable numbers 1 to 22 is used. One of the modes is selected based on the information and the staging random number assigned to the information, and in the situation where the look-ahead variable number is 3, the tables T8b-1 and T8b-shown in FIG. 173 are selected. With reference to 2, one of the modes is selected based on the look-ahead information corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 22 and the effect random number assigned to the information.

As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the table T8a-1, the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is started in the state where the first preceding mode is finally displayed. The following three modes are prepared as the modes.
-When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the states of hold 3 and hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect does not appear in any mode and is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. A mode in which the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer occurrence) when the variable display of the hold information is in the hold 1 state. When the state of 3 is reached, the timer look-ahead effect does not appear in any mode, and when the variable display of the hold information targeted by the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect is first preceded. A mode (premonition of timer generation) that is displayed and continued even in the state of hold 1.-Timer look-ahead effect when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3. Is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation), and this is continued even in the states of hold 2 and hold 1.

Further, in the table T8a-1, the following six modes are used as the mode in which the variable display of the hold information, which is the target of the timer look-ahead effect, is started in the state where the second preceding mode is finally displayed. It is prepared.
-When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the states of hold 3 and hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect does not appear in any mode and is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. A mode in which the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) when the variable display of the hold information is in the hold 1 state. When the state of, the timer look-ahead effect does not appear in any mode, and when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the second preceding mode. A mode in which it is displayed in (timer generation chance) and continued even in the state of hold 1.-When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3, the timer look-ahead effect is set. 2 A mode in which the display is displayed in the preceding mode (timer generation chance) and this is continued even in the state of hold 2 and hold 1. ・ When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3. The timer look-ahead effect does not appear in any mode, and the timer look-ahead effect is set to the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the hold 2 state. ), And when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 1, the timer look-ahead effect is changed from the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) to the second preceding mode (). Mode to change to display (timer generation chance) -When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation). Is displayed and this is continued even in the state of hold 2, but when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 1, the timer look-ahead effect is set in the first preceding mode (timer). A mode in which the display is changed from the premonition of occurrence) to the second preceding mode (timer generation chance). In addition to displaying in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation), the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (timer generation) when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the hold 2 state. From the premonition of the second preceding mode (timer generation) A mode in which the message is changed to (cance) and displayed, and this is continued even in the state of hold 1.

It should be noted that the timer look-ahead effects of the first and second preceding embodiments are displayed in the state of hold 1, and then are continuously displayed even after the hold information is digested and the variable display is started. It is desirable to do so. Further, the mode may be further changed in the variable display started by digesting the reserved information. Further, the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode and the second preceding aspect may be hidden when the advance notice side timer effect is started in the variation display, but when the advance notice side timer effect is started. Even so, the mode of hiding the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode before the advance notice side timer effect is started, and the display is continued even after the notice side timer effect is started. Then, if it is hidden at a predetermined timing after that, it becomes possible to add fun. If the timer look-ahead effect is not executed even though the timer look-ahead effect is executed in either the first preceding mode or the second preceding aspect, it is not the case when a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. It will be displayed. Further, it is more desirable that the timing of hiding is the same as the timing of hiding when the advance notice side timer effect is executed (such as the predetermined timing described above).

In the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding mode is the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding mode, although the peripheral control MPU1511a is a timer look-ahead effect in which the execution rate of the timer effect on the warning side increases when any of them appears. The timer look-ahead effect of (timer generation chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) are made to appear as different effects from each other. Therefore, as is clear from the contents of the table T8a-1, the timer look-ahead effect is changed from these preceding embodiments to the third preceding embodiment in the state where the first preceding embodiment and the second preceding embodiment are displayed. This is not adopted for the display mode. Further, in a situation where the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) appears, the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding aspect (timer generation chance) appears. Or, in a situation where the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding aspect (timer generation chance) appears, the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding aspect (timer preparation) appears. Can occur.

Therefore, in the situation where the pre-reading variable number is 4, the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) with reference to the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a). In addition to determining the execution mode related to the timer look-ahead effect of FIG. 172 (b), the execution mode related to the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) is further determined with reference to the table T8a-2 shown in FIG. 172 (b). It will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in the table T8a according to this embodiment, the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect in the state where the third preceding embodiment finally appears. Only one of the following modes is prepared as a mode in which the variable display is started.
-When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) and this is put on hold 2 and hold 1. A mode to continue even in the state

However, the third preceding embodiment is not limited to the above one aspect, and as in the case of the first preceding embodiment described above, neither timer look-ahead effect appears when the hold 3 or the hold 2 is in the middle. It is also possible to select an aspect for displaying the third preceding aspect from the above.

According to such a configuration, the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) is executed, and the timer of the third preceding mode (timer generation chance). Both the case where the look-ahead effect is executed and the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding aspect (timer preparation) When each is executed, the case will appear. Then, when both the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the timer look-ahead effect of the second preceding aspect (timer generation chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding aspect (timer preparation) are executed, respectively. Since it is definitely suggested that the timer effect on the notice side will be executed, enjoy the effect such as whether to change from the first preceding mode to the second preceding mode with a sense of security and peace of mind. Will be able to.

Further, the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding aspect, the timer look-ahead effect of the second preceding aspect, and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding aspect may be controlled so as to appear at the same time.

It is desirable that the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding embodiment (timer is being prepared) is continuously displayed even after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started. In this case, after the target pending information is digested and the variable display is started, the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) is hidden when the advance notice side timer effect is started.

Further, in this embodiment, the third preceding mode of the timer look-ahead effect is adopted as a mode for displaying "timer is being prepared" in the effect display device 1600, but for example, in the state of hold 1, the notice side It may be adopted as a mode for starting the count display for the effect (the effect appearing in the unexecuted variable display) that is the effect target of the timer effect. That is, in this case, for example, the remaining time for which the state of hold 1 is continued (the remaining change time of the special symbol which is in the state of variable display when it is in the state of hold 1) and the remaining time for which the hold 1 is digested and the change display is displayed. The count display will be performed over the total time from the start to the start of the effect targeted for the effect of the timer on the notice side, and the timer look-ahead effect (third preceding mode) and the timer on the notice side will be displayed. The effect will be executed as one count display in which two variable displays are connected.

In this regard, when the third preceding mode is realized as one count display linked to such a timer effect on the advance notice side, the count display is not executed in the hold 3 or the hold 2, and the count display is displayed when the hold 1 is in the state. It is desirable to execute. That is, if the count display is started when the hold 3 or the hold 2 is set, the effect of "the effect of the advance notice side timer effect" is set according to the number of holds when the state of the hold 1 is reached. By changing the "remaining time until the effect in the unexecuted variable display) starts", the count display (count display until the predetermined number is reached) can be appropriately executed for the same effect. This is because there is a concern that it will disappear.

The table T8b-1 shown in FIG. 173 (a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 173 (b) are shown in the table T8a-1 and FIG. 172 (b) shown in FIG. 172 (a). Since it has basically the same relationship as the table T8a-2, the details will be omitted.

Further, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the determination of the hold change effect in the first special figure look-ahead process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure look-ahead process (FIG. 136: step S5255). It also processes. This hold change effect is to change the mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information acquired in response to the winning to one of a plurality of modes different from the normal hold mode, so that the hold display can be displayed in any mode. Depending on whether it is displayed or not, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit when the pending display is digested.

More specifically, as the hold display according to this embodiment, in addition to the normal hold mode when the hold change effect is not performed, a mode of displaying in white blinking, a mode of displaying in blue, and a mode of displaying in green. It is possible to display in one of the mode of displaying in red, the mode of displaying in red, and the mode of displaying in rainbow color. Is low, and the expectation of big hits gradually increases in the order of blue, green, and red. It is set so that the relationship becomes%. In addition, the jackpot expectation is naturally set for the normal hold mode, but the jackpot expectation when the normal hold is displayed should be lower than the mode displayed by blinking white. It may be the same as or higher than the mode displayed by blinking white.

Therefore, normally, for example, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, a first effect situation with a lower expectation of a big hit than when displaying in green or red is provided. However, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment is a control that can provide a second effect situation in which the expectation of a big hit is high when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue instead of green or red appears under a predetermined condition. Is feasible.

FIG. 174 shows when there is no hold information in which the variable display is being executed and the pending information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) causes a jackpot symbol to appear. It is a figure which shows the normal time hold change table T9a which is referred. Further, in FIG. 175, a jackpot symbol may appear among the hold information in which the variable display is being executed and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the special time hold change table T9b which is sometimes referred.

In the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a new prize (acceptance of a game ball) to the starting port 2002 or 2004 occurs, the first special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 135: step S5245) or the second special figure In the look-ahead process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the hold information that is stored prior to the new prize and the variable display is in the running state and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold). It is determined whether or not there is a big hit symbol appearing among 1 to 3) (a judgment that the big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment or the look-ahead judgment). As a result, if it is determined that there is no jackpot symbol to appear, the normal time table T9a (normal time table T9a) is set so that the jackpot expectation gradually increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, and rainbow color. By executing the hold change effect with reference to FIG. 174), usually, for example, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, the first effect situation in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of displaying in red is the first effect situation. I am trying to be provided.

However, it is judged that there is a big hit symbol among the pending information that is stored before the new prize and the variable display is in the running state and the pending information in which the variable display is not executed. In this case (when a rare event occurs), the second effect situation is provided by executing the hold change effect with reference to the special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175).

That is, as shown in FIG. 175, in the special time hold change table T9b, first, regarding the red color and the rainbow color regarding the mode of the hold display, the "big hit winning" acquired as the hold information according to the new prize. Regardless of the content of "look-ahead information" or "look-ahead information about fluctuation pattern", the staging random numbers are distributed so that they are not selected.

Further, regarding the green color related to the mode of the hold display, even if the variation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14) in which the effect random numbers are distributed so as to be selectable in the normal hold change table T9a, the special hold change changes. In the table T9b, the effect random numbers are distributed so that they are not selected. In this regard, if the look-ahead information regarding the fluctuation pattern corresponds to SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), green can be selected in the special time hold change table T9b, but it is normally held. Compared to the change table T9a, the random numbers are distributed so that the probability of appearance of green is lower when the jackpot is won or lost.

On the other hand, regarding the white blinking and blue color related to the mode of the hold display, the special time hold change table T9b has a higher probability of appearing when the jackpot is won or lost as compared with the normal time hold change table T9a. The production random numbers are distributed to. Further, regarding the white blinking and blue color related to the mode of the hold display, even if the variation numbers 1 and 2 are not selected in the normal hold change table T9a, they can be selected in the special hold change table T9b. The production random numbers are distributed as shown above.

According to such a configuration, for example, an effect with a high expectation that a jackpot symbol appears (for example, an effect in which a notice side timer effect targeting the movement of the character B appears in the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach) is executed. If a new prize is generated during that time (under predetermined conditions), a green or red mode appears as a hold display according to the new prize, and a jackpot symbol appears in the high-expected effect being executed. The second production situation that makes it relatively easy to have the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in the high expectation production that is being executed when the white blinking or blue mode appears, while it becomes difficult to have expectations for. Will be able to provide.

In particular, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, as the third preceding mode of the timer look-ahead effect, the remaining time during which the state of hold 1 is continued (the state of variable display when the state of hold 1 is in state). The remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in It is possible to execute the count display of. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears on the effect display device 1600, there is a possibility that the variation display ends and the next variation display starts before the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is expected that the game will be improved in combination with the control using the special time hold change table T9b described above.

For example, suppose that the count display (or timer preparation) of the timer effect on the advance notice side appears during the execution of the variable display (for example, SP reach) in the situation where the white blinking or the blue hold display appears as the hold 1. , The second game progress can have a feeling of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear than the first game progress described below.
-The timer effect on the notice side targets the effect in hold 1 that shows only a low expectation (blinking white or blue), and is held after the running fluctuation display (for example, SP reach) ends in a lost manner. The first game progress / notice side timer effect at which the variation display according to the hold information of 1 is started is not the effect in the hold 1 showing only a low expectation (white blinking or blue), but the variation during execution. A second game progress that targets the effect in the display (for example, SP reach)

That is, even though the notice side timer effect having a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a big hit symbol appears with a probability of 10% or more when it appears) is executed, the notice side timer effect has a low expectation (for example, appears). However, if the effect in Hold 1 (blinking white or blue) where the jackpot symbol appears only with a probability of a few percent is targeted for production, the possibility that the jackpot symbol will appear will be greatly reduced. However, according to the second game progress mentioned above, it is special because the chance is increased by avoiding such a production situation and the fluctuation display during execution is a big hit. The chance is increased (high expectation of big hit) by being able to expect that the hold display of hold 1 is blinking white or blue (high probability of appearance) by referring to the time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175). The fact that the timer effect on the notice side targets the "effect in the running fluctuation display" also functions as if it supports "the running fluctuation display is a big hit"), and the chance is increased. Will occur, so it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

The third preceding mode of the timer look-ahead effect may be executed as "timer is being prepared" instead of the count display. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that the advance notice side timer effect is executed with the effect in the variable display as the effect target when the status in which "timer is being prepared" is switched to the count display. Therefore, when there is a hold display that is blinking white or blue when the count display appears, it can be expected that the jackpot symbol will appear in the variable display.

On the other hand, when "Preparing timer" is hidden and the count display is started in the situation where the green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, the timer effect on the advance notice side is performed. Not only does it make it difficult to have the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the fluctuation display, but also the timer on the notice side so as to raise the expectation level for the green and red (especially red) hold display. The production will not work. Therefore, if "Timer in preparation" is displayed in the situation where the green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, until the green or red (especially red) hold display is exhausted. It is hoped that the count display will not start, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained within the period until the count display (notice side timer effect) is started.

In addition, according to such a configuration, when an effect with a high expectation of a big hit appears in the variable display during execution, a new prize is generated and a hold display in any mode such as blinking white, blue, green, or red is displayed. By confirming whether or not the game appears, it is possible to predict with a predetermined probability whether or not the jackpot symbol will appear in the variable display during execution, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, although the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b is executed for the hold display according to the new prize, the effect target is actually "new". Instead of "Does the jackpot symbol appear in the variable display of the hold information (hold information with hold change) according to the prize?", "Hold information stored before the new prize (hold that is not subject to hold change)" Information) It is designed to function as an effect on "whether a big hit symbol appears in the variable display". Therefore, even if no hold change is executed when a new prize is generated or the above-mentioned preceding period staging is prohibited, the special time hold change table T9b is determined by the hold information that is subsequently won. When the hold change effect using is executed, the look-ahead effect can function as an effect as if the look-ahead effect occurred after the hold information for which no look-ahead effect was executed. It is expected that the entertainment of the game will be reduced due to the fact that it is not performed.

In the special time hold change table T9b, the green mode can be selected in some reach types, but as in the red mode, any fluctuation pattern may not be selected. .. In short, if the ratio of high-expected aspects that can appear as a hold display is lower than that of the normal hold change table T9a (including 0), it will be white when the count display appears. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when there is a blinking or blue hold display.

Further, the pending change can be generated at a predetermined timing at the time of winning, at the start of the fluctuation, or during the fluctuation, and the number of times may be generated multiple times. That is, in this case, even if the count display of the timer effect on the warning side is started in the variable display according to the hold display that is blinking white or blue, the blinking white or blue may change to green or red. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest. In this embodiment, even during the symbol change performed in response to the hold digestion, the display corresponding to the hold display that is the target of the digestion (although it is not already in the hold state, but is in the hold state) is displayed. The corresponding display) is displayed, and the mode of the display corresponding to the hold display is further changed (hold change) as described above.

However, when such a hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b is realized, a new prize is generated while a high expectation specific effect is being executed during the execution of the variation display, and the prize is given. When the hold display corresponding to the above is red, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the variable display in which a high-expectation specific effect (for example, a timer effect targeting the action of the character B) is executed. It may be a situation that definitely suggests that it will not appear, and there is concern that the game entertainment will decline.

Therefore, a new prize is generated at least during the period during which the specific timer effect targeting the accessory B operation is being executed (during the period during which the high-expected specific effect is being executed). Even if this is done, it is desirable to control so that the hold display corresponding to the winning is not displayed on the staging display device 1600 and the mode of the hold change is hidden. In addition, it is desirable to maintain the non-display state for the hold display even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and has been digested.

However, in this case, instead of continuously hiding the hidden hold display until the variable display is completed, for example, during the period of the variable display, a hit effect or a loss suggesting a big hit ( It is desirable to make the hold display, which has been hidden after the timing when the loss effect suggesting the big hit loss) appears, to display the mode of the hold change. According to such a configuration, even if the hold display corresponding to the new prize is red, it is already suggested that the hold display is lost, so that the game entertainment interest does not deteriorate, and the hold display is not only. By the fact that is red, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment by including the hold information with high expectation of big hit in the hold.

It should be noted that the control related to the non-display of the hold display does not target all of the timer effects (notice effects), but is a relatively big hit such as those that target the action of the character B among the timer effects. It is desirable to execute only for a specific timer effect with high expectation (notice effect with high expectation).

Further, as described above, when the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b is realized, for example, the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the third preceding mode (timer preparation, etc.) while the blue hold display appears. If this is the case, it is desired that the game progress in which the count display (timer effect) is started and the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display before the blue hold display is digested. In this regard, even in the case of a game situation in which such a game progress is performed, whether the count display (timer effect) is started during the change or the change according to the blue hold display without being started. In the variable display where the count display (timer effect) is started and the jackpot symbol appears before the blue hold display is exhausted so that the display gives a feeling of excitement as to whether the count display is started. , Count display (timer effect) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display rather than the rate (including 0%) at which the count display (timer effect) is started according to the start timing of the variation display. It is desirable to control so that the rate at which is started is higher. The ratio may include 100%. Alternatively, it is desirable to control the rate at which the count display (timer effect) is started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started, as compared with the case where the red hold display appears. .. The ratio may include 100%.

The count effect (hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b) that causes a chance increase in such a double is, in essence, "the hold information displayed in the second aspect among the plurality of aspects (for example, for example). In the variable display of the identification information initiated by the digestion of the red look-ahead hold), the hold information displayed in the first aspect of the plurality of embodiments (for example, the blue look-ahead hold) is digested. The ratio of the jackpot symbol (specific display result) being derived and displayed is higher than the started variable display of the identification information. "However," at least the specific count effect is executed within the period when the variable display of the identification information is executed. Hold information whose digestion order is later than the variable display in the execution state when it is ) Is displayed in the second aspect (for example, red look-ahead hold), the hold information is in the execution state as compared with the case where the hold information is displayed in the first aspect (for example, blue look-ahead hold). In a certain variable display, the ratio of the specific display result being derived and displayed is reduced. "

According to such a configuration, when the red hold display (second mode) is displayed for the variable display that has a slow digestion order and has not been executed yet, a specific count is made in the variable display that is already in the execution state. Assuming that the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") and ends, a blue hold display (first aspect) is displayed for the variable display whose digestion order is slow and has not been executed yet. Occasionally, an effect mode with a lower expectation appears as an effect target than when the count display of a specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") and ends in the variable display that is already in the execution state. The ratio will be high. That is, in this case, whether or not the red hold display (second mode) appears for the variable display that has not been executed yet functions as an important staging element during the period when the specific count effect is being executed. Through such a special staging relationship between the counting staging and the look-ahead staging, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment for a long period from the start to the end of the specific counting staging. It will be expected. In this sense, during the period when the specific count effect is being executed, it is still executed at the time of a new prize or a hold change effect (for example, an effect that upgrades the blue hold display to the red hold display). It is important to allow the hold display for the variable display that has not been made to appear in any of multiple modes such as the blue hold display (first aspect) and the red hold display (second aspect). It can be said that there is.

According to the special effect relationship between the count effect and the look-ahead effect, when a red hold display (second mode) appears for a variable display that has not yet been executed, the effect is being executed. If the variable display of is not finished and the variable display is continued until the next time or later, the ratio of the staging mode with high expectation appears when the count staging is finished, so the specific counting staging is finished. You will expect it not to be done. On the other hand, when a blue hold display (first aspect) appears for a variable display that has not been executed yet, it is less expected that the count effect is terminated by the variable display being executed. Since the rate at which the effect mode with a high degree of expectation appears when the count effect ends is higher than when it ends in the variable display of, it is expected that the specific count effect will end earlier.

However, the count effect does not necessarily have to straddle a plurality of variable displays, and the count effect may be ended within one variable display in which the count effect is started. Even with such a configuration, if a new prize is generated while the count effect is being executed, a blue hold display (first mode) and a red hold are used for the variable display that has not yet been executed. Since there is no difference in the fact that which of the display (second aspect) appears can function as an important staging index for the counting staging, a special staging between the counting staging and the look-ahead staging is performed. Through the relationship, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment for a long period from the start to the end of the specific count effect.

At the start of the specific count effect, a plurality of hold displays are displayed, but none of them is in a specific mode (for example, look-ahead hold such as green or red) (for example, a situation where the look-ahead hold has not changed). Even if the above appears, it may be possible to execute a process of making a specific mode appear during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed (for example, a process of changing from a normal hold to a red hold). According to such a configuration, at the start of the specific count effect, it is assumed that a plurality of hold displays are displayed, but none of them has a specific mode (for example, a situation in which the look-ahead hold has not changed). However, there is a possibility that the count display in the specific count effect may change to a hold display having a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (specific display result in the variable display in the execution state). (There is a possibility that the ratio may be changed from a high ratio to a low ratio), so that the game entertainment from the start to the end of the specific count effect is suitably maintained. Will be expected to do.

However, at this time, a plurality of display modes are prepared as count displays by the specific count effect, and if the count display is displayed in the first mode and the count is digested, the second mode is used. A process (for example, normal hold) in which a specific mode appears for the hold display until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value, as compared with the case where the k count is consumed in the displayed state. It is desirable to reduce the rate at which the process of changing from to red hold) is executed. According to such a configuration, by confirming the count display by the specific count effect, the display mode may change to a hold display having a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) during the count period. It is possible to recognize "high possibility" and predict "high possibility that the specific count effect will be continued until after the next symbol change is started" from the remaining count value. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide fun by comparing the results of those recognition / prediction.

On the other hand, on the contrary, at the start of the specific count effect, when a plurality of hold displays are displayed but none of them is in a specific mode (for example, a situation in which the look-ahead hold has not changed). During the execution period of the specific count effect, the process of causing the specific mode to appear during the period of execution of the specific count effect (for example, the process of changing from the normal hold to the red hold) may not be executable. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the count display in the specific count effect can be changed to the hold display having a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (execution state). In the variable display, there is a possibility that the ratio of the specific display result being derived and displayed may be changed from a high ratio to a low ratio). Therefore, from the start to the end of the specific count effect. You will be able to provide a sense of security.

Further, it may be possible that the plurality of hold displays are sequentially digested and the plurality of symbol fluctuations are sequentially digested before the predetermined time required for the specific count effect elapses. According to such a configuration, even if the third hold display is set to red hold in the situation where the specific count effect is started, the symbol change corresponding to the third hold display is started. Since there is a possibility that the specific count effect may reach a predetermined value during the execution period, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the specific count effect is completed.

Further, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, it may be possible to execute a process of putting the symbol change into the stop state (temporary stop) and then putting the symbol change into the change state again. According to such a configuration, for example, when the symbol change is stopped (temporarily stopped) while the look-ahead hold appears for the variable display that has not been executed yet, the specified state is in the executed state. Since it will function as an effect as if the next symbol change is started while the count effect is continued, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the end of the specific count effect. Become.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example related to "double chance up" (holding change effect using the special time hold change table T9b), the hold display is displayed smaller than the count display in the count effect, or is placed in front of the hold display. The change in the hold display can be made by moving the movable decoration or displaying another display image so that it covers the hold display so that even if there is a change in the hold display, it is difficult to notice. It is desirable to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest when it occurs.

In addition, a "first mode that requires a relatively long time" and a "second mode that requires a relatively short time" are prepared as the "specific count effect", and as a "effect pattern (design variation time)". A plurality of effects based on the result of the jackpot determination of "a specific effect pattern that is shorter than the relatively long time (first aspect) but longer than the relatively short time (second aspect)". You may select and execute from the patterns. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect pattern appears, the specific count effect is continued until the next fluctuation depending on which mode (first aspect, second aspect) the specific count effect is executed. Or, it will not be continued, so it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example related to "double chance up" (holding change production using the special time holding change table T9b), "holding information displayed in the second aspect among the plurality of aspects (for example, red). In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the look-ahead hold), the hold information displayed in the first aspect of the plurality of embodiments (for example, the blue look-ahead hold) is digested. The ratio of the jackpot symbol (specific display result) being derived and displayed is higher than the variable display of the identified identification information. "However," at least the specific count effect is executed within the period when the variable display of the identification information is executed. Hold information whose digestion order is later than the variable display in the execution state (pre-reading hold for the variable display that is not yet executed when the specific count effect is executed within the execution period of the variable display) Is displayed in the second aspect (for example, red look-ahead hold), it is in the execution state more than when the hold information is displayed in the first aspect (for example, blue look-ahead hold). In order to reduce the ratio of the specific display result to be derived and displayed in the variable display, there are cases where the symbol variation is executed in a shorter time than the predetermined time required for the specific count effect elapses, and a predetermined case required for the specific count effect. The design change may be executed in a longer time than the time elapses. However, in this case, regarding the above-mentioned "specific count effect", "the remaining time for the specific effect (the remaining time until a specific effect change occurs for the specific effect) is suggested by updating the count value according to the passage of time. It does not necessarily have to be executed as "an effect that suggests the remaining time for a specific effect by an image change or the like according to the passage of time". In short, if it is possible to suggest the remaining time, it is possible to provide fun as to whether the symbol change will end before the remaining time is exhausted, and the interest in the game will decline. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the "specific count effect" is not "an effect that suggests the remaining time for the specific effect by updating the count value according to the passage of time", but "the image change of the remaining time for the specific effect according to the passage of time, etc." Regarding what is realized by other depictions such as "the effect suggested by", the effect example (counting) is different from the above-mentioned effect example related to "double chance up" (hold change effect using special time hold change table T9b). It may be applied to the production).

In addition, regarding the "specific count effect", the effect change related to the specific effect is completed in the middle stage before the suggested "remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to the specific effect" is exhausted. May occur. At this time, it is possible that an effect change that cannot appear when the "remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to the specific effect" is completely exhausted without ending in the middle stage. These modifications are also applied to an effect example (count effect) different from the effect example (hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b) related to the above-mentioned "double chance up". May be good.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a new prize is awarded during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect (table T8a-1 and table T8b-1) of the first preceding embodiment or the second preceding embodiment is being executed. The rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed when the variable display that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is started and this is being executed when the hold information is newly acquired in response to the occurrence is described above. It is decided to perform control (control related to the change effect) in which the timer look-ahead effect can be executed so as to be different according to the newly acquired hold information (new prize).

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a processing procedure for the processing performed to realize such a transformational effect. In this process, a prize is awarded to a specific starting port (acceptance of a game ball) during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed. ) May occur, or within the period before the hold information held before the prize (the hold information in which the information related to the effect is deleted / reset) is consumed. It may be performed at a predetermined timing of.

As shown in FIG. 176, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, as the process of step S5601, it is determined whether the hold information corresponding to the new prize indicates the specific game information. The specific game information may be, for example, "game information that causes a highly expected specific fluctuation pattern such as SP reach to appear when the new hold information is digested" or "the new game information". It may be "game information that wins a big hit when the pending information is digested". Here, for convenience of explanation, "game information that wins a big hit when the new reserved information is digested" will be described as the specific game information.

As a result, if it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new prize indicates specific game information, then, as the process of step S5602, the hold information corresponding to the new prize is stored before the hold information. When at least a part of the information about the effect is deleted from the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode or the second preceding mode) among the reserved information, and the change effect is performed. Reset to the content.

For example, when the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) is set as the timer look-ahead effect, when the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is exhausted, the timer effect on the advance notice side has a probability of approximately 20%. It is executed, and when the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) is set as the timer look-ahead effect, there is a probability of approximately 80% when the pending information targeted by the timer look-ahead effect is exhausted. As described above, the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed. However, in the process of step S5602, all (or at least a part) of the information related to the timer look-ahead effect is deleted, and the table referred to when the effect pattern (SP reach, etc.) or the advance notice lottery is determined is used. Settings (such as setting a change flag) will be made to change to something different from the normal time. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, by performing control (FIG. 149) related to the effect based on the effect information modified (deleted / set) in this way, the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) and the first timer look-ahead effect are performed. Regardless of which of the two preceding modes (timer generation chance) is set, in the process of step S5502 (FIG. 149), the advance notice side timer effect is executed with a probability of approximately 50%. In addition, when deciding the contents such as the effect pattern and the advance notice effect, for example, the table at the time of the change effect (not shown) is referred to based on the fact that the change flag is set, and various effects are different from the normal time. Will be executed.

Then, after the modification process (step S5602) of the hold effect information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is performed, the background image is used as the process of step S5603, and the background image when the change effect is performed. Perform the process to change to. At this time, it is desirable to hide the display (first preceding mode, second preceding mode) that appears as the timer look-ahead effect. That is, in this case, when a new prize is generated (or from the time when the prize is generated until the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is consumed), the background image is the background at the time of the completely changed effect. When the image is suddenly changed to the image, the first-preceding mode or the second-preceding mode that has appeared until then is hidden, but the background image itself at the time of the transformation effect functions as one aspect of the timer look-ahead effect. You will be able to get it. Then, during the period when the background image at the time of the change effect appears in this way, whether or not the notice side timer effect appears when the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is exhausted (whether it is a mess). It will be possible to have great interest, which will allow the game to be maintained during the period when the timer look-ahead effect is being performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5601 that the hold information corresponding to the new prize does not indicate specific game information, then whether or not to execute the completely changed effect as the process of step S5611. Judgment processing is performed. This one-change effect is an effect of changing the background image to the background image when the one-change effect is performed in the process of step S5603, even though the above-mentioned modification process (step S5602) for the reserved information is not performed. That is.

If it is determined in the process of step S5611 that the one-change effect is not executed, the current timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode, second preceding mode) and the determination mode of various effects are to be continued. , The process (FIG. 176) is terminated without performing any process related to the change effect.

In such a configuration, when a new prize is generated during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed (in a specific starting area). When the game ball is accepted and the game information corresponding to it is newly acquired), the above-mentioned timer effect on the advance notice side is displayed when the variable display targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is started and this is being executed. The advance notice side timer effect can be executed so that the execution rate differs depending on the newly acquired game information (holding information). That is, in this case, if the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding aspect is being executed, the hold information is not the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect, but the new hold information. The acquired hold information is specific game information (information indicating a specific fluctuation pattern such as SP reach, information indicating a jackpot, or information indicating that the type of jackpot is to shift to a high-probability time-saving gaming state, etc. ), The ratio of the timer look-ahead effect on the advance notice side changes during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect, so it is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. It becomes possible to have expectations for other effects until the variable display is executed, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest during the period.

Further, in the above configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first precedent mode or the second precedent mode is executed, the hold information is not the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. Depending on whether the newly acquired hold information is specific game information, the above modification process (step S5602) is performed, and before the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is digested. The background image is changed to the background image at the time of the change effect, and the display related to the timer look-ahead effect is hidden. That is, in this case, until the transformation effect is started, the main body of the effect is the timer look-ahead effect, and the effect situation that gives a sense of expectation to the pending information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is provided. On the other hand, after the change effect is started, the main body of the effect is changed to the change effect, and the newly acquired hold information including the above timer look-ahead effect is given a sense of expectation. It will be shifted to the production situation where various productions are performed. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly change the subject of the effect when a hold with a higher expectation than the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is acquired, and it is already set. It will be possible to avoid losing the production time for the highly expected hold information due to the production.

It should be noted that such a change effect may be executed even if the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect indicates that the jackpot is won. In other words, in this case, even though the main body of the production has moved to the newly won hold information, the big hit production will appear in the hold that is digested before that, so a surprise production is realized. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

Further, in this embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding aspect is being executed, the process related to the change effect (FIG. 176) is executed. However, even when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding embodiment is being executed, the process related to the above-mentioned change effect (FIG. 176) may be executed. ..

Further, the background image at the time of the change effect may be continued even after the variable display according to the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is completed. That is, in this case, the hold information that is digested after the variable display according to the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is completed will function as a completely changed effect.

Further, such a change effect may be executed on the condition that the new prize is generated and a specific condition is satisfied even when the timer look-ahead effect is not executed. In this case, for example, the table referred to when determining the production pattern (SP reach, etc.) and the advance notice lottery for all the reserved information stored before the new prize is changed to a different one from the normal time. Settings for making the effect (such as setting a change flag) will be made, and as a result, the appearance probability of various effects will change unless it is a change effect.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rate at which the advance notice side timer effect is executed is changed at the time of the change effect, but when the change flag is set, the effect pattern different from the normal time is determined to change the change side timer. The ratio at which the effect is executed may be changed. As a result, even if the variable number does not cause the variable side timer effect to appear when the variable effect is not executed, the variable side timer effect appears when the variable effect is executed, or the variable side timer effect appears when the variable effect is not executed. Even if it is a number, it becomes possible to control so that the variable side timer effect does not appear when the variable effect is executed.

In addition, when such a change effect is performed, there is a possibility that the variable side timer effect will not appear when the change effect is executed, even if the timer effect appears when the change effect is not executed. Because there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline, if you win a lottery for a special notice effect that cannot appear during normal times (when the change effect is not executed) when the change effect is executed, the special notice will be given. It may be controlled so that the effect can appear.

Further, the ratio of the timer effect on the advance notice side to be executed in the variable display that was the target of the timer look-ahead effect at the time of the change effect does not necessarily have to be constant (50% here), and for example, the target of the timer look-ahead effect. It may be controlled so as to be different depending on whether or not the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display that has been changed to.

Hereinafter, the contents of the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. Here, the processing example related to each of the above-mentioned effects is merely an example, and for example, an effect other than the above-mentioned types may be executed as the content of the advance notice effect, or the appearance timing of each advance notice effect or the like. The appearance conditions and the like may be changed as appropriate as long as they are within the same technical concept. Therefore, in the production example described below, there may be cases where the processing content related to each of the above-mentioned productions does not match, but it is within the scope of the same technical idea and within the range that can be implemented by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are only changed appropriately in. Further, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed by the advance notice side timer effect or the variable side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning to include a timer look-ahead effect. Further, as the mode of the "count display", the "number of seconds" is counted below, but the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 177 (A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. In FIG. 177 (B), two prizes are generated during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (A), and the hold information corresponding to those prizes is stored. The hold display corresponding to 1 is shown in the normal hold mode, and the hold display corresponding to the second winning hold 2 is displayed in the red mode. In FIG. 177 (C), after the decorative symbol SZ that was in the variable display state in the effect state shown in FIG. 177 (B) is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, the hold information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out). ) Is performed, and the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested and changed to a fluctuating state. In this production example, as is clear from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of variable display (state of hold 0) is set, it is shown at the time of hold 1. The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the hold display (hold display of hold 0). Further, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can be further changed in the mode of hold change (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. It's a street.

Here, in the staging situation shown in FIG. 177 (C), the hold information that was in the state of hold 1 at the time of FIGS. 177 (A) and 177 (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Or, the hold look-ahead effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. As the mode of the hold look-ahead effect, any of the above-mentioned first precedent mode, second precedent mode, and third precedent mode may be executed, but in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (C), the hold look-ahead effect is executed. The appearance of the effect means that the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variable display) or the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold look-ahead effect (example here). Then, the hold information of hold 1 is targeted for the hold look-ahead effect).

In FIG. 177 (D), one prize is generated during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (C), and the hold information corresponding to the prize is normally held as the hold display corresponding to the hold 2. The production status displayed in the above mode is shown. However, assuming that the hold display corresponding to the hold 2 indicates specific game information (here, jackpot information) and satisfies the execution condition of the above-mentioned transformation effect, it is shown in FIG. 177 (E). As described above, the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2.

As described above, the one-change effect is a hold information obtained by modifying the contents of the hold information (here, hold 1) that is stored before the hold information (here, hold 2) that causes the change effect. It is something to digest. On the other hand, the above-mentioned one-change ghost effect is, for example, a hold that occurs when the hold display corresponding to hold 2 does not indicate specific game information (here, big hit information) and causes the one-change ghost effect. The contents of the hold information (here, hold 1) that is stored before the information (here, hold 2) and is in the hold state are put on hold and digested without modification. That is, in this case, the susceptibility to various effects will differ when the hold 1 is exhausted depending on whether the one-change effect or the one-change effect is performed. It is possible for the player to guess whether or not a hold indicating the game information is included (whether the one-change effect or the one-change effect is performed), so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. In both the one-change effect and the one-change effect, it is desirable to control the hold display (here, hold 2) corresponding to those effects so that the hold change does not occur regardless of the result of the jackpot determination.

Therefore, the timing at which the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to such hold 2 is after the variable display of hold 0, which is not the target of modification of the hold information, is completed. Moreover, it is desirable that the variable display of the hold 1 to be modified of the hold information is started before the start. In this respect, in this embodiment, by executing the control related to the change effect when the hold display of hold 1 is not yet shifted display after the lost symbol is stopped in the change display of hold 0. In addition to modifying the hold information (particularly, information related to the effect) of hold 1, as shown in FIG. 177 (E), the timer look-ahead effect and the mode of hold change (red) that have been displayed up to that point are displayed. In addition to hiding (displaying in a normal hold mode), the background image is changed to the background image when the transformation effect is performed. At this time, a predetermined display image (here, "change") is displayed for a predetermined time.

Further, in such an effect situation (FIG. 177 (E)), the timer look-ahead effect that has appeared until the variable display of hold 0 is continued without starting the count display. Therefore, it is recognizable that the target of the timer look-ahead effect is hold 1.

In FIG. 177 (F), after the appearance of the transformational effect background shown in FIG. 177 (E), the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested and changed into a fluctuating state by shifting the hold information. It shows the production situation.

Here, in the staging situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), the hold information that was in the state of hold 1 at the time of FIG. 177 (E) is digested and the variable display is started, or the same. The count display of the timer effect is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. Similarly to this, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), a specific display (here, "make a conversation notice appear") related to the first production (here, "conversation notice") is displayed. Has been done. The timing at which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) may be before the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears, or after the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears. Also, it is possible to appear at an appropriate timing.

It should be noted that the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case where the timer look-ahead effect is in effect (FIG. 177 (D)). A part of the display range (left part) of the notice effect that displays "Make a conversation notice appear" in the so-called ticker mode (slide image) is hidden by the timer effect that is displayed with priority over this. ing.

Further, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), the timer effect starts the count display with a relatively small number of counts such as "10 seconds". There is a high possibility that it will be the target of timer production, and there is concern that the interest in the game will decline. However, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), a specific display (conversation notice) indicating that the effect type (conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the timer effect is displayed (conversation notice). Is appearing), and it is expected that it will be confirmed and suggested that the target of the timer production is "a conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage" and that the big hit is won by the success of the mission. Therefore, the decline in the entertainment interest will be suppressed.

Moreover, as described above, when the change effect is being executed, the timer effect appears with a probability different from that in the normal time. For example, when the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation), the timer effect appears only with a probability of about 20% in normal times. On the other hand, when the change effect is executed, the timer effect appears with a probability of about 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect appears while the background of such a change effect appears, the appearance probability of the timer effect changes instead of the change effect (generally 20%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change (about 20%). The expectation that (about 50%) is being executed, and eventually the expectation that the jackpot will be won (because it is confirmed that the pending information of the jackpot is included at the time of executing the change effect) will increase. However, at this time, if the timer effect does not appear while the background of the change effect appears, the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change, not the change effect (generally 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. As a result, the degree of concern that the completely changing production (generally 20%) is being executed increases.

When the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared), the timer effect appears with a probability of 100% in normal times. , When the change effect is executed, the timer effect appears only with a probability of about 50%. Therefore, if the timer effect does not appear while such a change effect background appears, the appearance probability of the timer effect changes instead of the change change effect (generally 100%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. It will be definitively suggested that the production (approximately 50%) is being executed, and that the pending information for winning the jackpot is included. However, at this time, if the timer effect appears while the background of such a change effect appears, it is not a change effect (generally 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, but a change effect in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. As a result, the degree of concern that the production (generally 100%) is being executed increases.

FIG. 178 (G) is related to a timer suggesting that the count display of the timer effect executed in FIG. 177 (F) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, 0) and reaches the predetermined numerical value (here, 0). The display (here, "Yukuzo") indicates the production status in which it appeared. The timer-related display (here, "Yukuzo") suggesting that a predetermined value (here, 0) has been reached may appear after the count display of the timer effect is hidden.

In the staging situation shown in FIG. 178 (G), since the count display has reached a predetermined value while the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is still displayed, some kind of staging target for the timer staging. It is definitely suggested that is about to appear, and it can be said that a great deal of attention is being paid to whether or not a conversation notice will appear as the production.

In FIG. 178 (H), after the timer effect that has reached a predetermined value in FIG. 178 (G) and the timer-related display are hidden, a conversation notice (here, here) is shown as an effect that is the effect target of the timer effect. "Maybe it's a chance") shows the production situation where it appeared. Immediately after this, a special display indicating that the mission was successful will appear in the mission production (make the conversation notice appear).

In the production situation shown in FIG. 178 (H), it is shown that the mission was successful in the mission production (make the conversation notice appear), so that it is definitely suggested that the jackpot will be won.

In FIG. 178 (I), after the mission is successful in FIG. 178 (H), the fluctuation display is stopped with a lost symbol even though the special display (here, "mission success!") Appears. It shows the production situation.

That is, as described above, in this embodiment, with respect to the specific display (here, "make the conversation notice appear") related to the first production (here, "conversation notice"), the pending information to be the production target. (In the situation shown in FIG. 178 (I), it is possible to appear within the period of the variable display according to the hold 1), and under predetermined conditions, the hold information before the variable display (FIG. 178 (I). ), It is possible to appear in advance even within the period of variable display according to the hold 0). Moreover, the timing itself at which the first production (here, "conversation notice") is displayed and the special display (here, "mission success!") Appears is also the pending information (big hit) that is the target of the production. Not only can it appear within the period of variable display according to the variable display), but also within the period of variable display according to the reserved information (held information that does not become a big hit) prior to the variable display under predetermined conditions. It is said that it can appear in advance.

According to such a configuration, although it is definitely suggested that a special display (here, "Mission success!") Appears in the mission production and it becomes a big hit, the variable display ends with a lost pattern. Since it will be (stopped), an unexpected situation will occur as a player. However, after that, when the next fluctuation display is started, the fluctuation display will end (stop) with the jackpot symbol, so that a feeling of happiness will be given after being dropped into a despair state. .. As a result, even after it is definitely suggested that the jackpot will be a big hit, it will be possible to add a staging inflection, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment until the jackpot symbol is stopped. become.

However, when the special display appears in advance in this way, there is a concern that a complaint from the player side to the hole side will occur when the variable display ends (stops) with a lost symbol. Therefore, in the case of a loss variation in which the special display appears first, the special display does not appear at the rate at which the look-ahead effect that spans the next variation display (variation display that becomes a big hit) is executed within the execution period of the variation display. It is desirable to set it to be higher than the time. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), a timer is used within the period from the completion of the mission in FIG. 178 (H) to the end (stop) of the fluctuation display with a lost symbol. A new look-ahead effect will be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the timer effect count display is started, a loss symbol is displayed in the variation display, and a variation display in which the timer effect count display is started appears. It will be possible to realize the effect as if the variable display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried over. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a complaint on the player side to the hole side when the variable display ends (stops) with a lost symbol.

However, the look-ahead effect that straddles the multiple variable displays (up to the variable display that becomes a big hit) does not necessarily have to be executed, and in this sense, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the pending information in which the big hit symbol appears. It is desirable to continue to display the special display (here, "Mission success!") That appeared within the execution period of the fluctuation display in which the lost symbol appears even after the variable display is started after the game is digested. In this regard, if such a special display (here, "Mission success!") Is continuously displayed until the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display in which the jackpot symbol appears, the effect is produced until the jackpot symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 178 (K), it is deterministically suggested that the jackpot will be won as a staging in the staging pattern, because there is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable without being given a specific intonation. It is desirable to hide the special display (here, "Mission success!") Before the appearance of. As a result, after the special display (here, "Mission success!") Is hidden, it is definitely confirmed that the big hit will be won as the effect content in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 178 (K). Until the suggested effect image) appears, the anxiety about the appearance of the jackpot symbol will increase to some extent, and the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (L) (the effect situation in which the jackpot symbol is stopped) will increase. ), It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In addition, in FIG. 178 (J), the count display of the timer effect for 30 seconds is started, and after the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (J) appears, the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (K) is displayed. By the time it appears, the 30-second timer effect count display ends, the timer-related display (here, "Yukuzo") is displayed, and the effect that is the target of the effect has occurred. Needless to say.

Next, a timer effect example different from the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180.

FIG. 179 (A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. In FIG. 179 (B), three prizes are generated during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (A), and the hold information corresponding to those prizes is stored. The hold display corresponding to 1 is displayed in a normal hold mode, the hold display corresponding to the second winning hold 2 is displayed in a red mode, and the hold display corresponding to the third winning hold 3 is displayed in a blue mode. It shows the situation. In FIG. 179 (C), after the decorative symbol SZ that was in the variable display state in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (B) is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, the hold information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out). ) Is performed, and the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested and changed to a fluctuating state. In addition, also in this effect example, as is clear from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of variable display (state of hold 0) is set, it is shown at the time of hold 1. The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the hold display (hold display of hold 0). Further, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can be further changed in the mode of hold change (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. It's a street. Further, in FIGS. 179 and 180, the movable body KT for staging, which has been omitted in FIGS. 177 and 178 for convenience of explanation, is shown in the drawings. In addition, the movable body KT is, for example, "back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc." It is equivalent to "movable member" etc.

Here, in the staging situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold information that was in the state of hold 1 at the time of FIGS. 179 (A) and 179 (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Or, the hold look-ahead effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. As the mode of the hold look-ahead effect, any of the above-mentioned first precedent mode, second precedent mode, and third precedent mode may be executed, but in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold look-ahead effect is executed. The appearance of the effect means that either the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variable display), the hold information of hold 1, or the hold information of hold 2 is the target of the hold look-ahead effect. (In the example here, the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold look-ahead effect).

Here, as an aspect of the hold look-ahead effect, the count display may be executed from the time when the corresponding hold display (here, the hold information of hold 1) is still in the hold state. That is, in this case, an event may occur in which the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ ends after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the count display is a predetermined value (here, “0”). Since the event that the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ ends before reaching is possible, the target of the timer effect is the target of any pending information even if the count display is being executed. It will be possible to make it difficult to grasp.

However, in this effect example, one of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation), the second preceding mode (timer generation chance), and the third preceding mode (timer generation chance) is displayed as the mode of the hold look-ahead effect. Can be done.

In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), among the hold information 0, 1 and 2, the hold information 1 is in the red mode, which is the mode of the hold display having the highest expectation of a big hit. In view of this, from the player's point of view, it is desirable that the timer look-ahead effect targets the hold information 1 and generates a combined effect with the red hold display. That is, in this case, since it is shown that the expectation degree that the jackpot can be obtained by the hold information 1 is further higher by the combined effect, the hold 0 in the normal hold mode and the blue hold 2 in the low expectation degree are pre-read by the timer. It is possible to raise the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in any of the reserved information 0 to 2 as compared with the case where the jackpot expectation is dispersed as the target of the production. In addition, if the blue hold 2 with a low expectation becomes the target of the timer look-ahead effect, there is a concern that the game interest will deteriorate. Therefore, in order to maintain the game interest, the blue hold 2 with a low expectation is a timer. It is also important to advance the production so that it is not the target of the look-ahead production.

Moreover, as described above, in this embodiment, when a new prize is generated while the hold information (big hit hold) in which the big hit symbol appears is stored, the big hit hold time is not used in the normal time table T9a (FIG. 174). The hold change effect is executed with reference to the dedicated table (FIG. 175: special time hold change table T9b). In the hold change effect using this special time hold change table T9b, when the jackpot hold is already included (when hold 1 in the red mode is a jackpot), red or green is unlikely to appear as the mode of hold 2. And the mode of blinking blue or white is relatively easy to appear. Therefore, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), when the timer look-ahead effect is targeted at the hold information 1 and functions to raise the jackpot expectation, the blue hold 2 with a low expectation is set as the timer. The special time hold change table T9b (Fig. 175) is referred to because the chance increase by avoiding the deterioration of the game entertainment by targeting and the hold information of the hold 1 in the red mode is a big hit, and the blue mode. The chance is increased by expecting that the hold display of Hold 2 is in blue (high probability of appearance) (the notice side timer effect with high expectation of big hit is "effect in the running fluctuation display". It also functions as if it supports the fact that the variable display during execution is a big hit), which will increase the chances of the game. Will be able to.

Therefore, in the staging situation shown in FIGS. 179 (B) and 179 (C), is the blue or white blinking hold display newly generated when a new prize is generated, or the green or red hold display is displayed? By confirming whether it will occur newly, it is possible to recognize whether the jackpot hold is included, and it can be said that the production situation is such that a new prize is urged.

In FIG. 179 (D), the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ that was in the running state is a lost symbol while the mode of the timer look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 179 (C) is maintained (without starting the count). After the end (stop), the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested and changed to a fluctuating state by shifting the hold information respectively.

In the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (D), the player can see that the target of the timer look-ahead effect is the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variable display), which is the red mode, and the blue mode. It becomes possible to recognize that it is any of the hold information of hold 1, and it is desired that the count display is executed within the execution period of the variable display according to the hold information of hold 0, which is a red aspect.

In addition, also in this effect example, the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case where the timer look-ahead effect is in the mode (FIG. 179 (D)). Here, a part of the dialogue part (left part) of the female character in the conversation notice is hidden by the timer effect that is displayed with priority over this.

FIG. 179 (E) shows an effect situation in which the timer look-ahead effect ends and the timer effect count display is being executed during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (D). ..

However, as described above, whether or not the count display is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ according to the digestion of the red hold information (whether the timer look-ahead is for the red hold information). ) Is a matter of great interest to players. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the count display in the executing state is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the count display is in the executing state. It is possible to control the movable body KT for staging to move forward and position it for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, it is confirmed whether or not the timer effect count display is executed while the timer effect (timer look-ahead effect, count display) is executed and the player is given a feeling of excitement. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to further increase the attention to the timer effect and enhance the feeling of excitement.

In order to preferably realize such an effect, in a situation where the timer effect is executed but the count display is not yet executed (such as when the timer look-ahead effect is being executed), the movable body KT for the above effect is executed. It is desirable to control so as not to operate (move). That is, in this case, the movable body KT for the production suddenly moves where the player does not care about the existence of the movable body KT for the production, and the count display becomes difficult to see. By such a surprise effect that occurs at the worst timing, it becomes possible to further increase the attention to the timer effect and enhance the feeling of excitement.

Further, the operation effect by the movable body KT for the effect may be made to function only as an effect of making the timer look-ahead effect easy to see and making it difficult to see the count display among the timer effects. It may also function as a target notice E2 (first effect). That is, in this case, although the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is not the target of the timer effect and is not originally related, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being executed. (FIG. 179 (E)), for example, a higher jackpot expectation than the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)) can be shown, and the game entertainment can be improved. You will be able to do it.

As described above, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 (here, the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect) is executed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations, for example, counting. In the state where the display is not executed, it is desirable to indicate the jackpot expectation degree depending on which of the light emitting modes (blue, green, red) when the movable body KT for the effect is operated appears. At this time, when the movable body KT for the effect operates in the red light emitting mode, the jackpot expectation may be higher than that of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)). The expected value of the jackpot expectation when the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect occurs is lower than the expected value of the jackpot expectation of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)). Is required to be. However, as described above, when the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect is executed during the execution of the count display, the movable body for the effect is movable regardless of whether blue, green, or red appears as the light emission mode. It is desirable to control the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the motion effect by the body KT to be the same (for example, 70%). According to such a configuration, during the execution of the count display, attention is paid not to what aspect appears in the motion effect by the movable body KT for staging, but to the motion effect itself by the movable body KT for staging. Will be gathered together, so that it will be possible to avoid a decrease in the enjoyment of the game depending on the mode when the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect is generated.

By the way, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (E), the above-mentioned double chance is successfully increased because the target of the timer look-ahead effect is not the hold 2 in the blue mode but the hold 1 in red. In addition, it has succeeded in increasing the chance by executing the non-target notice E2 (here, the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect) during the execution of the count display. Therefore, if it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will not be won in the variable display despite the high expectation of the production situation, the game interest is originally enhanced. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced in the variable display that should be. In this regard, in the above-mentioned special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175), which is referred to when the jackpot hold (including hold 0) is included, the hold in the green or red mode when a new prize is generated. Since it is difficult for information to appear, if the hold 2 corresponding to the occurrence of a new prize in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (E) is displayed on hold in a red mode, a big hit hold is included. There is a possibility that the player will be exposed to what is not done.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a new prize is awarded during the period during which the count display of the specific timer effect, which is considered to be a highly expected mode, is executed, and during the period thereafter. Even if the mode (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) occurs, it becomes difficult to recognize the mode, and even if the hold display that has already been displayed is changed to hold, it becomes difficult to recognize the mode. I'm supposed to do it. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (E), the hold 1 and 2 are hidden and displayed by their shadows, which makes it difficult to recognize the mode of the hold display. May be hidden. As a result, even though the count display with high expectation is executed, it is possible to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated by the green or red hold display appearing when a new prize is generated. become.

In FIG. 179 (F), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 179 (E) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, It shows the effect status in which the effect (cut-in effect by a ally character) that is the effect of the timer effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 179 (F), even in the situation where the effect (cut-in effect by the ally character) that is the effect target of the timer effect is being executed, the hold 1 and 2 remain hidden and are shaded by the shadow. The mode of the hold display is difficult to recognize.

In FIG. 180 (G), after the effect (cut-in effect by a ally character) that is the effect target of the timer effect is executed in FIG. 180 (F), the ally character wins over the enemy character, so that the variable display is displayed. It shows the production situation that is shown to be confirmed and stopped by the jackpot symbol.

In the production situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), since it is definitely suggested that a big hit will occur, the game interest is reduced regardless of which aspect appears as the mode of the hold 1 and 2. There is no such thing. Therefore, with respect to the hold 1 and 2 which are difficult to recognize, which mode appears after the effect indicating whether or not the jackpot is displayed is displayed in a recognizable manner. It is desirable to be done. That is, in this case, even if it is shown that the fluctuation display is definitely stopped due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character, the mode of hold 1 and 2 becomes recognizable at that time, and as a result, it is held. Since it may be recognized that either 1 or 2 is a red or rainbow color mode, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), a new timer effect is generated and the count display is started. In this count display, even in the staging situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) where the jackpot symbol is fixedly stopped and the variable display is terminated, the remaining count number remains (the count number displayed at the start of the count display). Of these, the number of counts is larger than the smallest number (10 seconds)), and no effect that is the target of the timer effect is generated, and it continues even after the variable display ends. It is executed as the above-mentioned special timer effect.

However, after that, the count display of the timer effect is hidden during the period when the opening effect is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (I). As a result, the variable display (design effect) ended in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) and the effect during the big hit game (big hit game effect) started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J). It becomes possible to recognize that the production is not connected to each other, and the player can enjoy the newly started production with a fresh feeling.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is secretly executed according to the passage of time even during the period in which the count display of the timer effect is hidden (execution period of the opening effect). When the count display of the timer effect is redisplayed in the effect during the big hit game (big hit game effect) started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J), the numerical value of the count display is advanced by that amount. I am trying to be there. Then, the effect situation will be created as if the remaining time until the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value suddenly decreases, so the count is performed when the player's feelings are not ready. It becomes possible to make the display reach a predetermined numerical value, and it becomes preferable to avoid the timer effect being continued from the variable display state becoming a rut.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the timer effect that is continued from the state of the variable display is controlled so that the count display reaches a predetermined value within the execution period of the jackpot game. At this time, the point that a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) suggesting that a predetermined numerical value (here, 0) has been reached appears is the same as the timer effect performed within the period of the variable display.

In FIG. 180 (K), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 180 (J) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, It shows the effect status in which the specific effect (corresponding to the above-mentioned first special effect and the second special effect, "CHANGE" is displayed in the figure) to be the effect target of the timer effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 180 (K), in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a specific effect (display of "CHANGE") can be executed within the execution period of the jackpot game, and the specific effect ("CHANCE" is displayed). When "CHANGE" is displayed), the winning jackpot type is advantageous to the player (for example, the type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, or the high-probability time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. It is shown that the degree of expectation is high. The ratio may be 100%. In this way, when the above-mentioned special timer effect in which the count display is continued until after the big hit game is started is executed, not only the big hit is confirmed but also the winning big hit is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player. Since a certain degree of expectation will be high, it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

After that, when the ally character fights against the enemy character in a specific round game or the like, and the ally character wins as a result (Fig. 180 (L)), the winning jackpot is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Will be shown to be. When the ally character is defeated in the effect, it is shown that the winning jackpot is not a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

When the result of the effect during the big hit game appears in this way, the game will proceed according to the result. For example, if the result that the ally character wins is obtained, the big hit game is executed up to 16 rounds. Or, after the jackpot game is over, it will be controlled to a high probability time saving state. On the other hand, if the result that the ally character is defeated is obtained, the big hit game is ended in 8 rounds, or after the big hit game is finished, the game state with a lower degree of advantage than the high probability time saving state (for example, low probability). It will be controlled by the time saving state etc.).

Here, the effect content of the specific effect (display of "CHANGE") shown in FIG. 180 (K) may be related to the effect in which the ally character fights against the enemy character in the specific round game. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K), the effect content in which the ally character acquires a weapon is set, and the effect of fighting the enemy character using the weapon acquired in the specific round game is executed. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K), it becomes possible to imply that the possibility that the ally character will win in the subsequent battle has increased.

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself that may appear when such a timer effect is executed, and various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described. It should be noted that the effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed between the effects, and can also be appropriately combined and executed between the above-mentioned effects. Further, in each of the following production examples, the case of being executed as the advance notice side timer effect is described, but it may be executed as the variable side timer effect instead of the advance notice side timer effect. That is, in this case, the production content related to each of the following production examples is predetermined as the production content of the variation pattern.

[Timer target exclusion effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, a plurality of production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) are used as effect candidates to be timer targets. ) Is prepared, one of those effect modes is set as a timer target (count target) (timer target notice lottery), and a count display is performed toward the timing when the timer target effect mode appears. To execute. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation (character A notice), special timer, cut-in B, character B operation). (Notice of character B)) is performed without knowing which one is the target of the timer, and the production mode (notice of the timer target) that is not the target of the timer in such a production situation. It is possible to display which is the effect mode (the effect mode that was not determined as the timer target in the lottery) (timer target exclusion effect).

That is, in this case, at the stage where the remaining count in the timer effect is exhausted, the estimation material as to which effect mode is the target of the timer is provided. For example, when a low-expected effect mode (for example, a conversation notice) is suggested as an effect mode that is not a timer target, the possibility that the low-expected effect mode appears as a timer target is excluded at that time. Therefore, even though the remaining count in the timer production is being consumed, the game is enjoyed by the expectation that a highly expected production mode (for example, the character B operation) will appear as a timer target. It will be expected to improve. Further, when a highly expected production mode (for example, the operation of the accessory B) is suggested as the production mode that is not targeted by the timer, it is considered that the timer production cannot be expected at that time. It will be possible to focus on the production, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest when the count display reaches a predetermined value will be suppressed. According to such a configuration, while the remaining count is being digested, the expectation for the timer effect can be appropriately changed without changing the mode of the count display itself.

FIG. 181 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "Character reach without timer" are selected in the situation. FIG. 181 (b) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “SP reach without timer” are selected in the situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), a specific timer type (any of "hold change 5", "feature A operation 3", and "special timer 1"). When is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed, and even in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), a specific timer type (see step S5510) is executed as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). When any one of "hold change 5", "accessory A operation 3", and "accessory B operation 1" is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed.

However, the timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, the timer type is irrelevant and the variation pattern type. Or, it may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined production lottery based on the result of a big hit determination or the like. Further, as will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be made to appear in a fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. good. According to such a configuration, if it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed after the fact (for the timer target first-out effect) (although it is unknown whether it is executed), the effect that does not appear as the timer target. It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type the embodiment is. When the timer target exclusion effect appears while the timer effect has not been executed yet (the timer look-ahead effect is not even displayed), the timer effect is subsequently produced as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable to set the rate at which is executed to be high so that the timer effect is also executed as an effect suggesting that the timer effect is executed in advance.

First, among the examples shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "hold change 5" or "accessory A operation 3", 20 seconds have passed since the symbol change was started. At the timing around, the count display with the count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the effect mode ("hold change 5" or "feature A operation") that is the target of the timer. 3 ”) is appearing.

Further, among the examples shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "hold change 5" or "accessory A operation 3", 20 seconds have passed since the symbol change was started. At the timing around the time when the count has elapsed, the count display with the count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the effect mode ("hold change 5" or "feature") that is the target of the timer. A operation 3 ") is appearing.

In this regard, in the case of these examples, the timer effect is not executed (even the timer look-ahead effect is not displayed) at the timing when 10 seconds have passed since the symbol change was started. The first timer target exclusion effect may occur. In the first timer target exclusion effect, for example, it is shown that the "conversation notice" is not a candidate for the timer target, and when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the candidate for the timer target. It becomes possible for the player to grasp that is narrowed down to any of the pending change, the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the special timer, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation. That is, in this case, among the plurality of production modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation), the low-expected production mode is excluded from the timer target candidates. Since it becomes possible to recognize that (the high-expected production mode has the expectation that it is a candidate for the timer target), the player hopes that the timer production will occur within the fluctuation. Therefore, it is expected to improve the game interest when the timer effect (count display) is not executed.

In the period in which the count display is not executed (in this example, the period from the start of the symbol change to the elapse of 20 seconds), the above-mentioned timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode, second). The preceding mode, the third preceding mode) may be displayed.

Next, at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the symbol variation, the second timer target exclusion effect may occur in accordance with the start of the count display in the timer effect. In the second timer target exclusion effect, the effect other than the effect (conversation notice) excluded in the first timer target exclusion effect is excluded. For example, in the second timer target exclusion effect, if it is shown that the "special timer" is not a timer target candidate, the timer target candidate is pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B. , It becomes possible for the player to grasp that it has been narrowed down to any of the character B movements. In this case, the effect mode in which the big hit is confirmed among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation) is selected from the timer target candidates. Since it will be possible to recognize that it has been missed, it will be possible to arouse anxiety about whether a highly expected effect will appear as a timer target from the time when the first timer target exclusion effect is executed. Become.

Then, the third timer target exclusion effect may occur at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the symbol change. In the third timer target exclusion effect, the effects other than the effects (conversation notice, special timer) that have already been excluded in the first and second timer target exclusion effects are further excluded. For example, when it is shown that "cut-in B" is not a candidate for the timer target, the candidate for the timer target is narrowed down to one of hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, and accessory B operation. It will be possible for the player to understand this.

Then, at the timing when 40 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol change, the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case), and the effect mode (“hold change 5” determined by the timer target advance notice lottery). In the case of ", a pending change occurs, and in the case of" accessory A operation 3 ", accessory A operation occurs)) is executed as the effect of the timer target.

By the way, in the timer effects of "hold change 5" and "feature A operation 3" shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), the timer is targeted when 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of the symbol change. Although the effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, in such a mode of the timer effect (timer effect in which the effect of the timer target is executed when 40 seconds have elapsed), the effect is executed. , It can be seen that only three targets of timer production are prepared: conversation notice, hold change, and character operation. That is, in this case, when the experienced player confirms that the timer effect in which the count display reaches a predetermined value occurs at the timing of 40 seconds after the symbol change is started, the timer target is notified of the conversation. , Hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation, but one of three of conversation notice, hold change, and character A operation. It is supposed to see through. At this time, if two of the conversation notice, the hold change, and the character A operation are excluded by the timer target exclusion effect, any of the effects will be displayed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it appears or is exposed, it is desirable to execute the timer target exclusion effect so that at least two or more effects are left as candidates for the timer effect.

According to such a timer target exclusion effect, when the timer effect (count display) is in the unexecuted state or during the execution of the count display, the feeling of anticipation and anxiety is intonation (any effect is excluded from the timer target). Since it becomes possible to have (depending on whether or not it is done), it is expected that the game interest will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value.

Moreover, in the example shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is the timing when the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or the timer target effect). Is set according to any one of a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc. from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates for (timing at which) appears.

For example, looking at the time charts shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, when 45 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, even if the count display becomes 0 after that, the "feature A operation" is displayed as the effect of the timer target. It turns out that there is no possibility of appearing. In this way, in the timer effect, each timing (in this example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is usually prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0). As (etc.) passes by, the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are also narrowed down. In this regard, by performing the timer target exclusion effect, even if you are a beginner, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (in this example, the fluctuation start). As the 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc. pass, the types of effects that can appear as timer targets will be narrowed down, and you will be able to enjoy the timer effects to a high degree. ..

Therefore, among the examples shown in FIG. 181 (a), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "special timer 1" (a count display having a count number of 70 seconds according to the start of the symbol change of the character reach is displayed. In the example), each time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds elapse from the start of the fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, and the third timer target exclusion effect, 4 The timer target exclusion effect for the second time will be executed respectively. Further, among the examples shown in FIG. 181 (b), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "Character B operation 1" (a count having a count number of 70 seconds according to the start of the symbol change of SP reach). In the example) in which the display is performed, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, and the third timer each time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, and 50 seconds elapse from the start of the fluctuation. The target exclusion effect, the fourth timer target exclusion effect, and the fifth timer target exclusion effect are executed, respectively.

It should be noted that the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment suggests one effect mode that is not a timer target in the count effect each time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive after the symbol change is started. I did it. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target exclusion effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive, and a predetermined probability each time those timings arrive based on the type of fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot judgment. You may make the timer target exclusion effect appear in, or select the timing to execute the timer target exclusion effect from those timings. Further, at this time, the execution probability of the timer target exclusion effect may be different for each of a plurality of predetermined timings. For example, at a timing relatively early after the symbol change is started (for example, a timing at which the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur), the symbol change is relatively started. If the ratio of the timer target exclusion effect being executed is higher than the late timing (for example, the timing at which the fourth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur), one effect is produced. The count display can be digested for a relatively long time in a state where it is suggested that the embodiment is not subject to a timer. However, in this case, when the timer target exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the first timer target exclusion effect can occur, and when the timer target exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the fourth timer target exclusion effect can occur. It is desirable that the ratio (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears is the same regardless of the timing (or at any timing when the timer target exclusion effect is executed). In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. According to such a configuration, the timer target exclusion effect appears at an early timing (while the rate at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is high) after the count display is started (after the symbol starts to fluctuate). Since you will be conscious of what you are doing, you will be expected to improve your game interest from the beginning of the production.

In order to realize such an effect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the timer target is based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "pending change 5" of the character reach). Judgment as to whether to generate the exclusion effect or at which timing (in the example of FIG. 181 (a), a maximum of three timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds)) the timer target exclusion effect is generated. Perform processing. Next, at each timing when it is determined to generate the timer target exclusion effect, a determination process is performed as to which effect mode is suggested as the effect mode that is not the timer target. It should be noted that these determination processes are performed, for example, after each process shown in FIG. 149, or after step S5510 is performed and at a timing before step S5511 is performed, and before that. It can be performed based on the result information of the processing.

Alternatively, a timer target exclusion effect for exclusive use (dedicated for conversation notice) suggesting that a specific effect mode (for example, conversation notice) is not the timer target may be performed. That is, in this case, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, as a result of the jackpot determination, a dedicated timer target exclusion effect is performed based on the type of the fluctuation pattern or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "pending change 5" of the character reach). It is necessary to perform a determination process as to whether to generate the timer and at what timing the dedicated timer target exclusion effect is to be generated.

In any case, when the effect mode suggested as the effect mode not targeted by the timer is the effect mode with relatively low expectation, the suggested effect mode is the effect mode with relatively high expectation. It is desirable that the ratio of the highly expected effect mode appearing as the timer target effect is higher than that of the case. According to such a configuration, when a dedicated timer target exclusion effect for excluding a low-expected effect mode (conversation notice) appears, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, at least at a specific timing among the above-mentioned plurality of timings, it may be suggested that only a specific production mode (for example, "conversation notice" which is a supposedly low-expected production mode) is not a timer target. It may be set as follows. That is, in this case, when the timer target exclusion effect occurs at a specific timing, it is understood that the specific effect mode (for example, "conversation notice" which is a supposedly low-expected effect mode) is not the timer target. Since it will be possible, it will be possible to maintain the interest of the game by giving a sense of expectation that the production of the timer target is a production mode with high expectations.

Further, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, one effect mode is suggested as an effect that is not a timer target, but under a predetermined condition, two or more effects that are not a timer target are suggested. It may suggest the effect mode of. For example, if two low-expected effects are suggested, it will be possible to greatly enhance the game entertainment even though the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed.

In addition, regarding the "display suggesting which effect mode is not the target of the timer", the period from the start of the count display to the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case) (or). It is desirable to make it appear within the period until the effect targeted by the timer is executed) and maintain the display during the same period. Furthermore, regarding the "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target", if the display is maintained even after the effect that is the timer target is executed, the timer effect can be produced. It will be possible to use it as a material for remembering which production mode the target of.

Further, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the "display suggesting which effect mode is not targeted by the timer" is displayed while the remaining count of the count display is being consumed (for example, a specific timer). When the timer effect of the type is executed, it is hidden and hidden at a predetermined timing (when the specific count value is reached, etc.) at a predetermined timing (when the specific count value is reached before the count display reaches the predetermined value). The count display may reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) while the value is maintained, and the effect targeted by the timer may be executed. That is, in this case, the remaining count of the count display is consumed without knowing when the "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" is hidden. It will be expected to maintain a sense of tension during the same period (a period in which it is easy to become a rut). In order to obtain such an effect, the hidden "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" reaches the predetermined value and becomes the timer target. It is desirable to maintain the hidden state even after the appearance of the effect mode. However, even if the "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" is hidden, the effect once suggested as the effect mode that is not the timer target is the timer target effect. It is important to control it so that it does not appear, and it is possible to enjoy the timer effect with peace of mind as long as the memory of the hidden effect mode is not forgotten. In addition, the hidden "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" is the same even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect mode that is the timer target appears. After maintaining the hidden state (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed), the symbol is displayed again at a timing before the fixed stop, and it is confirmed whether the player's memory is correct. It is desirable to be able to do it.

Further, when the timer effect (count display) is in the unexecuted state and the "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" appears, the predetermined effect condition is also set. When it is satisfied, the timer effect (count display) may be hidden while it is in the unexecuted state. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to give a feeling of tension regarding the timer effect even before the count display is started, and it becomes possible to provide a sharp effect.

As will be described later, "display suggesting which effect mode is not targeted by the timer" is shown in FIGS. 198 (C) to (K) and FIGS. 200 (B) to (J). In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to grasp that the effect mode does not occur when the count display becomes 0. Other methods include, for example, a method of displaying the name of the effect mode on the effect display device 1600 and marking it with a cross, as well as a conversation notice or cut-in at a timing before the count display reaches 0. A method to show that a female character or a male character has died and suggest that a conversation notice or cut-in cannot be executed, or a hold display is monochrome before the count display reaches 0. Show that the characters A and B have failed and become inoperable at the timing before the count display reaches 0, as well as the method of making the color change impossible by displaying with. It is also possible to adopt a method that suggests that the accessory A operation or B cannot be performed. The point is to prepare a special mode that cannot appear at the timing before the count display reaches 0 when it is selected as the effect of the timer target, and this at the timing before the count display reaches 0. By executing a non-timer targeting effect such as a conversation notice or a hold change in a special mode, it is possible to realize "a display suggesting which effect mode is not a timer target". ..

Further, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, a highly expected effect mode is more likely to appear as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value, as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not occur. If the control is performed in such a manner, it is expected that the improvement of the game entertainment when the count display is digesting the remaining count is more preferably performed.

By the way, when it is suggested that the effect mode (special timer) for which the hit is confirmed is not the timer target in the timer target exclusion effect, any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Even so, there is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable because it will be compared with the production mode (special timer) for which the hit is confirmed. Therefore, when it is shown that the effect mode (special timer) for which the hit is confirmed is not the timer target, the symbol is concerned even if any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. The fluctuation may be always stopped by the jackpot symbol.

Alternatively, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, the jackpot symbol appears regardless of which effect mode appears as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"). The ratios (expectations) may be the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. That is, in this case, since it is not necessary to pay attention to which effect mode appears as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the time when the timer target exclusion effect appears (the rest of the count). It will be possible to end the timer effect early at the stage where the time is being exhausted). As a result, it will be possible to shift attention to other effects even though the remaining count of the count display is being consumed, so we have designed an effect that increases the types of effects that appear per unit time. You will be able to encourage.

In addition, if two or more count displays (timer effect) appear within one symbol fluctuation period and the timer target exclusion effect is executed, and then the effect situation occurs in which they reach a predetermined value at different timings, the timer is used. It is desirable to control the effect mode that is suggested not to be a timer target in the target exclusion effect so that it does not appear as the timer target in any timer effect (count display).

In addition, regarding the effect mode that is suggested not to be the timer target in the timer target exclusion effect, even if the count display is different from the timing when the predetermined value is reached, it will not appear after that. It is desirable to control (control so that it does not appear even if it is not a timer target).

Further, when executing the timer target exclusion effect, a preceding effect may be performed as to whether or not it is suggested that the timer target is not a target. That is, in this case, the timer target exclusion effect is not executed when the predetermined mode does not appear in the preceding effect, and the timer target exclusion effect is executed after the predetermined mode appears in the preceding effect.

Further, in this embodiment, the timer target exclusion effect is executed according to any of a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing when the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0). However, as long as the timer target exclusion effect is executed according to any of a plurality of predetermined timings, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target exclusion effect. However, even within the period in which the count display is executed, it is desirable not to execute the timer target exclusion effect when it is in a specific effect period such as a period in which the remaining count is low.

Further, among the timer types determined in the count display lottery (step S5510), those in which the execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not allowed for the entire period in which the count display is executed, or in the period in which the count display is executed. It is possible that some of the timer target exclusion effects are not allowed to be executed during a part of the period. By preparing such a special timer type, it becomes possible to concentrate on how the count display is digested when the timer type appears, and the original timer effect can be enjoyed. It will be like. In order to obtain such an action effect, when the timer target exclusion effect is in a special period in which it cannot occur, an effect mode different from that in the special period is caused to appear in the special period. It can be said that it is important for the player to be able to recognize this. On the other hand, even if the timer type does not allow the execution of the timer target exclusion effect for the entire period during which the count display is executed, the concentration on the timer effect is concentrated in the period before the count display is started. Since there is no concern that the timer will be killed, it is desirable to allow the execution of the timer target exclusion effect.

It should be noted that the period for hiding the above-mentioned "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" is controlled as the same period as the period during which the execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not allowed. May be good.

Further, when the count display in the timer effect is executed in any one of a plurality of embodiments including at least the first aspect and the second aspect, and the count display is performed in the second aspect, the first aspect is performed. It may be controlled so that the rate at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is higher than when the count display is performed in the embodiment. In this case, the ratio may include 100%. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest that the timer target exclusion effect is performed depending on the mode of the count display, and it becomes possible to pay attention to the effect during the count display depending on the mode of the count display.

The timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). It may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined production lottery based on the result of the determination or the like. Further, as will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be made to appear in a fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. good.

Further, as described above, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in the state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (the state in which even the timer look-ahead effect display does not appear), the timer target exclusion effect does not appear as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed after that is high, and that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is executed in advance. In this sense, the timer target exclusion effect may be executed as the first preceding mode or the second preceding aspect of the timer look-ahead effect. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation in which the timer effect is executed has not started and is still in the hold state, it becomes possible to suggest a specific effect mode that is not targeted by the timer effect. A specific effect mode is not targeted with the speculation such as whether the timer effect appears due to the symbol change inside, the timer effect appears due to the symbol change in the pending state, or the timer effect does not appear. It is expected that the game will be maintained until the timer effect is generated.

[Timer target first-out effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, a predetermined effect (operation of the accessory B) using the specific decorative member (accessory B) is counted, and the count display is displayed toward the timing when the predetermined effect appears. It is executed up to a predetermined value within the period during which the symbol effect is performed. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the timer effect is specified within the period before the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the predetermined effect appears in the period during which the symbol effect is performed. By making an effect using a decorative member appear, it can be suggested that a predetermined effect is counted (timer target first-out effect).

That is, in this case, by paying attention to what kind of effect appears when the remaining count in the count display is being consumed, the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it becomes possible to predict, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained from the start of the count display to the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

FIG. 182 is a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target first-out effect performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “SP reach without timer” are selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, for convenience of explanation, when any of the specific timer types (first-out timers 1 to 6) not exemplified in FIG. 162 is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The timer target first-out effect is executed. Further, in the first-out timers 4 to 6 of the first-out timers 1 to 6, the bonus A used in the "feature A operation" and the bonus B used in the "feature B operation" are used as the effect of the timer target. An effect such as "role A & B operation" that operates both is performed.

However, the timer target first-out effect is not performed when a specific timer type (first-out timers 1 to 6) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), but is exemplified in FIG. 162, for example. When any of the selected timer types is selected, the timer target first-out effect may be performed, or the timer type is irrelevant, and it is special in a predetermined effect lottery based on the type of fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot judgment. It may be done based on the results obtained. Further, as will be described later, the timer target first-out effect may be made to appear in a fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. good. According to such a configuration, if it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed after the fact (for the timer target first-out effect) (although it is unknown whether it is executed), the count display of the timer effect is displayed. It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type of effect mode appears when the value reaches a predetermined value. In this case, when the timer target first-out effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (a state in which even the timer look-ahead effect display does not appear), the timer target first-out effect is later compared with the case where the timer target first-out effect does not appear. It is desirable to set the rate at which the timer effect is executed to be high so that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is executed in advance.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 182, first, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of the first-out timers 1 and 4, the count number of 50 seconds is counted at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the symbol change. The counting display is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the effect mode ("feature B operation" or "feature A & B operation") that is the target of the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of the first-out timers 2 and 5, the count display having a count number of 70 seconds is started according to the start timing of the symbol variation, and the count display is "0". After that, the effect mode (“character B operation” or “character A & B operation”) that is the target of the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the first-out timers 3 and 6, the display of the timer look-ahead effect (first precedent mode, second precedent mode, or third precedent mode) is performed according to the start timing of the symbol variation. At the same time as it appears, the timer look-ahead effect is hidden and the count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started at the timing when 50 seconds have elapsed while the timer look-ahead effect is displayed. After the display becomes "0", the effect mode ("feature B operation" or "feature A & B operation") that is the target of the timer appears.

In this respect, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, the timer effect is not executed (even the display of the timer look-ahead effect) at the timing when the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol change. The first timer target first-out effect may occur even though it is set to no state. In the first timer target first-out effect, for example, the accessory B used in the "role B operation" or "character A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer targets of the first-out timers 1 and 4 is placed at or near the first position. A production that vibrates rattlingly (role B rattling) is performed at.

That is, the "effect B operation" which is the effect of the timer target of the first-out timer 1 is the "effect of displacing the accessory B from the first position to the second position", and is the effect of the timer target of the first-out timer 4. The "feature A & B operation" is the first "effect of displacing the bonus B from the first position to the second position and shifting the bonus A from the third position to the fourth position". In the timer target first-out effect, although it is common in that the accessory B used in those effects is used, an effect different from any of the effects (character B rattling) is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the timer effect is performed after the timer effect is executed even though it is in the stage before the timer effect is executed, and the target effect in the timer effect is. It becomes possible to suggest which production mode is used (suggesting that the production uses the accessory B). In addition, in the first timer target first-out effect, the effect B is used to perform a different effect (character B rattling) from the timer target effect (character B operation, character A & B operation). While suggesting that the target effect in the timer effect is an effect using the character B, it is concealed about how the character B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target is performed.

Further, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol change, the second timer target is performed while the timer effect count display is performed. First-out effects can occur. In the second timer target first-out effect, for example, the accessory B used in the timer-targeted effects of the first-out timers 1 and 4 in the "role B operation" and "character A & B operation" is moved from the "first position". An effect of displacing to "the first halfway position between the first position and the second position" (role B intermediate movement (small)) is performed.

That is, although the second timer target first-out effect is common in that the character B used in the "character B operation" and the "character A & B operation" is used, the effect is different from any of these effects (character). B Midway operation (small)) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching a predetermined value (when the remaining count is exhausted), which effect mode the target effect is. It becomes possible to make a suggestion (suggesting that the production uses the character B). Also, in the second timer target first-out effect, the effect B is used to perform an effect different from the timer target effect (character B operation, accessory A & B operation) (effect B intermediate operation (small)). By doing so, while suggesting which effect mode the target effect in the timer effect is, how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value is explained. It becomes possible to keep it secret, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target is performed.

Moreover, in the second timer target first-out effect, the range of the effect using the accessory B (from the "first position" to the "first position" is larger than the first timer target first-out effect (rattling near the "first position"). The displacement to the "midway position") is large, and the range of the effect that appears when the "feature B movement" or "feature A & B movement" is performed (displacement from the "first position" to the "second position"). ). Therefore, by comparing the first timer target first-out effect and the second timer target first-out effect, the character B can be used in the timer target effect (“character B operation” or “character A & B operation”). It will be possible to provide speculation about how it works.

Further, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol change, the third timer target is performed while the timer effect count display is performed. First-out effects can occur. In the third timer target first-out effect, for example, the accessory B used in the "role B operation" and "character A & B operation", which are the timer target effects of the first-out timers 1 and 4, is "first" from the first position. An effect of displacing to the "second halfway position between the first halfway position and the second halfway position" (role B halfway operation (large)) is performed.

That is, although the third timer target first-out effect is common in that the character B used in the "character B operation" and the "character A & B operation" is used, it is different from any of these effects (character). B Midway operation (Large)) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching a predetermined value (when the remaining count is exhausted), which effect mode the target effect is. It becomes possible to make a suggestion (suggesting that the production uses the character B). Also, in the third timer target first-out effect, the effect B is used to perform an effect different from the timer target effect (character B operation, character A & B operation) (character B intermediate operation (large)). By doing so, while suggesting which effect mode the target effect in the timer effect is, how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value is explained. It becomes possible to keep it secret, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target is performed.

Moreover, in the third timer target first-out effect, the range of the effect using the accessory B (displacement from the "first position" to the "second halfway position") is larger than that of the first and second timer target first-out effects. It is becoming larger, and it becomes a mode that is closer to the range of the effect (displacement from the "first position" to the "second position") that appears when the "character B operation" or the "character A & B operation" is performed. There is. Therefore, by comparing with the 1st to 3rd timer target first-out effects, the character B operates in any mode in the timer target effect (“character B operation” or “character A & B operation”). You will be able to provide more speculation about what to do.

On the other hand, also in the case of the first-out timers 2 and 5, in the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), the "role B rattling", Each effect such as "role B intermediate operation (small)" and "character B intermediate operation (large)" is performed as the first to third timer target first-out effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the first-out timers 2 and 5, the timer-targeted first-out effect is performed in a situation where the count display is exhausting the remaining counts at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It will be done.

On the other hand, also in the case of the first-out timers 3 and 6, in the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), the "role B rattling" and the "role" are used. Each effect such as "object B intermediate operation (small)" and "role B intermediate operation (large)" is performed as the first to third timer target first-out effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the first-out timers 3 and 6, at each timing of the timings Ta1 and Ta2, the count display is not executed and the timer look-ahead effect is displayed. Based on this, the first and second timer target first-out effects will be performed. According to such a configuration, the timer target first-out effect is executed when the count display is not executed, but in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4 in which even the timer look-ahead effect is not displayed. Compared to this, the rate of occurrence of events such as "the timer effect itself was not executed even though the timer target first-out effect was executed" is reduced, so the player has a higher expectation. You will be able to enjoy the timer target first-out effect.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 182, the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first to third timer target first-out effects are executed. After that, the symbol variation is stopped after the effect of the timer target is executed.

In the timer target first-out effect according to this embodiment, each time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive after the symbol change is started, the "character B operation" and the "character A & B operation" are performed. It was decided to perform the production using the accessory B used in. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target first-out effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive, and the timings ta1 to ta3 are set based on the type of fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination. The timer target first-out effect may appear with a predetermined probability each time it arrives, or the timing for executing the timer target first-out effect may be selected from those timings. Further, at this time, the execution probability of the timer target first-out effect and the selection ratio of the effect content may be different for each of the plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3.

In order to realize such an effect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the timer target is based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "first-out timer 1" of SP reach). A determination process (see FIG. 183) is performed as to whether to generate the first-out effect or at what timing the timer-targeted first-out effect is to be generated. Next, a determination process (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is performed to determine which effect mode is to be executed as the timer target first-out effect at each timing when it is determined to generate the timer target first-out effect. It should be noted that these determination processes are performed, for example, after each process shown in FIG. 149, or after step S5510 is performed and at a timing before step S5511 is performed, and before that. It can be performed based on the result information of the processing.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing an example of the content (table T10) of the determination process regarding whether the timer target first-out effect is generated and at what timing the timer target first-out effect is generated.

As described above, the timer target first-out effect is the timer target within the period before the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the timer target effect appears during the period during which the symbol effect is performed. By making an effect using the specific decorative member used in the effect of the above appear, it is an effect that suggests that the effect using the specific decorative member is targeted for the timer, and the peripheral control according to this embodiment. In MPU1511a, three timings Ta1 to Ta3 are prepared as timings at which such a timer target first-out effect can appear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, with reference to the table T10 shown in FIG. Based on the above, it is selected whether to execute the timer target first-out effect at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (or whether to execute the timer target first-out effect at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3).

As shown in FIG. 183, in the table T10, as a selection candidate for executing the timer target first-out effect, "the timer target first-out effect is not executed at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (" none "in the figure)". "The timer target first-out effect is executed only at the timing Ta1 of the timing Ta1 to Ta3 (" Ta1 "in the figure)", and "the timer target first-out effect is executed only at the timing Ta2 of the timing Ta1 to Ta3 (FIG. Among them, "Ta2") "," The timer target first-out effect is executed only at the timing Ta3 of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta3" in the figure) "," At the timings Ta1 and Ta2 of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. Execute timer target first-out effect (“Ta1 & 2” in the figure) ”,“ Execute timer target first-out effect at timings Ta1 and Ta3 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 (“Ta1 & 3” in the figure) ”,“ Timing Ta1 -Execute the timer target first-out effect at the timings Ta2 and Ta3 of Ta3 ("Ta2 & 3" in the figure) "," Execute the timer target first-out effect at all of the timing Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta1 & 2 & 3" in the figure). There are selection candidates such as ".

In the example of the table T10, when the count display is not executed and the timer look-ahead effect is not displayed, the effect random numbers are distributed so that the timer target first-out effect is not performed. Therefore, in the example of the table T10, in the case of the timer types of the special timers 1 and 4, the timer target first-out effect is not performed at the timing T1, the timing T1 & T2, the timing T1 & T3, and the timing T1 & T2 & T3. However, as described above, the timer target first-out effect may be performed at these timings.

Further, in the example of the table T10, when the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the timer target first-out effect is executed is higher than in the case where the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. It is set so that the number of times the timer target first-out effect is executed tends to increase.

Further, in the example of the table T10, when the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is "accessory A & B", compared with the case where the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is "accessory B". , The rate at which the timer target first-out effect is executed is set to be high, and the number of times the timer target first-out effect is executed is also set to be high.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is to be performed at least at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 as a result of performing the determination process based on the table T10, when the timer target first-out effect appears. Further, the determination process for the effect type of is performed.

FIG. 184 is an example of the content (table T11) of the determination process regarding which type of effect mode is to be generated at the timing when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU1511a refers to the table T11 shown in FIG. 184. Then, based on the winning information, the information regarding the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information regarding the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, any type of effect mode (“Character B rattling”, It is determined whether or not the "feature B midway motion (small)" and "feature B midway motion (large)") appear at the one timing that has been determined.

FIG. 185 is an example of the content (table T12) of the determination process regarding which type of the effect mode to be generated at those timings when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any two timings of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is performed at any two timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU1511a refers to the table T12 shown in FIG. 185. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, any type of effect mode (“Character B rattling → role”). "Character B rattling", "Character B rattling → Character B intermediate movement (small)", "Character B intermediate movement (small) → Character B intermediate movement (small)", "Character B rattling → Character B "Intermediate operation (large)", "Character B intermediate operation (small)-> Character B intermediate operation (large)", "Character B intermediate operation (large)-> Character B intermediate operation (large)") It is determined whether or not to appear at each of the two timings that have been determined.

For example, when it is determined based on the table T12 that "Character B rattling → Character B rattling" appears, "Character B rattling" is performed at both of the two timings that have already been determined. It will be executed as a timer target first-out effect, and when it is determined based on the table T12 that "feature B rattling → bonus B midway operation (small)" appears, the above two judgments have been made. "Character B rattling" is executed as a timer target first-out effect at the timing earlier than the timing, and "Character B midway operation (small)" is executed at the later timing of the two timings that have been determined above. Will be executed as a timer target first-out effect.

FIG. 186 shows an example of the content (table T13) of the determination process regarding which type of the effect mode to be generated at those timings when the timer target first-out effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU1511a refers to the table T13 shown in FIG. 186. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, any type of effect mode (“Character B rattling → role”). Object B rattling → Character B rattling ”,“ Character B rattling → Character B rattling → Character B halfway movement (small) ”,“ Character B rattling → Character B halfway movement (small) → Character B halfway "Motion (small)", "Character B midway motion (small) → bonus B midway motion (small) → bonus B midway motion (small)", "Character B rattling → bonus B rattling → bonus B midway "Movement (Large)", "Random number B rattling-> Character B intermediate operation (small)-> Character B intermediate operation (Large)", "Character B intermediate operation (small)-> Character B intermediate operation (small)-> "Character B midway motion (large)", "Character B midway motion (small) → bonus B midway motion (large) → bonus B midway motion (large)", "Character B midway motion (large) → role It is determined whether or not the object B intermediate operation (large) → the accessory B intermediate operation (large) ”) appears at the three timings that have already been determined.

For example, when it is determined based on the table T13 that "role B rattling-> character B rattling-> character B rattling" appears, the "role" is set at any of the three timings that have already been determined. It is determined that "object B rattling" will be executed as a timer target first-out effect, and "role B rattling-> character B intermediate operation (small)-> character B intermediate operation (large)" will appear based on the table T13. When is done, "Character B rattling" is executed as the timer target first-out effect at the first of the three timings that have been determined, and among the three timings that have been determined above. At the second timing of, "Character B midway operation (small)" is executed as the timer target first-out effect, and at the third timing of the three timings that have been determined above, "Character B midway operation (small)" Large) ”will be executed as the timer target first-out effect.

In the example of the tables T11 and T12, the determination process is performed in the same mode (selection ratio) regardless of which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is determined to cause the timer target first-out effect. Depending on which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is determined to cause the timer target first-out effect, the determination process may be performed in another mode (selection ratio). For example, if the timing at which it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is to appear is later, the rate at which the effect mode with a large effect range is selected increases, and the timer is performed. It becomes possible to estimate how much time is left until the target effect is performed, based on the size of the range of the effect that appears in the timer target first-out effect. In this case, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 199 (G), the timer target is operated by operating the specific decorative member (here, the accessory B) in such a manner that it overlaps with the count display of the timer effect in a front view. It is important to make the count display difficult to see during the execution of the first-out effect (role B intermediate movement (small), "character B intermediate movement (large)) in order to preferably obtain such an effect. Therefore, if the timer target first-out effect is executed without paying much attention to the count display, even if the timer target first-out effect is executed at the same timing, the timer target depends on the type of effect that appears at that time. When you are prepared for the production to be performed soon (when the production range is large), or when you feel that there is time left before the timer target production is performed (when the production range is small). ), And it is expected that it will be interesting by making it possible to create a gap with the time when the accurate remaining count is grasped after that. At this time, the timer target first-out effect The count display may be hidden during execution, and the count display may be redisplayed when the timer target first-out effect is completed.

However, if the specific decorative member (here, the accessory B) is operated so as to overlap the count display of the timer effect in a front view, the count display is made difficult to see during the execution of the timer target first-out effect (in this case, the accessory B). Or, when the count display is hidden), it is misunderstood that the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is being executed even though the timer target first-out effect is being executed. There is a concern that it will end up. Therefore, it is desirable to make the count display difficult to see during the execution of the timer target first-out effect, while continuously executing the count sound generated in accordance with the execution of the count display. That is, the output of such a count sound is terminated when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and this is not output when the effect of the timer target is performed. Therefore, the timer target first-out By continuously outputting the count sound during the execution of the effect, it is expected to suppress the misunderstanding that the effect of the timer target is being executed.

Further, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the effect range is larger in the timer target first-out effect than in the case where the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. The mode is set to be selected at a high rate.

Further, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is "accessory A & B" and the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is "accessory B". In comparison, the ratio of selecting an effect mode having a large effect range in the timer-targeted first-out effect is set to be higher.

Further, in the example of the tables T12 and T13, when the timing is late among the timings Ta1 to Ta3 and when the timing is early among the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the effect range is larger in the timer target first-out effect. Is set to be selected at a high rate. Therefore, it becomes possible to estimate whether or not there is much remaining time until the timer target effect is performed, based on the size of the range of the effect that appears in the timer target first-out effect.

Further, in the example of the tables T12 and T13, basically, as time elapses, the range of the effect in the timer target first-out effect (role B rattling → character B intermediate operation (small) → character B intermediate operation (large)). ) Is spreading, and even if the status quo (role B rattling → character B rattling, etc.) is maintained, the opposite (a mode in which the production range is narrowed) is set so as not to occur. That is, in this case, as time elapses, the mode approaches the range of the effect that appears when the "feature B operation" or "feature A & B operation" of the timer target is performed. By confirming the effect, it becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until the timer target "feature B operation" or "feature A & B operation" is performed is reduced.

Further, in the timer target first-out effect according to this embodiment, the specific decorative member (character B) used at the time of the timer target effect (for example, the accessory B operation) is always used, but the timer target effect (for example). For example, the timer target first-out effect may be performed by using a decorative member (for example, the accessory A) different from the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used at the time of the accessory B operation). That is, in this case, in the timer target first-out effect, it functions as an effect that suggests the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value with a predetermined accuracy. Then, in the case of realizing such a timer target first-out effect, the type of effect to appear as the timer target first-out effect (role B rattling, character B intermediate operation (small), accessory B intermediate operation (large)). It is also desirable that the ratio (accuracy) of the suggested type of staging to appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value differs depending on the number of executions. For example, when a type of effect with a large range of effect (feature B midway operation (large)) appears, a timer target first-out compared to when a type of effect with a small range of effect (feature B rattling) appears. The ratio of the staging using the specific decorative member (feature B) used in the staging (feature B movement, bonus A & B movement) when the count display reaches a predetermined value is increased. When the number of executions of the timer target first-out effect is large within the fluctuation, the effect using the specific decorative member (feature B) used in those timer target first-out effects (feature B) is compared with the case where the number of executions is small. The ratio of the movement, the accessory A & B movement) appearing when the count display reaches a predetermined value may be increased.

Further, in this embodiment, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a plurality of production modes including "role B operation" and "character A & B operation" ("character B operation" and "character A & B"). Except for "operation", on the premise that any of the effect modes (effect mode) that does not use the character B can appear, the effect using the specific decorative member (character B) is performed as the timer target first-out effect. And said. However, on the premise that only one of "Character B operation" and "Character A & B operation" is prepared as the effect mode using the character B, the specific decorative member (character) is used as the timer target first-out effect. B) may be used for the production.

For example, as an effect mode using the character B, only the "character A & B operation" can appear as the effect of the timer target, and the specific decorative member (character B) is used as the timer target first-out effect. When the effect is used, only a part of the decorative member (character B) used in the effect of the timer target (character A & B operation) is used in the timer target first-out effect. That is, in this case, while suggesting that the "effect using the character B" appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value by the timer target first-out effect, the "effect using the character B" It becomes even more difficult to predict the whole picture (using the character A in addition to the character B), and this can be kept secret. Therefore, the effect of the character B when the count display reaches a predetermined value by the timer target first-out effect (the character B rattling → the character B intermediate operation (small) → the character B intermediate operation (large)). Even if an effect that approaches the range is executed and its prediction is possible, the timer for the character A when the count display reaches a predetermined value is hidden because not only the effect range but also its existence is concealed. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the content of the target effect (role A & B operation) in a concealed state. At this time, the operation mode of the accessory B when the accessory A & B operation is performed may be performed as a timer target first-out effect.

According to such a configuration, the timer target first-out effect can be performed using only a part of the characters A and B (character B) used in the "character A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer target. Of course, in the timer target first-out effect, only a part of the characters A and B (character B) used in the "character A & B operation" is used, and the effect range of the character B in the "character A & B operation" is used. The effect (feature B midway motion (small), bonus B midway motion (large)) will appear only in a part of. Then, after such a small production range is gradually expanded by the timer target first-out effect multiple times, only the character B is performed in the larger effect range by performing the "character A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer target. Since the effect using the character A instead of the character A will appear, the novelty when the timer target effect is performed is lost by performing the timer target first-out effect while the remaining count is being exhausted. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably without such a situation.

Further, in this embodiment, the specific decorative member used in the timer target first-out effect and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect (effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value) are completely matched. However, these do not necessarily have to be exactly the same, and may be any effect as long as it can be suggested by the timer target first-out effect which effect mode appears as the timer target effect. For example, as a fan-shaped accessory, a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory" are arranged so as to overlap each other in a front view. The specific decorative member used in the above is a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory", and the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory". However, the fan-shaped accessory was used as the timer target first-out effect before the effect using the fan-shaped accessory was performed as the timer target effect (while the count display was being executed). It is possible to produce.

Further, in this embodiment, the accessory is used as the specific decorative member, but instead, the display means may be used as the specific decorative member. When the display means is used as the specific decorative member, the same effect as the effect using the above-mentioned accessory is realized by increasing the range in which the display appears (the range of the effect) or changing the display content. It is possible.

By the way, it is desirable to end the "effect using the specific decorative member" performed as the timer target first-out effect after the lapse of a predetermined time. When the specific decorative member is an accessory, control is performed to return the specific decorative member to the original position after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the specific decorative member is a display means, after a predetermined time has elapsed, control is performed. Control is performed to hide the display as the timer target first-out effect. At this time, it is desirable that the predetermined time required for the timer target first-out effect is shorter than the time required for the effect (timer target effect) that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. In this way, by realizing different production modes depending on the length of time, in the timer target first-out effect, the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect can be kept to a degree of unsatisfactory choice. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment by waiting for the count display to reach a predetermined value.

[Resurrection timer production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the count display is hidden, a plurality of production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B) It is possible to execute a count effect in which at least one of (movement, etc.) appears. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, when the first effect mode (for example, conversation notice) appears among the plurality of effect modes after the count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. Even so, after this, the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect is further continued. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time after the count display is redisplayed, the count display is hidden again and the second effect mode (for example, the character A operation (character A notice)) appears among the plurality of effect modes. (Resurrection timer production).

That is, in this case, after making it appear as if the first effect mode was a timer target (count target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, and the second effect mode is different from the first effect mode. Since it is shown that the effect mode of is a timer target, even if the count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden at the timing when a relatively low expectation effect appears. After that, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

FIG. 187 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. In the situation, it is decided that the number of notices is two (step S5523), and it is decided that the "conversation notice" is performed at the earlier timing and the "character A operation 1" is performed at the later timing. , This is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the revival timer effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to the “character reach without timer” are selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only the accessory A operation 1 but also a plurality of timers) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161), the following processing related to the revival timer effect is executed. However, instead of performing the following processing related to the revival timer effect when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the revival timer effect is produced regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 187 (a), assuming that the timer type of "role A operation 1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the next process as the next process. A plurality of effect modes ("Character A operation 1-1", "Character A operation 1-2", "Character A operation 1", including the mode of the revival timer effect, for the selected "Character A operation 1". -3 ”or“ accessory A operation 1-4 ”) is performed to determine whether to execute. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the embodiment of "Character A operation 1-1", 20 seconds are started after the count display having a count number of 40 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change. When 40 seconds have passed, the "conversation notice" that is not the timer target is executed, and when 40 seconds have passed, the timer is set when the predetermined value is reached and the count display is hidden. The "feature A operation (feature A notice)" is executed.

On the other hand, in the embodiment of "Character A operation 1-2", the count display with the count number of 20 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and then the predetermined value is reached when 20 seconds have elapsed. When the count display is reached and the count display is hidden, the "conversation notice" (first production mode) that is not the target of the timer is executed, but when the "conversation notice" is completed, the count display is displayed. It will be redisplayed and the timer effect will continue, and the count display will be hidden again after a predetermined time has elapsed (40 seconds after the count display with the count number of 20 seconds has started). The "feature A operation (feature A notice)" (second effect mode), which is the target of the timer, is executed.

On the other hand, in the embodiment of "Character A operation 1-3", the predetermined value is reached when 12 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of 12 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change. The notice E2 (first effect mode) as a non-target notice that cannot be the effect of the timer target is executed while the count display is hidden, but the notice E2 (non-target notice) ends. When this is done, the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect is continued, and the count display is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed (40 seconds after the count display with the count number of 12 seconds is started). Is hidden again and the "feature A operation (feature A notice)" (second effect mode), which is the target of the timer, is executed.

On the other hand, in the embodiment of "Character A operation 1-4", the predetermined value is reached when 8 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of 8 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change. The notice E1 (first effect mode) as a non-target notice that cannot be the effect of the timer target is executed while the count display is hidden, but the notice E1 (non-target notice) is executed. When it is finished, the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect is continued, and the count is counted after the lapse of a predetermined time (40 seconds after the count display with the count number of 8 seconds is started). The display is hidden again, and the "feature A operation (feature A notice)" (second effect mode), which is the target of the timer, is executed.

That is, among the plurality of staging modes prepared corresponding to "Character A motion 1", "Character A motion 1-2", "Character A motion 1-3", and "Character A motion" The aspect of "1-4" corresponds to the effect of the revival timer. Then, in these revival timer effects, the count display is temporarily hidden between the start of the count display and the time when the timer target effect (feature A operation) is performed, and the timer target is not displayed (the effect). Since the conversation notice, the notice E2, or the notice E1) appears, it is possible to make it seem as if the timer effect has ended when the effect appears.

In this regard, in the aspect of "Character A operation 1-2", a plurality of staging modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B) that can be adopted as timer targets. , Character B operation, etc.), the revival timer effect is performed for the effect (conversation notice) with a lower expectation of big hit than the effect that is the timer target (character A operation). I'm supposed to do it. That is, in this case, after the effect (conversation notice) with a low jackpot expectation appears as if it appeared as the effect of the timer target, it is shown that the effect (conversation notice) is not the effect of the timer target (count display). (Redisplay), and a production with a higher expectation of a big hit (role A operation) than the production (conversation notice) will appear as a timer target production (second production mode) (count display is not displayed again). Display), it is expected that the game will be improved by such a reversible production.

Further, in the modes of "Character A operation 1-3" and "Character A operation 1-4", a plurality of production modes that cannot be adopted as timer targets (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F). Etc.), the revival timer effect is to be performed for any of the targets (first effect mode). In such a configuration, the timer effect is not terminated at this timing when the effect mode (here, the notice E2 or the notice E1) that cannot be adopted as the timer target appears as if it is the effect of the timer target. It will be suggested that it will be continued. That is, in this case, in particular, the notice E1 that appears when the mode of "role A operation 1-4" is executed has a low expectation of itself, but the timer effect is continued without being terminated at this timing. By functioning as a staging that suggests, it will be possible to contribute to the improvement of the game entertainment. It should be noted that a plurality of effect modes (for example, advance notice E1, advance notice E2, advance notice E3, advance notice F, etc.) that cannot be adopted as timer targets can appear even when the timer effect is not performed.

Further, in each of the "feature A operation 1-2", "feature A operation 1-3", and "feature A operation 1-4" according to this embodiment, the count display appears when the count display is started. Although the numerical value is displayed as a numerical value different from 40 seconds (20 seconds, 12 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.), the peripheral control MPU1511a secretly sets a 40-second production timer for control and counts. By internally performing a process to continuously update the effect timer even while the display is temporarily hidden, the effect of the timer target (the effect of the timer target when 40 seconds have passed since the count display was started ( The character A movement) is made to appear. According to such a configuration, any one of "Character A operation 1-1", "Character A operation 1-2", "Character A operation 1-3", and "Character A operation 1-4". Even when the accessory A operation 1 is executed in the embodiment, the count display can be hidden again at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation, and the effect of the timer target (the accessory A operation) can be made to appear.

And, in such a revival timer effect, "the count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed" are different count digestions. It is important to be able to recognize that the same count digestion is being performed instead of doing so in order to suggest that the timer effect does not end in the middle and continues. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the embodiment of "Character A operation 1-2", the count display is hidden when the count display having a count number of 20 seconds becomes "0 seconds". The "conversation notice" will be executed, but after the "conversation notice" is completed, the count display will be displayed again in a negative notation, and the "0 seconds" when it is hidden will be displayed. I try to express how the count digestion is not finished and this is continuing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the embodiment of "Character A operation 1-2", the count digestion is secretly continued even while the count display is hidden. The count display is redisplayed from the state where the count has been digested for the time that was hidden. More specifically, in the embodiment of "Character A operation 1-2", the count display is hidden in "0 seconds", and the count display is redisplayed after the hidden state is maintained for 2 seconds. However, when the count display is redisplayed, the count digestion by minus count is performed from "-2 seconds" to 18 seconds.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 187 (a), the symbol variation is stopped after the effect of the timer target is executed in this way.

When realizing such a revival timer effect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "Character A operation 1" of the character reach). Therefore, a determination process (see FIG. 187 (b)) is performed as to whether the revival timer effect is generated or in which mode the revival timer effect is generated. It should be noted that this determination process may be performed, for example, after the step S5510 shown in FIG. 149 is performed and at a timing before the step S5511 is performed, based on the result information of each process before that. It is possible.

FIG. 187 (b) shows that when the timer type of “Character A operation 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the “Character A operation 1” includes the mode of the revival timer effect. It is a figure which shows an example about the content (table T14) of the determination processing which of a plurality of production modes is executed.

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the "character A operation 1" of the character reach is selected, the "character A operation 1" is changed to the "character A operation 1-1". , "Character A operation 1-2", "Character A operation 1-3", "Character A operation 1-4".

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the table T14 shown in FIG. 187 (b) is referred to, and the winning information, the information regarding the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information regarding the timer type, and the information are allocated. Any aspect of "Character A motion 1-1", "Character A motion 1-2", "Character A motion 1-3", and "Character A motion 1-4" based on the effect random number. Will select whether to execute the timer effect.

As a result, when it is determined to execute the timer effect in any of the modes of "feature A operation 1-3" and "feature A operation 1-4", in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525. , The type of non-target notice will be determined based on the determined type. For example, when it is determined to execute the timer effect in the mode of "Character A operation 1-3", it is determined that at least the advance notice E2 is executed as a non-target notice in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525. Therefore, when it is determined to execute the timer effect in the mode of "Character A operation 1-4", at least the notice E1 is executed as a non-target notice in the processes of steps S5512 and S5525. A judgment will be made.

In the example of the table T14, when the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as the timer target is executed, the effect mode (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer target is performed. The jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the target revival timer effect is executed. Further, when the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode with high expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer target is executed, the effect mode (notice) that cannot be adopted as the timer target is executed. It is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode with the lower expectation among E1 and E2) is executed. Further, in the example of the table T14, when the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the revival timer effect is executed is higher than in the case where the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. Is set to.

According to such a revival timer effect, the effect mode with low expectation (first effect mode) appears once by hiding the count display, which temporarily gives the player a disappointment, but then counts. The display is redisplayed and continued, and the count display continued after the predetermined time is hidden again to cause a highly expected effect mode (second effect mode) to appear. This makes it possible to give a player who was paying attention to the count display a temporary disappointment, but also to give surprises and surprises by continuing the count and directing the reversal, and the game interest is lower than before. Can be suppressed.

In this sense, the effect mode with high expectation (second effect mode) is executed as an effect using two different decorative members, and then the effect mode with low expectation (first effect mode) is performed. It is desirable to execute the effect as an effect using only one of the above two different decorative members (or a decorative member related thereto) in order to express the reversibility by the revival timer effect. At this time, one of the two different decorative members does not necessarily have to be completely the same when used in the second effect mode and when used in the first effect mode. For example, as a fan-shaped accessory, a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory" are arranged so as to overlap each other in a front view. This is a case where the decorative member used in the embodiment is a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and the decorative member used in the second staging aspect is a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory". However, it is possible to clearly indicate that the effect performed as the first effect mode has a lower degree of expectation.

In addition, in such a revival timer effect, "the count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed" are different counts. In order to make it recognizable that the same count digestion is being performed instead of digesting, the count sound is "temporarily hidden" even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continuously execute the count display that appeared before the display and the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the revival timer effect is performed only once within the period in which one symbol change is performed, but the revival timer effect is performed a plurality of times within the period in which one symbol change is performed. It may be executed over. Further, at this time, the same effect mode may be repeatedly displayed each time the count display is hidden. Then, as the number of times the revival timer effect is executed increases within the period in which one symbol change is performed, the effect mode with high expectation as the effect of the timer target (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)). It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance of.

Further, in the revival timer effect, the time from when the count display is hidden until the first effect mode (conversation notice, notice E1, E2, etc.) appears, and after the redisplayed count display is hidden again. By making the length different from the time until the second effect mode (role A operation) appears, it is possible to recognize whether or not the effect of the timer target is appearing. It is desirable to do.

In addition, in order to improve the game entertainment as a timer effect, when the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as the timer target is executed, the effect mode that cannot be adopted as the timer target is executed. Compared to the case where the revival timer effect targeting (notices E1 and E2) is executed, a more promising effect mode (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) appears as the timer target effect. It is desirable to control so that the ratio is high. Further, when the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode with high expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer target is executed, the effect mode (notice) that cannot be adopted as the timer target is executed. Compared to the case where the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode with the lower expectation among E1 and E2) is executed, the effect mode with higher expectation as the effect for the timer (effect type and effect content (cut-in)) It is desirable to control so that the rate of appearance of)) is high.

Further, in the revival timer effect according to this embodiment, the first effect mode appears after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") and is hidden, and the first effect is performed. When the mode is completed, the count display is redisplayed and this is negatively counted, and after this reaches a specific negative value and this is hidden, the second effect mode is made to appear, but the count display is If the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear under the condition that they are hidden, the count display is hidden when the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear. Each count value at that time may be set appropriately.

[Timer target suppression control]
That is, the effect to be the target of the timer effect (count target) can often be executed even when the timer effect is not performed. For example, the specific effect to be executed at a predetermined timing based on the fluctuation pattern. Staging (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.) and predetermined effect (for example, hold change, etc.) executed at the timing of winning. Be prepared. However, among these, when the "specific effect executed at a predetermined timing based on the fluctuation pattern" is the target of the timer effect (count target) and the count display reaches the predetermined value, a new prize is awarded. Occurs accidentally and a predetermined effect (for example, hold change) occurs due to this, the predetermined effect occurs in relation to the count display reaching the predetermined value as the target of the timer effect. Or, as a production unrelated to the timer production, it may be difficult to grasp whether the predetermined production has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize (confused situation), and eventually the target of the timer production (count target). ) May be overlooked (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a timer effect of a specific type targeting a specific effect is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the timer effect of the specific type reaches a predetermined value. When there is a relatively large number of players in the first period, the display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is allowed when a new prize is generated, but when the first period ends and the count display in the specific type of timer effect is a predetermined value. When the remaining time until reaching is reached in the second period, even if a new prize is generated, the display of a predetermined effect that is not the target of the timer is not allowed (timer target suppression control). As a result, in a situation where a specific type of count effect that targets a specific effect as a timer effect is executed, the count display is displayed as the target of the timer effect while allowing the generation of a predetermined effect that is not the timer target due to the occurrence of a new prize. It becomes difficult to grasp whether the predetermined effect was generated in connection with reaching the predetermined value, or whether the predetermined effect was generated due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect unrelated to the timer effect (confused). It becomes possible to suitably avoid such a thing.

FIG. 188 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer target suppression control performed when a specific variation number is selected in a situation.

As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds has elapsed at a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation was started. The display starts. Then, after the count display becomes "0", a specific effect that is a timer target appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") before the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, "0 seconds"). (1st period) allows the display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer when a new prize is generated (allowable period), but after the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, "5 seconds"). In the predetermined period (second period), even if a new prize is generated, the timer target suppression control that does not allow the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is performed (suppression period).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the timer target suppression control according to this embodiment, the suppression period (second period) in which the display of the predetermined effect is not allowed is set to the "count display is a specific count value (2nd period). For example, not only "the period from when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example," 0 seconds ") until the specific effect which is the target of the timer is executed (finished)" after reaching "5 seconds"). It is decided to continue until "the period after the specific production is completed". That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") and a specific effect that is a timer target is generated, the effect generation itself is suppressed, so that it is a timer target. The specific effect comes to function as a valuable effect generation opportunity, and the degree of attention to the specific effect is improved to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"). Will be expected.

However, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, “5 seconds”) has elapsed since the specific effect that is the timer target is completed. At this time, the suppression period (second period) that does not allow the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is terminated. According to such timer target suppression control, the symbol variation is stopped after the suppression period ends. In the period until it is done, the display of the predetermined effect that is not the target of the timer will be allowed again when a new prize is generated.

By the way, as described above, during the suppression period, even if a new prize is generated, the display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is not allowed. However, in this case, there is a concern that the player will play a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period in which the display of the predetermined effect is not allowed even if a new prize is generated, and as a result, the progress speed of the game per unit time. May decrease and cause a disadvantage on the hall side.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by the new prize is not allowed, but the display of the predetermined effect that is not allowed is about. Instead of discarding the display itself of the predetermined effect, control is performed to delay (carry over) the display time until the end of the suppression period. According to such a configuration, even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by the new prize is not allowed, but the display of the predetermined effect is suitably executed. Since it becomes possible to play, it becomes possible to suppress playing a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period.

When a new prize is generated within the permissible period and the predetermined effect is displayed, the acoustic output is performed according to the display of the predetermined effect, whereas a new prize is generated within the suppression period and the predetermined effect is displayed. When the display of the effect is delayed (carried over) until the end of the suppression period, it is desirable not to output the sound according to the display when the predetermined effect is displayed. This makes it possible to secretly display the predetermined effect at a timing different from the normal (at the time of winning), and when the player sees the predetermined effect displayed without his knowledge, he / she will be surprised. It will be expected to be granted to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the suppression period that occurs from the timing before the execution period of the effect that is the timer target (specific count value) to the timing after the end of the execution period is the timer target. It is desirable to control so that it does not always occur when the effect is performed.

For example, when such a suppression period is generated with a predetermined probability when a timer effect is performed, and when a big hit is won by a big hit judgment, it is compared with a case where a big hit is lost. If the rate of occurrence of such a suppression period is increased, a predetermined effect due to the prize will be generated when the prize is generated aiming at the timing before and after the effect of the timer target is performed. It is now prompted to confirm whether or not (whether or not there is a suppression period and there is a high possibility that a big hit has been won), and a new prize will be generated during the suppression period. It will be suppressed that the game that does not let you play is performed.

In addition, the rate at which the suppression period occurs differs depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.). By doing so, whether or not a predetermined effect due to the prize is generated when a prize is generated within the period before the effect of the timer target is performed (a suppression period has occurred and a specific type of effect is produced. Is in a situation where there is a high possibility that it will be executed as a timer target), and it will be suppressed that games that do not generate new prizes will be played during the suppression period. Will be done.

FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a table (table T15) referred to in the timer target suppression control when the rate at which the suppression period occurs differs depending on the type of the effect mode appearing as the effect of the timer target. ..

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, and the like are prepared as effects for the timer target. ..

In this regard, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), basically, the lower the jackpot expectation degree is, the lower the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target staging is, and the jackpot expectation. The higher the degree of the effect mode, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the effect of the timer target is set.

More specifically, when the effect of the timer target is "conversation notice", the suppression period is not always generated, and when the effect of the timer target is "cut-in A", the suppression period is set to 20%. When the effect of the timer target is "cut-in B", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 40%, and the effect of the timer target is "feature A operation". At some point, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 60%, and when the effect of the timer target is "feature B operation", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 80%, and the timer target When the effect of is a "special timer", the suppression period is always generated.

According to such a configuration, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the effect of the timer target, so that a predetermined effect is generated by a new prize. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the overlooking of a production mode with a high expectation of a big hit. Conversely, the lower the jackpot expectation is, the more likely it is that this will be overlooked. Therefore, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the jackpot expectation is low. It will be possible to proceed with the production while keeping what was being kept secret, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately until the design is stopped.

Further, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), the occurrence rate of the suppression period is determined according to the type of the effect mode appearing as the effect of the timer target, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won. There is. Therefore, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or lost (missing), if the type of the effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target is the same, the suppression period can be generated at the same ratio. ..

By the way, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the effect of the timer target is "pending change", the suppression period is always generated even though the effect is such that the expectation of big hit is relatively low. I am doing it. That is, the "pending change" according to this embodiment can be displayed not only as a specific effect that is a timer target, but also as a predetermined effect that is not a timer target when a new prize is generated. Therefore, if the suppression period does not occur when such a "holding change" occurs, the "holding change (changing symbol)" as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value There is a possibility that "changes in the hold display corresponding to the pending display" and "changes in the hold display corresponding to the pending symbols" due to the new prize may occur at the same time, and there is a concern that they may be confused. be. Therefore, it is desirable to make sure that the suppression period is generated when the effect of the timer target is "pending change". However, as mentioned above, as with the "conversation notice", the possibility of overlooking the "pending change" is increased, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the big hit expectation is low. If the aim is to proceed with the production while keeping what has appeared concealed, it may be controlled so that the suppression period does not occur even when the production of the timer target is a "pending change".

In the example of the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), the rate at which the suppression period occurs differs depending on the type of the effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target, but in addition to this, the same type of effect Even in the embodiment, the rate at which the suppression period occurs may be further different depending on the timer type determined in the count display lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

For example, even when "conversation notice" is selected as the effect of the timer target, the "conversation notice" is the "conversation notices 1 to 4" shown in FIG. 161 and further shown in FIG. 162. It is desirable to make the rate of occurrence of the suppression period different depending on which of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is applicable. In this case, the occurrence rate may include 100% or 0%.

In addition, the effect of the timer target is one of "conversation notice", "pending change", "cut-in A", "special timer", "character A operation", "cut-in B", and "character B operation". When this is the case, the suppression period may be generated at a predetermined ratio not only for a predetermined period before and after the execution of the effect of the timer target, but also for the entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation. In particular, when the effect of the timer target is the "special timer" with the highest expectation of a big hit, the "special timer" is set so that the suppression period is always generated over the entire period from the start of the symbol change to the stop. It may be possible to raise the expectation that "" will be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display itself of the predetermined effect caused by the new prize is not discarded, and the time when the display is performed ends the suppression period. Although it was decided to perform the control of delaying (carrying over) until, the display of the predetermined effect itself may be discarded and not performed.

[Timer production targeting new timers]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period in which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, pending change) prepared as candidates for the count target are prepared. , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) It is possible to execute a timer effect that hides the count display at the timing when at least one of them appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a "specific effect mode" is prepared as one of the plurality of effect modes that appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and then the "specific effect" is provided. When the "aspect" appears, a count display (second count display) different from the count display (first count display) up to that point is newly started.

That is, in this case, since the count display as the timer effect is executed in the form of being divided into the first count display and the second count display, even if the total time required for the timer effect is the same. , The time required to digest one count display (first count display or second count display) can be shortened, eliminating the monotony while digesting the count display and playing games. It will be expected to suppress the decrease in the amount of water.

FIG. 189 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. Time to explain the specific content of the timer effect for the new timer that is performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "Character reach without timer" are selected in the situation. It is a chart. FIG. 189 (b) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. Time to explain the specific content of the timer effect for the new timer that is performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "SP reach without timer" are selected in the situation. It is a chart.

In the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for convenience of explanation, only one type of "timer effect targeting the new timer" is prepared for each variation pattern. , Prepare multiple types (new timer 1, new timer 2, etc.) with different occurrence times of the first count display (for example, a pattern in which the first count display is started from the middle of the symbol change) and end times. Then, they may be selected by lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

In the "timer effect targeting the new timer" shown in FIG. 189 (a), first, the first count display having a count number of 30 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is hidden, a "specific effect mode" that is a timer target appears. In this way, after the "specific production mode" appears, a new count display (second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared until then is newly displayed. This is to be started (new timer). In the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, whenever a "specific staging mode" appears, a count display (second count display) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared up to that point is displayed. ) Is newly displayed to start this. However, even though the first count display has reached a predetermined value in this way, if a different count display (second count display) is newly started, the effect that is the target of the timer is executed. You may feel as if you were entrusted with the timer, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the "timer effect targeting the new timer" according to this embodiment, first, as a "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. It is decided to make a "failure production" that does not show any expectation appear. That is, in this case, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, the effect having an expectation as the effect of the timer target (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, combination). It will create a disappointing production situation as if it failed to generate (object B movement, etc.), but in that production situation, the second count display will be newly started, so the game As a person, he / she will feel that he / she can challenge the failed timer production again, and it is expected that he / she will improve the game entertainment through such emotional inflection.

However, in the "timer effect targeting the new timer" shown in FIG. 189 (a), the second count display started after the "failure effect" is not ended within the period of the symbol change, and the remaining count is counted. The symbol stop (big hit symbol or lost symbol) is performed before the digestion is completed. According to such a configuration, even if the player is looking forward to what kind of expectation the effect will appear when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the count is digested. Since it will be possible to completely lose interest in the jackpot expectation level when the symbol stop (big hit win) is displayed before that, no production will appear without causing a decline in the game interest. The timer effect can be terminated. In the symbol stop that appears before all the second count display is digested, in addition to the lost symbol, the jackpot symbol can also appear, so especially when the jackpot symbol appears, there is no game interest. It doesn't go down.

In other words, in the "timer effect targeting the new timer" shown in FIG. 189 (a), almost the entire period (at least half) of the symbol fluctuation is performed even though no effect having an expected degree appears as the timer target. The count display (1st count, 2nd count) will be performed over the above period).
・ In addition to performing a production that makes you aware of the possibility that a production with some degree of expectation may appear in the middle of the process (a production in which the first count reaches a predetermined value).
-By providing a configuration in which the newly started second count display is stopped while leaving the count number, the expectation that the timer target effect will occur soon is almost all of the symbol fluctuation. It will be able to last for a period of time. Further, as described above, the mechanism is such that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the fact that the production with the expected degree is not generated in both the first count display and the second count display is suitably suppressed. It's a street.

On the other hand, in the "timer effect targeting the new timer" shown in FIG. 189 (b), the number of counts for 30 seconds is set according to the start of the symbol change, as in the example shown in FIG. 189 (a). The first count display with is started. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is hidden, a "specific effect mode (failure effect)" that is a timer target appears. In this way, after the "specific effect mode (failure effect)" appears, a count display (second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared until then is displayed. The point of newly displaying and starting this is also the same as the example shown in FIG. 189 (a).

However, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), the symbol stop occurs after the second count display started after the "failure effect" reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the period of the symbol fluctuation. It is designed to do. In this respect, "timer production targeting a new timer" means, as described above, a sense of expectation that a timer target production will soon occur without any production having an expected degree appearing as a timer target. Since it has a technical feature in sustaining it, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the period of symbol fluctuation, it is necessary to make an effect with an expectation appear. I don't. On the other hand, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the period of the symbol change, the timer target is simply performed so that the effect with the expected degree does not appear. It is not possible to sustain the expectation that the production will occur soon.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the second count display started after the "failure effect" reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the period of the symbol change, the second count display is performed. The count display is not hidden and is maintained as a display that has reached a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the symbol is stopped while the display is maintained. In a state where the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is maintained, from the player's point of view, when the effect corresponding to the second count display reaching the predetermined value (the effect to be counted) appears. Since it looks like it is in a normal state, it is possible to suitably maintain the expectation that the effect of the timer target will occur soon until the symbol is stopped. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to completely lose interest in the jackpot expectation when the symbol stop (big hit win) is displayed before the second count display is hidden. Therefore, it becomes possible to end the timer effect without causing any effect to appear without causing a deterioration in the game entertainment.

By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for the player who has confirmed the "timer effect targeting the new timer", no matter what happens when the failure effect or the second count display occurs. There is a concern that it will be discovered that the production of will not occur. Therefore, only when the jackpot symbol is stopped while the second count display is exhausting the remaining count (including the period in which the display in the state where the second count display reaches the predetermined value is maintained) is the first. A special effect may be generated as an effect corresponding to the 2-count display. Alternatively, the rate at which a special effect is generated may be increased. According to such a configuration, the second count display has a different counting purpose from the first count display, and whether the jackpot symbol is stopped within the period when the second count display consumes the remaining counts. It becomes possible to give the fun of whether or not. In this sense, the first count display and the second count display may have different display modes (form, position, size, etc.).

It should be noted that the special effect may be generated when the second count display leaves the remaining count and this is in the running state. However, in view of generating a special effect as an effect corresponding to the second count display, after the second count display is hidden when the jackpot symbol is stopped (the second count display leaves the remaining count). It is desirable to perform a special effect (after hiding it, even if it is in a state). Then, it is desirable that the special effect executed in this way is continuously displayed including the execution period of the big hit game and the subsequent game period. That is, in this case, the special effect is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a process different from the process related to the "timer effect targeting the new timer".

The special effect may be generated within the period of the symbol change. In this case, it is desirable to make the jackpot symbol appear (for example, display it in a temporarily stopped state) within the period of the symbol fluctuation and hide the second count display, and then execute a special effect. However, the jackpot symbol may appear (for example, displayed in a temporarily stopped state) within the period of symbol fluctuation, and the second count display may be hidden after performing a special effect.

Then, if the rate of occurrence of the special effect (including 100%) is to be increased when the jackpot symbol is stopped while the second count display is digesting the remaining count, the symbol stop is performed. When the second count display reaches a predetermined value before it is displayed, it may be hidden, and the symbol may be stopped in the hidden state. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment while the second count display is being performed. However, even if the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol stop after the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, the rate at which the special effect occurs remains relatively low. In this case, the ratio may include 0%.

When realizing such a "timer effect targeting a new timer", in particular, a "failure effect" that does not show any expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is made to appear. If this is the case, it is different from the above-mentioned timer effect in which other effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) appear (these are). (In a separate lottery), the "timer production targeting the new timer" will be performed based on the fact that certain production conditions that have nothing to do with the result of the jackpot judgment or the type of fluctuation pattern are satisfied. It is desirable to make the judgment of. That is, in this case, in a situation where both the jackpot and the loss can be stopped when the symbol fluctuation is stopped (the situation where the jackpot symbol may appear according to the probability of the jackpot lottery), the "new timer is set. It becomes possible to generate a "timer effect targeted for effect", which makes it possible to generate a failure effect that has no expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the expectation that the effect of the timer target will occur soon without causing any effect having an expectation as the timer target for the period during which the symbol is changed.

However, if it is not required to exert such an action effect, the "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is not a failure effect that has no expectation. , Other production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) may be executed. In this case, through the same processing as in the case of performing the above-mentioned timer effect that causes other effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) to appear. "Timer effect targeting the new timer" will be executed.

In FIG. 189 (a), in the example in which the first fluctuation pattern (character reach without timer) is selected, the symbol is displayed before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. The fluctuation is stopped, and in FIG. 189 (b), in the example in which the second fluctuation pattern (SP reach without timer) is selected, the symbol fluctuation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. I did it. However, in the example in which the first variation pattern (character reach without timer) is selected, a pattern in which the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value may appear, or the second variation pattern may appear. In the example in which the fluctuation pattern of (SP reach without timer) is selected, the symbol fluctuation may be stopped before the second count display started after the "failure effect" reaches a predetermined value. Further, when a fluctuation pattern different from these fluctuation patterns is selected, "timer effect with the new timer as the effect target" may be performed.

In addition, the timer target effect will soon occur if the first count display is executed as a count display with a shorter count number than the second count display that can be stopped in the middle of executing the count display. It is desirable to maintain the expectation of doing.

In this embodiment, in the count display generated after the "failure effect" is performed, if the symbol is stopped before the count display is completely digested, either the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol may appear. However, in the normal count display that occurs regardless of the "failure effect", it is desirable that the jackpot symbol always appears if the symbol is stopped before the count display is completely digested.

The first count display may have a plurality of modes (for example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds) as the count number, and may be executed in any of them, but the second count display may be executed. , It is possible to execute only one mode (for example, 40 seconds) regardless of the number of counts executed in the first count display, as the first count display and the second count display are different count displays. It is desirable to make it recognizable that it is to be executed.

Further, considering that the first count display and the second count display are executed as different count displays, the period when the first count display is performed and the period when the second count display is performed are performed. It is possible to perform processing that makes the display mode (including different colors and effects) of the background image etc. different depending on when it is in (including the period when the display reaches the predetermined value and is maintained). desirable. In such a process, even if the reach effect is generated within the period in which the first count display is performed and the background image for the reach effect is transferred, when the second count display is subsequently executed, until then. Even if a reach effect occurs within the period in which the second count display is performed and the background image for the reach effect is transferred, the second count display is executed. The display mode different from the previous one that sometimes appeared is maintained even during the reach effect period, and is maintained until the second count display is hidden.

In the "timer effect targeting the new timer" according to this embodiment, as a "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. We decided to make a "failure effect" that does not show the degree of expectation appear, but instead of this, another count start suggestion that suggests that a count display different from the count display that was executed until then will be newly started. You may make the production appear. In this case, the expected degree may be indicated by the separate count start suggestion effect, or the expected degree may not be indicated.

[Timer mode staging]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, a plurality of production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, and character A operation) prepared as candidates for counting during the period in which the symbol production is performed. , Cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.), it is possible to execute a timer effect in which the count display is performed up to a predetermined value toward the timing at which at least one appears. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the count display is set to a predetermined value within a period before the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, "0"). The hell timer mode (first timer mode display), in which the ratio of appearances of highly expected production modes (effect type and production content (cut-in mode, etc.)) is relatively low when the timer becomes full. When the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the heavenly timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of the highly expected effect mode is relatively high can be displayed as the effect of the timer target. Yes (timer mode staging).

That is, in this case, since one of the timer mode displays having a different degree of advantage with respect to the timer effect is displayed when the remaining time of the count display is exhausted, this is a predetermined value after the count display is started. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until it becomes (here, "0").

FIG. 190 is a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). The timer mode effect performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "SP reach without timer" are selected and it is decided to perform "cut-in B1" as the effect of the timer target. It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of.

In the example shown in FIG. 190, for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (actually, there are a plurality of timers in addition to the cut-in B1) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161). The following processing related to the timer mode effect is executed. However, instead of performing the following processing related to the timer mode effect when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer mode effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 190, assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the selected "cut-in" as the next process. "B1" is a plurality of staging modes ("cut-in B1-1", "cut-in B1-2", "cut-in B1-3", "cut-in B1-4") including a timer mode staging mode. Judgment processing is performed as to which one to execute. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 190, in the embodiment of "cut-in B1-1", when 50 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of "50" is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change. The "cut-in B (cut B notice)" which is the target of the timer is executed when the predetermined value (here, "0") is reached and the count display is hidden.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "cut-in B1-2", 20 seconds have passed after the count display having the count number of "50" was started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and this is the first specification. When the count value (here, "30") is reached, the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed while the count digestion is in progress, and 50 seconds have passed since the count display was started. When a predetermined value (here, "0") is reached after a lapse of time, "cut-in B", which is the target of the timer, is executed while this is hidden, but the hell timer mode (first timer mode) is executed. The display of (display) is maintained even after "cut-in B" is hidden without being hidden.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "cut-in B1-3", 18 seconds have passed after the count display having the count number of "50" was started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and this is the first specific count value. When the second specific count value (here, "32") before that is reached, the heaven challenge effect of whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed is performed while the count digestion is in progress. As a result of failing to produce the heaven challenge, the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed, and when 50 seconds have passed since the count display was started and the predetermined value (here, "0") is reached. "Cut-in B", which is the target of the timer, is executed while the count display is hidden, but this is hidden for the display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display). The display is maintained even after the "cut-in B" is hidden without any problem.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "cut-in B1-4", 18 seconds have passed after the count display having the count number of "50" was started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and this is the first specific count. A heaven challenge effect is performed to determine whether the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress when the second specific count value (here, "32") before the value is reached. As a result of the success of the heaven challenge production, the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is displayed, and 50 seconds have passed since the count display was started, and the predetermined value (here, "0") is reached. Then, "cut-in B", which is the target of the timer, is executed while the count display is hidden, but this is hidden for the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display). The display is maintained even after the "cut-in B" is hidden without any notice.

That is, among the plurality of staging modes prepared corresponding to the "cut-in B1", the "cut-in B1-2", "cut-in B1-3", and "cut-in B1-4" modes are timers. It corresponds to the mode production. Then, in these timer mode effects, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is generated while the count digestion is in progress, and the timer target effect is executed while either of the timer modes is displayed. Will be done. Therefore, even when the count display is exhausting the remaining count, the timer mode effect related to the timer effect can give the timer effect an effect.

More specifically, when the heaven timer mode appears as the type of timer mode effect, the ratio of the effect type with higher expectation appears as the effect for the timer is higher than the case where the hell timer mode appears. It is long-awaited that the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value will come because the ratio of high-expected aspects to appear as the aspect (effect content) of cut-in B, which is the effect of the timer target, will increase. As a result, it becomes possible to pay more attention to the timer effect. On the other hand, when the hell timer mode appears as a type of timer mode effect, the effect of the timer target itself cannot be expected as compared with the case where the heaven timer mode appears, so the effect is different from the timer effect. It becomes possible to direct the gaze toward the timer, which makes it possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest even if a low-expected staging mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

In order to make the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode function more effectively, the same effect as the timer target effect is displayed when the heaven timer mode is displayed and when the hell timer mode is displayed. Even when the mode appears, it is desirable to control so that the ratio of the jackpot symbol to appear is higher when the effect mode appears when the heaven timer mode is displayed.

Further, in the timer mode effect according to this embodiment (in the example shown in FIG. 190, "cut-in B1-2", "cut-in B1-3", and "cut-in B1-4"), the timer is used. Even after the target effect is executed and hidden, the display related to the timer mode type (heaven timer mode, hell timer mode) is maintained. Therefore, even after the timer effect is completed, the effect can be advanced while the timer-related effect is displayed, and the effect status in which the timer effect is executed in either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode. The symbol will be stopped while the player is made aware of the presence of the timer. The display of the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode is hidden before the count display reaches a predetermined value (before the effect of the timer target occurs), or before the symbol stop is displayed. It may be hidden at the previous timing, or it may be kept displayed even when the symbol stop is displayed and hidden when the symbol stop is completed.

Further, the display of the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect may be generated before the count display is executed (for example, during the execution of the timer look-ahead effect). In addition, when the heaven timer mode or hell timer mode is displayed or the heaven challenge effect is performed while the count display is not executed, the timer effect is not always generated between the time when those effects are executed and the time when the symbol is stopped. You may not let it. However, when the heaven timer mode or hell timer mode is displayed or the heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display is not executed, compared to the case where those effects are not executed when the count display is not executed. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is high until the symbol is stopped, and that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is executed in advance.

Further, in the modes of "cut-in B1-3" and "cut-in B1-4", a heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display reaches the second specific count value, and then the count display is the first. While the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge effect when the specific count value is reached, in the mode of "cut-in B1-2", the count display becomes the second specific count value. At that time, the heaven challenge effect is not performed, and then the hell timer mode is displayed when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

According to such a configuration, after the count display is started, it becomes possible to pay attention to whether or not the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached. As a result, if the heaven challenge effect does not appear when the second specific count value is reached, the possibility that the heaven timer mode will occur is lost. That is, in this case, the hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specific count value, or the timer mode effect itself does not occur. Therefore, the count display is the first specific count value. You will be able to pay more attention to whether or not the hell timer mode will occur when it becomes.

When the timer mode effect itself does not occur, it is desirable that the rate at which a highly expected effect mode appears as the effect of the timer target is higher than when the hell timer mode occurs. However, if the ratio of the production mode with high expectation as the production of the timer target is different between the case where the timer mode production itself does not occur and the case where the hell timer mode occurs, the opposite is true. Even when the relationship is adopted, it is possible to pay more attention to whether or not the hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

On the other hand, if the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached, the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode are used as the timer mode effect when the count display reaches the first specific count value. Since any of the above is executed, it becomes possible to further pay attention to the type of timer mode effect that appears when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

According to such a timer mode effect, not only when the count display reaches a predetermined value, but also some specific count values different from the predetermined value (first specific count value, second specific count value). Even when it reaches, the timer effect (count value) and the effect related to it can be made interesting and watched, so that the game entertainment during the period when the count display is executed Can be suitably maintained.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 190, the count display of the timer effect reaches the second specific count value and the first specific count value in sequence, and when the predetermined value is reached, the timer target effect is executed, and then the timer effect is executed. The symbol fluctuation will be stopped.

In this embodiment, when a specific timer type (actually, there are not only cut-in B1 but also a plurality of timers) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161), the specific timer type is specified. It is determined which mode (cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4) is executed as the timer type (cut-in B1 in the example shown in FIG. 190). However, instead of cut-in B1, cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, and cut-in B1-4 are prepared as selection candidates for the count display lottery (step S5510). Then, it may be decided which timer type is selected from these candidates. This processing method can also be similarly adopted in the processing related to the execution of other effects (for example, the revival timer effect).

In the example shown in FIG. 190, when the effect of the timer target is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, as a specific type of effect (cut-in B) as compared with the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. The ratio of high-expected content (cut-in B is performed with a high-expected color, etc.) is increased. However, instead of this, if the effect of the timer target is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, multiple effect types (for example, conversation notice, hold change) are performed compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. , Cut-in A, special timer, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.), the ratio of the highly expected effect type may be increased. Alternatively, in the heaven timer mode, the rate at which a highly expected effect type appears as the effect for the timer target may be high, and the rate at which the content has a high expectation may be high.

In addition, a specific effect type among a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, special timer, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) is selected as the effect for the timer target. If, or if a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), make sure that either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode occurs within the execution period of the count display. May be good. At this time, it is desirable that a pattern in which the hell timer mode occurs can appear without the heaven challenge effect being performed.

In addition, an effect indicating that either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode always occurs within the period before the heaven challenge effect reaches the second specific count value may be performed.

In addition, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the heaven high probability mode in which the rate of success in the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) becomes higher when the heaven challenge effect occurs than in the normal time. You may want to move to. That is, in this case, in the heaven high probability mode, the probability of occurrence of the heaven challenge effect itself when the heaven timer mode is not displayed is lowered (the probability of generating the hell timer mode without generating the heaven challenge effect, or the timer. By increasing the probability that the mode effect will not occur) or by lowering the expectation of the timer target effect itself that occurred when in the heaven timer mode, the heaven high probability mode will be realized.

In the heaven challenge production, a period during which the operation by the player can be accepted is set, and the result of success or failure of the heaven challenge production based on the operation performed by the player within the period (heaven timer mode, Which of the hell timer modes will occur) may be displayed.

Also, if the heaven challenge effect occurs when the number of executed counts in the count display is relatively small, such as when the heaven challenge effect occurs at the same time as the count display of the timer effect starts, the count in the count display It is desirable that the rate of success of the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher than when the heaven challenge effect occurs when the number of executed items is relatively large. .. That is, in this case, just before the appearance of the effect that is the target of the timer effect, it is possible to maintain the game entertainment by the expectation that the effect will occur soon, and the effect that is the target of the timer effect appears. When it takes a long time (count number) to do so, it is expected that the game will be maintained with the expectation that the heaven challenge production will occur. In this case, the heaven challenge effect may be generated after the timer target effect is executed. In this case, the success rate of the heaven challenge effect is the lowest, and the timer target effect that has already been executed is the lowest. On the other hand, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode will occur in the form of follow-up.

Further, the heaven challenge effect may be generated as one of the target effects of the timer effect. When the heaven challenge effect is executed as the target effect of the timer effect, the rate of success in the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is set to 100%, and after the heaven timer mode is displayed. During the symbol fluctuation period of, the ratio of high-expected effects (for example, the character B operation) among the effects prepared as one of the candidates for the timer, which was not the target of the timer, is the effect. It is desirable to make it higher than if it did not appear.

[Count output stop control]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period in which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, pending change) prepared as candidates for the count target are prepared. , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) It is possible to execute a timer effect that hides the count display at the timing when at least one of them appears. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined effect different from the timer effect (preferably, but not necessarily limited to, the effect having a predetermined degree of expectation) is performed during the execution of the count display. When executed, an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until the predetermined value is reached, and the output related to the count display is not performed until the predetermined value is reached, and this is performed at an intermediate stage when the predetermined effect is executed. One of the effect modes for canceling the output is selectively displayed (count output stop control).

According to such a configuration, even if the output related to the count display is performed in the timer effect, the count display is not always performed until the predetermined value is reached, and the output is stopped in the middle of the process and the output related to the predetermined effect is output. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is expected that the output related to the count display of the timer effect will be output and the game entertainment will be maintained until this reaches a predetermined value (count digestion period).

FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count output stop control performed when a specific variation number is selected in the 2nd processing situation.

As shown in FIG. 191 (a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds has elapsed at a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation was started. The display starts. Then, after the count display becomes "0", the effect of the timer target, which is the timer target, appears.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the effect at the time when the predetermined effect appears. Determine if the situation is in a specific pre-determined staging situation. As a result, when it is in a specific effect situation, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the control to execute the predetermined effect is performed. The "predetermined specific effect status" used to determine whether or not to stop the output related to the timer effect count display is, for example, the timer effect count display being executed. This is an effect situation in which a conflict occurs regarding the effect output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect, such as when a predetermined effect is executed using the area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, the timer effect is continued even after the output related to the predetermined effect is completed. The count display is not output again. On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of the fluctuation) is secretly timed. When this reaches a predetermined value (a value when 20 seconds have passed since the count display was started), it is assumed that the timing for the output-stopped count display to reach a predetermined value (here, "0") has arrived, and the timer I am trying to make the target production appear.

According to such a configuration, after the predetermined effect is executed, the output is maintained in the stopped state of the count display, but if the count display is not stopped, the value is set to a predetermined value (here, “0”). When the timing that should have been reached arrives, the effect of the timer target will appear. That is, in this case, it is expected that the timer effect, which was shown as if it had been terminated halfway by the execution of the predetermined effect, was secretly continued, and that the effect of the timer target was improved when the effect of the timer appeared. Will be done.

However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191 (c), even if the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the predetermined effect is performed. When the effect status at the time when the effect appears is not in a predetermined specific effect situation, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until it reaches a predetermined value without stopping, and the count display is digested. In the meantime, the predetermined production will be executed.

More specifically, the predetermined effect is "an effect that causes an enemy character to appear in a specific area", "an effect that attacks a specific area", or "a display when the effect fails in a specific area". In the case of "the effect of outputting music or music", if such a predetermined effect is executed while the count display is being executed in a specific area, the player will be able to use the timer effect (count display). On the other hand, there may be a concern that some kind of adverse effect on the effect (for example, the expectation as a timer effect may be lowered) may be exerted. Therefore, when there is a production situation in which such a concern may occur, by stopping the output related to the count display of the timer effect and executing the predetermined effect, some adverse effect on the timer effect can be produced. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined effect without producing an image as if it were exerted (the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b)). Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, since the effect of the timer target is made to appear as a surprise while maintaining the output stop state related to the count display, such a predetermined effect is used. On the contrary, it can be expected to improve the game entertainment (the production mode of FIG. 191 (b)).

However, if the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped each time such a predetermined effect is executed, the effect image of the predetermined effect itself will be deteriorated, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be deteriorated. Will be done. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed, there is a vacancy in an area different from the specific area where the count display of the timer effect is output (the area where no effect is output). In some cases, the output of the timer effect count display is not stopped and is maintained, and the predetermined effect is output in a vacant area instead of the specific area (FIG. 191 (c). ) Production mode). As a result, it becomes clear that the predetermined effect is not an effect that stops the execution of the count display of the timer effect in the middle of the process, and the game interest is reduced when the predetermined effect is executed. Will be avoided.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 191, the symbol variation is stopped after the effect of the timer target is executed in this way.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure for realizing such count output stop control.

As shown in FIG. 192, assuming that the determination to execute the predetermined effect is made based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is used. First, when the timing for generating the predetermined effect arrives within the execution period of the symbol change, it is determined whether or not the predetermined effect is in a specific effect state prior to starting the output related to the predetermined effect. (Step S5701).

Here, the "specific effect situation" means that when a predetermined effect is newly output, the area required for newly outputting the predetermined effect is various other effects (here, a count display of a timer effect, etc.). As described above, it is a situation in which all of the predetermined effects are used and there is no space for newly outputting the predetermined effect. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 201 (G) and 201 (H) described later, the “bullet firing effect” by the cannon corresponds to the predetermined effect. Then, in the bullet firing effect, the empty (unused) area of the upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, and lower area in the display area is selected as the bullet firing destination. Normally, the unused area is used to produce a bullet firing effect. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G) described later, the area required to newly output such a bullet firing effect is various other effects (count display (upper left area), symbol variation (upper right). Area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)), and there is no space for newly outputting the predetermined effect. This corresponds to the above-mentioned "specific production situation". If a bullet is fired while in such a specific production situation, the production (for example, count display) that is already in the output state at the bullet firing destination will be damaged or destroyed by the fired bullet. (There will be a conflict regarding the production output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect), and as a result, there may be concerns that the jackpot expectation may drop. Also mentioned above.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192, when it is determined that a specific production situation is present (YES in step S5701) prior to starting the output related to the predetermined production, it is already different from the predetermined production. The output of the effect (here, the count display) in the output state is stopped (step S5702), and the free area created by the output is stopped to perform the process related to the output of the predetermined effect (step S5703).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no specific effect situation (NO in step S5701) prior to starting the output related to the predetermined effect, another effect is used in the area required for the effect output. Since there is an unused area that has not been used, it is possible to perform processing related to the output of the predetermined effect using the unused area without stopping the output of the effect different from the predetermined effect. (Step S5713).

Here, when the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5703, the effect mode is advantageous to the player after the predetermined effect is executed, as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5713. It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance of. For example, in the case of FIGS. 191 (b) and 191 (c), when the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b) in which the effect of the timer target is suddenly executed while the output related to the count display is stopped appears. It is desirable to control so that the ratio of the highly expected effect mode (effect type and effect content) to appear as the effect of the timer target is higher than that of the case where the effect mode of FIG. 191 (c) appears.

The processes of step S5702 and step S5703 may be executed as one process. For example, if the output data of the predetermined effect is overwritten in the processing area in which the output data of the count display is stored, the output related to the count display is naturally stopped, and the output is stopped in this output state. It becomes possible to perform output related to a predetermined effect.

Further, in this embodiment, it is decided to stop the output related to the count display and execute the predetermined effect when the output is in a specific effect situation, but the effect is not limited to this and is not limited to this. It is also possible to cancel the output related to the production of.

In the process of step S5702, an effect type for which output is to be stopped is selected from among a plurality of effects (in the output state) using the area required for outputting the predetermined effect, and the selected effect is stopped for output. You may output a predetermined effect. In this case, it is desirable to set priorities in advance for a plurality of effects that are candidates for output cancellation, and to select an effect type for which output is stopped based on the priorities. It is desirable to set this priority in advance on the program based on whether the production is more important to the player. As a result of determining the priority, if all of the other effects in the output state have a higher priority than the predetermined effect, the output related to the other effects is maintained and the output of the predetermined effect is not performed. ..

Then, the effect type for which the output is to be stopped is executed as a plurality of effects that are related to the effect contents and are connected (for example, a timer effect that is connected between the count display and the timer target effect). The output is stopped during the effect that appears earlier in the effect (for example, during the execution of the count display), and before the effect that appears later (for example, the timer target effect) is started, the predetermined effect is described above. When is terminated, it is desirable to execute the effect that appears later without stopping the output.

In addition, regarding the effects and predetermined effects that are subject to output cancellation when the predetermined effects are executed, in addition to the effects by image display, the effects by the movement of the characters, the effects by music, the effects by the board lamp, etc. good. In addition, at least two or more of each effect element such as image display, character movement, music, and board lamp are combined in the effect or the predetermined effect that is the target of output cancellation when the predetermined effect is executed. When it is executed as a composite effect, it may be sufficient to stop the output of at least one of the combined effect elements. For example, when the predetermined effect is the "bullet firing effect" shown in FIG. 201 (G) described later and the effect targeted for output cancellation is the "combined effect of the image display and the board lamp", the combined effect. Even if only the output related to the image display is stopped and the output related to the board lamp is maintained, the effect of the board lamp in the display area where the bullet as the image display does not reach is adversely affected. It can be said that there is no concern that (competition due to staging) will occur.

[Timer Plus Staging]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, at least one of a plurality of staging modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) is counted. It is possible to display the count display within the period when the symbol effect is performed, and after displaying the count display for a predetermined time, the count display is hidden and the effect to be counted appears in the hidden state. The production is feasible. In this regard, in the count effect, after hiding the count display that has reached a specific count value (for example, "0"), not only one of the above-mentioned plurality of effect modes appears, but also the specific count value (for example, "0") is displayed. By redisplaying the above count display in the form of having a larger count value than "), it is possible to execute an effect of continuing the count effect (timer plus effect).

That is, in this case, even if the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, "0") and one of the plurality of effect modes appears under the condition that the count display is hidden, the count display is displayed. Since there is a possibility that the count effect will be redisplayed with a count value larger than the specific count value and the count effect will be continued (the possibility that a more expected effect mode will appear), the count display will be displayed. It is expected that the game will be maintained after it is hidden.

FIG. 193 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer plus effect performed when a specific variation number (SP reach without timer) is selected in the situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only cut-in B2 but also a plurality of timer types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (FIG. (Refer to 162), the following processing related to the timer plus effect is executed. However, instead of performing the following processing related to the timer plus effect when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer plus effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 193 (a), assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a has selected the timer type as the next process. A determination process is performed as to which of a plurality of effect modes (“cut-in B2-1” and “cut-in B2-2”) including the mode of the timer plus effect is executed for the “cut-in B2”. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 193 (a), in the embodiment of "cut-in B2-1", 40 seconds are displayed after a count display having a count value of "40" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the symbol fluctuation. When a predetermined value (here, "0") is reached and the count display is hidden, the "cut-in B (cut B notice)" which is the target of the timer is executed.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", a count display in which the number of counts is significantly smaller than that of the aspect of "cut-in B2-1" is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol change. There is. In general, in such a timer effect, no effect is often performed during the period from the execution of the count display to the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value, so that there is a concern that the game entertainment will be deteriorated during that period. To. Therefore, in the timer plus effect (aspect of "cut-in B2-2") shown in FIG. 193 (a), first, a relatively small first count value (here, "4") after a predetermined time has elapsed from the symbol fluctuation. After displaying the count display with and hiding it, in the hidden state, the first double-compatible effect is performed for a longer time (here, 4 seconds) than the time when the count display was displayed (4 seconds in this case). For example, it is supposed to be executed for 9 seconds).

Here, in the first double-compatible effect, first, as an effect corresponding to the count display having the first count value (here, "4") (first timer target effect), the cut-in B effect is produced. To execute. However, in the first timer target effect, a mode with a relatively low expectation (a character wearing a blue aura) appears as a mode of the cut-in B. Then, after that, an effect (second timer target effect) is executed as to whether or not to redisplay the count display in a form having a count value larger than the first count value. As for the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display, for example, whether or not a specific display image (count-up image) appears and whether or not a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) operates. It is possible to realize it as a production such as whether or not.

In addition, in the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display (count-up effect), each time the count display in the hidden state is redisplayed, it is executed prior to that, but a specific display is performed. The effect mode (color, light emission mode, etc.) when appearing as an effect using an image (count-up image) or a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is different depending on the number of times the image is redisplayed. It is desirable to do so. Further, when a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is adopted as an accessory indicating that the count display is redisplayed, the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is subjected to the count-up effect. Not only that, it is desirable that it be used for other effects such as confirmation of a big hit. However, in this case, the operation mode of the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is different, and in addition to the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory), a different movable accessory is further operated. It is desirable to let them perform a movable effect in cooperation with them in order to understand that the count-up effect is not being executed.

According to such a configuration, two different effects as the target of the count "4" (the first timer target effect (cut-in B) showing the degree of expectation, and the second as to whether the count display is redisplayed). Since the timer target effect (count-up effect) will be performed, when the count display (count "4") for a relatively short time is executed, it is possible to enjoy the timer target effect for a longer time. become able to. Therefore, it is expected that the time required for the count display to be executed is reduced while maintaining the total time as a timer effect, and the deterioration of the game interest during the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value is suppressed. Become so.

In this respect, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the first double-compatible effect, and when the effect result appears, the first effect result appears. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having a second count value (here, "5") larger than the count value of. However, in the first double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that fails to redisplay the count display is also prepared, and the count display is not redisplayed when the effect pattern appears. It is desirable that the timer effect is terminated at this point.

After that, when the count display having the second count value (here, "5") is hidden after a predetermined time, the second double-corresponding effect is counted and displayed in the hidden state. Is supposed to be executed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the displayed time (here, 5 seconds).

Also in this second double-compatible effect, first, as an effect corresponding to the count display having the second count value (here, "5") (third timer target effect), the cut-in B effect is performed. Run. However, in the third timer target effect, as the mode of the cut-in B, an aspect (character wearing a green aura) having a higher expectation than the first timer target effect appears. Then, after that, an effect (fourth timer target effect) is executed as to whether or not to redisplay the count display in a form having a count value larger than the second count value.

According to such a configuration, the count display of the second count value (here, "5"), which takes a longer time than the first count value (here, "4"), is executed. However, in exchange for this, the cut-in B effect is executed in a manner with a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect. Therefore, while trying to extend the time required for counting to maintain the total time as a timer effect, it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment during the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value. Become.

In this respect, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the second double-compatible effect, and when the effect result appears, the second effect result appears. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having a third count value (here, "7") larger than the count value of. However, even in the second double-compatible effect, an effect pattern is prepared in which an effect result that fails to redisplay the count display is prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is not redisplayed. It is desirable that the timer effect is terminated at that point.

After that, when the count display having the third count value (here, "7") is hidden, the count display is displayed for the third double-corresponding effect in the hidden state. It is decided to execute for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time (here, 7 seconds).

Here, even in the third double-compatible effect, first, as an effect corresponding to the count display having the third count value (here, "7") (the fifth timer target effect), the cut-in is performed. Perform the production of B. However, in the third timer target effect, as the mode of the cut-in B, an aspect (character wearing a red aura) having a higher expectation than the first and second timer target effects appears. Then, after that, an effect (sixth timer target effect) is executed as to whether or not to redisplay the count display in a form having a count value larger than the third count value.

According to such a configuration, the count display of the third count value (here, "7"), which takes a longer time than the first and second count values (here, "4", "5"). However, in exchange for this, the cut-in B effect is executed in a manner with a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer target effects, so that the count display is displayed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest during the period until the predetermined value is reached.

In this regard, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", an effect result in which the above count display fails to be displayed again appears in the third double-compatible effect, and the timer effect ends at this point. Will be done. That is, in this case, in the timer effect, the cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura is finally executed as the effect of the timer target, but until the cut-in B according to the embodiment appears. Since the count display for a relatively short period of time is displayed multiple times and the effect corresponding to those count displays is executed multiple times, the period from the start of the timer effect to the end of the timer effect is reached. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Moreover, each time the count display is redisplayed, the count value is increased to increase the scale of the production as a whole, but the total time that the count display is displayed is larger than the total time that the count display is hidden. Is also shortened, and each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is executed in a more promising manner, so the timer effect is executed while maintaining the game interest for a long time. You will be able to.

Further, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", each time the count display is hidden, the degree of expectation is gradually increased by changing the aspect (color) for the same effect (cut-in B). By expressing how it goes, it is possible to execute those multiple count displays as one timer effect for "cut-in B", and the final displayed effect (red). It becomes possible to recognize that the cut-in B) by the character wearing the aura of is the effect target of the timer effect.

In the third double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the above count display appears is also prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is redisplayed and a timer effect is produced. It is desirable to continue. However, when the maximum number of times the count display is redisplayed is reached, the effect is not the cut-in B effect that was being executed until then, but a different effect (expectation is higher than any aspect of the cut-in B). It is desirable to execute a special effect (which is not prepared as a candidate for the timer target) so that it can be recognized that the maximum number of times has been reached. In this case, the effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display after the special effect is executed does not appear, but the time required for the special effect is the double-compatible effect (two) that have appeared so far. It is suggested that the effect that has appeared so far (cut-in B by a character wearing a red aura) has a higher degree of expectation by making it execute for a longer time than the effect that the timer target effect is executed. It is desirable to do so in order to improve the entertainment of the game. In this case, the degree of expectation may be 100%.

FIG. 193 (b) is a time chart for explaining a modified example of the timer plus effect.

The timer plus effect may be performed in the manner shown in FIG. 193 (b). That is, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the count display having the first count value (here, “4”) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the first count value (1st count value (here, “4”) is started. Here, the effect corresponding to the count "4" (the effect at the time of the 4-second timer) corresponding to "4") is executed.

Here, in the staging corresponding to the count "4" (staging at the time of the 4-second timer), the staging period is set for the time required for the first count value (here, "4") to be digested. During the effect period, the timer target effect such as cut-in B is executed in a predetermined mode (such as a character wearing a blue aura).

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the timer target in the situation where the count display is being executed, so that the game entertainment during the count digestion can be suitably maintained. ..

Moreover, when the effect corresponding to the count "4" (the effect at the time of the 4-second timer) is completed, the count display of the count "4" also reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), so that the timer is reached. Even if you do not check the count display of the effect, you can easily recognize that the count display has reached the predetermined value (here, "0") just by checking the effect corresponding to the count "4" (effect at the time of the 4-second timer). You will be able to.

Then, after the timing for ending the count "4" corresponding effect (4 second timer time effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "4" reaches a predetermined value), the first count value (after the count display reaches a predetermined value) is reached. Here, an effect (first count-up effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed in a form having a count value larger than that of "4"). This first count-up effect is executed as the same effect as the "effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display" in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the above count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect is terminated at this point without the count display being redisplayed.

However, as a result of the first count-up effect, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the above count display appears, a second count value (here, "4") larger than the first count value (here, "4") appears. Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having "5"). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having a second count value (here, “5”), the count corresponding to the second count value (here, “5”) is displayed. Execute the "5" corresponding effect (5 second timer time effect).

Here, in the staging corresponding to the count "5" (staging at the time of the 5-second timer), the staging period is set for the time required for the second count value (here, "5") to be digested. During the production period, the timer target production such as cut-in B appears in a mode with higher expectations (such as a character wearing a green aura) compared to the above count "4" compatible production (4 second timer production). Will be made to.

Then, after the timing for ending the count "5" corresponding effect (5 second timer time effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "5" reaches a predetermined value), the second count value (here). Then, an effect (second count-up effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed in a form having a count value larger than that of "5"). This second count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the "effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display" in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the above count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect is terminated at this point without the count display being redisplayed.

However, as a result of the second count-up effect, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the above count display appears, a third count value (here, "5") larger than the second count value (here, "5") appears. Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having "7"). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having a third count value (here, “7”), the count corresponding to the third count value (here, “7”) is displayed. Execute the "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer time effect).

Here, in the staging corresponding to the count "7" (staging at the time of the 7-second timer), the staging period is set for the time required for the third count value (here, "7") to be digested. During the production period, the timer target production such as cut-in B appears in a mode with higher expectations (such as a character wearing a red aura) compared to the case of the production corresponding to the above count "5" (5 second timer production). Will be made to.

Then, after the timing for ending the count "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer time effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "7" reaches a predetermined value), the third count value (here). Then, an effect (third count-up effect) may be executed as to whether or not to redisplay the count display in a form having a count value larger than that of "7"). This third count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the "effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display" in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and as a result of the effect, the count display is described above. When an effect pattern that fails to redisplay appears, the timer effect ends at this point without the count display being redisplayed.

In this regard, in this modification, after the timing for ending the count "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer time effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "7" reaches a predetermined value), the count is further increased. The count-up staging that suggests the possibility of this is shown as an example in which the count-up effect itself did not appear. In this way, even if the count-up effect itself does not appear, the count display is not redisplayed as in the case where the effect pattern that fails to redisplay the count display appears in the count-up effect. At that point, the timer effect will end.

According to the count-up effect related to such a modification, when a count display having a predetermined number of count values is displayed, the count value is displayed and immediately determined in advance corresponding to the count value. Since the count-compatible effect (cut-in B, etc.) having the effect content for the required time is started, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the count display is being executed. In addition, when such a count-compatible effect is completed (when the count display reaches a predetermined value), an effect is performed as to whether the count display has a larger count value and is redisplayed, and these two effects alternate. Since the timer effect is executed and continued by appearing, it is possible to suppress the situation where the count display is performed intently and no effect is performed in the timer effect, which is suitable for the game entertainment. Will be able to maintain.

In this modified example, a count-compatible effect (for example, count “4”) has an effect content for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) corresponding to the displayed count value (for example, “4”). While the corresponding effect) is being executed, the count display digestion (countdown of 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 0) is also performed. However, as described above, the count-corresponding effect (for example, the count "4" -corresponding effect) related to this modified example is such that the effect ends at the timing when the displayed count value (for example, "4") finishes digesting. Since it is executed, only the count value at the time of its appearance (for example, "4") is displayed for a predetermined time, and the count display during count digestion (4 → 3 → 2 → 1) is displayed. → It is more desirable not to necessarily perform this for the countdown of 0) in order to encourage attention to the count-compatible staging (for example, the count “4” -compatible staging).

Then, in each of the examples shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the symbol variation is stopped after the timer effect is executed in this way.

Of the timer plus effects, in the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display, an effect acceptance period of a predetermined time is set, and the count is based on the operation performed by the player within the period. An effect suggesting that the display is redisplayed (success effect) or an effect suggesting that the count display is not redisplayed (failure effect) may appear. That is, in this case, after the success effect appears, the count display is redisplayed in a form that the count number increases to continue the timer effect, and when the failure effect appears, the count display is redisplayed after that. do not have. When such an effect is adopted, even if the player does not perform the operation within the effect acceptance period, a predetermined effect result (successful effect or failure effect) is obtained at a predetermined timing after the elapse of the period. It will be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the time required for the first to third double-compatible staging is set to the same time, but each count display (“4”, “5”, “7”) is supported. The production time may be set to a different time from each other. For example, as the count value of each count display gradually increases each time the count display is redisplayed, the time required for this as a double-compatible effect corresponding to each count value gradually increases. If it is set to, the total time required for the count display itself can be kept relatively short, and the scale of the entire production can be appropriately extended while maintaining the game entertainment.

In addition, in the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display, when displaying the effect result, there are a plurality of effect modes having different ratios (expectations) in which the count display is redisplayed in a form that the number of counts increases. Either may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, each time the count display is redisplayed, a count display having a count value larger than the count value when the previous count display is displayed is made to appear. It is not always necessary to redisplay the count display having a count value larger than the count value when the count display is displayed. That is, even when the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is executed, even if the count display is redisplayed when the predetermined effect image appears after that, the game entertainment can be improved. It can be expected to be planned. However, despite redisplaying the count display with a count value smaller than the count value when the previous count display was displayed, there is a higher expectation as a timer target effect than the previous count display. If the rate of appearance (which may be 100%) is increased, the sense of speed from the display of the count display to the appearance of the timer target effect will be increased, and the game entertainment will be further improved. You will be able to do it. Then, when the redisplay in the count display having such a small count value is repeatedly executed, the appearance timing of the timer target effect gradually shortens from the time when the count display is first displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the entertainment of the game by such an accelerated timer production.

[Timer stagnation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) is performed. It is set as a count target, and the count display is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the effect mode to be counted is made to appear among the above-mentioned plurality of effect modes. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the count display can be hidden between the start of the count display and the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and then the count display is displayed. There are cases where it is hidden over the first time and cases where it is hidden over a second time longer than the first time (timer stagnation effect).

That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of a plurality of effect modes appears as a count target, and the count display is the first time or this until the predetermined value is reached. Since it may be hidden over a longer second time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time until one of the plurality of production modes occurs, and the feeling of tension until the production to be counted is executed. Will be able to sustain.

FIG. 194 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer stagnation effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "Character reach without timer" are selected in the situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 194 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only the accessory A operation 2 but also a plurality of timer types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161), the following processing related to the timer stagnation effect is executed. However, instead of performing the following processing related to the timer stagnation effect when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer stagnation effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 194 (a), assuming that the timer type of "feature A operation 2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the next process as the next process. Regarding whether to execute the selected "Character A operation 2" in a plurality of effect modes ("Character A operation 2-1" or "Character A operation 2-2"" including the mode of the revival timer effect. It is desirable that the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 194 (a), in the embodiment of "Character A operation 2-1", 30 after the count display having the count value of "30" is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation. When the second elapses, the predetermined value (here, "0") is reached and the count display is hidden, and the timer target "feature A operation (feature A notice)" is executed. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the embodiment of "Character A operation 2-2", 5 seconds have elapsed after the start of the count display with the count value of "10" after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol change, and the count is counted. When the value becomes "5", it is hidden, and when the hidden state is maintained for 6 seconds, the count display is redisplayed with the count value of "4". After that, when 2 seconds have passed and the count value becomes "2", this is hidden again, and when the hidden state is maintained for 16 seconds, the count display is re-displayed with the count value of "1". It is displayed, and after reaching "0" one second later, the "feature A operation (feature A notice)" that is the target of the timer is executed while the count display is hidden. It has become.

According to such an aspect of "Character A operation 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a count display having a count value of "10" starts after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation. However, as in the case where the count display having the count value of "30" is started, the predetermined value (here, "here" When it reaches 0 "), the effect of the timer target is executed. That is, in this case, even if a count display having a relatively small count value appears, if an effect of hiding the count display for a predetermined time (timer stagnation effect) occurs while the count display is digested, the count is counted. The progress speed of is stagnated for that time, and it is expected that it will be executed as a timer effect that takes the same time as when a count display with a relatively large count value appears. .. As described above, in the timer effect, the longer the time required for this, the higher the rate at which the effect mode of the timer target with high expectation appears, but such a timer is performed while the count is digested. By making it possible to generate a stagnation effect, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the game interest when a count display having a relatively small count value appears. In addition, since the time for the timer effect as a whole is extended by adding the time for the count display to be hidden, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest while the count display is executed. ..

Further, in the aspect of the "accessory A operation 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the first time (6) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"). The count display is hidden for a period (a period between the count values "5" → "4") and a second time (16 seconds) longer than the first time. The period to be set (the period between the count value "2" → "1") can appear, but the count display is "non" regardless of the length of those times (first time, second time). When returning from the "display state" to the "display state", the count value is advanced (changed) only by a specific number (here, "1"), which is the minimum unit. That is, in this case, the longer the count display is maintained in the "hidden state", the more the count progress speed is stagnant for that time, and the higher the rate of appearance of highly expected production modes. Since it is expected to become, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the embodiment of "Character A operation 2-2", as the count value in the timer effect progresses, when the count display is hidden, the time for which it is maintained in the "hidden state" becomes longer. It is set to. That is, in this case, even if the count display with a relatively small count value is being executed and the count digestion is likely to end (a situation in which the predetermined value is reached in a short time), at this point in time. If a timer stagnation effect appears in, the time required for the timer effect will be greatly increased and the degree of expectation will be greatly improved. You will be able to.

Further, in the embodiment of "Character A operation 2-2", after the count display is hidden, the count display is redisplayed and the timer target effect is executed after reaching a predetermined value. However, after the count display is hidden, the count display is not necessarily redisplayed so that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated halfway at this point can appear without executing the timer target effect. You may. When this effect pattern appears, the rate at which the symbol fluctuation is stopped by the jackpot symbol is lower than when the predetermined value is reached and the timer target effect is executed. However, by preparing such an effect pattern, the timer effect can be produced. It will be possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of this itself. Moreover, after the count display is hidden (after the timer effect is terminated halfway), the symbol fluctuation may be stopped by the jackpot symbol while waiting for the count display to be displayed again. It is expected that the game will be improved by realizing such a surprise-like production.

Further, in the embodiment of "Character A operation 2-2", the total time (22 seconds) in which the count display is hidden is longer than the total time (10 seconds) in which the count display is displayed. As a result, the deterioration of the game entertainment while the count display is being executed is suppressed.

FIG. 194 (b) shows an example of the relationship between the time until the count display is redisplayed (the time during which the non-display state is maintained) and the degree of risk that the count display is not redisplayed. It is a table H1 which shows separately of the count value when it is displayed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the type of timer effect including the mode of timer stagnation effect and its execution mode are related based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of fluctuation pattern so that the relationship shown in Table H1 appears. It is desirable to perform processing.

According to such an embodiment shown in Table H1, as the count value progresses (as it approaches a predetermined value), the maintenance time when it is hidden tends to be longer, whereas it is hidden. There is a tendency that the risk that the timer effect is terminated without the count display being redisplayed while being displayed is gradually increased. That is, in this case, if it is hidden at the stage where the count value has not progressed so much, the total time as a timer effect is small, but it can be extended steadily with a small end risk, but the count value is large. If it is hidden at the stage of progress, the end risk is large, but the total time as a timer effect can be greatly extended, so the effect as a timer stagnation effect gradually changes as the count value progresses. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest while the count display is executed.

In Table H1, one non-display time is associated with each count value, but a plurality of non-display times are associated with each count value, and the timer is stagnant at any of these non-display times. The effect may be generated.

In addition, at what timing (count value) the count display is hidden while the count display is being executed, and the number of times the count display is hidden, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of fluctuation pattern, etc. It is desirable to make a decision at the beginning of the symbol change based on this.

Further, in such a timer stagnation effect, an effect corresponding to the count display may be performed while the count display is hidden. For example, when the count value "6" is hidden for 6 seconds, the non-display effect corresponding to the count value "6" is performed for 6 seconds, and the count value "2" is hidden for 16 seconds. In this case, if the non-display effect corresponding to the count value "2" (the effect mode is different from the non-display effect corresponding to the count value "6") is performed for 16 seconds. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the count display is in the non-display state. At this time, an effect of whether or not the count display is redisplayed may appear in the non-display effect, and the count display may be redisplayed or the timer effect may be terminated according to the effect result. ..

More preferably, during the period from the start of the count display to the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value, when the count display is in the display state, there is a new effect (an effect different from the timer effect) that suggests the jackpot expectation. If you do not start it and you can start a new effect that suggests the big hit expectation (an effect different from the timer effect) when the count display is hidden, you should be careful about the remaining count. You will be able to enjoy a different effect from the timer effect. In addition to the increase in expectations due to the occurrence of the timer stagnation effect itself, it is now possible to enjoy the increase in expectations due to the production different from the timer effect, which gives a feeling of expectation for the timer stagnation effect. It will be possible to make it even higher.

Then, another effect that appears when the count display is in the non-display state may include a new timer effect different from the timer effect. However, in this case, the count is advanced faster than the progress speed of the hidden count, and a new timer is reached before the timing when the hidden count display is redisplayed. It is desirable that the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value so that the target effect appears. As a target effect of the new timer effect, an effect of redisplaying the non-displayed count display may be performed.

[Progressive production that leads to timer target production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, count display up to a predetermined value is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and at least one of a plurality of effect modes prepared as candidates for the effect corresponding to the count display. It is possible to execute a timer effect that causes one to appear as a timer target effect. In this regard, the timer effect according to the present application is a series including the effect of the timer target (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.). The timer-compatible effect of is started before the count display reaches a predetermined value, and can be ended after the count display reaches a predetermined value (progress effect leading to the timer target effect).

That is, in this case, since a series of timer-compatible effects corresponding to the timer effects are executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is preferable to enjoy the game until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Will be able to maintain.

FIG. 195 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the progress effect leading to the timer target effect.

As shown in FIG. 195, the timer effect is currently executed for a specific timer type within the fluctuation period of the symbol, and the count value of the count display is up to the first specific value (here, the count "6"). Assuming that progress has been made, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the progress effect (corresponding to a series of timers) that leads to the effect content of the timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"). Production) is started.

Here, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 195, a cut-in by a ally character is performed as a timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”). The display image SEG3-1 to be performed is displayed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this explanation example, the cut-in by the ally character is performed during the period during the count digestion before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"). The process leading to the situation is displayed as a staging image (progressive staging that leads to the staging content of the timer target staging).

For example, in this explanatory example, the count value of the count display is the first specific value (here, the count "6") before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, the count "0"). When it becomes, as an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG1 depicting a person who asks for help from a ally character is displayed.

Next, when the count value of the count display becomes the second specific value (here, the count "3") before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, the count "0"). As an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG2 depicting a state in which a ally character confronts an enemy character by accepting a request from a person seeking help is displayed.

That is, by sequentially making such display images SEG1 and SEG2 appear while the count display is advanced toward the predetermined value, when the count display is further advanced and reaches the predetermined value, the cut-in by the ally character (here, here). , The display image SEG3-1 in which the ally character wears an aura to defeat the enemy character) can be expected to be displayed, which makes it possible to enjoy the game while the count display is being executed. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease of.

However, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, even if the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count “3”) appears, it is cut by the ally character when the count display reaches a predetermined value. There is also an effect pattern in which the display image SEG3-2, which depicts the appearance of the ally character escaping in front of the enemy, is displayed instead of the display image SEG3-1 where the inn is performed. According to such a configuration, the count display has a predetermined value while it is possible to give an eye to which effect appears as the target of the timer effect in the period before the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since it is not possible to specify the effect mode that appears when the value reaches, it becomes possible to suitably maintain this for the game entertainment after the count display reaches a predetermined value. The display image SEG3-2 does not necessarily have to be prepared, and the display image SEG3-1 may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count “6”) appears, or after the display corresponding to the second specific value (here, count “3”) appears. After the image SEG2 appears, an effect pattern is prepared in which the count display does not progress any further and is terminated halfway before reaching a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, while such an effect progress that appears before reaching a predetermined value is performed, the progress of the count display with the risk that the timer effect ends halfway without the timer target effect appearing. You will be able to enjoy. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prepare an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated halfway, and the count display may always reach a predetermined value so that the effect of the timer target appears.

Further, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in is performed by the ally character, as well as the display image SEG3-1. Although the illustration is omitted, it is displayed as an effect image that is connected to a different display image (for example, a cut-in by a different character) prepared as a timer target effect. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 204 (C) to (F) and 205 (G) to (I) described later, one of the three ally characters shown in FIG. 204 (D) seeks help. The request from the person is accepted, and the accepted ally character confronts the enemy character and performs a cut-in effect.

Therefore, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is displayed, the second specific value (here, the count “3”) is displayed. As a display image corresponding to)), a display image different from the display image SEG2 may be displayed instead of the display image SEG2, and when the other display image is displayed, the display image is displayed when a predetermined value is reached. The production progress is made so as to connect to a display image different from SEG3-1 (for example, a cut-in by a different character). The display image SEG1 may be executed as an effect that is always connected to the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in by the ally character is performed.

It is desirable to decide which route to advance the effect while the count display is being executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the fluctuation pattern when the symbol is changed. When an effect pattern in which the timer target effect is not executed appears, the rate at which the symbol fluctuation is stopped in the jackpot symbol is lower than when the timer target effect is executed after reaching a predetermined value. By preparing it, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the timer effect itself.

Further, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count "6") appears, the count is counted until the count display becomes the second specific value (here, the count "3"). The display may be hidden. For example, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, when the count "6" is displayed, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the count "6" is displayed for the time when the counts "5" to "4" are digested. The count display is hidden while the display image SEG1 is displayed. After that, the count display is displayed at the timing when the count number becomes "3", and the display image SEG2 corresponding to the count "3" is displayed for the time when the counts "2" to "1" are digested. The count display is hidden while the display image SEG2 is displayed. After that, if the count display is displayed at the timing when the count number becomes "0" and the display image SEG3-1 (timer target effect) corresponding to the count "0" is executed, it is predetermined. You will be able to enjoy the progress of the production corresponding to the number of counts without worrying about the count digestion toward the value.

The display image SEG1, the display image SEG2, the display image SEG3-1 and the like may be displayed as a still image or may be displayed as a moving image that takes a predetermined time. When displaying as a still image, a plurality of still images may be sequentially displayed within a predetermined time corresponding to a specific count value (first specific value or second specific value).

Further, the time when the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value is displayed, the time when the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value is displayed, and the display image SEG3-1 corresponding to the predetermined value are displayed. For times, it is desirable to have them set as different times from each other.

Further, in this embodiment, as a progress effect leading to the timer target effect, a plurality of types of progress effects connected to any of a plurality of types of timer target effects are prepared, but a specific timer target effect appears. Only occasionally, it may be possible to execute a progress effect that leads to the specific timer target effect before the count display reaches a predetermined value.

Further, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the progress effect leading to the timer target effect is executed from the time when the count number is "6", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining count is a relatively small first specific count number (for example, "3") and when the remaining count is relatively large (for example, "6"). When the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect is made executable, and the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed when the remaining count is a relatively large second specific count number (for example, "6"). If the jackpot expectation is relatively high, the production will be progressed more while the number of continuous counts is large as if the jackpot expectation is high, so the game entertainment is more suitable. Will be able to maintain.

[Operation effect in timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the count display up to a predetermined value is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and the count target effect targeted for the count display can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, it is possible to set a period during which the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be received during the execution of the count display, and the operation means (for example, the operation button) can be set within the period. When the operation for 410) is performed, any of a plurality of operation-time effect modes having a different ratio of appearance of a highly-expected effect mode (for example, cut-in B) as a count target effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value. To generate. In addition, as the period for which the effect can be accepted, the first period from the time when the count display is the first count value to the time when the count display is the second count value, and the third count value where the count display is counted after the above second count value. The second period from the time of to the time of the fourth count value is prepared as at least a settable period. Then, during the symbol production period in which it is determined that a highly expected effect mode (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count target effect, the count display is the second from the first count value. When the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed and the effect is received while the count value is in the first period, and when the count display is the third count value, it is the fourth. In the case where the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed and the effect is received during the second period up to the count value, as a result of the effect reception, a specific operation effect is performed. The rate at which the mode (for example, a mode suggesting that a specific effect with a high degree of expectation appears as a timer target effect is high) is different (operation effect in the timer).

That is, in this case, even if it is determined that a highly expected effect (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count-compatible effect, the count display is from the first count value to the second count value. Specific depending on whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated or the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated from the time when the count display is the third count value to the time when the count display is the fourth count value. Since the easiness of occurrence of the effect mode at the time of operation is different, whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated from the time when the count display is the first count value to the time when the count display is the second count value is the count display. Should the operating means (eg, operation button 410) be operated from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value, or should the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) be operated by both of them? It will be possible to make the game strategy such as this interesting.

For example, if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period in which a specific operation mode is likely to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation mode does not appear can be suppressed. Even if this appears as much as the specific operation mode is likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that a highly expected effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count target effect. On the other hand, if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period in which the specific operation mode is unlikely to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation mode does not appear is high. When the specific operation mode is less likely to occur, it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that a highly expected effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count-compatible effect.

Then, until the count display reaches a predetermined value for these two periods with different personalities (from the time of the first count value to the time of the second count value and from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value). Since it can appear between these two periods, it is interesting to know how to operate the operation means (for example, cut-in B) for these two periods, and the game entertainment during the count digestion is maintained. Will be expected.

FIG. 196 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the operation effect in a timer performed when a specific variation number (SP reach without a timer) is selected in a situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 162), the following processing related to the operation effect in the timer is performed. It is designed to run. However, considering that the operation effect in the timer functions as "an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a specific effect appears as a timer target effect", the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). Instead of performing the following processing related to the in-timer operation effect when it is done, the following processing related to the in-timer operation effect is performed even when the timer type in which another effect mode appears instead of cut-in B is determined as the timer target effect. Run. When the timer type in which the effect having a lower expectation than the cut-in B appears as the timer target effect is determined, the effect is compared with the case where the timer type in which the cut-in B appears as the timer target effect is determined. The rate at which a specific operation mode is generated when the reception is made is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a), assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a has selected the timer type as the next process. A determination process is performed as to which of a plurality of effect modes (“cut-in B2-11” and “cut-in B2-12”) including the mode of the operation effect in the timer is executed for the “cut-in B2”. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 196 (a), in the embodiment of "cut-in B2-11", 40 seconds are displayed after a count display having a count value of "40" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the symbol fluctuation. When a predetermined value (here, "0") is reached and the count display is hidden, the "cut-in B (cut B notice)" which is the target of the timer is executed.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-12", a predetermined value (as well) when 40 seconds have passed after a count display having a count value of "40" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the symbol change. Here, "cut-in B (cut B notice)", which is the target of the timer, is executed when the count display is hidden after reaching "0"). However, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-12", it is the same as the first period from the time when the count value of the count display is "35 (first count value)" to "25 (second count value)". Regarding the operation effect in the timer when there is an operation for the operation button 410) in the second period from when the count value is "15 (third count value)" to when it is "5 (fourth count value)". The production reception is made, and a display suggesting that the production reception is in an acceptable state appears. In addition to the method of displaying a specific display image, the display suggesting that the staging reception is permitted is "25 (second count value)" from the time of "35 (first count value)". By changing the display mode (size, shape, color, etc.) of the count value from the time of "15 (third count value)" to the time of "5 (fourth count value)". Is also feasible.

That is, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-12", either the first period (count value is "35" to "25") or the second period (count value is "15" to "5"). If the operation button 410 is operated within the period, the effect reception as the operation effect in the timer is performed, and the rate at which the specific effect with high expectation appears as the count target effect differs depending on the effect reception. Generate one of a plurality of operation mode. As for the plurality of operation mode, for example, it is possible to adopt a mode in which a predetermined lamp is lit in either blue or red (a specific operation mode), and the mode in which the predetermined lamp is lit in blue is possible. When it appears, the rate at which a specific effect with high expectations appears as a count target effect is the lowest, and when a mode that lights up in red (a specific operation mode) appears, a specific effect with high expectations appears as a count target effect. Can be set to be the highest.

FIG. 196 (b) determines which effect mode should appear as the operation mode depending on whether the effect is received during the first period or the effect is received during the second period. It is a figure which shows an example of the table (table T16) which is referred to at the time of this.

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as an operation-time effect mode, a mode in which a predetermined lamp is turned on in either blue or red (a specific operation-time effect mode) is prepared.

In this regard, in the table T16 shown in FIG. 196 (b), in the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which "cut-in B" appears as the timer target effect, when the effect is received during the first period, "cut-in B2-12" is received. Blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "30/100", and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "70/100". Then, blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "70/100", and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "30/100". Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, the effect risk that the red color (high expectation mode) does not appear can be suppressed, but the red color (high expectation mode) is likely to occur. Even if this appears for a minute, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that a highly expected effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count target effect. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, the effect risk that the red color (high expectation mode) does not appear is high, but the red color (high expectation mode) is less likely to occur. However, when this appears, it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as an effect to be counted.

That is, although the illustration is omitted, in the production pattern in which the production mode with a lower expectation than "cut-in B" appears as the timer target production, for example, when the production is accepted during the first period, "50/100". Blue (low expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of "", and red (high expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of "50/100". Blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "90/100", and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "10/100". Therefore, when red color (high expectation mode) appears in the second period, it is possible to have an expectation that the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which "cut-in B" appears as the timer target effect is selected. become.

In this embodiment, when a specific timer type is determined, two periods, a first period and a second period, are generated within the fluctuation time, but the result and variation of the jackpot determination At least one of the first period and the second period may be generated based on the pattern type, the timer type, and the like. For example, if only the first period occurs, the risk that red (highly expected mode) does not appear when the production is accepted can be suppressed, but the degree of expectation when red (highly expected mode) appears is also so high. The operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that it does not become high, and when only the second period occurs, there is a high risk that the red color (high expectation mode) does not appear when the production reception is done. However, the operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that the degree of expectation becomes high when the red color (high expectation mode) appears. That is, in this case, depending on the preference of the player, even if he / she wants to operate on the first period side, the operation opportunity is given only on the second period side, or even if he / she wants to operate on the second period side. Since the operation opportunity is given only on the one period side, the count display is executed by causing a conflict as to whether or not to operate within the period on the side that is not preferred while the count is digested. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment while being played.

Further, in the first period and the second period, the display indicating that the staging reception is permitted may not always be performed. That is, in this case, it is counted in a state where it is unclear whether the production reception is permitted in the first period or the second period, or whether the production reception is permitted in either the first period or the second period. Since the display is advanced, it becomes possible to make the timer effect more interesting, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the count display is executed.

Further, for the first period and the second period, it is desirable to set the same length of time for which the staging reception is allowed in those periods. According to such a configuration, the staging reception is allowed for the same time in both the first period and the second period, so that the count value is a specific number of minutes (here, "10"). ) Can be provided as a "thinking time for performing an operation", and it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest during the period when the count display is executed through the addition of such a staging element. It will be like.

Further, in the first period and the second period, it is possible to receive the operation by the player multiple times, and the production mode changes (for example, blue → green → red) through the multiple receptions of the production. The more the effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) appears as the effect to be counted, the higher the ratio may be. However, in this case, even if the effect reception is performed a plurality of times, the ease of appearance of the finally appearing effect mode is set to be different between the first period and the second period.

[Timer concealment effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the count display up to a predetermined value is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and the timer target effect corresponding to the count display can be executed. In this respect, in the present invention, during the execution of the count display, the count front effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display.

That is, in this case, while the count display is in a situation where the count target effect is executed when the count display reaches the predetermined value, the count display is counted by the decorative body in a form that makes it difficult to see the count display until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since the forward effect will be performed, the count value by the count display can only be grasped in a discrete manner, and the remaining time until the count target effect is executed is only for a short time (during the count forward effect by the decoration). It becomes difficult to grasp and the interest in the count display can be increased.

In addition, instead of making the count display difficult to see, the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear through the counting front staging by the decorative body is raised, so that the count display is made difficult to see, which reduces the interest in the game. Will be expected to suppress this.

FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer concealment effect performed when a specific variation number is selected in the second processing situation.

In the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), first, a count display having a count number of "30" is started at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol fluctuation. After the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect that is the timer target appears. However, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count front effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count display.

Here, as the count front effect by such a decorative body, for example, in the example of FIGS. 206 (B) and 206 (C) described later, the movable body KT for effect is moved to the front of the count display for a predetermined time. It can be realized as a count number erosion effect that positions this over. The decorative body does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable body, and may be any one that makes the count display relatively difficult to visually recognize during the production as compared with the non-production.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed as an effect state (a state in which the count display is difficult to see) until the count value becomes "10". In the staging state, the ease of appearance of a specific staging with high expectation as a timer target staging is suggested by the operation mode or the light emitting mode of the decorative body.

Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the count front effect by the decorative body is completed, the count value changes from "10" to "0" under a state in which the count display is easily visible. It will progress, and after that, one of a plurality of production modes will appear as the timer target production.

On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), first, a count having a count number of "30" is obtained at the timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol change. The display is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect that is the timer target appears. Further, the point that the count front effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display during the execution of the count display is the same as the case of the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a).

However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished in a relatively short time, and when the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished. The count value progresses from "15" to "0" under a state in which the count display is easily visible, and then one of a plurality of effect modes appears as the timer target effect.

On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), first, a count display having a count number of "25" is displayed at the timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol fluctuation. After the start and the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect that is the timer target appears. The point that the count front effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display during the execution of the count display is the same as the case of the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b).

However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), the count forward effect by the decorative body is generated and ended at a relatively early stage, and when the count forward effect by the decorative body is completed. The count value progresses from "20" to "0" under a state in which the count display is easily visible, and then one of a plurality of effect modes appears as the timer target effect.

By the way, in the timer effect, as described above, the larger the count value when the count display is started, the higher the rate at which the effect target with high expectation appears as the timer target effect. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the count front effect by the decorative body occurs, the count value at the time when the count display is started is not used as a reference, but the count front effect ends and is visually recognized. It is set so that the larger the count value when it is made easier, the higher the rate at which the effect target with high expectation appears as the timer target effect. The ratio may include 100%.

For example, in the above-mentioned production example of FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), the count value at the time when the count display is started is "30" in any of the production patterns, but the count value is the same as that of FIG. 197 (a). In the production example of FIG. 197 (b), the count value when the count front effect ends and is easy to see is "10", whereas in the effect example of FIG. 197 (b), when the count front effect ends and it is easy to see. Since the count value of is "15", the effect example of FIG. 197 (b) has a higher rate of appearance of an effect with a high degree of expectation as a timer target effect.

According to such a configuration, if the count forward effect occurs during the execution of the count display, the effect value as the size of the count number that appeared at the start of the count is damaged, and the count number when the count forward effect ends. Since the size of the game is refocused, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the execution of the count display.

For example, in the above-mentioned effect example of FIG. 197 (c), a relatively small count value “25” is displayed at the start of counting, but when the count forward effect ends, it is relatively large at the end of the effect. The count value "20" is displayed, and the rate at which a highly expected effect appears as a timer target effect is higher than that of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b). There is.

That is, in this case, if a count forward effect occurs, there is a possibility that an effect with a high degree of expectation will appear as a timer target effect more than when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting. Therefore, it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting.

However, when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting, a relatively large count is also displayed at the end of the counting forward effect when a counting forward effect occurs after that, compared to the case where a relatively small counting value is displayed at the start of counting. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the value appears is high.

Further, in the effect example of FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (b) described above, since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start of the count display to the occurrence of the count forward effect, the count display is executed. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment by being aware of the possibility that the count forward production may occur for a long period of time.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example of FIGS. 197 (a) to 197, since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start to the end of the count front effect, the count front effect is started. At that point, it becomes difficult to predict the count value at the end, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the count forward staging is completed.

It should be noted that the count forward effect appears not only during the execution of the count display but also during the period before the count display is executed, for example, during the execution of the timer look-ahead effect in which the rate at which the timer effect appears increases when the count display appears. You may do it. However, in view of the configuration according to the present application in which the count progress is made difficult to visually recognize by making the count progress appear during the execution of the count display and the aim is to be interesting as the effect, the count display is more than before the start. , It is desirable that the count forward effect is executed at a higher rate after the count display is counted. Further, if the count forward effect is executed while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed during the period within one symbol variation, the count display is not yet started when the count forward effect ends, and the timer look-ahead effect is performed. When is in the executed state, the rate at which a highly expected effect appears as the timer target effect is higher than when the count display is executed when the count forward effect ends. It is desirable to set it as such.

If the count forward effect is to be executed while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed, the timer look-ahead effect and the count display are displayed at different positions, and then the timer look-ahead effect is displayed. While the timer is being executed, the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer look-ahead effect, and while the count display is being executed, the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer look-ahead effect. It is desirable to execute. That is, in this case, the decoration body moves to a different position depending on whether the timer look-ahead effect is being executed or the count display is being executed, but the decoration body is on the front side of the timer look-ahead effect. When the timer look-ahead effect ends when is in the position, the count display starts at a position different from the timer look-ahead effect, which has been difficult to see until now. According to such a configuration, when the count forward effect is generated while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed, the count display is started at the stage where the count forward effect is still being executed and this is not finished. Even so, since the count value of the count display can be made easy to see from the start, there is a possibility that the effect value as the size of the count number at the start of the count is damaged. You will be able to enjoy the count forward production while being excluded.

In addition, regarding the count forward effect, when the count display is in a relatively late stage where a certain amount of time has passed since the start of the count display, rather than in a relatively early stage where the time has not passed since the count display was started. It is desirable that the rate at which the count forward effect is executed is higher.

Also, if the count forward effect is executed in a situation where the remaining count (remaining time) until the timer target effect is executed is executed, the magnitude of the count value that appears when this is completed cannot be expected. In addition, since there is a concern that it may be confused with the timer target effect, the count forward effect is terminated before the remaining count number becomes less than the predetermined number, and the remaining count number is less than the predetermined number. In, it is desirable to prevent the count forward staging from being newly executed.

Further, regarding the count front effect, when a plurality of count displays are being executed, the decorative body may be positioned on the front side of the count displays.

Of the timer effects, a type of timer that causes a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) or a predetermined effect movable body (timer target first-out effect) to appear when a specific count value is reached. When the staging is performed, it is possible to substantially expose the current count value by those related staging, even while the staging forward staging by the decoration is being performed, so that the count display is visible. It will be possible to predict how much count progress has been made since it was made difficult. However, instead of performing the count front effect by the decorative body only on the front side of the count value, a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) when a specific count value is reached). After the count display is made difficult to see, the count front effect is performed so that the decorative body is located in front of the position where the predetermined effect movable body (timer target first-out effect) appears. It may be difficult to predict how much count progress has been made.

The decorative body to be produced on the front side of the count display is not limited to one, and the count front effect may be performed so that all of a plurality of decorative bodies are located on the front side of the count display. In this case, any one of a plurality of embodiments, such as an embodiment in which the plurality of ornaments are all located on the front side of the count display, and an embodiment in which only one of the plurality of ornaments is located on the front side of the count display. The count forward effect may be selectively executed with.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 198 to 207, various aspects of the above-mentioned timer effect itself and various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail. Here, the processing example related to each of the above-mentioned effects is merely an example, and for example, an effect other than the above-mentioned types may be executed as the content of the effect, and the appearance timing and appearance conditions of each effect may be executed. Etc. may be changed as appropriate within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, in the production example described below, there may be a production that does not match the production content related to each of the above productions, but it is within the scope of the same technical idea and within the range that can be implemented by a person skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are only changed appropriately in. Further, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed by the advance notice side timer effect or the variable side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning to include a timer look-ahead effect. Further, as the mode of the "count display", the "number of seconds" is counted below, but the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 198 (A) shows an effect situation in which a variable display (for example, SP reach) of a decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holdings is 0 in a normal game state. ing. In addition, in FIGS. 198 and 199, for convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY for staging, which has been omitted, is shown in the drawings. In addition, the specific decorative member SDY may be, for example, "back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc." It is equivalent to "moving member of" etc.

In FIG. 198 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “70” during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. It shows the production status to be started.

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 198 (B), when the timer effect (count number) is displayed and the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value, the target of the timer effect. Candidates for the effect type that can appear as are displayed, and while it is unclear which of those candidates will appear as the effect of the timer target while the count display is executed, one of the candidates is the timer target. It is possible to recognize that it appears as a production. In addition, "conversation" in the figure corresponds to a conversation notice, "hold" in the figure corresponds to a hold change, and "cut A" in the figure corresponds to cut-in A. The "role A" in the figure corresponds to the operation of the character A, the "secret" in the figure corresponds to the special timer, and the "cut B" in the figure corresponds to the cut-in B. The "role B" in the figure corresponds to the operation of the accessory B.

FIG. 198 (C) shows an effect situation in which the above-mentioned timer target exclusion effect is executed when the count number shown in FIG. 198 (B) becomes “60”.

As described above, the timer target exclusion effect is an effect mode that is not selected as a timer target (timer target in the timer target notice lottery) while it is unclear which effect mode the timer target effect is. It is possible to make a display suggesting at least one (or two or more may be suggested) of the effect mode (which was not determined as).

Here, as described above, in the timer effect, each timing (in this example, in this example) is usually prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) and the effect of the timer target can appear. As 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, etc. pass from the start of fluctuation, the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are also narrowed down. Therefore, in the effect example of FIG. 198 (C), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is set to a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates for the timing at which the timer target effect can appear. , 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.) will be set according to the arrival.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (B), an effect pattern for displaying the timer effect with a count number of "70" is described. However, at this timing, the timer effect does not have a count number of "70", but has another count number such as "10", "20", "30", "40", or "50". It is also possible to generate an effect pattern to be displayed. Assuming that a timer effect having a count number of "10" appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the count display of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 198 (C). A predetermined value (here, "0") will be reached at the same timing, and for example, a "conversation notice" will appear as an effect for the timer target. On the other hand, if a timer effect having a count number other than "10" appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), it is assumed that the "conversation notice" will not appear as the timer target effect. When the count number is left at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (C) and the count number has passed, the "conversation notice" is substantially excluded from the types of effects that can appear as the timer target, and the timer target It can be said that the candidates that can appear as a production have been narrowed down. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (C), since the count display is being executed with the count number of "60" left, at this timing, the effect candidates targeted for the timer are substantially selected. It is desirable to perform an effect (timer target exclusion effect) that suggests which effect type (conversation notice) is excluded from. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately express the staging situation in which the player is placed.

However, in the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C), it is suggested that the "special timer" is not selected as the timer target effect instead of the "conversation notice" at this timing. There is. According to such a timer target exclusion effect, it becomes clear in the middle of counting that the "effect indicating that the jackpot is confirmed when it appears" is not selected as the timer target effect. It will be possible to arouse anxiety about whether a highly anticipated production will appear as a timer target.

In the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, among the display images displaying the candidates for the timer effect target effect, the display image (secret) corresponding to the "special timer" is locked. By displaying the padlock in the state in an overlapping manner and displaying "Lock !!", it is suggested that the "special timer" is not selected as the effect of the timer target.

FIG. 198 (D) shows an effect situation in which the timer mode effect is executed when the count display reaches a specific count value after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). There is.

As described above, the timer mode effect is the expected degree as an effect for the timer when the count display reaches the predetermined value within the period before the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, "0"). Hell timer mode (1st timer mode display) where the rate of appearance of high production mode (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) is relatively low, and timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value. As the effect of the above, one of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of the effect mode with high expectation is relatively high is displayed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), first, the heaven challenge effect of whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed is performed while the count digestion is in progress, and the heaven challenge effect appears. At that point, it will be shown that either the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode will always occur.

In the heaven challenge production, whether there is a high possibility of shifting to the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode (for example, the devil and the angel are pushing each other, which is the dominant situation. In this case, it is suggested whether the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode occurs after such an effect.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), since the heaven challenge effect is executed under the effect type excluded in the timer target exclusion effect, which effect type is selected in the timer target exclusion effect. Depending on whether it is excluded (whether the production type with low expectation is excluded or the production type with high expectation is excluded), is it in a situation where the hell timer mode is likely to occur, or is it heaven? It can be said that the staging situation is such that it is possible to predict with a certain degree of accuracy whether or not the timer mode is likely to occur.

In FIG. 198 (E), the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is displayed as the result of succeeding in the heaven challenge production shown in FIG. 198 (D) (for example, the result of the angel winning the push against the devil). It shows the production status being performed.

In this effect situation, it is shown that when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) has a relatively high rate of appearance of the effect mode with high expectation as the effect of the timer target. Is done. Therefore, if the timer target exclusion effect is performed while in the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), the result is advantageous for the player (here, the low-expected effect among the plurality of effect types is the timer target effect. It becomes possible to raise the expectation when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, the timer target exclusion effect is executed under the appearance of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) as a result of the failure of the heaven challenge effect shown in FIG. 198 (D). In this case, the ratio of suggesting a disadvantageous result for the player (here, the highly expected effect is not selected as the timer target effect among the multiple effect types) is high, so the timer target is excluded. You will be able to arouse the feeling of anxiety when the production occurs.

In the example of FIG. 198 (E), the transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is not expressed as the mode of the count display, but the mode of the changing decorative symbol SZ or related thereto. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) has been entered without overlooking other effects during the digestion of the remaining count. Further, in this case, the current timer mode can be easily confirmed even when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

FIG. 198 (F) shows the second to fourth times after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C), while the heaven timer mode generated in FIG. 198 (E) is displayed. Indicates the effect status in which the fifth timer target exclusion effect is executed when the timer target exclusion effect is executed and the count display becomes “20”.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), five of the seven types of effects prepared as the effect candidates for the timer target are locked and displayed by the timer target exclusion effect (five types of effects). Is in a state where it is shown that is not a timer target), so when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the remaining two types of effects (hold change, accessory B operation) occurs. It can be said that it is in a recognizable state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), since the heaven timer mode is displayed, the remaining two types of production candidates (pending change,) are compared with the case where the heaven timer mode is not displayed. The ratio of the effect on the side with a high degree of expectation is high in the accessory B operation), and the expectation until the count display reaches a predetermined value can be suitably maintained.

At this time, the display of the heaven timer mode may be hidden after the appearance of the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F) and before the appearance of the timer target effect. According to such a configuration, if it is not remembered that the heaven timer mode was displayed, it becomes unclear which of the remaining production candidates has a high occurrence rate, and it is counted as a compensation for not concentrating on the production. It becomes possible to give a feeling of tension until the display reaches a predetermined value.

In FIG. 199 (G), after the appearance of the fifth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F), the count display becomes a predetermined value and before the timing when the timer target effect appears. By making an effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY as the accessory B) appear within the period, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY (character B) is targeted for the timer. It shows the effect status in which the timer target first-out effect is being executed.

That is, in this case, since the timer target first-out effect is executed while the display related to the timer target exclusion effect appears, there is a possibility that any of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect will appear as the timer target effect. It will be possible to provide further information on whether or not the timer is high.

In this example, since the "feature B intermediate operation (small)" is executed as the timer target first-out effect, the effect candidates (pending change, character B operation) narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect are specified. It can be recognized that there is a high possibility (may be 100%) that the "feature B operation", which is an effect using the decorative member SDY (accessory B), is executed as the effect of the timer target. It will be like. As described above, the "feature B intermediate movement (small)" means that the "feature B movement", which is the effect of the timer target, is "the specific decorative member SDY (feature B) from the first position to the second position." When it is "displaced", it means "an effect in which the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) is displaced from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position".

However, in this explanatory example, as the content of the effect related to the "role B operation", the first effect with a relatively low expectation is that the specific decorative member SDY (character B) is simply displaced from the first position to the second position. In addition to the contents, the second position with relatively high expectation is that the specific decorative member SDY (role B) is displaced from the first position to the second position and the accessory A is displaced from the third position to the fourth position. The production contents are prepared, and the production related to the "character B operation" is executed by any of the production contents.

In this respect, in the heaven timer mode according to this explanation example, compared to the case where the hell timer mode appears, when "role B operation" is selected as the effect of the timer target, the effect content is relatively high. The ratio of high second effect contents to appear is increased, so that even if the effect type that appears as the timer target effect is completely narrowed down by the timer target first-out effect, the heaven timer mode is concerned. It has come to play a useful function for the player as a player.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (G), when the timer target first-out effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY (role B)) is executed, the specific decorative member is being counted and digested. It is designed to be used for the timer target first-out effect in a form that overlaps with the count display of, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display. That is, in this case, when such a timer target first-out effect is executed while not paying much attention to the count display, the specific decorative member SDY (role B) used in the timer target effect is put into the state in which the effect is being executed. Coupled with this, it is easy to misunderstand that the timer target effect is being executed after the count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, instead of the timer target first-out effect during count digestion. It will be created. Therefore, when it was recognized that the effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) was not the timer target effect but the timer target first-out effect, the specific decorative member SDY (role B) was used as the timer target first-out effect. After that, even if no display related to the timer target first-out effect is performed until the count display reaches a predetermined value, the specific decorative member SDY (role) is used as the timer target first-out effect. It is expected that the timer target effect will be generated based on the recognition that B) has been used. When the timer target first-out effect is executed, the count display may not be difficult to see, but may be hidden until the timer target first-out effect is completed.

FIG. 199 (H) shows a specific count value (here, “here,“ 0 ”) in which the count display is before a predetermined value (here,“ 0 ”) after the timer target first-out effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is executed. A timer that suppresses the production according to the prize, even though a new prize is generated after reaching 3 ”) and it is decided to execute the production (pending change) according to the prize. It shows the production status in which the target suppression control is executed.

That is, as described above, in particular, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (H), it is extremely unlikely that "pending change" is selected as the timer target effect by the timer mode effect or the timer target first-out effect. No, since "holding change" is still left as an effect candidate for the timer target, there may be a case where a holding change corresponding to a new prize occurs near the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Then, the pending change may be mistakenly recognized as the effect of the timer target, and as a result, the effect of the timer target itself may be overlooked. When the "hold change" is executed as the effect of the timer target, it is executed for the "hold 0" in the figure, so it is relatively easy to distinguish whether the effect is the timer target. However, it is highly possible that these pending changes will be misunderstood in a situation where the number of remaining counts is low.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the first period (here, the count number is relatively long) until the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value is relatively long. When there is a remaining "3"), a pending change is allowed according to the occurrence of a new prize, but the remaining time until the first period ends and the count display reaches a predetermined value. When the second period (here, the period after the count number becomes "3" remaining) is reached, even if a new prize is generated, the pending change corresponding to it is not allowed. By doing so, the above-mentioned concern is resolved (timer target suppression control).

In FIG. 199 (I), the timer-related count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) while the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is being executed. After the display (here, "Yukuzo") is displayed, it shows the effect status in which the effect (feature B operation) that is the effect target of the timer effect is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the operation of the character B, which is the effect of the timer target, is compared with the first effect content, which has a relatively low expectation, under the condition that the mode is shown to be in the heaven timer mode. It shows how it is being executed as the second production content with high expectations. However, here, as is clear from the fact that the accessory B corresponds to the specific decorative member SDY and the accessory A corresponds to the specific decorative member TGY, it is used for the effect when it is the second effect content. The specific decorative member TGY to be performed is a position located on the back side in front view from the specific decorative member SDY used for both the first effect content and the second effect content, and most of them (at least). It is intended to be produced at the position where (more than half the area) overlaps.

According to such a configuration, which of the first effect content with a relatively low expectation and the second effect content with a relatively high expectation is executed (whether or not the specific decorative member TGY is in the effect state). ) Can be made difficult to judge, which encourages concentration on the effect of the timer target. In order to obtain such an action and effect, the content of the second effect may be any as long as it can be produced on the back side of the specific decorative member SDY (role B), and in this sense, the specific decoration. Instead of a composite effect of the member SDY (role B) and the specific decorative member TGY (character A), the specific display effect on the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the specific decorative member TGY (character A) to display the specific display. It may be executed as a composite effect of the effect and the specific decorative member SDY (role B).

In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is continuously executed, and even if a new prize is generated, a pending change is generated accordingly. Nothing is done, and the hold display that won the prize in FIG. 199 (H) is kept unchanged.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), of the "pending change" and the "feature B operation" left as the effect candidates for the timer target, the "feature B operation" is executed as the timer target effect. A display that can be recognized as being displayed (“role B” in the figure blinks) is displayed, and a display that can be recognized that the “holding change” is not the effect of the timer target (“role B” in the figure) is displayed. "Hold" is marked with a cross).

FIG. 199 (J) shows the effect status when the timer target suppression control is not executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect of the timer target was executed in FIG. 199 (I).

That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect of the timer target is executed, there is no concern that this is misidentified as the effect of the timer target even if the "hold change" is executed. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 199 (J), the hold display in which the execution was carried over although it was decided to change the hold according to the winning at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (H) is targeted. This is put on hold at the timing shown in (J). As a result, even if a new prize that is the target of the hold change occurs near the timing when the effect of the timer target is executed, the hold change is properly set while clearly indicating that the effect is not the effect of the timer target. You will be able to do it.

In the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (J), the hold display different from the changing hold display (hold 0) is targeted and changed to blue. However, in view of the above-mentioned special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the jackpot hold (including hold 0) is included, such a blue hold display has appeared. Since it is clearly shown that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears in the fluctuation is higher than when the red hold display appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), which effect type is excluded by the timer target exclusion effect even though a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer target effect was executed. And, the display indicating which effect was the timer target is continuously executed. In addition, the display suggesting that the user is in the heaven timer mode is being continuously executed. However, the display suggesting that the mode is in the heaven timer mode is such that the decorative symbol SZ is displayed in a reduced size in the reach display mode, and is also displayed in a smaller size.

Then, in this explanatory example, each display that is continuously executed even in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (J) is continuously executed even in the situation where the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 199 (FIG. 199). K)). According to such a configuration, for example, even in a state where the symbol is stopped (a state in which a big hit symbol appears), the timer effect is executed in the effect process up to that point, or the effect targeted by the timer effect. It is possible to recognize that was the "feature B operation".

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. ..

FIG. 200A shows an effect situation in which the variation display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal game state with the number of holdings being 4. ing.

FIG. 200B shows an effect in which the timer target exclusion effect is executed even though the timer effect is not executed during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200 (A). It shows the situation.

In this timer target exclusion effect, it is shown that the "feature B operation" is not a candidate for the timer target, and when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the timer target candidate talks. It will be possible for the player to know that the player has been narrowed down to any of the notice, the hold change, the cut-in A, the character A operation, the special timer, and the cut-in B. That is, in this case, among a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation), the effect mode with a relatively high expectation is the timer target. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the player is out of the candidates, the player hopes that the timer effect does not occur within the fluctuation, and the timer effect (count display) is not executed. You will be able to stimulate the entertainment of the game when you are there.

Note that, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201 suggest various effects prepared as effect candidates for the timer target when performing the timer target exclusion effect. Is not executed, and a display indicating that at least the "feature B operation" is not selected as the effect of the timer target appears. Therefore, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this example, it is possible to grasp that the "feature B operation" is not the timer target effect, but it is unclear what other effect types are available as timer target effect candidates. The Rukoto.

In FIG. 200 (C), after the timer target exclusion effect is executed in FIG. 200 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of "15", and the count display (here, countdown) is started. It shows the production situation.

Here, in the timer target exclusion effect in this explanatory example, after displaying that at least "the accessory B operation" is not selected as the timer target effect (FIG. 200 (B)), the display is displayed as a timer effect (? It is designed to continuously display this without hiding it until the count display) is executed, and the timer effect (count display) is started when the display is displayed. In such a configuration, how much expectation is this timer effect from the time the count display is started (here, a timer effect in which the relatively high expectation "role B operation" is not executed)? Will be able to recognize.

In the example shown in FIGS. 200B and 200C, when a display suggesting that at least "role B operation" is not selected as the effect of the timer target appears and is continuously displayed. Although the mode of displaying them is different from time to time, it is not always necessary to make them different, and they may be the same.

FIG. 200 (D) shows the timer effect under the condition that the count display is hidden after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200 (C) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). It shows the production status in which the "conversation notice (first production mode)" prepared as a production candidate is being executed.

That is, in this case, from the player's side, it is recognized that the effect such as "may be a chance" as the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is executed as the effect target of the timer effect. Become. However, the "conversation notice" shown in FIG. 200 (D) is not executed as the effect mode of the timer effect, and as is clear from the next effect situation (FIG. 200 (E)), the conversation notice is given. When it is finished, the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200 (C) is redisplayed and further continued (revival timer effect).

That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is shown as if it was a timer target (count target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, and the first effect is performed. Since it is shown that the second effect mode different from the mode is the timer target, the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when the effect with a relatively low expectation appears, and this is hidden. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed after that, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be appropriately maintained.

FIG. 200 (E) redisplays the hidden count display after the "conversation notice" executed under the condition that the count display is hidden in FIG. 200 (D) ends. It shows the production status to continue this (revival timer production).

Here, in such a revival timer effect, the count digestion is secretly continued even while the count display is hidden (FIG. 200 (D)), and in the example of FIG. 200 (E), the count digestion is secretly continued. , The count display is redisplayed from the state where the count has been digested for the time that was hidden (here, 2 seconds). That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice" is completed, the count display is changed to a negative notation (here, "-2") and redisplayed, but "0" when it is hidden by this. Then, it became possible to express how the count digestion was not completed and this was continuously executed, and by extension, the "conversation notice" that appeared in FIG. 200 (D) was not the production for the timer. You will be able to recognize it.

In addition, in such a revival timer effect, "the count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed" are different counts. In order to make it more reliable to recognize that the same count is being digested instead of being digested, the count sound is "once" even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continuously execute the count display that appeared before being hidden and the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed.

In addition, when the count display is set to a negative notation (here, "-2") and executed, a display that can recognize how many counts remain (for example, "-2 (18 remaining)") is displayed. It is desirable to do so. In this case, when the count display reaches "-20 (remaining 0)" as a predetermined value (when a negative count is performed for 18 seconds from "-2"), this is hidden and the timer target effect is executed. Become so.

FIG. 200 (F) shows a production situation in which a heaven challenge effect (not shown) occurs while the count display shown in FIG. 200 (E) continues, and as a result, the mode shifts to the heaven timer mode. ..

With the appearance of such a timer mode effect (heaven challenge effect, heaven timer mode), it is clearer that the timer effect has not ended and is still continuing (the state where the count display is being executed). Will be able to recognize. In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display indicating that the user is in the heaven timer mode is not related to the decorative symbol SZ, but is in the display area. It is displayed as a stamp notation mode on the left side of.

FIG. 201 (G) shows another effect that has nothing to do with the timer effect while the count digestion is being executed after the display indicating that the state is in the heaven timer mode is displayed in FIG. 200 (F). It shows the production situation where "cannon chance production" occurred as a predetermined production).

That is, in this "cannon chance effect", an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until a predetermined value (here, -20) is reached, and the output related to the count display is set to a predetermined value (here, -20). ) Is not performed until, and when the "cannon chance production" is executed, one of the production modes in which the output is stopped at the middle stage is selectively displayed (count output stop control).

More specifically, in the "cannon chance production", after displaying the cannon image near the center in the display area, from the cannon image, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, and the right in the display area. An effect of selectively using an empty (unused) area among the area and the lower area as a bullet firing destination to fire a bullet (bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) shown in FIG. 201 (H)). Is supposed to be done. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), the area required for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect (FIG. 201 (H)) is another various effect (count display (upper left area)). It is all used by the reach fluctuation (upper right area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)), and the bullet firing effect (Fig. 201 (Fig. 201) There is no space for new output of H) (specific production situation). And if the bullet is fired while in such a specific production situation, the bullet firing destination The effect that is already in the output state (for example, the count display) may be damaged or destroyed by the fired bullet (a conflict occurs between the timer effect and the predetermined effect regarding the effect output. In addition, there may be concerns that the expectation for big hits may drop as a result.

Therefore, in this explanatory example, when the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, if there is a specific effect situation (the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G)) in which there is no space for the output, there is a case. Of the areas that can be used as bullet firing destinations (upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, lower area), the output related to the count display using the upper left area is a predetermined value ( Here, it is not performed until -20), and the output is stopped in the middle of the process (count output stop control).

FIG. 201 (H) shows an effect situation in which the bullet firing effect is executed when the output related to the count display is not performed until it reaches a predetermined value (here, −20) and the output is stopped in the middle stage.

In this way, when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the output related to the bullet firing effect is different from the case of the above-mentioned revival timer effect. The count display of the timer effect is not output again after the end. On the other hand, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of the fluctuation) is secretly timed, and this is the predetermined value (Fig.). When the value (-20)) when 35 seconds have passed since the count display was started at 200 (C) is reached, it is assumed that the timing for the output-stopped count display to reach the predetermined value has arrived, and the timer is targeted. I try to make the production appear.

FIG. 201 (I) shows a cut-in A (cut-in effect by a ally character) as a timer target effect after the timing at which the output-discontinued count display should have reached a predetermined value has arrived. Shows the production status in which is being executed. In relation to the revival timer effect, the cut-in A is executed as the "second effect mode".

According to such an effect progress, after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the output reaches a predetermined value if the count display is not stopped while maintaining the stopped state of the output related to the count display. When the timing that should have been reached arrives, the effect of the timer target will appear. That is, in this case, the timer effect that seemed to have been terminated halfway by the execution of the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) was secretly continued. Will be expected.

In the effect situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), for example, when the display related to the timer mode effect is not performed and there is a vacancy in the left area, the count display of the timer effect (upper left area) is displayed. The output is maintained, and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is output using the empty space (left area). That is, in this case, the timer effect count display and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) are simultaneously output, and the timer effect count display is displayed even after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is completed. , It will be continuously executed until it reaches a predetermined value (-20 in this case).

As described above, the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is to output the output using any one of the plurality of regions, but the bullet is fired to any of the regions. There is no change in the jackpot expectation indicated by the firing effect (predetermined effect), and they are the same.

Further, also in this explanatory example, the display showing which effect type is excluded in the timer target exclusion effect executed in FIG. 200 (B) and the heaven timer mode displayed in FIG. 200 (F) are related. As for the display, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped while they are continuously executed (FIG. 201 (J)).

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 201 and examples of the effect different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. ..

FIG. 202 (A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 202 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “3” during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 202 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. It shows the production status to be started.

In FIG. 202 (C), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 202 (B) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, It shows the effect status in which the effect (cut-in B) to be the effect target of the timer effect is executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (C), the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation. At this time, since the count display is also hidden, the timer effect is terminated by the appearance of "cut-in B", which is a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low expectation for the player. It comes to recognize that. However, in this effect example, the count display is redisplayed after the "cut-in B" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation. The effect of whether or not it is present (the second timer target effect) is further made to appear.

In FIG. 202 (D), whether or not to redisplay the count display while "cut-in B" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. Indicates the effect status in which the effect (second timer target effect) is being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), as an effect regarding whether or not to redisplay the count display (second timer target effect), an operation system effect in which the player is allowed to operate for a predetermined time is allowed. Is executed, and if the player operates within the predetermined time, the first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed, or the second indicating that the count display is not redisplayed. The production result (not shown) is designed to appear. Further, as an operation system effect in which the operation by the player is allowed for a predetermined time, in addition to displaying the operation instruction image SSG prompting the operation of the operation button 410, the first operation button 410 is operated. The operation expected image SKG, which suggests the ease (ratio) of appearance of the effect result, is displayed. The ratio may include 100%.

In the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG, the effect mode in which the first effect result is most likely to appear (the ally of the grandfather). Character) has appeared. Therefore, although the "cut-in B" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) has been executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation, the count display is redisplayed. It can be said that the situation is such that the player can be strongly aware that the timer effect will be continued. Moreover, in the timer plus effect according to this embodiment, the count value is larger than the count value displayed in the first count display (here, the count value "3" shown in FIG. 202 (B)). Since the count display is redisplayed in the form, it is expected that a more highly expected effect mode will appear as a timer target effect.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), "cut-in B (blue aura)" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. It was decided to execute an effect (second timer target effect) as to whether or not to redisplay the count display (without hiding the display), but the timer target effect (second timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) was determined. After hiding "cut-in B (blue aura)" as the timer target effect of 1), the effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display (second timer target effect) is executed. May be good. However, in this case, the effect of switching from the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) to the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display (second timer target effect). It is desirable for the player to recognize that the timer effect has not been terminated and is being continued (or may be continued).

In FIG. 202 (E), after the first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed in the operation system effect shown in FIG. 202 (D) appears, the timer effect is the count number of “5”. Is redisplayed with, and the second count display (here, countdown) is displayed to indicate the effect status. In the operation system production, in addition to the case where the operation by the player is accepted within the predetermined time, the same production result as the case where the operation by the player is not accepted within the predetermined time (first). The effect result, the second effect result) will appear after the end of the predetermined time.

In FIG. 202 (F), after the second count display shown in FIG. 202 (E) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, It shows the effect status in which the effect (cut-in B) to be the effect target of the timer effect is executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (F), the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (red aura) with a relatively high degree of expectation. That is, in this effect example, the target effect is executed as the same type of effect in the first count display and the redisplayed second count display, and in the second target effect, the first target effect is executed. I try to execute it in the form of changing (promoting) to a production mode with higher expectations. According to such a configuration, it is recognized that by executing the same type of effect as the timer target effect, it is executed as one timer effect in which the first count display and the second count display are connected. As the number of times the count display is redisplayed increases, the effect mode as the timer target effect is changed (promoted) to a mode with a higher degree of expectation, so that the timer target effect occurs. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment from the time when the count display is redisplayed instead of the time.

In FIG. 203 (G), while the “cut-in B (red aura)” as the timer target effect shown in FIG. 202 (F) is displayed, the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display is displayed. It shows the production status being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 203 (G), among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG, the first effect result is more likely to appear than the example shown in FIG. 202 (D). A production mode (a middle-aged ally character) with a low value has appeared. Therefore, in a situation where "cut-in B" as a timer target effect has been executed in a mode with relatively high expectations (red aura), the count display may not be displayed again. It can be said that the situation is to raise awareness. In this way, after the count display reaches a predetermined value, the effect (cut-in B) having a mode (red aura) relatively advantageous to the player is executed as the timer target effect. On the other hand, an effect (operation expected image SKG) having a mode (middle-aged ally character) relatively disadvantageous to the player is executed. Moreover, in such a timer plus effect, the more times the count redisplay is repeated on one side and the "cut-in B" changes to a mode advantageous to the player, the more relative to the player on the other side. Since the operation expected image SKG, which has a disadvantageous aspect, is more likely to appear and the rate of redisplaying is low, each time the count is redisplayed, the game interest is enhanced and a sense of tension is felt. It becomes possible to preferably impart both the maintenance and the maintenance of the above.

If, as a result of such an effect, the count display is not redisplayed, the timer effect ends at that point, and then the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 203 (H)).

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 203 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. ..

FIG. 204A shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 204 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “10” during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. It shows the production status to be started.

Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required for counting digestion, the higher the proportion of the effect with high expectation as the timer target effect, so that such a small count number (here, here). If a count display that has only "10") is displayed, there is a concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, in this effect example, while executing the count display, an effect of hiding the count value for a predetermined time is generated, and the progress speed of the count is stagnated for that time, so that the count can be digested. It is possible to execute a timer stagnation effect that maintains a sense of expectation by extending the required time.

In FIGS. 204 (C) and 204 (D), when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 204 (B) becomes the first specific value (here, “5”), this is hidden. It shows the production situation at that time.

That is, in this effect example, when the count display reaches the first specific value (here, “5”) and the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any effect type (here, “0”) is used as the timer target effect. Along with starting a staging that suggests whether a conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation) will appear (progressive effect that leads to the timer target effect). The count display is hidden while the effect is executed. The progress effect leading to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the first specific value and is hidden.

In this effect example, as a progress effect leading to the timer target effect, a display image SEG11 depicting a person seeking help from a ally character and a display image SEG12 accepting a request from the person requesting help are sequentially displayed. It has become so. Here, at the time when the display image SEG11 and the display image SEG12 are displayed, it is possible to narrow down to some extent which type of effect appears as the timer target effect, but it is specified which type of effect appears. It is desirable not to be able to do that. For example, the display image SEG12 shows that three ally characters accept a request from a person seeking help, but it is predicted that one of the three ally characters will confront the enemy character. Although it is possible, it is desirable to make it unclear which of the three friendly characters will face the enemy character (for example, whether it is cut-in A or B).

In FIG. 204 (E), the count display is redisplayed with the count value of “4” after the “progress effect leading to the timer target effect (first time)” shown in FIGS. 204 (C) and 204 (D) is completed. It shows the production situation to be performed.

According to such a configuration, while the count value is between "10" and "5", the count value is also advanced by "1" each time one second elapses, whereas the count value is changed from "5" to "5". When progressing to "4", until the "progression effect leading to the timer target effect (first time)" that appears when the count value reaches "5" ends (here, 6 seconds), The count value does not progress and can be stagnated. In order to stagnate the progress of the count value, the count display may not necessarily be hidden, and the display may be maintained with the same count value (here, "5").

In FIGS. 204 (F) and 205 (G), when the count display redisplayed in FIG. 204 (E) is advanced to a second specific value (here, “2”), this is hidden. It shows the production situation when it is set to.

That is, in this effect example, the count display is hidden multiple times until the count display reaches a predetermined value, and each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is displayed. Progressive staging that connects with is being executed. The progress effect leading to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the second specific value and is hidden.

In this production example, as a progress effect leading to the timer target effect, a display image SEG13 showing the intention of the middle-aged ally character to confront the enemy character among the three ally characters depicted in FIG. 204 (D) and the middle-aged character. The display image SEG14 depicting the appearance of the ally character confronting the enemy character is sequentially displayed. Here, at the time when the display image SEG13 and the display image SEG14 are displayed, it is possible to grasp that a specific type of effect (cut-in B) appears as the timer target effect, but any effect content (blue aura) is available. It is not possible to specify whether or not to wear a red aura, etc.).

In FIG. 205 (H), the count display is a count value of “1” after the “progress effect leading to the timer target effect (second time)” shown in FIGS. 204 (F) and 205 (G) is completed. Shows the redisplayed production status.

According to such a configuration, when the count value progresses from "2" to "1", the progress effect leading to the timer target effect (second time) appears when the count value becomes "2". Until the end of ")" (here, 14 seconds), the count value does not progress and can be stagnated.

In FIG. 205 (I), the count display redisplayed in FIG. 205 (H) is advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed. After that, the effect status in which the effect (cut-in B) to be the effect target of the timer effect is executed is shown.

According to such a configuration, since the effect connected to the timer target effect is executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is preferable to enjoy the game until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Will be able to maintain. In addition, while the effect connected to the timer target effect is executed, the count display is hidden and the progress of the count value is stagnant, so that the time required for counting digestion can be lengthened accordingly. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the entertainment interest.

Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 205 (J)).

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 205 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. .. In FIGS. 206 and 207, for convenience of explanation, the movable body KT for staging, which is omitted in other drawings, is shown in the drawings. In addition, the movable body KT is, for example, "back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc." It is equivalent to "movable member" etc.

FIG. 206A shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 206 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “40” during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 206 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. It shows the production status to be started.

Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required for counting digestion, the higher the proportion of the effect with high expectation as the timer target effect, so that such a large count number (here, here). When the count display with "40") is displayed, the person feels relieved, and there is a concern that the tension while the count number is digested cannot be appropriately maintained. Therefore, in this effect example, while the count display is executed, the count front effect is generated by the decorative body in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display, and the count front effect is completed and the count display is displayed. The larger the count value when it is made easier to see again, the easier it is for an effect with a high degree of expectation to appear as a timer target effect.

In FIG. 206 (C), while the count display is being executed by the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (B), the movable body KT as the decorative body is displaced to the front side of the count display for a predetermined time. It shows the production situation (counting forward production by the decorative body) that continues to stay for a long time. Further, FIG. 206 (D) shows an effect situation in which the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body) shown in FIG. 206 (C) is completed and the count display is returned to a state in which it is easy to see.

According to such a configuration, even if a large count value is once displayed, it is eroded by the movable body KT (decorative body), and it seems as if it is redone as a count display of a smaller count value. Since it becomes possible to provide the directing property, there is a concern that the tension during the digestion of the count number cannot be optimally maintained.

Further, in such a count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), the longer the time required for the effect, the smaller the count value that is easy to see when the effect is completed, and by extension, the degree of expectation as a timer target effect. There is a concern that the entertainment of the game will decline due to the fact that it is difficult for the high-quality production to appear. Therefore, in the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), even on the movable body KT (decorative body) side, there are a plurality of effect modes having different expectations in a lottery different from the lottery for determining the effect mode of the timer effect. For example, it is desirable to make any one of the operation mode of the movable body KT, the light emission mode, and the like appear. According to such a configuration, even if it is difficult for a highly expected effect to appear as a timer target effect, it is shown that a big hit expectation is high depending on the effect mode on the movable body KT (decorative body) side, which is a separate lottery. If it is done, it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

In this regard, in this production example, the count value is returned to a state where it is easy to see while maintaining a relatively large count value such as "35", so that the expectation for the timer effect is maintained even after that. It will be possible to expect that the count display will continue in this state.

FIG. 206 (E) displays an operation instruction image SSG when the count display reaches the first count value (here, “30”) in the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (D), and is operated by the player. FIG. 206 (F) shows the production situation in which the opportunity is given, and FIG. 206 (F) shows the production situation in which the operation by the player is received and the production result appears at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 206 (E). ing.

That is, in this effect example, it is produced that there is an operation by the player in the first period from the first count value (here, "30") to the second count value (here, "20"). Allows reception, and as a result of the production reception, multiple operation mode production modes with different ratios of high-expected effects appearing as timer target effects (in descending order of appearance rate, for example, Daikichi, Kichi, Kyou, etc.) ) Is made to appear.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 206 (F), an operation is performed by the player when the count value reaches “23”, and as a result of the production, the most advantageous operation mode for the player ( Since Daikichi) has appeared, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the first period from the first count value (here, "30") to the second count value (here, "20"), when the operation by the player is not accepted for the production, the count display is not accepted. The count display will be advanced without any production result appearing.

FIG. 207 (G) displays an operation instruction image SSG to the player when the count display reaches the third count value (here, “15”) after the effect result shown in FIG. 206 (F) appears. On the other hand, FIG. 207 (H) shows the effect situation in which the operation opportunity is given again, and FIG. 207 (H) shows the effect result of the operation received by the player at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 207 (G). It shows the production situation.

That is, in this effect example, it is produced that there is an operation by the player even in the second period from the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). Allows reception, and as a result of the production reception, multiple operation mode production modes with different ratios of high-expected effects appearing as timer target effects (in descending order of appearance rate, for example, Daikichi, Kichi, Kyou, etc.) ) Is made to appear.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 207 (G), an operation is performed by the player when the count value becomes "8", and as a result of the production, a special operation time production that is most advantageous to the player is performed. Since the mode (Daikichi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the second period from the third count value (here, "15") to the fourth count value (here, "5"), when the operation by the player is not accepted for the production, the count display is not accepted. The count display will be advanced without any production result appearing.

However, in this effect example, when the count display is in the first period from the time when the count display is the first count value (here, “30”) to the time when the count display is the second count value (here, “20”), the operation means ( For example, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410) and the effect is accepted, and when the count display is from the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). In the case where the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed and the production is received during the second period up to, and as a result of the production reception, a special operation mode (Daikichi) The rate of occurrence is different.

More specifically, if the production is received during the first period, the rate of occurrence of the special operation mode (Daikichi) is relatively high, and the production is received during the second period. And the rate of occurrence of the special operation mode (Daikichi) is relatively low. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, it is possible to suppress the effect risk that the special operation mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the special operation mode (Daikichi) is available. Even if this appears as much as it is more likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that a highly anticipated production will appear as a timer target production. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, there is a high risk that the special operation mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the special operation mode (Daikichi) occurs. When this appears as much as it is difficult to do, it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that a highly expected effect will appear as a timer target effect.

According to such a configuration, the count display is the first from the first count value (here, "30") according to the player's preference and the production situation such as the expectation degree shown in other productions. Whether the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated firmly in the first period with low production risk until the 2 count value (here, "20"), the count display is the 3rd count value (here, "15"). ")" To the time of the 4th count value (here, "5"), the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated bullishly in the second period with high production risk, or both of them. It becomes possible to make the game strategy interesting, such as whether the operation button 410 should be operated.

In FIG. 207 (I), after the effect result shown in FIG. 207 (H) appears, the count display is further advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo””. ) Is displayed, and then the effect status (cut-in B), which is the effect target of the timer effect, is being executed. Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 207 (J)).

In each of the above-mentioned count effects, the count target effect is not immediately executed when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the count target effect is executed after a while. I am trying to be done. In this regard, a display mode suggesting which effect is executed as the count target effect within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") until the count target effect is executed. May appear. According to such a configuration, even if a situation appears in which a plurality of effects are arranged in parallel when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), any of the effects is the target of the count effect. You will be able to enjoy it without misunderstanding whether it is being executed as.

In this regard, within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) until the count target effect is executed, instead of the above display mode, “some do not have a one-to-one correspondence with the count target effect”. It is desirable that "a specific display mode commonly used in different count target effects" may appear. In this case, when a specific display mode appears, it is not suggested which of the commonly used count target effects appears, but when the display mode that should originally appear as the count target effect is performed. It is more desirable to increase the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears. According to such a configuration, although there is a risk of misunderstanding which effect is being executed as the count effect target, which effect is guaranteed to have a high rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol. Since it will be possible to have fun finding out whether or not it is being executed as a counting effect target, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

However, when the number of types of effects that can be executed as count target effects is N, within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") until the count target effects are executed. Even if a specific display mode appears in the above, it is a count effect target to the extent that "any of M (2 or more) effects less than N is executed as a count effect target". It is desirable to be able to narrow down which effect is executed so that it is interesting to find out which effect is executed as the count effect target.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) already described, a description of automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly explained.

In a general pachinko machine, we are trying to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest by outputting various sounds from the speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game. For example, even if the reach is supposed to improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds according to the type and some that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is a corresponding default sound. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize a variety of sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channels to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 (sound). While each channel is dynamically assigned and managed for each sound to be output from the output means) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), the number of combinations of sounds to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). .. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 208 (A) and 208 (B) show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison target with respect to the present embodiment, respectively. FIG. 208 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction ch" shown in the figure is an abbreviation for the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 208 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used, as shown in the figure. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a pair of a playback channel and a sound is assigned exclusively to prevent overwriting of the sound. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which the reproduction is started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and is muted. As a channel allocation method, the same channel is assigned so that the playback timing is not affected as much as possible.

In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that hinder overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap in playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 209 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by a fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it means that the output is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 210 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and indicates that the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 211 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 211 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 211 (C) says that each sound cannot be reproduced when it is attempted to be reproduced. It shows an example of the problem. In FIGS. 211 (A) to 211 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 211 (A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" are sequentially arranged along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "medium".

In the "first half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in the problem 1 of FIG. If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A", so that the "first half notice A" is provided. The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the pending winning sound, and the output of the "first half notice A" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in the problem 2 of FIG. If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen notice", so that the "full screen notice" is given. The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold prize sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 212 (A) and 212 (B) show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as the present embodiment, respectively.

FIG. 212 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the above-mentioned sound control by a fixed channel means that the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). The point is different. Here, the fact that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned according to a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used. The "reproduction ch" shown in the figure is an abbreviation for the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 212 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this automatic channel method, priority is assigned to each sound individually as shown in the figure. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural. Become.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which the reproduction is started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and is muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce the sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for designating a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when playing a new sound, if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group, the sound is played immediately.

In the above case, if there is no free channel, the staging control program searches all the channels currently being played in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly played. If there is a channel having a lower priority than or the same as the sound being reproduced, the staging control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the staging control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than the sound being reproduced or is not the same.

FIG. 213 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, the playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, such as the sound control by the fixed channel already explained, are used for each sound category and sound name. Instead of sound number, playback type setting and output type setting, identifier and priority for specifying AUTO group (also called "playback priority"), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seekpoints, playback type settings and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents in which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which each sound exists in plurality. Further, the priority order is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced at the same time. The higher the numerical value, the higher the priority of the sound to be reproduced, while the smaller the numerical value, the less preferential the sound should be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority is, for example, a notification sound having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3"). , A sound effect having a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmation sound" and "button pressing sound"), a BGM having a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10". Sounds (such as "full-screen notice sound"), soundes with a priority of "05" ("first half notice sound" to "second half notice sound"), and pending winning sounds with a priority of "01" It is supposed to be. As a result, when an attempt is made to reproduce a notification sound in a state where there is no free channel, for example, it is not necessary to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having a lower priority (for example, a pending winning sound) is not required to be reproduced. ) Is being played back, and the notification sound is played with priority.

As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the initial sound image localization positions of the left and right speakers in combination with the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers in combination with the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

Further, as already explained, the upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, the upper and lower of a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It shows the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, there is a difference in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. This upper and lower bread initial value is managed as bread information. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

Similarly, the initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set in the setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example, and in addition, "1" (0x1FF for 0xFF) in the third byte. By setting), it will not be affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices installed in the gaming machine, and it will always be played at the volume set by the default value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds.

The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as this seek point, for example, "0" is set for each of the "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to the "first half notice A sound effect", while the "second half notice A sound effect" and the "second half notice B effect" are set. [1] is set for each of "sound". With such a seek point, it is possible to register sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered in the sound source when the maximum number of sounds that can be registered is exceeded.

The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 214 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and indicates that the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 215 (A) shows an example of the staging time chart, and FIG. 215 (B) shows an example of the AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 215 (A) and 215 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 215 (A), “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop”, and “middle symbol stop” are sequentially obtained as game states along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "during a big hit".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponds to range A). Here, when an attempt is made to reproduce the hold prize sound as a new sound because there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure), the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be played back using the playback channels 12 to 13, any of the playing sounds is not overwritten by the holding winning sound (corresponding to the "holding sound reproduction" in the figure), and the others. The output of all kinds of sounds continues.

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 (reach BGM reproduction). Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, when an attempt is made to play a hold prize sound as a new sound because there is a start prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure), playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , All other types of sounds continue to be output without any of the playing sounds being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to the "holding sound playback" in the figure).

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 215 (A), for example, a notification (corresponding to the "notification 2 generation" in the figure) is generated, so that the notification sound has the highest priority of "25" as a new sound (corresponding to the "notification 2 generation" in the figure). When an attempt is made to reproduce (corresponding to the illustrated "notification 2"), as a result of searching for a free channel, it is found that there is no free channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 215 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels for reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to the “notification sound 2” in the figure) to be reproduced next is set. Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced on the reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten by the notification sound.

FIG. 216 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is used as the work name for each channel, such as setting reservation flag, request sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority at the time of automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, and volume control. It includes a work for pan and a work for pan control, and has each information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The playing sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly assigned when it is "0", while the channel is automatically assigned when it is "1 to" ("Sound control by the automatic channel method" described later. Equivalent to). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, if it is "1", it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound as "0". The elapsed time from the registration is the elapsed time among the plurality of playing sounds when trying to play a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. Used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been played for a longer period of time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-mentioned left and right pan and upper and lower pan set values.

FIG. 217 shows an example of a search process for an empty channel when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. Also in FIG. 217, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

The staging control program confirms an automatic allocation group for the new sound (step S1102A) when there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1102A), and if this automatic allocation group is "0", a fixed allocation is performed. Is determined, and playback of a new sound is started on the specified channel.

On the other hand, if the automatic allocation group is other than "0", the staging control program determines that the automatic allocation is automatic, and determines whether or not the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). ..

The effect control program determines whether or not a vacant (monaural) channel (1 channel) exists when the new sound is monaural (step S1108A), and if it exists, the vacant (monaural) channel. ) The reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel (step S1109A), and if it does not exist, the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority as the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether or not the channel exists (step S1110A).

The staging control program terminates processing if there is no channel of reproduced sound having the same or lower priority than the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, while if it exists. Determines whether or not a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1112A).

If there are multiple applicable channels, the staging control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time from the registration among the applicable channels based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel of (step S1114A). On the other hand, when the corresponding channel does not exist and is one, the staging control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel satisfying the desired condition (step S1116A).

On the other hand, in step S1106A described above, when the staging control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120A). When the effect control program determines that an empty channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproducing the new sound (step S1122A).

On the other hand, when the effect control program determines that there is no free channel, it determines whether or not there is a new sound with the same or lower priority in the (stereo) channel of the sound being played (step). S1124A) Since the processing is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, if the staging control program exists, it determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

The staging control program starts outputting the above-mentioned new sound on a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition when a plurality of applicable channels do not exist, while the effect control program has already been described when there are a plurality of applicable channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

As described above, the staging control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such a search process for free channels will be described in a more visual and easy-to-understand manner.

218 (A) and 218 (B) to 221 (A) and 221 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 218 (A), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for a normal BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 218 (B), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A having a priority of 05 occurs, and reproduce channels 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (A), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hotan pressing sound having a priority of 20 occurs, and selects the reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the button pressing sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), the staging control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B having the priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 06 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these playback channels 06 to 07.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (A), the staging control program searches for vacant channels in the wake of a request for reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound having a priority of 20, and selects the reproduction channels 08 to 09. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), the staging control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C having a priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 10 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 11, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is started to be played back in stereo using these playback channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), the staging control program searches for vacant channels in the wake of a request for reproduction of the reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, and selects the reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the staging control program searches for vacant channels in the wake of a reproduction request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25, and selects the reproduction channels 14 to 15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

222 (A) and 222 (B) to 225 (A) and 225 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for reach BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reach BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and the reproduction channels 02 to 03 have vacancy. Since it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

After repeating the above processing, the staging control program then, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), triggers a request for reproduction of the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10 to generate an empty channel. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), the staging control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a reproduction request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25, and is shown in FIG. 223 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (empty)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (A), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and reproduces channels 04 to 05 (reproduction channels 04 to 05). Since there is a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (B), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the accessory warning sound having a priority of 10 occurs, and the reproduction channels 12 to 13 are performed. Since there is a vacancy in the space, the reproduction of the character warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the reserved winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 (reproduction channels 14 to 15). Since there was a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), the effect control program searches for a free channel when a reproduction request for the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 occurs, but the free channel does not exist. Therefore, stop using the playback channels 14 to 15 that are playing the "holding winning sound" with the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being played, and use these playback channels 14 to 15 in stereo. Playback of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

By doing so, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is obtained. Each sound of will be played on the playback channel found by the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can the vacant channels be effectively utilized as described above, but also as many sounds as possible to be output can be produced by using each channel including the vacant channels. Since it can be played back, it is possible to realize a variety of sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

226 (A) and 226 (B) to 227 (A) and 227 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 226 (A), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and vacates the reproduction channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (A), the staging control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and reproduces channels 00 to 01. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (B), the staging control program searches for free channels when a playback request for a jackpot BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the jackpot BGM is started to be played back in stereo using these playback channels 00 to 01.

The staging control program restores the previous sound that was played before the replacement on the playback channel after the playback is completed when the replacement playback of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain playback channel. Needless to say, it is okay to do so.

[12-3. Variations on sound control]
In the above embodiment, the automatic channel method for sound control using all the playback channels for the maximum number of channels has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned fixed channel sound control is used. Sound control may be performed as follows depending on the combination or the like.

FIGS. 228 (A) to 228 (F) are diagrams showing variations of channel allocation in sound control by each of the above-mentioned two types of channel methods or a combination thereof, respectively.

FIG. 228 (A) shows an example of channel allocation in the sound control by the maximum number of channels (16 channels) fixed channel method described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 228 (B) shows this. Corresponding to the embodiment of the present invention described above, an example of channel allocation in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels is shown. Since the sound control by these two channel assignments has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 228 (C) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by an automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). .. FIG. 228 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed for some playback channels by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN3" in the figure).

FIG. 228 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for a maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for some playback channels by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 229 and after.

FIG. 228 (F) shows that while using one automatic channel group, channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels, sound control is performed by the automatic channel method, and sound by the fixed channel method described above is performed for some playback channels. Control is performed, but the difference from the above example is that the number of channels is secured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228 (F) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 235 and later.

As shown in this embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped into one group, free channels are assigned or channels being output are replaced based on a predetermined standard, so that sound is produced. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority of. Therefore, unlike the conventional control method that outputs sound by designating a channel, channel management is not required, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. It becomes.

Further, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels, for example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC having a small number of channels, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is reduced. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by the automatic channel method]
Subsequently, the details of another form of the above-mentioned sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as an automatic channel method, by dynamically changing the sound assignment to each channel, it was possible to effectively utilize the empty channels and reproduce many sounds, but the production of the game is In recent diversified gaming machines, hundreds or thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate the management of sound sources.

In addition, by outputting a plurality of sounds in an overlapping manner, it is possible to perform a duplicate warning effect or to enable a variety of sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically assigning the plurality of sounds to the reproduction channel for each group, the sounds are surely duplicated and output. can do. It also has the advantage of facilitating management by dividing the sound into types.

Further, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the staging sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start prize or the variable display is output. Output using the automatic channel method.

With the above configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the vacant channels by the automatic channel method and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Further, since it is possible to classify by the type of sound such as BGM, staging sound, and notification sound, it becomes easy to manage the staging data.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 228 (C) and 228 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control in which fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel method are mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned example, the number of channels in the sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by the fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method. .. Further, the channels for reproducing the sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 229.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in the sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

The channel configuration table includes "automatic allocation" indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for the channel number, "classification" indicating the group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" of each channel. A "remark" is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG. 229.

As shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is as follows: channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29 are. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

Further, the channel of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 is "AUTO group 1", and the channel of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 is "AUTO group 2".

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

The channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as "channel 0" and each channel is represented by "channel" + "channel number") is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting sound that is commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is started. Further, channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. be.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the stereo output is performed, but also a plurality of sounds are output at the same time to improve the sound quality of the BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (paired) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output at the same time. Furthermore, as will be described later, since it is possible to output BGM even on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to output four BGMs at the same time using a maximum of eight channels (4 pairs). It has become.

While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly played back. Therefore, the channel for playing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with the case of reproducing the sound only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of empty channels.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output when the advance notice effect is executed. In the advance notice effect, the sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. In this way, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition.

In the present embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned example, the channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound at the time of the preview production is AUTO group 1.

When outputting a sound at the time of executing the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is an empty channel, it is set to output the specified sound from the empty channel. On the other hand, if there is no free channel, the channel in use is opened to output a new sound or the output of the specified sound is stopped based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or staging sound. It is used when the BGM is output by superimposing four sounds or when a specific effect sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notice effect output by the automatic channel method.

The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, similarly to the channels 20 and 21. Channel 23 is a channel that is paired with channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the reserved sound is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, a sound output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound output with priority when a big hit is confirmed. The sound based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning is output from channels 24 to 29 as described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 reproduce a sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning prize and a sound output when the hold display changes at the start of the fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot confirmation even when there are no empty channels in channels 24 to 29, which attracts the attention of the player. Can be done.

Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, a fixed channel system in which an output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are surely transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel system channel is assigned when the output is constantly continued like BGM or when it is necessary to surely output like an abnormality notification sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, it is possible to prevent the sound from being output even though there are empty channels, and to create a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the free channel search process in the case of executing the control for outputting the sound of the present embodiment. FIG. 217 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 230 differs in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of common processing will be omitted.

In the free channel search process shown in FIG. 230, in the processes of steps S1108B and S1120B, when the new sound is the automatic channel method, it is determined whether or not there is a free channel in the channel of the same group. That is, even if the channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the result of step S1108B and step S1120B is "No".

Further, in the free channel search process shown in FIG. 230, when there is no free channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on a predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, the selection condition of the channel for stopping the sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. 231. It should be noted that the effect in which the sound output is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for replacing the sound output (stopping or opening the sound reproduction) when the channel is not available at the time of outputting the new sound in the present embodiment. .. As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being played and the new sound are compared, and the sound with higher importance is prioritized. As will be described later, the attributes include the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume size, the amount of change in the sound during playback, and the playback time of the sound at the time of channel selection. Including the remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 217, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel having a long elapsed time from the start of reproduction in this way, the output of the sufficiently executed effect sound is ended, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the new effect has been executed.

Condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, an effect with a long reproduction time can be an effect with a high degree of expectation, so an effect with a short reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling the effect having a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total reproduction time regardless of the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions related to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of the effect having a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction, that is, the progress ratio of the effect, with respect to the time of the entire effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the staging.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, an effect in which a loud sound is output can be a more important effect, so a channel having a low volume of output sound is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel having a large volume of output sound may be preferentially selected so that the player can recognize that a new effect is executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on the change in the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect of higher importance, and a channel having a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the channel with a large change in volume may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in the sound image localization position (panpot). For example, as a production that brings about a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the output of the left and right sounds of a stereo speaker can be a more important production, a channel with little change in the dynamic sound image localization position is used. Select with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on the note number (index). For example, select a number with a higher (smaller) note number. At this time, the priority may be associated with the sound number.

Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, it is assumed that the effect of outputting a stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher degree of expectation, and a channel for outputting a monaural sound is selected. On the other hand, since monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of free channels is not enough even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is opened, select the channel that outputs stereo sound in order to increase the free channels. You may do it.

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that the volume cannot be adjusted may be more important, or an effect set so as to be able to adjust the volume may be more important.

In addition to the conditions shown above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning a unique priority to all the sounds, the staging data may be set so as not to have the same priority.

The table shown in FIG. 231 shows the conditions 1 to 8 as an example, but these conditions may be applied individually or may be applied in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example of controlling the channel allocation based on the priority assigned to the newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 232 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of the priority of sound effects in the production example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 232, the first half notice_A is generated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. At this time, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C is generated while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 233, the priority of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set for the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the lower priority notice effects are duplicated in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppression volume value. It will be reduced.

Explaining the contents of each notice, the first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and the character appears on the display screen and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button press sound is played at the time of button operation (channels 18 and 19), the first half advance notice_B is started, and the effect is stereo from channels 10 and 11. Sound is output.

In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and the sound with a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily The sound is muted (blackout production). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. The horizontal axis indicates the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) indicates the volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from the time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at the time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

After that, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the effect button is played back at the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output at the volume V_B. Further, since the priority of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

If the priority of the advance notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the advance notice effect being executed, the volume does not need to be lowered, and the sound effect output at the same time is also small. You do not have to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen goes dark until the time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output at the volume V_C.

Further, the output of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B mute from the time t3 is resumed at the time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until the time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at the time t3.

After that, the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B continue to be produced until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t8, the first half notice_C ends, and the first half of the fluctuation ends.

During the period when the effect sound effect is muted, the output of the effect sound effect may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound effect may be stopped. When setting the volume to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire staging sound effect is set to 0, and the output of the sound effect of the first half notice_C. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Further, even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, the sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds having higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is lowered. It may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being played on the same channel (fixed channel method, automatic channel method) may be lowered. Further, the volume of the sound being reproduced in the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1--4. effect]
With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the sound having a high priority can be preferentially output. High-priority sounds are, for example, sounds such as notification sounds and warning sounds that are surely transmitted to players and employees of the amusement park, and there is a high expectation that the result of variable display will be a big hit. It may be a sound effect to raise the expectation of the game, or it may be a sound effect that has a high staging effect and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, by classifying each channel used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups, it is possible to facilitate the management of the staging data related to the staging sound effect. This makes it possible to improve development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. In addition, by enabling stable games, it is possible to improve the interest of the games.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, it is a group that outputs a sound effect of a notice effect (AUTO group 1) and a group that outputs a hold-related sound effect (AUTO group 2). The number of sound effects for the preview effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of overlapping effect sound effects can be reproduced at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output a staging sound effect exceeding the number of allocated channels, such as executing a pre-reading notice of the pending fluctuation together with the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the interest of the game can be maximized by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while exchanging the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to AUTO group 1. ..

Further, it is desirable that the change of the hold display of the variable display and the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound effect along with the change can greatly increase the expectation of the player and are surely executed. .. In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect related to such hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the effect sound independently of the advance notice effect related to the variable display. can. In addition, unlike the case of the advance notice effect in the variable display, the number of effect sound effects output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to AUTO group 2, so the output of the effect sound effect is canceled. It is less likely to be done. Moreover, even if it is canceled, the output of the low-priority staging sound effect is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by surely performing a highly effective production that raises the expectation of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As mentioned above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are effectively utilized by searching for empty channels, and by setting priorities, directing effects and sounds of high importance are given priority and output. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when the sound is continuously output as in the case of BGM, or when the sound is preferentially output in order to notify the failure or fraudulent activity of the gaming machine. In this way, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and application of sound, each channel can be effectively used, and further, appropriate control can be performed according to the sound output status. For example, in the control to output the BGM, the sound may be output to the pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state, and in the control to output the alarm sound, the designated channel is not searched for an empty channel. The sound should be output directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel method, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of the vacant channels and to give priority to the output of the sound having a high effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute the effect having a high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue the live performance while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, it is also possible to return the volume to the original volume if the previously executed low-priority effect is still being performed even after the high-priority effect is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized by stopping the other effects and executing the specific effect independently. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the production and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modification example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modified example in which the number of set channels and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set is variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Production example]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds of the same type than the number of channels that can be assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of performing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of screens (for example, divided into 9), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output the BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of a screen configuration of an effect in a modified example of the present embodiment. The production example shown in FIG. 235 is a preview production in the latter half fluctuation after the reach occurs.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect of displaying a different scene on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, any one of the scenes is selected, and the effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output at the same time. The scene may be selected by lottery or by the player.

The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Also, the default channel allocation is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 229. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (8 channels) of BGM at the maximum at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, the channels for outputting the BGM are reassigned, and the arrangement of the channels is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel layout]
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control in a modified example of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration at the time of executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration of FIG. 236 (A) is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 229, as described above.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 236 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 1 that adopt the automatic channel system is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the multi-screen effect.

After the start of the multi-screen effect, all the BGMs corresponding to each scene are played while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGMs are output at a normal volume, the volume becomes too loud, so the volume is output in a state where the volume is lower than usual. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the volume of the BGM of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the playback of other BGMs is terminated. .. When the player selects a scene, for example, the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected, and the BGM of the selected scene is set to another BGM until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the volume of the BGM of other scenes may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement changes from the default state (FIG. 236 (A)) to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 236 (B). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the latter half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display area, and the BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change is output to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 236 (B)). At this time, the volume V_1, which is smaller than the normal volume V_1, is output.

After that, when the scene for which the production is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the latter half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

After the multi-screen effect is completed, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of the BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the latter half variation.

Further, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the content of the effect, the channel arrangement may be changed when the game state (for example, the effect mode such as the big hit state, the time saving state, the background change, etc.) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to "variable fixed channels" in FIG. 228 (F)) that perform sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. The number (corresponding to the "variable AUTOch" of 228 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to make more notification sounds, BGMs or sound effects playable depending on the situation, for example, to output more types of notification sounds in a situation where the game is not played. It is possible to take flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects that should be reproduced in the production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

[16. Control for sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example of grouping channels and managing output sounds by associating them with each group has been described. Also, if the number of sounds that can be assigned at the same time in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being sounded is stopped and a new sound is output based on a predetermined condition, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group was explained. Here, when a sound is newly assigned to a channel and output, a case where control such as changing the volume of the sound being output by another channel is performed will be described.

After the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, in the state before the reach occurs (during the first half fluctuation), the output of the sound due to the BGM being reproduced or other effects is regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time together with the output of the predetermined sound effect. As a typical effect of performing such control, there is a blackout effect that regulates the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has passed after restricting the output of the sound effect, the darkening of the screen is canceled and the output of the sound by BGM or another effect is resumed, so that the newly output sound (the sound concerned). It is possible to draw the player's attention by highlighting the effect including the output of the above, and to increase the player's expectation for the fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is assigned to an empty channel and output instead of canceling the assignment of the channel on which the sound effect is output and assigning a new sound. In this case, in order to return the output of the BGM or the like to the state before the regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering the processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when different groups of sounds are being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and priorities are set for each group. Then, when the sound is output from the channel belonging to the low priority group, the case where the sound is newly output from the channel belonging to the high priority group will be described.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each channel group showing the priority of volume control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is divided into a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into 5 groups of 3.

Group volume priority and suppression volume value are set for each group. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In this embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and "1" has the highest priority.

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an mode in which the volume of other sounds being reproduced is changed when the sound is reproduced in a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when "-1" is set, the sound reproduction is continued as it is without changing other sounds being reproduced. When "0" is set, it is controlled to mute other sounds being played. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of other sounds being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. It should be noted that a numerical value of 100 or more may be set to control the volume to be larger than usual.

Further, when each set value is described with reference to FIG. 238, in the present embodiment as well, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed as in the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, sounds such as notification sounds and BGM that are preferentially output or are always output are assigned. In the automatic channel, staging sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of staging are assigned.

In the fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to "1", which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced on the fixed ch1, all the other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the game hall as shown as a reference reproduction sound. It may be an alarm sound to notify that a failure has occurred in the game machine, or a notification sound such as a ball jam. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed ch1, the output of the staging sound effect or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output because the occurrence of fraudulent activity or failure is a factor. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

In the fixed ch2, in FIG. 238, the group volume priority is set to "4", which is the lowest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "-1", even if the sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch2, the other sounds being reproduced are not affected. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch2 is mainly the BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the effect sound effect that attracts the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol while the BGM is output, etc. Is output.

In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently.

Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound, as shown in the reference playback sound. The jackpot confirmation sound is a sound for notifying that the result of the variable display becomes a jackpot at a predetermined timing such as at the time of starting winning, and is a staging sound effect that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, it has been confirmed that the game has transitioned to a high probability state. Can be made to.

The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that suppresses the output of other effect sound effects when the above-mentioned blackout effect is executed and is output in a silent state. At this time, the display on the staging screen is also dimmed. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot confirmation sound and V winning sound are suppressed in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is restarted. On the other hand, in the blackout sound effect, the player's attention is focused on the blackout effect by setting the state in which the sound effect by another effect is not output for a predetermined time even after the blackout effect sound is output. Further, after the blackout effect is executed, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed in the fluctuation. For example, the blackout effect is executed in the first half variation and the corresponding effect is executed in the second half variation. You may do it.

In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when the sound is reproduced in AUTO group 2, all the sounds being reproduced in the group having the priority "4" or less are halved (50%). It is suppressed by the output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that attracts the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 2 include, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice sound effect.

In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50" as in the case of the AUTO group 2, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group having the priority of "3" or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the warning sound effect is output from AUTO group 2, the volume of the warning sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 is already halved, the volume may be continued without being changed, or the volume may be further halved (1/4 of the initial volume). You may.

Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the holding display has changed, and a button pressing sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed. be. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority is the same, the sound is output as it is at the normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of the BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when a game ball enters the starting winning opening, a holding winning sound is output even while the blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a group volume control process for performing sound control corresponding to a group to which the output sound of the present embodiment belongs. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1401). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1401 is "No"), the processes after step S1420 are executed.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1401 is "Yes"), and the volume control table for each channel group. From (FIG. 238), the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppressed volume value is “-1” (without suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "Yes"), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processes after step S1406 are executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, when control is performed for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have already been registered (the result of step S1404 is "Yes"), the processes after step S1406 are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a has the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the sound having the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

Explaining the control for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not the parameter of the sound that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced is registered in the work area (step S1410). If the parameter of the sound that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is "No"), the output of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set (step S1407).

Explaining the sound control executed in step S1410 or later, if a sound that suppresses the output of the sound being played is registered (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU1511a is a new playback request. The group volume priority of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority held in the work area (step S1411).

When the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the peripheral control MPU1511a performs a new reproduction request. The volume of the sound is reduced based on the suppressed volume value in the work area (step S1414).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is higher than the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU1511a newly reproduces. The work area is overwritten with the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound (step S1412), and the volume of the newly requested sound is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU1511a is set to the work area. While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). When the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppressed volume value (step S1416).

When the processing of step S1415 and step S1416 is executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU1511a has the suppression volume value and the group volume priority work. It is determined whether or not it has been registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is "No"), this process ends.

When the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process is completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1421 is "No"), this processing is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a determines the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority in the work area. (Step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1423, step S1424), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Next, the volume control of the sound will be described in chronological order. FIG. 240 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 240 describes an example of executing the advance notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed channel 2). As shown in FIG. 238, the fixed ch2 has a group volume priority of "4" and a suppressed volume value of "-1". Since the suppression volume value of the normal BGM is "-1", the sound is reproduced without recording the sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value of the normal BGM in the work area.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of the hold winning is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The staging sound effect of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is "3", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1402 and step S1403 is "No"). .. Since the parameter was not recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half notice is recorded in the work area (step S1405).

At the start of the first half notice A, a normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is). "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is the same as the group priority of the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is set in advance. The determined volume value is set (step S1413).

At this time, since the normal BGM is being played and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half fluctuation (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the sound is based on the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A. Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of BGM is usually reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is blacked out. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

Further, since the group priority of the normal BGM and the effect sound of the first half notice A during playback is lower than that of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), these are The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, the sound is muted because the suppression volume value is 0.

Further, the second half notice B is started during the execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in a mute state, and the blackout effect is produced. Continue until is finished.

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the start winning slot, a hold winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority is the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameter recorded in the work area is maintained, and the volume is output at a predetermined volume. Therefore, the hold winning sound is output as usual even during the execution of the blackout effect.

Then, when the blackout effect is completed (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). .. Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A and the second half notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the output of the sounds of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the sound effect having a high group priority is output, the output of the sound effect having a low group priority can be suppressed to make a specific effect stand out. Furthermore, by volume control by the suppression volume value, the player can be made to recognize that multiple effects are progressing at the same time, and the group for the effect sound effect that greatly raises the player's expectation such as the big hit confirmation sound. By setting a high priority, it is possible to execute without impairing the effect of the effect.

Further, when a new high-priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound effect during reproduction is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the effect sound effect being reproduced is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. Was controlled to decrease, but from the timing when the sound with high priority is output, the volume of other staging sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out. May be good. In this case, the start value (volume currently being played), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified, or up to the target value based on the production content such as the length of the reproduction time of the effect sound effect. The time to reach and the amount of change may be set. For example, if the output of the new production sound effect is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the production sound effect stand out, or if the output of the new production sound effect is relatively long, the target. It is also possible to set a long time to reach the value to reduce the discomfort that may occur when the effect sound is switched.

For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the production sound effect during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time. It is possible to make the newly output sound effects stand out without breaking the tempo of the game.

Furthermore, when the output of the new staging sound effect ends and the output of the other staging sound effect is resumed, the volume of the other staging sound effect is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume under regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% when the sound effect of the first half notice A is played, but when the output of the normal BGM is restarted, the normal volume is set as the target value and the start value (the volume currently being played here. Then, the volume is suppressed to 50%), and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort while making the switching of the staging sound effect stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the staging sound effect as an example, it can be similarly applied to the case of the alarm sound and the notification sound. As an example, when a notification sound with high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraudulent activity) is output, not only the effect sound effect but also the notification sound with relatively low importance (priority) (for example). For example, the output of the ball jam notification sound) may be restricted. On the other hand, if a fraudulent act is performed while the notification sound of low importance (priority) is being output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted and the notification sound (alarm) of high importance (priority) is interrupted. Sound) may be given priority for output.

As for the alarm sound and the notification sound, the sound output time is not set as in the staging sound effect, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the alarm or the notification is eliminated. Therefore, when multiple types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, other notification sounds are output. .. At this time, the sound having the next highest priority may be output to regulate the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output at the same time.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long and short)]
In the above, the control of the sound that is output in duplicate according to the priority between the groups has been explained. Subsequently, a control example for controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long or short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table by sound effect]
FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each effect sound showing volume (volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of the sound in the present embodiment. The playback channel (ch) used, the total playback time, and the suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

Similar to the example shown in FIG. 238, the used reproduction channel is divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

The total playback time is the time from the start to the stop of the sound effect output. When -1 is set for the total playback time, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by other output sound effects. At this time, the volume of the sound effect is controlled so as not to be suppressed.

When 0 is set for the total playback time, the loop playback is repeated and output, and the output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is a number other than this (positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. The unit of the total reproduction time is millisecond (ms).

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect of changing the volume of other sound effects output at the same time, as in the example shown in FIG. 238. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the sound being played is continued as it is without changing the sound being played, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being played (in the total playing time-). Suppress (silence) the output of (excluding the sound effect for which 1 is set). In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

Subsequently, when each sound effect is described with reference to FIG. 241, in the present embodiment as well, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed, and the assigned sound effect is also the same. Is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 241 the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but it may be set for each sound effect.

Since the total playback time is set to "-1" and the suppression volume value is set to "0" for the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch1, if these sound effects are played, the other sound effects being played are set. All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the game hall, and is a sound effect that is output because it is caused by a fraudulent act or a failure. The volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped or muted).

Since the total playback time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects are designed so that they do not affect other sounds being played. The sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2 is mainly BGM in the game.

Since the total playback time is set to the value (playback time) set for each sound effect and the suppression volume value is set to "0" for the sound effect assigned to AUTO group 1, the notification sound output from the fixed channel 1 is set. All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, and the like, as shown in FIG. 238.

For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, the total playback time is set to the value (playback time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to "50", so that in AUTO group 2. When a sound is reproduced, the output of all other sounds being reproduced is halved (suppressed to 50% output). As a result, for example, the specific sounds output by AUTO Group 2, which can halve the output of the BGM and make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game, include, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect. Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and pressing the effect button. It is a button press sound to notify.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In the present embodiment, the output of the sound effects to be reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effects. 242A and 242B are flowcharts showing a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the output of the sound effect in this embodiment will be described.

When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1501A is "No"), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1501A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made, and the volume for each sound effect. The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 241) (step S1502A).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppressed volume value is “-1” (without suppression control) (step S1503A). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "Yes"), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing after step S1506A is executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "No"), that is, when control is performed for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), the processes after step S1506A are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total reproduction time of the sound requested to be reproduced. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1506A). When there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1510A.

Explaining the sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is "-1". (Step S1510A). When the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new reproduction is performed. Suppression of the volume of the reproduced sound is prohibited, and the output of other sound effects during reproduction is forcibly suppressed.

Peripheral control MPU1511a sets a predetermined volume value for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Further, the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request has been made are overwritten in the work area (step S1512A).

Then, the peripheral control MPU1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513A). When the volume of all the sound effects during reproduction is suppressed, the processes after step S1530A are executed (step S1514A).

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is not "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1". It is determined whether or not "-1" or a sound number is set in the work area (step S1520A). If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is "-1" or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "Yes"), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1" and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a is set. It is determined whether or not the suppressed volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppressed volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

When the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU1511a is the sound for which the new reproduction request is made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request is made is shorter or the same as the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the volume of the sound for which the new playback request has been made is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "No"), the volume of the sound for which the new playback request has been made. Is set to a reduced volume value based on the suppressed volume value of the work area (step S1525A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). When the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is "No"), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

When the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the processing of step S1526A and step S1527A on all the sounds being reproduced, the processing after step S1530A is executed (step S1528A).

When the volume control for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU1511a has a sound number, a suppressed volume value, and a total reproduction time. Determines whether or not has been registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are not registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "No"), this process ends.

When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time are registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. Is determined (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1531A is "No"), this processing is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erase (step S1532A). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1533A, step S1534A), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effect in the present embodiment. Next, the volume control of the sound will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 243 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 243 describes an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming is started and the normal BGM is output. Normally, the BGM is output on the fixed channel 2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. 241. Further, the normal BGM is a loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "Yes"), normally the BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set, and a normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15,000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is "No").

Further, since the parameter is not registered in the work area at this point (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A are held in the work area (). Step S1505A).

Further, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the BGM is normally playing (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), and the total playback time of the first half notice A is 15,000 ms (the result of step S1510A is “No”). The parameters of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which the reproduction request was made are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No", the result of step S1521A is "No", and the result of step S1523A is "Yes". ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

Subsequently, since the normal BGM is playing at this point and the volume has not been suppressed yet, the suppressed volume value is "100", which is larger than the suppressed volume value "50" of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), and the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

Subsequently, since the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "Yes"), the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is "No"). , This process ends.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound effect is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound effect is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is "8000", and the suppression volume value is "0" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output (step S1506A). The result is "Yes").

Further, the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "8000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is "15000" (the result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppressed volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is "50", and the suppressed volume value of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made is "0" (step). The result of S1521A is "Yes"), the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0", and the total reproduction time "8000" are overwritten in the work area (step S1522A).

Further, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the warning effect sound effect (step S1524A).

Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is usually "50" for BGM, "100" for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and the suppression volume value "0" for the blackout notice effect sound recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), so that the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is set to "0" (step S1527A).

After that, when the game ball wins a prize at the start winning slot during the execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 3, the total playback time is "2000", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the effect sound of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "2000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "8000". (The result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "0" and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is "50" (the result of step S1521A is). Since "No"), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the reserved winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound effect (result of step S1523A). “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the reserved winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “Yes”). Then, even when the output of the hold winning sound is completed (time t34), since the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound effect is continued.

After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), so that the blackout stored in the work area ends. The parameter of the effect sound effect is erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the normal BGM whose sound reproduction was suppressed (the volume was reduced) and the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A are returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM was suppressed during the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of other sound effects being played is muted, and while it is possible to make a specific staging (for example, a blackout staging) stand out, the staging sound effect is produced during the muffling period. Even when the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed by executing a specific effect. While notifying the player, if the sound effect output is continued until after the mute period ends, the sound effect output of the effect during the mute period is suppressed to emphasize the execution of a specific effect. be able to.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, a new sound is produced when there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game interest may be reduced due to the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no vacant channel (the number of vacant channels is 0), it is set in advance. By controlling so that less important sound output is selectively discarded based on the priority, it is possible to avoid the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design and reduce the game interest. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to devise technical measures in terms of how difficult it is to appear in a situation where there are no vacant channels (a situation in which the number of vacant channels is 0).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various types that are not output as long as appropriate games are played in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to the effect sound effect (effect sound). As for the notification sound of, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormal contents etc. with only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel-saving control structure is adopted for the output of various notification sounds will be described.

FIG. 244 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control by a fixed channel method for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the staging sound. An example of a sound definition table is shown when the process of outputting only in (say) is realized. In this sound definition table, the definition of priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting is managed for each sound name. is doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of other notification sounds, the effect sounds, and the like are omitted. Regarding the staging sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method exemplified in FIG. 209, the definition by the automatic channel method exemplified in FIG. 213 is defined for each channel excluding the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is a numerical value of the priority. The high notification sound is assigned and output to the channel X regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned to the channel X first is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output. Will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it means that the output is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 245 is a table showing, for each of the notification sounds exemplified in FIG. 244, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the conditions (cancellation conditions) at which the notification is terminated. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is to make effective use of a single channel X by using as many empty channels as possible. This is a measure to maintain the state and refrain from the subsequent notification sound output.

As shown in FIG. 245, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state where magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is performed). It informs that there is. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"". ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 repetitions of notification sound) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism was detected". On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are terminated so that the execution is continued until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied. It has become.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), there is a high possibility that a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a fraudulent act due to a slapstick act is performed). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to notify that it is in the state), and the count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor) even though it is not in the big hit game state (the state where the big winning opening is open). Notification sound for notifying that the detection by the winning opening sensor) has been performed (the state where there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the closed large winning opening to win the game ball) has been performed. 3 (abnormality of winning a prize) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are those. The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "boo-boo vibration has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example). , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and detected by the vibration sensor 2405 as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps are used. The lighting by is continued until the release condition "returning the power" is satisfied. Further, in the notification sound 3 (large prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo large prize abnormality has been detected" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "a large prize abnormality has been detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the notification time is set. The loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) from the time of detection by the count sensor 4005 is terminated, whereas in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition "returning power" is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). Further, the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing is a notification sound such as "boo-boo" that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed). A combination of an alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is is adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clearly distinguish it from other notification sounds. It is desirable to be done.

That is, when notifying an object belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed), the hall side response to the fraudulent activity rather than specifying which notification type it belongs to. It is important to speed up the initial action of. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of "boo-boo" and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent acts). Since it is possible to recognize that the situation has been performed), it is expected that the initial response to the fraudulent activity on the Hall side will be expedited. Furthermore, a message sound for notifying which notification type is to follow the notification sound of "boo-boo" is output, and display is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement for the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame 3 is detected to be open with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame opening switch 618 (there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed by opening the door). However, there is a possibility that the door has been opened due to the abnormal response measures taken by the hall side). The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "door is open ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open". ") And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (corresponding to 3 repetitions of notification sound) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Door is open ping pong ping pong". ), But the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release conditions of "door closure detection (door frame open switch 618 to the main body frame 4). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the "detection that the door frame 3 is closed)" is satisfied.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 (the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2). Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed by opening the main body frame, there is a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to an abnormality response measure by the hall side). , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed and this cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified. The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the main body frame opening switch is set as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time of detection by 619 is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, And the lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "frame closing detection (detection that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It will be.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the first notification group. In addition, as for the notification sound that is the target of loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (illegal act). (There is a moderate possibility that the There is.

That is, when notifying a person belonging to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed), while preventing the person playing the proper game from feeling disgusted. It is important to be able to take corrective action on the hall side to some extent quickly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who play proper games will not feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing proper games to feel disgust, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of belonging to the first notification group. It is output when it belongs to the third notification group although it has a different lighting mode from the case where it belongs to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust. It is expected that the measures for dealing with abnormalities on the hall side will be expedited to some extent by notifying by lighting various lamps that are not used.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is provided by the game ball at the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though it is in a non-time saving state. It is in a state where the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is performed in a mode that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to the game in the proper mode (left-handed)). It informs that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed"). ") And are to be executed respectively. As for the notification time, both the loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the lower plate 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 to be full in the game ball (lower plate). A notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where it should be removed) is used to provide game guidance for the game to proceed properly, although the possibility of fraud is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in a state of power, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation condition should be set to the same one. It is supposed to be.

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "please remove the ball of the lower plate" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and the notification time is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" and the game board. Both of the displays in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. ..

However, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) are detected by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279 when they are completed in 20 seconds. When the 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly speaking, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds is output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to the channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silence output), and a loop process is performed in which the message sound and the silence data are set and the notification sound for 10 seconds is repeated. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are designed to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by checking the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed with this assigned to the channel X.

By the way, there may be a silent part in the notification sound used in the first notification group and the second notification group (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to have a "pause". It is clear that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion having a relatively long time (third notification group) having a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent time in between. It will be possible to notify the game guidance without causing disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the priority order is set to be the same for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, but the priority order is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Further, as the reproduction type setting, it is decided to adopt loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. .. In addition, the "boo-boo" commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and the "ping-pong ping-pong" commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or it may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and the sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined is created at the time of output. You may then assign it to a channel.

FIG. 246 (a) shows the processing when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 246 (a), it is assumed that magnetic detection is performed by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 in which no notification sound is output. In the control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so that it is indicated that the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information that the magnetic detection has occurred is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the magnetic detection has occurred is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and the information is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the magnetic detection information. In the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X, and the notification mode thereof is determined. (Here, the loop of "Boo-boo magnetism detected") is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c for peripheral control. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is repeatedly executed from the timing tα1 for 60 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism is detected"). ”) And lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (a), at the timing tα2 in which 60 seconds have not passed from the timing tα1 and the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop reproduction state, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so that it is shown that the vibration detection has occurred, as in the case of the timing tα1 where the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information that the vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output externally and managed in the hall computer, and the step. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of vibration detection is included, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I don't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not processed for progress in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (60 seconds) is not timed up when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is completed, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection is performed. The schedule data for generation is set, and the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is assigned to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boo-boo vibration detected"). It is supposed to perform playback.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, although the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the above from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting the schedule data in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp For lighting, these are executed.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority order is the same. The lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection that was already in the set state will be reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection will be various. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. As with the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them is used. Even if it is reflected, there is no change in the lamp lighting.

After that, at the timing tα3, 60 seconds after the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism was detected” is repeated based on the time-up of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly). The loop processing to be executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is the time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced for 6 times.

At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not timed up, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest. By allocating the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boo-boo vibration”). The notification sound is played back in the loop of "Detected".

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, but is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tα3, the notification sound of "Boo-boo vibration detected" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is timed up, "Boo-boo vibration is detected". It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "boo-boo-shaking") among the notification sounds such as "was done".

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played (Fig.). 246 (a)), when the 6th alarm sound (here, "Boo Boo") and the 6th message sound (here, "Magnetic detection") have finished playing, the 7th alarm sound (here) Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "boo-boo") was played. As a result, "Boo Boo magnetism detected" and "Boo Boo vibration detected" are connected at strange points, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example). If the notification sound 1 ends with "boo-boo magnetism" and the notification sound 2 starts with "movement detected", it is a meaningless notification such as "boo-boo magnetism detected". It becomes a content, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of (which may confuse the site).

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, the notification sound 2 time-ups at the alarm sound of “boo-boo” and ends, and the message sound is emitted. Even if it is not played back, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality detection has occurred at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing and it is no longer played back (only magnetic anomalies). If it is a notification, the notification sound will end at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is cut off at a halfway timing, it is urged to check the display inside the liquid crystal display, and the display inside the liquid crystal shows "magnetism detected" and "vibration detected", respectively. By displaying the display, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

FIG. 246 (b) shows the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. An example is shown.

Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. 246 (a). ) And the above-mentioned processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. ) Is almost the same.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), at the timing tβ1 in which no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so that it is indicated that the frame opening detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection is detected. When it is grasped that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame opening) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X and the notification is made. A timer (30 seconds) is set to start the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, the loop of "the frame is open ping pong ping pong") and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 5 (frame open). ..

When allocating the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and is peripheral. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It will be like.

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection are obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the frame closing detection, which is the condition for canceling the frame opening detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly executed from the timing tβ1 for 30 seconds, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "the frame is open"). "It is open") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), in the timing tβ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tβ1 and the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is in the loop playback state, step S110. Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU1310a, the state of the notification flag is first updated so that it is indicated that the door opening detection has been performed, as in the case of the timing tβ1 in which the frame opening detection has been performed. Next, the information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and the information is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that the information of the door opening detection is included, the notification sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. 245 is transmitted to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame open) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side already assigned is preferentially reproduced and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door opening detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not processed for progress in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) that has not been set yet. ) Was set, and when the timer (30 seconds) was not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) was completed, the door open detection was responded. Schedule data for sound generation is set, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, the loop of "door is open ping pong ping pong") is used. The notification sound is played back.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection and the screen generation schedule data are set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the door open detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the inside of the liquid crystal described above These are executed for the display and the lighting of the lamp.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority order is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection that was already in the set state is reflected in each of the various lamp light emission, and the lighting mode data for light emission mode generation according to the door opening detection is lit. The mode is not reflected in each of the various lamp emissions. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the frame and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the door have the same data contents. No matter which one is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tβ3 where 30 seconds have passed from the timing tβ1, a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, and the time is set. By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door” is used. Is open Ping Pong Ping Pong "loop) will be used to play the notification sound.

That is, in the timing tβ2, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the door opening detection is not set and is set when the timing tβ3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound of "door is open ping pong ping pong" can be played from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up, "door is open". It will be possible to urge the loop processing to end and stop playing at halfway timing (for example, timing such as "door is open") among the notification sounds such as "ping pong ping pong".

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played (Fig.). 246 (b)) When the third message sound (here, "the frame is open") and the third alarm sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") have finished playing, the fourth message sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") Here, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open") was played. As a result, "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" and "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong" are connected at strange points, and it becomes impossible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation. The outbreak can be suitably suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the door open detection is shortened, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it becomes possible to surely grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 246 (c) shows the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the timing tγ1 in which no notification sound is output, the game is played even though it is in a non-time saving state in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). Assuming that the gate sensor 4003 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the region on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the region 5a (right-handed detection in a non-time saving state), it is mainly In the control MPU 1310a, the information that the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in a time-saving state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It will be like. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU1310a, and the information is not output to the whole computer to the outside.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the result is in a non-time saving state. When it is grasped that the right-handed detection information is included, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (set) for starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to left-handed") and measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). 20 seconds) is set.

Regarding the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state, in this embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the gate unit 2003 is played from the main control MPU 1310a. Only the information that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in a non-time saving state. , And processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

When assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied to various control data of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It will be like.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting it in the storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal is the end of notification, which is a condition for canceling the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) (the timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up). It will continue to run until. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid hindering the progress of the production, and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. Will not be done.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is repeatedly executed from the timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, "Please return to left-handed") will be executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the timing tγ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tγ1 and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is in the loop playback state, step S110 or It is assumed that the lower plate full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, information indicating that the lower plate full tank has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 in which the right-handed detection is performed in the non-time saving state. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (detection of full lower plate) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) in which the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), a command is issued in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). Even if it is found that the information of the lower plate full tank detection is included as a result of the analysis, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is channeled in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). It is not assigned to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) should not be newly assigned to the channel X. By setting this to, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially played and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not processed for progress in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not been set yet. Set this for (seconds), and when the timer (20 seconds) is not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, the lower plate is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time, and assign the notification mode (here, "Pull out the ball on the lower plate". The notification sound is reproduced in the loop).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set, the screen generation is performed according to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate. By extracting the schedule data from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display can be executed. There is.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

After that, at the timing tγ3, which is 20 seconds after the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as "Please return to the left-handed" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice.

At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not timed up, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the detection of the lower plate full tank. Then, by allocating the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here). Then, the notification sound is reproduced in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate").

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is set at the timing tγ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set and is set when the timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , The loop processing is terminated at halfway timing (for example, timing such as "Pull out the ball of the lower plate") among the notification sounds such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" so that it will not be played. You will be able to urge.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 246 (c)) When the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please pull out the ball on the lower plate") is heard. It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced. As a result, "Please return to left-handed" and "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange points, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to.

Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played, silence data for 5 seconds is inserted. Since the message sound of another notification sound is reproduced in, it is preferable to generate a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to avoid it.

FIG. 247 (a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 247 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, the said. Regarding the processing according to the magnetic detection (magnetic anomaly processing), the same processing as in the case described with reference to FIG. 246 (a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is started, and the timing when the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. In t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced for 6 times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), the timing t-2 in which 60 seconds have not passed from the timing t-1 and the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is in the loop playback state. In step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) in response to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection (see FIG. 244). ), Even if the door open detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

And usually, for the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is similar to the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (c) is overlapped. Processing is performed so that only the timer is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after a magnetic anomaly occurs is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being carried out. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the "second notification group" with a medium possibility of fraud. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), at the timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data are set. , Only set the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at the timing t-3, based on the setting of the flag, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are set, respectively. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X to start the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "the door is open ping pong ping pong"). .. The execution of the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting according to the door open detection is started from the timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" was detected by the door frame opening switch 618 while the loop was playing, but "Boo Boo magnetism was detected". From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as "Door is open", the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection is played in full for 30 seconds, and "Door is open ping pong ping pong". The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as is played three times. In this way, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group is reproduced. Although it is the content (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop), it is expected to raise awareness that the situation is highly likely to be fraudulent.

In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected", the notification content starts from the message sound (door is open), so that the first notification group is in the most tense situation. It will be possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs has been completed. On the other hand, by reproducing the alarm sound of "ping-pong ping-pong" after the message sound, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

FIG. 247 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 247 (b), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 in which no notification sound is output. Regarding the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the "frame opening detection processing (frame opening processing)" described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tδ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, the step is taken. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed hit in a non-time saving state in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 244), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed even when the right-handed detection occurs in the non-time saving state.

That is, as described above, as for the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (c) is overlapped. The process is performed so that only the timer of is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set, while the sound is generated according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Schedule data is not set. Then, at the timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not timed up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X for the minute amount, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of "return to left-handed").

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, and the notification sound such as "Please return to left strike" is not included at the right timing. Will be reproduced, so that it will be possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while maintaining the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, even with such silent data, the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It will be like.

FIG. 247 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 in which no notification sound is output. Regarding the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the "frame opening detection processing (frame opening processing)" described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tε1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at the timing tε2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tε1 and the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S112. It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of FIG. 94. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (See FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in both the sound and the lamp lighting. The output content will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. As for the display in the liquid crystal display, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal display on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in either the sound or the lamp lighting, the timing tε2 has been set until then. The process of canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the set state may be performed.

In this respect, in this embodiment, in the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection are obtained. Is kept in the set state, and the sound generation schedule data, screen generation schedule data, and light emission mode generation schedule data according to magnetic detection, which have higher priorities than the respective data, are set respectively. Put it in a state. Then, the allocation for the channel X and various lamp operations is determined from the contents based on the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 can be output in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed for the process on the lower priority side in the execution state (door open process). It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process, magnetic anomaly process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at the timing tδ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is started, and the timer for the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. When the time is up (60 seconds), the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been played for 6 times, and the loop processing is finished at a good timing. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the magnetic detection that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is processed in any of the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. The output content will be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has been changed to a tense situation is promptly transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing tζ1 in which no notification sound is output, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94) in a non-time saving state is detected. If so, the process corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state (left-handed guidance process) is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 246 (c). Therefore, at the timing tζ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is started, and the timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice. In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is set.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing tζ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tζ1 and the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is in the loop playback state, step S110 or It is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection, and the output content of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) processing is reflected as the operation of the actuator. It will be prevented from being done. As for the display in the liquid crystal display, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal display on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, as a method for preventing the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, right-handed detection in the non-time saving state set up to that point at timing tζ2 is performed. It is also possible to perform a process of canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state.

In this respect, in this embodiment, in the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state. In addition to the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection, which has a higher priority than this, the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door open detection are also kept in the set state. Set each generation schedule data to the set state. Then, the allocation to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection. Therefore, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection is such that the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), in the timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the processing on the lower priority side (left-handed guidance processing) in the execution state. It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (left-handed guidance process and door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing tζ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is started. When the time of the timer (30 seconds) is up, the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, and the loop processing is finished at a good timing. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing detection, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the door open detection with a medium possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, the notification sound 4 (door open) is processed by the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. In any case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first, so that the person who is playing the proper game does not feel disgusted, but after that. Notifications belonging to the second notification group are performed by the alarm sound of "Ping Pong Ping Pong", and it is expected that the hall side will be promptly notified that the situation has changed to the situation where there is a possibility of fraud. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of each notification sound shown in FIG. 244 should be output, various processes can be performed according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents and game guidance (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may be higher than the moderate possibility depending on other detection conditions. It is hard to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority of.

In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraudulent activity. be. That is, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state is continued. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained due to the convenience of the hall side (recovery of various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. 248 to 253, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priorities, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further change the state of the gaming machine. It is intended to realize notification in a manner that can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 248 to 253.

In the example shown in FIG. 248, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 in which no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also generated. It is put into a set state. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will play for a second.

On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection, the display is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 arrives.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the magnetic detection in which the priority regarding the notification is relatively high at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection is completed and the channel X is in the vacant state. Magnetic detection by sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the door open detection started from the timing tα11, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but the allocation for various lamp operations is At the timing tα13, the mode of lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection is switched.

That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection are also set. They are put into a set state. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

On the other hand, as for the liquid crystal display and the lamp light emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the magnetic detection sensor is in a situation where the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing. Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, a person who intends to perform some kind of illegal work opens the door frame 3 to open it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to be completed. It is assumed that the magnet may have entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 momentarily when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Since it is such an act, there is a concern that it is not sufficient as a countermeasure only by performing the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already turned off, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity to take some measures.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is terminated, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection" in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is set to the channel X. Special processing will be performed to reassign to. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated will be reproduced in a form connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection", which causes a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and attract everyone's attention. In addition, even as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that "when the magnetic notification is finished, all the notification sound reproduction is finished, and it is finally possible to make the fraudulent act inconspicuous." Since the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that should have ended is played, the notification situation will be unexpected, so it is expected that further fraudulent activities will be recognized as being too risky. It will be like.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period during which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period during which the notification processing belonging to the second notification group is being performed, other channels are used. It is decided to perform a process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the assigned symbol change and other game sounds (process of reducing the volume to a specific value). The specific value may be a volume of 0. During the period during which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds assigned to the other channels is not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is suppressed) is whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). It is a period during which the condition of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 248, in the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16, the symbol variation is based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. Processing to suppress the volume of the production sound inside and other game sounds (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the period during which the processing is being performed, processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds (processing for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing during the period (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16) in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed. It was decided to reduce the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds to the same value during the period, but both the first notification group and the second notification group are performing notification processing. During the period, the process may be performed to reduce the value to a lower value than during the period during which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states just by checking the effect sounds other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be made faster.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 248, at the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection is terminated, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the volume of other game sounds is terminated. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the closed state is played in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection ends is reached, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the volume of other game sounds may be continued without being suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 248, as is clear from the processing corresponding to the door opening detection, the liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The period during which the lamp is emitted and the period during which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the detection of door opening are the same at the start time, but the end times are all different. In this way, by operating them so that they have different roles in the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. In spite of this, it will be possible to appropriately notify the contents of abnormalities and game guidance.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 249, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at the timing tα23 in a non-time saving state. I'm assuming a case. However, in this example, unlike the case shown in FIG. 248, it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, so that the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the mode of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely malicious. Since it is unlikely that such an action has been performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is terminated.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250, magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, as shown in FIG. 248. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 250, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is completed at the timing tα34 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 250, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the terminated state is referred to as “notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection”. It will not be played in a connected manner. That is, even in the example shown in FIG. 250, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. Waiting for the corresponding notification sound to finish playing, the magnet momentarily falls within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 while the squirt is cold. It is assumed that you may be in a situation where you have entered. However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetic detection is not generated in a non-illegal state, the magnetic detection is performed even though the door frame 3 is in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing only by continuously playing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives, and the channel X is vacated in case further notification sound processing is required. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it becomes possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 251, magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 248. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 251 it was waited for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection to be completed, and an attempt was made to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt was cold. Occasionally, a magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and even though the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response to this, the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not falter in such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is being repositioned, and more malicious fraud may have been committed. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, while the notification sound 1 The process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from the time when the first magnetic detection is made to the time when 60 seconds from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection is made elapses. Will be able to be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption during the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. And finally, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism detected" does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected". It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a big sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). "Schedule data for sound generation according to detection" is set again, and the notification sound is reassigned to the channel X for special processing. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is not only reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to magnetic detection", but also in the middle of "inspecting boo-boo magnetism". It will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetic detection" in which the loop processing is completed at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appears in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 252, magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 248. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 252, it is assumed that the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at the timing tα54 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 252, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection is completed and the magnet is secretly placed inside the door frame 3 while the squirt is cold. Even though the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality was reproduced in response to this, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken greatly without being distracted by such a situation. It is assumed that more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is completed, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”, and then the notification sound is reproduced. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection". ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) without setting the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection. Seconds) are set, and at the timing tα55 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is completed, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. ..

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "boo-boo vibration detected" does not end its loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop is performed at a halfway timing such as "check for boo-boo vibration". Since the processing will be completed, it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is completed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) for the “sound generation according to the door open detection”. "Schedule data" is set again, and special processing is performed to reassign the notification sound to channel X. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection" which is connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection". In addition to being reproduced in, it will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to vibration detection" in which the loop processing is completed at a halfway timing such as "inspecting boo-boo vibration". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appears in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the frame opening detection is completed instead of the door opening detection. I'm assuming.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 253, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection is further generated immediately after the frame opening detection is performed is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if the magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent activity, the door frame 3 should be in the open state, and even if the main body frame 4 is in the open state, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet. Therefore, it can be assumed that the hole side may have mistakenly detected the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when using a magnet to clear the ball clogging in the ball tank or the payout passage.

Therefore, even in the example shown in FIG. 253, at the timing tα64 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the end state is "notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection". By regenerating in a form connected to "regeneration" (timing tα64 to tα65), it causes a great sense of discomfort in the hall and is expected to attract everyone's attention. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection but also magnetic detection is supported. For each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), special processing for terminating them is performed.

According to such a configuration, while the function for fraudulent activity is appropriately performed, when the hall side is erroneously detected, the notification process corresponding to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection is performed only by closing the main body frame 4. Since it will be possible to terminate all notification sounds, LCD display, lamps), it is expected that the hall side will respond quickly to false positives and maintain the atmosphere inside the hall appropriately. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 253, even when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the frame opening detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) according to magnetic detection. You may want to perform a special process to terminate.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjusting function.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 217), it is monitored whether or not the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated, and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. When it is determined that the volume of the speaker is reduced, the player sets the volume of the speaker (player set value). When it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 is operated, the volume of the speaker is set by the player. Performs processing to increase the value (player set value). In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pip!") Is output at the increased volume value. , It is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completed sound, the same sound may be output depending on whether the volume value is lowered or raised. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority as described above when there are no more empty channels (for example, "20" which is the same as the button pressing sound), and the output volume of the effect sound (for example, the output volume of the effect sound (for example, "20"). It is possible to more reliably convey that the change in the volume of the audible sound).

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period (demo display, etc.) before the game is started because the symbol change according to the jackpot determination has not yet been performed. Not only during the period that can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the big hit judgment is executed, the reception by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. By making it possible to change the volume value flexibly at times, we are trying to maintain the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine is also assigned to various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic anomaly or door opening, a process is performed in which a specific notification sound corresponding to the detection content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. Further, at this time, the channel allocation of various staging sounds according to the progress of the display staging itself is not stopped, and the staging progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Therefore, as long as the channel assignment of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

However, in the above-mentioned effect progress notification process, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped, the normal time (normal time) is the amount that a specific notification sound is assigned to the channel. More channels will be used than in the non-notification state), and there will be no empty channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound. The risk tends to be high. Then, if there is a case where there is no empty channel to which sound data is not assigned at a stage before the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, one of the sound data at that time. Since one channel allocation has to be discarded, even if the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed after that, the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to the channel is reproduced. It is not possible, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

Regarding the concern about empty channels related to the staging sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be decided from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production. Therefore, regardless of which channel method is adopted, the above-mentioned effect progress notification process is used. It is important to prepare a processing structure that allows a common processing program to be adopted in order to reduce the cost and improve the reliability of the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the staging sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the staging sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“pi!” Or “pipi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is expected that the risk of running out of free channels will be reduced by giving more room to the channels.

However, despite the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the volume value when a more important effect appears, the output volume is set while the effect progress notification process is being executed. If the change is not possible, the appropriate volume value will be adjusted according to the content of the staging progress when the staging progress notification process is executed due to false detection or notification due to hall side circumstances (door opening, etc.). It is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed. In addition, as a result of the progress of the staging during the period during which the staging progress notification process is being performed, if there is a large discrepancy between the appropriate volume value and the actual set value according to the staging content, the output volume (possible). Since it became possible to change the setting of (listening sound volume), it is necessary to accept multiple operations in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. As a result, even though the notification process under the progress of the production is finally completed, there is a concern that the entertainment of the game will be deteriorated due to the fact that the production sound cannot be output properly due to the lack of free channels.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value drops to a specific value. The output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed, and the above When the notification process (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume is changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point.

According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the set value (player set value) according to the progress of the staging while the notification process under the progress of the staging is being executed, a new operation is performed. It becomes possible to collectively change the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) to reflect all the operations up to that point when the effect progress notification process is completed without performing the above. In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It is expected that the decline in the entertainment interests of the game will be suppressed. In addition, the volume value (volume of audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and a situation occurs in which a shortage occurs in an empty channel due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Will also be suitably avoided.

According to the above configuration, when the batch change of the output volume to the player set value is executed when the effect progress notification process is completed, the game during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of times the user setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. It may be output with a sound of a special mode different from that (for example, "Bee!").

Furthermore, in order to more preferably solve the shortage of free channels when the effect progress notification process is completed, the number of changes in the player set value and the player during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed depends on the player. Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) all at once as the staging progress notification process ends. .. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the effect notification process due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate effect is produced due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of such an effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume) will be described.

FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating the content of the notification process under the progress of the production according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

First, prior to explaining the process from the execution of the staging progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume), the content of the staging progress notification process is described with reference to FIG. 254. Will be briefly explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 exemplified in FIG. 244 are shown, and the description of other notification sounds is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 254, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as volume suppression modes of the staging sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) regarding the volume, the output volume (audible sound volume) of the staging sound in the range of "20" to "50" is changed. Among the possibilities, the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanatory example, although the processing itself related to the output is performed, the effect sound is silenced. It is exemplified as a thing to make.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud When the notification process relating to any of these is executed, the process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. Moreover, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, the abnormality detection is turned off. Until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. ) Is not terminated, but is continued.

In this explanatory example, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, large prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume (audible sound) of the effect sound is executed. The period during which the process of suppressing the volume) is continued is the same as the period from the reproduction of the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) corresponding to the abnormality detection to the end of this. Is set to.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is performed in the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower side of the sound. However, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, that time point. Therefore, the process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is terminated in the first volume suppression mode on the side where the degree of suppression is low.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the effectability is achieved. The emphasis is on maintaining the sound, and no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound).

In this explanatory example, the suppression mode is different depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is not always necessary to make the difference, and the output volume of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. A process of suppressing (volume of audible sound) may be performed. However, regarding the end condition of the process to be suppressed, the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is different from the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to be able to do it.

FIG. 255 shows the contents of the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this explanatory example, the player setting value is changed by "1" within the range of "1" to "5" by the operation by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The smaller the value, the smaller the volume of the staging sound. Further, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set by the player when the above-mentioned suppression mode (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanatory example, the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the operation by the player.

Now, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), the player setting value is "3" out of "1" to "5" with respect to the volume of the effect sound, and no notification flag is set. , It is assumed that the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "60", which is 20 times that. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination is not performed and the start winning prize is awaited, the effect selection left button 331 is imitated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed image 331a and the display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH to the effect that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize whether the current player setting value is "1" to "5" is also executed. To. The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect which is a reach effect executed in a state where the background image is changed. At least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when there is an operation by the player. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In such a situation shown in FIG. 255 (A), when an operation is performed by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, the player setting value is set to "1" each time the operation is performed. The output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" accordingly. In addition, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a gauge display indicates which of the "1" to "5", which is the range of the player set values, is the current set value. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 255 (C)) will be executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player set value is "1", neither the player set value nor the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is lowered, and the game is played. The person setting value remains "1" (the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume is set to "1". It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". This also applies when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

On the other hand, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the decorative symbol SZ fluctuates in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of variation pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In this regard, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 255 (A) (the period during which the demo display or the like can be performed) but also the symbol change according to the jackpot determination after the game is started. It is designed to allow reception by the player even during the execution period, and the volume value is agile when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 255 (C) appears. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

That is, FIG. 255 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice due to the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 255 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is 20 times that of "60" →. Under the setting change to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at the changed volume "80", and in the second operation, the player setting is performed. The value has been changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) has been changed from "80" to "100", which is 20 times higher than that. At "100", which is the volume after the change, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played.

Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, it is within the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value. The second volume value display OH2, which indicates which is the current set value by the gauge display, is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This is to clarify which of the current setting values is for the range of the player setting values "1" to "5", even in a tense situation where a more important effect appears. The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased / decreased according to the change of the player set value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

The second volume value display OH2 is displayed from the time when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 255 (C) as shown in FIG. 255 (D). It is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and then the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is such that the player setting value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value "5"), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation is performed in such a manner that the player setting value does not change (operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value "5"). When is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is more preferably promoted to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 256, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection is generated during the execution period of the symbol change and the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the detection is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about the volume adjustment accompanying this.

The situation shown in FIG. 256 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (A). When a start winning is generated and a big hit judgment is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), the result and variation of the big hit judgment are the same as in the situation explained with reference to FIG. 255 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is varied and displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol change, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed in response to the detection. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "" "The door is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed in response to the door opening detection during the fluctuation period of the symbol, the first volume suppression mode is used. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (A), but the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such the effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the staging sound, which has been lowered to the value (here, "10"), is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) is this. It is permissible to accept changes to itself, and when the above-mentioned staging progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point. As mentioned above, it is made to change all at once.

That is, FIG. 256 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice due to the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 256 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the value set by the person (20 times), is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the first specific value.

At this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is first specified. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the numerical value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, so the second volume value. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5", which is the range of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state of being executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the notification processing under the staging progress (output volume up to a specific value). When each of the lowering processes) is completed, as shown in FIG. 256 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be "80" according to the first operation from the first specific value (here, "10"), and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, it will be changed collectively from the first specific value (here, "10") to "100" which reflects all the operations up to that point.

In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It is expected that the decline in the entertainment interests of the game will be suppressed. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the effect progress notification process is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the empty channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, when the output volume (volume of audible sound) is changed all at once (“10” → “100”) as the staging progress notification process is completed, the output volume changes. Nevertheless, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completed sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the effect notification process due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate effect is produced due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

On the other hand, FIG. 257 shows the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection while the process related to the notification sound corresponding to the state detection generated in FIG. 256 is a magnetic abnormality instead of opening the door. It is a figure explaining the content about the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the right button 332.

The situation shown in FIG. 257 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (A). When a start winning is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is varied and displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the magnetic detection is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetic detection"). And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the fluctuation period of the symbol and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in response to the magnetic detection, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the output volume of the sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), although the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (A), the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value (here, mute).

In this regard, even when the staging progress notification process corresponding to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, when the operation for the staging selection left button 331 or the staging selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, "0") is performed. The output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound (mute in this case)) that has been lowered to ()) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself regarding the volume. The change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-mentioned staging progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all the operations up to that point. As mentioned above, the batch change is performed.

That is, FIG. 257 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice due to the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 257 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the second specific value (here, "0 (silence)"), which is lower than the value set by the person (20 times), is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the second specific value.

At this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is specified second. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the numerical value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, so the second volume value. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5", which is the range of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Incidentally, in this explanatory example, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the staging sound (volume of audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection occurs. The effect notification process that suppresses the problem is continuously executed.

After that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the magnetic detection was performed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH was returned to the state of being executed again, and the effect progress notification process (output volume was specified). When the process of reducing the value to the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 257 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point in response to the completion of the process is completed. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be "80" according to the first operation from the second specific value (here, "0"), and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, it will be changed collectively from the second specific value (here, "0") to "100" which reflects all the operations up to that point.

In addition, when the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (D), the game board side effect display device. The display in the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. There is. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, and the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and corresponds to the player set value. On the other hand, in the notification processing according to the door opening, even if the notification sound ends, the production sound remains the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

In this way, even if a magnetic anomaly occurs, the player is allowed to change the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is expected that the decline in the entertainment interest of the game will be suppressed until the notification process under the progress of the production is completed. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the effect progress notification process is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the empty channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, the output volume (volume of the audible sound) is also output when the output volume (volume of the audible sound) is changed all at once (“0” → “100”) when the effect progress notification process due to the magnetic abnormality is completed. Even though the volume changes, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completed sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the effect notification process due to the notification due to erroneous detection is finally completed, the situation is such that the proper effect cannot be enjoyed due to the shortage of free channels. Can be suitably suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 244, the initial volume of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected". Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the sound is always reproduced at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification processing under the staging progress is not executed. Therefore, the player setting during the execution of these notifications. It is possible to appropriately change both the value and the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound). However, as shown in FIG. 244, “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the initial volume value for these notification sounds 6 and 7, regardless of the player setting value. It will always be played at the volume set by the default value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set in the third byte of the initial volume value, and "1" is not set. It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

Further, for each process described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, the state is detected not only during the execution period of the symbol change, but also in the state before the start of the symbol change and in the form of straddling the start and end timings of the symbol change. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

Further, in each of the processes described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, after the staging progress notification process is completed, the staging selection left button 331 or the staging selection right button is the same as before the staging progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation by 332, the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the staging sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

Further, the process described with reference to FIG. 256 and the process described with reference to FIG. 257 are made to have different suppression modes of the production sound during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being performed, but the suppression mode is not always the same. It is not necessary to make them different, and the output volume of the staging sound (audible sound) can be achieved in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the process of suppressing the volume) may be performed.

Further, in the effect progress notification process, the output volume (volume of audible sound) of various game sounds is suppressed, and among these game sounds, the game ball is placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as the sound played according to the winning (winning sound), may be played at the default volume without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued even though the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 has occurred. In this sense, some sounds (winning sounds), such as sounds played in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound be reproduced as a special sound that cannot be output when the effect progress notification process is not executed.

As described above, in FIGS. 244 to 257, there is no vacancy in the channel by adopting a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormal content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to make technical ingenuity in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the effect sound effect (effect sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), and the effect design is performed. Concerns remain about the emergence of the above unintended mode of sound output.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are various technical aspects regarding the channel allocation of the staging sound at the stage before the situation where there is no vacancy in the channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to devise it. Hereinafter, various technical measures made regarding the output of the staging sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical measures as the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents with only a single channel for various notification sounds is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. Further, in each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the staging sound. Further, when the automatic channel method is adopted, it is not always necessary to adopt the control based on the above-mentioned priority, and even if all channels are in use, a process of discarding a new sound may be performed. good. In addition, the examples described below can be combined and implemented as appropriate.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as "an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 to pray" or "a button operation" is performed. It can be detected by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, it does not show any expectation, for example, a sound corresponding to silent data composed only of silent sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of allocating a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by other sounds. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed in this way, even if a special production condition such as a big hit confirmation effect or a look-ahead effect is satisfied as a result of the game ball being accepted in the specific winning opening, the effect is satisfied. At this point, the special sound corresponding to the effect is not assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to be completed, it is possible to execute an effect of assigning a special sound to the channel and playing it back (post-notification effect).

That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to the specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the lack of channels even though a special result is obtained by the judgment according to the winning.

Regarding the special sound, for example, in addition to the big hit confirmation sound that is executed only when the big hit is won by the big hit judgment according to the prize, the production mode based on the big hit judgment according to the prize is highly expected (for example). , High-expected notice effect performed during execution of reach effect) is selected, and pre-reading is performed when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by pre-reading judgment according to a prize. It is possible to exemplify a look-ahead notification sound that is executed as an effect, but the point is that it is assigned to a channel and output when a special judgment result is obtained by judgment by a predetermined judgment means according to a prize. Anything that can be done is sufficient.

FIG. 258 shows, prior to outputting a special sound (for example, a cure) corresponding to the so-called look-ahead effect as a “special sound” when the game ball wins a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound has not been output (more accurately, a determination to output a special sound (a determination to perform a look-ahead effect) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example of a channel reservation process which is reserved in advance from time to time.

First, prior to explaining an example of the channel reservation process, first, a general pre-reading effect, which is a well-known technique, will be briefly described.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the prize. , The first and second starting port winning processes (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 134 are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed.

Further, as described above, in the first and second start opening winning processes (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), a look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the winning start opening side is also executed (FIG. FIG. 135: Step S5245, FIG. 136: Step S5255).

Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. be. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, information on the symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) are generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side suggests the judgment result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol, as described above. It is a production to do. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the information obtained from the read-ahead command when the determination process of whether or not the jackpot is won and the symbol fluctuation thereof are not digested and they are put on hold (the pre-reading command). Expectations as to whether the jackpot judgment that has been put on hold will obtain a special result based on the information related to the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side and the information related to the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side). It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, fluctuation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment time shown in FIG. 256 are performed. Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the look-ahead effect, for example, a new hold display according to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, blue with relatively low expectation and red with relatively high expectation). When it is determined whether or not to perform a specific look-ahead effect suggesting the expectation of look-ahead depending on whether it is displayed, and when it is determined that the mode (for example, blue, red, or not to perform the look-ahead effect) according to the result of the determination is performed. The process of performing the hold display is performed in the normal display mode). As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is digested, the look-ahead effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is previously suggested by the display mode is executed.

By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display for confirming a big hit) appears in a mode with high expectation, a special sound (for example, a cure) may be output in accordance with the look-ahead execution. many. However, since such a special sound (look-ahead effect) is played at the timing of winning the game ball that occurs irregularly, the game ball is won at the timing when there is no space in the channel, and the look-ahead judgment is made. If there is a chance of winning, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even though the look-ahead judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode with high expectation (blue or red). There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline without it.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 258, as described above, the special sound is output before the game ball is won by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the special sound (look-ahead effect) is output. The channel that can be assigned is in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more accurately, the judgment to output the special sound (the judgment to perform the look-ahead effect) has not been made yet). It is possible to execute the channel reservation process reserved in.

For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 258, the number of jackpot determinations (number of holds) currently in the hold state is 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Assuming that the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the player usually wins a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. Play the game (handle operation) so that it is played. As a result, when the game balls are won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, up to four big hit judgments are put on hold according to those winnings, and the big hit judgments are made. Each time the game is put on hold, processing related to hold display and look-ahead effect according to the winning is performed.

Here, as a look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. Then, when the look-ahead determination is won and the look-ahead effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cure) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the prize is won and the look-ahead judgment is made), and a specific mode is used. The hold display with will appear.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed is also, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, when the look-ahead judgment is won and the look-ahead effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cure) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing when the prize is won), but this is maintained in the state of waiting for execution. Then, after waiting for the channel targeted for channel reservation processing to become free, a special sound (for example, a cure) is output. It should be noted that the hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing when a special sound (for example, a cure) is output, or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold won by the look-ahead determination occurs. good. However, when the hold display with a specific mode appears at the timing when the hold that wins the look-ahead judgment occurs, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed and the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed are not executed. In any of the look-ahead effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can appear as a specific aspect.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) (not shown) is used. Detects this as an object and triggers the channel reservation process to start.

For example, at the timing tY11 shown in FIG. 258, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, and the "countdown" is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of assigning "voice" to a predetermined channel and playing it is performed. The countdown voice starts from "30", counts down every second, and ends when the countdown reaches "0". Further, even during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect in which the decorative pattern is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

However, for the "Torii of the shrine (background display in prayer mode)" in such a display area and the "countdown sound" in the predetermined channel, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. This can be generated by itself (triggered by detection by the sensor), and is not related to the production content (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the ongoing symbol fluctuation. It does not depend on the result of the jackpot judgment. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be changed to different contents as appropriate, but by performing such processing, a predetermined time (30 seconds) is determined. It is now possible to keep the channel in use (here, the state of use by "countdown voice" that does not show any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends is assigned to a predetermined channel (channel reservation processing).

Then, until the predetermined time (30 seconds) in which the channel reservation process is executed elapses, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 258, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occurred. Then, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, as described above, while the "countdown sound" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the judgment result (look-ahead winning) that the look-ahead effect is performed as a result of the judgment according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, a cure) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a waiting state. The special sound (for example, Cuin) that has been put into the waiting state in this way is output as a post-notification sound that is output after the winning time at the timing tY12 in which a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tY11. Become.

On the other hand, a prize is generated between the time when the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no prize, or if a special judgment result is not obtained (the pre-reading effect was not won), even if the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown voice" ends is reached, it is special. No sound is played.

According to such a configuration, between the time when the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (look-ahead winning) may be obtained by the judgment according to the prize, the special sound (cuein) is not output at that time and the "countdown voice" is output. It will be executed as a post-notification effect to output at the timing when it is finished and a vacancy occurs in the channel. Therefore, even though a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the absence of a free channel. Further, even if a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 and tY12, a special sound (cuein) corresponding to the special determination result (pre-reading winning) is produced at one timing in which at least one channel has a vacancy. Since the playback is aimed at tY12, as long as it is confirmed whether or not a special sound (cuein) is generated at the timing tY12, the special judgment result (look-ahead) within a relatively long time of the timings tY11 to tY12. You will be able to easily recognize whether you have won).

When the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are vacant at the timing tY12 and played. However, if the special sound (cuein) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the "countdown voice" has been assigned, the channel reservation process and the corresponding post-notification effect can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it is useful in that it can be realized and the range of production can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

Further, in this embodiment, as for the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image, the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown voice" ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) are performed. It is designed to continue to be displayed even after the timing of termination has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request the execution of such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands to re-occur the channel reservation process each time the number of reservations decreases, and before holding their hands. It is considered that it seems that it is beneficial to hold your hand over the "Torii of the shrine" as a background image (the probability that the special sound will be played at the timing of the later announcement is higher). Yes, the prayer mode background display is continued until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a button release operation). However, in reality, the player holds his hand over even if the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image or the "Torii of the shrine" is not displayed as the background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the assigned state for a predetermined time is only performed by the predetermined sound (countdown sound). Therefore, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown sound” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the post-notification sound is finished.

Further, when the player holds his / her hand again during the period from timing tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the playback time of the "countdown voice" is from the time when a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the re-detection. May be extended to output a special sound according to the pre-reading winning when the timing is reached.

In addition, such a prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol fluctuation is in the fluctuating state but also when the symbol fluctuation is not in the fluctuating state. You may try to do it. Further, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to the action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor.

However, when the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (second prize) are compared with the case where the special sound (cuein) is output at the time of winning. Since it is difficult to know which of the 2nd hold), the 3rd prize (3rd hold), and the 4th prize (4th hold) has obtained the special judgment result (look-ahead winning), the look-ahead winning There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline due to the hold being digested without recognizing that the hold has been made. On the other hand, the content reproduced as a special sound is not a uniform sound (here, "cuein"), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), and the third prize (first hold). It is also conceivable to make the difference depending on which hold of the 4th prize (4th hold) is pre-reading. However, with this, the content changes from the sound played in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed (here, "cuein"), so it is possible to grasp that the look-ahead was won. There is concern that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is obtained for any timing between the timings tY11 and tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). A process of varying the reproduction time of the special sound (here, "cuein") starting from the timing tY12 is performed according to whether (pre-reading winning) is obtained.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) of winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 and tY12. However, in this case, the special sound (here, "cuein") is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 259, a case where a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the second prize (second hold) in which the prize is won at a relatively early timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. Assuming, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, and if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 6 seconds, "Kyuin" is played twice. Then, a sound in the form of "cue in cue" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 260, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the third prize (third hold) in which the prize is won at a relatively late timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if the special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 9 seconds, "Kyuin" is 3 It is played back in batches, and a sound in the form of "cure cue cue in" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 261, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the fourth prize (fourth hold) in which the prize is won at an extremely late timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced from the timing tY12 for 12 seconds. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if the special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 12 seconds, "Kyuin" is 4 It is played back in batches and outputs a sound such as "Kyuin Kyuin Kyuin Kyuin".

According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) has been obtained between the timings tY11 and tY12, as well as the timing. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by winning a prize. In this example, it is suggested that the shorter the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) is obtained by the winning that occurs at the earlier timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. Therefore, the longer the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more it is suggested that the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by the winning that occurred at the later timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. ..

In this example, it can be assumed that only the first prize is generated between the timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the prize. In this case as well, it depends on the timing when the prize is generated. Therefore, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is changed as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holds is limited to 4 at the maximum, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "cooked" 1 regardless of the prize timing. Set the playback time for the second prize, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the playback time for the second "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and make a special judgment in the third prize. If a result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the 4th winning, the special sound is obtained regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the playback time for four "cueins".

Further, in this embodiment, when the look-ahead winning is obtained, "Kyuin" is played as a special sound, but the first judgment result (for example, relatively expected degree) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won. Depending on whether a low look-ahead win) or a second determination result (for example, a look-ahead win with a relatively high expectation) is obtained, the reproduced content as a special sound may be changed. For example, if the first judgment result (for example, a look-ahead winning with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won, "Kyuin" is played as a special sound, whereas the look-ahead when a prize is won is played. When the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the judgment, if "Dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timing tY11 and tY12. In addition to the prediction of whether or not the pre-reading win was obtained by winning, the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) and the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) as the pre-reading winning It will also be possible to make predictions about which one was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 262, the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) in which the winning is performed at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. ) Has been obtained, and it is assumed that the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was won at an extremely late timing. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced in the "cure" mode for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the "dokan" mode for another 9 seconds.

According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the "cure" mode is 3 seconds, the first prize is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12 (1st prize). It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) is obtained by the look-ahead determination in the first hold). Also, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was possible to win the pre-reading in the pre-reading judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold) that won the prize at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Further, according to the fact that the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) in which the prize was won at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the mode of "dokan" after the one "cuein" that has been played back is completed, the second pre-reading judgment in the fourth prize (fourth hold) is the second. It will be possible to predict that a judgment result (a look-ahead winning with a relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

Alternatively, when the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the first start port 2002, "Kyuin" is played as a special sound. , When the second judgment result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the second start port 2004, "Dokan" may be reproduced as a special sound. .. In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the first starting port 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is performed. Depending on the presence, it is desirable to play "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 262 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the mode of "cure" is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 can be set. The first prize (first hold) that won the prize at an extremely early timing is the prize to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first judgment result (the first special figure side) is the pre-reading judgment corresponding to this. It will be possible to predict that a look-ahead winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the look-ahead was also won in the look-ahead judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Further, according to the fact that the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment in the first prize (first hold) in which the prize is won at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the form of "Dokan" after the one "Kyuin" that has been played is completed, the fourth prize (fourth hold) is on the second starting port 2004 side. It becomes possible to predict that the second determination result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead determination corresponding to the winning prize.

As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening while the channel reservation process is being executed. , The case where the look-ahead winning in the look-ahead production is obtained is illustrated. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262 is, in short, a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received in a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that makes it possible to avoid a channel shortage that occurs when a special sound is output when a judgment result is obtained and cannot be output. Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the look-ahead winning in the look-ahead effect.

[Channel usage restrictions]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment monitors the number of free channels as the game progresses, and when the number becomes less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds is recorded. The ratio of restricting the execution of output-related processing is increased (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, at least for some game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is restricted from the stage before the number of free channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of free channels approaches 0. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of free channels to zero.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested (every time the start condition is satisfied), the digested symbol variation is Determine the availability of channels during the execution period. As a result, when there is a margin in the availability of the channel, the ratio of channel use restriction (channel restriction level) is lowered at least until the symbol variation to be determined is completed, and the channel is vacant. When there is no room in the situation, increase the rate at which channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) at least until the symbol variation targeted for judgment is completed, and set the channel restriction with such symbol variation as one unit. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution period of the symbol change targeted for determination is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as the channel restriction level, and as the level value becomes higher, the ratio of restricting the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound increases.

FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the process related to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

It is assumed that it is determined that the pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 263, the value of the channel limit level set last time is reset as the process of step S3101. The reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation is completed.

Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the effect pattern of the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the symbol variation to the start of the reach effect, or the symbol). Specify "X", which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) based on the timing when the channel has the least vacancy within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the symbol without starting the reach effect. do. Further, as the process of step S3103, the channel is channeled within the period of the latter half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol fluctuation) based on the type of the effect pattern of the latter half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern. Specify "Y", which is the number of free channels (minimum number of free channels) based on the timing when the most free channels are exhausted.

However, when the effect pattern in which the symbol is stopped without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol change is selected, the symbol change corresponding to the "second half of the change" is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process itself of step S3103, or the maximum value that can be set as the number of free channels "Y" in the process of step S3103 (a value that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

Next, as the process of step S3104, the "X" specified in the process of step S3102 is compared with the "Y" specified in the process of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y". Based on the value on the side where the minimum number of free channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of free channels), the channel restriction level is set at least until the symbol variation targeted for determination is completed. As a result, from the start to the end of the symbol variation targeted for determination, the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. , It is expected that the number of vacant channels will not be reduced to 0, and that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the appearance of an unintended production mode will be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the "minimum number of free channels" used for the determination is specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This means that the production content of the first half of the fluctuation (the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the start of the reach production, etc.) is shared by multiple production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). Therefore, it is considered that the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation as a unit. ..

However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel restriction level setting does not necessarily have to be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. With the pattern as one unit, the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel has the least vacancy within the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

In addition, the "minimum number of free channels" here refers to sounds that are automatically generated when the effect pattern (effect content) to be determined progresses (BGM-related, symbol stop-related according to the jackpot determination, and jackpot determination). It shows how many channels are left as vacant state when they are assigned to each channel only for the corresponding sound effect related). Therefore, button press sounds (sounds associated with effects generated based on button operations, etc.), volume adjustment completion sounds, various notification sounds, block winning sounds (sounds associated with winning general winning openings), and pending winning sounds (first). The production patterns (production content) to be judged, such as the sound associated with winning the starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004) and the normal electric production sound (sound associated with the production according to the judgment of the normal symbol), have been developed. Various sounds that are not always executed by just playing are not included as the judgment target.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing the value of the channel restriction level separately set for the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3104, and showing an example of the restriction content separately determined for the channel restriction level. ..

As shown in FIG. 264, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, first, among various game sounds, the block winning sound (winning to the general winning opening) is used as the sound to be restricted from using the channel. (Sounds associated with), hold winning sounds (sounds associated with winning the first start port 2002 or second start port 2004), general electric production sounds (sounds associated with the production according to the judgment of a normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol change in which there is no room in the vacant channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds. Restrictions on channel usage can occur.

More specifically, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 264. Set to "0". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a margin in the vacant channel and the symbol fluctuation is executed, and the sound that is subject to the restriction of channel use (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). None of these are restricted, and if there is a prize in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol change, the block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and the first start opening 2002 or during the execution of the symbol change is executed. If there is a prize in the second start port 2004, the hold prize sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and when the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol change, the normal pattern corresponding to the effect is performed. The electric effect sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and when the volume adjustment is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to the predetermined empty channel and played.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restriction is performed based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 264. Set the level to "1". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a slight margin in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction. Of the sounds), the channel use limit (25% limit) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a prize in the general prize opening during the execution of the symbol change and this is detected, the prize balls for the quantity corresponding to the prize are paid out, but this is specified for the block prize sound. It will be processed so that it will not be assigned to a free channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the schedule data for sound generation according to the winning to the general winning opening and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 264. Set to "2". That is, in this case, assuming that the vacant channel is in a situation where the symbol fluctuation is executed with a relatively small margin, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, and volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are applied. Of the completed sounds), the channel use limit (50% limit) is generated for the two sounds of the block winning sound and the holding winning sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned restriction on the block winning sound, when there is a winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the quantity corresponding to the winning. Although the prize balls for the minutes are paid out and the above-mentioned first and second start opening winning processes are performed, the reserved winning sounds are processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the reserved winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 264. Is set to "3". That is, in this case, assuming that there is no room for symbol fluctuation in the vacant channel, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction. A channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound). That is, in this case, in addition to the restrictions on the block winning sound and the holding winning sound described above, even if the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the normal electric effect sound is not included. Will be processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined free channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the symbol change, the volume adjustment itself is performed according to the volume adjustment operation, but the volume adjustment completed sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, do not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the sound of the Fuden production sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, and do not play the Fuden production sound or the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

According to such a configuration, when a symbol change is executed in which the number of vacant channels in a state where no sound is not assigned becomes less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation is not less than the number, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, some game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0. Since the execution of related processing is restricted and the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation will be suitably suppressed.

Further, in the above configuration, among various game sounds, the sound for which channel use is restricted is not the most important "directing sound related to the jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other "sounds associated with winning". , "Sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment". That is, even if the channel use is restricted during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect of whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is not restricted and is appropriately executed. Therefore, during the execution of the symbol variation. The decline in the entertainment interest when the channel usage is restricted will be suppressed.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of sound that are candidates for channel use restriction among various game sounds are prepared (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level increases (the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation), the number of types of sounds that are subject to channel usage restrictions will be increased. However, a method that limits the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0, and increases the ratio of execution limitation as the number of free channels decreases. The method is not limited to this, and for example, the method described below with reference to FIG. 265 may be adopted.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction content separately determined for each channel restriction level.

As shown in FIG. 265, in this alternative example, the channel is used according to the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. A restricted lottery will be held as to whether or not restrictions will be applied. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared and a determination result indicating that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, one game sound (for example, volume adjustment completion sound) is obtained. The restriction processing related to the channel use is performed only for (etc.).

For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is set to 0/100, and the channel is used. The channel use restriction process is not executed for the specific game sound to be restricted (for example, the volume adjustment completion sound).

However, when the channel restriction level becomes 1 or more, the probability that a judgment result indicating that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is obtained increases as the value increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum free channel). The same probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), and the same probability is 50/100 when the channel restriction level is 2 (minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel restriction level. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), and the same probability is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when the determination result that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, the restriction processing related to the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

Even with such a configuration, if the number of vacant channels in the state where no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is increased. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than a predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds among the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sounds), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0. Since the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, it is preferable to generate a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It will be expected to be suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completed sound) is played during the execution period of the symbol change, the minimum free channel during the execution period of the symbol change is confirmed. It will be possible to infer the possibility that the number will run out, and it will be possible to promote game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) commensurate with the inference.

In the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265, the minimum number of free channels is specified from the occurrence status of the notice effects after the determination processes related to the various notice effects are executed based on the effect patterns, and the specified minimum vacancy is specified. We decided to set the channel limit level based on the number of channels, but this is not always the case. For example, since it is possible to predict in advance how many sounds will be allocated to the channel at the same time during the symbol fluctuation period for each effect pattern, the susceptibility to channel shortage is classified in advance according to the effect pattern. I will do it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the higher the likelihood of channel shortage in which the effect pattern is classified in advance, the higher the ratio of channel restriction may be set. That is, in this case, when a specific type of production pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, many channels are not used and empty channels are not actually used without button operation or various prizes. Even if there is a margin in the number of, there may be a situation where the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound may be restricted while the symbol variation is being executed. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid the number of beings becoming 0, and even when such a process is executed, "the number of free channels during the symbol change is relatively large. When the number is small, the rate at which the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high, and when the number of free channels during the symbol variation is relatively large, the rate at which the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately because it is a phenomenon that the player does not feel any discomfort even from the player side. Further, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound is restricted, it becomes possible to infer the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause channel shortage.

Further, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, the channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit, but the channel is developed as the production content progresses within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied, and channel restriction may be executed according to the channel restriction level each time. Alternatively, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, the channel restriction level is set unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and the channel restriction level is reached. Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

By the way, in the configurations exemplified in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, the sound to be restricted from using the channel is not the most important "directing sound related to the jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that. It was decided to use only "sounds associated with winning", "sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment". However, since some of these sounds occur less frequently than the staging sounds, in order to realize the restriction processing that enables more effective securing of vacant channels, "related to the jackpot determination". It is desirable to adopt "directed sound" as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is executed for the "effect sound related to the jackpot judgment", there is a concern that the effect sound will not be reproduced and the effect will be lacking in excitement. If the jackpot symbol is stopped in a certain situation, the game entertainment may be reduced.

In this regard, in the configurations exemplified in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, among the "directing sounds related to the jackpot determination", only the "directing related to the pattern fluctuation that is in the pending state and will be digested in the future" is the production. If the use of the sound channel is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 265 or another example), the effect related to the result of the symbol change during execution is satisfied. Therefore, it will be possible to adopt the production sound with high frequency of occurrence as the restriction target without any restriction.

For example, when a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 during the period when the symbol change is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to the prize is put on hold, the hold is usually made. Performs a determination process as to whether to perform a look-ahead effect for the jackpot determination in the state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a look-ahead effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether the pending jackpot determination is a jackpot winner is performed. Become.

However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about vacancy (such as when the symbol fluctuation with a minimum number of vacant channels of 0 or 1 is being executed), the channel usage is restricted to "pending state". If "the sound produced according to the effect related to the symbol change that will be digested in the future" is targeted, a prize will be generated for the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the corresponding jackpot judgment will be suspended. Even if the state is set, the determination process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed for the jackpot determination put in the hold state, and both the look-ahead effect and the effect sound corresponding to the pre-reading effect are not performed.

According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and the vacancy becomes uncertain, the channels that are assigned to the production related to the future symbol fluctuations that are not the running symbol fluctuations are being executed. Since it will be possible to supply the production sound related to the fluctuation of the sound, it will not have any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation during execution, and the production sound with high frequency of occurrence will be restricted. You will be able to. In addition, the effect to be restricted is only "the effect related to the symbol change for the future that is in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is restricted, it will be restricted when it is put on hold in the future. Since the effect during the symbol change (the content of the effect according to the effect pattern) that is not set is always executed, the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the restriction target of the effect can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, when "directing sound related to big hit judgment" is targeted for restriction, if only the directing sound of the directing (directing display, directing sound) is targeted for restriction (no sound output), the production lacks excitement. In the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about availability, a prize will be won and the jackpot judgment will be put on hold. Sometimes, the judgment process for the look-ahead effect itself is not executed, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed, so that a special result (pre-reading winning) cannot be obtained in the look-ahead judgment. Only the same effect situation as when the pre-reading effect is executed (holding display when the look-ahead effect is not executed) is obtained, and it becomes possible to suitably avoid the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the effect execution lacking in excitement.

In addition, when the "effect sound related to the jackpot judgment" is restricted, the judgment process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed when the prize is won and the jackpot judgment is put on hold, and the effect display and effect related to the look-ahead effect are performed. I tried not to do both with sound, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the "directing sound related to the jackpot judgment" is targeted for restriction, the judgment processing for the look-ahead effect is performed when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during the symbol change arrives. Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect, but limits them, and when a specific timing arrives during the symbol change, only the effect display and the effect sound are restricted. You may cancel and do this. That is, in this case, the effect display related to the look-ahead effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing), which is different from the case where the "effect sound related to the jackpot determination" is not restricted (normal time), and is special. Since the look-ahead effect is executed after making it appear as if the result (pre-reading winning) was not obtained, the look-ahead effect is suppressed while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to not outputting the effect sound corresponding to the look-ahead effect. You will be able to do it favorably.

In addition, as processing related to future production under the situation where channel use is restricted, ・ Judgment processing for pre-reading production is performed when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, a specific timing during symbol change has arrived. Until this is done, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not executed, and these are restricted. The first restriction processing is a configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed.
-The game progresses when the second restricted processing is such that the judgment process for the look-ahead effect itself is not executed when a prize is won and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed. Among them, when the symbol variation in which the number of empty channels in the state where no sound is not assigned is less than the predetermined number is executed, compared with the case where the symbol variation in which the number of the same empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is executed. Therefore, the ratio of execution of either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first restricted processing was performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is "A", and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restriction processing is performed is "B". When, it is more desirable to execute either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing so that the relationship becomes an "A <B" relationship. That is, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the vacancy causes greater anxiety, both the effect display and the effect sound are restricted instead of the first restricted processing that limits only the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second restriction pretreatment is increased, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more preferably suppressed.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in the output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is lowered. It is possible to perform a process of ending the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel in the state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is completed in this way, it is possible to execute the process of increasing the volume of the other game sounds for which the assignment to the channel is continued (channel special opening process).

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel allocation mode of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is lowered (suppressed state)). It will reduce the number of channels in (increase the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds, the number of channels in use is reduced. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is no longer output.

FIG. 266 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special opening process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 266, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "normal BGM reproduction" corresponding to the above is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and corresponds to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "staging A reproduction" is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction, effect A reproduction), the sound of "effect A reproduction" is in the stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of effect. At the timing tk13 (during the execution of the symbol variation), the reproduction channels 08 and 09 are removed and the reproduction is terminated. In this way, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect, the effect content of the predetermined effect pattern can be obtained by finishing the allocation of the effect sound from the channel and promptly changing it to an empty channel. It will be possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a new sound cannot be assigned and played due to a shortage of empty channels as it progresses.

However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is in the middle of the effect (during the execution of the symbol change), the effect sound is not assigned from the channel and the channel is changed to an empty channel. The number of effect sounds in the reproduced state will decrease, and there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in the effect pattern has decreased by the decrease.

Therefore, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), first, before the timing tk13 for removing the sound of the “staging A reproduction” from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and ending the reproduction arrives. During the period from "timing tk12" to the arrival of "timing tk14" after the timing tk13, the sound of "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the effect B displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced. It is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 to be in the state of reproduction (here, stereo reproduction). Then, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of the “staging B reproduction” is put into the reproduction state, the timing tk13 at which the “aging A reproduction” is terminated. In line with the arrival of the sound, a process (volume suppression process) is performed in which a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" are kept assigned to the channel and the volume is reduced.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), the sound of "production B reproduction" in this explanatory example is output as a production sound corresponding to the step production in which the production content can be developed up to four times. After the production content has been developed three times (step 1, step 2, step 3) in sequence, the production is performed as to whether the production content is further developed according to step 4. Therefore, a process (volume suppression process) is performed in which a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the step effect are kept assigned to the channel and the volume is lowered. If a high-expected staging mode that further develops into the staging content according to step 4 appears when the volume suppression process is completed and the volume is returned to the normal volume (a staging with a relatively high expectation). While the specific staging sound corresponding to the staging content of the step 4 is output as the sound of the "staging B reproduction", the staging content according to the step 3 does not develop into the staging content according to the step 4. When a low-expected staging mode in which the staging is completed appears (a staging with a relatively low degree of expectation), a staging sound different from the specific staging sound is output as the sound of the "staging B reproduction".

According to such a configuration, an effect design is made in which the timing tk13 arrives aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and the “effect A” is performed while the volume suppression process is performed. Since the sound of "playback" is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is terminated, the number of channels in use has decreased (the sound of "production A playback" is in the non-playback state. It will be possible to make it difficult to notice (what was done).

In particular, in the examples shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (c), the production content having a relatively high expectation (the production content developing to step 4) and the production content having a relatively low expectation (step). Within the period in which the production content (the production of whether or not it develops to step 4) that leads to any of the production content (the production content that does not develop to 4) appears (the period in which it is unclear whether or not it develops), the above-mentioned The volume suppression process is executed, and the sound of "Production A reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 to end the reproduction. According to such a configuration, not only the volume of the staging sound is lowered, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the staging B (sound of "staging B reproduction"). Since the production A (sound of "production A playback") is terminated at, the volume of the production sound that was the target of volume suppression including the sound of "production B playback" was returned. Occasionally, even if the sound of "Production A playback" is prevented from being reproduced, the production content with relatively high expectations (the production content that develops to step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectations (production content that develops to step 4). It becomes possible to attract attention to which of the effects (contents of the effect that does not develop to step 4) appears, and to make it difficult to notice that the sound of "production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

Moreover, in the volume suppression process according to this explanation example, although the volume is lowered while a plurality of production sounds including the sound of "Production B reproduction" are assigned to the channels, all the production sounds are reduced. The volume is not lowered, and the specific production sound (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is continuously reproduced at the normal volume. That is, in this case, the volume of a plurality of staging sounds is lowered while the volume of some staging sounds (sounds of "normal BGM reproduction") is being played normally without being suppressed, and thus the sounds are distinguished. Since the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated while the sound is made more difficult, it can be made more difficult to notice because the sound of "Production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced. It will be like.

Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the sound reproduction of the "effect A reproduction" is not terminated immediately after the volume suppression process is performed on the plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has passed since the volume suppression process was started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive, the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, the player may be attracted to the staging sounds A and B in which the change of "volume decrease" occurs, but the volume decreases to a specific value. When the state of not changing at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest is no longer diminished. Therefore, the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is aimed at such timing. By terminating the reproduction of the sound, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In particular, in this explanatory example, the volume of the effect sound targeted for the volume suppression process is gradually reduced, and the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, it is decided to start the reproduction of the sound of the "effect B reproduction" in the state of reproducing the sound of the "effect A reproduction", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the sound of "Production B reproduction" is being reproduced, the sound of "Production A reproduction" is started to be reproduced, and while the sound of "Production B reproduction" is being reproduced in the suppressed state, "Production A reproduction" is performed. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be terminated.

Further, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be an effect accompanied by an effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as an effect of only sound, for example.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of "effect B reproduction" is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, the sound of "Production B playback" is started to be played based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.), and the sound of "Staging A playback" is played while the sound of "Staging B playback" is played. The reproduction of the above-mentioned may be terminated in the above-described manner.

Further, it is not always necessary to gradually reduce the volume of the staging sound that is the target of the volume suppression process. On the contrary, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned step by step. In addition, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a lower volume than usual, it is difficult to notice that the sound reproduction of "Direction A reproduction" has ended. Is possible.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the specific effect sound according to the effect pattern (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is excluded from the volume suppression process, and the normal volume remains unchanged. Although it is designed to be continuously played, the volume of all the staging sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. On the contrary, with respect to the sound of "Production A reproduction", the volume may be maintained without necessarily lowering the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume may be lowered. While the player is attracting the interest of the player to the sound of "Production B playback" in the state of being played, the playback of the sound of "Production A playback" is terminated, and then the sound of "Production B playback" is included. Even if the sound of "Production A playback" is not played back when the volume of multiple production sounds that were targeted for volume suppression is returned, the production content with relatively high expectations (step 4). The sound of "Production A playback" is reproduced, attracting interest in which of the production content that develops into (the production content that develops into) and the production content that has relatively low expectations (the production content that does not develop into step 4) appears. You will be able to make it harder to notice that it is no longer being done.

Further, at least during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sounds of "effect A reproduction" and "effect B reproduction" is performed (after the volume of "effect B reproduction" is lowered from the normal value). (Until it is returned to the normal value), even if a prize is awarded to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in order to more preferably maintain the interest in the sound of "Direction B reproduction". It is desirable not to play the corresponding hold winning sound. Further, even if a special result (pre-reading winning) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when a prize is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the staging sound corresponding to the pre-reading effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the sound reproduction of "effect A reproduction" is terminated within the period when the volume of the effect sound is decreased, and when the period ends, the sound is assigned to the channel in the state of volume decrease until then. We decided to raise the volume of the production sound that had been used (return to the original volume value), but in addition to this, at the end of the period, a special production sound that was not previously assigned to the channel will be added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and played (played at the normal volume). With such a configuration, it became interesting to see if a special production sound was played when the volume was returned, and it was further noticed that the sound of "Production A playback" was no longer played. You will be able to make it difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels used after the volume is restored is smaller than before the volume is lowered, there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation may be lowered, but a special production sound. Is newly assigned to the channel and played (played at the normal volume), so that it is the same as or more than that before the volume is lowered and after the volume is restored (two or more production sounds are sent to the channel). Since it will be possible to use the channel of (when newly assigned), it is also preferable that the player feels as if the expectation level has decreased. Will be avoided. In this case, the special effect sound may or may not be reproduced when the volume is returned, suggesting that the expectation is relatively high when the special effect sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

If you want to newly assign a special production sound that was not assigned to the channel when the volume is returned and play it, the channel that became vacant due to the sound assignment of "Production A playback" being removed. It is desirable to assign a special production sound to. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a wide range of production with a small amount of channel resources.

Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and is, for example, a restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265. As "Production A" is adopted, the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the more the channel is specially opened (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol fluctuation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to make people feel uneasy about running out of channels, "Direction A" can be continuously output without being terminated in the middle. become.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs processing to advance the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns the sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel for reproduction. Perform the process of making it. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and output in a suppressed mode or silently ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is lowered to a specific value and output) and an operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is detected in this state, the big hit symbol (corresponding to the symbol) is caused by the symbol fluctuation. A special effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is output in an unsuppressed manner (suppressed operation sound output processing). The degree of expectation suggested by the special production may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special effect sound corresponding to the operation detection is output, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed mode or silently. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage status of the channel seems to be affordable. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety such as "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". This will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

By the way, when it is attempted to output a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (sound of "BGM reproduction") to a channel in a suppression mode or silently, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that a process (process of reducing the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the existing sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a valid period for the effect reception), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern ("" It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate a valid period of the effect reception) after the sound of "BGM reproduction") is set to be output in a suppressed mode or silently.

However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the valid period of the production reception is generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (production reception) is performed at any timing within this valid period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume returned to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the sound corresponding to the sound is started to be reproduced at an indefinite timing.

In addition to the process of returning the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "BGM reproduction dedicated to special production sound reproduction". It is also conceivable to perform a process of regenerating. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the content of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and ended, the timing of the symbol stop, etc., it is within the valid period. While it is uncertain (depending on the player) at what timing the operation (directing reception) will be performed, if the operation (directing reception) is used as an opportunity to newly play the sound of "BGM playback". However, there is a concern that so-called sound deviation will occur between the timing of various productions and the timing of stopping the design after that, and the interest in the game will be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern (a plurality of sound data ( For example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, sound data at the second half of the super reach effect, etc.) are predetermined according to the time series specified by the corresponding schedule data for sound generation. Performs the process of sequentially allocating to channels. Then, among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. When assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series, the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel and playback is started from a timing before the valid period of the effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the valid period ends. It is designed to maintain the assigned state for a predetermined channel and play it for a long period of time until the timing after that.

In this regard, in a part of the section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, the process is suppressed or silently applied to the sound output as compared with the other sections. When the data content that stipulates that is performed is preset and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data, a part of the section (special). It is designed to have a time-series relationship in which the valid period of the production reception occurs within the period). In addition to this, regardless of the timing of the operation by the player within the valid period of the above-mentioned effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The sound of "BGM reproduction" is a special production sound according to the production reception, straddling two sections in the specific sound data, the period after (partial section) is completed (other section). It is designed to be played back in an unsuppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, super). Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach effect) to the predetermined channels according to the time series specified by the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of silent output (special period)". In addition, when the player's operation is received for the production in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, it is special in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is set to start playing, the sound of "BGM playback" that is in the playback state on the predetermined channel is "output in a suppressed mode or silently" regardless of the production reception (special period). Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in the form of being mixed in with the special production sound being reproduced. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) will be reproduced, it will be possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppressed mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently, the special directed sound is not suppressed by the highly immediate processing triggered by this. It is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation between various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that, while the reproduction is started at.

FIG. 267 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example of executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described with reference to FIG. 267.

As shown in FIG. 267 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ts11, the effect is advanced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start to the end of the symbol variation when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. It may be reproduced as a sound material) based on the schedule data for sound generation, or the entire period of the symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is them. It may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 267, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in the playback state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 267 (a) and 267 (b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state is special. Silence data content is set at timing ts12, before the arrival of timing ts13 when the operation valid period (valid period of effect reception) is given to give an operation opportunity that triggers the generation of the staging sound. It is designed to be in the playback state in some sections. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content, and it seems that there is a margin in the usage status of the channel. While the atmosphere is provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This provides an operation opportunity for the player to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". It will be possible to do so, and this will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

Moreover, the operation validity period according to this explanatory example is the timing ts16 at which a part of the section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is terminated even if there is no operation by the player. At the timing ts15, which is before the arrival of, the period is terminated so that the operation by the player is not accepted for the production. Therefore, no matter which timing of the operation valid period the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM reproduction" will be in the reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content. It will be possible to generate a special production sound according to the operation by the player while the atmosphere is provided in which the usage status of the cage channel seems to be affordable. The operation valid period ends not only when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when the operation by the player is accepted for production. When the timing ts15 arrives without the operation by the player, the special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation by the player is performed at that timing.

Then, in this explanatory example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is accepted for the effect at the timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned based on the acceptance of the effect. Special production sounds are assigned to channels 08 and 09, which are different from those of, 03, and played.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, the maximum time (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) from the start to the end of the operation valid period is set to "SY", and the operation valid period is terminated at this maximum time. When the time (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) until the end of a part of the section where silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is set to "BF", it is within the operation valid period. Regardless of which timing the player operates, the special production sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time of "SY + α (> BF)" and played.

According to such a configuration, the timing ts16 always arrives when the special effect sound is in the playback state, regardless of the timing during which the operation is valid. It becomes possible to output the sound of "BGM reproduction" as a non-suppressed mode so as to be mixed in with the special production sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special effect sound to the output of the "BGM reproduction" sound as an unsuppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , The buffer period for restoring the output period of the special production sound in an unsuppressed manner (the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored in an unsuppressed manner by being mixed with the special production sound). By making it function as a period that makes it difficult to notice that, when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is not restored as a non-suppressed mode, and the discomfort caused by restoring it after a predetermined time is caused. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

Then, after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction in this way, when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the non-suppressed mode. Playback of the special production sound will be terminated while in the state.

In the above explanatory example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound starts" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound ends" are operated by the player as shown in FIG. 267 (b). It will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow according to the accepted timing, but regardless of which timing they correspond to, the timing ts16 arrives when the special production sound is in the playback state. , It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, "a feeling of strangeness due to the sound of" BGM reproduction "not being restored as a non-suppressive mode when the operation by the player is accepted but being restored after a predetermined time" is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly transferred to the reproduction state in the normal section while the special effect sound having a large initial volume value is attracting attention.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, when the operation by the player is received for the effect, the special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but the specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination. The special production sound may be generated based on the fact that the production has been accepted only when the conditions are satisfied. Even if a specific effect condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when the player's operation is received within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced. Then, regardless of the timing of the operation within the operation valid period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly put into the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 267.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is shortened compared to the case where the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect) is reproduced. The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section in the state where the reproduction of (sound, etc.) is completed. In this case, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the sound of BGM reproduction is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end. According to such a configuration, there is a silent period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) and the return of the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if a revival effect that raises the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during this silent period, it is expected that the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. May be good. In this case, at the timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated and this may be made an empty channel.

In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction by also performing a movable effect of operating a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to secretly shift the reproduced sound to the reproduced state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is silently output in a part of the section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound is suppressed more than the sound of "BGM reproduction" in other sections. It suffices if it is output by. Here, the suppressed mode can be exemplified as a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced, and the like.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel itself is set to the suppression mode or the time-series period in which the sound is silenced, so that the "BGM reproduction" can be performed. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently just by playing it without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, it is not always necessary to set a time-series period in which the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. For example, at timing ts12, the sound of "BGM reproduction" may be set. Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, the process of increasing the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (the process of returning to the initial volume value) is performed with the effect reception as an opportunity. Try not to. Then, when the specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. The process of increasing from the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without increasing the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from the specific value. good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, a restriction process for making it difficult for a new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel is performed at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the arrival of the timing ts12 to the timing ts16. Is desirable. It should be noted that such restriction processing has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol change during execution, such as a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric effect sound, and an adjustment sound. It is desirable that a specific game sound is targeted for restriction, and that the specific game sound subject to this restriction is not newly assigned to a channel and its reproduction is not performed.

Further, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is used on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. It is desirable that it is not music but a production sound such as a sound effect or dialogue so that it does not overlap with the sound of It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed mode or silently. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of a specific effect sound should be terminated before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special production sound is not output.

Further, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM reproduction is emitted from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the staging sound on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of being silenced ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of production sounds including special production sounds are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM reproduction into those production sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is usually used. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the embodiment.

Further, such a suppressed operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265. "BGM playback sound" is adopted as the restriction target, and the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol variation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The ratio of the operation sound output processing under the suppression may be increased. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to cause anxiety that the special production sound is not output due to lack of channels. You will be able to do it.

[Channel allocation cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which sound data is not assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. It is feasible (channel allocation cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created by the operation by the player, the player operates the empty channel at the timing immediately before the player's favorite directing sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite directing sound or special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

The operation (channel allocation cancellation operation) in this explanatory example is not limited to the "button operation", and an example of an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 to pray is exemplified with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262. It may be a specific action that has been performed, in short, by a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect some state change that occurs when such a specific action to be detected (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed. It suffices that the sound assigned to the channel is removed from the channel and the reproduction is terminated when the detection is triggered.

FIG. 268 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when the processing related to such a channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 268, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM1 reproduction" according to the above (for example, the effect sound effect reproduced during the execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the reproduction channels 00, 01 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the production mode (for example, one song that is continuously played over multiple fluctuations in a time-saving game state, etc.) is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback). ) Is in the situation.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 268 (a) and 268 (b), among the sounds (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction) in these reproduction states, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). Is targeted for forcibly terminating the channel allocation when is detected, and when the timing tw12 is reached during the period when the symbol change is being executed, the effect reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is received. The permissible reception period can occur up to the timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) to be detected such as "operate a button to secure an empty channel" in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An operation instruction image prompting you to perform is displayed.

Here, FIG. 268 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed. Shown.

As shown in FIG. 268 (a), if the detection is not performed by the predetermined detection means until the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. Further, at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button to secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden.

Further, at the timing tw13, a process of assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproducing the sound is performed. In this explanatory example, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to empty channels by the detection by the predetermined detection means, the vacancy is secured in advance in the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11). It is possible to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) to a channel and play it. However, if a vacancy is not secured in advance for another channel, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be played back and output. Concerns will arise.

FIG. 268 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and detection is performed by a predetermined detection means during the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13. Shown.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), if detection is performed by a predetermined detection means before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channels 02, 03 are performed at the timing tw12a in which the detection is performed. The sound of "BGM2 playback" will be removed from. As a result, it becomes possible to secure in advance an empty channel (playback channel 02, 03) that can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmed sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. , The concern that a predetermined production sound (here, a big hit confirmed sound) cannot be reproduced and output will be resolved. Further, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated, and in this case, the music or dialogue as the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is completed (or). Since the playback will end at a halfway point without being played back (to a good point), I feel that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player. It becomes possible to make it easier, and it becomes possible to wait with confidence at the timing when a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced.

At the timing tw12a where the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. (Operate the button to secure a free channel) will be hidden, and the acceptance period for which the production acceptance of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted will end.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), in the timing tw13, not the playback channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as free channels, but other channels (playback channels 10, A predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) is assigned to 11) and played back. However, if there is no vacancy in the other channels at the timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmed sound) is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

Alternatively, when the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the fact that the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in the other channel. However, a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) may be assigned to the specific channel for reproduction. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmed sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, an effect sound different from the predetermined effect sound (here, here) is assigned to the specific channel. , BGM2) is assigned, but since the assigned state is canceled at that time triggered by the detection of a specific action such as a button operation (channel allocation cancellation operation), one channel (specific channel) is assigned. Just by using it, it becomes possible to reproduce the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and the predetermined production sound (here, the jackpot confirmed sound), respectively, and it becomes possible to effectively use the reproduction channel which is a finite resource. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing is later than the timing tw13. It is also possible to reproduce a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound).

Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound, the effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears, or the effect sound suggesting that the jackpot has been lost may be used. It is desirable that these staging sounds are selectively output based on the type of staging pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that the jackpot has been lost, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound may be output and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

On the other hand, the sound for which channel allocation is terminated when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is detected is not output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute it as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is overlooked when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and there is no problem. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment when the state is forcibly terminated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), it was decided to generate a reception period in which the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted when a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation arrives. Not limited to. For example, at least during the period when the specific sound to be excluded from the channel allocation is in the playback state, the acceptance of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel allocation of the specific sound is based on the acceptance. May be resolved. In this case, for example, a predetermined timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific sound was put into the playback state, and the state of the vacant channel secured in advance is maintained for a predetermined time, and then another sound is emitted to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played.

Further, as a method for canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forcibly terminated, in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned an empty channel at that time, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel allocation of a specific sound by allocating the channel by overwriting the channel with an extremely short allocation cancellation reception sound such as 1 second. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel allocation of the specific sound at an earlier stage when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the specific act is not forcibly terminated.

In addition, at least in the period from when the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted until the reproduction of the predetermined production sound using the vacant channel created by the production reception is completed, a new sound is produced. Specific game sounds (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound) that are not related to the effect of whether the jackpot symbol appears within the symbol fluctuation so that the channel is not wasted. , Look-ahead effect sound, etc.) should not be output.

In addition, the specific sound (sound of "BGM2 playback") that is the target of forced termination is played as a non-loop production sound such as a song or dialogue that is played only for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easier to remember the feeling that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. ..

[Abnormal notification while the production is being performed according to the production pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not always assigned to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state is not always output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on condition that it occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not always output, so that a margin is given to the channel by that amount and the risk of running out of empty channels is promoted. Will be expected.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though the timing should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "a movable body abnormality has occurred") and a game It is possible to execute an abnormality display (for example, "an abnormality has occurred in the back-middle movable effect unit 3200") in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600. In addition, it is desirable to display an abnormality in the display area so that it is possible to identify which of the plurality of movable decorations the abnormality has occurred, but it is desirable to group the plurality of movable decorations into groups. It may be an embodiment for specifying which of the groups the movable decorative body has an abnormality. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decorative unit 3100 and the like). , Back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back top movable production unit 3500, back bottom movable production unit 3700, etc.) An abnormality is displayed in the display area in a manner capable of identifying which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body the abnormality has occurred. It should be noted that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies having a relationship in which the drive sources are different from each other and are provided separately.

However, such an abnormality of the movable body is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and there is a high possibility that the player will not make any mistakes. Therefore, if various games (such as symbol fluctuations and big hit games) according to the jackpot judgment are being executed, the notification process may be executed openly during the execution period. On the other hand, it will have an adverse effect, which is a pleasure for the player. Not only that, there is no room for the number of free channels as much as the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is output, which may give the player anxiety that it will not be possible to output a new sound. , There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

However, on the other hand, the failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is also an aspect that it is difficult to assume a situation in which a sudden failure occurs when the movable decorative body does not operate at all. Then, when the movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decoration body is not operating at all, it is abnormal because the movable decoration body is removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent act such as a hobby act or a wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in a detected situation, and even under such a situation, if the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not output, it may promote fraudulent activity and is legitimate. From the perspective of a good player, there is concern that the interest in playing games will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, and this is detected. Even in such a case, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the notification process (output of the notification sound, display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.). However, during the period in which various games (design variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern (effect pattern)). If an abnormality is detected in the movable body while the movable decorative body is being operated based on the effect pattern during the big hit game, the pachinko machine 1 will notify the user (output of the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. It should be noted that the external output (hall side notification) of the information that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body may be performed regardless of the situation because it is not performed openly and does not adversely affect the production.

According to such a configuration, even during the period in which various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, the movable decorative body is unlikely to fail (according to the peripheral control board 1510). Movable body abnormality in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control (the situation where the movable body drive process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variable pattern (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game) is not performed) In the event of an abnormality, the pachinko machine 1 can perform notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound, but at least in a situation where the movable decoration is prone to failure (during the production operation of the movable body), the movable body abnormality occurs. When it occurs, the pachinko machine 1 does not perform the notification processing such as the abnormal notification sound, so that the person who commits the fraudulent act is restrained from committing the fraudulent act, but is a legitimate game. It will be expected that the person will avoid having an adverse effect on the production being performed.

For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound allocation control to the channel, and the abnormality occurrence occur. Since the light emission control of the light emitting part including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected, it has an adverse effect on the effect during execution. It will be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing for operating the movable decorative body again comes after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body can be operated while the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. No production is performed.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not the pachinko machine 1 performs notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Regardless of this, it is possible to execute a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (an operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to restore the movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol change in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration is performed, the specific movable effect is started. If the specific movable decoration is recovered from the abnormal state at the earlier stage, the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration can be executed.

It should be noted that the movable decorative body is specified within a predetermined time even though the restoration process for causing the corresponding movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (origin position)) is executed. If the player does not return to the position (origin position), it is assumed that the recovery has failed, and the game or production will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state.

FIG. 269 shows the allocation status of each channel when an abnormality in the movable body is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol is changed. And, it is a time chart showing an example of the situation on the movable decoration side.

As shown in FIG. 269 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur over a period up to the timing ti14 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The staging control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decoration is executed after the timing ti14. It may be possible to do so, or the staging control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ti13. Therefore, in the timing ti13, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect of producing the specific movable decorative body (FIG. 269 (b). (See), the effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and played back (see FIG. 269 (a)).

Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, it is first determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the restoration process has failed and the restoration cannot be expected. Therefore, the movable body drive process is terminated without performing any drive. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a specific movable decorative body is in a specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is in the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in the manner determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decoration is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when the driving for the specific movable decoration is completed, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired. When it is determined that the body has been returned to the specific position (original position) based on the information, the movable body driving process is terminated. However, if it is determined that the specific movable decoration is not in the specific position (original position) within the movable body drive process, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed. After that, the movable body drive process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

By such a movable body drive process, the specific movable decorative body performs the effect operation from the timing ti13, but in this explanatory example, the specific movable decorative body is set to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period in which the effect operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot be operated. In FIG. 269 (b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the driving for the specific movable decoration body (driving for the staging operation) is completed, it is determined that the specific movable decoration body is not in the state of being returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). Abnormality is determined), and based on the determination, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, as described above, the situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is movable. Since it can be said that the situation is likely to have been caused by the failure of the decorative body, in this explanatory example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, the movable body abnormality is caused in the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound assignment control to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the effect being executed.

At the timing ti18, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is terminated, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position). In that case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history is deleted, and after that, it becomes possible to execute the normal movable effect. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 269 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), and the recovery fails. If this is the case, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the production will be advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, even if the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable decorative body based on the effect pattern arrives within the same symbol variation or within the symbol variation after the next time, the specific movable decorative body The effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played. Including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, various light emitting units are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, even if the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body itself is operated (light-emitting) in the mode of operation, so that the movable effect is not performed. It is expected that the game will be suppressed.

In this way, during the period in which the symbol changes, at least when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, the movable body By not assigning the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not playing it, it becomes possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being performed.

On the other hand, even when an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same fluctuation pattern (specific effect pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. When it occurs at a timing different from that when the specific movable decorative body is operated by the effect control (effect pattern), the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

FIG. 270 shows a movable body abnormality not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, but in a process different from this process. It is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel at the time of detection and the status on the movable decoration side.

As shown in FIG. 270 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, in the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being produced by the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

And, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), when the timing ti12 is reached, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity is the maximum timing ti14. Can occur over a period of time. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The staging control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body moves by some external force at the timing ti11a before the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform the staging operation (moves without being based on the staging pattern). It is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 270 (b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti11b, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decoration body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred.

At the timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is completed, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history will be deleted, and after that, it will be possible to execute the normal movable staging without any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) occurs so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state, so that the effect operation of the specific movable decoration is performed. Not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played, and an abnormality occurs. Various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decoration is caused by the restoration process. If it is resolved, the usual effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) will be executed, including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. In this explanatory example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality occurs only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and the restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is executed. .. That is, when a plurality of movable decorations including a specific movable decoration are in a situation where the restoration process is being executed, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, it is specific. The staging operation of the movable decorative body is not always performed, but this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, it is assumed that the movable decorative body has not been detected to have returned to a specific position (origin position) at the timing ti13a (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery has failed. is doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

Further, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decoration body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decoration body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality has been detected because a specific movable decorative body has been removed from a specific position (origin position) due to an act of pounding or an illegal act such as wire entry. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body is not resolved by some external force even in the restoration process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

Therefore, at this timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, in addition to the various effect sounds corresponding to the specific effect pattern being assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect content, the abnormality notification sound is played over the predetermined time on the reproduction channels 00, 01. It will be assigned to and played. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being advanced and executed as it is, the abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "" "An abnormality has occurred in the movable staging unit 3200 in the back") will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting parts, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, a part of the light emitting parts are made to emit light in an abnormal mode, and the other light emitting parts are made to emit light in a normal manner according to the progress of the production content. It will emit light.

According to the examples of FIGS. 269 and 270, even if the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol change, at least the period during which the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the change pattern is executed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the process, it is unlikely that a fraudulent act has been performed, and there is a possibility of a failure during the effect operation. Therefore, the effect is given priority over the abnormality notification. .. On the other hand, if the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed and the effect is more abnormal than the effect. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that it may be more important to output a notification.

In the example shown in FIG. 270, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not performed in the timing ti11b, and the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed in the timing ti13a in which the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. I decided to do. However, in the timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected even though the specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the effect pattern, and even this alone causes a fraudulent act such as a rattling act or a wire entry. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the wire has been damaged, the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body may be started to be output at this timing ti11b. At this time, the notification by the display or the notification by the lamp may also be performed.

In short, regarding the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period when the design is changed, "the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation based on the effect pattern, but the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation. An abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration as a necessary condition, and an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the production operation based on the effect pattern. It is important not to be executed as a sufficient condition, so that the person who commits the cheating is restrained from committing the cheating, but the legitimate player is being executed. It will be expected to avoid adverse effects on the production of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality within the period in which the symbol change is performed, "the specific movable decoration body does not perform the effect operation based on the effect pattern". After adopting at least "the occurrence of an abnormality in the body", for example, "the restoration process performed in response to the occurrence of the abnormality fails" or "the occurrence of the abnormality occurs under specific circumstances". It is possible to adopt such as as a further condition.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration in the process of operating the specific movable decoration according to the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when operating a specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed as a trigger, so that the specific movable body is movable. It may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body in the process of operating the decorative body according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body is visited regularly.

Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 269, the actuator such as the motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 270, an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti11b, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the specific movable decorative body is exemplified as the one in which the specific movable decorative body is produced and operated at the timing of the operation by the player. It may be the one that produces the effect.

Further, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, and during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may try to reduce it.

If the abnormality notification is not executed under the sufficient condition that "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the effect operation based on the effect pattern", the abnormality notification is not executed thereafter. However, even if the abnormal state is not resolved and remains, it is desirable that the abnormality notification is not performed at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

[Restoration processing of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies having different drive sources and are provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality). By assigning (sound data) to channels and playing them, it is possible to prevent the number of channels used from becoming unnecessarily large even in a situation where movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously for multiple movable decorative bodies. rice field. It should be noted that the movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body cannot operate properly, and is the same as the one exemplified in "Abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern". be.

However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on a gaming machine has increased, and simply associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable decorative bodies is sufficient for the game. It is becoming difficult to properly notify the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and an abnormality notification sound different depending on which of those groups the movable decorative body belongs to has an abnormality is transmitted to the channel. By allocating and making it reproducible, even though the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified.

Even in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 269 and 270). Is processed. Therefore, also in this example, even if various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) occur and are detected during the period of execution, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (outputs the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Similarly, during the period in which various games (design variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the staging control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern). If an abnormality is detected in the movable body while the (effect pattern) or the movable body drive process for operating the movable decorative body is performed based on the effect pattern during the big hit game, the pachinko machine 1 notifies the process (the effect pattern). The output of the notification sound, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, only one abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and set to the playback state corresponds to a specific group among the above groups. On the other hand, it is decided to execute a process of performing a restoration operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to promote a reduction in the risk of running out of empty channels by giving a margin to the channels. In addition to this, it will be possible to quickly recover from abnormalities for each movable decorative body, and it is expected that the channel usage time will be reduced through the efficiency of processing itself when an abnormality occurs. .. For the contents of the restoration process and each process at the time of success or failure, the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 269 and 270). ) Is the same.

Here, as a mode for dividing a plurality of movable decorative bodies into two or more groups, it is required that the mode is suitable for notifying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided on the door frame 3 side, for example. A plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decorative unit 3100, a back middle movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, and a back). When divided into two groups (right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, back lower movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. Whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the board side, which is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened, can be transmitted to the hall side depending on the type of abnormality notification sound. become. In other words, if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body on the board side, it can be said that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than in the case where the movable decorative body on the frame side has an abnormality. Therefore, by outputting the notification sound based on such grouping, the notification sound corresponds to the abnormality of the movable body, but depending on the type, the player does not notice it (unpleasant feelings). It becomes possible to secretly inform the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the degree of possibility of fraud is high.

When the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment also has a movable body abnormality, the pachinko machine 1 also outputs the above-mentioned notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality as the notification process by the pachinko machine 1, and also displays the effect on the game board side. As described above, it is possible to execute the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600. In this regard, in this explanatory example, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processes according to the abnormality of the movable body, and any of those groups. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, while the above-mentioned "notification by display" is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality as in the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound", it is superior in the information transmission function for notifying the abnormality contents in more detail. It has the above-mentioned properties. Therefore, in the above-mentioned "notification by display", the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound" in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exerted, by utilizing the difference in nature. Therefore, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the movable ornaments belonging to the independently divided groups has an abnormality.

That is, in this case, for example, the movable decorative body A and the movable decorative body A are grouped according to the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B. Depending on the presence, "Although the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is Is the first notification mode in which different displays are performed, and the second notification mode in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs. , And "a third notification mode in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are different from each other regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs". Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a more detailed notification mode by notification based on these two different contents of sound and display.

FIG. 271 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol changes. It is a time chart.

As shown in FIG. 271 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur over a period up to the timing tj15 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The staging control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decoration is executed after the timing tj15. It may be possible to do so, or the staging control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14. Therefore, at the timing tj14, the movable body drive process is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is originally received, and the movable body driving process is performed to operate the specific movable decorative body, and the channel is performed. A staging sound corresponding to the movable staging is assigned to 08 and 09 and played.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, at the timing tj11, a plurality of movable decorative bodies move (operate without being based on the effect pattern) due to some external force, and the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body moves more than the timing tj13 in which the effect can be produced. It is assumed that those movable body abnormalities are detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 271 (b) and FIG. 272 (b) described later, the dotted range indicates the period during which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, the above-mentioned restoration process for causing each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in relation to this restoration process, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. , The frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side have a movable body abnormality. Each situation is assumed.

More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 271, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different from that of D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and if they operate simultaneously, they may interfere with each other due to contact. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate by using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other due to their movements, including the relationship with the above, the restoration process is performed at the same time at the timing tj12 so that the movable decorative body can be quickly restored to an abnormal state.

In such a configuration, the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed for a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side is performed. In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in the above, the restoration process can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity ends. It is assumed that neither the restoration process of A, B, C nor the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side is completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the above operation is effective. Regardless of the timing of the production reception within the period (valid period of the production reception), the processing is performed so that the production operation that is triggered by the production reception is not performed when the production reception is received.

That is, in this case, if the effect reception occurs within the period in which the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is executed, it is clear that the specific movable decoration cannot be operated by the effect. Even if the staging reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed, it is possible to interact with other board-side movable decorations that are still in the stage of executing the restoration process. There is a concern that it will interfere. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any of them within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and played, and the movable effect is performed by various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. It will only emit light in the light emission mode when it is used. The point is that if a specific movable decoration falls under any of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C, the restoration process is completed after all the restoration processes are completed (all the restoration processes are completed successfully). Only when the timing at which the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed comes, the execution of the effect operation is permitted.

On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and the above. It is processed so that whether or not to perform the production operation triggered by the production reception is changed depending on the timing of the production reception within the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception). Will be.

That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, the timings tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the staging operation after the restoration process is completed (successful restoration process). Will definitely arrive, and even if the other movable ornaments A to C, D, and F are in the process of being restored, there is no concern that they will interfere with each other. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if this is the case, the effect operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed by the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) when the operation is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. It will be emitted.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing at which the restoration process is completed. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state, so that the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state. The body effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played. Therefore, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process) in the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C, F perform the restoration process. Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other even during the execution of, the normal effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) including the effect operation of a specific movable decorative body. Will be executed.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration process is completed (successful restoration process). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) of the time is assigned and played, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay at.

Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 271 will be described. In this example, when the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is notified, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are described. , C and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are divided into two groups, and the abnormally generated movable decorative body belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on the presence.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, since such a situation cannot normally occur while the proper game is in progress and cannot occur as a result of fraudulent activity, the hall side is responsible for checking the operation of the accessory and repairing it. There is a high possibility that you are in a special situation, such as manually tampering with all movable ornaments. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state at an early stage.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it was detected that the movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. In the timing tj12, the restoration process on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration process on the frame side movable decoration body side are started at the same time as described above, whereas the notification sound output is frame side movable. The abnormal notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, and the abnormal notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the board side is assigned to the channel. I try to keep it output.

That is, the time during which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, the side that takes a long time to complete the restoration process, "board-side movable decoration A, By assigning only the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the B and C sides" to the channel, the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B and C sides on the board side" can be generated. It becomes possible to end the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F during playback, and "abnormality notification common to the board side corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C". Since it is avoided that the output request of the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side" is required after the output of the "sound" is completed. The notification process can be terminated in a simpler manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, while the restoration processing is performed on the board-side movable decorations A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F, the board-side movable decoration A, The "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative body A, B, C side" is assigned to the channel and played over the period until the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are completed. Therefore, the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the control of assigning the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

On the other hand, in the notification mode by display in the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processes according to the abnormality of the movable body, the above-mentioned "notification by sound" is performed by utilizing the difference in properties from the above-mentioned notification sound. The above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode different from that in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and different display is performed depending on which of the independently divided groups the movable decorative body belongs to. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, it corresponds to this. The "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly to this, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, this will be applied. The corresponding "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is completed. Therefore, even if the restoration process of the specific movable decoration is completed first, depending on the execution status of the restoration process of the movable decoration grouped with the specific movable decoration, the restoration process may be higher than that of the specific movable decoration. It is possible that the "notification by display" corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed will be terminated first.

According to the example of FIG. 271, as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of notification sounds according to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced, but the restoration process is in the reproduction state. The movable decoration body corresponding to the notification sound in the above is not limited to the movable decoration body corresponding to the notification sound, and the movable decoration body corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the playback state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduced state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process applied to these movable decorative bodies is simultaneously executed. As a result, for the movable decoration that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, the total time required for the restoration process can be shortened as compared with the movable decoration that corresponds to the notification sound in the reproduction state, and a plurality of movable decorations can be shortened. While one of the specific notification sounds is being played, all movable decorations can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is performed at the same time. Not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side) that can be operated without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. For a plurality of movable decorations (DF) belonging to at least one group (frame side in the above example), which can be classified into (frame side) and the restoration process can be executed independently for each group. If all of them can be restored and operated at the same time by selecting them as movable decorative bodies that can operate without being affected by each other's operating conditions, refer to FIGS. 271 and 272. It is possible to configure it to obtain the described effects.

In the example shown in FIG. 271, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body is visited regularly. Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, a specific movable decorative body is produced as an effect at a timing operated by the player, but a specific movable decorative body is produced at a specific timing determined by the effect pattern. It may be something to make.

Further, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, and during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may try to reduce it.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, movable body abnormalities occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol change was executed. Although the explanation is based on the assumption of a situation, the symbol change does not necessarily have to be executed. That is, during the execution period of the big hit game or when the game of the special symbol is in the state of waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board side movable decoration bodies A, B, C and the frame side movable decoration body D, Even when a movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG. 271.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, all of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side are restored based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. And said. However, if a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other even if they operate simultaneously are included in the board-side movable decorative body, the board-side movable decorative body is provided in a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed at the same time only for some movable decorative objects that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the timing at which it is determined whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the timing at which the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F have a movable body abnormality. It is assumed that the timing at which the determination of occurrence is performed is the same, but these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 272, after it was determined that the movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the movable body abnormality occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. Even if it is determined to that effect, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F is completed at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorations A, B, C side" is completed, the "frame side movable decoration bodies D, E, F side" It can be avoided that the output request of "corresponding abnormal notification sound common to the frame side" is required.

On the contrary, in the example shown in FIG. 271, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. The processing structure may be such that it is determined that the processing has been performed. However, in this case, when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F are performed. After waiting for it to be determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are supported. It is desirable to perform the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, respectively, while the notification processing is performed. As a result of waiting for the process of determining whether or not the movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this case, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are restored while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

[Automatic multiple operation function (automatic repeated hit function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting an operation button 410) to a predetermined operation means may be urged to perform a plurality of operation effects corresponding to each of these operations. However, in recent years, during a predetermined validity period in which an operation opportunity for such a plurality of operations (such as repeated hits) is given, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) does not have to be operated a plurality of times. An automatic multiple operation function (auto) that allows the effect mode to appear when the operation is performed multiple times just by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) that maintains the operation state for a relatively long time. It is becoming more and more equipped with a continuous hit function).

In such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function), a single operation (one operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time when an operation in a long mode such as a so-called long press is performed. ) Is repeated (such as the feeling that fast repeated hits are being made) to make the player remember, which is a player who is not good at multiple operations (slow continuous hitting speed). It can be said that it is important to suppress the deterioration of the game interest of (players, etc.) and to encourage various players to use the function. However, if the effect change (for example, operation sound) is simply generated when the effect is received every time a relatively short time elapses when the player is in the operation state, the player can do the same. Even if you intend to operate with a single push, the short operation time (the time when the operation state is slightly maintained by a single push) becomes slightly longer or shorter, so the production reception is multiple times. The number of production receptions for one single operation is stable because it may occur (multiple operation sounds are generated) or the production reception may occur only once (one operation sound may be generated). There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the discomfort caused by not doing so.

In this regard, in the conventional automatic continuous striking function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case where an operation by a single press is performed, an effect change (for example, an operation sound) due to an effect reception is performed. Etc.) only once. Then, after the first effect change (for example, operation sound) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses. After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, the effect change (operation sound) when the effect reception is made is repeated every time the predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since there is a time margin between the generation of the first production reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second production reception (operation sound), a single push is performed. Whether the operation is repeated within a relatively short time just by performing the so-called long-press operation, while avoiding the feeling of strangeness due to the unstable number of production receptions when the operation is performed. It will be possible to create a production that looks like this.

However, from the player's point of view, it is necessary to allow time between the first production reception (operation sound) and the second production reception (operation sound). It is wasteful in terms of operation production, and the number of production receptions (operation sounds) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when performing a so-called long press operation). There is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable due to the fact that the speed will be slower.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in the mode of one-shot operation, the operation for the operating means is long. Similar to the case where the operation (long press, etc.) is performed, the specific sound associated with the operation for the operation means can be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operating means, it feels as if a single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. It will be possible to make the player remember (such as the feeling as if a fast continuous hit is being performed). As a result, all operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the effect (whether it is a single effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single push. Even if there is, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (for example, operation sound) per unit time.

FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function). Here, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is adopted as the operation means. Further, in other drawings including FIG. 273, the white specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated based on the effect reception corresponding to the operation of the button 410. The black specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated following the white specific sound output in the figure while the production reception is not occurring when the operation button 410 is not operated. Is. It is desirable that the volume and timbre of these specific sounds are not different from each other and are the same.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 in the predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of the multiple operation (continuous hitting, etc.) is given (single operation). It is assumed that one operation is performed in. Therefore, at the timing tx11, the detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is the same. The process of starting the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) accompanying the operation is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx11, the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410. Even if no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is interrupted in the situation. It can be output as a target.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is now terminated at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if no operation by the player is detected until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is generated every time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses. ") Is output so that a specific sound (for example," picone ") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 can be output intermittently.

Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), 5 times (N times) between the start of the grace time TY1 and the lapse of the grace time TY1. It is set to have a time length that allows a specific minute sound (for example, "picone") to be output. As a result, even if the operation is performed in the form of a single operation within a predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) is given, the specific sound associated with the operation (sound according to the production reception). Is output for at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection, and 4 times (N-) that is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses even when there is no operation thereafter. It will be output intermittently over one time) and the total number of specific sounds).

In particular, in this embodiment, the grace time TY1 ends in the middle of the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the grace time is in the middle of the output of the fifth specific sound). Even when the timing tx13) at which the time TY1 ends arrives, the processing (output interruption processing, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound being output at that timing tx13 (for example, “pico”)). (The process of overwriting with the sound of The output (sound type) in the same mode appears. In other words, if the specific sound that accompanies the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes ambiguous whether the operation has been accepted multiple times or not, and in the end, the operation feeling as if the operation was performed multiple times. There is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to remember (it will make you think that it is just a specific sound that is simulated in a non-operation state), but with such a configuration, such a concern is raised. It is expected that the problem will be solved suitably.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the predetermined valid period ends between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1, and a new operation is not accepted for production, the present invention is concerned. Until the grace time TY1 is completed, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output every time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined valid period has expired, it is necessary to avoid that the number of times of receiving the production is not stable when the operation by a single push is performed. Not to mention, it will be possible for the player to remember the feeling as if the operation was performed within the period exceeding the predetermined valid period, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved. In this sense, display is performed so that the player can recognize whether the predetermined validity period is continued or terminated (such as the remaining time display in which the validity period is continued). It can be said that it is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) while it is recognizable that the state has been completed.

Regarding the "specific sound output associated with the operation" in the figure, the volume waveform of the specific sound (other sound output) that is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses, rather than the signal waveform associated with the specific sound output. The waveform excluding) is conceptually shown. As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the specific sound of the previous output to finish being output to the end elapses, and the specific sound of the previous output is converted to the specific sound of the previous output. On the other hand, the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed. It is expected that the player will be able to remember the feeling.

By the way, as the reproduction type of the specific sound, in addition to the mode in which 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 elapses, the target sound is used. It may be a loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that is repeatedly reproduced each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, a mode may be used in which a plurality of specific sounds that are continuously and intermittently output are reproduced as one sound data. In the mode of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, not all the specific sounds are necessarily output as the same single sound, but are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. There may be.

On the other hand, among the examples shown in FIG. 273 (a), regarding the display output in the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 is also displayed after the operation display pattern accompanying the operation for the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11. Even if the player's hand is separated from the player and no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display content of the operation display pattern is advanced multiple times in the situation. It has become something that can be made to do.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is now terminated at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state), as described above. Is. In this regard, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order from the timing tx11 until the grace time TY1 set above is timed up. It is said that the display contents of the display pattern at the time of operation can be advanced by executing.

The contents of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, as the mode shown in FIG. 274. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 274, the "display scene 1" is a moving image depicting a situation in which a ally character holds a sword and is about to pull out the sword, and the "display scene 2" is a ally. It is a video that depicts how the character pulls out the sword and cuts off the sword, and "Display Scene 3" is a video that depicts the ally character having a sword fight with the enemy character in the first mode. , "Display scene 4" is a video depicting a friendly character having a battle with an enemy character with a sword in the second mode, and "display scene 5" is a video in which a friendly character has a third with an enemy character. This is a video that depicts a sword fighting in a mode.

After displaying the operation display pattern accompanying the operation for the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, while the specific sound is intermittently output, these display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed, so that the ally character becomes an enemy. It becomes possible for the player to remember the feeling that the production content of fighting the character is progressing according to multiple operations. Note that each display scene 1 to 5 does not necessarily have to be a moving image, but may be a still image. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying the display pattern at the time of operation, various effect displays (hold display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of the effect displays, an image that changes the effect (color change, etc.) each time the effect is received by the operation by the player may be included, but it recognizes whether or not the effect is received. To make it difficult, it is important to display the image as a smaller image than the display pattern at the time of operation.

Here, in the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1. It is set to have a time length so that at least 5 (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if the operation is performed in the mode of one-shot operation within a predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) is given, at least 5 (M) display contents of the operation display pattern are displayed. ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (progressed) even when there is no operation thereafter. The displayed content will be advanced over the total number of.

In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the timing tx13 at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). When is arrived, unlike the case of the specific sound, the display scene 5 is not displayed to the end but is interrupted in the form of being chopped at that point to end the operation display pattern. That is, unlike the case of a specific sound without progress, the display content at the time of operation has a progress in the effect content, and the display content is displayed if the operation is continued by intentionally interrupting the display scene in the middle of the display scene. It gives the player the impression that it may have been able to make further progress, which is expected to encourage further operations by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed from the start to the end of the grace time TY1. It can be said that it is more desirable to set to to encourage the player to perform further operations. In order to encourage the player to perform further operations, only a part of all the display scenes 1 to 5 should be displayed between the start and the end of the grace time TY1. Is more desirable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined valid period ends between the start of the grace time TY1 and the lapse of the grace time TY1 and the new operation is not accepted for production, the predetermined valid period is reached. At the end of the period (the state where the remaining time of the grace time TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and the display showing the result as the operation display pattern is performed. , This will be described later.

It should be noted that the display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and progressed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation after the display scene 1 is displayed. May be set in advance according to the time from the output of the specific sound to the re-output (automation time TY2), or is set regardless of the time (automation time TY2). It may be a thing. In this sense, display changes such as switching to another display or the occurrence of a new display in the content of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 274, the display scene 1 is "from the state where the sword is held". There is a display change due to "video depiction to the state where the sword is pulled out", and there is a display change due to "effect generation while the ally character fights the enemy character" in the display scene 3). It can be said that it is more desirable. By using a display scene having such a display change, it is possible to make it appear as if the display change in each display scene was caused by the staging reception, so that the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene can be made. It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if the above is not strictly matched. Further, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in the predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of the operation (continuous hitting, etc.) is given a plurality of times. It is assumed that the operation is performed in a long mode to be maintained in. Therefore, also in the timing tx21, as in the case of the timing tx11, the detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. The process of starting the output of the specific sound and the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) associated with the same operation is performed.

Further, even in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses, as in the case of the above-mentioned non-operation period (the period from the timing tx12 to tx13). A sound (for example, "picone") can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in a predetermined time and order for operation. The display content of the time display pattern can be advanced in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 273 (a).

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, first, during the operation maintenance period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), it is determined whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). Periodically monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed (for example, falling edge detection in the detection signal)) is performed. Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and while regular monitoring is performed, "every time the automation time TY2 elapses". It is decided to perform "a process of outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ")" and "a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order". In other words, in the operation maintenance period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the operation detection state, and it is determined that the operation is in the operation detection state. Based on this, a process such as "outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ")" or "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and the operation is detected." No processing such as "advancing the display content based on the judgment" is performed, and "regular monitoring (judgment) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" is performed. And "a process to output a specific sound (for example," picone ") every time the automation time TY2 elapses" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order". "Processing to make" is performed respectively. The "periodic monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. Is to be done.

After that, as a result of "regular monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)", the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (the operation button 410). When the timing tx22 for determining that the operation state) has been completed arrives, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the result of the determination. Set the grace time TY1 you have. However, at this time, "a process of outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ") each time the automation time TY2 elapses" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are output according to a predetermined time and order". The "process of sequentially outputting" is continuously executed even after the arrival of the timing tx22 at which the operation state ends, until the timing tx23 until the end of the grace time TY1. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22) to the situation where the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) that straddles the timing of the transition, the specific sound can be output intermittently in one processing mode that is only output again every time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the operation display pattern can be continuously output in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

According to such a configuration, in producing the output mode of the specific sound at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the output mode of the specific sound at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 273 (b). , It becomes possible to standardize the processing mode (program) related to the output of a specific sound among them. Similarly to this, the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of single-shot operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of long press operation shown in FIG. 273 (b) are shown. In producing, it becomes possible to standardize the processing mode (program) related to the output of the display pattern at the time of operation among them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 273 (a), as a result of "periodic monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" at the timing tx12. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed. Further, the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) changes to the situation where the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) that straddles the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is only output again every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and multiple display scenes. The operation display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

As a result, even if the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing, the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as in the so-called long-pressing mode. The specific sound associated with the operation of the operation button 410 will be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, the single press (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press). It will be possible to make the player remember the feeling as if it is being performed (such as the feeling as if a fast continuous hit is being performed). This stabilizes the responsiveness of the effect (whether it is a single effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single push, and which operation mode (single push, single push,) is used. Even if long press) is adopted, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (specific sound) accompanying the operation per unit time.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 273, the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing (FIG. 273 (a)) and the case where the operation is performed in the so-called long-pressing mode (FIG. 273). Although the same effect change is caused in (b)), in fact, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), one effect reception is performed at the timing tx11, and the white outline in the figure is specified accordingly. In contrast to the sound output for only one time, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), four times of production reception are performed according to each time the automation time TY2 elapses from the timing tx11, and the white in the figure corresponding to them is received. The specific sound output without extraction is made for 4 times. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, at least a specific number of production receptions are required, or a production lottery is performed each time the production reception is performed, and a specific production is specified according to the result. When a type of effect that causes the effect result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), since only one effect reception is substantially performed, a specific effect result is produced. You can't expect much from that. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, by intentionally outputting the specific sound in black in the figure even when the production reception is not occurring, so many production receptions actually occur. Even if it is a situation where you can not expect a specific production result to appear, you can operate it multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring. Even when a player who is not good at playing a game (such as a slow continuous hitting speed) performs a single operation, it becomes possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the game interest.

In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much the effect reception is generated only by checking the specific sound output once, but from the start of the operation to the end of the operation. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to give an eye on how many production receptions have occurred.

Further, in the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and after that, the grace time TY1 is timed up. By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined validity period ends or the production conditions are satisfied and a specific production result appears within the predetermined validity period, the ally character becomes the enemy character and the sword. I am trying to make a depiction of a single-minded meeting. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific effect result is to describe how the ally character wins over the enemy character as a result of such a meeting with the sword, and the specific effect result is within a predetermined valid period. When does not appear, it is desirable to display the result of the failure when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of such a sword fight at the end.

As described above, the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing (FIG. 273 (a)) and the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in the mode of long pressing (FIG. FIG. In any case of 273 (b)), the specific sound associated with the operation is intermittently output multiple times, and the operation display pattern associated with the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule for progress. By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating multiple times will be encouraged to perform the operation with peace of mind. However, in reality, during the above-mentioned predetermined validity period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a continuous striking operation over a plurality of times in the mode of one-shot pressing, and when such a continuous striking operation is performed, 1 It is important for the player to remember the feeling of operation that each production reception is generated by each operation in order to improve the interest of the game. However, if the operation feeling that the production reception is generated by one operation is completely reflected as the production, the player who is good at multiple operations is more advantageous than the player who is not good at multiple operations. Since the staging is as if it were, it is required to achieve both of the staging elements (operation feeling, fairness of staging) that are in such a trade-off relationship.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure the operation feeling that the effect reception is generated by each operation, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an immediate effect for the operation. Focusing on the fact that "whether the sound is generated (or changed) when operated" is a more important parameter than "whether the display is generated (or changed)", the operation buttons are used for a predetermined validity period. Each time the operation on the 410 is performed in the mode of a single push, a specific sound corresponding to the effect reception is output according to the operation timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a continuous striking operation over a plurality of times in a single-shot pressing mode during the period from timing tx31 to tx32 within a predetermined valid period. Suppose. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, each time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, a new specific sound is generated with respect to the specific sound (specific sound in the output state) of the previous output. A new specific sound is output in such a way that the sound data is overwritten on the specific channel. In this way, even when the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing, such output is performed while making the specific sound intermittently output over a plurality of times. When the operation button 410 is operated again, a new specific sound is output in such a way that the specific sound in the output state is intentionally cut off (interrupted) in the middle of the operation, so that the operation by the player is performed. It becomes possible to explicitly suggest that a specific sound is newly output and the production is accepted at the timing when is performed.

In this embodiment, even if the operation button 410 is operated only once in the mode of one-shot pressing or the operation is performed by long pressing, the specific sound of the previous output is output to the end. The automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the above elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is overwritten on the specific channel for the specific sound of the previous output. That is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output with an accurate rhythm at regular time intervals (automation time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of a single press. In that case, every time the operation timing by the player arrives irregularly, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output, so one operation at a time is required. It becomes possible for the player to appropriately remember the operation feeling that the production reception is occurring.

Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), each time the operation button 410 is operated for a predetermined valid period, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state). Monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this regard, in the period from timing tx31 to tx32 in which the operation button 410 is operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of one-shot pressing, the operation is continued each time the operation button 410 is operated. As a result of periodical monitoring of whether or not the operation state is in (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has been completed, and a predetermined time length is provided accordingly. The grace time TY1 will be set (not shown).

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is newly operated before the grace time TY1 ends (time up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Then, it is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is in the continuous state (operation state) is performed. Therefore, during the period from timing tx31 to tx32, every time the operation button 410 becomes an operation state or a non-operation state, a process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state is performed. , The state transition is performed rapidly with the state in which the grace time TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), after the continuous striking operation for 6 times is performed between the timings tx31 and tx32, the repeated striking operation becomes tired, and after that, the repeated striking operation is performed. It is assumed that the time required will be significantly longer. For a player who is not good at such multiple operations, after timing tx32, it is not possible to perform multiple repeated hit operations well, so the number of times the production is accepted is larger than that of a player who is good at multiple operations. There is a concern that the number of games will be reduced and the interest in games will decline. However, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a specific sound is emitted every time the automation time TY2 elapses even though the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state is terminated. As described above, the process of outputting is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, at least the grace time TY1 after the previous operation state is completed. As long as the repeated operation can be performed within a shorter time than that, the player can be made to feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. It will be like.

For example, if it is determined at the timing tx33 that the continuation of the operation state has been completed as a result of periodical monitoring of whether or not the operation state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination. , A grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, although the time required for repeated operations will be significantly longer, a specific sound will be output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the player is not operating. By performing the process of making the operation, the specific sound accompanying the operation is continuously and intermittently output. However, these specific sounds are output as specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in black in the figure under the condition that the production reception is not generated.

In this regard, the blackened specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) in the figure can be generated only until the grace time TY1 has elapsed from the end of the previous operation state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), for the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation for the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (the time does not increase) based on the operation. Along with this, at the timing tx34, the white specific sound (10th specific sound) in the figure is output due to the occurrence of the production reception in the form of cutting (interrupting) the specific sound that was in the output state. At the same time, it will be returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

However, such an operation state is also terminated when the timing tx35 is reached, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the above monitoring, and based on the determination, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is obtained. It will be set again. Then, every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the operation by the player is not performed, the black specific sound (11th to 14th specific sound) in the figure is output again, and the grace period. When the operation by the player is finally performed at the timing tx36 before the time TY1 is timed up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the figure in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In the form, the white specific sound (15th specific sound) in the figure is output.

In this way, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, the repeated operation can be performed at least within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 after the previous operation state is completed. As long as it can be done, the specific sound in the figure that is outlined in the figure at the timing when the operation by the player is performed, and the specific sound in the figure that is periodically outlined in the situation where the operation by the player is not performed. By outputting each of these, the player can be made to feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. Therefore, according to the mode related to the output of the specific sound, it is possible to secure the operation feeling that the effect reception is generated by one operation at a time, and the player who is not good at the multiple operations. Even if there is, the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state makes it possible to output the specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and intermittently, so there is a trade-off relationship (operation feeling). , Production fairness) will be expected to be compatible.

However, even when a specific sound is output in such a manner, it is performed multiple times in the operation display pattern that plays a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within a predetermined valid period. If the mode of progress of the displayed content is greatly different between the player who is good at the operation and the player who is not good at the multiple operation, in the end, it is better than the player who is not good at the multiple operation. A player who is good at multiple operations may have an advantage, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the display content of the operation display pattern is not gradually advanced according to the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is timed up. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, the display content can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32 within the predetermined valid period. However, until the set grace time TY1 is timed up, the operation button 410 is operated again to cancel the setting of the grace time TY1. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended within the predetermined valid period does not come.

When the operation is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 275 (a), the display of the operation display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. After that, the display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 274 are predetermined as the operation display pattern regardless of the operation status even though the speed of the continuous striking operation is changed drastically as described above. It is only displayed and progressed in sequence according to the schedule, which makes it appear that the fairness of the production is maintained between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations. You will be able to.

However, even if the display content as the display pattern at the time of operation is developed in the same manner, the number of times that the effect reception is actually generated due to the operation is the number of times that the player who is not good at the operation is operated multiple times. It is inevitable that there will be differences between the players who are good at. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, at least a specific number of production receptions are required, or a production lottery is performed each time the production reception is performed, and a specific production is specified according to the result. When a type of effect that causes the effect result to appear is performed, it is easier for a player who is good at multiple operations to produce a specific effect result, which is an effect of performing the operation multiple times. Significance will be maintained. In other words, while maintaining such staging significance, in terms of staging such as sound and display, the fairness of staging between a player who is not good at multiple operations and a player who is good at multiple operations is maintained. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest of a player who is not good at multiple operations by making it look like it is being played.

Further, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous striking operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is received when the operation is performed by long pressing, the mode in which the display pattern at the time of operation progresses is Since it is the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the button deterioration is accelerated due to the repeated hitting operation being performed too quickly.

Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 275 (b) assumes a case where the operation button 410 is not operated in time until the grace time TY1 set in the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined valid period arrives, and the timing tx37 (specific end timing) starts from the timing tx31. Dynamic display output (process of sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that point.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the output of a specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends when the output state is reached has arrived. Even if this is done, processing that cuts off (for example, "pico") a specific sound in the output state at that timing tx37 (output interruption processing, processing that interrupts by overwriting with another sound, etc.) is performed. As described above, the output (sound wave type) in the same mode as the specific sound that has been output up to that point is made to appear even after the timing tx37 arrives. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends has arrived, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is the output. If the operation button 410 is operated before the sound is muted, the player can feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. It is possible to let them do it.

In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), before the blackened specific sound (10th specific sound) in the figure output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the 10th specific sound output is interrupted and the white specific sound in the figure is generated twice, the black specific sound in the figure is intermittently output again, so that the specific sound associated with the operation is generated. It can be seen that is being output continuously and intermittently. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output in this way, whereas in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily terminated at the timing tx37. .. After that, it is clear that the progress of the display content is redone from the first display scene (display scene 1) at the timing tx38 when the white specific sound in the figure is output again.

FIG. 276 shows a predetermined valid period in which the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function) described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 275 is given an operation opportunity of the multiple operation (continuous striking, etc.). It is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when an operation is performed within the predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48) when a specific effect pattern for generating the above is executed.

As shown in FIG. 276, at the timing tx41, a predetermined valid period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (repeated hits, etc.) is given occurs, and the player determines the timing tx42 within the predetermined valid period. Assuming that the operation is started, also in this effect example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound associated with the operation for the operation button 410 and the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) associated with the operation are output, respectively. The process of starting is to be performed.

However, in this production example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, a specific sound output in white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is produced with a predetermined probability. It is possible to execute the process of outputting.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound output in black in the figure is generated even in a situation where the operation button 410 is not operated and the effect reception is not generated. The black specific sound output in this figure is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output in the figure that occurs at the timing when the production reception occurs (the same mode in this production example). ) Is output. Further, as described above, the display content at the time of operation that appears on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that the display content is advanced according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. Therefore, from the player's point of view, even if the operation is performed by long-pressing or multiple times within a predetermined valid period, it is recognized how much the effect reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that it is in a difficult situation. Therefore, in this production example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, a specific sound output with a white outline in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing a process of outputting at 50% or the like), it is possible to predict to some extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of such special sounds.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 276, when the predetermined validity period is in a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45), the two consecutive hit operations at the timing tx42 and tx43 and the timing tx44 By performing each of the long press operations of, a total of 9 production receptions are generated, and the specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated 9 times (1st to 9th in the figure). (White specific sound), the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined valid period is started, the operation in the mode of single-shot operation requires a long time that cannot be said to be repeated hits, and the timing tx46 , Tx47 is performed twice, so that the production reception for two times is generated, and the specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is generated twice at intervals (10th in the figure). , 11th white specific sound), the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is relatively small.

However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the display pattern at the time of operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined valid period is started by the above-mentioned black-out specific sound output. It is continuously output in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined valid period is started. Since the display scenes are simply switched according to a predetermined schedule in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), these progresses. It can be seen that it is difficult to determine whether the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is high or low just by checking the output status.

In this regard, if you check the output status of the special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when the white specific sound output in the figure occurs, it is a relatively early period (timing) after the predetermined valid period starts. In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined valid period is started, so that such a special sound is produced. It will be possible to predict to some extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to some extent whether the specific sound output shown in white in the figure or the specified sound output shown in black in the figure is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment of the player who is not good at multiple operations will be maintained appropriately. In this sense, although the special sound can be generated when the specific sound output is generated, it is output based on the condition that the output condition different from that of the specific sound output is satisfied. Even if the specific sound output is generated, it is required to output the special sound in such a manner that the special sound is not necessarily generated.

Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when the production reception occurs may be changed according to the number of production receptions that have occurred within the predetermined valid period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the white specific sound output in the figure and the black specific sound output in the figure is generated.

Further, considering that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, the time from the output of the specific sound to the mute and the time value longer than the automation time TY2 are obtained. It is desirable to set it as a thing. In this example, the time value is set to be twice the "automation time TY2". Further, when outputting a new special sound when the previous special sound is output, it is desirable to cut off (interrupt) the previous special sound and output the new special sound.

However, in such a pachinko machine 1, the number of players who perform the operation multiple times is reduced because the same effect as when the operation is performed multiple times can be enjoyed only by performing the operation by pressing and holding. There is a concern that the significance of the production as a production that requires multiple operations will be lost. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIG. 276, in the period after the operation by the player is started at least in the predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48) at the timing tx42, the operation by the player is a mode of long pressing. A state in which the operation is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and a state in which the operation is performed as a single operation mode (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48). The display of a specific image (specific display) can be permitted only when there is and a specific display condition is satisfied.

That is, in this case, in order to confirm a specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a single-shot operation rather than at least a long-press operation. It will be possible to give a meaning to the production by performing the round operation (continuous hitting, etc.), and it is expected that the game entertainment taste will be maintained appropriately.

Moreover, in this production example, in order to confirm the specific image, it is not a condition that the operation is performed only as a mode of the one-shot operation, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself becomes high, each time a predetermined valid period occurs, the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple times operation) function is not used and the operation is performed multiple times (continuous hitting, etc.). ), It seems that you are trying to display a specific image that is difficult to appear, and you dare to operate it multiple times without using the automatic repeated hit (automatic multiple operation) function. It is expected to promote the understanding of others about what to do.

In the production example shown in FIG. 276, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the time of "automation time TY2") has elapsed without a new production reception occurring from the timing when the previous production reception occurred. The display of a specific image within a predetermined validity period is defined as the above-mentioned "specific display condition" that a production hit is obtained in a predetermined production lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed. Specific display) will appear. In this regard, in the predetermined production lottery, when the jackpot is won by the jackpot judgment (or, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined validity period, the success display can be displayed (the jackpot expectation is high). In the case of (directing situation)), there is a 70% chance that a directing hit will be obtained, but when the jackpot is judged to be a big hit (or the operation is performed within a predetermined valid period). In the production situation (when the production situation has a low expectation of big hit) where the success display cannot be displayed no matter how much it is done), the production hit can be obtained only with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when the display (specific display) of the specific image appears within the predetermined valid period, it is suggested that the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, and the game entertainment can be preferably maintained. The above "specific display condition" is not limited to this, and "a specific non-operation time (here," automation time TY2 "" without a new production reception occurring from the timing when the previous production reception occurred. "Twice as long as the time has passed" and "The production hit was obtained in the prescribed production lottery" are adopted as the "specific display conditions", and when this is satisfied. The display of a specific image (specific display) may be made to appear, or other conditions may be adopted as "specific display conditions".

In addition to the types described above, the predetermined staging lottery mode is, for example, a staging situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined valid period (a staging situation in which the jackpot expectation is low). Occasionally, there is a 0% chance that a production hit will be obtained (or the production lottery itself will not be performed), but no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined validity period, a success display cannot be displayed. In the case of (a production situation in which the expectation of a big hit is low), there may be a mode in which a production hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, so that there is no need to perform a barren operation for making the specific display appear. Will be recognizable within a predetermined validity period. In this case, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined validity period ends without the success display appearing as the specific display.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 276, when a new effect reception occurs while the specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specific image is specified at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued on condition that the state in which the player is not operating (the state in which a new effect reception is not generated) is maintained. There is.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, in order to make a specific effect result (success display) appear within a predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48), it is required that at least a specific number of times or more of the effect reception occurs. The appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the 11th staging reception (the 11th white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of making the success display appear as a display pattern at the time of operation is performed in the form of (interruption). The content of this success display is the production content of the part (display scenes 3 to 5) that is repeated in the operation display pattern, such as destroying the enemy character that was having a sword fight in the display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable that it is related. In addition, when a success indication appears, it is desirable to suggest that the jackpot judgment has a high expectation of winning the jackpot.

Further, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the 11th production reception (the 11th white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined valid period is terminated at that time and a new production reception is performed. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at the timing after the timing tx47, the specific sound or the special sound shown in white in the figure does not newly occur, and the specific display does not newly appear.

FIG. 277 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 276, but the operation in the mode of one-shot operation by the player is shorter than the grace time TY1. It is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when it is repeated for a long time that cannot be said.

As shown in FIG. 277, even when the operation in the mode of one-shot operation by the player is repeated over a long period of time, as long as the operation is repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1. After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within a predetermined valid period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output, and the operation display pattern is the display content according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such an effect mode, even if the operation is performed only four times within a predetermined valid period, it is possible to create an effect situation as if the continuous striking operation is performed about 20 times. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that the player who is seriously performing the continuous striking operation cannot understand the meaning of the continuous striking operation, and the interest in the game is reduced.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined valid period is "Tx1", the length of the grace time TY1 is "Tx2", and the specific effect result (success display) is displayed within the predetermined valid period. When the minimum number of production receptions required for appearance is "EU", each of these numerical values is set so that the relationship ["Tx1 / Tx2" <EU] is established. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeated at the last minute when the grace time TY1 elapses to create a production situation in which the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, the operation causes the operation. The number of staging receptions that occur will be less than the minimum number of staging receptions (EU) required for a specific staging result (success display) to appear within a predetermined valid period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it becomes possible to prevent a specific effect result (success display) from appearing. It is expected that those who have a game will maintain their entertainment interests. In addition, in order to obtain such an action effect more reliably, the minimum number of times of effect reception (EU) required for a specific effect result (success display) to appear within a predetermined valid period is set. Strictly speaking, it is required to set a numerical value larger than the integer value when the numerical value calculated by "Tx1 / Tx2" is rounded up to an integer.

In this regard, in this effect example, the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) required to produce a specific effect result (success display) within a predetermined valid period is calculated by "Tx1 / Tx2". Since it is set to "11 times", which is more than twice the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, since the failure display appears due to the insufficient number of operations, the production situation is such that it is not possible to recognize whether the jackpot expectation is low or high.

Furthermore, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the display of a specific image can appear only when it is in a state of being performed as a mode of one-shot operation and a specific display condition is satisfied. Is. In this regard, in this production example, when the above-mentioned "specific non-operation time" required to display a specific image is "Tx3", the relationship ["Tx1 / Tx3" <EU] is established. Each of these numerical values is set so as to be performed. In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to make a specific display appear each time the operation is performed once within the predetermined valid period, the number of production receptions that occur within the predetermined valid period is within the predetermined valid period. In, the number of production receptions (EU) required to produce a specific production result (success display) will be less than the minimum. That is, in this case, a staging selection function of whether to make an attempt to make the specific display appear even at the risk that the specific effect result (success display) does not appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. It is expected that the game will be improved because it will not be possible to casually make repeated attempts to make it appear, which will enhance the directing performance when the attempt is made. It will be like.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 277, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined valid period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of making a failure display appear as a display pattern at the time of operation is performed in the form of (interruption). The content of this failure display is the production content of the part (display scenes 3 to 5) that is repeated in the operation display pattern, such as being defeated by the enemy character who had a sword fight in the display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable that it is related. In addition, when a failure display appears, it is desirable to suggest that the degree of expectation of winning a big hit is low in the big hit judgment.

On the other hand, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, the specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined valid period ends regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. It is designed not to be chopped (interrupted), but this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently after that, those specific sounds will be muted while the success display or failure display is being performed, and then the success display or failure display will be displayed. The relationship is set to be hidden.

In this embodiment, the grace time TY1 is set after the operation state by the player ends, and the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state is output until the grace time TY1 elapses. Although it was decided to perform it at least four times, the number of times of "specific sound output in black in the figure" that occurs in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time having at least twice the length of the automation time TY2, the specified sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state is at least twice or more. Since it will occur, it is possible to make people feel as if the continuous striking operation (multiple operations) was continued even in the non-operation state.

Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. So, the depiction of the ally character having a sword fight with the enemy character appears. Therefore, in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2, a specific display in which the jackpot expectation degree is shown may be performed. According to such a configuration, if a specific display is overlooked, it cannot be reconfirmed unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace time TY1 elapses. Therefore, a predetermined validity period However, it becomes possible to provide an effect of which one to select between the demerit that the specific display is wasted and the demerit that the specific display cannot be confirmed.

Further, in this embodiment, it is allowed to perform a continuous striking operation in such a manner that the staging reception occurs at an interval shorter than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the staging reception occurs when the operation by pressing and holding is performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a highly flexible operation-time effect by the player (see FIG. 275). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous striking operation is performed, the progress mode of the display scene in the operation display pattern is the same as when the operation by long pressing is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform high-speed continuous hitting operation, which is expected to suppress excessive operation of the operation button 410 and reduce the risk of damage etc. Will be done.

In addition, when performing a type of production that requires at least a specific number of production receptions in order to produce a specific production result within a predetermined valid period, only a long press operation is performed within the predetermined valid period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception is performed more than the specific number of times. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specified number of times so that the effect reception is performed more than the specified number of times only by performing the operation by long pressing for half of the predetermined valid period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, twice the time (specific non-operation time) of the "automation time TY2" has elapsed since the timing of the previous production reception without the occurrence of a new production reception. It was decided to make the display of a specific image (specific display) appear at that time, but the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value that is at least twice the "automation time TY2" and within the range in which the grace time TY1 is the upper limit value (grace time TY1 or less) is used. , While the specific sound in black in the figure is output more than once when in the non-operation state (as if the continuous striking operation is being performed when in the non-operation state), It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) appears based on the number of simulated operations (the number of times of output of a specific sound in black in the figure) in the non-operation state reaches a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Game machine equipped with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine provided with the effect operation unit 400 in the plate unit 320, which can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player, has been described. A gaming machine capable of further increasing the player's motivation to operate will be described with reference to FIGS. 278 to 329. The staging control of the staging operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 278 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 279 is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged in the door frame 3 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side of the front view. The sword effect operation unit 5000 houses a sword portion 5010 having a sword blade portion 5011, a handle portion 5012, a flange portion 5013 sandwiched between the sword blade portion 5011 and the handle portion 5012, and a sword portion 5011 of the sword portion 5010. It constitutes a sword decoration body 5001 composed of a sheath portion 5020 capable of being capable of being used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sheath portion 5020 movably provided on the door frame 3 in the left-right direction in the front view. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword pulling direction and the sword delivering direction. The sword portion 5010 is usually in a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and the sword-drawn portion 5011 becomes visible to the player by the sword-pulling operation in the sword-pulling effect. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword-drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the sword-delivering operation by the player and returning to the sword-delivering state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 280, an opportunity to execute a sword-drawing effect accompanied by movement of the sword-effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword-drawing effect can be executed. The following is shown, and (B) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown.

The staging patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword-drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed without the sword-drawing preparation transition production being performed in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance. Despite this, there are patterns in which the sword-drawing production is not performed, patterns in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed, and patterns in which the sword-drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 280 (A), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is drawn according to the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for a large hit fluctuation at the time of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern for a small hit fluctuation at the time of a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for an outlier fluctuation at the time of a miss, and the fluctuations that are advantageous for the player. The more the pattern is, the higher the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuations, with a probability of 30% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for small hits, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuations. It has a 20% chance of being executed. It should be noted that the probability of the variation pattern at the time of the out-of-bounds fluctuation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when the reach effect is not performed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (B), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing main effect is drawn according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the type of variation pattern is the same, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the fluctuation pattern results in an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the fluctuation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for out-of-order fluctuation, there is a higher probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed than in the case where the sword preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for small hit variation. In the case of the fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the sword-drawing effect is executed, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern is advantageous for the player, the higher the probability that the sword-drawing effect with the aura member is executed. Is set to be. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and aura member movement due to sword pulling movement of sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing effect (sword-drawing preparation transition effect and sword-drawing book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 281). FIG. 282) and the aura member 5035 are provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described with respect to the case of forming an integral decorative body (FIGS. 283 and 284).

FIG. 281 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself, and is a state transition diagram of (A) sword delivery state and (B) first. The sword-drawn state and (C) the second sword-drawn state are shown. FIG. 282 is a vertical sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 282 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 281 (A), the sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword-delivered state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 281 (B), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling preparation transition production, only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the sword blade part 5011 is pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and can be visually recognized by the player. It becomes the first sword pulling state. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (C), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling main production, the blade portion 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath portion 5020, and most of the second sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state can function as an operating means capable of accepting the sword-delivering operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the blade pulling operation of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 has a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 has a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword-delivered state (FIG. 281 (A)) to the first sword-drawn state (FIG. 281 (B)). The range of motion is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 282 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 282 (B)) inside the portion 5020 to deform the blade portion 5011. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the process of changing the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (FIG. 281 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates at the maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword-drawn state.

As shown in FIG. 282 (A), the aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011. The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033 and. In the aura member 5030, the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by a driving means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a, and FIG. 282. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011, respectively.

Further, below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state, it changes from the closed state to the open state, and the operation of the aura member 5030 causes the blade portion 5011. Although the example in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state after being deformed is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state functions as an operating means (not limited to the form in which the maximum operation is performed, but also the form in which the operation is stopped in the middle). ).

FIG. 283 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020, and is a state transition diagram of (A) sword delivery state, (B) first sword pulling state, and (C). Shows the second sword pulling state. FIG. 284 is a vertical sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 284 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in FIGS. 282 and 283 described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 283 (A) to 283 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) is the above-mentioned sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself can move in the left-right direction, it can move in the up-down direction. Further, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form of having an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade portion 5011 (sword delivery state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword delivery state. ⇔ Operates according to the first sword withdrawal state ⇔ second sword withdrawal state). This makes it possible to combine the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to make it appear as an integral decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 284 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely housed state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011 and the enclosure aura member 5036. It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion of the above, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by a driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in the front view, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is rack right. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 284 (B), the enclosure aura member 5036 stops at a position where it is combined with the blade portion 5011 to form a second sword pulling state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the enclosed aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the range of motion.

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion maintains a relative positional relationship according to the state change (sword delivery state ⇔ first sword extraction state ⇔ second sword extraction state) of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010). An example of merging with 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (coalescing) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword pulling state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state functions as an operating means (not limited to the complete appearance state in which the maximum movement is performed, but the movement is stopped in the middle and appears in the middle. It is only necessary to be able to be in a state with an aura member). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state.

(Example of sword drawing using a sword ornament)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 285 to 290, a sword-drawing effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001) will be described. In the following, the staging pattern ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure) and the sword-drawing main effect is not executed. The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described with respect to the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing effect is executed. 285 to 289 are production transition diagrams of the sword-drawing effect. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that were variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, "7"), and only the central decorative symbol is variablely displayed. It begins by forming a reach state (FIG. 285 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image suggesting the execution of the sword pulling effect (movable of the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. Specifically, after the image of two samurai facing each other and starting the Iai (Fig. 285 (X2)) is displayed, the image of one samurai holding the handle and holding the sword in the sheath (Fig.) 285 (X3)) is displayed. Here, the effect suggesting that the sword decoration body 5001 is movable is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this period, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword delivery state (FIG. 281 (A)).

Next, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed by a lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 286 (X4) and (X5). When started, in the display area of the staging display device 1600, the face of the samurai holding the sword with his eyes closed is displayed in the above image, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed with the passage of time. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state, so that the sword-drawn preparation transition effect is performed. It should be noted that when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, it is easier to execute the sword-drawing book effect after that than when it is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is an expectation degree effect in which the expectation degree at which the sword-drawing book effect is executed is indicated by the movement of the sword decoration body 5001. In the sword-drawing preparation transition production, by swinging the sword decoration 5001 in the first sword-drawing state up and down, even if the player is expected to further change the sword decoration 5001 to the second sword-drawing state. good. The vertical swing of the sword decoration body 5001 in the first sword drawing state is performed to the extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visible to the player in the form with the aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration body 5001 may maintain the sword-delivered state so that the image shown in FIG. 285 (X3) described above continues to be displayed.

Here, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent sword-drawing main effect is in the form of having an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect (FIG. 282 (A). )) The range of motion is moved (maximum movement) as much as possible from the open state (FIG. 282 (B)) to deform the blade portion 5011. At this time, the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword-drawn state can be visually recognized by the player from the hand of the blade portion 5011 to the portion of the habaki 5011a, but as described above, the aura member 5030 is the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011. Since it is provided below, there is no possibility that the aura member 5030 will be visually recognized by the player even if the aura member 5030 operates at the maximum. Further, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at a timing substantially simultaneous with the timing at which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and at the same time, the degree of expectation is determined by the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

Then, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed by the lottery based on the type of variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 286 (X6)), and the central decorative pattern that was displayed in a variable manner is stopped. And the stop mode different from the right decorative symbol, that is, the stop mode (here, "6") is displayed as a stop (FIG. 286 (X7)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state from the first sword-drawn state at the time of FIG. 286 (X6), and maintains the sword-delivered state. That is, the reach effect is completed without the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as an operating means.

On the other hand, when the sword-drawing main effect is executed, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, an image in which the Iai slash is performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is the second sword-drawn sword. It becomes a state. Here, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state includes a form with an aura member that can be visually recognized in a form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 is invisible. A form without an aura member is provided so that the undeformed blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized.

First, with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state is in the form without an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing effect is started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the samurai opening his eyes and sharpening his eyes is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 286 (X5). 287 (A1)), an image of pulling out the sword that was being held and slashing the opponent's samurai is displayed (Fig. 287 (A2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 287 (A1), and the sword blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

Next, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 in which the player protrudes from the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of grasping and pushing the sword blade portion 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath portion 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same shape as the second sword withdrawn state of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 287 (FIG. 287). A3)). In the sword decoration body 5001, the LED of the internal LED board 5011c blinks and emits light to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of Iai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in the foreground so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Iai slashing scene image (FIG. 287 (A2)). It may be good (see FIG. 293 (G2) described later).

Then, during the effective operation period, the player grabs the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and performs a sword delivery operation in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. The post-operation effect is performed according to the degree of expectation that gives an advantageous result, and the effect is terminated with the notification of winning of the symbol type (FIG. 288). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, the cut effect image is displayed flashily in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 288 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. At the timing when the opponent's samurai is defeated and Iai is settled, the center decorative symbol stops in the same stop mode as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, that is, the jackpot mode (here, "7") in the center of the screen. It is displayed (FIG. 288 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of alignment, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of a big hit (FIG. 288 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is displayed. In the center of the screen, the central decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, that is, the off mode (here, "6"), along with the image that the opponent's samurai cannot be defeated at the timing when the stop is displayed. Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 288 (D2)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 289, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state is in the form of having an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing effect is started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the samurai opening his eyes and sharpening his eyes is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 286 (X5). 289 (B1)), an image of slashing the opponent's samurai by pulling out the sword he was holding is displayed (Fig. 289 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 289 (B1), and the sword blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 (right aura member 5031 and left aura member 5032). Becomes visible to the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time when the state changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even if only the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player and then the aura member 5030 changes from the closed state to the open state and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It suffices that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form of having an aura member in the second sword-drawn state by the time the operation valid period is started. However, since the sword decoration body 5001 is already in the second sword extraction state in which the player can operate the sword, it is possible to surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation due to the appearance of the aura member 5030, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that the player may induce an erroneous operation. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while a series of movements from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state are performed as in this example, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword withdrawal state. It is preferable that the operation validity period is started promptly.

Further, the images of FIGS. 289 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images of FIGS. 287 (A1) and (A2) described above, and the player can see whether the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member just by looking at the images. It is not possible to judge whether or not it is. By actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001, the player can grasp whether it is a form with an aura member or a form without an aura member. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 can be attracted attention even before the sword decoration body 5001 is made to function as an operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without any confusion. Can be done. The image displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time does not have to be the same as described above, and may be an image similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword decoration body 5001. .. For example, there may be some differences in the samurai image (differences in eye color and effect effects).

Then, when the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form with an aura member as the sword decoration body 5001. It will be displayed (FIG. 289 (B3)). Subsequent production is the same as in FIG. 288 described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In the case of the form with an aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 288 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed more flashily than in the form without an aura member.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation valid period in the sword-drawing effect in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 290, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The state changes to the state of pulling out the sword (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern in which the aura member is attached is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state, but even if it is in the open state, the aura member 5030 is in the game in the first sword drawing state. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword withdrawal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword withdrawal state, and if so, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 has a form with an aura member. I can't. However, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword-drawing main effect is executed, and there is a high possibility that the form will have an aura member, so that the player's expectation can be increased. Further, even if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 285 (X3)) is executed by the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, it is possible to capture the state change (movable) of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state.

Then, when the sword-drawing preparation transition production is completed, the sword-drawing main production is subsequently started, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (time t2). Then, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation valid period is started, and the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of Iai effects is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), the post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 returns from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. Then, when the preset operation valid period ends, the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that a series of Iai effects ends (. Time t5). The operation validity period may be terminated by the detection of the operation by the player, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure. If no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation valid period.

Here, the predetermined period (time t3-t2) from the time when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword pulling state to the start of the operation valid period is the mode (aura member) in which the player is in the second sword pulling state of the sword decoration body 5001. A period longer than the operation valid period (time t4-t3) is secured as an aspect confirmation period during which it is possible to confirm whether or not the form is attached, a light emission mode, and the like. That is, even if the operation unit (sword unit 5010) that can be operated by the player reaches the operation position (second sword removal state) that functions as the operation means, the operation acceptance is started immediately (the operation validity period is generated). Instead, the player is allowed to operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. As a result, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword decoration body 5001, and raises expectations for the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with an aura member, the expectation increases), and prepares the mind. As soon as the second sword is pulled out, the operation validity period starts and there is a concern that the interest of the game will decline due to the hasty shift to the operation production without confirming the mode of the operation means. Can be wiped off.

Further, the sword pulling effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed in a series of Iai effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is a movable effect (time t0 to t3). An operation effect (time t3 to t4) as an operation means is defined as an effect. As a result, the player can be impressed with the unexpectedness and variety of effects in switching the functions of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the deterioration of the game entertainment caused by the uniform effect by the conventional operation means can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself and the sword blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 has been described. However, the aura member 5035 is the sheath portion of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 provided in the 5020 is combined with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to form an integral decorative body.

As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the mode of the members (sword portion 5010 and aura member 5030) having the same system as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. is doing. The mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword delivery state, first sword withdrawal state, second sword withdrawal state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is determined based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 280). Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display will be an advantageous result for the player due to the change of its own mode, and raises the interest of the player's operation means (sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in playing games.

In addition, before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the second sword extraction state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation level is suggested by changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword delivery state to the first sword removal state. is doing. In addition, the aura members 5030 and 5035 appear in the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation. In this way, the sword ornament 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (first sword withdrawal state and appearance of aura member) in the process of changing from the sword delivery state to the second sword withdrawal state (operation position). , The player becomes strongly interested in the operating means until the operating means becomes operable. Further, when the state change of the operating means and the expectation degree suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the operation to the operation position is performed after the expectation degree suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation degree is high. In the aspect, there is a concern that the player may operate the sword decoration body 5001 even though the operating means is not yet in the operable operation position at the time when the player grasps the sword decoration body 5001. Since the state change to the position and the expectation degree suggestion proceed at the same time, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned erroneous operation.

In the above-mentioned first sword extraction state, only the habaki 5011a portion of the sword blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5012 so that the aura member 5030 (5035) cannot be visually recognized. A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the state of one drawing. At this time, make sure that the amount of sword drawn in the first sword-drawn state is less than the maximum amount of sword-drawn in the second sword-drawn state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in a completely appearing state when the second sword is pulled out. Since a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the expectation is high from the first sword withdrawal state can be visually recognized by the player, the player can have a higher expectation at the time of the first sword withdrawal state. You can increase your interest in subsequent changes.

Further, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first sword withdrawal state, it is determined that the aura member is attached at the stage of the sword withdrawal preparation transition production (high expectation). Since the player can grasp it and have high expectations, the disappointment when the sword-drawing production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the player's emotions are greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword-drawing book effect, and it is possible to provide a highly playful effect.

(Transformation example 1-Sword drawing using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 291 to 294, when the sword-drawing effect is executed in the reach effect, the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Will be described. FIGS. 291 to 293 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modified example 1. FIG. 294 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 of the modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. The same description as the above-mentioned sword-drawing effect (FIGS. 285 to 290) will be omitted as appropriate.

Here, the effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which neither the sword preparation transition effect nor the sword main effect is performed, and after the sword preparation transition effect is executed. Screen transition of the staging display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the staging pattern ((Y1)-(Y3)-> (F1)-(F3)-> (G1)-(G4) in the figure) in which the staging is performed. The transition and the motion transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described.

When the reach effect is started, the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 291 (Y1)), and the effect suggests the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 291 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation valid period are performed, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate is performed (FIG. 291 (FIG. 291). Y3). At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is emitted, and the operation button of the image display is also displayed in the same light emitting mode. Therefore, the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. It is possible to detect that the operation button 410 is emitted, and the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when the operation by the player is detected.

If the sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect are not performed and the result is off, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the reach effect is completed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying the result of the loss (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is terminated. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation button 410.

Further, when the sword-drawing main effect is performed after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected. A sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 292 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the staging display device 1600, the white characters of "Tenki" are displayed on the blackout screen (Fig. 292 (F1)), and the image of the samurai on his side trying to touch the sword is displayed. (FIG. 292 (F2)). Next, the sword-drawing effect in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawn state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura member) is started (FIGS. 292 (F3), 293 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (a form with an aura member) due to the sword extraction main effect, FIG. 292 (F2) immediately before and immediately after. Unlike the image of the samurai's Iai in FIG. 293 (G1), an image of a lightning bolt running is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation to win (hit) Iai is shown by the strength of the lightning bolt.

Subsequent production is the same as in FIGS. 287 (A2), (A3) and 288 described above, and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state and a predetermined period elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is used by the player. In order to function as an operation means that can effectively accept the operation of the sword decoration body 5001, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is urged to perform the sword delivery operation within the operation valid period (FIG. 293 (G2)), and the symbol type (hit or miss) is notified by the player's sword delivery operation (FIG. 293 (G3) or (FIG. 293). G4)).

Subsequently, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 294, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player initiates the state change of the sword decoration body 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is generated at an early stage, and the operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates the operation button 410 within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) (time ty), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to change the state, and the sword is first pulled out from the sword-delivered state. Here, in the first sword-drawn state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in order to make the sword decoration body 5001 function as an operation means. When a valid period occurs, an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 (time t3), and when the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation valid period (time t3 to t4) (time t3). At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). If the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) of the operation button 410 set in advance, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (first form) when the operation valid period ends. (2) It may be deformed and changed at once to a form with an aura member in a sword-drawn state). Further, the timing of the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state is changed according to the operation of the player's operation button 410, that is, after the first sword withdrawal state is reached and a certain period of time elapses, the state changes to the second sword withdrawal state. You may do it. Further, if the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (time t3 to t4) of the sword decoration body 5001 set in advance, the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the second when the operation valid period ends. It is returned from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state.

In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. The timing for starting the sword withdrawal operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the timing for starting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (time tp). In this way, the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is reversed (sword pulling operation and sword delivery operation) depending on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated, so that the mutual operation is effective. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operating means is operated during the operation valid period of one operating means, it becomes invalid.

As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, by operating the operation button 410 by the player, the form (final form) when the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operating means is determined (for example, the form with an aura member by deforming and changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001). It can be made to look like the second sword is pulled out. As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's motivation to operate can be increased.

Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect images corresponding to the deformation and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (FIGS. 292 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 293). Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, it is possible to further increase the operation value of the operation button 410 and enhance the interest of the game.

(Transformation example 2-Stage aura sword drawing using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 295 to 299, the degree of appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 with the aura member, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011, based on the modification 1. A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of operations of the operation button 410 by the player will be described. FIGS. 295 to 299 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modified example 2. The same effects as described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 stages. Aura level 0 indicates a completely contained state (FIG. 284 (A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visible to the player. The aura level 3 is a completely appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is fully visible to the player by being united with the blade portion 5011 in the second sword-drawn state while maintaining a relative positional relationship in the sword-delivered state (Fig.). 284 (B)) is shown. The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player by only 1/3 of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player for only two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

Here, there is no sword preparation transition effect with the effect pattern ((Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which neither the sword preparation transition effect nor the sword main effect is performed. Is the case where the sword-drawing effect is performed, and the effect pattern (in the figure) in which the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the final form (the form with the aura member in the completely appearing state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once. (Z1)-(Z3)-> (I1) and (I2)-> (G1)-(G4)), multiple operation of the operation button 410 is required, and the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001 changes stepwise. Regarding the effect pattern ((Z1)-(Z3)-> (J1)-(I2)-> (G1)-(G4) in the figure), the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword decoration body. The operation transition of 5001 will be described.

In the above-mentioned modification 1, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration body 5001 is found by operating the operation button 410 once, but in the modification 2, the operation of the operation button 410 is performed step by step. It is characterized in that a step operation effect is performed in which the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to change the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001.

First, in the effect pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword extraction main effect is not performed, that is, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 does not change even if the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. 291 of the above-mentioned modification 1. (Y1) to (Y3) → Follow the same staging transition as in FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2) (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 296 (H1) and (H2)).

In addition, there is no sword preparation transition effect, but the sword extraction main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member) by operating the operation button 410 once. ), The operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effect as in FIGS. 291 (Y1) to (Y3) of the above-mentioned modification 1 (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)). Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration body 5001 is united with the sword blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the sword blade part 5011 in the sword delivery state, and completely appears when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword removal state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 296 (I1)). The form of the sword decoration body 5001 of the above-mentioned modification 1 with an aura member is composed of the aura member 5030, and the modification 2 is different in that it is composed of the aura member 5035. FIG. 292 (F1) (F2) → follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 293 (FIG. 296 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

Further, in the case where there is no sword preparation transition effect but the sword extraction main effect is performed, the operation of the operation button 410 is required multiple times, and the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001 changes stepwise. The production transition is the same as before until the operation of the operation button 410 for the first time (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decoration body 5001 after the first operation is in the state of being delivered to the second state of being pulled out. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely housed state (aura level 0) in which the player cannot see it. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as in FIG. 296 (I1) described above (FIG. 297 (J1)).

Then, the second operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect of emitting and decorating the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. Is performed (Fig. 297 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura levels 0 to 3.

First, when the set aura level is "0" (that is, in the case of the form without the aura member), the aura member 5035 maintains the completely housed state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is terminated (there is no operation request for the operation button 410 thereafter), and it is notified that the process returns to the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state. An image (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (FIG. 297 (J3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 has no aura member, and follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. (FIG. 297 (J4) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

On the other hand, when the set aura level is any one of "1" to "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 appears from the completely housed state to 1/3. Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 297 (J5)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in green indicating aura level 1.

Then, the third operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect for which the operation target operation button 410 is light-emitting is decorated. Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 298 (K1)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be green indicating aura level 1. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "1", the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the player returns to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen. White letters) are displayed, and an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 1/3 appears, and in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 298 (K3) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "2" or "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in red indicating aura level 2.

Then, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image showing the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect that is decorated with light emission is performed (FIG. 298 (K5)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red, which indicates aura level 2. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "2", the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (Since then, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the player will return to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state (here, "Iza" on the blackout screen. White letters) are displayed, and an image showing the aura level is displayed (FIG. 299 (M1)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 2/3 appears, and in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (M1) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 299 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in a rainbow color indicating an aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state is performed. An image notifying the return (here, the white character of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 299 (L2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is the same as FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. Follow the production transition (FIG. 299 (L3) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In the above description, the degree of coalescence of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is changed each time at the operation timing when the aura level rises to widen the range visible to the player (increasing the degree of appearance). Not limited to. Even if the aura level rises, the aura that was confirmed when the aura level was confirmed (specifically, when the white letters "Iza" are displayed on the blackout screen) without increasing the appearance of the aura member 5035. A stock type combination may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 at once so that the appearance degree according to the level is obtained. Further, the target for increasing the appearance degree stepwise is not limited to the aura member 5035, and the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be targeted. For example, the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be gradually changed from the first sword-drawn state to the second sword-drawn state.

As described above, in the second modification, the player is requested to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as the operating means is in the movable state, which is a surprising novelty. It is possible to provide various operation effects, and it is possible to further enhance the fun of the game as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the player is given multiple operation opportunities to develop the production step by step, it is possible to impress the player with a great deal of involvement in the production and prevent the interest in the production from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is recognizable even in the subsequent production, the player can feel the afterglow of the operation production.

(Other staging pattern 1 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 300 to 302 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword-delivered state functions as an operating means, and the sword pulling operation by the player is operated and detected. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in the front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state is the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbol forms a reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 300 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 3). 300 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the staging display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the staging display device 1600 in the front view, and a part of the bamboo blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to the player. There is. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-delivered state.

In the princess reach effect, an image of the princess heading to the back of the blind is displayed (FIG. 300 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggestion image suggesting the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 300 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is urged to the player to pull out the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 301 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small steps in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. May be good. Then, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword pulling operation by the player means an operation of pulling out the sword blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword pulling state, the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, and the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection / notification operation may be an operation in which the sword portion 5010 (or the handle portion 5012) moves up and down, such as movement or vibration, and an operation different from the sword pulling operation of the player can be felt through the handle portion 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection / notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle portion 5012. For this reason, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) is reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body is prevented. Can be done.

In the sword pulling operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player pulls out the sword, depending on the degree of expectation. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is stationary above the display area without overlapping the display area of the staging display device 1600 (initial stage). The state) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 301 (C1)). Then, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the detached mode "767" (FIG. 301 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 301 (C2) is notified, but not limited to this, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the detection notification operation is terminated. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is placed in the center of the front surface (below the display area) overlapping the display area of the staging display device 1600. Only the hold display area can be dropped and moved to a visible state (total fall state) (FIG. 301 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the staging display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body. The 5001 maintains the second sword-drawn state (FIG. 301 (D2)). At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the staging display device 1600 may be provided, for example. By differentiating the color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed after that, the expected degree of the lottery result by the princess reach (the degree of expectation of winning, the game profit when it is a winning, etc.) may be suggested. ..

Then, after a predetermined period has passed since the sword decoration body 5001 was put into the second sword pulling state by the sword pulling operation by the player, that is, after the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the staging display device 1600, the second sword pulling state was reached. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the staging display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 301 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 having good visibility is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed with the blinds removed (Fig. 302 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword pulling operation was performed again, and in the display area of the staging display device 1600, when the result of this variation display is a hit, the hit is notified together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIG. 302 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the detachment is displayed together with a sad princess in the case of the detachment (FIG. 302 (F1) (F2)).

When the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player cannot move due to being grasped when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration body 5001, but the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player at the left-right movable production timing (FIG. 301 (D3)) of the sword decoration body 5001. If it is held in the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the movable effect in the left-right direction of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) are progressing. Because it is configured to do so, the progress of the game will not be stagnant. The sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured not to perform a movable effect. You may.

In this way, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword pulling operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved in the forward direction (at the operation position) of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. On the other hand, it can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword pulling operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword pulling operation was performed, increasing the operation value of the player and motivating the player to operate. It is possible to suppress the decline of. In addition, since one operating means can be operated in a stepwise different manner (vertical direction during operation, left-right direction after operation) by the operation by the player, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. It is possible to increase the operating value of the operating means as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

It should be noted that the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is an effect display for the purpose of performing an integrated effect with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (a sword accessory). The operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the staging display device 1600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after performing the sword pulling operation with the sword decoration body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved so as to be located outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed so as to be displaced to the left (the left end of the frame). Further, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example is a vertical movement (a sword pulling operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. For the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a direction different from the movement direction (here, the vertical direction) at the time of operation by the player (horizontal direction as in this example).

Further, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player is performed, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm it for a certain period of time, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the subsequent movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001, and preventing the movable body from being damaged by unnecessary contact. Further, if the movable effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to let go, and the operation is required during the operation valid period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection / notification operation is completed, the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other staging pattern 2 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 303 to 305, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 303 to 305 are diagrams illustrating the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which the expectation degree suggestion effect suggesting the expectation degree that the fluctuation during execution becomes a big hit and the operation of the operation button 410 are performed. As an effect, a pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 303 (A)), first, the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The operation promotion effect is started and the player is urged to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 303 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. When the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation degree suggestion effect is performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Later (FIG. 303 (N1)), an image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed (FIG. 304 (N2)). After that, the result of this variation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 304 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expected degree suggestion effect for the variable display during execution, and for example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expected degree (FIG. 304 (N2)). A character that changes the held display may be made to appear.

Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and expanded by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 303 (M1) shows an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, a message of the title "sword pulling chance" and the operation explanation "sword is delivered") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 305 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses after the second sword is pulled out and the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 305 (M3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the effect based on the result of the variation display this time is performed.

When the result of this variation display is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state ( FIG. 305 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative pattern) is displayed (FIG. 305 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the fluctuation display this time is out of order, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is only stopped from moving in small steps in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the disconnection (the stop mode “767” of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 305 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001) become possible, and the player can perform the operation button 410. It is not possible to specify the subsequent expansion at the time of manipulating. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation motivation and a decrease in the game interest, which is a concern due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach effects, the first operation (pressing operation and sword delivery operation) differs between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001). It will be requested from the player based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the player in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not look good.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. The operating means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. Is desirable.

(Other staging pattern 3 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 306 to 310 are diagrams illustrating a screen transition of the effect display device 1600, a state transition of the operation button 410, and an operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410. Even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable based on the pressing operation of, and is displayed in the detached mode, it is re-variated from the symbol display of the detached mode and the player is given an operation opportunity again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given / R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be explained.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 306 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, the start image of the operation effect). , The message "You can move the movable body with a single button blow") is displayed (Fig. 306 (B)), then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 306 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. When the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to a single blow (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) to be moved by the operation. You may do so. If the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is movable and becomes a big hit, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 307 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is released is an image (decorative pattern) for notifying the jackpot. The stop mode "777", the message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 307 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is only stopped to move in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 308 (P1). It is developed into a pattern (FIG. 308 (P2)) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in an detached mode (“767”), or a resurrection pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the staging display device 1600, the resurrection start image (referred to as "yet") indicating that the variable display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative symbol in the detached mode of FIG. 308 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 308 (P3)), the decorative design is again in the reach state and reduced to the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the center of the screen. An operation valid suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a samurai ally) is displayed (FIG. 308 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 308 (P5)). As a result, the player raises the expectation that the production using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be light-lit and decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state and moved up and down. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means according to the set effect pattern, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (Katana) is performed. The pattern on which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set so that the degree of expectation is lower than the pattern on which the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat oozes on the samurai's forehead of the operation valid suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is luminescently decorated (FIG. 309 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is continuously moved in small steps and the operation button 410 is light-lit and decorated, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation for prompting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 309 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, the operation button 410 is not decorated with light emission when it is operated a necessary number of times.

Then, when the result of the variable display becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 309 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed on the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible to the player at the lower right of the screen. As in the case of the above (FIG. 305 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the aspect of the decorative pattern at this point. Next, the screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again from the fully dropped state and the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image notifying the big hit (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed in the center (FIG. 309 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is out of alignment, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 309 (R5)).

When the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the operation means, the samurai who has closed his eyes in the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600 opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp (sword decoration body). (Confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in the form with an aura member (FIG. 310 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be light-emittingly decorated. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is effective instead of the operation button 410, but at this point, the form such as whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps, the second sword is pulled out and a predetermined period of time elapses, and when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 310 (Q2)).

Then, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 309 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 310 (FIG. 310). Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of alignment, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 309 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 310 (Q5)).

In this way, since the expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the expectation is more powerful than the expectation suggested by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. Further, even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 again. Will be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest, which is a concern because the operation effect is monotonous and does not look good.

In addition, although the above-mentioned three examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword decoration body 5001 are given in FIGS. 300 to 310, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of productions can be provided, and the entertainment of the game can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo-ream production using sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 311 to 325, a pseudo-continuous effect using the sword decoration body 5001 that changes the form stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variable, and is performed in response to the pseudo-continuous variation along with the pseudo-continuous variation in which the temporary stop and re-variation are repeated once or multiple times. Etc. are shown. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears to have stopped, but actually swings slightly and the fluctuation continues. In this example, when a variation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, the pseudo-continuous effect of the effect pattern that can be selected by the lottery of the effect content by the peripheral control board 1510 is described below. Explain to.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 311. There are two types of the sword decoration body 5001 up to the above, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member. Here, the sword portion 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle portion 5012. Are provided in two types.

FIG. 311 is a diagram illustrating a form of the sword decorative body 5001 used for the pseudo-ream effect. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deforming the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 so that the player can change the shape from the left and right sides of the sheath portion 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the door. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the above-mentioned aura member 5035, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the above-mentioned aura member 5030. FIGS. 311 (A) to 311 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state, and show the step 0 form to the step 3 form in order. The sword decoration body 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in FIG. 311 (A), the step 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. 281 (A) and 283 (A), and no operation is required for any of the initial components. Shows morphology. As shown in FIG. 311 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath portion 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 311 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle portion 5012 expands and moves so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from the inside. show. As shown in FIG. 311 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle portion 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. Shows morphology. Here, the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form enable the morphological change without putting the sword decorative body 5001 into the second sword pulling state. Further, since the sword portion 5010 capable of accepting operations by the player and the non-moving sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integral decorative body as the operation unit of the operation means, it is possible to provide a more powerful operation means. Can be done.

(Example of pseudo-continuous production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 325, an example of the effect transition will be described with respect to the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 320. FIG. 320 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 320 (A), the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern are determined by the main control board 1310. When any of the six types of variation patterns of the pattern is selected, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The production patterns that perform pseudo-continuous production include basic production patterns (sword LV1 weak production pattern, sword LV1 strong production pattern, sword LV2 weak production pattern, sword LV2 strong production pattern, sword LV3 weak) corresponding to each of the six types of variation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is selected. When the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). ), One of the sword LV3 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, and the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival LV1 effect pattern). Be selected.

In each of the staging patterns, the number of continuations (1 to 3 times) of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity according to the number of continuations, and when the operation opportunity is given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is set (see FIG. 320 (B)). The effect pattern names "LV1" to "LV3" correspond to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of 1 to 3 times. Further, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop positions (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In addition, the "pseudo-sword LV1" gives the sword decoration body 5001 a selection operation opportunity for the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), and the player makes a selection not to operate, so that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues. It is shown that it is a production that can acquire. Further, the "pseudo-resurrection sword LV1" follows the same production transition as the sword LV1 weak production pattern of the basic production pattern that gives the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 for the first pseudo-revolution fluctuation (re-variation). Fluctuation It is shown that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed again after the fall effect of the special decorative member SDY (sudare) based on the first operation opportunity. The details of the production contents of each production pattern will be described later.

Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the higher the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, the higher the expectation is as the morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 progresses, and further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare role) is set. The lower the drop position of the object), the higher the expectation is set. It is set so that the drop position of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is the same as the case where all the drops are made with the effect pattern that is less frequent. Specifically, the expectation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the half-fall sword LV1 weak staging pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continuation once and the full-fall sword. The expectation of the LV1 strong production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2 times, and the expectation of the half-falling sword LV2 weak production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2. The expectation of the sword LV2 strong production pattern of times and full fall is 50%, the expectation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 3 times, and the expectation of the sword LV3 weak production pattern of half-fall is 50%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). The expected degree of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of 3 times of continuation (variation) and the total fall is set to 65%. Further, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the selected fluctuation pattern even if the effect pattern is the same, and the higher the degree of expectation is, the higher the degree of expectation is set. The expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, respectively. Will be. Further, the expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and when the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is used. Further, the expectation of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set to 100% regardless of the variation pattern.

Hereinafter, the pseudo-sequential effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 320 (B) will be described with reference to an effect transition example shown in FIGS. 312 to 319 and an effect execution timing chart shown in FIGS. 321 to 325. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of the effect transition of the pseudo-continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. FIGS. 313 to 315 are diagrams showing a transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is being performed. Further, FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a transition example of the post-operation effect (fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. be. Further, FIGS. 317 and 318 are diagrams showing examples of effect transitions that are characteristic of the pseudo-sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo-sword LV1 strong effect pattern. Further, FIG. 319 is a diagram showing an example of a staging transition, which is a feature of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 staging pattern. Further, FIGS. 321 to 325 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sword accessory) in the pseudo-continuous production, and FIG. 321 is a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 322 is a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern), FIG. 323 is a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern), and FIG. 324 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 325 shows a pseudo-revival sword LV1 production pattern. In the following, an example of an effect transition in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in an effect before the variable display is started and the reach state is reached will be described.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 312 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) does not overlap with the display area of the staging display device 1600 in front view, and a part of the bamboo blind can be visually recognized by the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the state of delivering the sword in the stage 0 form (initial form).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 312 (B) and 312 (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect content notification "great chance if 100 bodies can be defeated" message, samurai An image that accumulates the aura) is displayed, suggesting to the player that the pseudo-continuous production will start. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 312 (D), the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are re-variated to the player. Notify that. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the embodiment, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600 has the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). ), A sword image showing the form of the sword decoration body 5001 (stage 1 form) in advance is displayed. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is notified at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts, so that the player Can grasp and face the stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. 312 (E), it is displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600 at the time of FIG. 312 (D) described above. The pseudo-sword pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 at this time is the timing when the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration body 5001 from the effect display which is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). The morphological change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). Pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 312 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in a magnified display. , The sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (G), in the display area of the staging display device 1600, is it possible to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state in which the player can operate the sword as an operating means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) indicating whether or not, that is, whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity, is displayed. Subsequent effects are a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective (a production pattern with "LV1" in the name) and a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is not operation-effective (name) according to a preset production pattern. Branches to the effect pattern) with "LV2" or "LV3" attached to. In the following, an example of the effect transition will be described in order for the nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak production pattern / Katana LV1 strong production pattern)
First, with reference to FIGS. 313 and 316, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration body 5001 as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the staging transition in the case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is covered with the above-mentioned FIG. 312 (G). An operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) is displayed (FIG. 313 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation is displayed (FIG. 313 (T2)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword removal state (stage 1 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (FIG. 313 (T3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) according to the set effect pattern.

Here, when the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U1), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) ) Is moved from the initial state to the full fall state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the staging display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 312 (B). An expectation notification image (“100 defeated!”) That notifies the expectation of the variation display result is displayed in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous production shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half-fall state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Here, the display of the expected degree notification image enables the player to grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Further, when the set effect pattern is a "weak" effect pattern, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a half-fall state. The semi-falling state means a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the fully falling state, and overlaps with the upper half area of the display area of the staging display device 1600 in front view. .. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned from the semi-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the staging display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 312 (B). An expectation notification image (“50 defeated!”) That notifies the expectation of the variation display result is displayed in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous production shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Then, as in the "strong" effect pattern, the expected degree notification image at this time is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

If the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001, the set effect pattern is regardless of whether it is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, as shown in FIG. 316 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. To. Regarding the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the "weak" effect pattern and the "strong" effect pattern. In this way, by operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword delivery operation is requested, the player can perform a reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the drop position of the specific decoration member SDY (sudare). I can meet you. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have a different expectation each time, so that the decrease in the motivation of the player to operate is suppressed, and further, the deterioration of the game interest for the uniform production is suppressed. can do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 321 the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is operated during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. Enable as a means and give the player an opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If there is no operation by the player, the fall effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 321, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword decoration body 5001 that has become operable (second sword withdrawal state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the staging display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification corresponding to the full fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the staging display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Katana LV2 weak production pattern / Katana LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 313 and 314, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration body 5001 as an operating means in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given at the operation opportunity grant timing of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). After following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to 312 (G), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not provided with an operation opportunity from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 312 (G). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 that was in the second sword-drawing state is returned to the sword-delivered state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 1 morphology (Fig.). 313 (S1)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 313 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the embodiment, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second pseudo-sequential fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. Further, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, when the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 313 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the step 1 form to the step 2 form in which the handle portion 5012 is split left and right so that the first decorative portion 5012a can be visually recognized (FIG. 313 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (FIG. 313 (S4)). The morphological change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decoration body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once at the timing when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the staging display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 2 form) in which the sword delivery operation by the player is possible as an operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 314 (V1)).

Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the staging display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) is displayed (an image). FIG. 314 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation is displayed (FIG. 314 (V3)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword removal state (stage 2 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (FIG. 314 (V4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can know that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the operation validity period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area, an escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed (Fig.). 318 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 322, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. In the period T2 in which the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 2 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. When the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 322, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 312 (G)), but the sword decoration body 5001 in an operable state (second sword-drawn state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword decoration body 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 314 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 314 (V4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the staging display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification corresponding to the full fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the staging display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T2.

(Katana LV3 weak production pattern / Katana LV3 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 314 and 315, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration body 5001 as an operating means in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body is used at the timing of giving the operation opportunity of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) shown in FIG. 314 (V1) above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 313 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1), the effect display device 1600 is used. In the display area, a continuous image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1), and the second sword is drawn. The sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 2 morphology (FIG. 314 (V5)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 314 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the embodiment, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600, a sword image showing the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo-sequential fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed in advance. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. In addition, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, when the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 314 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative portion 5012b protrudes above the first decorative portion 5012a so that both decorative portions can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body (the sword decorative body 5001). FIG. 314 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (FIG. 314 (V8)). The morphological change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword decoration body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state may be set to be simultaneous. Further, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 does not have to be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and when the final stage is reached, the form may be changed collectively for a plurality of stages. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once at the timing when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the staging display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 form) in which the sword delivery operation by the player is possible as an operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 315 (X1)).

Here, when the set effect patterns are the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the staging display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1) is displayed (an image). FIG. 315 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation is displayed (FIG. 315 (X3)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword removal state (stage 3 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (FIG. 315 (X4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can know that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the operation validity period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of, an escape image ("enemy, escape!") Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed ("Enemy, escape!") Is displayed (. See FIG. 318 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 323, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are In the period T2 in which the sword decoration is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the game is played. Give a person an operation opportunity. When the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 323, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 312 (G)), but the sword decoration body 5001 in an operable state (second sword-drawn state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 314 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword decoration body 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the staging display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification corresponding to the full fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the staging display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 317 and 318, the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), but the pseudo-continuous variation is made by selecting not to be operated by the player. An example of an effect transition when a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire continuation (level-up effect) of (re-variation) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given at the operation opportunity grant timing of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). .. However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. 313 (T1), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity of FIG. 313 (T1). An operation selection image (“may be an opportunity !?” message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z1). )). Then, the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect for urging the selection of the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and operation validity period are shown together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword". The image is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z2)).

Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is a variation of either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern). Subsequent effect transitions differ greatly depending on whether the effect pattern is set based on the pattern.

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When it is detected, it follows the same effect transition (FIG. 316) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern.

On the other hand, if the sword-delivering operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. When the valid period of the operation is completed, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second sword drawing state of the stage 1 form to the sword delivery state of the initial form, and the display area of the staging display device 1600 has this selection operation opportunity. An image (“Is it an opportunity ...”) indicating that it was an opportunity to operate is displayed (FIG. 318 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("enemy, escape!" ) Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 318 (W3)).

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When detected, FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 316 (U1) → After following the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (total period of the periods T2 and T3) is variablely displayed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode (not shown). Then, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the normal mode at the same timing as a predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 316 (U5)). reference).

On the other hand, if the sword-delivering operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. When the operation validity period in which the operation is performed ends, the operation pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-mentioned FIG. 317 (Z2) to a continuous image (FIG. 313 (S1)) showing that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. After that, in the same manner as the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, FIGS. 313 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. ) → FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 316 (U5).

As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) greatly differs in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310. When the selected fluctuation pattern is a sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when operating at the selection operation opportunity, the basic effect pattern Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and face the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to obtain the level-up effect described later, but you will also reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the degree of expectation that you could have known if you originally operated it. .. Further, when the selected fluctuation pattern is a sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If you do not operate at the selection operation opportunity, you can enjoy the effect by continuing the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) as in the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if it is operated, the effect of continuing the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) that could be obtained without operation (the change in the form of the sword decoration 5001 due to the level-up effect) is overlooked, and the form of the sword decoration 5001 is initially set. It will be returned to the form. As for the operation in the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, which is unknown to the player, is exactly the opposite, and the operation in the operation valid period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that brings a disadvantageous operation result to the person. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a feeling of tension and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game caused by a uniform operation effect.

In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) occurs. When the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the level of the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form at the time of the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decoration body 5001, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is raised to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, an operation is required a preset number of times in the effect pattern, but in this example, two operation opportunities (LV1 and L3) can be given in advance, but one operation is performed by the player. The grant will end at the opportunity, and it is possible to provide a novel production that more reflects the intention of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate due to an operation effect that does not look good, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In other words, even if an effect pattern is set in which the sword decoration body 5001 can change from the initial form to the stage 3 form according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, the initial form to the stage 1 form may be set depending on the operation of the player. Only the changes up to can be seen, leading to reach production. Since the player can be made to select an operation without being caught by the selected fluctuation pattern (set effect pattern), the player can be given a feeling that his / her own operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). .. If you do not operate the sword decoration body 5001, you will not be able to grasp the degree of expectation and you will end up, and the form will change (level up) further, and you will operate it at the operation opportunity given after becoming the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the non-operation selection produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set so that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 320 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect more suitable for the player's own sense of selection, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 324, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing of is described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 1 form is performed. Is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is a sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or a sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, three pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are originally provided so that the specific decoration can be performed. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol variation in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern. Then, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, the second and third pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are continued, and the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation is continued. In the period T2 in which (re-variation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And give the player an opportunity to operate. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 324, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). (See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword decoration body 5001 that has become operable (second sword withdrawal state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → FIG. 317). (See (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 317 (Z2)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the staging display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the full fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues (when the sword is set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation valid period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S1)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 314 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword decoration body 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the staging display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the full fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the staging display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

In addition, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is not continued (when the sword is set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the staging display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 319, the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern is followed, and after making it appear as if the reach production is entered as it is, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is revived. An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

When the set effect pattern is a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the above-mentioned FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIGS. Follow the production transition. When the operation by the player is detected in the first operation opportunity, the same effect as in FIGS. 316 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above is performed regardless of the type of the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 319). After following the staging transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo-continuous fluctuation by the pseudo-continuous sword symbol is restarted again. If the operation by the player is not detected in the first operation opportunity, the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the initial form of the sword delivery state at the end of the operation valid period, as in the other effect patterns. Instead of the above-mentioned FIG. 319 (UA1) → (UA2), the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends without the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)).

The resumption of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600 shown in FIG. 319 (UA3) described above. Temporary stop display with a pseudo-sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, a pseudo-sword pattern that shows the form and effect level (number of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001. This will notify the player (Fig. 319 (UA4)). On the pseudo-sword pattern at this time, the sword image of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form and the effect level 3 are displayed. At this point, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001, and the initial form (sword delivery state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo-recovery sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of the temporary stop display (FIG. 319 (UA4)) immediately before the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form starts, the form and the effect level of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, in the display area of the staging display device 1600, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 319 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display acts on the sword decoration body 5001. It is moved and displayed toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration part 5012a and the second decoration part 5012b operate and both decoration parts can be visually recognized as an integral decoration body. (Fig. 319 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (Fig. 319 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form for a plurality of stages, it is possible to impress a powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 form), which enables the sword delivery operation by the player, is enabled as an operation means, and the above-mentioned FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X5) are provided with an operation opportunity. If an operation by the player is detected after following the effect transition of, although not shown, the specific decorative member SDY (not shown) depends on the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. The type of drop effect of the bamboo blind) is determined. If the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is once in a half-dropped state, so the level is raised to the above-mentioned FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2). → The same as (U5), the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the total drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends. On the other hand, if the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the expectation level due to the half-drop effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (sudare) as in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends.

If the operation by the player is not detected at the operation opportunity to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword pulling state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation valid period ends as in the other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the initial state of sword delivery, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not perform the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) occurs. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Showing that the process has ended is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

In this way, the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern follows the same effect transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, and when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored again, it jumps over the level of the stage 2 form and the stage 3 form. Since the same development as the production of the level of (the production of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the basic production pattern) is performed, the player is surprised and reaches with a stronger expectation than other production patterns. Can face. In addition, the player will not be disappointed even if the operation opportunity is given by the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is half-falled. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 325, the operation execution timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 staging pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operating means in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. Give the player an operation opportunity. At this time, regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is half-dropped by the player's operation (expectation notification). Direction) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

Then, after the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed and the display returns to the variation display of the decorative symbol in the normal mode, the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in another staging pattern is performed. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the sword decoration body that changes its form into the step 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped during the period T1, the specified decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the player's operation (expectation notification). Direction) is performed. Further, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped during the period T1 during the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped by the player's operation. A production (expectation notification production) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 325, when the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). (See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword decoration body 5001 that has become operable (second sword withdrawal state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 319 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the staging display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 319 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the staging display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

After that, in the display area of the staging display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative symbol in the normal mode (see FIG. 319 (UA3)), but the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is restored (FIG. 319 (UA4). )reference).

Then, at the same time as the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restarted, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 319 (UA5)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 319 (UA6)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword decoration body 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is changed from the initial state to the total drop state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 316 (U1)). Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to the entire drop in the display area of the staging display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) starts from the initial state. It changes to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)), and the expected degree notification image of the expectation degree corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the staging display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2). )), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous effect using the sword decoration body 5001, the number of pseudo-continuous changes is 2 and 3 times in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times, respectively. If it is less than, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state for each pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) so that the player can operate it, but an operation validity period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the sword-delivered state without giving the player an operation opportunity. For this reason, the player is expected to see whether or not the operation is effective even if the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operable, so that the player is interested in the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in operation motivation and a decrease in amusement interest.

Further, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is characterized in that the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a useful effect for the player by the operation of the player. Make the player's operation selection careful. Therefore, it is possible to make the sword decoration body 5001 interested in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the sword decoration body 5001 can change its form step by step until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation validity period occurs), the expectations and interests of the player are raised step by step, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. The period from when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operation state and in the second sword withdrawal state (operation position) until the operation effective period is generated is the operation time mode (form, light emission, movable) in the operation position by the player. Etc.) should be provided for a period in which it can be sufficiently confirmed. As a result, the player can confirm the operation mode before operating the sword decoration body 5001, so that the operation valid period is generated as soon as the second sword is pulled out, and the mode of the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to dispel the concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the hasty shift to the operation production.

The step change of the sword decoration body 5001 described above is shown in the form, but the present invention is not limited to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emitting mode or the operation mode of the sword decoration body 5001, may be changed stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

(Application to look-ahead production)
Although the sword-drawing effect in the pseudo-continuous reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a look-ahead effect. The case of applying to the look-ahead effect will be described below. In the following, a case where the third hold is the target of the look-ahead effect and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the look-ahead effect pattern will be described as an example.

When the hold to be the look-ahead effect occurs as the third hold 3, the same effect as in FIGS. 312 (B) to 312 (F) described above is performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. It should be noted that the sword decoration body 5001 is different in that the second sword withdrawal state is limited to the time when the operation opportunity is given (the operation validity period is generated). Then, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIG. 312 (G) → FIGS. 313 (S1) to (S4) described above is performed. Further, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 2 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIGS. 314 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X3) is performed. Will be. As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state only at the occurrence timing of the operation valid period in the look-ahead effect. Here, the operation valid period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 which is the target of the look-ahead effect is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change (sword delivery state) of the operation promotion effect and the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 315 (X4) described above are started. The second sword is pulled out from). After that, the same effect transition as in FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the look-ahead effect is completed.

The state change of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state is limited to the occurrence timing of the operation valid period, but the gradual morphological change is performed at the end of the variation display, but the next variation display is performed. It may be done at the start. The look-ahead effect has the same effect as the pseudo-continuous reach effect.

(Pre-operation suggestion staging using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is operation-effective or the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). .. Specifically, as a suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory), the operation valid period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation valid period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position, and there is a sword decoration body 5001 (from the operation button 410). When the operation is valid, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) that generates the operation valid period with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) positioned at the initial position even during the operation valid period. When is performed, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with an operation of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed. Has a 70% probability (including a step-up pattern) that the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective, and a 30% probability that the operation button 410 is operation-effective. Hereinafter, an example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
FIGS. 326 and 327 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 during the reach effect by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect which performs the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 326 (A)), the operation button is determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operating means of the 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 326 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001.

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) that is predetermined to be effective for operation is generated. Let me. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the initial position, the operation button 410 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the sword decoration body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 is operated and enabled, as shown in FIG. 326 (C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Let me. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated effectively, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the ratio is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 326 (D), the operation valid period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible.

If an operation on an operation effective means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) is detected in FIG. 326 (C) or (D) described above, and the result of this variation display becomes a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved to drop from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a stop mode "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the staging display device 1600 is notified of the out of order. An image (stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 328 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-enabled during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect to be executed. In FIG. 329, although the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 was once enabled for operation without the sword decoration body 5001 being operation enabled, and then the sword decoration was performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern which makes the body 5001 operation effective.

As shown in FIG. 328 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 whose operation is determined to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. It is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps the upper part of the display area of the staging display device 1600 from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) that is predetermined to be effective for operation is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in the suggested position, the sword decoration body 5001 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

When the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position. To generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible. Further, even when the operation button 410 is operated effectively, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 is used. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved from the state of being operated at the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) may be moved from the state of operating to the suggested position to the fully dropped state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation on the operation-effective operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 328 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 326 (C) or (D) is used. Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved so as to be in a completely dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a stop mode "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the staging display device 1600 is notified of the out of order. An image (stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

The operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggested position, but a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the ratio of the sword decoration body 5001 that is effective for operation is different, the player's interest in the motion can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern that follows the effect transition from FIG. 328 (AA1) to (AA3) described above before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational effective, the operation button 410 becomes operational once, and then the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 329 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 which is determined in advance to be operation-effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) described above is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) as in FIG. 328 (AA1) described above is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps (FIG. 329 (BB1)). ). Next, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (FIG. 329 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 327 described above is not performed, and the switching suggesting the switching of the operation effective operation means. Suggested images (most blackout images) are displayed (FIG. 329 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the staging display device 1600, the operation means for which the operation is effective is from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration body 5001. A switching notification image (message of "chance to pull out the sword" and "a message that the sword should be delivered") is displayed (FIG. 329 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 327) in the above-mentioned second suggestion pattern.

It should be noted that, at the time of FIG. 329 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the operation of the button operation 410 (without the operation promotion effect). It suffices if the player's interest can be directed to the button operation 410 and then the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is effective is generated. ) Can be changed, and the operation means that is effective depending on the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) in which the operation valid period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operation valid. In the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1), where the operation validity period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggestion position, the sword decoration body 5001 is highly expected. Is highly expected to be effective for operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in order to grasp which operation means is effective for operation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 327) after the operation of the operation means, a series of drop effects are performed from the vertical wiggle movement of the pre-operation suggestion effect. It can be shown as a production of, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body will be effective, is not limited to this, and the character is shown during the pre-operation suggestion effect. It may be displayed to suggest the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means for which the operation is effective is determined, not only the operation button 410 is lit or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second sword withdrawal state, but also the operation means for which the operation is effective is moved by vibration or the like. You may do it.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation (or pretended to be valid) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggested position. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation of the sword decoration body 5001. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to have the expectation that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that the motivation for operation is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is effective is displayed. At the same timing (FIG. 326 (B)), as in the second suggested pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is viewed from the initial position in front of the display area of the staging display device 1600. It may operate in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper portion, and may be moved in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. After that, when the operation valid period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the movement in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the sword decoration body 5001 to be effective even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is executed. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation valid period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Perform the production with a pattern. In the effect period in which a specific effect pattern is executed, a specific effect acceptance period (valid period) in which a specific effect execution condition is satisfied can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific effect acceptance period. And, based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting a privilege). The degree of expectation for giving a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide another operating means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when the operation button 410 satisfies a specific effect execution condition), this There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the pre-operation effect to which the operation opportunity is given occurs even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for granting the privilege is higher than the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for the privilege grant suggested when the operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when the production is in the pre-stage where it has not been performed yet and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired effect result (effect result suggesting that the expectation for granting the privilege is high, etc.) does not appear in the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation for another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). Even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such operation-related production. Become.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) having such a staging property. If so, it is possible to execute a common operation-related effect when giving those operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, at least, as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) in which the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted), at least
-The operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) after the "specific operation-related effect" that can appear even when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled (the effect can be accepted). The first effect mode that generates the valid period (effect acceptance period), and the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) without starting the effect of "specific operation-related effect". A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) to be performed are prepared, and by executing one of the production modes, the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (effect). It is designed to generate a valid period (directing reception period) that can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period in which the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be accepted. Regardless of whether there is a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for staging, it is common (specific) prior to the occurrence of those periods. ), Since the operation-related effects can be executed, it becomes possible to have an interest in which of the specific operation means and another operation means can accept the effects. By performing the operation while the above is performed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In such a common (specific) operation-related effect, one of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) corresponds to a predetermined time after the effect is started. The production reception period will be generated, but at least when the production is started, which of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) corresponds to the production reception period will occur. Should be kept secret.

Hereinafter, some effect modes that can be adopted when carrying out such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanatory examples and other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means targeted for a common (specific) operation-related effect, respectively. The type of the operation means is not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be the target of the common (specific) operation-related effect. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show the production content when any of the production reception periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related production is executed, and the common (specific) production is shown. ) Operation-related effects may be omitted if any of the effect acceptance periods occurs without being executed. However, as shown in FIGS. 206 (E) and 206 (G), for example, the effect contents when any of the effect acceptance periods occurs without the common (specific) operation-related effect being executed. .. That is, in this case, the operation instruction image for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears or the operation instruction image for prompting the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 appears without executing the specific operation-related effect. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach effect is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period during which is being executed, or is common during the execution period of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed with each of the effects of each of the other examples described later, and can also be appropriately combined and executed with each of the above-mentioned effects. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined with the effects of each of the other examples described later by substituting a part thereof, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. Further, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform the effect of each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for each of the different productions described later.

[First staging mode]
In FIGS. 330 and 331, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the production example (the first production mode) to be performed.

In FIG. 330 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of holdings is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 330 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 330 (a) is being executed.

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display is displayed to move within each. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword It is suggested that the operation for any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 330 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330 (b) is advanced, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "Operate" and a staging reception) prompting you to operate any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) while each is stopped and displayed in the area. A bar display) showing the remaining time of the possible period) shows the production status.

According to such an effect mode, although the operation for at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be received, the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to make it unclear which of the above is available for staging. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 330 (c)) in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 can be received for the effect and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means are performed before the operation for at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) can be received. Common (specific) operation-related as shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and (c) over a period until the operation for at least one of (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for staging. I try to perform the production.

Therefore, in addition to this effect example, in each effect example described below and other examples thereof, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and 330 (c). do not have. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 and the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 is after that (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). It suffices if it occurs in (middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for staging. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted. For example, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and sword decoration. An effect image different from any of the image SYGs may be made to appear as a specific operation-related effect without appearing.

However, in order to more surely conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect, there is a case where the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs and the effect for the sword decoration body 5001. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of specific operation-related effects (starting of the effect) to the occurrence of those effect reception periods, depending on whether the reception period occurs.

In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation for any of the operation means ("Operate!" , Etc.), or always operate a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means, regardless of how the multiple operation means can receive the effect. May be displayed to prompt the user. In short, as an operation instruction, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be accepted for the effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production.

Further, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 330 (c), it is concealed as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated to accept the production. , Even when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting the production, and when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not capable of accepting the production (in any of the first to third situations described later). Even so), only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is set to emit light, and the operation of the operation button 410 is urged. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the sword decoration body 5001 side to provide the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect situation in which the image shown in FIG. 330 (c) appears is only the operation for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where the production can be accepted, or in the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be accepted for the production, or the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for the sword decoration body 5001. Both of them are set to be in one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001) occurs among these a plurality of situations, the first situation (the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) is given. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001) occurs within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate at which (the situation in which is granted) occurs.

Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), the operation button 410 is operated in any of the first situation (operation button 410) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). Is performed (whether the progress of "FF" in the figure is made), or when it is in either the second situation (sword decoration body 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). When the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed (when the progress of "GG" in the figure is made), the effect reception is performed and the operation time effect according to the operation (FIG. 331 (d), FIG. 331 (f)). Is supposed to be done.

In the operation-time effect, regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 performs a predetermined display effect. ("Chance !!") is supposed to be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception. , The degree of expectation for granting benefits may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time production according to this production example (first production mode), the production is accepted by the operation by the player in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute the control to put the operating means into the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331 (d), even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the operation is performed according to the effect reception. It is possible to execute the control to reciprocate the sword decoration body 5001 on the side not performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which the effect reception is generated as a result of the player's operation on the operation button 410 and the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, the "operation" is performed. Even if the sword decoration body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated without operating the button 410, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side may have been executed. It will be possible to appeal the possibility to the player.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword pulling operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in the sword delivery position according to the production reception. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the sword withdrawal position (sword withdrawal state) instead of returning to the sword withdrawal state. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword delivery position (sword delivery state) to the sword removal position (sword removal state) based on the operation by the player, and is in a state of being maintained in such a sword removal state. Occasionally, the production will be performed during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed between the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation time effect on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body at that time. By confirming the operating state of the 5001, it becomes possible to feel that the operation-time effect caused by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 side is being executed.

Then, after the operation-time effect (FIGS. 331 (d) and (f)) is performed in this way, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 331 (e). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side is available. Even if it is executed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not operated (sword delivery position (sword delivery state)) when a predetermined time has elapsed (at a stage before the reach effect is started). It will be controlled to return to. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decorative member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating movement or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than until the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 330 and 331, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001) is used. Regardless of whether 5001) is allowed to accept the effect or not, the common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) effect is started. While the operation-related effect is being executed, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect. Since the operation button 410 can be used for staging, the specific operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operating means (for example, the operation button 410) can be used for staging. It will be possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping it secret.

In this production example (first production mode), in particular, whether a specific operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can accept the production, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is the production. Regardless of whether the operation button 410 can be accepted or not, when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is allowed to accept the production, the sword decoration body 5001 is said to be able to accept the production. You will be able to be confused as if it weren't there. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to urge the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the effect with a relatively high expectation is performed when the effect is received. It is expected that when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it will be interesting to know which operation means should be operated.

In addition, when the operation means of the side that cannot accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the effect is not accepted. No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is exhausted by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, if the operation means of the side that is not allowed to accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the above operation is performed. Although the effect reception required for executing the effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection of the operation itself is to be performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection. Control may be performed to end the effect acceptance period for the means at that time. With such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is obtained between the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although it is set to be executed, these operation-time effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation-time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect-time effect performed by the operation-time effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 may emit light. , A unique production sound is generated, etc.), it becomes possible to more appropriately improve the game entertainment when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received.

Further, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other effect mode. The production reception period is not set when the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) and the production reception period related to the occurrence of the other production mode is not set. An effect acceptance period is set for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001 is used, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration body 5001, the operation button 410). In either case, when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 330 (c), it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect. That is, in this case, when there is an operation for the first operation means while the effect acceptance period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, While another effect mode is executed as an operation-time effect, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed and the effect acceptance period related to the occurrence of the above-mentioned other effect mode is not set (No. 1). When there is an operation for the first operation means (when the effect reception period for the operation means 2 is set), another effect mode is not executed as the effect at the time of operation, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be performed. In short, when the effect acceptance period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect acceptance period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. It will be set for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when another effect mode appears as the operation time effect, the second operation is performed instead of causing the other effect mode to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation time effect on the second operation means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as an effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related production is performed is the situation where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used. The first situation where only the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted for the production, the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, and the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 It is set so that both the operation and the operation for the above correspond to one of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation time effect is displayed when the effect reception is performed, whereas in the third situation, the operation time is different from that of the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or the above-mentioned other effect mode (different from the operation-time effect of the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-mentioned production example, the above-mentioned third situation is not always necessary.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-mentioned production example is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied by control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), the player does not perform the operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be enabled to be executed. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, regarding the control to operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position) at an earlier stage. It is desirable to end the operating state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 332 to 335 show that the specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect showing the process of the effect until either the first effect result or the second effect result appears. It is suggested that when the first effect result appears as a result of the above, an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means Of these, it is a figure which shows the effect example (second effect mode) which suggests that the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs.

In FIG. 332 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of reservations is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 332 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 332 (a) is being executed.

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is simultaneously displayed in the image, and the state in which the lightning bolt image IZ acts on those images BTG and SYG is depicted. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword It is suggested that the operation for any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 332 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b) is advanced, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed as effects. An effect is performed in which the other party is pushed out of the display area by pushing each other in the display area of the device 1600.

That is, in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c)) relating to this effect example (second effect mode), "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG press each other, and these images are pressed. It is executed as an effect such as "Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area", and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in FIGS. 332 (b) and 332 (c) is either "the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001". It corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods" even when the occurrence of.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 332 (c) depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains in the display area in a predominant situation, and the figure on the right side shows a sword decoration image SYG. It depicts how the situation is predominant to remain in the territory. In a specific operation-related production, the situation of such inferiority / superiority changes from moment to moment with the passage of time.

FIG. 333 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c). Is being performed (first production result). When the content of the effect is advanced, the period for accepting the effect for the sword decoration body 5001 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 333 (d)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the effect (the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs).

At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays (character display such as "press" and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is in a state where the effect reception is possible (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, the operation of the operation button 410 is urged by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 to the light emitting state.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is advanced through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.). The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 332 (a)) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the expectation for granting benefits is higher than that.

Further, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The rate at which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed without going through It is desirable to make it high. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the later-described staging delay when the specific operation-related effect is passed.

In FIG. 333 (e), as a result of performing an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. It depicts how the production is being performed during operation.

The operation-time effect shown in FIG. 333 (e) is the same as that of FIG. 331 (d). That is, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is placed in the first position and the second position according to the effect reception. The same applies to the fact that control for reciprocating operation between the position and the position (control for setting the operating state) can be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception. Then, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Then, after such an operation-time effect (FIG. 333 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 333 (f). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, the reach effect is started when a predetermined time elapses after the operation time effect is executed. Control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-operated state (sword delivery state)) at a stage prior to that. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decorative member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating movement or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than until the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 334 (g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is in the display area. A production that depicts the remaining state is being performed (second production result). When the content of the effect is advanced, the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 334 (g)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be accepted for the production (the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs) among the plurality of operation means. ..

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display prompting the operation (character display such as "sword pull out" and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is possible to receive the effect (during the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001) among the plurality of operation means. In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit having the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be in the light emitting state) is in the light emitting state. By doing so, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is urged.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is advanced through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.). The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 332 (a)) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without undergoing a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than in the case, and the expectation for granting benefits is lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed after a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

In FIG. 334 (h), as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among a plurality of operating means while the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is being performed, an effect reception is performed and the operation is performed. It is a depiction of how the production is being performed during operation.

The operation-time effect shown in FIG. 334 (h) is basically the same as the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. In 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, a production mode such as "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the production reception, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. "Chance !!" may be displayed. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception. By doing so, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), the effect mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes based on the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 ( It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 311 to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form), and the degree of expectation for granting benefits such as a big hit depends on which of these modes appears. The height is suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 334 (i), even if the operation-time effect (FIG. 334 (h)) is terminated and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position). The sword decoration body 5001 is not returned to the sword-delivered state, but is kept in the sword-drawn state. That is, in this production example, although the illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is kept in the sword-drawn state, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword delivery state (during the period when the reach production is performed, etc.). The operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and in that case, the operation-time effect according to the operation to the sword-delivered state can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is given an operation opportunity in two stages, and the first stage operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) and the second stage operation. Since the effect at the time of operation is performed according to each operation (operation to the sword delivery state), not only when the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is being operated, but also the first stage. It is expected that the game interest for the operation will be maintained favorably even during the non-operation period from the operation of (operation to the sword withdrawal state) to the second stage operation (operation to the sword delivery state). Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in opposite directions). Further, it is desirable that the operation time effect corresponding to the first stage operation and the operation time effect according to the second stage operation are different from each other.

Further, when the operation-time effect (FIG. 334 (h)) is performed according to the first stage operation, the sword decoration body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the sword-drawn state, and is not maintained in the sword-drawn state. In that case, it is desirable not to give the operation opportunity of the second stage. Whether to maintain the sword decoration 5001 at the position (sword-drawn state) where the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state) can be given in the operation-time production according to the first-stage operation. It may be executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not. That is, when the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state and is returned to the sword-delivered state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state). It is clear that it will be. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

If the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-pulled state as a result of performing the operation-time effect (FIG. 334 (h)) according to the first stage operation, when a predetermined time has elapsed (reach effect). The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword delivery state)) before the start of the sword decoration body 5001. However, in this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is in its operating state (reciprocating) for at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation (maintenance in the state of pulling out the sword). Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than until the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 335 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 333 (d). The effect of describing the state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this production example (second production mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the production shown in FIG. 332 (c) is performed, the production shown in FIG. 333 (d) or the production shown in FIG. 334 (g). Either the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) or the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears. It is said that which effect content appears is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), unlike the case of the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the effect performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c)). (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning bolt image IZ may cause some change in the button image BTG.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), the instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as "press" or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed, which is also shown in FIG. 333 (d). ) Is different from the case of the production shown in. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the effect acceptance period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes recognizable that there is.

In FIG. 335 (k), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in the mist MY, and even the outline description thereof is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), all the effect elements (button image BTG) suggesting that the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect are removed. Therefore, although it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) that the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted, such an effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) appears. As a result, it becomes possible to raise a suspicion as to whether the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

Even in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitely shown which of the plurality of operating means the production acceptance period will occur is reduced. It suggests that it is.

In FIG. 335 (i), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production that depicts the appearance of the sword is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, it is suggested that the outer shape of the mist MY may cause an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410. You will be able to.

Further, also in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with FIG. It suggests that the remaining time of is even less.

Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i) is further advanced and the mist MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 334. The production shown in (g) is performed.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even in the case of (FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 335 (j)), there is a possibility that the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, so that the game entertainment should be maintained. Will be able to.

In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 335 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning bolt image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect for the sword decoration body 5001 is achieved. It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and this will also enable the maintenance of the game entertainment.

In this effect example (second effect mode), the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears (FIG. 335 (k)), and further. When the production is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 334 (g) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that it is a production that suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is prevented from necessarily approaching the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 335 (j) and 335 (k) also hides which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, even in the effect situation shown in FIG. 334 (h) in the above-mentioned effect example (second effect mode) after providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, FIG. 333 (e) is used. Similar to the effect situation shown in the above, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be enabled. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Third production mode]
336 to 339 are diagrams showing an example of an effect (third effect mode) that is basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but is different from the second effect mode. Is.

In FIG. 336 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of reservations is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 336 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 336 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. This suggests that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be ready for staging.

In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and these operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated respectively. As a result, it is easy to make it possible for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 to be able to receive the effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. I try to make it recognizable. Here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 from the initial position to the operation position, but compared to the case where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated to the operation positions when the operation opportunity is given. I try to operate each at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, it is an operation means in which time is still left before the effect acceptance period occurs, or an operation means in which the effect acceptance period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed. Regardless of this, each of these operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left before the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change ends, the game entertainment for those operations can be enjoyed. It will be possible to maintain it suitably.

Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is produced by each operation (FIG. 336 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the effect display in the effect display device 1600. After the start, basically the same production progress as the above-mentioned second production mode is made.

For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 336 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed except that the button image BTG corresponds to the “movable operation button 410”. , The production content is as described with reference to FIG. 332 (b).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are at positions different from the initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. In addition, it is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operating position when the operating opportunity is given.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is immediately given without the operation-related effect, but it is movable. When the operation means is adopted, even if such an operation-related effect is finally completed, it is necessary to operate the operation means on the side where the effect can be accepted to at least the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related production will be further delayed by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay will reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect acceptance period has occurred is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect acceptance period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operation means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the extension of the operation-related production. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operating state at a position different from the operation position, so that the production reception period is in the operating state. It will be possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "movable operation button". Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to "410", the production content is as described with reference to FIG. 332 (c). However, even in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

In the effect shown in FIGS. 336 (b) and 336 (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 show an aspect when they are in the initial position (non-drive position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, by intentionally making the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the staging display device 1600 different from the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, their matching will be achieved in the near future. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect to be performed (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed, or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

Further, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "at the operation position". Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (d).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operating position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Become so.

As the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), first of all, "a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed". After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character display such as "press" or effect) for generating an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 to prompt the operation is performed. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 will be different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the deviation of those modes will soon be filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 333 (e) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state of being returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). Moreover, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position.

After such an operation-time effect (FIG. 337 (f)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 337 (g). Is also as described with reference to FIG. 333 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is performed, the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is an operation of the sword decoration body 5001. Except that the instruction content regarding the above is "pushed in" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", the effect as explained with reference to FIG. 334 (g). It is the content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in an operating state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in an operating state. That is, in this case, since the sword decoration body 5001 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Will be done.

As the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), "a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode of moving to the operation position)". First, after performing the display effect, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character such as "push"" that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the sword at the time of display is displayed. The decorative image SYG will be different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes can be prevented. It will be possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be filled (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 334 (h) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. The sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of being returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an operation-time effect (FIG. 338 (i)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 338 (j). Is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 335 (j).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operating position. It is suggested that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and the possibility that the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred still remains even by setting such an operation state. You will be able to do it.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (k) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operation at different positions.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (l) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operation at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the operating position than the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the initial position.

When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that it is a production that suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is prevented from necessarily approaching the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 339 (k) and 339 (l) also hides which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In this effect example (third effect mode), the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

In each of the above-mentioned effect modes, and in another example thereof, when "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, it is basic. Is given an operation opportunity only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the operation time effect on the button side is performed. Become. Further, when the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" appears as a production result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. Of the body 5001, the operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received, the operation time effect on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the effect at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and the effect at the time of failure (do not operate the specific decorative member SDY) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit judgment. While either one is supposed to appear, even in the operation time production on the sword character side, success production (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and failure production based on the result of the production lottery according to the big hit judgment. (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is to appear, and the contents of their production are the same. Therefore, when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the operation operation effect on the button side and the operation operation effect on the sword accessory side, in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates, the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600 is the same as each other. It may be the content.

Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to the specific operation-related effect, it is decided to perform an effect as to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the result is used. On the other hand, an operation opportunity is given. However, there are cases where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the effect content that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means regardless of which effect result appears, such as pushing each other with each other. It may be.

For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state is brought into the sword-drawn state, or a mode in which the sword-decorated body 5001 in the sword-drawn state is brought into the sword-delivered state) for one operating means. It is possible to give an effect as to whether or not the operation opportunity is given by (operation), and the operation opportunity may be given to the operation means in the mode according to the result. In this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in a state different from the sword-delivered state and the sword-drawn state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state or the sword-drawn state when the effect result of making the sword is shown.

In addition, when the symbol variation in the pending state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the symbol variation is in the pending state (digested before this). It is also possible to perform the effect suggested from (within the execution period of the symbol change). According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given only to one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is not given are provided. For both, it will be possible to sustain the game interest related to operation for a longer period of time. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol change in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in the pending state (within the execution period of the symbol change digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is used. It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

In the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as a specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button image BTG,) corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) are used. Although it was decided to display the sword decoration image SYG), these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 may occur after that. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the effect reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001, those operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It will be possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period will occur. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and sword decoration. An effect image different from any of the image SYGs may be made to appear as a specific operation-related effect without appearing.

However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed at the same time is adopted while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is completed. Either BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of those operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. By executing the specific image (for example, lightning bolt image IZ, etc.) as the effect content, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs for the specific operation-related effect. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect can be executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one of two rocks, and when a lightning bolt falls on one side of the rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock and the other. By making the sword decoration image SYG appear from the rock when a lightning bolt falls on the rock on the side, it is possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 334 (g). .. Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect can be executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one rock, and when the lightning bolt falls on the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. It is also possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIG. 333 (d) and FIG. 334 (g). In short, it is desirable to advance the production as an effect content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, there are specific cases where the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs and the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of the effects) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. Further, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, a plurality of production modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and the effect reception period during which the specific effect (operation-time effect) can be generated depends on which of these effect modes the effect is performed. The ratio set for the specific operating means among the plurality of operating means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in other examples thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation with respect to the operation means on the side shown in the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operating means on the side (such as FIG. 333 (e)), control is performed to return the operating means on the side that has not been operated to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the time when the operation was performed. You may do it. However, it is not based on the time when the operation is performed, and depending on which timing of the production reception period the operation is performed, from the operation of the operation means on the side not operated to the end of the operation. It is desirable to make the time lengths different.

That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated and the remaining time of the effect acceptance period is short, the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has conflicted with Kika or whether to operate the operation means on the side not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation during the production reception period (depending on the high possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that did not operate is operated and then the operation is terminated. Time length up to ("Even if the operation means on the side shown in the specific operation-related effect is operated, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect may have been executed." By making the length of time that appeals to the player different), it becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

Further, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect acceptance period ends. May be made to work.

Further, between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.), the side with high expectations as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. A predetermined effect suggesting the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed may be performed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body (here, a specific movable body) that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. , The specific movable body can be operated more reliably based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed by operating the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY). Desirable to enable.

In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect result between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.). An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is intentionally generated only on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means. As a result, it becomes possible to create a special effect mode as if the effect was shown and the effect was completed even though the effect was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect was performed. You will be able to maintain the game entertainment while you are playing. In addition, when an operation for one side of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with high expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the degree of expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game interest when the player understands that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. ..

Further, when the effect reception period is intentionally generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means while the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects relating to the plurality of operation means are being performed, the effect acceptance period is within the effect acceptance period. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, for example). Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) appears as a result of the effect, the expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the effectability as the specific operation-related effect between the time when the effect is started and the time when the effect result is shown. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side with a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is granted more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, the production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation is performed before. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

However, even if it is set to the automatic button effect state described later, the effect acceptance period is only for the operation button 410 of those operation means while a specific operation-related effect is being performed. In the case of generating After that, even if the effect acceptance period for any of the above-mentioned plurality of operation means occurs as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect acceptance period. It is desirable that the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed (so that the automatic button function functions) without doing so. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function functions, and it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be expected to suppress the decrease in.

It should be noted that the setting change related to the on / off of the automatic button effect state can be changed not only during the period when the symbol change is not executed but also during the period when the symbol change is executed by operating the operation button 410, for example. It is desirable to be. For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated when the automatic button effect state is off, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the automatic button can be changed. When the effect state is on, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, the operation time effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the automatic button effect state is set. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it may be tempting to generate an operation-time effect by an operation by the player while maintaining the automatic button effect state on, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. During the effect reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, when the operation for the operation button 410 as well as the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled and the operation is performed for the other operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state to cause a change in the effect being executed. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation-time effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may be different depending on whether the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as a result of the effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or a sword decoration body 5001 is imitated. It was decided to give an operation opportunity corresponding to the displayed sword decoration image SYG, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (first display mode and second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) is given to the operation button 410. If a period) is given and an operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword decoration body 5001 when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are used. Any display content may be adopted.

For example, in the above-mentioned second and third production modes, the production image CG (first) shown in FIG. 340 (a) is replaced with the production image shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 337 (e). Display mode) is displayed, and the staging image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b) is displayed instead of the staging image shown in FIGS. 334 (g) and 338 (h). May be good. According to such a configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect portion and the other background image (the part displayed before the specific operation-related effect is started). Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (almost the entire effect in the display area). Since it can be replaced), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) in the display area shown in FIGS. 333 (d), 334 (g), 337 (e), and 338 (h). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the staging display related to the granting of operation opportunities is performed using almost the entire display area (until other staging images such as the background part where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). By doing so, it is expected that the game will be more interesting for the operation.

In the staging image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (a), the first display mode has a shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design. The character is displayed, and in the staging image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is possessed. The second character is displayed so as to implicitly suggest which operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect image imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 itself. , It is desirable to display as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape and a part of the design of the operation means.

Further, regarding the staging image CG (first display mode) and the staging image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area as described above, the staging image CG (first display mode) and the staging image TG are used. It may also be performed with an effect suggesting a different degree of expectation depending on which of (second display modes) is displayed. For example, when the staging image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the staging image CG (first display mode) appears. Further, a plurality of staging modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared as the staging image CG (first display mode) and the staging image TG (second display mode), and it depends on which of the staging modes is displayed. It may suggest the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the staging image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the expectation is higher than when the staging image TG (second display mode) appears. You may do it.

Further, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (preferably, it is desirable that the effect is relatively high). When the operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect, is executed) (preferably, the effect situation has a relatively low expectation). It may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) does not execute the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). If it is displayed, the effect acceptance period is applied not only to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, but also to another operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) that does not correspond to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. In the situation where the effect is relatively high, it becomes possible to give a different kind of fun to the operation than when the button image BTG appears, and it becomes possible to improve the entertainment of the game. Another operating means may be a different operating means from the sword decoration body 5001.

In addition, when a button image BTG appears in an effect situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively It is desirable to suggest that the staging situation has a higher degree of expectation than when the sword decoration image SYG appears in the staging situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, when the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. When 410) is operated, the effect acceptance period for another operation means that is occurring at the same time is also terminated so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation for the operation means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the effect acceptance period for the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means may be terminated so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated, and the operation is performed. Even though an operation means different from the means is operated, the operation time effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means (operation button 410) are operated may be executed.

If a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even if the effect reception period occurs for the operation means of, the same operation time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed within the effect reception period without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to make it work (make the automatic button function work). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing the specific operation-related effect when the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is used. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means different from the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is provided even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation effect as when operated is executed, and the special operation effect that may appear only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is executed is not executed.

However, during the effect reception period, another effect before the specific timing at which the operation-time effect (effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) will appear by the above-mentioned automatic button function is different. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and it is assumed that a specific timing has arrived. However, it is desirable that the effect during operation (the effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the effect acceptance period, but the automatic button effect state is continued in the on state even after the effect acceptance period ends. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then each of the above-described effects (operation-time effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). When the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed). In addition to the operation means corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (sword decoration body 5001), another operation means not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (for example, the operation button 410) is also used to generate the effect acceptance period. It becomes.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes, and in another example thereof, as a result of the effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" or When any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" is displayed, and when the effect reception is performed by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggesting that the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make any of the second operation-time effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content suggesting the above, will be executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period generated after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (first). Display mode) is displayed, and when the effect is executed based on the effect reception for the operation button 410, and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the effect reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when it was executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side with a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the fact that the effect has been accepted, the effect image (sword decoration) on the side with relatively high expectations as a result of the effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. Compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, there is no demerit in the effect result, so that the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned timer effect (FIGS. 148 to 207), it is possible to set "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes targeted by the timer). be. That is, in the timer effect for "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means", when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. This makes it possible to enjoy the production during operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operating means" prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when the operation for the operating means is performed, the effect result is advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. Allow any of the unfavorable production results to appear. However, when the "operation opportunity for the operating means" is given as the effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result advantageous to the player is higher than that of the case where the effect target of the timer effect is not set. It is more desirable to be. The ratio may be 100%.

In this regard, when an effect pattern for executing a timer effect for the effect of "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001)" appears, the "operation opportunity for the operation means" which is the effect target appears. A specific operation-related effect using "grant" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears is executed.

According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when it is played.

However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously advanced to just before that for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001). However, it is difficult to understand which production should be watched, and there is a concern that the attention will be distracted and the game entertainment will be reduced.

Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. 341. , Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the "specific operation-related effect" is set to the unexecuted state, and the count value is set. It is desirable to start the "specific operation-related effect" after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0").

FIG. 341 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001). The following timer effect corresponds to the above-mentioned notice side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processes according to the timer effect.

In FIG. 341 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of reservations is 0. It shows the production situation.

In FIG. 341 (b), the timer effect is started (here, countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 341 (a). It shows the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 341 (b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. There is.

That is, in the timer effect related to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (1), while it remains unclear which effect is being executed among the plurality of timer target effect candidates prepared. Here, the count "0") is reached so that it is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" as the count value is displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be produced. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode). A specific operation-related effect as to which of the above is displayed will be executed. That is, in this case, even though two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), those effects are sometimes performed. Since it is possible to avoid overlapping in a series, it becomes possible to enjoy each different production.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable because it cannot be recognized whether it was done as a game. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), between the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) and the time when a specific operation-related effect is started. An effect that suggests the effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) that the timer effect is intended for is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first displays “sword”. This suggests that the timer effect was intended to "provide an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration body 5001".

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword delivery). In the production situation where the player recognizes that the operation opportunity is given by "", the production of "specific operation-related production" will be started, so that the game entertainment can be improved. become. When the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the count display (count "0") is displayed when the effect display device 1600 displays "sword". It may be displayed continuously.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the sword decoration body 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, the count is “0”). It is designed to perform reciprocating movements in the vertical direction), and this also means that "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration body 5001" is the target of the timer effect. I try to suggest it.

It should be noted that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is counted not only when the timer effect targets "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001" but also when another effect is the production target. It may be done when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 does not function as an effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is intended for, but functions as an effect suggesting that the count display has become 0. Will be. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the effect to be the effect is started, and the timer effect is the effect target. It is said that the effect that suggests the type of effect is being executed at the same time as or before the start of the effect that suggests the type of effect, and that the effect that suggests the type of effect that the timer effect is targeting is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to be done.

FIG. 341 (d) shows an effect situation in which the “specific operation-related effect” is started.

In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type for which the timer effect is the effect target is hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is also in a finished state. However, it is important to execute the effect suggesting the type of effect that the timer effect is intended for, and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

After the "specific operation-related production" is started in this way, the production progresses in the order of FIGS. 341 (e) to (h). The contents of these productions are described in FIG. 332 (c). ), FIGS. 334 (g) to (i), or FIGS. 336 (d), 338 (h) to (j), and the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 336 (d) and 338 (h) to (j).

As the timer effect performed in connection with the specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 or the timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made viable. That is, in another timer effect, the point that the specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 341, but the specific operation-related effect is the effect. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, "0") according to the start timing (strictly, a little earlier than this), and the effect is continued even after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, the privilege is given regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Expectations for (big hit) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but when the effect situation in which the effect is advanced at the same time appears, the specific operation-related effect is produced. Regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, their effect value is the same (the degree of expectation for the privilege grant (big hit) is the same. Same). That is, in this case, since the directing performance of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously advanced, any of the effects is produced. It will be possible to avoid the situation where the attention is distracted due to the inability to understand whether to pay attention to. However, in order to improve the entertainment of the game, if a production pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect appear at the same time appears, a privilege is granted more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341 appears. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first suggests the type of the effect target (display (here, the count is “0”). Although "sword delivery") is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect object as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is targeted for the timer among a plurality of effects that can be targeted for the timer, the display suggesting which effect is the target of the timer effect may not be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned staging modes and in another example thereof, prior to giving an operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, the operation opportunity is given to any of the operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether or not it would be granted. However, the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production acceptance period). Does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 (prior to the production reception period). It may be possible to make an effect pattern such as performing a second precursor effect appear. When performing these precursory effects (first precursory effect, second precursory effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the said It is desirable to lower the expectation for granting benefits when the effect appears, in order to enhance the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

Here, as the precursor effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears, for example, fog. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of being stuck. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer, behind the specific image) that is difficult to see due to overlapping with the specific image. After that, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (increasing the transmittance, reducing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.). It can be executed as an effect to be exposed to the sun. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursory staging will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations for granting a privilege (big hit), As the precursory effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed progresses, it becomes possible to make it interesting as to which display mode the button image BTG appears.

It should be noted that the first precursor effect that appears when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration is given. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. It is important that each is executed as a different production content. Further, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect is different.

Such a precursory effect is the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" in the sense that "when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, the effect is performed as an effect related to the addition of the operation opportunity". It can be said that it is a higher-level concept including. As for the precursory effect including the "specific operation-related effect", as described below with reference to FIG. 342, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursory effect is performed in any of the effect modes. By suggesting how long the effect reception period that occurs in response to the precursory effect is, depending on what was done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the precursory effect is performed. It is more desirable to try.

FIG. 342 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect content for each of the types of the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a) (precursor effect A), the precursor effect A is started when the first predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This precursory effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursory effect is performed. When A is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a) (precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T1 will be generated.

In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the precursor effect A. ) Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T1, the above-mentioned operation time effect (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f)) is performed based on the effect reception. , FIG. 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (b) (precursor effect B1), when the second predetermined time has elapsed, not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. The precursory effect B1 is set to start. This precursor effect B1 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) when an operation opportunity is given (specific operation). When the precursor effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is coming to occur.

In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1. Will be done. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for a specific operating means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation time effect different from the above-mentioned operation time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of terminating the period T2 at that time is performed.

In this respect, in this production example, the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is the effect acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect A, as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and 342 (b). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having a time length different from that of T1 (here, a short time length). This suggests how long the effect acceptance period generated in response to the precursor effect is, depending on which mode (precursor effect A, precursor effect B1) the precursor effect is performed. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment taste when the precursory staging is performed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (c) (precursor effect B2), the precursor effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. Like the precursor effect B1, this precursor effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to the time when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (Those that are not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect acceptance period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 Production reception period) T3 is to be generated.

Even in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (a character display such as "press") for prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period are displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when the staging reception is performed by the operation for a specific operating means within the staging reception period (valid period) T3, the staging during operation is different from the case where the precursor staging A and B1 are executed based on the staging reception. Is executed, and a process of terminating the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this respect, in this production example, the effect reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor effect B2 is the effect acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect A, as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and 342 (c). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even though the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low expectation for granting a privilege (big hit) is executed, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. Since it is suggested that a long production reception period (valid period) T3 will occur, a production situation will be created as if a specific operation-related production was performed, and the precursor production B2 It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when it is performed. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege differs between when the staging reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the staging reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

It should be noted that the precursory effects B1 and B2 are specified by making the same effect mode appear from the start of the effect until the timing in the middle of the effect, and making a different effect mode appear after the timing has elapsed. The operation means may be provided with an effect as to whether the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 or the effect acceptance period (valid period) T3 is generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such a directing property, and the precursor staging B1 and B2 are set to start the staging when a different time elapses from the start of the symbol change. Alternatively, the precursor staging B1 and B2 may have different time lengths from each other.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (precursor effect C), the precursor effect C is started when the third predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This precursory effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursory effect is performed. When C is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (precursor effect C), when the precursor effect C is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T4 will be generated.

Even in the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (character display such as "press" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect C is displayed. ) Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T4, the above-mentioned operation time effect (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f)) or , FIG. 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. It is supposed to be done.

In this regard, in this production example, the effect reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor effect C is the effect acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect A, as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and 342 (d). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect". Since it is suggested that the effect reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as that of the precursor effect A is generated, the game entertainment when the precursor effect C is performed is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 342, the effect acceptance period is associated with the types of precursor effects A, B1, B2, and C by associating the lengths of the effect acceptance period (valid period) with each other in a one-to-one relationship. I tried to suggest the length of (validity period). However, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2, etc.) having a predetermined time for each type of precursor effect to be different, the production reception period (valid period) ) May be suggested.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is subjected to the effect. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operating means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operating means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 is in the state of being operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as the state of being operated in the operation position in accordance with this, and FIG. 338. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operating position (sword withdrawal state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as the state in which the sword decoration image SYG is operated in the operation position (sword withdrawal state). Has been done.

However, a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) that imitates the appearance. If this happens, the range of the effect will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the effect, even though a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is being performed, and the game interest will decline. I am concerned.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is described below with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344. Regarding BTG), it is desirable not to necessarily express the state of the specific operating means at that time as it is, but to display it as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 343 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the effect when the precursor effect other than the specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect content when the precursor effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

First, FIGS. 343 (a) to 343 (c) show the contents of the effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), it corresponds only to the sword decoration body 5001 side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the “specific operation-related production”. Assuming that the precursory effect is executed, it becomes recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity. In addition, in the precursor effect (the same applies to the precursor effect in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is to be given soon is made, an effect image imitating the operation means. Does not necessarily have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity from the time when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

In the precursory staging shown in FIG. 343 (a), the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation and the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content as to which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity, the sword decoration image SYG, which has a low expectation as the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image SYG of the degree of expectation. Which of the tall sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

FIG. 343 (b) shows the production result in which the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively high expectation situation. It will be suggested that there will be a production acceptance period for. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (b), the final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura does not change to another effect image (sword decoration image SYGa, etc.) is displayed. ..

FIG. 343 (c) shows an example of an effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, an instruction display (“pushing in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Further, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state. I try to change the state to the state. When the production reception is performed within the production reception period, the production at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the production reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword delivery state. Be maintained. In addition, a process is performed to end the effect acceptance period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when the precursory effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, here). , The effect image imitating the sword decoration body 5001) (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) is displayed in the same state (sword removal state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image imitating the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) and the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001) Are all in a state of being stopped at a predetermined position.

On the other hand, FIGS. 343 (d) to 343 (g) show the contents of the effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the situation of the effect, as shown in FIG. 343 (d), if the precursor effect as the "specific operation-related effect" is started, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is used. It will be recognizable that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the crab.

FIG. 343 (e) shows a production situation in which the precursory effect as a “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 as a production result of the "specific operation-related production". Has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (e), the final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG does not change to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

FIG. 343 (f) shows an example of an effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, an instruction display (“pushing in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Further, when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword removal state.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 343 (f) and 343 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-drawn state during the effect reception period (sword decoration image SYG). The sword decoration body 5001 is made to be in a different state from each other because the sword decoration body 5001 is designed to slowly and continuously perform upward displacement until the end of the production reception period. I am trying to do it.

In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration body 5001, the production reception will be performed when the operation to the operation target accessory 141 is performed to the sword delivery state. A predetermined operation-time effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-delivered state. In addition, a process is performed to end the effect acceptance period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when the production acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related production, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is used for the production. On the other hand, the other side does not work and can play the role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 343 (f) and 343 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period, but the sword is not limited to this. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated to stop the sword decoration body 5001.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 343, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are used in the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (c)) that occurs without going through a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stopped state, during the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. As for the other side, this is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for the production. Therefore, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be expanded, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the operation is performed. While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is set to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

Either the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a precursory effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursory effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effectability as to which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 appears, any one of them. When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode having a relatively high expectation or a display mode having a relatively low expectation. It will be possible to further provide the staging of. The method may be appropriately adopted in each of the above-mentioned production modes and other examples thereof, in addition to the production example of FIG. 343.

Then, in order to give such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is used as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it can be recognized or appeared, and it is unknown whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is shown. (Make it a recognizable display state, etc.) so that it appears as the production progresses. After that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side appearing as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white outline of the effect image imitating the operation means). It is desirable to release the state so that the color can be confirmed) in sequence as the production progresses. Further, when the button image BTG is displayed after such an effect progress, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation under predetermined conditions (for example, an operating means). After making the imitated effect image clear, etc.), the button image BTG is further hidden, and it is recognizable that the sword decoration image SYG appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Yes, and it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG has high expectations (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). It may be possible to generate an effect pattern that further advances the effect. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG). To make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), it is higher than the display mode on the low expectation side (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

FIGS. 344 (a) to 344 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) as an effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 344 (a), the precursor effect as the "specific operation-related effect" is started, but the precursor effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. The first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and the second character holding the sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001). It is depicted that they are facing each other, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am doing it.

FIG. 344 (b) shows a staging situation in which the staging result of the precursor staging as a “specific operation-related staging” appears. In this effect situation, the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (sword decoration) is not displayed in order to suggest that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. The effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 344 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 340 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed), and is specific. While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect started) are the relevant. It is suddenly replaced with an effect image (display image shown in FIG. 344 (b)) as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

FIGS. 344 (c) to 344 (e) show an example of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 344 (c). An instruction display (a character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the sword decoration body 5001 to operate.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 344 (c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts the operation from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 344 (d), the sword decoration body 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state only after a relatively short time has elapsed from the start of the effect reception period. It is designed to do. After that, as shown in FIG. 344 (e), the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in a sword-pulled state at least until the end of the production reception period, unless the player operates it. (Operation from the sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state) will be waited for.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 344 (c) to (e), the movement (swing in the rotation direction) is completely different from the movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration body 5001. In the lowering motion), the second character is depicted as swinging down the sword decoration image SYG, and even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, the sword decoration image SYG continues. It is designed to operate. The sword decoration image SYG related to this production example loops a series of displays from the start (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)) of the swing-down operation within the production reception period. It is designed to be repeated by processing.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the loop processing, and the display change progresses by the amount according to the passage of time. Further, the sword ornament 5001 is also brought into a sword-pulled state while a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)) are performed. However, even if the loop processing is performed, it will be maintained in the sword-drawn state without being affected by it. In addition, when the operation to the operation target accessory 141 is performed to the sword-delivered state within the effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, and the predetermined operation time effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the above-mentioned The loop processing is completed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-delivered state. In addition, a process is performed to end the effect acceptance period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursory effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect acceptance period. The movement modes (movements that play a role in accurately transmitting the current situation (movements until moving to the operation position), loop movements used for staging) are different from each other, and the movements of the sword decoration body 5001 are completed. Even after that, the sword decoration image SYG will continue its operation without ending. As a result, when the effect acceptance period (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) that occurs after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is continued until after the effect acceptance period occurs ( It will be possible to expand the range of the production, such as making it feasible by continuing the background), and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 344, the effect content (display in which the characters face each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 344 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is performed. The staging (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) when the staging reception period occurs in such a way that both the background image and the background image are changed is executed. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) that imitate the operation means are specified differently from each other under the display of the dedicated background (full moon). Since both the image) and the image) are dynamically displayed during the reception period, it is possible to improve the performance during the reception period. In this sense, even in the precursory effect, it is possible to perform the effect using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a staging connection in between to further improve the staging. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes having different expectations for granting the privilege, and may be displayed by any of the display modes.

In addition, in the precursory production as a specific operation-related production or the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as those productions, and the production reception is performed according to which of the production modes appears. It is also possible to suggest whether a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time effect when the effect is accepted during the period. The background image that appears when the precursory effect is performed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 344, when the precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, the effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image appearing in the precursor effect. It was decided to execute the production within the period, but when the above-mentioned precursor production that is not a specific operation-related production is performed, both the production content and the background image that appeared in the precursor production are changed. It is also possible to execute the production when the production reception period occurs.

In the production example shown in FIG. 344, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decoration body 5001 started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately communicating the current situation). The performed movement may be completed before the production reception period occurs), and then the stopped state may be maintained.

Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the background image is changed depending on whether the background image is changed when the effect acceptance period occurs. It may be possible that the display to be displayed may not be performed. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period occurs, the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period occurs. Is desirable.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the production reception is performed, it is decided to operate the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) as an operation operation based on the production reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 331 (d), 333 (e), and 334 (h), the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button) is used as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. By making 410) also operate, it is possible to improve the effectability of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed. In this way, in order to improve the effectability of the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed depends on the result of the effect. Then, the production situation at the time of success in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While the effect situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the operation-time effect performed without going through a specific operation-related effect (for example, a specific operation-related effect). In the operation-time effect after the precursor effect, which is not an operation-related effect, is performed, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side, depending on the result of the effect. It is possible to show the production situation at the time of success when only operates, or to show the production situation at the time of failure when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and the specific operation-related effect according to another example thereof, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the button is added with the princess character (specific effect mode), for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (a). The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. If the value is set to be high, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific production mode) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 345 (b). In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific staging mode, it is desirable that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

Further, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (figure) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed). 345 (a)) and the second effect pattern (FIG. 345 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, the expectation for granting the privilege is set to be the same when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest in whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, as well as the button image BTG and the sword. Regardless of which of the decorative image SYG appears, it becomes possible to provide completely different fun such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 345 (c), when the specific effect mode is in the stage where the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. (For example, from the time when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, a specific effect mode (displayed by the princess character) is performed even though a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed. The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (same degree of expectation). That is, in this case, since the directing performance of the specific operation-related production itself is lost, such as "precursor production by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related production is being performed. It will be possible to provide a completely different effect.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001 according to each of the above-mentioned production modes and other examples thereof, the sword portion (handle portion 5012, sword blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the operation mode 1 (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 301, a second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated laterally. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode) together. Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit. The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of the above. Both the sword part (handle part 5012, sword blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are operably supported (operated) by one main body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3. Even if one side of the sword part (handle part 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in the state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). It is formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and the operation is performed on the sword decoration body 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that there is a high possibility that an operation error will occur on the player side. In particular, regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image (and its effect) imitating the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001. When the instruction display prompting the operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side. Become. That is, in this case, as the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing moment by moment, let the player first perform the operation for correcting the operation error, and then let the player further perform the operation in the original correct mode. It is difficult to do so, and if a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectations is performed, but the production reception period ends before the production reception is performed. , There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001, there are modes such as "movement in the vertical direction" by the sword part and "movement in the lateral direction" by the sheath part, and there are a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reversal relationship. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the proper side, and the production reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing the operation opportunity is increased.

Therefore, when performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit. , As will be described below with reference to FIGS. 346 and 347, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed from the same state, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

FIGS. 346 and 347 show an example of an effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure.

In FIG. 346 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 346 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 346 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b), the first effect imitating the first operation mode in which the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001 is operated from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state. The image OX and the second effect image TX that imitates the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so as to move laterally are included in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time to indicate that the operation opportunity by any of these operation modes will soon be available for staging. In this respect, in the first staging image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed larger than the second staging image TX, the first staging image OX and the first staging image OX. In each of the effect image TX of 2, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

FIG. 346 (c) shows the development of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b), the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX and the effect image TX are pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect). When the result) appears, the effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

In the specific operation-related effect related to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 346 (c), when the first effect image OX is left in a predominant situation, a display such as "push" can be visually recognized. When the situation becomes predominant even though the second staging image TX is left, a display such as "slide" can be visually recognized. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that they may be mistakenly recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

In FIG. 346 (d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 346 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. A production that depicts the state left in is performed (first production result). When progressing to this effect content, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, the specific operation time effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the first operation mode is used. When the operation is performed, the effect reception is performed, and a specific operation time effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 346 (d), the effect acceptance period related to the specific operation-time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, in the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as "push" and the remaining time of the effect acceptance period are shown. Bar display) will be displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 operates from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

In FIG. 347 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. It shows the production situation when it is performed by the player.

That is, in this effect example, even if an effect reception period related to a specific operation-time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the first operation mode is used. The operation detection of the operation mode 2 itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is assumed that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received in the effect is specified. (Here, "it is fine") is done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 347 (f), the content of such a specific notification changes with the passage of time so that the player can regain his / her calmness (here, “calmly push in”). It has become like. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it becomes possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that even if the player side is in a panic state, this is preferable. It will be expected to be suppressed. As a result, even if the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of the second operation mode is operated by the first operation mode as it is, the player side is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize it.

In FIG. 347 (g), the operation on the proper side (first operation mode) is performed in the production status (effect reception period when the operation is erroneous) in FIGS. 347 (e) and 347 (f). As a result, it is a depiction of how the production reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation-time production corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is separated from the sword decoration body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration body 5001 is in a non-operated state (normal state) from the state of the second operation mode. ) Will be returned.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (state of operation error), since the production reception is properly performed, the deterioration of the game interest when the operation error occurs can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, it is decided to notify that the operation should be performed as it is without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation as it is without correcting the operation error) is performed. It is not always necessary to provide detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, since the player may be in a panic in a situation where an erroneous operation is performed, it may be counterproductive to notify a complicated content. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received, the notification is not displayed by a message but by an effect or only a sound. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed in which the specific notification is performed and the operation-time effect is not performed based on the operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to fully expect that the operation will be switched to the proper operation.

On the other hand, depending on the player (particularly, an elderly player or the like), it is possible that a situation may occur in which the operation is mistakenly performed even before the production acceptance period occurs in the specific operation-related production. For example, when the operation instruction for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not given, but the operation for the second operation unit (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed, the first operation unit is performed. It is also assumed that a situation will occur in which a production acceptance period related to a specific operation production is generated only for the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side of the above, and in this case as well, how should the player operate it? There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize whether it is good or not.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation part (sheath part) is given the operation opportunity is performed, the first operation-related effect is performed. The second operation unit is in a situation where the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the operation unit side of 2 (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 346 (b) and 346 (c)). Even when the operation for is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received. The specific notification may be "a message display indicating that the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity is given soon while maintaining the operation state" may be displayed, or the display by a message may be used. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as a notification using only sound. In any case, by confirming the special situation that the specific notification is performed based on the operation and the effect at the time of operation is not performed even though the operation is performed, the operation is subsequently performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be a chance to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the state in which the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the left) while the operation for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being performed remains. Even when the effect reception period related to the specific operation effect occurs only on the sword part) side, the operation for the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword decoration body). When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 is moved to the left), the effect reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Will be.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the same state, the production reception will be performed properly, so that the operation error occurs before the production reception period occurs. Even when this occurs, the decline in the entertainment interest will be suppressed.

However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed as to whether the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit or the second operation unit, the effect result is shown and the effect acceptance period. If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of, the information will be mixed with the content to be notified (instruction display, etc.) within the production reception period, and the player will be more and more confused. There is a concern that it will end up. Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect in which the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, in the period until the effect result is displayed. , The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, the above-mentioned first period is performed. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operation unit of 1.

In the above-mentioned production example, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested when the specific notification is performed. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the production mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 311). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in the above to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to one of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may let it. Alternatively, when the effect acceptance period occurs after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of aspects described above.

In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display (character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration body 5001 The sword decoration image SYG imitating the above is displayed, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311). It will be.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the staging display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to give some fun to confirm the sword decoration image SYG. However, the performance is poor during the production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance during the production reception period.

At this time, it is better to make the aspect expressed by the sword decoration image SYG have a higher degree of expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the effectability during the effect reception period is improved. It is desirable to ensure that it is suitable. For example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. To display. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by confirming the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the production reception period will be suitably maintained.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is sufficient that the number of production modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of production modes are prepared as the sword decoration body 5001, the plurality of production modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

However, if the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable because they are falsely displayed. There is concern, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the stage 0 to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311). When the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, thereby displaying the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword. It is desirable to make the decorative image SYG different from each other. Regarding the special aspect, the outer shape may be changed by further deforming and combining the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image 5001 may operate in a mode that does not appear in the sword decoration body 5001. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, the structurally difficult staging expression of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, so that the concern that the sword decoration is falsely displayed is suppressed. In addition to being able to do this, it is expected that the sword decoration body 5001 will be provided with an effect beyond the imagination of the player when the structure of the sword decoration body 5001 is viewed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Even when the sword decorative image SYG is provided with a special aspect in this way, each aspect of the sword decorative image SYG is prepared as an aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, it is shown in FIG. 311). It is desirable to be able to display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. When the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to suggest that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in other modes. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Further, regarding the method of making the sword decoration image SYG displayable in a special manner, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, for another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 312 to 319). It may be applied.

For example, assuming that the production situation is shown in FIG. 315 (X1), the next production progress destination is the production situation shown in FIG. 315 (X2) and the production situation shown in FIG. 348 (a). The staging pattern will be prepared. Then, when the effect is developed into the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) showing that the opportunity is not given is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 that was in the second sword drawing state is in the sword delivery state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Will be returned.

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 348 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the embodiment, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation).

However, here, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), the pseudo-sword symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the fourth pseudo-sequential fluctuation (re-variation). A sword image showing (special aspect) is displayed, but this special aspect can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area, and the sword decoration Body 5001 itself is immutable. The special aspect of this production example is that the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to a special mode in the display area, the sword decoration body 5001 has a stage 3 form. It will change from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state while maintaining.

After that, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 which is a special aspect is displayed. An image (bar display) showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 348 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 348 (e), when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped according to the set effect pattern. The expectation degree notification effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and another example thereof, for example, when the symbol change is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is subjected to the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration body 5001. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It makes it possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the symbol change is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. The effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursory effects are executed as different effect contents from each other, and as those effect contents, for example,
-The specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area.
-After that, an effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed at a position where it is difficult to see by the specific image.
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or reducing the area where the specific image is displayed). It may be made to change. For example, in the first precursor effect, a display effect by "cloud effect" is performed as a specific image (display effect that gradually makes it easier to see the effect image imitating the operation means), and in the second precursor effect, "flame" is performed as a specific image. Display effect by "effect" (display effect that imitates the operation means gradually makes it easier to see, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by "water effect" as a specific image (effect image that imitates the operation means) By making the types of specific images different, such as by gradually making the display effect easier to see, it is possible to make those precursor effects different from each other. In this case, the "cloud effect" is used. When the display effect is performed, it is recognizable that the first precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed. At that time, it is recognizable that the second precursor staging is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the display staging by the "water effect" is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect) is performed as to which of the button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity.

Then, when the precursor effect (at least one of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect) is to be performed with such an effect content, an effect image imitating the operation means by a specific image is used. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operating means during a period that is difficult to see. When such a configuration is applied to either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operating means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when it is not certain which of the display mode (for example, blue) is displayed, the effect is produced during the effect reception period. You will be able to improve your sex. Further, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is convinced which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when the person cannot have the effect, it becomes possible to improve the effectability during the effect reception period.

FIG. 349 is a diagram showing an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 350 is an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart showing. Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the first precursor effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 349 and 350, but this example of the effect is not the first precursor effect but the second precursor effect and the third. It can also be applied to precursor staging.

In FIG. 349 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of reservations is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 349 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first precursor effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 349 (a).

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (b), the display effect by the "cloud effect" is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a "cloud effect" gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 350 (increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself). Or, the area where a specific image is displayed is reduced, etc.).

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 350, at the timing t2 in which the display effect by the "cloud effect" is gradually changing to non-display, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set. At the same time, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and an instruction display (bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 are displayed (bar display). FIG. 349 (c).

In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, red) is displayed. , Blue), the rate at which the operation-time effect is performed in a manner with high expectations is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the staging situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), there is no certainty as to whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. However, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect during operation is executed in such a way that the effect content is switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is the first display mode and the first. It becomes possible to advance the production without being sure of which of the two display modes is displayed.

Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), it is not certain whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. Nevertheless, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (c) at the timing t3, the effect acceptance period generated at the timing t2 is continued, and the “cloud effect” is obtained. Is completely hidden (FIG. 349 (d)). In such a situation, it is possible to perform an operation on the operation button 410 while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in such a way that the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 349 (d).

According to such a configuration, during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period from the display of the button image BTG to the completely non-display of the "cloud effect" (timing t2 to t3). ), It becomes possible to provide the effectability by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to see.

In addition, in order to enhance the staging performance during the staging reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period of the timings t2 to t3. In this production example, when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as "press" is displayed. For example, at timings t2 to t3. If the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period is dynamically displayed in the period from timing t3 to t4, the effectability in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more preferably enhanced. Will be able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect acceptance period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the effect acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the "cloud effect" is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see first appears, and after a predetermined time from that situation, the effect situation is difficult to see. Until then, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in a production situation where it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the effect reception period occurs, the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor). In the case of staging, a staging pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide the fun of increasing the value of paying attention to the button image BTG as the button image BTG is in a production situation where it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the button image BTG is made difficult to see by the "cloud effect", but the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is affected by the "cloud effect". It was decided to display it so that its visibility would be maintained without receiving it. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the change in the visibility of the button image BTG with peace of mind while grasping the remaining time of the production reception period.

However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be affected by the "cloud effect" so as to be difficult to see until the timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode while the remaining time of the production reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide unprecedented novel staging.

When such an effect is applied to any of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the precursor effect is started. Even if the length of the time until the specific image is made visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the specific image becomes visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) at the same time. Further, when such an effect is applied to any of the precursor effects of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the precursor effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (time until the specific image is hidden), prepare multiple of these to give multiple effects with different expectations. However, the time from the display of the effect image imitating the operation means until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set it to the time.

Further, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to see due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself imitating the operation means, and then relative. It may be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operating means appears in a display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance itself in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or while another display is performed as a precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see. May be good.

Further, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, the specific operation-related effect described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 350 will be described in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later. ) May occur only when it occurs. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and as a result of the progress of the effect, a plurality of operations are made available. Since the effect reception period corresponding to only one of the operating means will occur, if there is a delay in deciding which of the plurality of operating means should be operated, it is better than being operated by the player. It is possible that the production reception period will end after all the remaining time has been exhausted. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is generated, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed. During the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect, the player operates the operation means on the side to be operated and the automatic effect function. Since the effect reception is performed by any of the above and the post-operation effect is always executed, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

[Automatic button effect status]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is controlled to this automatic button effect state. When the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, the effect acceptance period is within the effect acceptance period. Even if the operation by the player is not accepted for the effect, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation by the player is accepted for the effect can be executed within the effect acceptance period. There is. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect after the operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, so that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate is suppressed. You will be able to. As for the automatic effect function, by generating the same effect reception as when the operation was actually performed when this functioned, the process according to the effect reception may be performed, or the effect reception may be generated. The same processing as when the production reception was received may be performed without letting it.

In the embodiment relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, effects, settings, and the like may be appropriately combined or used in combination.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed. It is possible to set the production state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When the "setting of the automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is made. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, and the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for a different operation means may be operated a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating the operation button 410 once. It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, some players want to positively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred, and for such a person, the operation button 410 is used. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state for the operation button 410 is set for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode maintained for 2 seconds (so-called "long press mode"). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the automatic button effect state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult for it to be set incorrectly. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is not set even if the operation is performed in the long press mode when at least the effect reception period occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. ..

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set and the setting is canceled, the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change has not been executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When "Release of automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol change is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled only by operating the operation button 410 once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, unlike the case of setting the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is positioned in the operation state even if the operation state for the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed). The automatic button effect state is canceled only when it is detected (just operated in a single operation mode). That is, it can be said that the fact that some operation is performed on the operation button 410 means that the desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the automatic button effect is produced. By canceling the state and returning to the normal staging state at an early stage, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operating means including an operation button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the jackpot determination when it is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation for the operation button 410. A staging acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operating means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (more accurately, a predetermined staging pattern in which a staging reception period is set for a sword decoration body 5001 or the like). Is generated, and even if the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration body 5001) is not received during the production reception period, the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration body 5001) is performed during the production reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the effect is received. According to such a configuration, is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be accepted for the effect, or another operation means (for example, for example). , When the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) as to whether or not the operation for the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect is executed, the effect result. Regardless of whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 can be used for the production, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate the operation button 410, so that such a specific operation-related production can be enjoyed with peace of mind. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target among a plurality of operation means occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When the operation for the first operating means is not performed within the first side effect receiving period, it is possible to execute an automatic process that causes the same change for the effect as when the operation for the first operating means is performed. Yes (first automatic staging means),
-When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second side effect acceptance period in which the second operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means is set. When it occurs, when the operation for the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change as when the operation for the second operation means is performed is executed. It is possible (second automatic staging means)
Regardless of whether the first-side production reception period or the second-side production reception period occurs, when the same specific time elapses after the period occurs, the first (1) Automatic processing by the automatic staging means or automatic processing by the second automatic staging means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means are the operation target. Regardless of which of the second-side effect reception period set as is within the execution period of the symbol change, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time elapses from the occurrence of those periods. Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, when the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time elapses after the first side effect reception period occurs. The automatic processing by the first automatic staging means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic staging means is executed and when a time different from the specific time elapses after the first side staging reception period occurs. As there are cases, the staging progress may be performed within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic staging means would be executed when a specific time elapses after the first side staging reception period occurs, but the timing is different from this. Since the production is accepted and the production is automatically generated after the operation, it can function as a surprise production.

It should be noted that when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol variation period than when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The ratio of the production reception period to be performed may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, so that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, the automatic production is performed. Since the post-operation effect is executed by the functioning of the function, the effect reception period can be generated more frequently while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the frequent occurrence of forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of both the effect acceptance period for the first operation means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means is high. However, it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the occurrence rate different between the effect acceptance period for the first operating means and the effect acceptance period for the second operating means.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production reception conditions are met within the production reception period, the post-operation effect can be executed (post-operation effect execution means).
-It is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition based on the operation performed by the player within the production reception period (player operation reception means).
-When the operation by the player is not performed within the production reception period, it is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means). )
However, regarding the specific timing within the production reception period, it is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has elapsed from the start of the production reception period. I'm supposed to do it. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player to operate himself / herself will be given before the automatic effect function is activated, and there will be an option to generate an effect reception by the operation by the player. , It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic staging means is executed when a specific time elapses after the first side staging reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side staging reception period occurs. When the effect progresses within the symbol variation so that the automatic process by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from that has elapsed, the above "specific time" or the above "specific time" Any of the "time different from" will be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side staging reception period.

Here, if the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol change when controlled to the automatic button effect state, and the operation for the operation button 410 is received during the effect acceptance period. , The process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Similarly, during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect reception period for an operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect reception period occurs. Even if the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the period, the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception and the process of canceling the automatic button effect state are executed respectively. Is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception", the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the effect acceptance period. It will be executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when the operation for the body 5001 is received.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (specific effect). The desire to end the condition) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which a player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end a specific effect state and the operation to allow the operation reception to be performed, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the entertainment interests may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button is given an operation opportunity within the effect reception period. A process for ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and a process that can cause a change in the effect by performing an operation on the 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 only once (only by operating in a single operation mode). (Processing to execute the effect after operation) is performed respectively, so the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation is accepted. Even if it occurs within the period, it will be possible to smoothly switch the staging state.

However, regarding the setting change related to the automatic button effect state (change of setting to automatic button effect state or cancellation of setting of automatic button effect state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (state in which the symbol change is not executed). , The setting can be changed without requiring an operation on the sword decoration body 5001. That is, the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that amount, a big hit is expected than the operation button 410. The degree is high. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thereby the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling at the time and maintain the game entertainment. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed, the operation means (operation buttons) other than the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means are displayed. The automatic button effect state can be set or canceled by operating the 410 or another operating means) multiple times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the sword decoration body 5001 does not need to be operated to the automatic button effect state. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed for the purpose of.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. Only when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is received. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decoration body 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It will be like.

In addition, as a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button effect state is set, "automatic operation for generating an operation effect even if the pachinko machine 1 is not operated within the effect reception period". In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "effect function", special operation means that are not the target of the "automatic effect function that generates an operation effect without operating during the effect reception period" May further be included. That is, in this case, when the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs when the symbol variation is in the execution state, and the operation for the special operation means is received within the effect acceptance period, the effect is received. The post-operation production according to the production reception suggests the degree of expectation for the big hit. However, even if the situation is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect is accepted appears. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but if the effect is different from the effect when the effect is received, it may appear.

Further, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long press), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period during which the symbol change is in the execution state. Not only when, but also the effect acceptance period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect acceptance period where the expectation is suggested when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated, and the expectation is suggested when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable not to allow this even if there is a production reception period, etc.). That is, if the operation button 410 is operated (operation in a long-pressed manner) while the effect reception period for an operation means different from that of the operation button 410 is within the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is generated. In the middle of the production reception period, the "automatic production function that generates the production during operation without operating during the production reception period" is enabled to operate the original production reception (operation means different from the operation button 410). The effect reception period at the time of operation) may occur without operation, and for a player who is not familiar with such an automatic button effect state, is the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurring, or is the operation button 410? This is because it may be confusing whether the production acceptance period for a different operation means has occurred, and there is a concern that this will reduce the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the precursor effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, but it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is not performed, and a precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be possible to execute it as a display mode different from the above. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to preliminarily recognize whether or not the automatic production function can function within the specific production reception period, and it becomes possible to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed during the effect reception period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, the specific image is specified so as to go to the specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which a lightning bolt falls toward a specific area) may be displayed (precursor effect) outside the area. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, the "specific image suggesting the remaining time" in the hidden state is watched to the place where it will appear in the future. Since it becomes possible to prompt the player, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation by the player is not in time and the specific effect reception period ends. Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game entertainment taste is appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player, but the result of the big hit determination including each of the following explanatory examples Based on this, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state according to the progress of the game or the effect, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which the state can be set or canceled according to the progress of the game or the effect, for example, "While it is controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but it is a big hit game state. The control mode such as "the automatic button effect state is canceled when the state shifts to the high probability time saving state" and "the automatic button effect state is generated within the execution period of the symbol change, and the symbol change in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generate an effect pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence" or "generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol fluctuations are executed". It is possible to adopt a control mode such as, etc. Further, the pachinko machine 1 may be constantly controlled to the automatic button effect state, and in this case, the automatic button effect state is not canceled.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions may be a predetermined timing when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted or after that, or the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation effect is performed as if the production reception was performed after the production reception period ended. It will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the middle timing (specific timing) when the remaining time of the effect reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions as in the case of actual operation. At that point (specific timing), the effect acceptance period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation effect will occur even if the operation is not performed when the automatic button effect state is controlled, until the effect reception period ends (effect reception). It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period) so that the post-operation effect corresponding to the function is started. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function even though the specific timing within the effect reception period has arrived, the post-operation effect is generated by the player's own operation after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to make it feel uneasy when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, it is mistaken that it is controlled to the automatic button effect state even though it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is recognized, and it may not be possible to check the post-operation effect. "," The automatic effect function may not work due to some trouble, and the post-operation effect may not be confirmed. " You will be able to.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in sequence, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-mentioned effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. It may be used in an appropriate combination.

In explaining each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not normally controlled. When the effect reception period that can occur is generated, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be executed only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared. When a specific valid period related to this is generated while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific valid period. You may do it. According to such a configuration, the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is enhanced (improvement of the effectability by allowing the generation of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, the automatic effect function may not work during another effect reception period that is set when a specific display effect is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific valid period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function functions to save the trouble of operation, which makes it possible to enjoy the VIP feeling. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be enhanced. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic effect function from functioning in all of the other effect reception periods set when a specific display effect is not performed, and the automatic effect is automatically produced in at least a part of the effect reception period. If the function cannot function, the above-mentioned effect will occur when a specific valid period occurs when a specific display effect is being performed (when an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always functions occurs). It is possible to expect. Further, even when such a specific valid period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production according to this.

Further, as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, at least the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect are prepared.
-If the first specific valid period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first specific valid period occurs. Whereas the function works to terminate the first specific validity period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect.
-If a second specific valid period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific valid period occurs. At the timing when
-When the third specific valid period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific valid period is controlled even though it is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of the operation, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed may be performed when each process is in a specific effect state, such as preventing the appearance of the post-operation effect. According to such a configuration, even if the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is from the time when the effect acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function may function when the predetermined time has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed. Even if the production acceptance period ends, the above-mentioned automatic production function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, the above-mentioned is described when the second predetermined time elapses. It becomes possible to advance the staging with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic staging function of the above works or the above-mentioned automatic staging function does not work in the first place. The first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called). When a single operation is performed), the effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

The first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled. There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. If this is the case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interest when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is provided. Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects generated when the effects are received during the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different production contents.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, at what timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function functions (which is the effect acceptance period when the effect is accepted). The automatic production function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time) showing the remaining time of the production reception period so that it can be recognized (whether there was only time left). It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect with this displayed instead of being hidden at the time point. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period is the first specific valid period (. A relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs, the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses) and the second specific valid period (relatively after the production reception period occurs). It becomes possible to recognize which of the two (the period during which the automatic effect function operates) when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed.

In this sense, when the first specific valid period (the period during which the automatic staging function functions when the first predetermined time elapses after the staging acceptance period occurs) and the second specific valid period (the period in which the automatic staging function functions) occur. The jackpot expectation is different from when the second predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs (for example, the second specific validity period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degree is different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may be used. As in the case where the function is performed, the "bar display" may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the "bar display" is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. May be good.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the operation target after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is to be activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation means to be operated within the effect acceptance period (for example, an operation to be operated). In addition to displaying an image display that imitates the means), even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. It is desirable to. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be performed. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the operation target suggestion image may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the image is displayed. Whenever the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific valid period or when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. The operation target suggestion image may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed.

At this time, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect are both. Will be able to be confirmed at the same time, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

Further, when an effect that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is referred to as an "operation system effect", the operation system effect is related to this. It may be performed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.) without the effect. However, in this case, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "other specific effect not related to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and the "other specific effect not related to this" are not executed. It is desirable that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is higher than that in the case where the "specific effect" is performed in parallel. That is, when the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect not related to this" are in parallel, the effect is not accepted in the "operation system effect" and the post-operation effect is not executed. However, since "another specific effect that has nothing to do with this" is in the running state, the decline in the game interest can be suppressed, while the "operation system effect" is executed but "another that has nothing to do with this". When the "specific effect" is not executed, if the "operation system effect" does not accept the effect and the post-operation effect is not executed, no effect will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "other specific effect not related to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect not related to this" are specified. By increasing the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic staging function to function compared to the case where the "staging" is performed in parallel, the game entertainment when the operation system staging occurs can be appropriately maintained. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, the precursory effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs, the effect that the operation means to be operated operates, etc. are executed as "operation system effect" or related effect. It can be said that it is a thing. Further, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the precursor effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function increases. You will be able to. In this case, it is desirable that the effect is executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably a precursor effect) and ends before the end of the effect acceptance period. It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether or not the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at a high rate, and it becomes possible to provide the effect in a tense atmosphere. In this regard, if the "other specific effect" is to be generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the precursor effect), the "other specific effect" is performed multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is performed, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when "another specific effect" is executed is high. It will be possible to have a sense of tension as to whether the production reception period will occur.

Further, when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is continuously executed 999 times. Until the 1000th loss change) is reached, an effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the big hit determination may occur with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the effect acceptance period occurs, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function when there is no operation by the player. On the other hand, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss variations are executed). And when the 1000th loss variation) is reached, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) that reaches the specific value, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player during the production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated and the player operates within the production reception period. It is also possible to execute a process that always generates the same post-operation effect as at the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the loss fluctuation reaches a specific value, "the player should be operated every time the staging acceptance period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. Even though I was urged to do so, I couldn't get any results. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions the automatic production function. Since it is realized as a staging effect, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment. At this time, in the staging acceptance period that occurs when the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss fluctuation), the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, "operate") that is different from the display image (for example, "operate") that appeared when the number of times reached a specific value (for example, loss fluctuation up to 999 times) during the production reception period. It is desirable to make "If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf" etc.). In addition, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied. In the (effect pattern), a special display image (for example, "for example," " If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf. " It is desirable to execute the process that always generates the effect after the operation.

In addition, when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times continuously. The number of remaining fluctuations until the 1000th loss fluctuation) may be displayed.

In addition, during the symbol change, the first operation is performed until the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches the specific value when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Both the effect acceptance period for the means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means can occur, but in the symbol variation when the loss variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. , Only one of the effect acceptance period for the first operation means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side may advance the effect so that it cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is preferably suppressed that the staging acceptance period occurs and the expectation is given to itself. You will be able to get it. However, this production example "has achieved some results even though it has urged the player to operate each time the production reception period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a staging that always functions the automatic staging function. In order not to have any more expectations, the effect acceptance period for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low is generated, and the second operation means (for example, for example) is generated. It is desirable not to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur in both the case where it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means among the plurality of operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). The second effect reception period, in which an operation opportunity is given to the user, cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when the effect state is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment of.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-Displays an image imitating an operation means (an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation target to be operated) (an image display means).
-If an operation is performed by the player while the image is displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means).
-After the production reception period occurs, if a specific timing arrives without the player performing the operation while the image is displayed, the post-operation effect can be executed without receiving the operation by the player (). Automatic production reception means)
However, the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the post-operation effect is executed is different in the "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to do it. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. It will be possible to generate a post-operation effect.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is to be activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, a simulated image (an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation target to be an operation target) is displayed during the effect acceptance period, and the operation target suggestion image is displayed. Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be performed. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the operation target suggestion image may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the image is displayed. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the image is displayed, or may be emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decorative body. It may be executed as an operation by.

At this time, if the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different expectations, the expectation (image) suggested within the effect acceptance period even when the effect is generated after the operation. Display mode) can be confirmed.

The image that is continuously displayed in this way will be hidden after the post-operation effect is generated. However, what is the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs? The time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden should be different from the case where the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed when different times elapse. Is desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when a specific time elapses or whether the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic process when a time different from the specific time elapses. Even if it does not exist, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. ..

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time elapses, and when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time elapses, the big hit is determined. The degree of expectation obtained may be different.

In addition, if there is an effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the player while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect acceptance period. One of the modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation, a high expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) can appear, and a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) can be displayed. ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the production reception period, the production reception (automatic production function always functions) is performed and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed, but the low expectation display is displayed. When an aspect (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. In some cases, the effect is not accepted (the automatic effect function is functioning) and the effect is not executed after the operation. That is, if a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears and the operation is forgotten, the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, which inevitably lowers the game interest, but the low expectations. When the display mode (for example, the blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that the game interest does not deteriorate so much even if the operation is forgotten, so that the highly expected display mode (for example, the red operation image) appears. If you forget to operate it, the automatic production function must be activated within the production reception period to avoid the deterioration of the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate, but the low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation). If you forget to operate when the image) appears, make sure that the automatic production function does not always function within the production reception period to give you a sense of tension in playing so that you do not forget to operate it. It is expected to raise the awareness of player participation. When not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears. It may not be possible to appear. Further, during the effect reception period, any one of three or more display modes may appear.

Then, in each characteristic technique described below, another example relating to these automatic button effect states may be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Suggestion of expectations by automatic staging function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not operate within the effect acceptance period (when the above-mentioned alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period), the said It may be possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed on the effect. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not received during the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted. It is also possible to generate an effect pattern in which the process (automatic effect function) that causes the effect is not executed. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the automatic effect function does not function when the operation by the player is not received within the effect acceptance period, the symbol changes as compared with the case when the automatic effect function functions. In, it is possible to execute a process in which the effect is advanced within the symbol variation so that the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears is low. At this time, the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect acceptance period. By confirming whether or not it works, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a staging demerit may occur, a novel staging property such as forcing the player to exercise a staging selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the staging reception period". It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an operation on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like). The above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 330 to 350)) as to whether a period occurs or a period in which an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect occurs. See))) is feasible. In this respect, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related effect, those effects are compared with the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute the process of advancing the effect within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period. At this time, the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect acceptance period occurs also functions as an effect suggesting that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a high rate. Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to more preferably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

Further, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 more than when it is shown that the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity as the effect result. When it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state is higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period generated in response to a specific operation-related effect is set in the operation button 410. On the other hand, it is more desirable to set the ratio so that the ratio is the same when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given and when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001.

According to such a configuration, a production situation with a relatively low expectation (suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is not changed by this (the effect result of a specific operation-related effect), the expectation that the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function is not changed. It will be possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effect results can be performed in parallel to enhance the game entertainment.

Hereinafter, specific examples of the effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353.

In FIG. 351 (a), the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the display area of the effect display device 1600 is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

FIG. 351 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 351 (a). As shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area during a specific effect reception period, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press"). , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. (For example, "chance!" With a relatively low expectation, "super heat!" With a relatively high expectation, etc.) with different expectations even within the display area. Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and the normal effect state is returned to, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%.

That is, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 351 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted within the specific effect acceptance period. However, the post-operation effect that should have occurred as long as the effect reception is performed is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 351 (d), even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific effect acceptance period. , The post-operation effect with the same content as when the operation was performed within the specific effect reception period and the effect was received will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs depending on the operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode of display in the display area is the same as that of the case where the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (e), the production progresses in such a way that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific effect reception period is generated as "the effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", or "the above-mentioned automatic effect function". Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot judgment when executing the symbol change, and as a result, 60% in a specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 40%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic staging function functions. "Period" or "Production acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60% and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40% during a specific effect reception period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific effect reception period is generated as the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", "the above-mentioned". Which of those periods should be generated so that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it is generated as the "effect acceptance period when the automatic effect function of Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

According to such a configuration, the automatic production function functions when the production reception period occurs, in which it is determined that a mode with high expectation (such as "super heat!") Appears as a post-operation effect when the effect is received. While the ratio of performing is relatively high, when the production acceptance period occurs, it is determined that a mode with low expectation (such as "chance!") Will appear as a post-operation effect when the effect is accepted. The percentage of functions that work will be relatively low. Therefore, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect acceptance period. By confirming it, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a staging demerit may occur, a novel staging property such as forcing the player to exercise a staging selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the staging reception period". It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

However, as shown in FIG. 351 (d), even if the automatic effect function functions when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect acceptance period, it is expected as a post-operation effect. Since low-level modes (such as "chance!") Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic effect function has a relatively high degree of expectation, this The suggestion of continuous expectations (suggestion by the function of the automatic staging function, suggestion by the mode of post-operation staging) will realize the staging performance that will not let you down, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately. It will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351 (c), even if the automatic effect function does not function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, the effect reception is performed. Since there is a possibility that a highly expected aspect has appeared in the post-operation production that should have appeared, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately. However, when the staging situation shown in FIG. 351 (c) (a situation in which the automatic staging function does not function and the staging does not appear after the operation) appears, the staging situation (automatic staging function) shown in FIG. 351 (d) appears. Worked, but it is desirable that the expectation is lower than when the post-operation effect shows a mode with a low expectation.

In FIGS. 352 and 353, when the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) occurs in the automatic button effect state, the effect suggests the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function. A concrete example is shown.

In FIG. 352 (a), the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here,). , "Auto button is being set") appears continuously.

FIG. 352 (b) shows an effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335 is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 352 (a) is being executed. .. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 332 to 335, there are cases where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and cases where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. A common display effect is performed in the above, and while the common display effect is being performed, it is concealed whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. .. However, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of a specific operation-related effect, a production situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a result of the first effect having a relatively low expectation. As a result of the second effect with a relatively high expectation, an effect situation indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated appears, so that the operation button 410 with a relatively low expectation and the relatively expectation degree appear. It will be shown which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given the operation opportunity.

FIG. 352 (c) shows that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352 (b). It shows that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press" etc.) is displayed. Character display and bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c), the specific decorative member SDY (such as a bamboo blind) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. One of a plurality of modes (for example, "chance!" With a relatively low expectation or "super heat!" With a relatively high expectation) with different expectations even in the display area while performing the staging operation. It will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and the normal effect state is returned to, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic effect function of the above does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. There may be a situation where the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when the effect acceptance period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 352 (c)), the effect occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)), the effect within the symbol variation is increased so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period is increased. Makes it possible to execute the process to be advanced. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as "the proper operation cannot be performed within the production reception period and the production corresponding to the operation may not appear". It becomes possible to provide an interest in which of the body 5001 is activated through the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect. In order to obtain such an action and effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic staging function has functioned.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display indicating that the automatic effect function is in a high rate of functioning (here, "auto button high accuracy") continues. It has come to appear as a target.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is not received during the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 352 (d). As long as the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect that should have occurred will not be executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function. In that case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if not.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 352 (e), the effect is produced even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period. The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed within the reception period and the production reception was performed will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs depending on the operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode of display in the display area is the same as that of the case where the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (f), the effect is advanced in such a way that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific effect acceptance period.

On the other hand, FIG. 353 (g) shows a state in which the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352 (b). It shows that the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred due to the appearance of the production status indicating that it is in. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, "" A text display such as "Pay the sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, which also prompts the operation for the operation button 410 and also causes the sword decoration body 5001 to move from the operating state to the original position. Operation becomes acceptable.

Here, assuming that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received for the effect within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c). The same post-operation effect as when it was done will be executed. However, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received for the effect within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c). Among multiple modes with different expectations (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectations, "super heat!" With relatively high expectations, etc.), the mode with high expectations is The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This ratio may be 100%. In addition, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is canceled and the normal effect state is restored, and the remaining time is exhausted during the specific effect reception period. The point that the production is terminated when there is no production reception is the same as in the case of the production reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g) (the production reception does not occur). In the case), although the production situation has a higher expectation than when the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c) occurs, the production reception occurs in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c). As in the case of not doing so, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, an effect situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result with a relatively low expectation (FIG. 352). Even when (c) appears), the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions does not change due to this (effect result of a specific operation-related effect), so that the above-mentioned automatic effect It will be possible to suitably maintain the expectation that the function will function. In this way, two different effects that are not affected by each other's effect results (specific operation-related effect, suggestion of expectation level by the automatic effect function) are paralleled, and a disadvantageous effect result appears in one side effect. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest of the time. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. Expectations will be lower than if it worked.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not received during the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 353 (h). As long as the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect that should have occurred will not be executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. Even if this is not the case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if it did not work.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 353 (i), even though the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 was not performed within the effect acceptance period. The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation is performed and the production reception is performed within the production reception period will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but when the post-operation effect occurs according to the operation during the effect reception period. In both cases, when the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (j), the effect is advanced in such a way that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time after the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect occurs.

It should be noted that the effect acceptance period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated as the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", or "the above-mentioned". As for whether or not it is generated as an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not work, as in the case of the effect acceptance period (see FIG. 351 (b)) in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed, the symbol changes At the time of execution, the decision (selection) is made based on the result of the jackpot judgment, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. However, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at a rate of 80%. For example, when a jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic staging function functions. "Period" or "Production acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, and 80%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at the ratio of.

Similarly, the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) is also generated as the “effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions”. In that case, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it occurs as the "effect acceptance period when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work". , Which of those periods should be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

As for the post-operation-related effect, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) and the specific operation-related effect are not executed. It may be executed as a different effect from the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)). However, even when the effects are executed as different effects, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, the sword decoration body 5001 used in the production examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be the sword decoration body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 311. Further, in FIGS. 352 and 353, the description will be given as an example in which the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 332 to 335, but the "automatic effect" will be described. The “effect using function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect of FIGS. 330 to 350.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 352 and 353, when a specific operation-related effect is executed without being controlled by the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is performed. In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button effect state from being accepted, the state of "the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted" is before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to generate the effect from at least the effect situation shown in FIG. 352 (b) (the effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started) so that this can be continued until the effect acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to perform a setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has started, this cannot be accepted. Therefore, the automatic button effect state It has become possible to provide "directing using the automatic staging function" only to those who are continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button staging state, and the game is continuously played while maintaining the automatic button staging state. You will be able to provide staging value for what you do.

Further, the effect acceptance period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect, and the effect acceptance period (FIG. 352 (c), FIG. 353 (g) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect). ), The first display mode (for example, blue button image BTG and blue sword decoration image SYG) and the second display mode (for example, green button image BTG and green sword decoration). Image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the second display mode appears, a "statement acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" occurs as compared with the case when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to have a high percentage of.

Further, the effect acceptance period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect, and the effect acceptance period (FIG. 352 (c), FIG. 353 (g) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect). )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decorative image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the third display mode appears, "the above-mentioned automatic effect". It is also possible to make sure that the "effect reception period" in which the function functions occurs.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period. While there is a risk that a staging demerit such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the staging acceptance period", it is necessary to provide a judgment material as to whether or not to exercise a staging selection such as ". It will be possible to do so, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, the effect acceptance period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" exemplified in FIGS. 330 to 350 and FIGS. 352 and 353. It is desirable to generate the above as a period having a longer time than the effect acceptance period (such as FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. There may be a situation where the operation cannot be performed, but by giving a long time to the production reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related production", it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. Will be expected.

In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 352 and 353, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic effect function to function is set to be relatively high during the effect acceptance period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect". For example, whether or not the automatic effect function works by setting the effect acceptance period to have a longer time than the effect acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect". It can be said that it is desirable to maintain the staging of the game for a long time and to improve the game entertainment. In this case, the timing at which the automatic effect function functions is reached when the first hour has passed since the period occurred in the effect acceptance period in which the "specific operation-related effect" is not executed. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect", the automatic effect function is to make it arrive when the second time, which is longer than the first hour, elapses after the period occurs. It is important to maintain the effect of whether or not it works for a long time.

In addition, the production acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect" and the effect acceptance period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" are the time from the start to the end of those periods. Even if you try to make them different, the bar display that shows the remaining time of the production reception period will be displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the remaining gauge amount will decrease. It is desirable to just make the speeds different. That is, in this case, even if the effect acceptance period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, it is continued for the same period as the effect acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect". Since it will be possible to make people think that it is, the staging of whether or not the automatic staging function works, coupled with the "frustration" caused by the fact that it is continued for a longer period than expected, is suitable. You will be able to make it.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353, the first effect acceptance period (effect acceptance period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Is generated, and even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the process by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it is not always executed, during the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect occurs without being executed. The first when the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period rather than the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410). The ratio of processing by the automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is increased.

In this regard, as for such an automatic button effect state, the ratio (“60% -40%”, “20% -80%”) at which the automatic effect function functions differs depending on the type of effect reception period, as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is set to the "first automatic button effect state", the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions depends on the type of effect acceptance period is different distribution rate ("50% -50%", "10". % -90% "), the" second automatic button effect state "is set differently, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, the automatic effect function is set to always function regardless of the type of period. A third automatic button effect state to be generated may be further prepared so that any of the effect states can be set, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function is not prepared, and the game is always played in the automatic button effect state (first automatic button effect state, second automatic button effect state, third automatic button effect state). And the production may be executed.

Further, the production examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be modified and implemented as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing (first) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect acceptance period occurred. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing within the effect reception period) to end the first effect reception period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect acceptance period occurred (the first). The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing within the effect reception period of 1), and then the first effect acceptance period ends without the post-operation effect being executed (the post-operation effect is not executed after that). ). On the other hand, if the automatic effect function functions during the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses after the third effect acceptance period occurs, and the second effect acceptance period or the third effect is received. The production reception period is terminated and the post-operation effect is generated accordingly. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time elapses after the third effect reception period occurs, and then the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period or the third effect without the post-operation effect being executed. Ends the production reception period of (After that, the post-operation effect is not executed).

According to such a configuration, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage in the first effect acceptance period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function functions is low, and the automatic effect function can be used. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time for the player to accept the production by his / her own operation until the first production reception period ends. You will be able to play games with your heart. On the other hand, in the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function functions is high, the automatic effect function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic effect function can be used. Since there is not much time left for the player to operate when it does not function, even though the ratio of the automatic staging function is high, it is necessary to provide a game with a sense of tension. Will be able to.

Regarding the above modification, in the first effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the first effect acceptance period). However, in the second production reception period and the third production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second production reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic effect function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic effect function should not function (due to some trouble), it is time for the player to operate it. Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, it can be expected that the same action and effect will be achieved.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned effect examples with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353, in other effect examples, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player. It may be controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination, or may be constantly controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the setting to the automatic button effect state itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine capable of functioning at a predetermined ratio.

[Unified operation control when in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (end the automatic button effect state). Wish) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which a player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button effect state and the operation to enable the operation reception, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the entertainment interests may decline.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception is received. After the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the operation according to the effect reception, only by performing the operation once for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given within the period. Each effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) is performed (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if there is a desire to end the automatic button effect state and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation within the effect acceptance period, the effect mode can be switched while avoiding the loss of operation opportunities. Will be able to be performed smoothly.

As described above, when the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol change is in the execution state, the setting operation is permitted only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. ..

On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated in the state where the effect acceptance period has not occurred. The operation for canceling the setting is permitted only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state where the effect reception period has occurred, when the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given is operated within the effect reception period. , The process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) according to the effect reception are performed respectively (operation unified control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated while the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred, the operation is not accepted and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

However, some players play games with a selfish game technique such as "while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), operate by yourself only when you like to advance the effect". It can be assumed that some people want to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (button for continuing the automatic mode) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect is performed. The process of ending the state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in the effect are performed respectively (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state), but the process is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If an operation for the above special operation means is performed within the effect reception period related to the specific effect, the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed and the effect changes according to the operation. The processing that can cause the above is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is terminated and it is desired to actively perform the operation game after that, the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period. If you want to rarely perform an operation while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), you can operate the special operation means within the effect reception period. By simply using the operating means properly, the player can realize the desired game.

Hereinafter, the operation unified control in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 356.

In FIG. 354 (a), the number of holds is 1 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows a state in which the effect reception period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred while the reach state is formed in the effect situation being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the display area of the effect display device 1600 is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area even during this effect reception period, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, below). An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410. However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 in which no change has occurred is allowed to be operated.

In FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (d), although the operation button 410 was not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions to enable the effect acceptance period. It shows how the post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed and the production reception was performed is being executed. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is terminated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (described as "PUSH" in the figure) are described. Any operation opportunity for the button) 1410 will be lost.

That is, in the post-operation effect according to this effect example, a stepwise effect progress appears, and any of the effect results of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 354 (c) and 354 (d)) having different expectations can be obtained. Even if it is decided at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of the jackpot determination) that it will finally appear, first, as shown in FIG. 354 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion). Smoke image) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 354 (c), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 354 (b). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi"'s omikuji) that suggests that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 354 (b) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 354 (d). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi"'s omikuji) that suggests that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

Then, the flow of the effect shown in FIGS. 354 (a) to 354 (d) appears as a basic effect progress when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs the operation. ..

However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode (automatic button effect state) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation. A desire to end) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which a player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button effect state and the operation to enable the operation reception, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the entertainment interests may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that (detection that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position) is performed, the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception are performed respectively (automatic). Operation unified control in the button effect state). When the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a) ends, the above-mentioned automatic effect function cannot function, and the special operation means ( In the figure, the operation opportunity for the button (button) 1410 described as "PUSH" is also lost.

Even if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception is performed as shown in FIG. 355 (e). As a post-operation effect according to the situation, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 355 (f), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 355 (e). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi"'s omikuji) that suggests that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 355 (e) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 355 (g). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi"'s omikuji) that suggests that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

However, if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is also performed based on the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 355 (e) to 355 (g), after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display shown (here, "auto button is being set") will be hidden. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. The suggestive display (here, "auto button release") is to appear (see FIG. 355 (e)).

Further, as described above, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure) in which no change has occurred is described. Button) The operation for 1410 is also allowed. Then, this special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 "operates by itself only when it is desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode switching). As mentioned above, it is prepared to enable a selfish game technique such as "promoting the production."

Therefore, even when the operation for the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), as shown in FIG. 356 (h). In addition, as a post-operation effect according to the operation performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception is performed, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 356 (h). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi"'s omikuji) that suggests that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 356 (h) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 356 (j). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi"'s omikuji) that suggests that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed. When the operation for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is received, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is terminated, and the above-mentioned automatic effect is performed. As the function becomes inoperable, the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is also lost.

However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the automatic button effect state is based on the operation. The process of terminating is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 356 (h) to 356 (j), even after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The indicated display (here, "auto button is being set") will be continuously displayed.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operating means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is used within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a). A special case that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions (FIG. 354 (b)), or when an operation for the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 355 (e)). The production is made to appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 356 (j), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears in the case (FIG. 354 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 355 (e)), a glittering effect display is additionally displayed. I am trying to do it. Instead of the glittering effect display, an additional effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be performed.

According to such a configuration, the change content of the effect caused when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period related to the Omikuji effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). And, when controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation was performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period related to the Omikuji effect. The changes in the staging that occur in some cases will be different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly) appears, "the operation for the operation means is performed and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is You will be able to enjoy the post-operation effect and recognize that the setting has not been canceled and this is still ongoing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), even when displaying a staging image (here, “Kichi” fortune) suggesting that the staging result has a relatively low degree of expectation, it is special. The production (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly) can appear.

Further, such a special effect (here, a glittering effect display) is made to appear additionally to the above-mentioned post-operation effect at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the special effect is made. When an additional effect appears, it is desirable that the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing due to the symbol variation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is useful for the player to operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 There is a concern that the operation for will not be performed. Therefore, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the special effect (here, glitteringly shines). If the effect display) does not appear, any effect result will appear by operating the operation button 410 within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a), or by operating the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation is lower than in the case of.

According to such a configuration, "the operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (button described as" PUSH "in the figure) 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and is continued, there is a demerit such as "it can be suggested that the rate of big hit symbols appearing due to symbol fluctuations is extremely low". Since there is a risk of being vulnerable, it is expected that the player will be able to exercise such a staging choice in a suitable manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), although the same effect mode as that in the example shown in FIG. 355 (f) appears, the above-mentioned effect demerit has occurred. Therefore, it is recognizable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than in the examples shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and 355 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), the effect mode is shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and 355 (f) while making it recognizable that the situation is low in expectation. By making it the same as the case, the third party who does not operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation where the production selection fails. It is difficult to grasp the above, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of which staging selection is made within the staging acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a), FIGS. 354 (b) and 355 ( e), as shown in FIG. 356 (h), it was decided to display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion), but the specific effect image is relatively as a post-operation effect. It may be displayed in either a plurality of modes in which the rate at which the highly expected production mode (here, the “Nakayoshi” omikuji) appears or the rate at which the special effect appears is different.

Further, regardless of which staging selection is made within the staging acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a), this is omitted without displaying a specific staging image, and the staging mode with different expectations. (Here, either "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) may be made to appear directly as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the staging situation is present when the staging situation (FIG. 356 (i)) in which the staging selection fails appears, the staging mode with a different degree of expectation ( Here, when either "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) appears as a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion).

In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation even within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a), so that it can be used for determining whether or not to take the above-mentioned effect risk. You may.

Further, the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operating means for continuing the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, it may be carried by another operating means already prepared.

Further, during the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a), is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be accepted for the effect? Alternatively, the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) is executed as to whether or not an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect. It may be the result of this.

Further, during the effect reception period in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity, the first effect in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is also given. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 354 (a)) and the second production reception period in which no operation opportunity is given to the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are included. good. In this case, when the first effect acceptance period (see FIG. 354 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 330 to 350) described above is higher than when the second effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to increase the rate at which (see) appears until the symbol change is stopped. According to such a configuration, the ratio of the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appears depending on whether the first effect acceptance period or the second effect acceptance period occurs. It will function as a suggested effect.

[Stable side automatic production processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means can be accepted for effect and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated". It is possible to generate the production reception period of. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and for any operation means within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, which of the multiple operating means should the automatic effect function be enabled (which of the multiple operating means causes the same change as when the effect was received)? Becomes a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means can be accepted for effect and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated". When the production acceptance period of is generated, "whether there is a possibility that a production result with a lower expectation will appear" instead of "whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher expectation will appear". Is the standard, and the process of enabling the automatic effect function for an operation means different from the "operation means on the side that can generate an effect that may produce an effect with a lower expectation" (automatic effect on the stable side). Processing) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, the production mode with the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period is Since it will not be possible to appear when the automatic staging function functions, a situation such as "when the automatic staging function forgets to operate, the staging mode with the lowest expectation will appear" will occur. It becomes possible to avoid it suitably.

Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 357 to 359.

First, an example of an effect when a special effect acceptance period occurs when the user is in the normal effect state without being controlled by the automatic button effect state will be described. In FIG. 357 (a), the number of holds is 3 in the normal effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation being performed, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 while the reach state is formed. It shows the production situation where the production display suggesting that the special production reception period is started. In this production situation, although neither the production reception for the operation button 410 nor the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword have been in the situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of being moved to the sword pulling position in order to prompt the determination of which of the decoration body 5001 should be operated. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

FIG. 357 (b) shows the player using either the special effect reception period (pressing operation of the operation button 410 or sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 357 (a). It shows the production status in which the production reception period) that can be selected by the side has occurred. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) in the effect display device 1600 that has appeared since the effect state shown in FIG. 357 (a), and operation buttons. While the state of the 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is kept to be continued, the instruction display for prompting the operation to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG). Correspondingly, a downward arrow displayed for each, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special production reception period, etc.) will appear.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "disturbance" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operating means are capable of accepting the production.

That is, in this effect example, when the effect is received for the operation button 410 within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b), as the effect after the button side operation, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed. After it is displayed that it has been done (Fig. 357 (c)), it is suggested that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. And the effect of making any one of "100 defeated" appear based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIG. 357 (d), FIG. 357 (e)) is executed. For example, in the post-button operation effect when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) appears at a rate of "40%", and in FIG. 357 (e) at a rate of "60%". In the effect after the button side operation when the big hit is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) appears at a ratio of "60%", and the ratio of "40%". It is possible to make the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e) appear.

On the other hand, when the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is made within the special production reception period, it is first displayed that the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been made as the effect after the sword side operation ( FIG. 358 (f)) shows that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. An effect (FIGS. 358 (g) to 358 (i)) in which any one of "777 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-operation effect on the sword side when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (g) appears at a rate of "10%", and in FIG. 358 (h) at a rate of "50%". The staging mode shown appears, and the staging mode shown in FIG. 358 (i) appears at a rate of "40%". The staging mode shown in FIG. 358 (g) appears, the staging mode shown in FIG. 358 (h) appears at a rate of "50%", and the staging mode shown in FIG. 358 (i) appears at a rate of "0%". It is possible to make the aspect appear.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the number of defeats is small regardless of whether the effect after the button side operation or the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Has a lower degree of expectation than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. Further, when the number of defeats is the same (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (h), and the effect mode shown in FIG. 359 (e) described later). , Expectations may be different, but it is desirable that they be the same.

In such a configuration, a special effect reception period is generated to allow the effect reception for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means), and the special effect reception period is generated. Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (effects after button side operation, effects after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means on the operated side within the effect reception period, one operation means can be operated. The monotonous staging will be improved, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

In particular, the same expectation is not shown by operating either the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means), but the sword decoration body 5001 (first operation means). Only when the operation means (2) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, FIG. 358 (g)) is shown, which suggests that the jackpot symbol is unlikely to appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). Since we have made it possible for the production mode of "defeating one body" to appear, we would like to see the production (effect after operation of the sword side) on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operating means) side even if we take such a risk. It is expected that the game will be maintained by giving conflicts and stimuli to the game.

In this case, the effect after the operation of the button side is the "specific effect mode with the lowest expectation" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. (Here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 358 (g)) "is eliminated, and it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect. Further, the post-operation effect on the sword side is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here)" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period. Then, in the sense that there is a risk of appearance of "the effect mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 358 (g)", it functions as a post-operation effect relatively including turbulence.

Furthermore, in this production example, during the period from the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (a) to the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (b) (here, within the special production reception period). The effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears, it is more than when the effect mode does not appear. , The rate of appearance of "the specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 358 (g))" is low when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. It is possible to carry out the staging progress in the form of a sword. This ratio may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, even if there is a risk that "a specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, a production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 358 (g))" may appear. As a material for determining whether or not the operation should be performed on the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it becomes possible to use the effect result of whether or not the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (ab) appears. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably improved when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b) occurs.

In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b) occurs but no production reception is performed within the special production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production is performed. The function does not work, and the effect is advanced without executing both the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

On the other hand, FIGS. 359 (a) to 359 (e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect acceptance period occurs while the automatic button effect state is controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 359 (a), 359 (ab), and 359 (b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except for the fact that a display indicating that effect (here, "auto button is being set") appears continuously on the effect display device 1600, an effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period will start appears. From to the end of the special production reception period, the production is performed with the same contents as in the above-mentioned normal production state (FIGS. 357 (a), 357 (ab), and 357 (b)). Be progressed.

However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b), "the effect result with lower expectation (here, FIG. The automatic effect function is enabled for the operation button 410, which is different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate the effect that may cause the effect of "defeating one body" shown in 358 (g). It is possible to execute the process of making it (stable side automatic effect process).

That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 was operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. As a result, the same change as when the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the special effect acceptance period is caused for the effect. Therefore, as a post-operation effect on the button side, first, after it is displayed that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been made (FIG. 359 (c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation and the larger the number of defeats. As an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher, either "50 defeated" or "100 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot judgment (Fig. 359 (d), Fig. 359 (e)). ) Will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 within the special production reception period. Since the staging mode (here, the staging mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 358 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic staging function is activated, "when there is a forget to operate". It becomes possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as "the automatic effect function causes an effect mode with the lowest expectation to appear."

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, during the special effect acceptance period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 359 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears. , "The specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 358 (g))" appears at a low rate, and the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Since the opportunity to enjoy the sword is given, it is expected that the sword decoration body 5001 is preferably encouraged to operate.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, a special period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the production and the period for which the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received for the production are simultaneously generated and terminated at the same time. It was decided to control it as the production reception period, but it is not always necessary to generate those periods at the same time. For example, if the period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect and the period in which the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received for the effect overlap in a part of them, those periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and the effect differs depending on which operation means is operated. May be executed. ”The above special production reception period may be always generated. That is, in this case, "Which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and further, a special effect reception period occurs" at a relatively early stage from the time when the symbol change is started with a specific effect pattern. You will be able to think about a staging strategy that assumes that a special staging acceptance period will occur, such as "Should you perform the setting operation to the automatic button staging state before doing?" .. For example, since it will be possible to confirm "how much notice production was performed in what production mode (expectation)" before the special production reception period occurs, these confirmations will be made. It has become possible to use the result as a judgment material for "which of the multiple operating means should be operated within the special production reception period", and the game until the special production reception period occurs. It will be possible to maintain this as well as the interest.

However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410 or when there is an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 within the special effect reception period, and even when there is an operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the automatic effect function Which effect mode will appear when is functioning is determined by a lottery (judgment) based on the result of the jackpot determination at the start of the symbol change or when the effect reception occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

Further, even if the special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. When there is an effect display (FIGS. 357 (a), 359 (a)) that suggests that a special effect reception period will start, it is permissible to set the automatic button effect state. It is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so that it will not be done. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that a special effect acceptance period in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that the effect display has started, this will not be accepted, so you can continue playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. It has become possible to provide "stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state" only for those who are, and it is an effect for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. Will be able to provide value.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the button-side operation is performed with the "specific production mode (FIG. 358 (g)" having the lowest expectation" that may appear when the production after the sword-side operation is performed. It was decided to execute it as a unique effect mode that is different from any of the effect modes that may appear when the post-effect is performed, but for the "specific effect mode with the lowest expectation", the effect after the button side operation is performed. It may be executed in the same mode as the effect mode that may appear when it is performed (for example, (for example, "defeating 50 bodies" shown in FIG. 357 (d)). In this case, the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Even if "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation" appears as a result of the performance, the same mode as the effect mode that can appear when the effect after the button side operation is performed appears for the purpose of seeing. Therefore, it may be difficult for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to recognize that the staging situation is such that the degree of expectation is extremely low. It becomes possible to do so, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suppressed. That is, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, one such as "a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception". Even though the effect situation only appears, the symbol changes depending on whether the effect situation is generated by the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword decoration body 5001. Since the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear differs depending on (the fluctuation of the symbol in the execution state), it becomes possible to further enhance the fun as an effect using a plurality of operating means.

However, this is a case where the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side is executed as the same mode as the production mode that can appear even when the post-operation on the button side is performed. However, the "special production mode with the highest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side is a unique production mode (for example, different from any of the production modes that may appear when the post-operation on the button side is performed. (It is desirable to execute as (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 358 (i)). According to such a configuration, “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation” in the post-operation on the sword side. When appears, it is difficult to recognize that the staging situation is such that the degree of expectation is significantly low for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated. On the other hand, even if a third party does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated when the "special production mode with the highest expectation" appears in the production after the sword side operation. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the staging situation has a significantly high expectation. Therefore, as a player, he / she bears the above-mentioned risk without worrying about the eyes of a third party. You will be able to enjoy the production (effect after operation of the sword side) on the side of the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means). In addition, regarding the "special production mode with the highest expectation", a third party Anything that is recognizable may be used, and for example, uniqueness with other staging modes may be ensured by performing a movable body operation or lamp emission.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)), the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" (FIG. 358 (FIG. 358). i)) can appear, and when the effect mode (FIG. 358 (i)) of the "777 body defeat" appears, any other effect mode (FIG. 357 (d), FIG. 357 (e)) appears. , FIG. 358 (g), FIG. 358 (h)) has a higher rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). This ratio may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary to make the effect mode (FIG. 358 (i)) of the "777 defeated" appear, and in this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) is shown in FIG. 358. The appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (h) is higher than the appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e) by the amount of lowering the expectation of the effect mode shown in (g). Will be.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the effect after the button side operation (FIGS. 357 (c) to 357 (e)) and the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)) are shown. ), A common effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating 100 bodies") can appear, but the common effect mode does not appear. May be good. Further, in the effect after the button side operation, only the display change appears, whereas in the effect after the sword side operation, in addition to the display change, the movable body operation, the lamp light emission, and the like may be enabled. Further, the effect after the operation on the button side and the effect after the operation on the sword side do not have a commonality as the effect content regarding the number of defeats, and the effect content itself may be executed as an effect different from each other.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, when the production reception occurs, including the time when the production reception is performed by the function of the automatic production function, first, for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. Although it was decided to make the display (FIG. 357 (c), FIG. 358 (f), and FIG. 359 (c)) appear, which suggests whether the production was accepted, the degree of expectation is suggested without making the display appear. It is also possible to execute an effect that causes the effect result to appear.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)), the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" (FIG. 358 (FIG. 358). When i)) appears, it is more related to the specific operation described above than when any other staging mode (FIG. 357 (d), FIG. 357 (e), FIG. 358 (g), FIG. 358 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appears until the symbol variation is stopped, and when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operation means (sword decoration) on the higher expectation side. It is desirable to increase the ratio of operation opportunities given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, it is possible to suitably encourage the sword decoration body 5001 on the side having a high production risk to perform an operation.

[Production reception processing according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is displayed. And, the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) based on the effect received by the operation, and the effect reception that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when an operation for the operation button 410 is performed while the second display effect is displayed, the above-mentioned second display effect is based on the fact that the effect is accepted by the operation. It is possible to execute a plurality of processes related to different operation effects such as a process of generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect suggesting an expectation degree) different from the expected effect of 1.

In such a configuration, the type of effect as the expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation differs depending on the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed during the effect reception period. Therefore, it is possible not only to enhance the game entertainment when the operation is performed, but also to appropriately enhance the game entertainment from the occurrence of the production reception period to the operation.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed within the effect reception period. When the effect status in which the first display effect is displayed or the effect status in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, the effect reception A process that generates the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation for the operation button 410 is performed even if the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed within the period. Is feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period. The first display effect will be executed regardless of whether or not it has been performed, and when the effect status in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period, whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated Regardless, the second display effect will be executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect reception period, there is a concern about forgetting to operate. You will be able to enjoy the production without having to.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when the effect acceptance period for generating the post-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect acceptance period for generating the post-operation effect does not occur. and,
-The effect status in which the effect is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect acceptance period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred, and the first display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the first expected effect (effect after operation) and the process of ending the automatic button effect state are performed, respectively (the effect shown in FIG. 360 described later). See progress),
-The effect status in which the effect is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect acceptance period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the second expected effect (effect after operation) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 361 described later). See Production Progress),
-An effect that is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), does not have an effect acceptance period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button is performed. The process of terminating the effect state is also prevented (see the effect progress shown in FIG. 362 described later).
-The effect reception period that is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the first display effect and the second display effect have not occurred. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in an effect situation in which none of the above is displayed, a process for generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect). Each process, such as the process of terminating the automatic button effect state, is executed according to each effect status (effect reception process according to the display type).

According to such a configuration, when the operation for the operation button 410 is performed when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear, and when the first display effect appears. The type (first) as an expected effect (post-operation effect) according to the operation (effect reception) when the operation button 410 is operated when the second display effect is not performed and the second display effect appears. The expected effect (1) and the 2nd expected effect) are made different, and even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself does not appear. There is a possibility, and the process of ending the automatic button effect state will not be performed. Therefore, the variety of the production using the operation button 410 can be ensured, and the game entertainment when the production using the operation button 410 is performed can be suitably improved.

Hereinafter, the effect reception process according to the display type in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 364.

In FIG. 360, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period from timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 360 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410). An example of the effect when the first effect pattern that can be set as "the effect acceptance period that allows the effect" is executed is shown.

In this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. 360 (b), in the effect display device 1600. , The button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, an arrow display in the downward direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears. (First display effect).

Then, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect at the timing tb12 before the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 360 (c), the symbol changes (in the execution state) based on the effect reception. The first post-operation effect (in the figure, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in the symbol variation) is executed (the first expected effect). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state based on the effect reception, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 does not consume the remaining time. It will be terminated at that point. Therefore, at the timing tb12 where the effect is received, the display indicating that the effect is controlled to the "auto button effect state" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button is being set"). ) ”Will also be hidden.

However, in this case, regardless of whether the effect is received within the period from timing tb11 to tb13, in timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 360 (d), the first post-operation effect generated by the effect reception ( The first expected production) is not finished yet, and it is in the middle of execution so that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained for the period from timing tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the production reception is performed. It is desirable to do.

In FIG. 361, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period from timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 361 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410). An example of the effect when the second effect pattern that can be set as "the effect acceptance period that allows the effect" is executed is shown.

In this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. 361 (b), in the effect display device 1600. , "Haunted OBK with a present box" will be introduced (second display production).

Here, when "Haunted OBK with a present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation is always generated when the operation button 410 is operated. Since it is not always the case, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 361, the ghost OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period from timing tb21 to tb23, and the ghost OBK is displayed before the timing tb23. When the operation button 410 is operated at the timing tb22, the effect is received, and as shown in FIG. 361 (c), the jackpot symbol is generated by the symbol change (the symbol change in the execution state) based on the effect reception. The second post-operation effect (the character display of "super heat" in the figure) that suggests the degree of expectation that appears is executed (second expected effect).

However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 ends at the time when the effect reception is performed without exhausting the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. I am trying to maintain this. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here," auto button setting ")" that appears in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be done.

Regardless of which of the periods from timing tb21 to tb23, the effect reception is performed, in the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 361 (d), the second post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) generated by the effect reception is performed. The expected production) has not been completed yet, and it is necessary to keep the game in the middle of execution so that the game entertainment can be appropriately maintained for the period from timing tb21 to tb23 regardless of the timing when the production is accepted. Is desirable.

FIG. 362 is for generating a second post-operation effect during the period from timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 362 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. An example of the production when the third production pattern for displaying "Haunted OBK with a present box" is executed even though the production reception period of the above has not occurred is shown.

In this third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 362 (b), in the effect display device 1600, a ghost OBK with a present box appears (second display effect).

However, as described above, in the production situation where the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, even if the operation button 410 is operated, the post-operation effect suggesting the degree of expectation is performed. Since it is not always generated, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 362, the ghost OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period from timing tb31 to tb33, but as shown in FIG. 362 (a), the ghost OBK is displayed. During this period, the "effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 361 (a) and 361 (c), even if the operation button 410 is operated while the ghost OBK holding the present box is displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation. The effect (first post-operation effect, second post-operation effect) does not appear, and the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed during the period from timing tb31 to tb33.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect acceptance period for the post-operation effect does not occur in the automatic button effect state. In this case, basically, the process of ending (cancelling the setting) of the automatic button effect state is performed, but it is shown in FIG. 362 even when the effect acceptance period related to the post-operation effect does not occur. If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while in such a production situation (a production situation in which a ghost OBK holding a present box is displayed), a process for generating a post-operation effect and an automatic button effect state are displayed. It is decided to advance the production so that neither the processing to end is performed.

Therefore, the second operation shown in FIG. 361 (c) is displayed when the embodiment (ghost OBK with a present box) shown in FIG. 362 (b), which is the same embodiment as that of FIG. 361 (b), is displayed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated in the expectation that a post-effect (second expected effect) will occur, the effect will not change, but the automatic button effect state will not be canceled. You will be able to continue this. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
-Even when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, only the detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is enabled, and when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, the effect If there is a detection, it is determined whether or not the timing of the detection is "within the period from timing tb31 to tb33 where the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed", and the "hold the present box". When the timing when the ghost OBK is displayed is within the period from tb31 to tb33, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the timing when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed. A method for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state when it is not "within the period of tb21 to tb23" (the period of timing tb31 to tb33 is set as a prohibited period for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state. Method)
-During the period from tb21 to tb23 when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, a method such as detecting whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated and not performing the operation itself should be adopted. Is possible, and any method may be used to realize it.

In FIG. 363, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period from timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 363 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol change is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. An example of an effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period from the timings tb11 to tb13 is shown, although the above-mentioned first effect pattern that can be set as the “allowable effect acceptance period” is executed.

As described above, in this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, the effect display is as shown in FIG. 363 (b). In the device 1600, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, an arrow display in the downward direction and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Display) appears (first display effect).

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 363, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period from timing tb11 to tb13, but when the timing tb12'before the timing tb13 arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function Is designed to function, thereby causing the same change in the effect as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 363 (c), at the timing tb12', the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function. The suggested first post-operation effect (in the figure, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12', the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled" (here, "auto button setting") that has appeared up to that point in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. It will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tb12', at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 363 (d), the first post-operation effect (first) generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed. It is desirable that the expected production) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest during the period from timing tb11 to tb13.

In FIG. 364, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period from timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 364 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol change is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. An example of an effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period from the timings tb21 to tb23 is shown, although the above-mentioned second effect pattern that can be set as the “allowable effect acceptance period” is executed.

As described above, in this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, the effect display is as shown in FIG. 364 (b). In the device 1600, "a ghost OBK with a present box" is introduced (second display effect).

Here, as described above, when "Haunted OBK with a present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Since it is not always possible to generate the effect, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) that prompts the operation of the operation button 410 appears. There is no.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 364, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period from the timing tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22'before the timing tb23 arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function Is designed to function, thereby causing the same change in the effect as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 364 (c), at the timing tb22', the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function. The suggestion second post-operation effect (in the figure, the character display of "super heat") is executed (second expected effect). However, even in this case, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tb22', the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled" (here, "auto button setting") that has appeared up to that point in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. It will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tb22', at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 364 (d), the second post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed. It is desirable that the expected production) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest during the period from timing tb21 to tb23.

By the way, although the illustration is omitted, although the above-mentioned third effect pattern (see FIG. 362) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is used within the period from the timing tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function cannot function and the automatic button effect state is canceled because the effect acceptance period for generating the second post-operation effect has not occurred in the first place. It goes without saying that it will continue (that is, no change will occur).

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the first display effect shown in FIG. 360 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 361 and 362 execute effects that are developed with different contents from each other. , The type of post-operation effect when the operation is performed, depending on whether the operation button 410 is operated when either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed (first). The expected effect (the second expected effect) is different, and even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself may not appear. It will be prevented from being processed to end the automatic button effect state. Therefore, the variety of the production using the operation button 410 can be ensured, and the game entertainment when the production using the operation button 410 is performed can be suitably improved.

As for the first display effect, there are a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and it may be possible to execute the first display effect in any of these effect modes. Further, as for the second display effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the second display effect may be executed in any of the effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect are executed as display contents having no relation to each other. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, in the first display effect, an instruction display prompting an operation for the button image BTG or the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, the button is displayed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display prompting the operation for the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is being performed is displayed. It has become.

Further, regarding the first expected effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the first expected effect may be executed in any of the effect modes. Further, as for the second expected effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the second expected effect may be executed by any of the effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed as the effect contents having no relation to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the fortune-telling image is displayed in the first expected effect, whereas the fortune-telling image is not displayed in the second expected effect, and the degree of expectation by character display is displayed. Is being suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as a movable effect or an effect by a lamp display, the contents may not be related to each other.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, as an effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the second display effect appears, "the effect for the operation button 410". A second effect pattern and a second display effect appear in which it is determined in advance (for example, in the judgment process performed at the start of the symbol change) that a "effect reception period that allows reception (operation)" will occur. With the third effect pattern, it is determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol change) that the "effect acceptance period that allows the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. I decided to prepare. However, after preparing a second effect pattern in which it is predetermined that a "effect acceptance period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" occurs when the second display effect appears. Based on the fact that the production reception is performed within the production reception period that allows the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410, a determination (lottery) is made as to whether or not to generate the second expected production. FIG. 360 by generating a second expected effect when a specific result is obtained in the determination and not generating a second expected effect when a specific result is not obtained in the determination. -The production example shown in FIG. 364 may be realized. Further, apart from the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect appears, the "effect acceptance period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. The above-mentioned third effect pattern, which has been determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation), may be further prepared.

When the second expected effect is generated as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. It is possible to increase the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state) than when the first expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. desirable.

Further, when the second display effect is performed, the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) is stopped until the symbol variation is stopped, as compared with the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance between. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, a specific operation is performed. It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that the related production (see FIGS. 330 to 350) will be performed, and it will be possible to suitably suppress the game entertainment.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed and when the second display effect (FIG. 361 (b), FIG. 362) is displayed. (Refer to (b)) is displayed, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated. However, even if there is an operation, the second expected effect does not always occur. When the second display effect (see FIGS. 361 (b) and 362 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect is displayed. When the effect function is enabled, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 361 (b) and 362 (b)) is displayed, the operation is performed by leaving it to the above-mentioned automatic effect function. There is concern that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIG. 361 (b) and FIG. 362 (b)) is displayed. (See) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is disabled, and when the second display effect is displayed, even if it is operated, the second expected effect will occur, but at least it must be operated. For example, the second expected staging may not occur.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the ghost OBK is displayed, the "effect reception period for allowing the production reception (operation) for the operating means" is generated while the ghost OBK is displayed. You may do so. Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the ghost OBK is displayed, the automatic production function may function within the "effect reception period for allowing the production reception (operation) for the operation means", or the player may use it. Even if the operation is performed, the ghost OBK may not be hidden, and the effect of displaying the ghost OBK may be continued even at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33.

[Auto repeated hit function in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 prompts a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) to a predetermined operation means, generates an effect reception every time there is such an operation, and performs a multiple operation effect corresponding to the operation. May be struck. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, how to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function when such a specific effect acceptance period in which the operation effect is performed a plurality of times occurs becomes a problem.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operating means (for example, an operation button 410) is provided during a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hitting, etc.) is given. Is not required to be operated multiple times, but an effect when the operation is performed multiple times simply by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) for maintaining the predetermined operating means in the operating state for a relatively long time. It is equipped with an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous striking function) that makes the mode appear, and the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous striking function) functions by performing an operation on a predetermined operating means in a long operation mode. When this happens, the effect is received every time a predetermined time elapses while the operation state is maintained, and it is possible to execute a process of generating the post-operation effect a plurality of times according to these.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hitting, etc.) is given when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated within the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically operated in the long operation mode within the specific effect reception period. Similar to when the multiple operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) functions, the process of generating the effect according to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

According to such a configuration, there is a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic continuous striking function is enabled when a so-called long press operation is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous striking, etc.) is given. Therefore, at least when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous striking function is enabled appears even if the operation by long pressing is not performed within the specific effect reception period. Therefore, even if the automatic effect function is activated when the specific effect reception period that requires multiple operation receptions occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period. Players will not be dissatisfied with the frequency of occurrence of, and will be able to enjoy the production.

FIG. 365 (a) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (continuous hitting, etc.) on the operation button 410 during the timing tc11 to ct13 of the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. The specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period" is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated multiple times in the mode of one-shot operation in which the operation state is maintained only for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. It shows an example of the production when it was performed over.

As shown in FIG. 365 (a), in this effect example, every time the operation button 410 is operated in the mode of the single-shot operation within the specific effect reception period (timing ct11 to ct13) (the operation button 410 is the original). Every time it is detected that the position is changed from the position to the operation state (here, the rise is detected), the effect reception is performed according to the operation, and the specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the effect reception. .. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by the lottery when the effect is received. In addition to the appearance of a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition, the specific production reception period is terminated at that point without exhausting the remaining time. ..

Here, although omitted in the figure, within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to ct13), the specific time from the start to the end of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception. A new production reception (operation detection) may be made within. In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the process of being executed at the time when the effect is received is interrupted, and a new specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is generated. Therefore, it is desirable to suitably maintain the operation feeling (staging reactivity) when the player operates it. It should be noted that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is terminated when a specific time has elapsed from the start, unless a new effect reception is generated again during the execution of the specific effect. Become.

FIG. 365 (b) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (continuous hitting, etc.) on the operation button 410 during the timing tc11 to ct13 of the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period" is executed, and the operation state is maintained for a relatively long period of time within the specific effect reception period (so-called long press). An example of the effect when the operation for the button 410 is performed is shown.

As shown in FIG. 365 (b), the operation button 410 is in the operation state while the operation state for the operation button 410 is maintained in the mode of long pressing during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to ct13). A process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on the operation detection (effect reception) at the time. Auto repeated hit function) is to be executed. As this process (automatic continuous striking function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed on condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and the operation detection (effect reception) is performed. It is possible to execute it as a process such as "to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on the reception). Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by the lottery when the effect is received. In addition to the appearance of a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition, the specific production reception period is terminated at that point without exhausting the remaining time. ..

FIG. 366 (a) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timing ct11 to ct13 of the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state. An example of an effect when a specific effect pattern that can be set as "a specific effect acceptance period to which is given" is executed and no operation is performed within the specific effect acceptance period is shown.

First, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing ct11 to ct13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed even once and the timing ct13 is reached. When it reaches the point, the specific production acceptance period will end.

On the other hand, assuming that no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to ct13) while the automatic button effect state is controlled, it is specified as shown in FIG. 366 (a). The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing ct12 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect acceptance period has occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function performs a new specific effect every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic continuous striking function functions. The process of generating the post-operation effect) will be executed.

As this process (automatic staging function), for example, "operation detection (staging reception) is performed every time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific staging (directing reception) is performed based on the operation detection (staging reception). It is possible to execute it as a process such as "to generate a post-operation effect). Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous striking function is activated so that "operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and these operation detections are performed. A process such as "generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) based on (effect reception)" may be performed. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by the lottery when the effect is received. In addition to the appearance of a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition, the specific production reception period is terminated at that point without exhausting the remaining time. ..

FIG. 366 (b) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timing tc11 to ct13 of the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state. A specific effect pattern that can be set as "a specific effect reception period" is executed, and the operation button 410 is pressed and held while the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning during the specific effect reception period. An example of the production when it is performed is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing ct12 as in the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (a), whereby the first specific effect is performed at the timing ct12. After the generation of The process of causing it to be executed will be executed.

However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in a long-pressed manner at the timing ct12a when the process by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, in the timing tc12a, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished) because the operation for the operation button 410 is detected while the automatic button effect state is in the state. However, in this production example, even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing ct12a, the production reception is not performed. Then, after preventing the specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception from occurring at the timing tc12a, the process (predetermined time t1) executed before the automatic button effect state is canceled. The process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) is continued without ending each time.

According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the operation by long pressing is performed at any timing in the state. Even if the operation is started, the rhythm and tempo of the specific effect (post-operation effect) will not change and the effect will not be delayed, and the process has already been executed. The process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a form of being inherited until after the operation mode by long pressing is started. Therefore, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period in the automatic button effect state, the player can operate the operation without worrying about adverse effects on the effect in the execution state. It becomes possible to perform the operation, which facilitates the operation by the player. That is, although the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b) is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, the effect is different. The same mode will appear as the mode of the specific staging that appears within the specific staging reception period.

It should be noted that the process already in the execution state (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is inherited until after the operation mode by long pressing is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an auto continuous hit function that functions when an operation is performed by pressing and holding within the specific production reception period, and a function when the operation is not performed within the specific production reception period. Regardless of which of the automatic effect functions to be performed, the same process (process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed. It is nothing but from.

However, after the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 is digested, indicating that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. The process (process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued from the time when the automatic button effect state is established, on condition that the determination is made. It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operation state when the predetermined time t1 based on the previously executed specific effect is exhausted, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated at that time. Instead, the process executed from the time when the automatic button effect state is set (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is terminated.

In the production example using the automatic continuous striking function shown in FIG. 365 (b) and the automatic effect function shown in FIGS. 366 (a) and 366 (b), the predetermined time t1 is set based on the timing at which the specific effect is completed. After the lapse of time, a process (automatic continuous striking function, first aspect as an automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) was executed, but instead of this, the timing at which the specific effect started was used as a reference. As a result, a process (automatic continuous striking function, second aspect as an automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) may be executed after the elapse of a predetermined time t2. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start to the end of the specific effect, but is preferably from the start to the end of the specific effect. Set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed in the form of interrupting the specific effect. It will be possible to make people feel as if they are repeatedly performing single-shot operations at high speed even though they have not performed any operations, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing ct12 at which the automatic effect function functions (within the period of timing ct11 to ct12), the operation button 410 is operated at that time. The setting of the automatic button effect state will be canceled (finished). At this time, the first specific effect is generated in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and thereafter, if the operation is a long press mode, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses. A process (automatic continuous striking function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single-shot push mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A new specific effect (post-operation effect) will be generated each time.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when the effect reception is performed while the specific effect is in the middle of execution, the effect reception is performed by interrupting the specific effect in the state of execution. Although it was decided to generate a new specific effect, a new specific effect corresponding to the effect reception may be generated in parallel with the specific effect in the middle of execution without ending.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when a new single-shot operation is performed and the effect is accepted while the previous specific effect generated by the single-shot operation is in the middle of execution. When a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated according to the effect reception, while the previous specific effect generated by the automatic effect function (or automatic continuous striking function) is in the middle of execution. Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has entered the operation state from the original position due to a single operation or a long press operation, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated at the time of the detection, and the operation button 410 is already in the execution state. It was decided to continue the process (process to generate a specific effect every time a predetermined time elapses). After that, if the operation state is maintained when the predetermined time based on the previous specific effect has elapsed (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is performed for the specified time). Since the process (process to be generated each time elapses) is further continued, the player can end the automatic button effect state while appropriately continuing the operation system effect that has been in the execution state from the time when the automatic button effect state is in the player. It will be possible to shift to a state where the operation system effect is performed by the operation by, and it is expected that the player's participation consciousness will be raised by this.

[Setting processing related to the automatic button effect state according to the type of effect pattern]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation with respect to a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. It is possible to set and cancel the automatic button effect state, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to set and cancel the automatic button effect state while maintaining attention to the progress of the effect while the symbol is changing. I am trying to do it.

However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the execution period of the symbol change, the processing load increases due to the setting change that was not expected at the start of the symbol change, and at the start of the symbol change. There is concern that it will adversely affect the decided production progress. In this regard, as the types of the "effect pattern executed based on the result of the jackpot determination", at least, "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" and "the operation are performed. Since the "second effect pattern" in which the specific effect acceptance period cannot be set is prepared, the setting or cancellation of the automatic button effect state is not always promptly executed depending on the type of effect pattern. In some cases, no problem will occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the symbol variation is in the execution period depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state. By making the setting and the processing mode for canceling the automatic button effect state different, the increase in the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation is suppressed.

FIG. 367 shows a symbol variation in the “first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three. Is a time chart showing a processing example when the operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (cancellation operation) and the operation for setting (setting operation) are performed within the execution period of the symbol change. .. The first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

As shown in FIG. 367, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, "a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears" can be set. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in the "staging pattern". Then, although the symbol change is being executed, the effect progress as the first effect pattern is made while the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed). ..

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the cancellation of the setting of the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Will be done.

Further, in this effect example, after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way, the operation for the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state) at the timing td12 within the specific effect reception period shown in the figure. ) Is detected. When the operation for the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without exhausting the remaining time. Will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the specific effect acceptance period when the automatic button effect state is not set, the effect is accepted when the operation button 410 is operated. It will not be accepted as a setting operation for the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect is received, the post-operation effect is executed, and the automatic button effect state is canceled. It is also accepted as an operation, and the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished).

Furthermore, in this effect example, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific effect acceptance period is completed, and the symbol is being changed. , The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) when the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It is designed to be executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change may be executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state.

Then, in this effect example, when the symbol change is stopped after the setting to the automatic button effect state is made, the state is in the hold state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol change is stopped. The next symbol change is digested (change starts). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, the effect progress is made in the state set in the automatic button effect state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 367, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is executed, the specific effect is specified during the period in which the first effect pattern is executed. When the operation button 410 is operated when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the symbol change is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set while the automatic button effect state is controlled. However, by performing the release operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is possible to make the specific effect reception period occur in the state where the automatic button effect state is canceled, and the player himself operates it. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the desired desire arises. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the release operation is received before the specific effect reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific effect reception period ends. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

Further, according to the above configuration, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed during the period in which the symbol change is executed in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set". Is now acceptable. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the specific effect acceptance period ends, but the setting operation by the player is performed within the period before the specific effect acceptance period starts. Is performed, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol change is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" without being controlled by the automatic button effect state, the specific effect acceptance period occurs. By performing an operation on the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in the period before, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. It is also possible, and the automatic effect function makes it possible to suitably maintain this for the game entertainment when one wants to enjoy the effect after the operation.

In order to obtain such an effect, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of the symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) relating to the effect content in the first effect pattern. Even if is obtained, it is desirable to make sure that this occurs for the specific production reception period. In addition, the specific effect display can appear within the period of the symbol change, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect acceptance period always occurs until the symbol change in the execution state is completed. It is desirable to make the production progress as such. According to these configurations, by confirming the effect content that appears within the execution period of the symbol change, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect acceptance period occurs, and until the specific effect acceptance period occurs. You will be able to select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

At this time, regarding the above-mentioned specific effect display, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a high possibility that the post-operation effect will be performed in a manner with high expectation when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. , If it is performed by any of a plurality of embodiments, it is expected that the automatic button effect state will be used for the judgment regarding the selection of whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned specific effect display, at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display are provided, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. It may be permissible to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player between the time when the specific effect reception period occurs, but when the second specific effect display appears, the said. If it is not allowed to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player between the appearance of the second specific effect display and the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the specific effect can be set. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment from the appearance of the display to the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

FIG. 368 shows a second effect pattern (loss variation) in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three. ) ”, And a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (cancellation operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. It is a time chart showing.

As shown in FIG. 368, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three, "a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set." It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "2 staging pattern". Then, also in this effect example, as in the case shown in FIG. 367, although the symbol change is being executed, the automatic button effect state can be canceled (the release operation is permitted). The production progress as the second production pattern will be made.

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the cancellation of the setting of the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Will be done.

That is, it seems that there is little merit in ending the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, it is usually more likely that the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set" will appear when the symbol variation in the pending state is exhausted. At this time, there may be a desire to return to the normal production mode (a desire to end a specific production state) in which the production can be advanced depending on the player's own operation.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set is executed, but also in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is executed. However, the automatic button effect state can be terminated by the operation by the player. Therefore, it is possible to pre-terminate the automatic button effect state when the "first effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is set" is still in the hold state, and thereby, in the "first effect pattern". It becomes possible to avoid a situation in which the automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect reception period is set and the operation means (operation button 410) must be operated without hesitation.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the player performs the setting operation at the timing td23 shown in the figure after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern is being executed, which is not controlled by the automatic button effect state and the specific effect acceptance period is not set. Even if an operation is performed by the player (even if the operation button 410 is in the operation state from the original position and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)), at least the second effect pattern. The setting operation by the player is not accepted (the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed) within the period during which is being executed. Instead of this, even if the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, the relevant case is concerned. During the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted.

That is, even if "setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state" is performed immediately before the specific effect acceptance period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation within the specific effect acceptance period. However, even if the operation is performed, the production reception is performed and the post-operation production is executed. In view of these facts, it is necessary to promptly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed during the period when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is executed. It is considered that no problem will occur if the automatic button effect state is set before the start of the specific effect acceptance period that may occur after the next symbol change is digested.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed, the setting operation is performed by the player within the period. Even so, until the end of the period (while the symbol change is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol change according to the second effect pattern is completed and the symbol is stopped (loss). When it is in the state of (design stop) (timing td24 in the figure), the setting to the automatic button effect state is made based on the setting operation. In this way, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is executed, even if the player performs an operation, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not allowed, and the set timing is set to the symbol. Since it is carried over after it is stopped, the processing load increases because the setting change related to the effect state that was not determined at the start of the symbol change occurs during the execution of the symbol change (by the operation by the player). Such things can be suitably suppressed.

Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation was stopped, the automatic button effect state was set and the hold state was set. The next symbol change that was there is being digested (change start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, the effect progress is made in the state set in the automatic button effect state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the second effect pattern is executed, the second effect pattern is in the execution state. Even when the operation button 410 is operated at any timing, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress an increase in the processing load due to a setting change related to the effect state, which was not determined at the start of the symbol change, during the execution of the symbol change (by an operation by the player). Will be.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the next symbol change in the pending state is started after the symbol change of the second effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is stopped. However, even if the next symbol change is not in the hold state at the time when the symbol change of the second effect pattern is stopped (missing symbol stop), the automatic button is displayed when the symbol change is in the symbol stop state (missing symbol stop). The setting to the production state will be made.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern is performed. The setting to the automatic button effect state is made when the symbol fluctuation of is stopped, but it is not always limited to this, and the point is that the automatic button is set during the period when the second effect pattern is executed. It suffices that the setting to the effect state is not allowed and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable to set the automatic button effect state when the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stopped) or during the period when the next symbol change is executed. That is, if there is an effect situation such as "it is decided to change the setting related to the effect state within the symbol change" at the time when the next symbol change is started, the effect is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it is only necessary to advance the pattern, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to an unintended state change during the execution of the symbol change.

In this case, even if the next symbol change is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stop) or the next symbol change is executed. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set within the specified period. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol change is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined in which effect pattern the next symbol change is executed. It becomes possible to carry over the timing when the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed after the symbol is stopped without performing.

Further, when the operation button 410 is put into the operation state within the period in which the second effect pattern is executed in order to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the second effect pattern. The automatic button effect state may be set only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is terminated while the next symbol change is on hold, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol change, but the next symbol change is made. If the second effect pattern is terminated while is not in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stop).

In addition, apart from the "second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set", the "specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set". "3 effect pattern (hit variation)" is further prepared, and when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period during which the symbol variation is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol is stopped or the execution period of the big hit game is executed. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be performed within.

[Prohibited period for setting the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation with respect to a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. The setting related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and by simplifying such an operation, it is possible to set the automatic button effect state while maintaining the attention to the effect progress during the symbol change. ing.

However, if the specific processing related to the effect such as the effect setting is allowed at any time by the operation by the player during the execution period of the symbol change, including the setting process to the automatic button effect state, the feeling of tension is felt. There is a possibility that the entertainment interest will be reduced due to the lack of directing. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol change according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, at least when a specific effect reception period has not occurred, the player operates to perform specific processing related to the effect setting or the like. In a permissible gaming machine, it is desirable to be able to start a prohibited period in which the specific process related to the above-mentioned effect is not allowed between the start of the symbol change and the occurrence of the specific effect acceptance period. That is, in this case, there is a concern that a prohibited period will occur, so that even in a state where a specific effect reception period has not occurred, an operating means (operation button 410, etc.) has been created while the prohibited period has not occurred. ) Will be required to be performed, and it will be possible to suitably maintain the player's participation consciousness for the game and the production.

Hereinafter, an example of an effect in which "setting process for setting an automatic button effect state" is adopted as "specific process related to effect" will be described in detail, but the "specific process related to effect" is not limited to this, and for example, an effect mode ( It may be applied as another process such as a process of changing the effect mode in which the first character plays a leading role to another effect mode (effect mode in which the second character plays a leading role).

In FIG. 369, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period (specific valid period) in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears” can be set, and the symbol changes. FIG. 370 is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of the fluctuation, and FIG. 370 is an effect example when the effect is advanced in the third effect pattern. It is a figure which shows. The third effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation, and may be the same as the above-mentioned first effect pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370 (a), a third effect in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set when the effect is not controlled by the automatic button effect state. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "Pattern". Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol change, the effect progress as the third effect pattern is made while the automatic button effect state can be set (the setting operation is allowed). ..

However, in this effect example, when the symbol is changed in the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set", the timing te11 (before the specific effect acceptance period occurs) (See FIG. 369), the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state, or the prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 370 (b), in this prohibited period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed. In the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 370 (b), an image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is displayed, and a button lock effect such as "auto setting invalid" is displayed. Has been done.

The prohibition period generated in this way ends when the timing te12, in which the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11, arrives. However, no matter how much the operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed until the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 370 (c) and 370 (d), the above-mentioned specific effect (prohibited image) ) Is designed so that no change occurs.

Then, when the prohibition period ends at the timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is hidden, and the setting process for the automatic button effect state is returned to the allowable state. After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 370 (e)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears appears at the timing te13. (See FIG. 370 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 370 (f), the effect reception period is set as the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, but the effect reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 and 370 (f), since the specific effect acceptance period occurs in the state where the automatic button effect state is not set, the specific effect acceptance period is within the specific effect acceptance period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a specific timing. However, even when the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 369, it is before the prohibition period starts. If you set the automatic button effect state to, it is possible to make the specific effect acceptance period occur while the automatic button effect state is set. In this case, the specific effect can be set. The above-mentioned automatic effect function can be activated at a specific timing within the reception period.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is not the timing when the operation button 410 is in the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after becoming. However, in this case, if the operation button 410 is put into the operation state and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. 369 arrives, after the timing te11 occurs. It is possible to allow the setting to the automatic button effect state. Therefore, the above-mentioned specific effect (prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 when the prohibited period is started as in the effect example shown in FIG. 369, but is generated later than the timing te11. Is desirable.

FIGS. 371 and 372 are diagrams showing a modified example of the prohibited period (here, the prohibited period related to the setting of the automatic button effect state) related to the “specific process related to the effect such as the effect setting”.

That is, as described above, in the above-mentioned production example with reference to FIGS. 369 and 370, when the prohibition period occurs at the timing te11 (see FIG. 369), the first specific time (for example, 25) after the prohibition period occurs. No matter how many operations (operations for the operation button 410) are performed until the end of the second), the setting operation is not accepted and the above specific effect (prohibited image) is used. Is designed so that no change occurs.

However, in the following modification detailed with reference to FIGS. 371 and 372, the prohibition period is "a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) is required from the occurrence to the end". Is the same, but when the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibited period occurs, the player operates (operation button) to end the prohibited period early. It differs from the above-mentioned production example described in detail with reference to FIGS. 369 and 370 in that a process that allows (operation with respect to 410) can be performed.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 371 and 372 (a), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set when the effect is not controlled by the automatic button effect state. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "3 staging pattern". Then, even in this modified example, although it is during the execution period of the symbol change, the effect progresses as the third effect pattern while it is in a state where it can be set to the automatic button effect state (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). Will be made.

Further, at the timing te11 (see FIG. 371) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is permitted. It is also shown in FIGS. 369 and FIG. It is the same as the above-mentioned production example with reference to 370.

However, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 371, among the prohibited periods, the period from the timing te11 to the arrival of the timing te11a in which the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (the period during which the release is not possible). Then, no matter how many operations (operations for the operation button 410) are performed within the period, no change is made in the specific effect (prohibited image) (FIG. 372 (c). (See), in the period from the timing te11a to the arrival of the timing te12 (the timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the prohibited period) (the period during which the release is permitted), the operation by the player is performed. When (operation for the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute a process in which the prohibited period can be terminated early.

More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibited period can be terminated early by an operation by the player (operation for the operation button 410), the timing te11a first arrives in the effect display device 1600. A special image that did not appear in the period up to (the period that cannot be canceled) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372 (d), the image NJG suggesting the remaining time as the prohibited period is displayed as the special image.

That is, in the prohibited period related to this modification, such an image NJG appears when the timing te11a arrives (see FIG. 372 (d)), so that the prohibited period cannot be canceled (see FIG. 372 (d)). It can be suggested that the timing te11 to te11a) has shifted to the period in which the prohibition period is allowed to be lifted (timing te11a to te12), and the prohibited period is shown while the remaining time is shown. Will be able to function as an effect on whether to end early.

Then, when the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the prohibition period is allowed to be canceled, the operation button 410 is put into the operation state. Based on the fact, the process of terminating the prohibited period early is executed. As a result, after the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not yet arrived.

Here, in this modification, when the prohibited period is terminated early by the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) by the player, the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. It is possible to execute the process that causes the above. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372 (e), the image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is destroyed and a character such as "successful release" is displayed to cause a change in the effect. As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

Then, in the state where the prohibition period is terminated early in this way, when the second operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. 371, the operation is performed. When the operation is performed for the second time (here, when the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting process for the automatic button effect state can be performed. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (here, "auto button setting in progress") is displayed according to the effect setting.

After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 372 (f)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears appears at the timing te13. (See FIG. 372 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 372 (g), the effect reception period is set as the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, but the effect reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 371 and 372 (g), since the specific effect acceptance period occurs in the state of being set to the automatic button effect state, the specific effect acceptance period is within the specific effect acceptance period. If no operation is performed by the player before the specific timing arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. However, even in the case of the effect example shown in FIGS. 371 and 372 (g), the invalid period is first set by performing the first operation within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the invalid period is allowed to be canceled. In the case of the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 and 370 (f), unless the setting process for the automatic button effect state is performed by performing the early end and performing the second operation in the early end state. Needless to say, the same production situation as above will appear.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, the specific effect acceptance period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the "prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is completed. A specific effect acceptance period may be generated immediately after the "prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is completed (in a form connected to the prohibition period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period will occur while the setting opportunity to the automatic button effect state is prohibited. It will be possible to raise the player's awareness of participation when the production reception period has not occurred.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, in the "prohibited period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed", when the effect is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period that occurs thereafter. As the post-operation effect, any one of a plurality of effect modes having different ratios such as the rate at which a relatively high expectation effect mode appears and the rate at which a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol change in the execution state may be made to appear.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-When the effect image of FIG. 372 (e) is in the third state, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, "padlock") in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state are different from each other. Appear one of "multiple production modes with different destruction conditions of the image with the chain attached to it").
-When the effect image of FIG. 372 (d) is in the second state, when the third state is reached, "a specific third effect mode (plural third effect)" is selected from the plurality of third effect modes. Of the modes, a plurality of second staging modes (for example, "a plurality of staging modes in which the colors of the image NJG are different") in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which "the third staging mode most advantageous to the player" appears is different. Make one appear,
-When the effect images of FIGS. 372 (b) and 372 are in the first state in which they appear, when the second state is reached, "a specific second effect mode (plural)" is selected from the plurality of second effect modes. Of the second production modes of the above, a plurality of first production modes (for example, a plurality of production modes in which the color of the background image is different) in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which "the second production mode most advantageous to the player" appears is different. It is desirable to execute processing such as making one of) appear. According to such a configuration, while the production progresses within the prohibited period or the process of ending the prohibited period is executed early, the degree of expectation can be suggested step by step by the production related to each other. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment during the prohibited period can be appropriately maintained, and that the early termination of the prohibited period is promoted to raise the awareness of player participation. In this sense, with respect to the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the movable decorative body is made to be executed as an effect that cannot be operated, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibited period is predetermined movable. It is desirable to be able to perform it as an effect mode for operating the decoration. A predetermined movable decoration body is operated when a specific third effect mode appears among a plurality of third effect modes, and a predetermined movable decoration appears when a third effect mode different from the specific third effect mode appears. You may not move your body.

Further, regarding the effects illustrated in FIGS. 370 (e) and 370 (f) and FIGS. 372 (f) and 372 (g), the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) is used. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation) as to whether the operation can be accepted for the effect or the operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350).

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, it has been described that the specific effect acceptance period is always generated after the "prohibited period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is generated. However, it is not always necessary to generate the specific effect acceptance period, and after the "prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is generated, the symbol change stops without the specific effect acceptance period occurring. You may prepare a staging pattern that can be used.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, regarding the "prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed", the effect pattern in which the jackpot expectation is relatively low (for example, the super reach state). It is desirable that the appearance rate of an effect pattern having a relatively high expectation of a big hit (for example, an effect pattern in which a super reach state occurs) is higher than that of an effect pattern in which That is, in this case, even though the effect pattern with a relatively high expectation of big hit appears, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state is forcibly lost for a predetermined period. It will be possible to encourage players to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's awareness of getting a big hit will increase.

However, if the setting process for the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, it is inevitable that the player who desires the automatic button effect state will lose his or her interest. As shown, after a certain amount of time has passed, the player can cancel the prohibited period early, and when it is canceled, the player can return to the state where the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is allowed again. Is desirable.

Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target to be set by the operation by the player may be another operation means such as a touch panel, a sword decoration body 5001, and a cross key, in addition to the operation button 410. Further, the prohibition period may be terminated early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, or when setting the automatic button effect state. The prohibition period may be terminated early by manipulating the operation target used. However, if the prohibited period is to be terminated early by operating the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, the mode of operation (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

As described above, FIGS. 369 to 372 show an example of the effect in which the "setting process for the automatic button effect state" is adopted as the "specific process related to the effect", but this is the "specific process related to the effect". Not limited to. However, regarding the "specific processing related to the effect", regardless of the type of effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means may be changed within the execution period of the symbol change. It is desirable that it can be performed by the operation.

[Automatic production function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation with respect to a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. The setting related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and by simplifying such an operation, it is possible to set the automatic button effect state while maintaining the attention to the effect progress during the symbol change. ing.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as an operation means, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation provided so as to be operable between the original position and the operation position by a predetermined driving force. The means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is provided, and in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player performs the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed.

By the way, when the effect acceptance period for such a movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 293 (G2), the movable operation means is placed in the original position by a predetermined driving force. There is a case where the player is given an operation opportunity to operate the movable operation means in the moved state by first moving from the to the operation position. In this operation opportunity, the effect reception may be performed not by the operation of returning from the operation position to the original position but by the operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position.

However, when such an effect acceptance period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), thereby causing the movable operating means (here, here, the movable operating means). If the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) cannot be properly given, and the staging reception desk There is a concern that the corresponding post-operation effect cannot occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), and this causes the movable operating means (here, here, the movable operating means). Even if the effect reception period as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) occurs without being able to drive the sword decoration body 5001) from the original position to the operation position, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. At that time, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected in the effect reception period. ..

According to such a configuration, even if some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and it becomes inoperable, it can be moved by using the automatic effect function. Post-operation effects using the operating means can be properly displayed.

However, when the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state where it cannot operate due to some abnormality or failure, the operation itself for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) itself. Since it is a difficult situation, if an operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is required in order to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button is used. It is not possible to set the effect state (specific effect state), and in the end, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot occur.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) are used. Regardless of which of the production acceptance period occurs, the same production change as when the operation is performed on the operation means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is generated. Processing can be executed (automatic staging function). On top of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed only by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). I am trying to be.

That is, in this case, not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the side where there is a concern that the operation cannot be performed when an abnormality or failure occurs, but only the operation with the general push-type operation button 410 is required. It becomes possible to generate an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, even if an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) during the execution period of the symbol change, the operation to the operation button 410 is set to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By performing the above, it becomes possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001).

In order to adequately ensure operability in the event of such an abnormality or failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) provided for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is used. It is important that it is provided as an operation means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration processing in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say.

However, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, as long as the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality / failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is set.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol change. , The restoration process for returning the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to the normal state (original position) is executed. The restoration process can be executed as the above-mentioned processing content. For example, a restoration operation (operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to the original position is performed. , It is repeated up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until it returns to the original position properly.

According to such a configuration, the movable operation is performed by confirming that the restoration process is started for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol change. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of being abnormal or malfunctioning. Furthermore, as a result of the restoration process being executed, the movable operating means (here, the sword) is confirmed by confirming whether or not the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position. The player side determines whether the restoration process for the decorative body 5001) has succeeded and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred has been resolved, or whether the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred continues. You will be able to recognize it. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred continues, the operation to the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By setting the above, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of being abnormal or malfunctioning, the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be used. It will be possible to properly generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception.

However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred has failed, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if this is done, the effect acceptance period for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) occurs before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be properly generated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special effects reception periods in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be generated. Regardless of which of the effect patterns is selected and executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the maximum time required for the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) (restoration operation (5)). Addition time between the time when the operation per second) is repeated up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times) and the time required for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) (here, 2 seconds). It is possible to execute the process of advancing the production so that the special production reception period does not occur only after the lapse of time.

According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is started in the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the movable operation is performed. Even if the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality / failure has occurred before the special production reception period occurs. However, since it becomes possible to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is appropriate. Will be able to generate. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect acceptance period occurs in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the special effect is produced. The same change as when the operation for the movable operation means is performed within the reception period will occur for the production.

FIG. 373 is a time chart showing an example of such an effect process.

As shown in FIG. 373, in the example related to this effect processing, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the movable operating means (here) is performed at the start timing of the symbol change. Then, the restoration process for returning the sword decoration body 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. In addition, it takes 2 seconds to set the automatic button effect state. In addition, the special production reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the operation for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be used for the post-operation production according to the production reception. It takes 10 seconds.

In view of each time setting value, first, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate a special effect reception period, 15 seconds (restoration process), 2 seconds (setting operation), and 3 seconds (special effect reception). A time longer than "30 seconds", which is the sum of "period" and 10 seconds (post-operation effect), is assigned, and "17", which is the sum of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation). Unless the production is advanced so that the special production reception period is generated at a timing after "seconds", the design changes (in this case, the sword decoration body 5001) in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred. It is not possible to ensure the above-mentioned staging when the special staging acceptance period) is started.

Therefore, in the figure, as a plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (symbol variation time of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are assigned are exemplified. However, in the production patterns A to C in which a time shorter than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is allocated, only the production progress in which the special production reception period cannot occur is executed. .. On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is assigned, a special effect acceptance period can be generated, but the symbol variation is started. By making it possible to execute only the production progress that the special production reception period cannot occur at the timing before "17 seconds (15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) addition time)". To ensure the above-mentioned effectability when the symbol change (the effect pattern that can generate the special effect acceptance period) is started in the state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure. I have to.

In the example related to this effect processing, the special effect reception period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which the time longer than the above-mentioned addition time "30 seconds" is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in a part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than "30 seconds" is assigned.

However, in reality, the restoration process fails if the special production reception period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has passed since the symbol change started. If you do not perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) immediately after recognizing that you have done so, the special effect acceptance period will be generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It cannot be done and is not realistic. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually takes time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can be said that the above-mentioned effects are not effective unless the above-mentioned time setting values are designed on the assumption of such time values.

In this respect, what is designed to include such time values is a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8) in which a post-operation effect is generated each time a plurality of operations are received and the effect is received. Seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) in which the effect is received and the post-operation effect is generated when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time or longer. In the valid period (effect reception period), even if the operation is started later than the occurrence of the valid period, multiple operations or long presses are performed a proper number of times and a proper time until the valid period ends. It is possible to do it over.

In view of these facts, among the above time settings, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation), a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) should be used. Is desirable. That is, in this case, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect acceptance period, "15 seconds (restoration process)", "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)", A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds", which is the sum of "3 seconds (special production reception period)" and "10 seconds (post-operation effect)", is allocated, and "15 seconds". (Restore processing) ”and“ 8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period) ”are added to generate a special production reception period at a timing later than“ 23 seconds ”or“ 25 seconds ”. As a result, only the effect pattern E among the effect patterns A to E can be executed as the effect pattern satisfying the condition.

It should be noted that the multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) do not necessarily occur in the staging pattern (variable pattern) that can generate the special staging acceptance period. It may occur in a different production pattern. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation valid periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case. Will set the length of the valid period on the generating side instead of 2 seconds (setting operation). Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is capable of generating both a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds), those valid periods. It is desirable to set the long side instead of 2 seconds (setting operation).

Further, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, it is required to digest the symbol fluctuations one after another in a shorter time. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, each of the above-mentioned time settings is set. It is not always necessary to carry out the design related to the above. However, in this case, there is a concern that a special effect acceptance period will occur during the period in which the restoration process is being executed for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, even during the period when the restoration process is being executed for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the player controls the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by the setting operation. It is desirable to be able to do it. According to such a configuration, even though the restoration process is being executed for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the post-operation effect as an effect using the movable operating means is performed. Will be feasible, and efficient processing will be realized in which both the restoration processing for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the post-operation effect are performed in parallel. Note that this process is not limited to the gaming state in which the time saving function is enabled, and may be applied to the gaming state in which the time saving function is not enabled. In this case, the design required for each time setting described above is applied. Will not be done.

Further, in the example related to the effect processing described with reference to FIG. 373, the effect using the movable operating means may be executed as any of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 350. .. When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the "effect using movable operation means" shown in the figure is realized as an effect in which a specific operation-related effect, a special effect acceptance period, and a post-operation effect are sequentially performed. The Rukoto.

In addition, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is not generated only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if the operation is not performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means may be made without fail within the special effect reception period so that the post-operation effect appears. When the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not controlled, there is an opportunity to operate the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at least during the symbol change in the normal game state. Although the special effect acceptance period to be granted does not occur, the effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is granted to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-mentioned restoration process in case of abnormality / failure is generated. Is possible. The effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration process in the case of an abnormality / failure is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can also occur when you are. When such a configuration is adopted, the design for each time setting described above may be performed, but the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) may be used without the design for each time setting described above. It becomes possible to secure the above-mentioned effectability when an effect pattern that can generate a special effect acceptance period is started in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred.

Further, in the example related to this effect processing, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled by the setting operation by the player, but the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination, or the setting to the automatic button effect state itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function always functions. It may be provided as a possible gaming machine.

[Movable staging triggered by the establishment of conditions other than the conditions for design games]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU1310a), when a game ball is accepted in the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when a big hit is won, a big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be acquired is executed after executing a symbol change in which the big hit symbol is displayed, and after the big hit game, it is advantageous to the player. It is possible to control the game state (time saving state, probability change state). Further, while such a symbol game is performed, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, various advance notice effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, and a look-ahead effect are produced according to the result of the determination regarding the hit (for example, in addition to the effect pattern). Etc.) are made feasible, and as mentioned above, the game is maintained in the interest of the game until the big hit game is played.

However, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific) only by performing the effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a. There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (sudare) and the like will become monotonous, and it will be difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operating rate for a long period of time.

Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol fluctuation (the start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied, the display content and the movable on the effect display device 1600 are satisfied. It is possible to execute a process that can change the behavior of the decoration. That is, in this case, display changes and movable body movements appear in a mode beyond the scope of the symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period of time. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol change (the start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied, the display content on the staging display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. As a method for causing the above, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. In addition, in order to change the display content on the staging display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted, but a situation in which the symbol variation is not executed temporarily (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is "0" and the number of pending numbers is set. The above-mentioned other condition must be satisfied even if the condition is "0"), and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, the display content on the staging display device 1600 and the like. It must be capable of causing changes in the behavior of the movable ornament.
-A method in which a production lottery unrelated to the symbol fluctuation is periodically executed, and the fact that a specific result is obtained by this production lottery is regarded as "the establishment of another condition" described above.-The cumulative number of operations for a specific operation means. The time is measured by the arithmetic processing in the RTC (real-time clock) function or the peripheral control MPU1511a (or the main control MPU1310a) (for example, the power is turned on). (Measure the time from), and the above-mentioned "satisfaction of another condition" is that the measured time reaches a predetermined time.

Generally, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured by using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition is satisfied, and the display content on the staging display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, until the change timing arrives. Since it is common to take a relatively long time (at least several hours, etc.), it is possible to change the display content or the behavior of the movable ornament despite such a long time. If something that cannot be done occurs, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set in advance is set as a start condition of the symbol game. Can occur based on the fact that another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time) is satisfied. Then, in a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, a situation in which the movable decorative body should be in the in-situ position but is not in the in-situ position) and a specific state has not occurred, the symbol changes. When the corresponding restoration operation time arrives, it is possible to start the process of causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, it is possible to start a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state without starting a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation even when a predetermined restoration operation time arrives. ..

That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the satisfaction of a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol change side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state, a movable body abnormality can be detected by a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution status of the symbol change. It is expected that the movable decorative body will be restored and the operation in a specific mode (the operation when another condition is satisfied) will be executed more reliably.

Hereinafter, an example of the processing content when the movable decorative body is operated when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIG. 374. In the example shown in FIG. 374, for convenience of explanation, "RTC state in which a display content different from the previous one appears when it is determined that the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time by using the RTC function (RTC state). It is described as "a process that can execute a process of generating a specific state) and sequentially operating three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C according to the occurrence timing of the RTC state (specific state)." As described above, the method of causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the start condition of the game is satisfied is not limited to this. As is the case, it is possible to appropriately adopt each of the techniques described below even when other methods are adopted.

Assuming that the state is before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the remaining time until the elapsed time from the power-on reaches the predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs). The remaining time) will be updated regularly. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt2, the elapsed time from the power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) is generated. Based on the above, it is possible to execute the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the establishment of a condition unrelated to the situation of the symbol change (the establishment of the second condition), so that the flow of the game so far can be changed. You will be able to have a sense of expectation as if it will change. At this time, the display content of the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

In order to more preferably increase the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the effect is produced. If you win a big hit between the time when the period (RTC state) occurs and the time when it ends, the production progress by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) (normal state) It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, even at the timing Rt1 slightly before the timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before), the condition unrelated to the state of the symbol fluctuation is satisfied. Based on the condition satisfaction (the first condition is satisfied), the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is satisfied) can be executed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this example, it is determined whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the passage of time since the power is turned on. When it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the pre-display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the process (behavior of the movable decoration) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. .. The "pre-display" can be executed, for example, as a display such as "soon RTC state" or a countdown display toward the timing Rt2.

According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body movements are the result of the jackpot determination. Since it is suggested in advance to the player that it is not based on (it does not have any jackpot expectation), it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the game interest due to a recognition error by the player. You will be able to.

In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at least during the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the staging display device 1600 appears. The decorative pattern (staging pattern) itself is hidden so that it is not displayed. That is, in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation level appears as the display content on the staging display device 1600. Since the process of causing the game to be started is started, it is expected that it is more preferable to avoid the deterioration of the game interest due to the recognition error by the player.

Here, "pre-display appearing at timing Rt1" and "moving body movement appearing at timing Rt2" correspond to "display not conforming to symbol variation" and correspond to "behavior of movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation", respectively. Is what you do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body occur regardless of the execution status (including the execution status) of the symbol change at those timings. However, depending on the execution status of the symbol change, the preparations for operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are not ready (the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in the original position even though the timing Rt2 has arrived). There is a concern that the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be sequentially operated even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

For example, when any one of several fluctuation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the movable decorative body A or the movable decorative body B, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, A movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, but it seems that the movable body operation time (here, when the RTC state occurs) in the above-mentioned RTC state arrives during the execution of such a movable effect. In some cases, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the process of being executed cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, not only the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C but also various movable pachinko machines 1 are provided. It is possible to perform movement abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined (abnormality determination) that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state in this movable abnormality determination, a predetermined movable decorative object is determined for the movable decorative body that is the determination target, following the processing of the abnormality determination. By executing the restoration process of performing the restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.), it is possible to quickly restore the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. Therefore, it is possible that the movable body operation time in the above-mentioned RTC state arrives while the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.) is being performed on the movable decorative body. If there is, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of the restoration operation cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

The "restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change" includes, for example, the start time of the symbol change (the time when the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side is acquired when the symbol change starts) and the symbol change. It is possible to execute (execute the restoration process based on the acquisition of the command) as at least one of the stop timings (the timing to acquire the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped). Is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (peripheral control MPU1511a), first, at least "after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives, the movable decorative body is specified according to the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in the embodiment, the movable decorative body (movable decorative body A, movable decorative body B) used within the period is reached. , Movable decoration C) is prohibited so that it is not used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol change side, so that the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration that does not conform to the symbol change) It is possible to suppress the situation where the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol change side.

However, at this time, even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, if the movable effect is not executed within the effect pattern, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be deteriorated. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (peripheral control MPU1511a), only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content in the effect display device 1600 appears at the timing Rt1. That is mentioned above.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when there is a symbol change (B change (loss) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, "what kind of expectation" was displayed until then. "Display not shown (display from timing Rt1)" is not hidden at this point, and it is displayed over the period until the timing Rt2a when the symbol change (B change (loss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to maintain it.

According to such a configuration, in the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol change is actually performed, the staging display device 1600 is decorated. The effect pattern by the pattern is hidden, and only the display that does not show any expectation will appear. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable decorative body (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is advanced. It is expected that the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the movable effect according to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is preferably suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 374, when the symbol change (B change (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a arrives). , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display that does not show any expectation (display from timing Rt1)" that was displayed until then is hidden at this point. Then, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol change is responded to. The display showing the degree of expectation such as the staging pattern and the notice staging is started as usual.

However, even if a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed in this way, "timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived. At least as long as it is within the period from then until the movable decoration finishes operating in a specific mode (here, sequential operation by the three movable decorations A, B, and C) depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol change side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol change side is prohibited, but since the movable body movement corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol change side. The decline in interest will be suppressed.

As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether or not the situation should be prohibited at the start of the symbol change (C change in the figure), and when it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol change (figure). Among them, the C variation) itself may be set as a prohibited target of the movable effect (at least the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs occurs in the middle of the corresponding symbol change (C change in the figure), the movable decorative body changes depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. Even if the "period until the operation in a specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C) is completed" is completed, the movable effect (in this case, the movable effect (in this case, the period until the symbol change is completed) is completed. At least, the execution of the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C) becomes unacceptable.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is set to the timing Rt2a later than the original timing Rt2. There is concern that the number will decline. However, the RTC state itself occurs at timing Rt2, but if the jackpot is won between the time when the RTC state occurs and the time when the RTC state ends, it is controlled to the special effect mode. Etc.) does not occur at timing Rt2, and only the symbol fluctuations (C and D fluctuations in the figure) after the first digested symbol fluctuation after the RTC state occurs are targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

By the way, until the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is completed (stopped) (until the timing Rt2a arrives). ), "After the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It is also possible that the period until the end of the sequential operation by C) elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display without any expectation (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. This is in the example shown in FIG. 374, in which the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after the timing Rt2) is subject to the RTC effect privilege. This is because it is not.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (peripheral control MPU1511a), at least after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed, even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives, the restoration process is triggered by this. By prohibiting this so that (a process of causing a movable decorative body in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation) is prohibited, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not according to the symbol variation). The behavior of the movable decorative body) can be prevented from occurring due to the restoration process on the symbol change side.

According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the satisfaction of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol change side is performed. The process of making a device is prohibited, and the process of performing a predetermined restore operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. Therefore, the influence of the execution status of the symbol change. It is expected that the movable body abnormality will be restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without receiving the response, and the movement of the movable decorative body in the above specific mode will be executed more reliably. ..

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state and the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) according to the jackpot determination is in the middle of the process. It is assumed that the above timing Rt1 arrives. As described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation, for example, a display such as "RTC state" appears in the background display on the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) is completed between the display such as "RTC state soon" and the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is created. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 arrives when the symbol change is in the middle of the process, and at the timing Rt2, three movable ornaments behave as a movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol change. The process of sequentially operating the decorations A, B, and C is executed. The "display not conforming to the symbol variation" from the timing Rt1 is continued for a period until the new symbol variation (variation B (loss) in the figure) is stopped.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, "three movable decorative bodies A, depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs" arrives. In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, among various movable decorative bodies, It is prohibited to perform both the movable effect on the symbol change side using C and the restoration process on the symbol change side. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, even though the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is executed during the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a, the effect display on the symbol variation side (the effect display on the symbol variation side (loss)). It will be controlled as a period during which neither the display showing the degree of expectation), the movable effect on the symbol change side (moving body movement showing the degree of expectation), or the restoration process on the symbol change side is executed (No. 1). One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 374, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expected). The movement of the movable body whose degree is indicated) and the restoration process on the symbol change side are both controlled as a period during which they are not executed (second limitation).

It should be noted that such control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (neither the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the degree of expectation) nor the movable effect (movement of the movable body showing the degree of expectation) is executed) is the said. Even if the symbol change during the period is not a loss change but is performed based on the winning of a big hit (big hit change), it is executed. That is, in this case, when the expected effect is not executed and the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C reaches the timing Rt2a in the middle of execution, the jackpot symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, as a player who was expecting to be in the RTC state, he / she will be able to enjoy the fun as a surprise production that exceeds the expectation. After the jackpot symbol appears in this way, the jackpot gaming state occurs while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operating.

Further, as described above, as for the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display in which the decorative symbol is not changed and no expectation is shown), the symbol change that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrived is present. It will be hidden at the stop timing Rt2a, and instead, a specific background (such as "in RTC state") after the RTC state has occurred will be displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started while a specific background (such as "in RTC state") is displayed, an effect display (expectation degree is shown) according to the variation pattern. Will be displayed) will be executed normally. However, regarding the movable effect on the symbol change side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, after the timing Rt2a arrives. Will be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, even if an effect pattern for performing a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, the movable effect is performed. Although the display in the liquid crystal display, the sound, and the lighting of the lamp are performed as usual, the movable decorative body is prevented from operating.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives, the three movable decorative bodies A and B depend on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. , In the period until the sequential operation by C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change (here, the start of the symbol change). Even if the time (time, stop time) arrives, it is prohibited to perform the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform the predetermined restoration operation). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) and the symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) )) The start time (restoration operation time) has come, but in these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decoration in an abnormal state, it is restored to the movable decoration. No processing is performed.

However, during the period of timing Rt2 to Rt5 (when abnormal, timing Rt2 to Rt5'), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol change side in this way, first, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state at timing Rt2. Determine if it is. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A is, for example, that the movable decorative body A in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (first position) and then is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

Next, at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B is, for example, that the movable decorative body B in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

Next, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is completed. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, that the movable decorative body C in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (e), when the timing Rt5 after each operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. The "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" is terminated, and the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, when it is determined in any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, a process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation. Is feasible. However, while executing a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs, the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is predetermined. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, it will be annoying, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed, and a series of movable body operations (here, three movable bodies) when the RTC state occurs. It is not executed independently as an operation separate from the sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C), but is executed as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. .. That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation itself for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated as a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. , The deterioration of the game interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state can be preferably avoided.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed. However, at the time of abnormality including the operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B instead of the process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation) based on the result of the abnormality determination. It is possible to execute the process of operating (special operation) in the operation mode of. After that, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not re-operated (normally operated) in the normal operating mode, and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. 374 (e) is not performed. Similar to the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body C is movable. The process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation by the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state occurs (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the abnormal movable decorative body B occurs. Until the timing to operate is reached, it will be left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol change side. Then, when the timing for operating the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operation mode. Therefore, "three It becomes possible to restore the abnormally generated movable decorative body B while suitably maintaining the effect mode when the RTC state is generated, such as "sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C". That is, in this case, since it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as the operation when the RTC state is generated is executed, a predetermined restoration operation is performed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. The deterioration of the game entertainment when performing the game will be preferably avoided.

The symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially executed by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. It starts when it is in the middle stage and continues until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Therefore, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) and the start time (restoration operation time) of the next symbol change (D change (loss) in the figure) have arrived. At that time, the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol change side has already been released. Therefore, when a movable decorative object in an abnormal state exists at that time, the restoration process is executed for the movable decorative object. The Rukoto.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), the "special mode including the restoration operation" when the movable decorative body B is operated in the "special mode including the restoration operation" is referred to as "normal operation". The movable decorative body B may be restored (returned to the original position) by an operation mode different from the "mode", and may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt1, only the display (for example, "soon RTC state" or the like) that does not show any expectation level is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display content is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, "RTC preparation state"). You may switch to. However, even when the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, the display content on the staging display device 1600 does not show any expectation during the period from the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation). It is important to make the display that does not conform to) appear.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B has been described, but even when the abnormalities are determined in operating the movable decorative bodies A and C, the normal operation mode is used. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restoration operation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the operation time of the movable body for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set as the occurrence time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the operation time of the movable body may be set at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the RTC state (specific state) occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, "not conforming to the symbol variation" based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 in which the condition is satisfied based on the function (RTC function) not conforming to the symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU1511a side. It was decided to start "display" and "behavior of movable ornaments that do not conform to pattern fluctuations". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function that does not conform to the symbol variation on the main control MPU1310a side, "display that does not conform to the symbol variation" and "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". May be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, "after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, 3). This is prohibited so that the restoration process on the symbol change side is not performed when it is in the period until the end of the sequential operation by the two movable ornaments A, B, and C. The movement of the movable body in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the (specific state) is less likely to occur due to a conflict with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may be started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is set to the execution state. In this situation, the RTC state (specific state) may occur, and eventually the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) causes the movable body to move in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the RTC state (specific state). There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, even during the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is desirable to prohibit this so that it will not be executed.

FIG. 375 is a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 374, in which "at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 during the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2" are shown. It is different from the example shown in FIG. 374 in that the restoration process is not executed.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 375, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), an abnormality determination (or an abnormality determination) is made for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. , Restoration process) I am trying not to execute this itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while the display does not conform to the symbol change (such as "RTC state soon"), this is restored. There is no such thing, and it will be left in an abnormal state.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 375, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs arrives, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to the processing related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state. It is decided to perform an abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

As a result of the above abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived, and FIG. 374 is shown. The above-mentioned processing (processing related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state) will be performed with reference to. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is executed again individually, indicating that there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 374 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 374 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed prior to the start of the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state, and the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. Even after that, the second abnormality determination is executed prior to operating the movable decorative body B.

On the other hand, as a result of performing the above abnormality determination prior to executing the process related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state, it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. At that time, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a form of delaying the arrival of the movable body operation time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is "a situation in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movement of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet started". By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode can be performed in the "normal mode" instead of the above-mentioned "special mode". Become so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 375 (f), at the timing Rt2 where the RTC state occurs, "the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movement in a specific mode by the movable decoration body". It is assumed that it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of performing the abnormality determination when "is not yet started". Then, while maintaining the "state in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the movement of the movable decoration in a specific mode has not yet started", the movable decoration determined to be abnormal is determined. Will be restored.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 375 (e) and 375 (f), in the RTC state, as compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. The arrival of the movable body operation time is delayed (delay from timing Rt2 to timing Rt2b in the figure), and the period created by such a delay (timing Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) should be used. Then, it becomes possible to restore the movable decorative body that has been determined to be abnormal so that the movable body operation time in the RTC state comes. After that, when the movable body operation time in the RTC state arrives, the processing as described above is performed with reference to FIG. 374.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 375 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. is doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 374 (e). Then, when the timing Rt5b arrives after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in the normal mode, the "movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is reached. Behavior ”is terminated, and the prohibited state (prohibited state over timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol change side is released.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 375 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), a new abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 374 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have sequentially operated in the mode corresponding to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are the normal mode and the movable decorative body B is the special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibited state (prohibited state over the timing Rt1 to Rt5b) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is terminated. ) Will be canceled. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. The operation in the special mode will be executed respectively.

According to such a configuration, even if a movement abnormality occurs during the movement of the movable body immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movements of the movable body at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (here, three). (Sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 375, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration process for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is set. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs are due to the increase in the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored. ) Will be delayed over a longer period of time, but it will be possible to perform a series of moving body movements in the normal mode when an RTC state occurs. The restoration operation for a plurality of movable ornaments may be executed in parallel, and in this case, the delay time until the series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs can be suppressed. become.

However, even in the example shown in FIG. 375, it is annoying that the player may feel that the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performing a predetermined restoration operation. There is a concern that the number will decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 375 (f) and 375 (g), when the "restoration operation" is completed, the "sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C" is executed (sequential execution). ), So that the series of movable body movements up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as "a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs". It is made difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, it is possible to display (error code, etc.) indicating that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body. In the example shown in FIGS. 375 (f) and 375 (g) as well as the example shown in 374 (f), during the period during which the restoration operation (restoration process) is executed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An error occurs in the movable decoration during (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during the period during which the movable decoration B is operated in the special mode (during the operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality determination). There is no indication (error code, etc.) that indicates that the game is being played. Further, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is completed, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is completed, and further, FIG. 375 ( f) At the timing when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started after the restoration operation shown in (g) is completed, the display content on the staging display device 1600 is triggered by the occurrence of these timings. Does not cause any change. These things also make it appear that "a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs" is performed, and that the predetermined restoration operation is performed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

In addition, in FIG. 374 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 375 and its alternative example, it was decided to sequentially perform the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state. Not limited to the above, the movable decorative body (one, two, or three or more, etc.) used in the movable effect on the symbol change side is based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (start condition). It suffices as long as it operates in a specific mode at the time of operation of the movable body within the specific state in which it occurs.

Further, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, provided so as to be movable). Operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc., and board side movable decoration body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) ) Etc.) and may be used respectively.

However, as an operating means, for example, in FIG. 374 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 375 and another example thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state). When the frame-side movable decoration body (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decoration body that is also used as such an operation means even after the timing Rt2a arrives. There may be a situation in which "operations that do not conform to symbol fluctuations" are being performed.

That is, as described above, in the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display that does not show any expectation (from the timing Rt1)" that has been displayed until then is displayed. Display) ”is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol change is responded to. It was also mentioned above that the display showing the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the advance notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, during the period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative body (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001, etc.) that is also used as an operating means is used. Depending on the effect pattern, the frame-side movable decorative body, which is also used as an operation means, may be given an operation opportunity even though it is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state. A situation that causes confusion in terms of production can occur. In the period of timing Rt2 to Rt2a (further, the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (the display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if the symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is performed, the operation opportunity is not given within the period.

Therefore, even though the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operating means is subject to the result of the jackpot determination. When it is time to give an operation opportunity, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific display (operation instruction image) for prompting the specific operation means to perform an operation. Even if a specific operating means in a state where a specific operation is performed is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed, it is a game that the operation opportunity was originally given to the specific operation means. It is possible to appropriately suggest to a person. In addition, by not accepting the effect of the operation for the specific operating means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of failure or abnormality due to the operation being performed for the specific operating means in the operating state. It will be expected.

However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display prompting the operation for the specific operation means is performed. If such a thing happens frequently, the game entertainment may be reduced due to the lack of progress in the production. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be operable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the operation effect is performed within the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination. An operation means (for example, an operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in which the generation rate of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively high. When it is given, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the effect reception (predetermined effect according to the effect reception) when the operation is performed are executed as usual.

That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable (for example, vibration), the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the symbol changes according to the jackpot determination. A movable decorative body capable of operating a specific operating means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low rate of occurrence of an operation effect in the RTC state (specific state) at the movable body operating time. By using it as one, the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, but the movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body (for example)). For example, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the jackpot determination is reached for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably a specific operating means in which the rate of occurrence of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low) is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When it is used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable to perform the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 374) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 375) is executed for any one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. However, it becomes possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected by the performance (delay or the like). In this case, it is desirable that all of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C be used as board-side movable decorative bodies. As a result, even if any of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the restoration operation, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the door frame 3 is provided. The operation by the frame-side movable decoration can be executed in parallel.

Then, after the RTC state (specific state) is generated, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operating means (for example, a sword decorative body) in which the rate of occurrence of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low is relatively low. When the time required to complete the operation not conforming to the symbol variation according to 5001)) (the operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state) is set as the "specific time", any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot judgment is executed. Even in this case, as long as at least a "specific time" does not elapse after the symbol variation starts (the effect pattern starts), the predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration). It is desirable to set each effect pattern (timing for giving an operation opportunity) so that the body (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive.

According to such a configuration, in FIG. 374 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 375 and another example thereof, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, the symbol variation is within the symbol variation. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decoration body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state). Since the operation) has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, it is possible to enhance the effect when the RTC state occurs without sacrificing the effect on the symbol change side.

Further, as described above, in view of the fact that the normal effect control is allowed only for the symbol variation after the symbol variation that is first digested after the RTC state occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example). , The operation that does not conform to the symbol variation due to the sword decoration body 5001) (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation that is digested first after that is forced to start later than this, the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is equal to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). It will be possible to allow a margin to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol change due to) in advance.

Further, when the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In the execution thereof, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to execute the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the operation of, or to perform the operation in the normal state after performing the restoration operation. In this case, the "special mode including the restoration operation" also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) by an operation mode different from the "normal operation mode". It may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001).

Then, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is the "normal mode", the "special mode including the restoration operation", and the "restoration operation". Regardless of which mode of "the mode of performing the operation of the normal mode in the subsequent manner" is executed, as long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is used. It is more desirable to make settings for each effect pattern so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) regardless of which of the effect patterns corresponding to the jackpot determination is executed at the timing Rt2a. Regardless of whether the operation is executed in the normal mode or the mode when an abnormality is determined, only after the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is used. On the other hand, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity.

Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received, at least one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. It may be possible to execute a specific movable effect. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decoration body (RTC). Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may still be in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It will not be possible to accept productions, and there is concern that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required for the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C to be completed when the sequential operation is performed in the normal mode is set as the "special time", the jackpot determination is made. Regardless of which of the effect patterns according to the above is executed, as long as neither the above "specific time" nor the "special time" elapses after the symbol change starts (the effect pattern starts). , Each effect pattern (inside operation opportunity grant timing) so that the predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive). It is desirable to make the settings related to.

When the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is restored. It is desirable to prohibit the timing Rt2 so that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

On the other hand, among the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is a specific movable decorative body (for example, a movable decorative body A having a fast operation order, a movable decorative body that takes a long time to perform a restoration operation, and the like). When an abnormal state occurs within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is prohibited, but the movable decoration different from the specific movable decoration (for example, the operation order is slow). For the movable decoration B (or the movable decoration C) or the movable decoration that takes a short time to restore, if this is in an abnormal state within the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decoration is restored. The process (restoration operation) may be performed without prohibition. For example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration body B (or the movable decoration body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decoration body A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed during the period, the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed in the normal mode.

Further, the timing at which the series of operations of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the RTC state is generated, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities with less influence on movable effects]
As described above, this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) responds to symbol fluctuations when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately and in a situation where no specific state has occurred). When the restoration operation time (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol change) arrives, it is possible to execute a process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the situation of the production, it will be a pleasure and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol change" is set as "restoration operation time corresponding to symbol change". Then, as shown in FIG. 376, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol change is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state has arrived, at least the following processes are performed in the peripheral control MPU1511a. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is changed. Processing to advance the production ・ Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol change is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change), it is specified. Processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, it is assumed that "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect progress related to the "specific effect pattern in which the specific movable ornament can be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable ornament are performed. A situation will appear in which the processes to be performed are performed in parallel.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, the effect pattern (relatively expected degree) that has a directing relationship with the specific effect pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in the effect pattern having a paired relationship (effect pattern with relatively low expectation), even though the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the effect is directed toward the specific timing tm2. It is made so that the same aspect of the effect as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (an effect pattern with a relatively high expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is performed. To. In this way, by preparing two staging patterns (a staging pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and a staging pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are in a paired staging relationship, the specific timing tm2 is reached. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having an effect of whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display as to whether or not the specific movable ornament operates). Will become feasible, and the game entertainment will be suitably maintained by such staging.

However, if there is a case where the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol change is started, the specific timing is specified. Despite the arrival of tm2, it becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where the staging operation cannot be performed. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 376, among the effect patterns, the effect progress related to "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2" and a predetermined effect for the specific movable decorative body. When a situation appears in which the process of performing the restore operation (restoration process based on the restore operation time corresponding to the symbol change) is performed in parallel, "specific timing tm2" is reached regardless of the restore status. The process of causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation "is completed. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as "a process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", but in the following explanation, "whether the abnormal state is resolved or not" It is assumed that the process of repeatedly performing the restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body until a predetermined upper limit is reached is executed.

More specifically, with regard to the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation", the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decoration is abnormal. The time required for this to be done will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decoration, "a predetermined restoration for a specific movable decoration" is performed. The timing tx at which the "processing to perform the operation" is completed also arrives at a relatively early time, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration fails and is restored (restored) As the number increases, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is postponed to a later time. And at the latest, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and has not been restored (restored) yet, but the timing tx is exceeded when the restoration operation is executed again, the specific movable decoration By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration status is terminated. Will be.

It should be noted that when it is assumed that x time is required to perform the restoration operation once for a specific movable decorative body, one symbol is established so that the relationship "x time x n times <timing tm1 to tm2 time" is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed at the stage when the upper limit number n is reached. By this method, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be completed by the time the specific timing tm2 arrives, regardless of the restoration status.

According to such a configuration, the effect progress related to the specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When a certain situation appears, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed by the time the specific timing tm2 arrives, regardless of the restoration status. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decoration is restored before the arrival of the specific timing tm2, but also when the specific movable decoration is not restored, the specific timing tm2 is specific. Since the movable decoration is stopped, it is possible to suitably maintain the effect of whether or not the specific movable decoration operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decoration is stopped at a position different from the original position, some behavior may occur when the specific timing tm2 arrives, or the movable decoration does not operate. Even so, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (when the effect operation by the movable decoration is performed, the lamp of the movable decoration emits light). ..

However, in reality, if a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoration operation while the above-mentioned predetermined effect is being performed, it has an effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the game entertainment.

As a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result hit by an attack) appears in the super reach effect, and operates if the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as "not", it is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a way that incites whether or not a specific display result appears", and a specific movable decorative body is "a thing that does not appear". When it is provided as "thing that operates based on the fact that the effect is accepted by the operation by the player (or that the effect is accepted but does not operate)", "the effect that causes a specific display that encourages the operation by the player to appear". Can be exemplified.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, the specific movable decoration recovers (restores) from the abnormal state at the timing tx when the “process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed. It is assumed that it will be in a normal state. In this way, even if the abnormal state is reached at the start of the fluctuation (or the "restoration operation time" such as when the previous symbol was stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives after the restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to produce and operate a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration cannot recover (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more accurately, the timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation time arrives. Will be. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

However, in recent years, pachinko machines are becoming equipped with movable ornaments that have a more complicated structure and perform multi-step movements, and in such movable ornaments, it takes longer to complete the restoration process. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or an effect pattern that is paired with the effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, it is within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol change to the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decorative body becomes an abnormal state, it can be restored only in a simple manner as a first aid measure, which accelerates the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. It can also be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol change is started, the main control MPU1310a side When the special effect pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, a specific movable state is performed while the special effect pattern is produced (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is performed). It is controlled so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the decoration is operated) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) and 377 (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation is started in the situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the effect progress related to the special effect pattern. And when a situation appears in which the process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is performed in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (the period until the symbol is stopped). Allows this to continue without terminating the restore process.

More specifically, in the restoration process started from the timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. Even in such a case, the restoration process is not terminated at least while a special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for a specific movable decoration body is executed for the entire period thereof.

According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration is performed, aiming at the time when the above-mentioned special effect pattern is performed. Since it will be possible to perform additional operations, etc.), this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and will be carefully restored as a player. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent production with peace of mind by watching the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern so that it can be selected only when the player loses the prize in the big hit judgment. In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as "This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while" appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) and 377 (d), the timing tm11 arrives when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and is continued even after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is terminated. With such a configuration, the restriction that "even though an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends, if the hold digestion is not interrupted and the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol change is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, the next time). The time to start the symbol change) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still being continued, it is determined that the specific movable ornament is still in an abnormal state (for example, it is not located in the original position). Will be done. Then, if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body may be newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only the restoration process can be performed, the content of the process is naturally limited, and the inability to adequately deal with the abnormality may accelerate the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. ..

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 377 (b) and 377 (d), the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. Occasionally, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) arrives, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated and this is continued in a form that straddles the next restoration operation time. .. According to such a configuration, no matter what the situation is when the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is being executed, "despite the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration". Since the restriction that "the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes are performed" is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 377 (c) and 377 (d), the new symbol variation is started as a result of the start of the new symbol variation while the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. As such, "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) to 377, the game is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the game and the situation of the effect (furthermore, the state of restoration, etc.) after the special effect pattern is completed. With respect to the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably). It is desirable to finish within a shorter time than the time until the predetermined production is performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digesting the special effect pattern), the specific movable time is relatively long until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the ornament.

If a situation appears in which the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is completed, the effect pattern is described. Do not end the restoration process within the new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and straddle the symbol variation (effect pattern) three or more times (after the restoration process is started, the one The restoration process may be continued in the form of (the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods).

In the example shown in FIG. 377, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It is supposed to be in a state. In this way, by continuing one restoration process in a way that straddles the next restoration operation period (here, the next symbol change start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made recoverable, and it becomes possible to produce a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, even though one restoration process was continued across the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time), a specific movable ornament was abnormal at timing tx. When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained until the symbol change is completed from the timing tx and the next restoration operation time is further reached. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific movable decorative body is specified each time the restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives. If the restoration process for the movable decoration is started many times, if the specific movable decoration is irreparably damaged, the specific movable decoration cannot be restored, but the specific movable decoration cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline as the restoration process for the body is repeated. Therefore, even though the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit after the specific movable decoration is put into an abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decoration) reaches the predetermined upper limit). However, when it has not been restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to start a new restoration process for a specific movable decoration even if a new restoration operation time has come.

However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit number. , When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, the special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the effect pattern thereof One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next effect pattern. That is, in this case, even though the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, the restoration operation time has not been restored from the abnormal state. Even when the +1 "th restoration operation time arrives, the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is continued without being terminated. In this way, with respect to the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation period, the predetermined upper limit number may be reached no matter how many times the restoration operation period arrives while the one restoration operation is continued. It is desirable that the count is treated as one restoration process so that it is not terminated so that the restoration process in a more full-scale manner is not hindered.

By the way, regarding such a restoration process (restoration process performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation), the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 or the back) In addition to the medium movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the same manner as described above. The door. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be operable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like) that are also used as the operating means are used. , The above-mentioned specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) may be restored (restored) in a manner different from that of the case.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation for giving an operation opportunity to give an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol change is performed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity granting effect, "a process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 341 (f))". "Process to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))", and "display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period". ) (See FIG. 341 (f)) ”is performed respectively. As a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (here, the operation of pushing it in) and the production is received, the "specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory)" is received based on the production reception. ) And the process of producing a movable decorative body on the board side (see FIG. 341 (g)) "and" the process of causing a change in the display content (see FIG. 341 (g)) ". Become. The board-side movable decorative body to be produced by this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377.

However, among such operation opportunity granting effects, the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" is not executed normally when the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state for the "process to generate the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001" and the "process to display the operation prompting". It is feasible regardless of whether it is in a certain state or in an abnormal state. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player who sees the "display prompting the operation" operates the sword decoration body 5001 and receives the effect. "Processing for producing a movable decorative body on the board side such as a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)" and "processing for causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. Not only that, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 receives an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation part operates, so that the abnormal state is obtained. Can occur in some cases.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 provided so as to be operable, a sword decorative body 5001, etc.) that is also used as an operating means is used. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377, a return process for applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position when an abnormal state occurs. The restoration process) is performed at each timing of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)" and "after the effect is received by the player in the effect pattern of the movable operation system". It is made feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body can be moved by aiming at the timing such as when the symbol change starts or stops (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing at the start and stop of the symbol change, but also a different unique timing (during the change period). Of these, the frame-side movable decoration (operation) is aimed at the timing when an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal state may be resolved). Since the process of restoring (restoring) the means) will be performed, it is expected that the return to the original position of the frame-side movable decoration (operating means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. ..

FIG. 378 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration body (operation means). be.

As shown in FIG. 378, the effect pattern of the movable operation system (the effect pattern in which the operation opportunity granting effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the period when the design is changed) is executed. It is assumed that the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operation position, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001", "a display prompting the operation (character display such as" push ", and an effect reception period". If the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player and the production is accepted (timing tm22) while the bar display indicating the remaining time of the sword is being executed, "specific decoration member SDY (sudare), etc." The process of causing the effect operation of the movable decorative body on the board side and the process of causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600 are to be performed, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 378, the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377 is operated as a board-side movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 378, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 at the timing tm22 for which the production is received, and the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (movable decorative body on the board side) and this cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration body, but an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration body. Regarding the determination to that effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the specific notification sound and display are accompanied by the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications be performed. This is a sword decoration 5001 "placed within reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if it is notified that it has become an abnormal state, repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be done by the player's hands, the specific movable decorative body is "placed out of reach of the player (game board 5)", and this has become an abnormal state. This is because, even if the notification is given, nothing can be helped as a player, and simply emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed may promote a decline in the interest of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 378, an abnormality is found in the specific movable decorative body while performing the "process for producing and operating the specific movable decorative body" based on the fact that the effect is received at the timing tm22. Although it will occur, by allowing this to be executed as usual for the "process that causes a change in the display content of the staging display device 1600", it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 378, at the timing tm23, the symbol fluctuation already in the pending state is immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is started. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 376 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol change, but the restoration operation time (here, at the start of the symbol change). ), The timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status). As described above, it is finished by (until the predetermined production is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the sword decoration body 5001 is also "specifically movable decoration" based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, when the symbol change starts). It is possible to execute a process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoration operation and at least a part of the operations in parallel so as to return the operation to the original position (giving a driving force). Moreover, the timing at which such a "process for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is also the same, regardless of the restoration situation, within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, a predetermined effect). It is made to end by (until it starts).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is resolved and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of excitement when the restoration operation and the movable staging are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 378, the timing at which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is started / ended is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is started / ended. However, only one of those timings may be the same, or any of those timings may be different.

Further, regarding the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", as described with reference to FIG. 377, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. Not only can it be continued even after the special effect pattern ends, but also the symbol fluctuations that are on hold after the special effect pattern ends are immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds). In such a situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) can be continued without being completed. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation can be performed in the same manner as this (the mode described with reference to FIG. 377). That is, in this case, also for the "process of causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation", when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it will be terminated regardless of the restoration situation between the start of the next symbol change and the elapse of the time required for the timing tm2 to arrive. Become.

In addition, after the sword decoration body 5001 is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times, and then a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed continuously. When a situation appears in which an effect pattern different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis (for example, a specific effect pattern) is executed, the special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. Form The restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 may be continued.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 are completed at the timing tx, but the restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in an abnormal state, and the specific production pattern is produced and advanced without performing the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body. Therefore, the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm24.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (returned to the normal state) by the above, the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that the fact that an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2 is itself an abnormal situation. In such an unreliable situation, even if a specific movable decorative body is used for the staging operation, there is a high possibility that it will fail. It can be said that it is desirable to do so.

Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and the abnormal state is restored again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed. That is, if the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and a notification is given each time the abnormal state is restored, it gives a misunderstanding as if the player is responsible for not eliminating the abnormal state. Since there is a possibility, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) should be performed only when the first abnormality that changes from the normal state to the abnormal state occurs to encourage the player to perform the repair work. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 378, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are subjected to the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) that arrives after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body recovers from the abnormal state. Now, while only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 378, the sword decoration body 5001 that was in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is Assuming that the production is accepted by the operation by the player, it can be expected that the abnormality generated in the sword decoration body 5001 may have been eliminated by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration body 5001 that was in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received by the player's operation, the sword decoration body 5001 is subsequently used. It is possible to apply a driving force to return it to the position (retain it in the original position). At this time, considering that the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed based on the effect reception, the period (once) in which the driving force is applied so as to return the sword ornament 5001 to the original position. (Period when the return operation is successful) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is finished (the specific movable ornament is returned to the original position). It is desirable to terminate the process before it is executed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, considering that there is a rare chance that the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by such an external force (operation by the player) has a high possibility of recovery, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to the sword decoration body (returning operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is used until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is completed. By continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (the return operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is executed again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this return processing fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decoration body 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and after that, it is assumed. , The sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both kept in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is produced and advanced, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 378, the frame-side movable decoration body (sword decoration body 5001) also used as the operation means is set for the board-side movable decoration body (specific movable decoration body). In addition to the restoration operation time (at the start of the symbol change), the restoration operation time (timing after the production is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as an operating means, is likely to be in an abnormal state due to direct contact by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, it is the original. Since a large number of opportunities for returning to the position are given and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning by using at least an external force) are used as the returning method, the abnormal state is eliminated. There is a high possibility that the game will be less enjoyable.

It should be noted that, after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received for the production by the operation by the player, the design change starts for the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position. A driving force may be applied to the sword decoration body 5001 with a content (different operation mode) different from that of the restoration process performed when the time (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the processing is to restore the sword decoration body 5001 by using an external force (operation by the player), it is necessary to perform the processing differently from the processing when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing will be executed in a simple manner so that the restoration processing is completed within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the restoration status, and if the restoration fails, it will be more serious at the next restoration operation time. It is desirable to ensure that the return processing is performed properly.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 378, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol fluctuation start time) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed for that number of times. Nevertheless, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 is not newly started. Even when the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the effect is received by the player's operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state at the timing tm25, after the effect is received, the sword decoration body 5001 is used. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the in-situ position (retain in the in-situ position). That is, as described above, the return process after the effect is received is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by an external force (operation by the player) is increasing. Therefore, even in the above-mentioned situation where recovery without external force is given up, it is desirable to execute the process without giving up. Therefore, "a process for generating an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))" and "a display prompting an operation (a character display such as" push "and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period". It is important that the process of performing the display) (see FIG. 341 (f)) ”is also performed as usual even in the above-mentioned situation where the recovery without an external force is given up.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is given a first operation opportunity to be pushed in while being positioned at the operation position (operate to a specific detection position), and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the original position, it is pushed (to a specific detection position). When the operation means is provided so as to give a second operation opportunity so as to operate), even if an effect reception occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state. The driving force to return to the original position is not given, but the driving force to return to the original position is given only when the production reception occurs at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation portion is relatively small, so it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been resolved is naturally low.

Further, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received by the player's operation is not necessarily the production reception. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been performed, and for example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 374 to 378, the symbol change start time (further, the timing after receiving the effect) is exemplified as the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change, but the restoration operation time is described. , It may be a predetermined timing that arrives on condition that the symbol change is executed at least, and may be used as at least one of the symbol change start time and the symbol change stop time, for example. When the symbol variation stop time is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is stopped, and this start. The restored process may be terminated before the timing tm2 in the specific effect pattern that has been reserved and digested arrives, or it may be executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved and digested. Each of the above-mentioned processes will be performed.

Further, the frequency of appearance of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the movement frequency of the movable decorative body is high occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as the movement frequency is high. Therefore, in the special effect state, the normal effect state is generated. It is desirable to enable the game so that the frequency of appearance of a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) or a specific movable decorative body, which is also used as an operating means, is in an abnormal state. Occasionally, when the above-mentioned special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 377, the abnormal state is maintained for a period from the start of the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol change. It is possible to continue to perform one restoration process for the movable ornaments in. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a symbol change start time) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is again performed. Since it is not started and the restoration process that is already in the execution state is continued without being terminated, it is movable different from the movable decoration that is the target of the restoration process. The problem is when to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 377, the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is a new restoration operation time (next) after the arrival of the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends. Even when straddling (the start time of the symbol change), it is continuously executed without ending. In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body other than the specific movable decorative body between the time when the timing tm11 has elapsed and the time when a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) has arrived. In the case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, "both methods 1 and 2", or "both methods 1 and 3" is adopted to restore the other movable ornament. It is desirable to execute.

Method 1: Specify at least when there is a relationship such as "a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body". When a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoration process for the movable ornament is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) ) Has arrived, and the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is newly started.

According to such method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) whose restoration process has not yet been executed, and the other movable decoration will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation time). It becomes possible to newly start the restoration process for the body (frame side movable decorative body). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are executed at the same time. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of the movable ornaments is expected.

Method 2: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as a board-side movable decoration", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is not started at that time, and a specific restoration process is performed. After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decoration to be completed, another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

According to such method 2, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration body (frame side movable decoration body) whose restoration process has not yet been executed. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decoration body (frame side movable decoration body), we waited for one restoration process for a specific movable decoration body to be completed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of those movable ornaments is expected.

Method 3: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as a board-side movable decoration", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for a specific movable decoration is not executed, but another movable decoration (frame side movable) is triggered by the restoration operation time that arrives after waiting for the restoration processing for a specific movable decoration to be completed. The restoration process for the decoration) is newly started.

According to such method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration that is not in the execution state yet. It will be treated as invalid for any of the restoration processing for, and unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration, the said No processing will be executed for the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes an abnormal state while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is in the execution state, those movable decorations can be carefully restored one by one. By making it possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, it is expected that the rate of deterioration of these movable decorative bodies will be suppressed.

(Operation button operation check period)
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), the operation buttons 410 and the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) can be operated as an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a. As described above, it is possible to perform an operation-time effect using a drive-type operation means (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for giving a privilege by driving as well as the operation). However, although it is possible to execute such an operation-time effect, if some abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the player can experience the operation-time effect in the manner intended by the designer. There is a concern that it will be difficult to make it, and as a result, it will lead to a decline in the entertainment interest. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, as a part of maintenance regarding whether or not the effect during operation can be executed, an operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period) described later is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is confirmed that the player can experience the operation-time effect of the mode intended by the designer, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Specifically, the operation confirmation period during which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. 379. Hereinafter, for convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described, but the same operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000. The operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decoration body 5001 may be generated in parallel or sequentially. Further, in order to realize more reliable confirmation work for each member, no overlapping period is provided between the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decoration body 5001 (avoid overlapping periods). It is preferable to generate them sequentially. FIG. 379 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period).

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the staging operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the staging operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this happens, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The staging operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state, and when the operation button 410 is projected, a predetermined protrusion is provided. If the operation to return to the normal state is not performed until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is normally operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, if the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state, and in such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, if the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a protruding state. In such a case, the protrusion position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. By such detection of the press detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state and that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state. ..

Further, as the effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or repeatedly hit according to the instruction. The pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state, and the effect is changed. By pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 379, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the operation confirmation period, the operator (player or hall) confirms whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in a state of protruding from the normal state. It can be realized at the discretion of the administrator). Specifically, when the condition for generating the operation confirmation period described later is satisfied, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is started, and the operation button 410 is in a normal state for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this embodiment) which is the occurrence period. When the press detection status (operation detection status) is monitored and the press (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 is projected based on the press detection (operation detection). Change to. On the other hand, even after the condition for generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period was satisfied (while generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period), the pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state for a predetermined time was not detected. In that case, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated when the predetermined time elapses. According to this, for a player or a hall manager who wants to confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, the operation button 410 may be pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and by pressing the operation button 410, the operation button 410 may be pressed. It is possible to give confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, and to execute and provide the operation-time effect using the operation button 410 with peace of mind.

Then, after the operation button 410 is pressed to bring it into a protruding state, and then the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed before the predetermined time elapses, and it is detected that the operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state. To return to the normal state again, the arbitrary operation confirmation period ends after the lapse of a predetermined time. On the other hand, if the pressing of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state by driving after the elapse of the predetermined time. Will be returned. After the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated, the operation button 410 is pressed to make it in a protruding state, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated. In such a case, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary time from occurring until a predetermined time elapses after confirming that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated.

The above-mentioned operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) is generated when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, the condition for generating the operation confirmation period is configured so that the condition for generating the demo effect is satisfied in order to avoid duplication with the effect during operation. Specifically, in the demo effect, there is no entry into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain period of time after the effect set in the variation pattern is completed, and the effect set in the variation pattern is It is an effect of waiting for customers when it is not started (information on the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU1310a is not received on the peripheral control MPU1511a side for a certain period of time), and is suitable for avoiding duplication with the operation operation effect. In this way, by using the execution time of the demo effect to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period in the confirmation operation period, the boring time that the effect set in the fluctuation pattern is not started can be set to the operation button 410. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time of whether or not is detected and operated normally.

The start of the demonstration effect is an instruction by the main control MPU1310a (for example, a demo effect) when the ball has not entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain period of time while the symbol game is not in progress. The start command) may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU1511a side, and the confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) may be generated on the peripheral control MPU1511a side by receiving the transmission. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an instruction by the main control MPU1310a (for example, a command to start the demonstration effect) is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU1511a side, and by receiving the instruction, the peripheral control MPU1511a side confirms the operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation). Period) may be generated, thereby avoiding duplication with the operation-time effect, and confirming whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. It is possible to execute and provide an operation-time effect using the operation button 410 with greater peace of mind.

Further, LEDs (LEDs of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button) are mounted on the operation button 410, and whether or not an arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and the progress stage of the arbitrary operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period). The light emitting mode is changed in a plurality of stages according to the state of the operation button 410 in the above. Specifically, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. Then, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is lit with a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined amount of light (a light emission mode A for the confirmation period suggesting that the arbitrary operation is possible). ) To emit light. As a result, it is possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and that the operation button 410 is requested to be pressed. Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed to make it protrude after the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is the same color as the case where the operation button 410 is not pressed even once. However, the light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is increased by one step (light emission mode B for a confirmation period suggesting that an arbitrary operation is in progress). As a result, even after the operation button 410 is pressed to bring it into a protruding state, it is possible to notify the outside that the operation button 410 is further requested to be pressed. After that, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are pressed once at least until the remaining arbitrary operation confirmation period (predetermined time) elapses. Although the color is the same as when the button is not pressed, the light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is weaker than that of the above-mentioned light emitting modes A and B for the confirmation period (light emitting mode C for the confirmation period suggesting that the arbitrary operation has been completed). As a result, it is possible to notify the outside that the confirmation work in the arbitrary operation confirmation period has been normally performed. Even when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the operation button 410 may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode, and for example, the operation button 410 may be made to emit light in a mode different from any of the light emission modes A to C for the operation confirmation period. Such things can be exemplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 379, after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the end of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing, and the operation button 410 is in the normal position. There is an automatic operation confirmation period for confirming the origin so that it is located at. During the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated so as to move up and down several times near the normal state, and the normal position sensor can detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set to a protruding state, and the operation button 410 is operated so as to return to the normal state from the protruding state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in the normal state by the normal position sensor, it is possible to grasp that the operation button 410 is operating in the normal position. According to this, it is possible to ensure that the operation button 410 operates at a normal position, and it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from being displaced when the effect is executed using the operation button 410.

Further, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to be longer than the automatic operation confirmation period. Specifically, while the predetermined operation confirmation period of "10 seconds" is set as described above, the automatic operation confirmation period is a short time of "5 seconds" as the time required for a series of operations. Is set. During the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 operates regardless of the player's pressing to confirm the origin, in other words, the operation confirmation of the drive system proceeds automatically. On the other hand, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period, if the player does not press the operation button 410 in the normal state, the operation button 410 does not change to the protruding state, and if the player does not press the operation button 410 in the protruding state, the operation button 410 does not change to the protruding state. The protruding state is maintained until the arbitrary operation confirmation period elapses. Therefore, by making the arbitrary operation confirmation period longer than the automatic operation period, the operation button 410 will not be missed, and the appearance of the operation button 410 in the protruding state will be changed by driving. While it is possible to have players and hall managers carefully check for a long period of time in the absence of such a situation, it is possible to quickly end the operation check (automatic operation period) of the drive system, which does not require such long-term check. It is possible, and the efficiency of a series of confirmation work of the driven operation means can be improved.

In the waiting period between the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the automatic operation confirmation period, the frame side lens 417 or the second frame side lens 417 provided on the peripheral edge of the operation button 410 is operated by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332. A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (LEDs of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423) is lit. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and the player's operation can be accepted at the time of presenting the effect. Further, during the peripheral confirmation period, when either the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 or the second button decoration portion 411b is lit, but any of them is pressed. Depending on the situation, the mode in which the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b are lit (for example, the mode of light emission such as brightness and color) is different. Therefore, during the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pressing is normally recognized, and the frame side lens 417 and the first. It is possible to confirm whether or not the two-button decoration part 411b lights up normally, and the drive-type operation means itself is confirmed by a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period). Not only that, it is also possible to check the related members around it.

Further, if the operation button 410 is not pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the state is not projected, the peripheral confirmation period may not be provided after that. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b do not light up, and the series of operation confirmation periods is shortened. It becomes.

Further, prior to the series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm vibration whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the staging operation unit 400 operates by operating the operation button 410. There is. During the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the staging operation unit 400 vibrates. Therefore, during the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 operates and the staging operation unit 400 vibrates normally. In addition, by generating a series of operation confirmation periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration confirmation period from hindering the confirmation of the series of operation confirmation periods, and various confirmation operations can be performed efficiently. realizable.

Further, when the predetermined protrusion start condition that is satisfied in the progress process of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state, but due to some abnormality, the operation button 410 is moved by the normal position sensor. The operation button 410 may not be in the normal position because it has not been detected as a normal state. The cause is, for example, when a problem occurs when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state when a predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, or the player does not intentionally return the operation button 410 to the normal state. It is possible that this is the case. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 380 (A), except for a series of operation confirmation periods, a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game at the start of fluctuation (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) and a special corresponding to the end of the symbol game. Whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the end of the fluctuation of the symbol (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern) and at the timing of the start of the above-mentioned demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods). If it is determined whether or not it is in the normal position (whether it is not in the normal position) and it is determined that it is in an abnormally protruding state (not in the normal position), control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Will be. According to this, even when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing unrelated to the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern. It prevents the misunderstanding that the operation button 410 may have operated as a part of the production based on the above. Further, even if an effect using the operation button 410 is performed after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, it is guaranteed that the operation button 410 operates normally, and the effect is reduced. It prevents you from doing so.

If it is set to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period in the confirmation operation period by using the execution time of the demo effect as described above, the operation button 410 is abnormal when the demo effect is started. When the operation button 410 is in a protruding state and control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state (control for returning to a normal position) is performed, the start of a series of operation confirmation periods may be delayed. For example, if the operation button 410 is abnormally protruding at the timing at the start of the demo effect (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), the operation confirmation period is even at the start timing of the series of operation confirmation periods. When the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is given priority, and the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (when the operation button 410 returns to the normal position). In addition, based on this, the entire series of operation check periods may be started with a delay.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 380 (B), in a series of operation confirmation periods, it corresponds to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) and the end of the symbol game. At the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol (at the end of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), it is not determined whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether it is not in the normal position), and it is abnormal. Even in the case of the protruding state (not the normal position), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed at that time. This is to give priority to the operation confirmation as to whether or not the operation button 410 is pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period to cause a protruding state, and the operation button arbitrarily generated during the arbitrary operation confirmation period is particularly given. This is to maintain the protruding state of 410 so as not to be terminated by the progress of the symbol game. In this way, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded during the operation check period, the operation is performed at the end of the operation check period, as in the case where the player presses and the operation button 410 is pushed out. Control is performed to return the button 410. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state before the predetermined period as the operation confirmation period elapses, the abnormality does not have to wait for the predetermined period to elapse. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is to be returned to the normal state.

(Anomaly detection of sword decoration)
Next, although the sword blade portion 5011 (see FIGS. 278 to 281) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the above-mentioned sword effect operation unit 5000 should be in the sword-delivered state, the abnormality is not in the sword-delivered state. The detection will be described with reference to FIG. 381. FIG. 381 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword decoration body 5001 and the abnormality detection.

The sword decoration body 5001 can be changed into a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed and a sword-drawn state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is exposed (second sword-drawn state). In the above-mentioned production example, the state between the sword-delivered state and the sword-drawn state (first sword-drawn state) was used as the effect using the sword decoration body 5001, but in this example, such a state is used. It will not be used. The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sword delivery position sensor capable of detecting that the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state and a sword removal position sensor capable of detecting that the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state. ing. Further, the sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the sword blade portion 5011 from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state. In this example, the sword-delivered state corresponds to the operable state in which the player can pull out the blade portion 5011, and the sword-drawn state corresponds to the inoperable state in which the player cannot pull out the sword blade portion 5011. ..

Further, as an effect set for the variable pattern, an effect using the sword decorative body 5011 is set. As shown in FIG. 381 (A), in the production using the sword decoration body 5001, an operation acceptance period in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state can be pulled out is generated within the production time. During the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 in the sword-delivered state is set to the sword-pulled state according to the instruction in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, the display of "sword-pulling"). You can get the result. Then, when the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001 and puts the sword blade portion 5011 in the sword-drawn state within the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword-delivered state is controlled at the end of the production time. Will be done. If the player does not pull out the sword decoration body 5001 during the operation acceptance period and the sword blade portion 5011 is left in the sword-delivered state, the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation acceptance period. To hold. It should be noted that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation buttons 410 described above. There is. That is, when the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 can be pulled out with higher expectation than when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 381 (B), the blade portion 5011 should be in the sword-delivered state except during the operation acceptance period, but the period other than the operation acceptance period and not in the sword-delivered state is a predetermined period (in this example). When it is determined that the sword decoration body 5001 has reached an abnormality (2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword-pulled state or in the state between the sword-drawn state and the sword-delivered state other than the operation acceptance period. It has become. In this example, from the time when the detection state of the above-mentioned sword delivery position sensor is in the OFF state (the state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is not in the sword delivery state), the above-mentioned predetermined period (the sword delivery state other than the operation acceptance period) is reached. The measurement is to be started.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 381 (C), during the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 should be in the sword-delivered state unless the player pulls out the sword ornament 5001. When it is determined that the predetermined period (2 seconds in this example) has been reached, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed. It will be done. That is, during the operation acceptance period, when the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001, the sword blade portion 5011 is located in the sword pulling state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001, and in this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword delivery position sensor is in the ON state (the state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state). .. In this example, the processing time for one cycle for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery restoration control is set to "0.5 seconds".

Further, the operation acceptance period is set to be longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 (4 seconds in this example). During the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, the sword delivery restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed, but the operation reception is performed after returning to the sword delivery state. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and in the remaining period, the player can pull out the sword ornament 5001. Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pulling out the sword decoration body 5001 from being hindered.

As described above, the determination of whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position) is made at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern). At the start of the effect), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the variation pattern), and at the timing of the start of the above-mentioned demo effect. That is, during the operation acceptance period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position). Not. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 is also performed during the operation acceptance period in which the sword decoration body 5001 can be pulled out. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player cannot pull out the sword decoration body 5001 as much as possible. Further, the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is said to have a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410. , It is possible to prevent overlooking the production result in such a highly expected production.

In this example, the period during which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword-delivered state reaches a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), except when the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, but it is said that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 only when the blade part 5011 is not in the sword delivery state at the start of the operation acceptance period. You may decide. For example, the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword-delivered state at the start of the operation acceptance period, and after the start of the operation acceptance period, it is not known whether the player should completely remove the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword blade portion 5011 is removed. There is a possibility that the sword is left in a state between the state and the sword delivery state for a predetermined period, but in such a case, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. ..

In addition, when instructing the sword removal of the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 or the like, the instruction is continued regardless of the occurrence or elimination of the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001 during the operation acceptance period. You may want to do it. For example, during the operation acceptance period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed, but the "sword restoration control is completed". The instruction in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 or the like is continued even during "until the process" and "the remaining period of the operation acceptance period after the blade portion 5011 is returned to the sword delivery state". In addition, if the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001 according to the instruction "until the sword restoration control is completed", the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword-drawing state, and the sword is restored. The control is forcibly terminated and the instruction is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timing of participation in the effect of pulling out the sword decoration body 5001 from being hindered by the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001.

Further, although the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade 5011 to the sword delivery state was performed in this example, it is possible that the sword blade portion 5011 cannot be returned to the sword delivery state due to the catching of a foreign object or the like. In this case, one cycle of sword restoration control, which should be completed in "0.5 seconds", may be repeated for a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state will continue beyond the operation acceptance period, but in such a case, the operation is performed while the sword restoration control is being performed. The result effect may be derived at the end of the reception period, and the sword restoration control may be continued even after the result effect is derived. As a result, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be resolved, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the game entertainment is deteriorated without hindering the progress of the production.

(Abnormality judgment timing of operation buttons)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the staging operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 382. FIG. 382 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the operation button 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body that the player cannot operate.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is in a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And, it is possible to change to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this happens, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The staging operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 382 (A), at the start of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the variation pattern), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (variation pattern). At the timing of the start of the above-mentioned demo production, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state without satisfying the predetermined protrusion start condition. It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position), and when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (not in the normal position), the operation button 410 is determined. Is controlled to return to the normal state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, it is returned to the normal state at least when the special symbol starts to change, so that the operation button 410 is used as an effect based on the variation pattern. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being hindered when the operation button 410 is pressed.

In the game board 5, around the game board side effect display device 1600, there are a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom. A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable staging unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) that stands by around the game side effect display device 1600 and a game side effect display device. It is possible to change to the operating state (display position) displayed on the front surface of the display area of 1600. Further, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

In addition, the movable decorative body is not included in the back-bottom-back movable production unit 3100, the back-up left movable production unit 3200, the back-up left movable production unit 3300, the back-up middle movable production unit 3400, and the back-bottom front movable production unit 3500. A standby position sensor that can detect that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable production unit 3500. A drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for operating between the operation state and the operation state is provided.

As shown in FIG. 382 (B), at the start of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the variation pattern), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (variation pattern). (At the end of the production based on If it is determined whether the movable decoration is in the non-operating state (whether it is in the normal position) and it is determined that it is not in the non-operating state (it is not in the normal position), it is said that an abnormality has occurred. Judgment is made and control is performed to return the movable decoration to the non-operating state. In this way, when the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is returned to the non-operating state at least at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. When this is performed, the movable decorative body does not move, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the production from being lost. Further, if the movable decorative body remains positioned in front of the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality during the execution of the effect based on the variation pattern, the visual recognition of the display area is hindered. However, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation by returning to the non-operating state at least at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and the player can hinder the change to the normal state or the protruding state at the timing of controlling the state, whereas the movable decorative body is a movable decoration. It is a member that the player cannot touch, and the player cannot hinder the change to the non-operating state or the operating state at the timing of controlling the non-operating state or the operating state. Therefore, the operation button 410 is more likely to have an abnormality than the movable decorative body. In this respect, the operation button 410 has more chances of abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body, so that even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it can be performed at an early stage. It is possible to return to the normal position. Therefore, although there is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur in the operation button 410, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the fluctuation pattern. It can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, as the effect set in the variable pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and an effect using the movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. Therefore, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, the operation button 410 may have a problem at the timing of controlling the operation button 410 to a normal state or a protruding state. There is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more opportunities for abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body. Therefore, although the operation button 410 is frequently used, when the operation button 410 is used as an effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the occurrence of an abnormality hinders participation in the effect. Can be prevented.

(Abnormal occurrence of operation buttons during operation)
Next, an operation-time effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384. FIG. 383 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation time effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and FIG. 384 is the operation time effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button 410 in.

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the staging operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the staging operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this happens, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The staging operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state, and when the operation button 410 is projected, a predetermined protrusion is provided. If the operation to return to the normal state is not performed until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is normally operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, if the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state, and in such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, if the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a protruding state. In such a case, the protrusion position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. By such detection of the press detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state and that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state. ..

Further, as the effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

First, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation acceptance period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated, but the operation acceptance period is generated. At the start, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether or not it is in the normal state. Then, as shown in FIG. 383 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button in the normal state is determined. Change 410 to a protruding state. Further, during the operation acceptance period, as the instruction effect A at the time of the projecting operation instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the projecting state, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, projecting). A display that imitates the operation button 410 in the state, a message display of "press the protruding operation button!", And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, the voice of "press the protruding operation button!") Are combined.

In the above-mentioned operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. As described above, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Will be done. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the above-mentioned instruction effect A at the time of the protrusion operation may be terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 383 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state. Further, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation is performed during the operation acceptance period at the same timing as when the abnormality has not occurred. The instruction effect B at the time of this protrusion operation informs the player that the position is equivalent to the normal protrusion although it is an abnormal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. (For example, a display that imitates the operation button 410 in a protruding state, a message display that says "This is a real protrusion! Push the operation button without worrying about it!"), Or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example). , "This is a real protrusion! Push the operation button without worrying about it!") Is combined. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation of changing the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is not performed, so that the operation is changed to the normal state. It is not possible to recognize whether the effect using a certain operation button 410 is being performed or the effect is being performed using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, and the operation is in a protruding state. There is a risk that the player will hesitate to operate the button 410. However, by displaying in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 and performing the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation by the voice from the speaker, the operation button 410 that is at least in a protruding state from the display or the voice is pressed. It is possible to recognize that the effect used is being performed. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the degree of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. It should be noted that the instruction effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those composed of different production contents as described above, and the player is informed that the instruction effects A and B are positioned at the same level as the regular protrusions although they are abnormal protrusions. If this is possible, the instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect content.

Further, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is not pressed to the normal state during the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is normally pressed at the end of the operation reception period. Control is performed to return to the state. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the above-mentioned instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation may be terminated.

Next, when the effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation acceptance period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated, but the operation acceptance period is generated. At the start of, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether or not it is in the normal state. Then, as shown in FIG. 384 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. To maintain. Further, during the operation acceptance period, as the instruction effect C at the time of normal operation instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the normal state, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal operation). A combination of a display that imitates the operation button 410 in the state, a message display of "press the operation button!", And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, the voice of "press the operation button!"). Will be. Further, during the operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the above-mentioned instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation may be terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state. Further, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the above-mentioned instruction effect D during normal operation is performed during the operation acceptance period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. This instruction effect D for normal operation informs the player that the current protrusion is not in the same position as the normal protrusion, and for example, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 ( For example, a display that imitates the operation button 410 in the normal state, a message display of "This protrusion is irrelevant, but press the operation button!", And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, "This protrusion is irrelevant"). Press the operation button! ”, Etc.) are combined. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation occurs in which the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, but the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 occurs. In addition, by performing the instruction effect during normal operation by the voice from the speaker, it is possible to recognize from the display and voice that the effect using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed. .. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the above-mentioned instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation may be terminated. It should be noted that the instruction effects C and D during normal operation are not limited to those composed of different effect contents as described above, and it is possible to inform the player that the current protrusion is not in the same position as the regular protrusion. If this is the case, the instruction effects C and D during normal operation may be configured with the same effect content.

Further, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike the time of executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation is performed. The button 410 is not locked to the locking mechanism, and its abnormally protruding state is maintained. Further, even at the end of the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, when the effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed within the operation acceptance period. When pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism and returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period. It is not locked by the mechanism and its abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, is the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state performed from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state? , It is not possible to recognize whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is being performed, but it will eventually return to the normal state when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed. It is possible to recognize whether or not the production of is being performed.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in an abnormally protruding state other than the operation acceptance period is used in the same manner as the operation acceptance period when the effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed to a normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as will be described later, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), the symbol game At the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the variation pattern), the operation button 410 is controlled to return to the normal state at the timing of the start of the above-mentioned demo effect.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the above-mentioned instruction effect during the normal operation is performed during the operation acceptance period when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed. However, it is possible not to perform such an instruction effect at the time of normal operation. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is a production with a lower expectation than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, so that the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed. This is because even if the degree of expectation for the production cannot be confirmed by not being used, the player hardly suffers any disadvantage.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is in a normal state during the operation acceptance period when the effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. When pressed to, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. However, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism. It may be prevented from being locked to the abnormally protruding state. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the abnormal protrusion is performed regardless of whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state or the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 in the pressed state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not return to the normal state. This is because an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, such as when the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred, so that such an actor can be treated. It can be alerted.

(Notification when an error occurs in the operation button)
Next, a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 385. FIG. 385 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is in a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And, it is possible to change to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this happens, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The staging operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 385 (A), when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation acceptance period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. However, at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. Then, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, but the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. Dont return. In such a case, the operation button 410 is abnormally projected, but at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Even if the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Will be done.

Further, even if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation acceptance period, the normal operation button 410 is also performed. It does not return to the state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the end of the operation acceptance period, as will be described later, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern). At the start of the production), at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the start of the above-mentioned demo production (timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods) Then, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

As described above, if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation acceptance period. Will be done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed as described later. That is, during the operation acceptance period, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and there is a high possibility that it is not the intention of the player, so that the operation button 410 has an abnormality. We are trying to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making what has happened noticeable.

On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 other than the operation reception period, the response is different from the case where the operation button 410 has an abnormality in the operation reception period. For example, other than the operation acceptance period, when the above-mentioned demo effect is executed, the above-mentioned automatic operation confirmation period is also provided, and during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing. , The origin is confirmed so that the operation button 410 is located at the normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 385 (B), during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is first operated so as to move up and down several times near the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is moved. The origin is confirmed by the normal position sensor so that it can be detected as being in the normal position. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is brought into a protruding state, and the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism by operating so as to return from the protruding state to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is operated to return to the normal state within the automatic operation confirmation period, but the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, It does not return to the normal state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to the normal state, the abnormally protruding operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. Control is repeated. Then, if the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state at the time when the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (five times in this example), the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state. The automatic operation confirmation period ends, and after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period and the abnormality continues after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, a symbol such as after the above-mentioned operation acceptance period ends. At the start of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (at the start of the effect based on the variation pattern), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the variation pattern), the demo effect At the start timing (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is performed. Specifically, notification by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, display of "an abnormality has occurred in the operation button") and blinking of the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4. (For example, the lamp / LED blinks more violently than during normal production) to appeal to the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410.

As described above, if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period is performed. Not done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is performed. That is, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred due to the player operating the operation button 410 even though the operation of the operation button 410 is not required except during the operation confirmation period. Since it is highly possible that the player is intentional, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred, and attention is given to such an actor.

In this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is to be performed. You may do it. However, in such a case, it is preferable to suppress the degree of appeal to the outside during the automatic operation confirmation period, rather than the effect of notifying when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. As a result, even after the end of the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not hindered, and the effect related to the progress of the game (the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) can be focused on. can.

(Confirmation effect when an abnormality occurs in a movable decorative body)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 386. FIG. 386 is a time chart showing the flow of the effect when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

In the game board 5, around the game board side effect display device 1600, the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable staging unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) that stands by around the game side effect display device 1600 and a game side effect display device. It is possible to change to the operating state (display position) displayed on the front surface of the display area of 1600. Further, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

In addition, the movable decorative body is not included in the back-bottom-back movable production unit 3100, the back-up left movable production unit 3200, the back-up left movable production unit 3300, the back-up middle movable production unit 3400, and the back-bottom front movable production unit 3500. A standby position sensor that can detect that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable production unit 3500. A drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for operating between the operation state and the operation state is provided.

As shown in FIG. 386, at the start of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the variation pattern), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern). At the timing at the start of the above-mentioned demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), the movable decoration should be located in the non-operation state without satisfying the predetermined operation start condition. However, at those timings, it was determined whether or not the movable decoration was in the non-operating state (whether or not it was in the normal position), and it was determined that it was not in the non-operating state (not in the normal position). In that case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state.

However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, if the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state even though the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed, the movable decorative body is movable. An effect is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body. Specifically, the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the displayed contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image that have been displayed are changed to non-display. In addition, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 is violently blinked. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, it is appealed to the outside that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body.

In addition, when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, in addition to the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, it is confirmed whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. A confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600, a display such as "Please press the operation button to end the abnormality notification and continue the game" is displayed. Then, unless the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but also the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image are left hidden in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. , The lighting of the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 and the sound from the speaker are prevented from being produced according to the display contents.

On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. To end. Then, after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. Then, the display contents such as lighting of the lamps / LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and the sound from the speaker will be performed. For example, when the effect of operating the movable decorative body is performed after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, the display of the display area, the lamp, and the lamp are compared with the case where no abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body. Although there is no change in the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker, the movable decoration does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decoration. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, a confirmation effect is performed, and the game is advanced after recognizing that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the movable decorative body not operating. In addition, not only when the movable decorative body in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state, but also when an abnormality such as the movable decorative body stops operating from the non-operating state occurs, the same confirmation effect is performed. It has been.

In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that the movable decorative body can be operated by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the operation is performed during the operation acceptance period (the period during which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed) in the effect using the operation button 410. Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decoration does not operate from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be pressed by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect used is performed, it is possible to recognize that the movable decorative body does not operate.

In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that can derive a predetermined effect result without operating the movable decorative body by pressing the operation button 410 is also performed. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration as described above, the display in the display area, the lighting of the lamp / LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected, so that the movable decoration can operate. If there is no effect, the same effect as when no abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is used. There is an effect to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the game and a confirmation effect to confirm whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. It may be possible to perform various effects. In such a case, control is performed to return the movable decoration to the non-operating state after the start of the confirmation effect. For example, if the movable decoration returns to the non-operating state during the execution of the confirmation effect, The confirmation effect may be terminated even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Interference avoidance operation of multiple movable bodies)
Next, an interference avoidance operation when an abnormality occurs in any one of a plurality of movable bodies in a state where they can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. 387. FIG. 387 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the operation button cover 419 and the operating state of the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period. In this example, in the staging operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated. The case where it is possible will be described.

The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is sealed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to the exposed open state. The staging operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the operation button cover 419 from the open state to the closed state.

Like the operation buttons 410 other than this example, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the staging operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the staging operation unit 400. It has become. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this happens, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The staging operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

Further, as an effect set for the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 is set. As shown in FIG. 387 (A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation acceptance period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation acceptance period occurs, the operation acceptance period is generated. The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. When it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. During the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state according to an instruction.

If the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the normal state is restored, but the operation button 410 in the protruding state is in the normal state. If it is not pressed until, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state at the end of the operation acceptance period. Further, at the end of the operation acceptance period, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is in a protruding state, and the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is opened, there may be a problem that the operation button cover 419 stops between the closed state and the open state. That is, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a relationship of interfering with each other if they operate at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to be in a protruding state without the operation button cover 419 being opened, the operation button 410 to be projected and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other, and the operation button Further problems may occur between the 410 and the operation button cover 419. Therefore, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control is performed to avoid the interference so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 387 (B), when the operation acceptance period occurs, the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is controlled to be in the open state, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control is performed. If it is determined that there is no such condition, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and control is not performed to make the operation button 410 in the normal state protrude (control to make the operation button 410 protrude). Is prohibited). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 from interfering with each other when the operation button cover 419 is not opened. Even if the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation acceptance period occurs, unless the operation button cover 419 is in the open state at the time when the operation acceptance period occurs. Does not control the operation button 410 in the normal state to be in a protruding state (prohibits the control to make the operation button 410 in a protruding state).

In addition, when the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state at the time of the operation acceptance period, but then the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger touch. , It is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been resolved, the operation button 410 is allowed to be in a protruding state, and the operation button 410 in a normal state is controlled to be in a protruding state. In this way, even though the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a situation of interference, when the interference situation is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is brought into a protruding state. Therefore, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in a protruding state during the remaining period of the operation acceptance period. Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of the operation acceptance period, the player presses the operation button 410 in a protruding state by the player's self-help effort. It is possible to prevent participation from being hindered. After pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state, the operation button cover 419 is returned to the normal state, and then the operation is performed. It prevents the situation where the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other from occurring again.

If the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of the operation acceptance period, but the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger touch, it is normal. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is in the protruding state, but if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are sequentially displayed at the end of the operation acceptance period. The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state, and after that, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, the operation button in the open state is set. Control is performed to return the cover 419 to the closed state. This prevents the situation where the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other from occurring again later.

On the other hand, if the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of the operation acceptance period and the player is left in that state after that, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not in the protruding state. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state. Further, at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is resolved, and later, the operation button 410 is performed. It prevents the situation where the operation button cover 419 interferes with the operation button cover 419.

(Operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation buttons according to the game status)
Next, the operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a time chart showing an operating state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-time saving state and the time saving state. In this example, in the staging operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated. The case where it is possible will be described.

The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is sealed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to the exposed open state. The staging operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the operation button cover 419 from the open state to the closed state.

Like the operation buttons 410 other than this example, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the staging operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the staging operation unit 400. It has become. The staging operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so that it does not protrude in the non-time saving state (normal state), and is in the normal state, whereas in the time saving state, the lock mechanism is locked. The operation button 410 is positioned in a protruding state due to the detachment and the spring mechanism. The staging operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

In this example, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state can be performed. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation acceptance period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and the operation in the closed state occurs when the operation acceptance period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in the normal state. Then, during the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction. At the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

Further, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation acceptance period. However, as shown in FIG. 388 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, only the control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed. Is done. Further, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is the same as in this example, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts to change (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), and when the special symbol corresponds to the end of the symbol game. At the end of the fluctuation (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), it is the timing at the start of the above-mentioned demo production.

On the other hand, in the time saving state, it is possible to perform an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation acceptance period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation acceptance period occurs, the effect is in the protruding state. By pressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained. As long as the time is shortened, even if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state, it will not be locked by the lock mechanism and the operation button 410 will be returned to the protruding state. Become.

Further, in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 should be in the open state and the operation button 410 should be in the protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 388 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the operation button cover 419 in the closed state to the open state, control is performed to return the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is controlled. Only done.

As described above, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state, whereas in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. At the same time, the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state, but any one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 is used. When an abnormality occurs as described above, the operation button is used to perform an effect using the operation button 410 at a position corresponding to the game state by changing the position of the return destination of the member in which the abnormality has occurred. It is possible to prevent the participation in the production of operating the 410 from being hindered.

[18. Staging control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by sound output, lighting / blinking of lamps, display of images, etc., and various elaborate effects are being attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control device, based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes the effect according to the game state of the game. do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to perform a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313649 discloses a control technique for realizing various effects displays by using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which the symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially defined in chronological order. By preparing a control process that realizes a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying specified symbols according to this scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of staging displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. It is also possible to include the BGM designation in the scenario data. In this case, by outputting the designated BGM by the sound source IC, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to the display screen.

However, in gaming machines, more elaborate production is required. With the above-mentioned conventional technique, it has been difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as audio output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, it was not possible to change the BGM while executing the image display according to the scenario data. Further, when the sound effect was output in response to the user's operation in the middle of the image display, the image display and the BGM output were stopped and the sound effect was output. When the output of the sound effect was completed, the BGM and the image display were restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM was played, which gave a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamp is controlled by an individual program according to the game state, regardless of the content of the image display, and it is difficult to realize a wide variety of lighting and blinking linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes the effect of the game. In the present embodiment, each configuration for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but it may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the staging control in the present embodiment will be described, and then the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and outline of each function]
FIG. 389 is a functional block diagram illustrating a configuration and an outline of a function for executing the effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. It is equipped with 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives the input of the main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines the block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, layers are set for each effect category such as a background and a character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are superimposed and displayed to display an image on a liquid crystal display device. Is output. As a result, for example, if only the background is different and the display (operation) of the character is the same, it is possible to standardize the layers for displaying the character. As a result, the capacity of the staging data (scheduler data) can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying the effect for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires the effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions in the order in which they should be executed, among a plurality of processes requested according to the staging device, in order to control the staging in each staging device. It is data. The effect block data includes "liquid crystal display block data" for executing an effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal symbol block data" for variable display of the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, and sound (sound). There are three types, "sub-effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes the scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each effect device is called, and the effect device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

The output module unit 5080 receives the effect device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits the effect device drive data to each effect device based on the effect device control information. Each effect device operates based on the effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the effect control unit 5020 is configured by software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by. It should be noted that the staging control unit 5020 may be configured by another arithmetic circuit and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Subsequently, the details of the configuration of the module or the like that realizes each of the above-mentioned functions will be described. FIG. 390 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a module or the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all of the configuration may be configured as hardware.

In the present embodiment, the system module 5100 for driving each staging device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules related to the effect. Further, the staging control unit 5020 for creating the staging device control information for driving each staging device based on the main command is included.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is information in one set of 3 bytes, and is a command status value, a command mode value, a command status and a check sum value of the mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times of 8 bits each. This signal is received by the main command buffer 5110 that is output, the checksum value is evaluated, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, the received command is discarded and the command is correct. If it is determined, it is handed over to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information indicating the content related to the effect among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the main command can include whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting winning opening, the result of the special figure lottery, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the like. Further, when the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the sensor output such as opening the door, the operation of the start lever and the stop button, the rotation and stop of the reel, the success or failure of the combination at the time of stop, and the like can be mentioned. The commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the content of the production.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is related to the effect. If it is determined to be a command related to the production, it is handed over to the production control unit 5020.

The staging control unit 5020 specifies a layer to be staging controlled from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 determines the control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub-effect block control unit 5320 determines the control information for executing the sound output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, the operation of the accessory, and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as a background and a character, and a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. included.

The liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds), which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and generate a liquid crystal display list command by the liquid crystal module 5400. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

The sound source built-in VDP1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated, for example, by expanding the character data specified by the liquid crystal display list command to the specified position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes the sub-effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub-effect block data is block data for executing each effect of the lamp, sound, and motor, and includes one or a plurality of sub-effect scheduler data. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs the operation defined in the sub-effect scheduler data in advance.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of the various effect devices, and executes the sub-effect scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices includes a sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at 1 frame intervals and a sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect device at 1 millisecond intervals. included. In this way, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the operation of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it is possible to quickly respond to a problem in the operation of the accessory.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, as an example, three types of effect control such as sound output, lamp lighting / blinking, and accessory operation are performed. explain. The staging control by the sub-staging 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub-staging 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described as being the same except for the execution cycle without any particular distinction. Hereinafter, the outline of the control according to the type of the staging device will be described.

First, a case of executing an effect by sound output will be described. When the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for sound output (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameters. It is possible to start multiple schedulers. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and the effect sound effect with different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel and sound can be output at the same time. .. The sound source built-in VDP1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and outputs the sound source data from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

Next, a case of executing the effect by the lamp will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit starts the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of lamps and layers in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data every cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp drive data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5150 to the serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output lamp data in a single cycle. With this configuration, the output of the lamp data is the next operation of creating the lamp data in response to the increase in the lamp system and the increase in the processing time of the lamp control due to the overlapping of the lamp layers. By setting the cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the lamp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously created lamp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output, the previously created lamp drive data is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA, and each lamp is turned on and blinked. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling the lighting / blinking of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case of controlling a drive device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating an accessory will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for driving device control, the scheduler execution unit activates the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the function for controlling the drive device (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameter. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of drive devices in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the motor drive data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs the motor drive data to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU1511a regardless of DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the timing of output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, and the total processing time for each frame cycle becomes longer. This is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission is set to 0 by shifting the timing of the motor data serial transmission and the corresponding latch signal output, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU to be used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed can be set to 0 in the same manner. Further, at the same time as the output of the motor drive data, the effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU1511a). Each effect-driven photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In the present embodiment, the scheduler data can adopt various structures. For example, a call function for fetching other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, once executes other scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. Will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to utilize general-purpose staging contents in various situations in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect peculiar to a gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the general-purpose production content can be utilized in various situations by the call function, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function that switches the effect content according to the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, determines the game state based on the main command when executing the conditional branch function, and executes the effect content according to the game state. .. By doing so, it becomes possible to deal with a wide variety of game states with one scheduler data. Examples of the gaming state used for the conditional branch include the result of a lottery performed during the game, the presence or absence of an operation of a button or the like by the player, and the like. In the rotating drum type gaming machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel may be used, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state of the starting winning opening may be used. In addition, conditional branching may be made depending on whether or not an error has occurred during the game.

Various configurations are possible for the content of the effect after the conditional branch. For example, after the conditional branching, the configuration may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by conditional branching, the process may be configured to return to the process before branching. According to the latter aspect, for example, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

As described above, the gaming machine can include various effect devices, and as an example, a display device for displaying an image can be included. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops a bitmap of an image according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, it can be configured by a combination of VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like prepared as a bitmap for characters or the like to be displayed on the screen.

[18-3. Basic concept of staging control]
FIG. 391 is an explanatory diagram showing a basic concept of staging control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, the case where the main effect control is executed by executing the scheduler data including the function will be described, and in particular, the sound output will be described as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device when the effect is executed. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub-effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

The sound functions executed at the time of sound output include "SPLAY" for playing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being played, and "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level at the time of playing a phrase. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and the control specified by the parameters and the like is executed. Upon receiving the execution of the sound function, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data and outputs the sound source drive data to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the specified channel. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels will be described as 4 for easy understanding. Further, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. The speakers [1] to [4] shown here schematically represent the outputs of each channel Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that you are doing it.

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by the channel management works 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being played. The stereo playback flag indicates whether or not to output in stereo. The output volume is the volume for each channel. The loop attribute specifies whether or not to play repeatedly. This information is specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

As described above, FIG. 391 shows the basic concept of the staging control in the present embodiment by taking the sound output control as an example. The sub-staging scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub-staging block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function that controls each effect device is called and processed by a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device.

[18-4. Data flow in staging control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the staging control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of staging control from receiving the main command to acquiring the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data required for staging control]
FIG. 392A is a diagram illustrating a configuration up to acquisition of data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. When the effect control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 as described with reference to FIG. 390, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the effect control unit 5020 provides each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the hold effect), and a game instruction layer (a game instruction). Layer to perform), communication error layer (layer to notify communication error), notification layer (layer to notify various notifications), and abnormality notification layer (layer to notify abnormality) based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200. , Acquires and updates the corresponding effect block data number for each layer. Further, the acquired effect block data number is handed over to the effect block control unit 5040. For example, in the case of a variation pattern layer, the effect block number is a variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, a variation pattern-specific LCD symbol block data combination number table, and a variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data. Determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the effect block is divided into a predetermined unit (block) which is a common effect in a series of effects (for example, an effect executed from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol). Further, block data including control information such as the effect content and the effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect for each effect block based on the effect block number, the effect by each effect device can be synchronized. Further, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display, and in the present embodiment, the variation pattern layer is the rearmost layer and the abnormality notification layer is the frontmost layer, and the more important information is displayed on the front surface. It is a configuration for.

When the effect block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, the effect block control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub-effect block) corresponding to each layer. The control unit 5320) acquires the corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub-effect block data 5053). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect.

For example, when the main command is the start winning command, the hold layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for displaying the hold on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of the start prize are output. 5053 is acquired. Further, when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted to specify the fluctuation pattern layer. Furthermore, a command is also sent to notify the occurrence of an error or a warning, and the abnormality detection layer is specified. Further, by performing the effect for each layer, it is possible to perform a plurality of effects at the same time.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 displays the liquid crystal. Production 1f Start the scheduler. The liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal display schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal display schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal display 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal display schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates the display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the display list command to the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal display 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

Further, when the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 Activates the LCD symbol 1f scheduler by. The liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates the display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the display list command to the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

When the sub-effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub-effect block data 5053, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub-effect block data 5053. Then, when the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 activates the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 activates the sub-effect 1 ms. Start the scheduler.

Further, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub-effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub-staging schedule data 5073 does not differ depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the staging device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share the scheduler data, prevent the same type of problems from occurring in multiple places, and reduce the data capacity. can.

Here, a specific example of executing the same schedule data simultaneously by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 392B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. Four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed for the step-up notice, and by executing the effect that gradually develops the effect content, the player is expected to display the variation of the symbol. Suggest a degree.

In the step-up notice 1, the notice effect ends when the step-up 1 effect is executed. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect is generated just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the end of the step-up 2 effect. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and the notice effects are completed after the step-up 3 effects and the step-up 4 effects are completed, respectively.

In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also perform the step-up notice along with the liquid crystal display. Since different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up effect in the sound effect, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each stage of the effect. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

When the liquid crystal display of the step-up notice develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage, so that multiple step-up effects are temporarily performed at the same time. There is a period of time. As described above, in the lamp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up effect, but in the present embodiment, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously by a plurality of schedulers. It has become. Therefore, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effect overlap.

Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 effect is started just before the end of the step-up 1 effect. The warning lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data is executed at the same time (duplicate) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate, so that the same pattern of effects can be produced in parallel in a series of effects. Realized to do.

The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the control target effect device, and defines them in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. Instructs the processing of the function that has been performed. Each module processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates the data necessary for driving the staging device, and outputs the driving data to the staging device.

[18-4-2. Outline of execution of scheduler data]
FIG. 393 is a diagram illustrating a flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of the present embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect content based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and uses the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700 to control various effect devices. Control. FIG. 393 shows the structure of the scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number designated by the effect block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect number is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the number of effect management pointers corresponding to the effect number is prepared, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 393, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, and the like represent storage addresses of the effect management pointers [1], [2], and the like, respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the staging management table may be configured so that the staging number and the staging management pointer are associated with each other, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the staging management pointer using the staging number as a key, and then obtains the scheduler data. The process may be performed. Further, if the address value of the staging management pointer is used as the staging number, the amount of data in the staging management table can be reduced, and the above-mentioned search becomes unnecessary, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 393, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is composed of a function and a parameter in principle. As described above, the function is an instruction for controlling the staging device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the staging device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided.

Functions are grouped into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (driving devices) and users. The sequence control is a basic function for performing the effect control, and the lamp, the sound, and the motor are functions for controlling each effect device. The user is a function that does not belong to these groups. A specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398.

In the example shown in FIG. 393, a "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and then sets the address specified by the parameter to the staging management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily move to the address specified by the parameter to process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-mentioned saved pointer value.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function after the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at the address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and a return is performed at A3n. When the effect command finishes these processes, the "call" returns to the designated address A2 and proceeds to the process of the next address A3.

In this way, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to incorporate the contents of the series of blocks BL3 specified by the addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced and the creation load can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are held during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the general-purpose production content can be utilized in various situations by calling, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. , It is possible to suppress the loss of the interest of the game.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as "feature operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "ramp operation number set". This is because it merely specifically indicates a very limited function that can be realized by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

In the example shown in FIG. 393, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. In the "NOP" function, the process of the scheduler data is continued after waiting for the specified number of frames. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] elapses. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing of the scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing if the value of the parameter Prm [031] is not 0, and if this value is 0, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing. , Performs the process of moving to the function of the next address.

In the present embodiment, a work having the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 392A is used to specify a voice operation number or the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores voice operation numbers and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. Further, the layer designated by the staging control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 392A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from these layers.

Similarly, the scheduler data is defined by the function and the parameter after the conditional branch address A11. In the example shown in FIG. 393, the conditional branch is not provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, it is possible to specify the accessory command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), etc. without considering the conflict with the block BL1. .. Instead of these settings, the block BL3 and the like may be captured by the "call" function.

In the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect content may be generated, and different addresses may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 393, if the condition "random value value ≤ Th1?" Is added to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. Further, if the address A41 (not shown) is called with the condition "Th1 <random number value ≤ Th2?" Next to the address A2 (address A2 + 1), the address A31 or later is assigned according to the random number value. Will perform different productions. In this way, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to a random number, the production content can be randomly switched by the random number, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Hereinafter, switching the production contents in this way is referred to as "production lottery" in the present specification.

In the staging lottery, the display, sound, lamp, and drive device may all be switched, or only a part of them may be switched. To switch all, specify all the display, sound, and lamp contents in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Further, in the scheduler data, it may be specified that different scheduler data is called according to the random number for the effect lottery by using the conditional branch and the "call" function. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device independently performing the staging lottery, the staging mode realized by the combination becomes very diverse, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

However, regardless of the result of the display, sound, lamp, and drive device effect lottery, it is preferable that these effects are completed at the same time in order to realize a natural effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected in the staging lottery has the content that the staging ends at the same time. It should be noted that it is not an indispensable requirement that the production is completed at the same time, and these production times do not have to be the same.

The effect lottery using the scheduler data has the advantage that the effect content can be varied and the lottery mode can be switched according to the display, sound, lamp, and output status of the drive device. For example, when the drive unit is executing the figure-eight distribution operation at the time when the effect lottery is instructed and other operations are restricted, the drive unit module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery related to the drive device. You may. Similarly, with respect to the display, sound, and lamp, the staging lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the staging lottery is instructed. Further, in the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting the selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, the staging lottery only switches the staging content by the control process of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the sound output will be described. FIG. 394 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and outputs voice. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice. Further, each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with a voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the voice operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice operation number table and reduce the processing load when referring to the table. Has the advantage of enabling.

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later in FIGS. 397 and 398.

In the example shown in FIG. 394, a "call" function is defined at address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter, and reproduces the phrase data 5508.

Further, a structural example of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. 394. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In the present embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is the output channel specified when the phrase is played. The left / right panpot and the top / bottom panpot are the left / right / top / bottom output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be played. When the song number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the sound source built-in VDP1540a reads the sound source data corresponding to the song number from the liquid crystal display and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces the sound. The loop is a specification of whether or not to repeatedly play the sound. Stereo is a specification of whether or not to output in stereo.

A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5507. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5505 being executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 394, as the processing progresses, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops multiplely specified by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, in the processing after the address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of the address SA2, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call), the call nesting is performed. The number will be 2. After finishing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to 1. The same is true for loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 395 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting / blinking control. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for a lamp. Further, each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with a lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referring to the table. It has the advantage of being possible.

The lamp pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters as in the effect data (FIG. 393). The function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

In the example shown in FIG. 395, a "call" function is defined at address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown), and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

The address LA3 defines the gradation pattern setting. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored in the address LA11 specified by the parameter. The lamp scheduler 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 in association with each other. The lamp is turned on with the designated gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value elapses, the lamp with the gradation data 2 is used. Turn on. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings for the address LA12 and later, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between the gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes of the addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lighting of the lamp is terminated. The lamp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the processing of the next address until the processing is stopped (address LAn).

A work 5603 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5602. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5603. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running or not. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The ramp executes the next function when this value reaches zero. The gradation data timer represents the waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 395, when the gradation data specified in the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 shifts to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is terminated and the process proceeds to the processing of the address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 being executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 395, as the processing progresses, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is the address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the figure, as the processing progresses, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The number of loops is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be allowed to nest.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Subsequently, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. The drive device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive device. The drive unit module 5700 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

The control items of the drive device include, for example, the amount of movement (rotational step angle of the stepping motor), the movement time, the movement speed (rotational speed of the motor), the excitation method, the trapezoidal drive, and the rotation direction. In addition, there is an instruction to execute a return operation to return to the origin position and an instruction to stop the mechanical end (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop it while being urged to the limit position of the movable range). included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed by a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function at the start and stop of rotation.

The scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drive device will be described later with reference to FIG. 398.

[18-5. function]
The example of using the function in the module used for the staging control has been described above. Here, other functions will be described. FIGS. 396 to 398 are diagrams showing an example of a function in the staging control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, functions are divided into groups of sequence control, ramps, sounds, motors and users. Hereinafter, the functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
Functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of staging. FIG. 396 shows an example of a sequence control function. The outline of each function will be described below.

"STOP" is a function representing the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by designating the number of executions as a parameter. The time according to the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle in which the "NOP" function is executed. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed in a 1 ms cycle, if the number of executions is also specified as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" has the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value as parameters, and when the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value are satisfied, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function is terminated and the condition is changed. If it is not satisfied, it is a conditional weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

"MEMW" is a function that writes a specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area with the target scheduler work number and value as parameters. "LOOPST" is a function for performing iterative processing (loop), specifies the beginning of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. If "0" is set for the number of loops, an infinite loop will occur. "LOOP" is a function for designating the end of the iterative process (loop).

"RET" is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the effect management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, and processes are executed from a designated address (block), and information for specifying a call destination such as an address value or a label is set as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the callee is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the process of the callee, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

The "SUBC" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the branch table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, it executes the "call" function based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBC" will be described later with reference to FIG. 401. When the process of the callee is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the process of the caller (the next process of the "SUBC" function).

The "SUBJ" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, the "JUMP" function described later is executed based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. 402. The process of the caller who executed the "SUBJ" function is not returned, and the process of the callee is continued as it is. "JUMP" sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

"REF" is a function for invoking another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using the "REF" will be described later with reference to FIG. 403. Like "REF", "REF" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start. In "REF", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REFF" can be executed independently for a specified period for the processing of the scheduler data to be executed. For example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, other scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It is possible to prevent it from becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
Functions belonging to the group of lamps are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 397 gives an example of a function related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"HPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on the gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp is reset and the reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

Similar to "HPLAY", "KPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "KPLAY", when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the running lamp is continued without resetting.

"HPLAY2" is a function that specifies a layer in addition to the gradation data by a parameter and executes a lamp gradation data reproduction process. The processing is the same as that of "HPLAY". Similar to "HPLAY2", "KPLAY2" is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter and executes a lamp gradation data reproduction process. The processing is the same as that of "KPLAY".

“HPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute the designated lamp gradation data reproduction process for reproducing the lamp gradation data specified in the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning at the time of reproduction by "HPLAY", and the lamp gradation data is reproduced at the time of reproduction by "KPLAY". Continue playing without interruption. That is, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed by using "KPLAY" while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

In addition to the above-mentioned "HPLAY" function, "HPLAY2" is the same as "HPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

In addition to the above-mentioned "KPLAY" function, "KPLAY2" is the same as "KPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (sound)]
Functions belonging to the group of sounds (sounds) are functions for controlling the sound output. An example of a function related to sound control is given in FIGS. 397 and 398, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound having the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound is reset and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. Similar to "SPLAY", "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing a phrase stop process for stopping the reproduction of the sound based on the phrase number specified by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" uses the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of execution of the "PAN_PH" function for the playing phrase specified by the parameter, and ends the panpot. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the specified transition time. In addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can also specify the panpot start coordinate position with a parameter, and like the "PAN_PH" function, the audio output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the specified transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" is specified from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value at the transition time. In addition to the function of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" can also specify the fade start volume value with a parameter, and like the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is a parameter at the start of function execution. This is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value at the specified transition time from the fade start volume value specified in.

"VOL_PH" is a function that increases / decreases the volume value of the phrase being played, which is specified by the parameter, with the volume value specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" is a function that mutes the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" is a function for canceling mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute a designated channel music reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. If the same phrase has already been played, the playback of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is played from the beginning during playback by "SCPLAY", and the phrase playback is continued without interruption during playback by "SXCPLAY". That is, even if the same phrase is executed by using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being played, no particular process is executed.

In "PAN_CH", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for a ch (channel) is performed. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". Regarding "PAN_CH2", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH2" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for ch is performed. "PAN_PH2" is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change.

"VOL_FADE_CH" is "VOL_FADE_PH" except that the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH" fades for a phrase, whereas ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change. Regarding "VOL_FADE_CH2", the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH2" fades for a phrase, whereas it fades for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change.

In "VOL_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_PH" increases / decreases the volume value for the phrase, whereas the volume value increases / decreases for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mute the phrase, whereas the mute the ch is specified by the parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" cancels the mute for the phrase, whereas the mute for the ch is canceled, and ch is a phrase specified by a parameter. The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
Functions belonging to the group of motors are functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids. FIG. 398 gives an example of a function related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor specified in the parameter to reproduce the operation based on the motor data number. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. "SOL_OFF" executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user's group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described above. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 398, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MBUF_SET" executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value set process that sets a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. “COMMAND” and “COMMAND0” are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command for starting drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. The "MEMC" executes a scheduler memory copy process for copying the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string that defines the functions required to execute a series of processes in the order of execution. There is one or more schedulers for each purpose for management purposes, but all functions can be executed by all schedulers, and functions related to lamps can be executed by the sound scheduler, or by the accessory scheduler. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the schedulers provided for each purpose, which can execute the functions for sound, and it is also possible to execute all the functions in a mixed manner. In addition, there is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed at the same time.

FIG. 399 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler definition of the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. The following is an overview of typical types of schedulers.

First, to explain an example of a scheduler related to state transitions, there is a special figure state scheduler (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data that controls the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the gaming state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions to another state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the player operates the effect button, wins the effect execution lottery, or when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for sound includes a background that controls the output of the sound that is output along with the background display and the variable display of the symbol, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) for executing the symbol sound scheduler data, and is output when the advance notice effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the related scheduler for the lamp includes the background that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp due to the background display and the fluctuation display of the symbol, and the scheduler for executing the symbol lamp scheduler data (LMP_SCH01). ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the advance notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the lamp is 1f (frame).

In addition, a scheduler that controls sounds and lamps in conjunction with each other is also defined. Such a scheduler has a sound / lamp notification layer that outputs sound and lights / blinks lamps in order to notify the outside of notifications such as out of balls and jams, and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01-03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that is generally used to execute an effect in which sound output and lamp lighting / blinking are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operation, and a scheduler for executing motorram clear scheduler data for setting when clearing RAM (MOTSYS_SCH). MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler for executing motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of accessories (MOTINI_SCH), and for executing motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of accessories. There is a scheduler (MOTO_SCH) of the above, and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the operation of the accessory by the effect and the like.

The scheduler for executing the operation of the character by the effect etc. is a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH01-05) for controlling the operation of a specific character and a general-purpose scheduler used regardless of the type of the character. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

The processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the motor is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the management of the game state and the sound and the lamp (1f = about 33.334 ms of the present embodiment). It has become.

Although the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to dynamically increase or decrease according to the gaming state or the advance notice. As a result, it is possible to activate each scheduler independently of the number of characters and the like provided in the gaming machine and the number of effects, and it is possible to reduce the restrictions for executing the effects.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (staging 1)]
The outline of the functions used in the staging control and the types and functions of the scheduler that performs a series of control by combining these functions has been described above. explain.

[18-7-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 400A is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 400A, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a logo character 5001, a star character 5002 (left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, right star character 5002c), and a hatchet character 5003. Is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged on the upper left side of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper stage position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the effect is completed. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can not only move in the vertical direction but also vibrate up, down, left and right before and after the movement.

The star character 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star character 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star character 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star character 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star accessory 5002 can operate independently, and one or a plurality of star accessories 5002 operate at predetermined timings depending on the content of the effect.

The left star accessory 5002a moves to the lower left and can move to a position slightly lower to the left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle star accessory 5002b moves downward and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right and can move to a position slightly lower to the center of the game area. In addition, each star accessory 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final arrival position, or may be returned to an intermediate position and stopped after reaching the final arrival position.

The hatchet 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hatchet 5003 can be dropped (moved) from the initial position (upper stage position) to the intermediate position and the lower stage position. Depending on the operation of the effect button by the player and the lottery result of the hatchet notice effect, it moves from the initial position to the middle position and stops temporarily, then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. The operation mode is set. Similar to the logo accessory 5001, the hatchet accessory 5003 can also be produced to vibrate up, down, left and right before and after movement.

Next, the flow of the advance notice effect executed by one symbol change will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 400B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice will be described. The flow of the advance notice effect including the hatchet advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 410.

FIG. 400B is a diagram illustrating an example of execution timing of the advance notice effect executed in a series of variation display from the start to stop of the variation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and explaining the scheduler and the scheduler data used at this time. be. In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 400B, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice are executed. In each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, sound output, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each advance notice effect will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (FIG. 401) that controls the lamp in the step-up notice, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (FIG. 402) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star character in the star character notice. The motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" (FIGS. 403 to 405) for controlling the operation of the 5002 and the motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 406) for controlling the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory fall notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled to change stepwise according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 400B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) "LMP_SCH02".

FIG. 401 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP" is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up advance notice work area "YKK_STP". The lottery result value of the step-up notice is stored in the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP", and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP".

The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are the addresses of scheduler data for executing the step-up notice corresponding to the number of step-ups (1 to 4).

In the present embodiment, the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice having the number of step-ups of 4 is stored in the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP", and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, executes lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH01".

After that, when the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", the process returns to the processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice having the number of step-ups of 4 is stored in the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP", and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies the lamp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up and executes the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Wait processing is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the advance notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH02".

After that, when the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", the process returns to the next processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is terminated.

The step-up notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory content (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). be. Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundred, and in the case of two branches such as the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for the judgment becomes too complicated and it becomes difficult to manage corrections and the like. On the other hand, in "SUBC", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the working memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the call address table for branching is one to each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by using a plurality of both. Secondly, since it is in the form of "CALL", it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and it is not necessary to describe the scheduler data after branching for the number of branches. By describing one scheduler data, the same process can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process may not be performed and the "SUBC" function may be terminated.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set the scheduler data of the branch destination, but in the function "SUBC", it is possible to easily add or delete branch destinations. , It is possible to easily add / change the contents of the production and improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the fluctuation, and the notice is executed until the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, as in the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 400B. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

FIG. 402 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, first, the function "KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights (blinks) for 1 second based on the gradation pattern data "PTA_CUT_STA". At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop number of 90 times. Since one frame corresponds to one loop, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to the function "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". Button ON_OFF The operation state of the effect button is stored in the work area "YKK_BTN", "0: button OFF" when the effect button is not operated, and "1: button ON" when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" are rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

While "0: button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is selected when the button cut-in notice button is OFF in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". To. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" of the calling scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notice button is ON in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is the function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", and the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" has the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP". Is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores the address of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area "YKK_CUT" stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. In the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4", first, the lamp is turned on in red (gradation data pattern "PTA_CUT_RED") by the lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the wait processing of 150 frames is executed to continue for 5 seconds. Let me. At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is not CALL but JUMP, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP" and returns to the calling scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT". do not do. Therefore, the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed and when the "STOP" function included in "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed from the scheduler "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1". There is.

The button cut-in notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory content (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundred, and in the case of two branches such as IF statements, the number of scheduler data for judgment becomes too complicated and it becomes impossible to manage corrections. .. In "SUBJ", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the working memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the call address table for branching is one to each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by using a plurality of both. Secondly, since it takes the form of "JUMP", it is possible to execute different processes for each branched scheduler data after executing the "SUBJ" function. Further, as in the case of "SUBC", in order to deal with a program defect, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process is not performed and the "SUBC" function is terminated. You may do so.

That is, the function "SUBJ" selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, like the function "SUBJ", and the selected scheduler data. It is possible to transition the process to, and the same effect as the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Further, unlike the function "SUBJ", the function "SUBJ" continuously executes the processing of the schedule data of the callee and does not return to the processing of the caller, so that it is suitable for selectively executing the processing. ing. For example, when the effect content to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, the function "SUBJ" can be used to prevent duplicate effects from being executed. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing by the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the processing of the callee is executed, and the processing can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and to flexibly support the processing branch. Furthermore, since it becomes easy to respond to additions and changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, it becomes easy to improve the development efficiency and to respond to the specification change of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star character notice]
Subsequently, the control of the star character advance notice executed in the latter half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. When a reach occurs in the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the transition to the latter half of the fluctuation occurs, a group notice is generated, and the star character notice is executed independently of the group notice. The notice of the star character is that a plurality of types of star character 5002 (in this embodiment, the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c) that can be operated by the drive body (motor) are used. By operating, the degree of expectation of symbol fluctuation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of star characters 5002 appearing, the higher the degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 400B, the star character advance notice of the present embodiment is executed by driving the star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (scheduler for left star character scheduler data). Will be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star accessory 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) can also be used. ..

FIGS. 403 to 405 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the scheduler data for controlling the motor in the star accessory advance notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 403 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” that controls the overall flow and the left star accessory 5002a, FIG. 404 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” that controls the right star accessory 5002c, and FIG. 405 is the scheduler that controls the middle star accessory 5002b. It is a figure explaining the data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star accessory advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated star character advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star character advance notice work area "YKK_HYA". .. The lottery result value of the star character notice branch is stored in the star character notice work area "YKK_HYA", and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star character notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

The address of the star character appearance scheduler data is stored in the star character advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to make the accessory non-operation when the notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the star character advance notice. SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star characters 5002.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result value indicating that the star character advance notice that causes the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c to appear in the star character advance notice work area "YKK_HYA" is executed. "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star character 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star character notice is "1", and when the left star character 5002a and the right star character 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star character notice is drawn. "2" is set in the result value.

The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies the parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the appearance operation pattern of the left star accessory 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" in which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" by the function "REF". The function "REF" is a function for executing the scheduler data specified by the parameter by the scheduler also specified by the parameter. Here, the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "RQ" executes the middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04". In this embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function "MPLAY") for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the middle star accessory 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star accessory 5002a. ing. As described above, by executing the scheduler data for operating each star accessory 5002 with different schedulers, each star accessory 5002 can be controlled in parallel.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the weight processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this weight time, the left star accessory 5002a operates in the specified mode. After the weight processing is completed, the function "RET" is executed, the caller's star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is returned, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is completed by the function "stop".

Next, the control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. 404. The right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in FIG. 404, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star accessory 5002c. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the right star accessory 5002c. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

Finally, the control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. 405. The middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 405, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star accessory 5002b. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the middle star accessory 5002b. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star accessory 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star accessory 5002b are combined with the function "RQ". By executing using, it is possible to operate each accessory in parallel. That is, the operation of each accessory can be executed in parallel without performing special control by executing the scheduler data defined individually as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing multiple operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated, and the number of data becomes enormous. Therefore, the function "REF" is used. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called for easy control. In this embodiment, an example in which three types of accessories are operated in parallel has been described, but it is possible to execute more accessories in parallel as long as the operation of the accessories is not hindered. From the above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the logo accessory fall notice]
Subsequently, the control of the logo accessory fall notice executed in the latter half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo character fall notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star character notice. The logo accessory fall notice is a notice effect in which the logo character 5001 imitating the logo of the gaming machine operates so as to fall vertically in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is higher than usual. Shows that is high.

As shown in FIG. 400B, the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment is driven by driving the logo character fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (logo character scheduler data scheduler). Will be executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 with a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09).

FIG. 406 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that controls the motor in the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, first, the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop number of 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. The logo.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", and based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", sets the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify. The button logo character fall notice execution lottery result is stored in the button logo character fall notice work area "YKK_LGO", and if the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is missed, "0: Not executed", button. Execution of logo fall notice If the lottery is won, "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the button logo character fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo character fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO".

While "0: Not executed" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo character fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the logo character fall notice not executed motor scheduler The data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" of the calling scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory fall notice is missed, the loop processing is executed 90 times, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. ..

On the other hand, when "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is won, the button logo character falls. In the notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of executing the logo accessory fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo accessory fall notice button branch address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and if the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF" and the effect button are operated. If so, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO".

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" when the logo character fall notice button is OFF. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory fall notice is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is released from the loop processing. It is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor scheduler when the logo character fall notice button is ON in the button logo character fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO". The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. For the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON" is executed. The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command "COM_LGO_ON" is a command for starting the effect of dropping the logo accessory 5001 on the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_LGO_ON". The parameter "PTA_LGO_DOWN" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds). At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a falling operation over 3 seconds, and stops at the falling position for the remaining 1 second.

Further, by executing the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI", the logo accessory 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), during which the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the weight processing is completed, the execution of the logo character drop operation is completed, so the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed, the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the caller's scheduler It returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but since the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo character is executed. However, the remaining loop count processing is performed, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is terminated by the function "STOP".

As described above, by issuing a command internally when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, the effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal display only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function "COMMAND", it is possible to link a plurality of types of staging devices and execute them as needed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to execute a more interesting staging. ..

In this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal on the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. However, by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side, the control can be changed from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result to the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, it is possible to perform processing that cannot be controlled by the function command. In addition, the merit of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuance timing is used as the processing timing as it is, so there is no need for time management or execution judgment by the program. In addition, it is possible to interactively process external inputs (buttons, jog dials, touchpads) by the user that are not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue commands using the function "COMMAND", and perform processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the function "COMMAND" has a function of transmitting a fixed value command, but a work area is specified instead of a fixed value, and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. You may.

[18-8. Application example of scheduler data (when the power is turned on)]
Subsequently, the scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variation display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 407 is a drawing illustrating scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the power-on command, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" drives the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON".

When the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed, the sub-internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub-game state (sub-internal state) is started. With the progress of the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the LCD display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub-internal state, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc., as shown in FIG. 407. Will be done. At this time, the main game state is the standby state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 408 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or when a predetermined event occurs in the gaming control on the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. To. As described with reference to FIG. 390, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 and analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, starts the corresponding scheduler, and executes the scheduler data.

Also, when the function "COMMAND0" (Fig. 397) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process, as with the main command. Will be done.

When the main command or the command output by the function "COMMAND0" is received, the command for executing the control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis process. The generated commands include commands for starting the scheduler and commands for controlling various effect devices (commands for sub-internal output).

In the command to start the scheduler, for example, the scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 and the change in the sub-internal state due to the progress of control on the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board such as the start winning prize. The scheduler data for executing the effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, the scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, in addition to starting the scheduler directly from a command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function "RQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the effect device (command for sub-internal output) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command to control the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The commands that control the effect device are temporarily stored in the sub-internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order in which they are stored from the beginning of the buffer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by further invoking another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to execute a plurality of schedulers in a hierarchical combination by receiving one main command. This makes it possible to make various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 into parts for each scheduler data, and by combining the schedulers, it is possible to implement multiple types of effects in parallel while realizing various effect controls. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines, such as streamlining debugging work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the command analysis process can be standardized by the command output by the function "COMMAND0". This makes it possible to standardize the scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which causes problems such as the need to manage a huge number of scheduler data combinations in a table. It can be suppressed.

Subsequently, the activation of the scheduler and the execution of the scheduler data when a command at power-on is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 409 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when the power of the present embodiment is turned on.

As described with reference to FIG. 408, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process and the scheduler. The sub-state scheduler is started by the start process, and the corresponding scheduler data is executed sequentially. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed to issue a command to create a sub-internal state, and if necessary, output lamps and sounds corresponding to the sub-internal state. ..

To specifically explain the scheduler to be executed, first, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" is used to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_MDEMO" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the manufacturer demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 300", the standby state is set for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting starts based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. Further, by executing the function "SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO", sound reproduction is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 450", the standby state is set for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed. The gaming machine is in a playable state at this stage, and loops in this standby state until the game is started and the gaming ball wins a prize.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (staging 2)]
Next, an example of executing the hatchet accessory fall notice instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice will be described. The hatchet fall notice is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control such as inheriting the parameters used in the first half notice to the second half notice is performed.

[18-9-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 410 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of variation display from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and FIG. The scheduler data for executing the effect and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a figure explaining the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice.

In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 410 (A), the step-up notice and the button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet fall notice, are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, a group notice is executed in the latter half of the fluctuation, and a hatchet character second half fall notice is executed following the button hatchet character first half fall notice that has been continued from the first half. In each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, sound output, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, the contents of the hatchet fall notice will be described with reference to FIG. 410 (B). As described above, the hatchet fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice and a hatchet second half fall notice.

In the first half of the button hatchet role, which is the first half of the fall notice, the notice effect is advanced by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won, the drop effect of the hatchet accessory 5003 is not executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the second half of the hatchet character fall notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the hatchet character second half fall notice regardless of the operation of the effect button.

When the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won and the effect button is operated at a predetermined timing, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position. Further, if the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the middle position and the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory second half fall notice is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the lower position. That is, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the upper part (upper stage position, initial position) to the center (middle stage position) in the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, and falls to the lower part (lower stage position) in the latter half. In addition, when the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half fall notice is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is designed to fall to the lower part regardless of the position. Further, when the hatchet accessory fall notice is completed, the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 410 (B), the hatchet accessory fall notice is produced in six different patterns. Specifically, when the result of the execution lottery of the button hatchet first half fall notice is not won, it does not depend on the operation of the effect button, so when the hatchet second half fall notice is not won (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of pattern 1, since the button hatchet first half fall notice and the hatchet second half fall notice are not won, the hatchet 5003 does not fall and is maintained without moving from the upper part. In the case of pattern 2, the hatchet 5003 does not fall and is located at the top in the hatchet fall notice, while the hatchet 5003 wins the execution lottery in the hatchet second half fall notice, so the hatchet 5003 is from the top to the bottom. It falls at a stretch.

Execution of the button hatchet first half fall notice When the lottery is won, the effect mode of the button hatchet first half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, the hatchet accessory fall notice can be executed in four patterns depending on whether or not the effect button is operated and the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory fall notice.

If the result of the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet is not won and the effect button is not operated, and the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet is not won, the hatchet 5003 will not fall. It remains located at the top (Pattern 3). If the result of the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet character fall notice is won and the effect button is operated, and the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet character object fall notice is not won, the hatchet character 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Will fall from the top to the middle and remain in the middle until the hatchet fall notice is completed (Pattern 4).

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet, and do not operate the production button, and if you win the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet, the effect button is not operated, so the hatchet role. The hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is located at the upper part until the second half fall notice of the object is started, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory (Pattern 5). If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet, operate the production button, and win the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet, the hatchet 5003 will be displayed from the top when you operate the production button. It falls to the middle, and further falls from the top to the bottom in the notice of the fall of the hatchet in the second half (Pattern 6).

As described above, the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment can have six patterns of effect, and the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice will be described below. Specifically, the button hatchet first half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the button hatchet first half fall notice shown in FIG. 410 (A), and the hatchet role second half. The latter half of the hatchet accessory fall announcement motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the drop notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls for hatchet fall notice]
FIG. 411 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that controls the motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. .. As mentioned above, if the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet fall notice is won, the function "LOOP" accepts the operation of the effect button for 3 seconds, and when the effect button is operated, the hatchet 5003 is operated. Perform the production to make. Execution of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet If the lottery is not won, if the effect button is not operated even if the lottery is won, the hatchet 5003 ends without operating. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA" is executed to start drawing an effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 rattles the hatchet 5003. After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT". Specifically, the hatchet 5003 rattles.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop number of 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. Will be executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", and based on the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address of. The result of the execution lottery of the button hatchet first half fall notice is stored in the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", and if the execution lottery of the button hatchet first half fall notice is not won, "0:: "Non-winning", "1: Hatchet first half fall notice execution" is set when the lottery is won. The result of the execution lottery of the button hatchet first half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

Button hatchet first half fall notice When "0: non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected when the first half fall notice is not executed. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery is "non-winning", so the scheduler data without executing the button hatchet first half fall notice. End the execution of.

On the other hand, when "1: Hatchet first half fall notice execution" is set in the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button hatchet first half fall notice execution lottery is won. , Button hatchet first half fall notice In the lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the time of executing the hatchet fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button hatchet first half drop notice button branch address. It is executed with the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatchet first half fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". .. As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and when the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF". , "1: Button ON" is set when the effect button is operated. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice button OFF motor scheduler The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet fall notice is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is exited from the loop processing. Is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button is turned on in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". The hour motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the hatchet is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to an intermediate position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 drops to an intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1", "1" is written in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, and it is recorded that the hatchet 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. After that, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is terminated by the function "STOP".

Button, which is the first half of the hatchet fall notice, when the hatchet first half fall notice is completed, the hatchet second half fall notice, which is the second half, is started. FIGS. 412 and 413 are diagrams illustrating the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the motor in the hatchet second half fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet fall notice of the present embodiment. be. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used in the same manner as the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" to execute the hatchet character second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed, and drawing of an effect suggesting whether or not the hatchet 5003 is dropped on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. .. After that, the weight processing "NOP: 90" for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of a big hit increases when the hatchet 5003 falls, the player's expectation is raised by drawing an effect for 3 seconds.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters. ..

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", and based on the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address. The result of the execution lottery of the hatchet second half fall notice is stored in the work area "YKK_NTA2", and if the execution lottery of the hatchet second half fall notice is not won, "0: non-winning" If the lottery for executing the second half fall notice of the hatchet character is won, "1: Execution of the second half fall notice of the hatchet character" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the hatchet second half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2".

Hatchet second half fall notice 2 When "0: Non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" will drop the hatchet second half. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" is selected when the advance notice has not been executed. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result non-winning BL Branch based on.

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice is not announced in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The run-time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" when the hatchet second half fall notice is not executed is selected in the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". To. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". After that, the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is overwritten with "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" shows the hatchet first half fall. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is selected when the advance notice is executed and the second half fall notice is not won.

In the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" when the hatchet first half fall notice is executed and the second half fall notice is not won, the weight process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is first executed. In the weight process executed here, as will be described later, when the hatchet 5003 is in the lower position, it becomes a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the hatchet 5003 is originally in the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After the weight processing is completed, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operation time of the hatchet 5003, the weight process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is restored by the function "RET".

In addition, when "1: hatchet second half fall notice" is set in the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" Motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of winning the second half fall notice of the hatchet. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the hatchet fall notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_ ..

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" has not yet announced the hatchet first half fall notice. Execution / Second half fall notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 413), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 240" executes a weight process of 240 frames (about 8 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Subsequently, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the above-mentioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet first half falls in the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN". Notice execution / second half fall notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 413), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position and the timing to start the operation of returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (about) are used by the function "NOP: 120". Weight processing for 4 seconds) is executed. This time is the time until the hatchet 5003 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed in the same manner as in the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" to return the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the hatchet 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is set to "0: initial position". And terminate the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In the hatchet fall notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hatchet 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 by writing the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 using the function "MEMW" in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. .. As a result, it is possible to determine the amount of movement of the motor for each position of the hatchet 5003, and it is possible to execute the effect according to the operation result of the effect button by calling each corresponding scheduler data.

Further, even in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the hatchet 5003, the common scheduler data is called by moving from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function "MEMW" can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing the scheduler data and referencing it when executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify a value indicating a state that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data at the time of executing each scheduler data. The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data. This makes it possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, streamline the creation and debugging of scheduler data, and facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, the function is to write a fixed value, but by specifying the work name as a function parameter instead of the fixed value, data can be passed from the program side and processing based on command information can be performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. A peculiar feature of the function "MEMW" is that even information that has not been determined at the start of execution of scheduler data including the function "MEMW" can be processed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables control of effective time and interactive control.

[18-10. Scheduler data configuration example (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of advance notice effects has been described above. The execution content of such a series of advance notice effects is drawn by lottery based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each notice production.

Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of advance notice effects based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the basic effects related to these series of advance notice effects and variation patterns (regardless of the lottery other than the advance notice effects). The structure of the scheduler data for executing the background effect and the effect related to the pattern effect, which are produced and are one-to-one with the fluctuation pattern, will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (effect sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. The block is, for example, from the start of the symbol change to the occurrence of reach, or to the time when the symbol stops when no reach occurs (first half change), and from the occurrence of reach to the time when the symbol stops (second half change). ), From the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. Further, a time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each block, and the execution timing and execution time of the advance notice effect within the allotted time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and the data related to the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

In addition, the rule of block division is that when comparing basic effects related to fluctuations in multiple fluctuation patterns, the same basic effect part is used as common block data, and the part with a difference in the basic effect of the liquid crystal display is divided as block data. do. Referring to FIG. 414A, in the variation pattern-specific LCD effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” is normally varied for 6 seconds. It is a loss, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of the loss is produced. Since the 6-second effect of normal fluctuation and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into the 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) of normal fluctuation and the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) of stop loss.

The fluctuation pattern "10H02H" is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the design of the loss is produced. Since the 12-second effect of normal fluctuation is also used for other variation patterns, it is divided as the 12-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK) of normal variation, and the pattern effect of loss is exactly the same as the variation pattern "10H01H". As the loss stop liquid crystal effect block data, the loss stop liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) divided into liquid crystal display blocks according to the fluctuation pattern “10H01H” is commonly used. Similarly, for other fluctuation patterns, the parts that have already been converted into block data for the basic effect are used in common, and the parts that are different are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by making blocks, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and for all fluctuation patterns and basic effects such as jackpots other than fluctuations, by combining unique LCD effect block data. , It is possible to realize basic effects such as all fluctuation patterns and jackpots other than fluctuations. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the main purpose of blocking is a liquid crystal display that includes a specific basic production when there is a change in a specific basic production. The change is reflected in all variation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, since the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data of sound, lamp, and accessory in this embodiment, but the format and function are basically different for each block data. The configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect are combined is the same as the sub-effect block data that controls the sound, the lamp, the accessory, and the like. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and video material IDs, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, and colors related to the effects related to pictures and movies displayed in the background and patterns. It is composed of functions that can specify control information for generating display list commands for VDP1540a with built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information, and also indicates the type and execution timing of the effect related to the advance notice effect that occurs in the block data. Information to be shown is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for variablely displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as the liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variable display of the identification symbol independent of the control of other liquid crystal displays. For example, even when the shape of the identification symbol is changed and variable display is performed, a common notice effect can be obtained. It can be executed on a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for displaying the symbol has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display. Further, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect related to the design are combined for each block data has the same configuration as the sub-effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for the symbol display has the same structure and function as the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the mode of variable display of the identification symbol is embedded.

FIG. 414A is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variable pattern, which stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variable pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 414B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variable pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variable pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment.

The liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each fluctuation pattern is a table that holds information indicating the combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. For example, for the variable pattern number, a unique number for specifying the constituent liquid crystal display block data is held in chronological order. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H", it is composed of "LCD03_BLK" indicating a normal fluctuation for 12 seconds in the first half fluctuation, "LCD04_BLK" indicating a normal short reach in the second half fluctuation, and "LCD02_BLK" indicating a stoppage. Will be done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. In this way, the configurations of the basic effect and the advance notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 414, the same liquid crystal display block data is used for all the same effect sections. For example, when the first half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the advance notice effect actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal display block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal display block data can be uniquely specified for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 414B, the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each fluctuation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern. .. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Further, as shown in FIG. 415, the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern contains information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to one-to-one with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data having the same variation pattern number.

Next, the procedure for executing the advance notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, the outline of the procedure for executing the effect control based on the liquid crystal effect block data, the effect control based on the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the effect control based on the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 416 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the staging control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the fluctuation pattern command (main fluctuation-related command) "10H03H" is received from the main control board 1310, the fluctuation pattern number "10H03H" is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 is notified. Notice.

As described with reference to FIG. 392A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. The corresponding block data number is acquired from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, and the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern. do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to each effect device to the same number, it is possible to execute all the effects of each effect device in synchronization.

Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for all layers to the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub effect block control unit 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit. By 5333 (5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal symbol block data "ZUG03_BLK". , Sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normally variable 12-second sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK".

When the processing of the liquid crystal display block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal display 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal display block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the content of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source to draw a drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, when processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data according to the variation display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as that for processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub-effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub-effect 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub-effect block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data designation function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp (“KPLAY”), a speaker (“SPLAY”), and an accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specification functions in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to modules (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and each module executes the effect by various effect devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "RQ, EQUF". It is possible to control various staging devices by executing the staging data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time. Further, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", it is possible to control by a command instead of a function. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designation function that controls the operation of the character, the operation of the character and the drawing are linked as in the above-mentioned hatchet fall notice effect. It is possible to carry out the production that was done.

Here, a procedure for executing the effect control using the sub-effect block data will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing for each variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

In the effect block control unit 5040, the variation pattern layer is selected by the effect control unit 5020 based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and the control of the block data number for each variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is varied. Control is started using the sub-effect block data combination number table for each pattern (FIG. 415). The row position of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 415) is set in the row index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 415, if the fluctuation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H". Since it is the third row, “2” (row-1) is set in the row index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub-effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is started, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern based on the row and column indexes (step S7011). Further, the sub-effect block data number table row index is initialized with "0" (step S7012). As a result, processing is started from the first record of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern specified from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 420 (B)). Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) is obtained from the sub-effect block data number table. get. One or more scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice), and the scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data are associated with each other based on the lottery result of the advance notice.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index when all the scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data has been started, and the sub-effect block data number table row index has a fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the separate sub-effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub-effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of sub-effect block data number table row elements for each variation pattern is not exceeded (the result of step S7014 is "NO"), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern This is the process for executing the next sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern when the execution of all the scheduler data in is completed. The sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is executed periodically, and the execution status of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is monitored.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern by using the row and column index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. (Step S7021). As a result, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is specified and defined in the sub-effect block data. It is determined whether or not the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub-effect block data control update process is terminated.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the advance notice) defined by the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. When is completed (the result of step S7022 is "NO"), the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each fluctuation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is the end data ("DATA_END"). Is determined (step S7023). If it is end data (the result of step S7023 is "YES"), since a series of effects has been completed, the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is terminated.

On the other hand, if the next column data is not end data (the result of step S7023 is "NO"), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. , The sub-effect data block control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern is executed (step S7024).

As described with reference to FIGS. 414A, 414B, and 415, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, by blocking, if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the number of activations of the staging block and the scheduler defined in the staging block will always be the same regardless of the combination of staging and the appearance of staging. The complexity can be reduced and, as a result, the quality can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the staging control by one or more drawing schedulers and sub staging schedulers, it is possible to link the operations of various staging devices, and various staging without discomfort is executed. can do. In addition, since scheduler data with the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data that controls various staging devices should be independently developed and checked for each staging device and block data. Is possible, and development efficiency can be improved.

FIG. 420 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect of the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and FIG. The execution time of the advance notice effect, (B) shows the structure of the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. The sub-effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and advance notice sub-effect block data for executing the background effect and the advance notice effect. In FIG. 420B, two types of sub-effect block data, background block data and advance notice block data, are combined, but the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 420, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern constituting the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), and “SCH02_BLK” ( Loss stop). The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the left symbol and the right symbol. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the result of the variation display is confirmed as a loss, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 420 (A), the sub-effect block data related to the step-up notice, the BTN logo accessory fall notice, and the symbol stop notice notice, and the sub-effect related to the background. Block data is defined. Further, in the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK", the sub-effect block data of the cut-in notice and the group notice and the sub-effect block data related to the background are defined. Further, in the sub-effect block "SCH02_BLK", the advance notice effect sub-effect block data is not defined, but the sub-effect block data related to the background is defined. In the figure, the execution of the advance notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of advance notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of advance notice effects are duplicated. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 420 are as described above.

Hereinafter, the effect control by each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 420 (B), two types of sub-effect block data in the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern will be described.

In the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background, normally variable 12-second background sub-effect block data is defined. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal variation 12-second background are defined in the normal variation 12-second background sub-effect block data. Since the background sub-effect block data having a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds is the scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is completed.

The sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice defines the function "NOP", the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data, and the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal display scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub effect according to the liquid crystal display. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. The BTN logo character fall notice sub-effect block data defines the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo character fall notice. The BTN logo character fall notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo character fall notice liquid crystal effect block data. As the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice are defined. The symbol stop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

At this time, from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect. Function until the start of, and from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal notice effect (design stop notice) to the end of the execution of the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern. "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effectation scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the scheduler block for each fluctuation pattern by the function "NOP", the sequential scheduler is performed at the execution timing of each advance notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal advance notice effect at the designated timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern does not have to be.

The execution time of the advance notice effect set by the scheduler data that controls the effect device such as a lamp, sound, and accessory is defined as a common time for each advance notice effect. As a result, since the time from the start of the control by the sub-effect block data to the execution of each advance notice effect is uniquely determined, the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Further, the time information at the time of executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is managed not after the start of the fluctuation but as a relative value from the start of the execution of the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. As a result, when the same sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern has an effect start time from the start of the variation for each variation pattern. Although it will be different, since the time value is relatively managed in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, it can be processed without any problem. The liquid crystal display block data for each fluctuation pattern is also managed by the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each fluctuation pattern is also similarly managed by the liquid crystal symbol block for each fluctuation pattern. It is managed by the relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub-effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined in the normal short reach background sub-effect block data. Since the normal short reach background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is completed.

The function "NOP", the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and the group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the advance notice. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal display effect scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data defines the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the group notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the group notice are defined. The group notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the group notification liquid crystal display block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

Further, the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern has the same number of sub-effect block data columns as the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern, but the number of sub-effect block data columns may increase or decrease. no problem.

Finally, in the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern, since the effect related to the advance notice is not performed, only the loss stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normally variable 12-second background are defined in the loss stop background sub-effect block data. Since the loss stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 421 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the liquid crystal display effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern differ only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub-effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common to each other, the description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described with reference to FIG. 392B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 422 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file in a step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) using a video composition / motion creation graphic tool for a step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. be.

The drawing data file is created for each step-up effect, and is composed of a series of effects that combine still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 422, the drawing data file is converted into the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data in the present embodiment by the tool in step-up effect units.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notices as in the present embodiment are used. If it is feasible, it is necessary to change the drawing data files for 4 lines, and considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data files are created in a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice in combination.

FIG. 423 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data, and (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, four types of step-up notices can be executed in the present embodiment, but step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In the step-up notices 3 and 4, the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

Explaining the step-up notice LCD effect block data, first, it is decided whether to execute any of the step-up notices 1 to 4 based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of the fluctuation. To. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is not won, the step-up notice liquid crystal display effect block data is not executed, so that the step-up notice is not executed and drawing is not performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 1, the step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 2. Step-up notice The step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is terminated because the data to be executed next is "DATA_END".

Further, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, the weight is waited for the time specified by the parameter, and then the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2 Since the data to be executed next is "DATA_END" after the execution of the liquid crystal display scheduler data is completed, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is terminated.

As described above, by combining the staging scheduler data of the notice in the minimum configuration unit, it is possible to realize a plurality of variations of a single notice.

Subsequently, the step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 423 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured such that the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data and the block configuration and the execution time all have a one-to-one correspondence. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the staging devices with respect to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result of the advance notice, and it is possible to realize a staging with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub-effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub-effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub-effect block data stored in the order of data access is acquired from the sub-effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO" for each fluctuation pattern. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it is possible to execute the basic effect and the advance notice effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. ..

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time, whereby the various effect devices can be used. The production can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is subsequently performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, only by executing the corresponding block data based on the information that identifies the effect content such as the fluctuation pattern, the hierarchically defined scheduler data is automatically acquired and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, which greatly improves development efficiency. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler is configured to analyze the scheduler data described in a predetermined format and control the staging device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included in the peripheral control board 1510) is updated, a common schedule can be obtained by installing a scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it becomes possible to utilize software assets related to production control of gaming machines for a long period of time.

The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler started when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use to free up the used area of the memory. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the schedule data is completed, or it may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state.

[19. LCD effect scheduler data effect control]
Subsequently, the details of the liquid crystal display scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal display block data will be described. The liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is composed of a combination of functions that control the effect target, like the sub effect block data. In the sub-effect block data, sound output, lamp lighting, operation of the drive device, etc. were controlled targets, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
First, a function (a scheduler function for liquid crystal display) that constitutes liquid crystal display scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is an effect control command (function, command) described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data described above, and a command is given to the sound source built-in VDP1540a by the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. Send and perform the production. Further, when the scheduler function for liquid crystal display is executed, the attributes of the object to be displayed (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) can be changed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
FIG. 424 is a diagram showing an example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function of the present embodiment. The outline of each liquid crystal display scheduler function will be described below.

Each liquid crystal display scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and subscheduler setting.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is for setting the liquid crystal display object by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, for example. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ" specify the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target object.

Next, the group to which the function for scaling (scale setting) the display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling is, for example, setting the center of a designated display area to be enlarged or reduced when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on the CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to do. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing the drawing process, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, the group to which the function for setting the angle when rotating and displaying the liquid crystal display object belongs will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by specifying the angle, it is not necessary to store a plurality of rotated liquid crystal display objects, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. can.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. Further, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" specifies an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value to rotate a liquid crystal display object.

Next, other functions will be described. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA" is an α setting process, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not pass the background color at all.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and specifically, a frame value which is a drawing update interval of a liquid crystal display object is set. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval for redrawing the liquid crystal display object during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z-index is a hierarchy for displaying the liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed on the front side or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn on the backmost surface.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information about the effect SW. Although the details of the effect SW will be described later, the effect SW is information incorporated in the control information for drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back and the effect content is switched. , Perform another production. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information in the still image index number on the CGROM and the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets the frame effect SW information to the entire LCD effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets the SW information that defines the special control information described later in the liquid crystal display scheduler data.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling the subscheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a subscheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the processing and improve the development efficiency.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD production]
The example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, the parameters specified when the scheduler function for liquid crystal display is executed will be described with an example. 425 and 426 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the liquid crystal display scheduler function in the present embodiment.

The parameters of the liquid crystal display scheduler function are managed for each group in the same manner as the liquid crystal display scheduler function. The group of the scheduler function for liquid crystal display and the group of parameters are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement-related, sub-effect scheduler function, and the like.

The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE", and "AAD_SCALE2". ] Etc. are included. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for specifying a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS" is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS3" is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_ALPHA" is a parameter for designating the α value which is the transparency of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. "AAD_ANGLE" is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY_B" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SKIP" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SKIP_B" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during the liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SCALE" is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE2" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE3" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SIZE" is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters of the staging SW includes "AAD_LCDSWENTRY", "AAD_LCDSW", "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM", "AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY", "AAD_KICKLCDSW", "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY", "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" and the like.

"AAD_LCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered effects SW, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_LCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_KICKLCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of footage setting parameters includes "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY", "AAD_SEQFOOT" and the like. "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SEQFOOT" is a parameter that specifies the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter for designating the symbol index number and has a length of 16 bits.

The parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function includes "AAD_SUBENTRY", "AAD_SUB", and the like. "AAD_SUBENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of subscheduler function parameters and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SUB" is a parameter that specifies the subscheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Conventionally, the staging control in a gaming machine has been realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various staging devices and a program for linking a plurality of staging devices. These programs were described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the staging device for each content of the notice in addition to the commands related to the fluctuation pattern, and were created by a programmer having a high level of skill. In the liquid crystal drawing, each effect drawing data is called in the frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent game machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of the game machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, advanced technology is required for individual programmers, development man-hours increase, and it becomes difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the staging control program increases, the man-hours required for the test for the purpose of confirming the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality also increase.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it may be possible to realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by the program code. Instead, the program data for the game machine is output by the tool that creates the liquid crystal drawing effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality.

Specifically, by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in chronological order, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal drawing effect is used. In this tool, a single staging drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one staging block, and staging blocks are grouped together for each state such as fluctuation pattern and big hit to create a staging common block. By combining multiple staging common blocks, a series of staging drawings such as fluctuation patterns and big hits can be realized.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of the effect related to the lottery, replacement of the effect and the design, and interactive effect for the external input by the player occur, so the combined effect common block is simply executed as it is. Then, it is impossible to realize all the productions.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect common block is created by the above-mentioned tool, the effect switch (effect switch) for calling a program for executing the effect at a predetermined timing or executing a predetermined control is performed. ) Can be set (embedded). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, a callback always occurs regardless of whether the effect SW is "ON" or "OFF". Further, when the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect block included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing and detects the built-in effect SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected effect SW (callback). do). Then, a display list command can be created based on the information processed by the called back program function, and ON / OFF of the effect display and replacement of the effect can be realized. It should be noted that the program function called by the callback can also execute an effect other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of an accessory, etc.). In addition, it is possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting a flag and updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to display or hide the drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, replace the effect and the design, and realize an interactive effect for the external input by the player. ..

The program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal display and replacing the effect called by the callback is built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, by setting the staging SW so that a designer or plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge calls a predefined program function while setting staging elements such as images and videos at the time of staging design. It is possible to realize complicated production specifications. Furthermore, by creating a staging block (LCD staging scheduler data) for each staging configuration unit using the staging creation tool, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period, and in addition, the staging content is based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the staging SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be significantly reduced.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Subsequently, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 427 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an effect switch according to the present embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

The effect SW number is associated with an effect SW group ID, an effect SW reset group ID, an effect SW attribute, an effect SW activation command address, an effect replacement information table address, and the like.

The staging SW group is a set of staging SWs grouped according to the execution mode of the staging, and the staging SW group ID is an identifier of the staging SW group, and defines which staging SW group it belongs to. The staging SW reset group has the same configuration as the staging SW group, and by specifying the staging SW reset group ID, the staging SW group belonging to the staging SW reset group is set to OFF, and the staging SW group belonging to the staging SW group is collectively performed. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

FIG. 428 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the staging SW group of the present embodiment. Further, as described above, the staging SW includes active and passive, and the staging SW group is composed of one or a plurality of active staging SW and passive staging SW. Specifically, the head group number of the active effect SW and the number of active effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group, and the head group number of the passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SWs are included.

The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal display effect SW full reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive / active information, and the like. The liquid crystal display SW full reset information is information that specifies whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information that specifies whether or not to call the callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call the default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. The passive / active information indicates an evaluation method of the staging SW. When passive, the staging SW is statically evaluated, and when active, the staging SW is dynamically evaluated.

The effect SW start command address is the address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW start command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW start command table. FIG. 429 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 429 illustrates the effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and the effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of the number of commands and the data for the number of judgment commands.

[20-2. Control by the production switch in the step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 430 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) shows a stage in which a step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) is a screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 430 (A), the step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the next stage is executed. .. If the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and if it does not develop, the step-up notice ends as it is.

Here, variations of the step-up notice production at each stage will be described. In the step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of the step-up notice effect, the effect that the display screen is filled with ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of the black ink and the pattern of filling. For example, when the color of black ink is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation is high in the order of white, red, and rainbow color. Further, as the fill pattern, the higher the position where the fill is started, the higher the expectation, and the expectation may be changed at the position itself where the fill is started. For example, if the fill is started from only one place on the lower left, the expectation is low, if the fill is started from two places on the lower left and upper left, or if the fill is started from three places on the lower left, upper left and upper right. Expectations are higher in order, and highest when filling is started from the four corners.

Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage is executed. The development staging is performed in a common manner halfway in order to raise the player's expectation regardless of whether or not it actually develops to the next stage. Explaining the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with the combination of the black color and the fill pattern determined by the lottery. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (becomes lighter), and the characters to be displayed in the step-up notice 2 emerge. When the step-up notice 2 is developed, the ink is applied as it is and the characters are displayed darker, and the production is continued. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed darkly and are inked and hidden.

In the step-up notice 2, characters according to the degree of expectation are displayed. As for the character pattern, the degree of expectation increases in the order of "change", "ossu", "spirit", "continuation", and "one-shot deadly". As for the effect mode of the step-up notice 2, first, the screen is filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the black color and the fill variation in the step-up notice 1 with the characters displayed. After that, when the screen is completely filled with ink, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the ink is gradually removed before the screen is completely filled with ink, and finally the ink is completely removed and the displayed characters disappear. It will end up.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black ink by the step-up notice 2, and the effect of gradually removing the black ink is executed from this state. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern of ink sticking. For example, if the ink is applied from only one place on the lower left, the expectation is low, and if the ink is applied from two places on the lower left and upper left, the ink is applied from three places on the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The degree of expectation is higher in the order of going, and the degree of expectation is the highest when the ink sticks from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of brushing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the characters are brushed, the development effect is successful and the step-up notice 4 is entered. On the other hand, if the characters are not displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, it means that the development effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final stage of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has higher expectations in the order of "game", "opportunity", "development", "enthusiastic fight", "fierce heat", and "happiness". In addition, the character color is expected to be higher in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

Subsequently, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the staging SW will be described. FIGS. 431 to 433 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 431 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the staging contents and the staging SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 432 (A) is a step-up notice 1 for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled with black ink from four directions of the screen. Step-up notice 1 for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled with. The liquid crystal display scheduler data and the drawing image are shown. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

FIG. 431 is all the effects produced by the step-up notice 1, and is divided into each drawing (lower left of ink drawing, upper left of ink drawing, lower right of ink drawing, upper right of ink drawing, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the content of the effect are described in correspondence with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and 10 for each of the character failure and character success drawing categories, for a total of 26 effects. It has become. In addition, there is always one effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing category, and only one of the drawing categories "character failure" and "character success" is executed, so the maximum effect that can be executed simultaneously in step-up notice 1. The number is 5 effects in total of the drawing category "lower left", the drawing category "upper left", the drawing category "lower right", the drawing category "upper right" and the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success".

Further, the method of determining the effect of each drawing category will be specifically described according to the advance notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1. First, a lottery for step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the content of the production related to ink drawing. Specifically, the production contents related to ink drawing are the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing division "lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right", and the color of the ink appearing from the selected ink appearance place. Become. In addition, it is either the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success" and the content of the character displayed at this time.

Next, the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 drawing image when the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described with reference to FIG. 432 (A). .. As mentioned above, the total number of effects of step-up notice 1 is 26 in total, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes one for each drawing category of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only the staging data of is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the figure of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. Black ink spreads from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen at the same time, and the characters of "change" are dimmed in the drawing category "character failure" and the drawing category "character success", and then the drawing category "character". "Failure" erases the "change" character, and at the same time, the "change" character is clearly displayed in the drawing category "character success".

Further, in FIG. 432 (B), the drawing category "lower left" is "red", the drawing category "upper left" is "none", the drawing category "lower right" is "none", and drawing is performed according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1. Issue a command with the category "upper right" being "red", the drawing category "character failure" being "spirit", and the drawing category "character success" being "none". As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left", red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right", and the characters "spirit" are displayed faintly in the drawing category "character failure". , The character of "Ki" is deleted in the drawing category "Character failure".

At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the corresponding effect is set to ON according to the content of each issued lottery command. Specifically, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left" is set to "red", "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper right" is set to "red". Then, "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "Character failure is enthusiastic". On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper left" is "none", the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower right" is "none", and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "character success" is "none". Since the effect of "" is not performed, none of the effect SWs is set to ON and is set to OFF.

As a result, red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left" and red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right" from all the effects of step-up notice 1, and the drawing category "character failure" is "spirit". It is realized that the effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON according to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 433, the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data of FIG. 432 (A) is used to perform an effect according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. 433 (B). The mechanism for replacing the production will be explained.

FIG. 433 is a diagram illustrating a master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing category in the present embodiment and an effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. More specifically with reference to the lower left ink effect replacement group in FIG. 433, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. It becomes the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to. On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which the white ink spreads from the lower left, the corresponding effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI", and the index number on the CGROM of the video in which the red ink spreads from the lower left. The effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left ink effect replacement table. Further, the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command for drawing the effect, and is defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Using the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" as a trigger (when detected), a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left ink effect replacement table is referred to, all the effect SWs registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. do. In the present embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left" is "red", and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, so that the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" corresponds to "from the lower left". The moving image number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

The replacement program function called by the callback delivers the moving image number on the red ink CGROM from the specified lower left to the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 corresponds to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above video number, use the video number on the CGROM corresponding to the video in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function to create the display list command. create.

The features of the replacement of the effect by the callback of the present embodiment are the low-level control structure (in this embodiment, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the data structure that is easy to change and suitable for tooling) to the high-level control structure (the present embodiment). By calling a program function for replacement (a program function that is unsuitable for change but enables complicated processing) by calling back, it is possible to separate the detection of the timing of replacement and the replacement control, which is simple. It is possible to perform complicated processing using the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is a data structure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for calling back (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of this embodiment by calling back, a structure for performing complicated control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side has a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler. When the staging control is realized by analyzing and executing the data, the complexity of the program code processed by the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side increases, and when adding a new function or changing the function, be sure to do so. It is necessary to change the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the problem occurs due to the control change, but also the function that was operating normally before the change is affected and a new problem occurs. There is a risk that it will end up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the callback is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for calling back (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW), and a plurality of times executed by the callback are executed. Judgment whether execution is possible or processing content in the callback function of. By creating the corresponding callback function to realize a single function, it is not necessary to change the liquid crystal effect scheduler data structure even when adding a new function or changing the function, and the call corresponding to the new function This can be achieved by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. Therefore, the range of influence due to the change or addition of the function is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting other callback functions and causing a malfunction is reduced. Also, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is centrally executed by a single large program, the person who performs the execution analysis using multiple callback functions and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to realize each function. However, the structure and structure of the program can be simplified.

In this embodiment, the description is made specifically for the replacement of the effect, but the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not only the replacement of the effect, but also the replacement of the symbol, the control of the display or non-display of the effect, and the drawing target. It can also be applied to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other staging display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

Here, about the purpose of defining the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table. explain. If the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master's effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master's effect SW is always the liquid crystal effect scheduler. It exists only on the data, and the replacement effect SW corresponding to the master and the index number on the corresponding CGROM exist only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined to be several thousand. Consistency between the index number of the video (image) on the CGROM and the production SW under the situation where the game specifications are frequently changed or the game specifications are added between the planning and development of the game machine and the introduction to the market. Is extremely difficult to maintain.

Regarding the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be erroneously defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement may be erroneously defined. It is possible that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the LCD staging scheduler data. In this case, there is a difference between the command value of the effect lottery, the effect SW on the replacement table, and the number of data of the index number on the corresponding CGROM, and the effect is replaced with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. .. Since the degree of expectation is set for each production, it is possible that a production dedicated to big hits that does not appear due to fluctuations in the deviation may appear, which is a fatal problem for a gaming machine. By defining the effect replacement table including the master effect SW and the index number on the corresponding CGROM as in the present embodiment, it is possible to confirm the consistency by comparing the total number of effects and the replacement table. Become. Further, in the liquid crystal display scheduler data, any data in the replacement table can be defined without any problem, so that the control method is extremely unlikely to cause a problem. In the present embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal display scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the master's CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and is always replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and the effect is drawn.

In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the black ink is gradually erased from a part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed and the ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends as it is. Since the effect of gradually erasing the ink from the vertices of the display area is executed regardless of whether it is successful or unsuccessful, the effect SW flag for four types of drawing patterns that gradually erases the ink for each vertex is executed. (Layer) is defined. In addition, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

The composition and control method of the upper left ink replacement group, the lower right ink replacement group, the upper right ink replacement group, the character failure effect replacement group, and the character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group shown in FIG. 433 are the same as those of the lower left ink replacement group. Is.

In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter, the effect SW flag (layer) may be defined according to the mode in the animation of the displayed characters, or one type of effect SW flag (layer) may be defined. Only the layer) may be defined, and the type of character animation may be set by the parameter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are produced by individually defining the drawing effect pattern for each ink appearance position or character content and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. It can be executed or a combination of effects can be executed. Since switching and combining the effects only requires switching the setting of the effect SW flag individually, the planner who configures the effect can simply set the parameters with the tool without the need for techniques such as creating a new program. It is possible to realize various variations of production. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize dozens of types of drawing patterns only by combining four types of drawing patterns depending on the appearance position of black ink and two types of result display patterns of the development effect. As a result, the types of programs to be developed can be minimized, the development efficiency of the staging control program of the gaming machine can be improved, and the inspection of the developed staging control program can be streamlined to improve the quality. Can be done.

[20-3. Overview of control based on staging switch]
Next, the outline of the control based on the staging switch will be described. FIG. 434 is a diagram illustrating a control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and in particular, shows an evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In the present embodiment, first, when the main command (main control command) that triggers the start of the effect is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues the peripheral control inside to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. The issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issuance command is a command for executing a notice lottery or executing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internally issued command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether or not the data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command string of the effect SW determination data, and if the matching data exists, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command string. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

The effect SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command sequence for turning on the effect SW. The effect SW judgment command sequence is not a fixed length, but it is possible to combine multiple command values, main control command values and sub-internal command values, and peripheral control internal issuance command values and peripheral control internal command values. .. For example, the fluctuation start specification command value and the probability state specification command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background specification command of the peripheral control internal issuance command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

By defining multiple commands side by side, for example, if the mini characters that are displayed for different backgrounds are different even for the same mini character notice, the background command value is determined, and after the background is specified, the mini character command value is determined. For the first time, it will be possible to identify the production of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it will be necessary to make multiple judgments for the number of commands. On the other hand, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice side by side as in the present embodiment, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. It is not necessary to make a judgment multiple times, and even for an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, the corresponding effect can be specified in the same manner as the effect defined by a single command. Further, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, it is possible to simultaneously activate a plurality of effect SWs with a single command value.

The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, which is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The staging SW determination data is registered for all staging SWs by a combination of the staging SW determination command value and the staging SW number.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 434, when the command "0x103001" is received, the effect SW number 100 "LCDSW_LEFDW_S1" is registered in the effect SW determination data, so that the effect SW flag stored in the RAM is stored. Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 431 to 433, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding advance notice effect is executed. Is done.

Further, in the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. An example of these functions will be described below. FIG. 435 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function takes an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

LEDSW_TST is a function for determining whether or not the effect SW number is ON from a steady-state program or a called back program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a steady program or a called back program, instead of activating the effect SW by a command.

LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the effect SW from the steady-state program or the called back program. If the attribute of "all reset" is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW is based on the "reset target effect SW group ID" of the "effect SW information table" corresponding to the effect SW number. Set all effect SWs belonging to the group to OFF.

LEDSW_GET is a function that acquires the attribute information of the target effect SW from the steady-state program or the called back program. LCDSW_ATOR is a function to acquire the frame time from the activation of the active staging SW from the stationary program or the called back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of staging switch]
Next, an implementation example of control using the staging switch will be described. 436 to 441 are diagrams showing a part of a program code for executing control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each figure is written in C language.

As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set for all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, the callback is executed, the decision not to perform the specific process is made in the callback function, and the callback function is terminated.

436 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the staging SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code for defining the staging SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of staging SW control information. , (C) is a diagram showing an example of the staging SW group.

The staging SW information table is configured based on the staging SW information table management structure shown in (A), and has a staging SW group ID, a reset target staging SW group ID, a staging SW control information (staging SW attribute), and a staging SW. Includes command information address and staging replacement information table information.

The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The staging SW group is grouped by functions such as a staging SW for performing the same (same type) advance notice staging, a staging SW for holding display, and a staging SW for notification. ing. The staging SW group ID is represented by bits, and one staging SW can belong to a plurality of staging SW groups.

The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for designating the effect SW group for setting the effect SW to OFF when "all reset of the effect SW" is specified in the "attrib bit assignment" described later. This makes it possible to collectively specify the effect SWs that cancel (reset) the processing at the same time when the effect SWs are switched. The reset target effect SW group ID is represented by bits like the effect SW group ID, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

The staging SW control information is information that defines the function of the staging SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal display SW all reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive / active information. Further, the effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 436 (B), and the contents will be described below.

The passive (PASSIVE) / active (ACTIVE) information indicates an evaluation method of the effect SW, and is "PASSIVE" when the bit is "0" and "ACTIVE" when the bit is "1". In the passive mode, even if the command to activate the effect switch is received multiple times during the period in which the effect switch is defined, the drawing effect corresponding to the effect switch is performed only once, and in the active mode, the effect switch is produced during the period in which the effect switch is defined. If the command to activate the SW is received multiple times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect is received. Active is used when the drawing effect corresponding to the button press is displayed when the button is pressed multiple times within the button validity period.

The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call the default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. When "1" is set in the bit, the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

The replacement information is information that calls a callback function for effect replacement when the effect SW is evaluated. When the bit is set to "1", the predefined replacement callback function is called at the time of the effect SW evaluation defined for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Is done.

The liquid crystal display SW full reset information is information that specifies whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to "1", the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the "reset target effect SW group ID" is set to OFF at the time of the effect SW evaluation.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 436 (A). As the effect SW command information address, the defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of the effect SW evaluation. The output command is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and the output command is used to control or execute a new effect SW.

The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which the data to be replaced is defined when "1" is set in the replacement information bit of the effect SW control information (when "with replacement" is specified). Address is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG. 439.

Next, the staging SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, it is managed as an effect group, such as when a plurality of related effect SWs are set. The staging group includes a staging SW group ID, an active staging SW head ID, an active staging SW number, a passive staging SW head ID, and a passive staging SW number.

The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active staging SW head ID is identification information of the staging SW located at the head of the active staging SW belonging to the staging SW group. The number of active staging SWs is the number of active staging SWs arranged from the staging SWs corresponding to the active staging SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head of the passive effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SWs corresponding to the passive effect SW head IDs. As described above, by defining the staging SW group ID as the reset target staging SW group ID, when "reset all staging SW" is specified in "attrib bit assignment", the staging SW group ID belongs to the staging SW group ID. It is possible to set a plurality of passive effect SWs and a plurality of continuous active effect SWs to OFF at the same time.

FIG. 437 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 437, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number by using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to by using the effect SW number as an index.

By defining the effect SW number in an enumerated type in this way, it is not necessary to directly handle the effect SW number as a numerical value when setting or referring to the effect SW number in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 438 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the effect SW flag, and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON / OFF) the processing based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. “1” (ON) is set when the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, and “0” (OFF) is set when the effect SW is not executed.

The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 436 (A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read at the time of program execution and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. Further, the effect SW information table is stored in an array indexed by the effect SW number as in the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all the effect SWs is stored.

Subsequently, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for performing the effect replacement will be described. The staging SW replacement table information is included in the staging SW information table as shown in FIG. 436 (A). FIG. 439 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW replacement table information included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment and the program data defining the effect SW replacement table, and FIG. 439 shows the effect SW replacement table information, (B). ) Indicates an effect SW replacement table.

FIG. 439 (A) is program data showing the configuration of the staging SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table information, the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data are stored. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

The effect SW master data is the effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and in the case of "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1", the case where the black color is black corresponds to this (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, there is a case where the color of black ink is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

FIG. 439 (B) is program data showing the configuration of the staging SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of the material number defined in the replacement table are defined, and in the present embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After defining the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In the present embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

As a specific replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement table information is referred to, and all the effect SW effect switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of rows of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to the line of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number that identifies a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer composition]
Next, the layer for displaying images and moving images will be described. The layer can be used for general purposes by dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of areas (layers, layers) and drawing the layer. For example, by separating the background layer, it is possible to draw in a common method even if the displayed character is changed.

In the present embodiment, by individually storing and managing a table (layer information table) for storing layer information, it is configured so that even if a part of the layer is changed, the other layers are not affected. Can be done.

FIG. 440 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background). For). The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function is determined. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. Further, FIG. 441 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, in which (A) is the content of the layer information table (first half of the notice 1), and (B) is the layer information table (notice). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. Both the layer information tables 1 and 2 in the first half of the notice determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, like the layer information table for the background.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 440 (A), a layer information table for a background, a symbol display, a first half notice, a big hit effect, an accessory operation, a hold display, and the like is defined.

Further, FIG. 440 (B) shows a layer information table for the background, and in the production in the present embodiment, the sea background, the mountain background, and the river background are defined, and further, the background according to the game state (time reduction). Medium background, high accuracy medium background) are also defined. Furthermore, variations such as changing a part of the background color can be added by the effect SW.

FIG. 441 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice 1, in which a roulette notice, a blackout notice, and a window notice are defined, and a command for clearing the notice is also defined. FIG. 441 (B) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice 1, in which a step-up notice, a button mini character notice, and a conversation notice are defined, and a layer table for clearing the notice is defined as in the case of the first half of the notice 1. Is also defined. The layer table for clearing the notice is used to end the drawing of the notice executed in the layer table of each notice defined in the layer information table of each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and "all reset of the effect SW" is defined by "attrib bit assignment". When the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the advance notice SWs belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the reset target effect SW group ID are set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the effect SW is drawn. Is finished and is hidden. The layer table for clearing the notice is empty data because it does not produce anything.

A record for termination determination is stored at the end of the area allocated to the list for storing the layer table and the table for storing layer information, and when the record for termination determination is detected, it is determined that the data reading has been completed. It becomes possible to do. This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (number of records) without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the advance notice effect using the liquid crystal display effect block data (common block) will be described by taking a step-up advance notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Production layer table / LCD production block data]
FIG. 442 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in the present embodiment, (A) is a liquid crystal layer table for step-up notice effect, and (B) is a liquid crystal effect common block. The configuration of is shown.

As shown in FIG. 442 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the number of liquid crystal display common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal display common blocks are equal to the number of liquid crystal display common blocks. It is defined as a pair with the total number of drawing frames and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (580) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP", and the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" are defined. It is determined whether or not to execute the callback based on the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" and execute the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" based on the information of the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" in the callback function.

The liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is defined in the order of the effect SW, the total number of drawing frames, the loop start frame position, the playback time, and the liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 442 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set so that the number of steps can be increased or decreased by adding or deleting the liquid crystal display block. For example, when adding the step-up notice 5, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

The effect SW controls whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal effect block can be executed based on the set value, similarly to the effect SW defined in the layer table. The total number of drawing frames defines the total number of effect frames of the liquid crystal display block. Explaining using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal display block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced in (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the reproduction of the liquid crystal display block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” on the first line is completed.

The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position, and the playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". When loop reproduction is performed from the beginning or the middle of, the number of frames to be looped is added to the reproduction time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total reproduction time. Step-up notice 1 Since the playback time of the LCD production block of "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is (150) frames, if the latter 50 frames are looped twice after the playback of the LCD production block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, the playback time is the total playback time. This can be achieved by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50 × 2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. By using the loop playback function, it is possible to create an effect in which the pattern is not fixed and fluctuates during a pseudo-continuous effect.

Further, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of playback even though the total playback time and the playback time of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" of the present embodiment are the same is due to some problem. If the next effect common block is not executed, the drawing will not be updated, and in order to prevent the LCD screen from stopping, drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total playback time is exceeded.

In the present embodiment, when the effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 are executed, the control by the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is performed after the notice lottery related to the effects is executed on the peripheral control board 1530. Peripheral control internal commands related to the notice effect, step-up notice 1 command, step-up notice 2 command, and step-up notice 3 command are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

After setting the effect SW, the callback is executed based on all the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", and the callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and the liquid crystal display block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2", and "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON, so the LCD effect blocks "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" and "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU1" and "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU1" are executed, respectively. On the other hand, since "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" is set to OFF, "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4" is not executed. As described above, since it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal display blocks in the common block for liquid crystal display and control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal display block by using the effect SW, it is possible to execute a combination of a plurality of notices. In addition, it is possible to switch the display / non-display of each effect.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal display block of each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 443 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the liquid crystal display block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

As for the contents of the liquid crystal display block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal display block is defined. There are two types of functions, "LCD_NOP" and "LCD_NULL", and the liquid crystal display scheduler data, which are the number of execution frames, the function, or the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data. "LCD_NOP" is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and "LCD_NULL" is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal display block.

Subsequently, a specific explanation will be given about the liquid crystal display block. Explaining with reference to the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", the leading (3) indicates that "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is three). In the next line, since the number of execution frames (120) is specified as "LCD_NOP", the weight is waited from the start of execution of the liquid crystal display block to the (120) frames. (120) After waiting between frames, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). After that, "LCD_NULL" in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is terminated.

As explained in FIG. 430, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage of the step-up notice, it is realized by using the weight of "LCD_NOP" to realize the execution of the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage. is doing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" does not perform weighting, and starts executing the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The liquid crystal display block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the weight by "LCD_NOP", waits for (120) frames, and then starts the execution of the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" to generate the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts execution when (120) frames have elapsed from the start of execution. As a result, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next stage.

Further, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect block in chronological order, and when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is continuously defined, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames. Is executed, and the liquid crystal staging scheduler data in the next line is executed.

In the effect scheduler data of the step-up notice effect 2, after the total number of functions is defined, the function NOP for waiting while executing the step-up advance notice effect 1, the function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing the step-up advance notice effect 2, Finally, the function LCD_NULL that indicates the end of the scheduler data is defined. The step-up notice 3 and the step-up notice 4 are also described in the same manner.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal display scheduler data for the step-up notice effect has been explained above. Subsequently, an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting the operation of the effect button during the fluctuation of the design and operating the effect button within a predetermined period will be described.

[23-1. Button mini character production mode]
FIG. 444 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the button mini character effect of the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is executed when an execution lottery is performed when the main command is received or when the fluctuation starts, and when the winner is won. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated during the reception period of the button operation input, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half valid period and the second half valid period are set for the acceptance period of the button operation input, and the mini character is displayed in different modes.

Further explaining, when the execution lottery for the button mini character production is won and 90 frames (f) have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the first half of the button mini character is valid. The valid period of the first half of the button mini character is 90 frames, and an image (movie) prompting the button to be pressed is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the valid period of the first half of the button mini character. Button mini character If you operate the button during the first half of the valid period, the mini character will be displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, when the button is operated during the valid period of the first half of the button mini character, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as the first half of the second half of the button mini character. In FIG. 378, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character, but the character may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character. The character may be displayed in a different manner as long as possible.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as the first half of the button mini character. In FIG. 444, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character, but the character may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character. The character may be displayed in a different manner as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 445 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 445, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character effect has the number of liquid crystal display common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal display common blocks is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal display common block. It is defined as a pair with the number and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (180) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawing frames (150) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT", and the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002", first, the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" is executed during the (180) frame. After that, during the (150) frame, the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" is completed.

Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal display common block for the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 446 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines individual common blocks of the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal display common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” of FIG. 446 are the same as those of the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described with reference to FIG. 442. The effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call the callback function to determine whether to execute the LCD effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effects that define the active attribute in the effect SW control information. It becomes SW. Therefore, the drawing effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the number of times the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 447 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines liquid crystal display effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal display effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 447 are the same as those of the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 377. Explaining the processing by each liquid crystal display block data, first, in the first half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is executed, and the weight is waited for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation. .. Subsequently, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the valid period of the first half of the button mini character is executed in (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is completed. In the latter half of the production, the "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the latter half of the button mini character is executed, and the weight is waited for (30) frames from the start of the fluctuation. After that, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the latter half valid period of the button mini character is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is terminated.

As described above, since the effect SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effect SWs, the effect SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are set to ON while the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" are being executed. If the command to be issued is issued multiple times, the drawing effects corresponding to the effect SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are executed as many times as they are issued. In addition, a callback is always generated every frame by the effect SW, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of button pressing is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame even after the button pressing control is completed until the liquid crystal display scheduler data execution is completed. Control that the period during which the callback is executed is set as the button valid period without separately determining the button valid period by creating the liquid crystal display scheduler data that draws the staging during the button valid period and controlling it with the active staging SW. Is possible. For example, by repeatedly hitting the button, the number of times of repeated hits can be counted, and the effect according to the number of times can be executed. In addition, the lamp can be turned on in response to a button operation by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function that controls the lamp in the callback function. Further, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the accessory, it is possible to execute the operation according to the number of button operations and execute the scheduler data to return to the initial position after the button operation valid period ends. The procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position is, for example, to wait by "LCD_NOP" until the button operation valid period ends, and then execute an effect block including a function to return the accessory to the initial position.

[24. LCD effect scheduler for designs]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing contents according to the game state and the expected degree of the variable display game to be the notice target. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbol to be variablely displayed in the variable display game when a predetermined condition such as a gaming state is satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and reels in which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are assigned to each column. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a mode corresponding to the gaming state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

The display of the identification symbol is updated every frame, and the effect SW is assigned, as in the case of the advance notice effect. In the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image for displaying the identification symbol is defined as master data. .. A reel number is defined in the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game status and effect. For example, if the identification symbols displayed in the mountain background, river background, and sea background are different, the left symbol of the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, and the left symbol of the river background is R3, the middle symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol of the mountain background is R6, the middle symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each number of reel arrangements of the identification symbol. What is the reel arrangement? The design of the identification symbol and the identification symbol when the identification symbols are displayed in the order of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 and then returned to 1 to be displayed. The reel index defines the total number and the display order of the identification symbols. It is possible to define multiple reel indexes.

Further, the table for replacing the identification symbol includes a replacement table for the identification symbol corresponding to the reel number and the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the replacement table of the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement is defined for each reel index.

The identification symbol is replaced by using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. In the reel index replacement work number table, the work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index are defined. It is displayed on the reel replacement work when it can be recognized that the identification symbol is stopped or stopped by the player, such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the confirmed symbol number value of the identification symbol. The identification symbol number value is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of fluctuation according to the effect content.

Explaining the specification of the data for replacing the identification symbol, when the callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number in the callback function for replacing the identification symbol is used. Based on this, the target reel index replacement work number is specified from the reel index replacement work number table. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of identification symbols displayed in the liquid crystal display scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is specified in the replacement table of the identification symbol, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. Specify using the index replacement work number.

Further, in the replacement of the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as in the effect replacement. , The display list command is always created using the index number on the CGROM of the master defined in the replacement table, and the effect content is drawn.

Further, by replacing the identification symbol every frame, it is possible to immediately return to the normal display even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the generation of noise or the like. In addition, by setting the reel according to the game state, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the content of the identification symbol even if a problem occurs in the replacement of the identification symbol due to an error. , It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

[25. Callback Timing]
Subsequently, the timing of occurrence of the callback when the effect SW is detected will be described. In the present embodiment, the drawing classification can be determined by the parameters passed to the function in the callback function to be called back.

FIG. 448 is a diagram showing an example of a drawing division that can be determined in the callback function at the time of executing the callback by the effect SW of the present embodiment.

Callback occurs before the start of LCD A drawing for "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A" and after the start of LCD A drawing for "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A". Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B" causes a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B" causes a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. Liquid crystal A and liquid crystal B are separate liquid crystals, and by making it possible to determine the completion of drawing before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, drawing is performed on the liquid crystal B when the drawing of the liquid crystal A is completed, or the drawing of the liquid crystal B is completed. It becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A as an opportunity.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before all drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after all drawing is completed. By making a judgment before the start of drawing, the frame buffer can be initialized with the required background color before drawing, and by making a judgment at the end of drawing, it is possible to instruct other staging devices to execute the staging when the drawing is completed. It will be possible.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before the drawing of the corresponding layer starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after the drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. A predetermined process can be executed before or after the drawing of a specific layer is started or completed. For example, if a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing the notification layer by making a determination before the start of layer drawing, it is possible to enlarge and draw the display of the notification having a high priority. In addition, by making a judgment after the start of layer drawing, the effect is drawn around the symbol drawn at the timing when the symbol with high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, so that the symbol with high expectation is drawn. It is possible to display the effect around the symbol only when is stopped.

As described above, it is possible to specify the drawing division and execute a predetermined process before or after the start or completion of drawing. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 448, "LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK" can generate a callback before the start of common block drawing, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK" can generate a callback after the common block drawing is completed. By making a judgment before the start of drawing the common block, the execution of a specific LCD effect block corresponding to a single effect that constitutes the LCD effect common block can be stopped to stop drawing the effect, or the LCD effect common block. By making a determination after the drawing is completed, it is possible to execute a liquid crystal display common block different from the liquid crystal display common block scheduled to be executed in advance at the start of the fluctuation.

Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR" generates a callback before the start of drawing the liquid crystal display block in the common block for the liquid crystal display, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR" generates a callback after the drawing of the liquid crystal display block is completed. Liquid crystal display block By making a determination before the start of drawing, it is possible to change the liquid crystal display block to be executed based on the result of external input by the player. Further, by making a determination after the start of drawing the liquid crystal display block, it is possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal display block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal display block that draws a single effect. Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST" can generate a callback before the start of drawing the still image and the moving image in the liquid crystal display scheduler data, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST" can generate the callback after the drawing of the still image and the moving image is completed. Various effects can be replaced by making a judgment before the start of drawing a still image or a moving image. Further, by making a determination after the drawing of the still image or the moving image is completed, it is possible to add the drawing of the effect according to the replacement contents of the various effects.

As described above, the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing category, so it is very important to determine the drawing category in the various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal display scheduler data for each liquid crystal display block, and an image or a moving image is drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the classification of the effect. Will be done. Further, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer.

When the effect is executed, an image or the like is drawn in parallel on a plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, the background layer background is drawn and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer when the step-up notice 1 is executed. Further, drawing is performed by the step-up notice 1 on the notice layer (notice_first half 1 layer). FIG. 449 is a diagram showing an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers at the time of executing the advance notice effect of the present embodiment.

At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer, but if it is attempted to manage these effect SWs individually, the processing may become complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the staging SW is grouped and managed for each layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the classification of the staging.

For example, the effect SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 449, the effect SW group background, the effect SW group symbol, and the effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and the division of the effect.

In this way, by grouping and managing the effect SW, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, when changing the currently displayed background and the pattern display and hold display that match the background to another background when a new fluctuation starts, the background layer, pattern layer, and hold layer are divided according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to hide the symbol display and hold display according to the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and hold display according to the new background in the corresponding layers, a plurality of patterns can be displayed. It is possible to switch the drawing only for the necessary effect display from the plurality of effect displays displayed by superimposing the layers.

In addition, in the effect that spans the game state, for example, in the big hit effect from the start of the change to the end of the change, the symbol is hidden and the background is changed to the big hit effect. It is also possible to display continuously. In such control, the effect group to be hidden is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which the effect SW full reset is specified is set to the liquid crystal effect common block at the start of fluctuation. It can be realized by defining it as a block common to the liquid crystal effect at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, in order to streamline the control of the complicated game production, all the productions are managed as common blocks in block units of a certain length. As a result, the production block is selected according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the advance notice lottery, and by drawing based on the selected production block, a series of productions such as a variable display of the design and a big hit are realized, and complicated control is performed. It realized the control to synchronize the drawing contents with the sub-effects such as the accessory, the lamp, and the sound output without doing it. The common block is set to a period divided at a predetermined timing from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the finalization of the symbol, and these periods are assigned to the fluctuation pattern, for example, corresponding to the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation. It was set according to the fluctuation time of the symbol.

With this configuration, the common block can be used universally with a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Furthermore, by ensuring the independence between the advance notice effect executed in the first half variation and the advance notice effect executed in the second half variation, the degree of freedom in combining common blocks can be increased.

However, as described above, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize an effect that continues from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the change only by combining the effect blocks of a certain length. When executing such an effect that spans a plurality of periods, in addition to the fact that the preceding common block and the succeeding common block are associated with each other and the versatility is reduced, each common block is executed independently. Therefore, there is a possibility that the control becomes complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the production. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to individually create and control the program code instead of setting the program data.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the present embodiment, not only the variable display of the symbol and the series of big hit effects are performed by combining the effect blocks of a certain length in all the effects, but also the length of the effect blocks. Is exceptionally configured to allow a staging block length that matches the staging period, rather than a fixed length. Further, by making it possible to draw by combining effect blocks having different effect times and drawing an effect block that straddles the combined effect blocks at the same time, it is possible to realize a drawing effect that continues from the start of the change to the end of the change.

An effect that spans a plurality of periods includes, for example, a countdown effect that counts down a number when the symbol starts to change and continues the countdown display from the first half change to the second half change. FIG. 450 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block spanning a plurality of periods of the present embodiment, where (A) is a symbol display and advance notice effect execution timing, and (B) is a liquid crystal notice effect block using a common block. , The configuration of the liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block spanning a plurality of periods is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 450, the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” corresponds to the first half fluctuation being “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the second half fluctuation being “normal short reach”. As shown in FIG. 450 (A), in the first half variation, the step-up notice and the BTN logo accessory fall notice are executed, and in the second half variation, the cut-in notice and the group notice are executed. The contents of each notice production are as described above. In addition, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

In FIG. 450 (B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect (step-up notice, BTN logo character fall notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block, and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice. The composition of the effect block of the countdown notice to be executed until the end is shown. The block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

The effect block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts, a liquid crystal effect notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the latter half fluctuation ends after the end of the liquid crystal effect notice block data. .. The function NOP that waits until the LCD effect notice block data starts is the NOP that is executed before the step-up notice starts, and the function NOP that waits until the second half fluctuation ends is the NOP that is executed after the group notice ends. The same waiting time is set.

As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the effect block, it is possible to operate the common block more flexibly. Further, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of the execution timing of other effect blocks being shifted due to the exception setting. The control of the exception common block is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW in the same manner as the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
For the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing, the drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is taken out from the frame buffer and stored in the storage area for capture of the built-in sound source VDP1540a separately from the frame buffer. So, I was doing processing such as reuse of images and transformation / additional drawing. In this way, by temporarily storing the drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various staging expressions have been efficiently realized.

FIG. 451 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which an image is written in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 451, conventionally, the image drawn on each layer is superimposed on the frame buffer and written, and then output to the display device.

Specifically, first, the moving image or still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed on the preview layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Finally, the moving image or still image related to the reserved layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command, and drawing data for one frame is created.

After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to the capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a. After adding a new effect around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, it is written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

By doing so, it is possible to easily create the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame simply by adding an effect to the created drawing data. However, in such image conversion by the conventional technique, only image conversion for one frame of drawing data can be realized, and in addition to the addition of new drawing elements for one frame of the liquid crystal drawing screen, one frame of drawing data can be realized. It is limited to enlarging or reducing the entire LCD drawing screen. It is not possible to perform image conversion on the drawing elements drawn on each layer on the capture buffer or on each drawing element in the layer.

The reason why the image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each effect, such as the background, the pattern, and the notice, are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order. It will be overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since the drawing element is a set of colored dots (points) when it is drawn on the frame buffer, even if you try to extract the drawing element with a rectangle, it will be overwritten by another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element of the overwritten part is lost.

At present, due to the improvement of the processing capacity of VDP, it is less necessary to reuse the image data for one screen of the drawn liquid crystal display, but the expression of the production is diversified for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. Therefore, it was expected that the load would increase to execute the complicated drawing process.

In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and perform a more diverse effect, the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. When newly drawing the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display instead of adding, the image can be dynamically changed during drawing in each effect display unit that constitutes the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display. A complex production expression is realized by adding a new drawing.

Specifically, a single staging drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one staging block, and the staging SW is included in the staging scheduler data for displaying by the staging block. Incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When changing the image, instead of drawing the corresponding effect block in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the recalled program function on the frame buffer, it was assigned to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a separately from the frame buffer. Draws on the off-screen buffer (temporary storage of image display information). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image only for a specific notice, adding a new image, and replacing the effect only for the background, the image can be changed for the image in which multiple effects are superimposed, and the new image can be changed. Additions can be realized.

Hereinafter, a configuration in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the image is written in the frame buffer will be specifically described. FIG. 452 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer and then writing it to the frame buffer in the present embodiment.

As described above, one or a plurality of image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers, which are different from the frame buffer, are allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a. Then, image conversion is performed with the image conversion buffer, and complicated image conversion is possible by combining the image converted on one or a plurality of off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

Further explaining, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data constituting each layer corresponding to the effect and each liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data, and is embedded when the display list command is created at the time of liquid crystal drawing. The callback function is called by the callback based on the effect SW, and the image conversion is performed in the callback function.

In FIG. 452, first, before starting drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. By doing so, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the symbol layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the symbol layer, an effect is added to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be added to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the advance notice layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when the drawing of all the staging elements related to the staging layer is completed, the display list command for rotating the staging drawing of each staging element of the staging layer is executed in the function called back based on the staging SW. create. By transmitting this display list command, each notice rotated in the off-screen buffer B is drawn, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Finally, all the staging elements of the reserved layer are written in the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed on the entire screen, but on each layer drawing unit, the drawing element unit constituting the layer, and the image conversion regardless of the order of drawing in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

The present embodiment is characterized in that a callback based on the same effect SW is performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within the period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timing are as described with reference to FIG. 448 described above.

Further, by performing image conversion by a callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is the target of image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of fluctuation-related drawing, the image is based on the lottery result value of the advance notice lottery and the result of interactive operation by the user's external input at the timing of creating the display list command that draws the image to be converted. It becomes possible to determine the conversion method.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on the animation data stored in the CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source to perform drawing at the time of executing the game effect. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in the buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command creation for one screen is completed, the external request DMA (transfer means). Was used to send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

However, at present, as the production specifications become complicated and the processing load increases, the processing time such as the advance notice lottery processing at the start of fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer synthesis processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems and the motor system The processing time of the motor data creation process due to the increase in the number is also increasing. Since the processing time of peripheral control such as staging is executed in a fixed cycle, if the above-mentioned high-load processing is executed in duplicate, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle. ..

Exceptionally, if the processing cannot be completed within the cycle, if the processing cannot be completed within the cycle constantly, the game control by the main control device and the staging control by the peripheral control device should be synchronized based on the processing cycle. There was a risk that the progress of the game and the production of the game by each production device would be separated from each other, and the interest of the game would be significantly reduced.

Therefore, it is necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by reducing the time required for the processing with a high load in the peripheral control processing such as staging. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drawing process having a relatively high load in the peripheral control process, particularly the above-mentioned processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating a native display list command that can be processed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, is set. A means for reducing the processing time and shortening the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device to a VDP1540a with a built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 453 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 453, first, various liquid crystal effect scheduler data are acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information (parameter values corresponding to the VDP register number and register number) related to the display list command to be transmitted to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that can be executed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. The converted VDP native display list commands are temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Further, when the callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c as needed.

Then, in the process of processing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the display list transfer to the external request DMA. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

When the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source receives the transferred VDP native display list command, it temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is changed from the buffer to VDP1540a by using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle in which the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting the enormous amount of liquid crystal display scheduler data for one screen into the VDP native display list command group is a heavy processing load. If a single gaming machine is configured to have multiple VDPs from different manufacturers, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is an intermediate data format, is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each manufacturer. It becomes possible.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is applied in which a part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 454 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring the display list command group in the present embodiment to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 454, first, the display list transfer setting is set to the external request DMA by the liquid crystal display scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the same manner as when the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the converted VDP native display list command group. And it is composed of interrupt display list commands.

The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP1540a based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module. The sound source built-in VDP1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

The built-in sound source VDP1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image in the frame buffer. Further, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, and a transfer interruption request is generated for the external request DMA. After that, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU1511a.

When the peripheral control MPU1511a detects an interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the interrupt processing module determines that the interrupt factor is an interrupt by an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. In the callback function, the display is replaced and the design is replaced by referring to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal display scheduler data. The method of replacing the effect is the same as the description using FIG. 439 and the like described above, and the method of replacing the symbol is also the same as the description using FIG. 439 and the like described above. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data correspondence callback information table, the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the corresponding effect SW are defined. The replacement information is confirmed by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the confirmed replacement information, and the command is transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP1540a. After that, the peripheral control MPU1511a transmits a display list command for resuming display list analysis to the sound source built-in VDP1540a. The sound source built-in VDP1540a analyzes the display list command for restarting the display list analysis, generates a transfer restart request for the external request DMA, and restarts the analysis of the display list command.

By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without any conversion of the VDP native display list related to all the effects other than the replacement. Instead, it is possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP1540a using an external request DMA (transfer means).

With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU1511a associated with the display of the image, and it is possible to speed up the image processing. Further, since the used area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list command group, and the infrequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed by the conventional procedure. As a result, the processing of the frequently used display list command can be shortened, so that the processing speed can be increased as a whole and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. In addition, display list commands corresponding to highly versatile images (moving images) are stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and different image processing depending on the model and version is performed by the conventional procedure to improve development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
The processors (CPU, MPU) used in the game control and peripheral control (effect control) of the gaming machine can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used in a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, each of which has a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. .. The floating-point type is a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and has sizes of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

Whether the processor used for peripheral control of the game machine is a CISC processor or a RISC processor, the data in the memory (ROM, RAM) is stored in 1-byte units at all addresses, and the data stored in all the addresses can be read and written. It is a machine. The address for reading and writing a plurality of bytes of data is not limited to this. When the processor reads multiple bytes of data, it always reads from the byte boundary, and an alignment violation occurs when the access crosses the byte boundary. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor, but for example, the execution of the program is delayed due to multiple memory accesses instead of being able to continue processing, or the processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of a run-time exception. Relax.

However, in the current development of gaming machines, when a program that controls a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur during program execution, and the program execution speed may decrease. In peripheral control of a gaming machine, it is necessary to complete all the processes within a predetermined processing cycle, so that the decrease in the execution speed of the program may become a big problem. In particular, since the production of a gaming machine is composed of a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and various information is stored in different types of data types. The data structure is adopted.

In order to solve the above problems, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure composed of a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored in the memory when the data corresponding to the data structure is stored. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area that stores. This adjusts the access start position of the data by the processor and arranges the information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address to prevent the occurrence of alignment violation and prevent the program execution speed from slowing down. Can be done. Adjusting the alignment for the data structures on all ROMs and RAMs is a huge task, so the load on the processor is heavy and the processing time is long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and RAM related to the conversion process, the control process related to the drawing of the liquid crystal, the lamp control process, and the like. In addition, there is no problem in adjusting the alignment other than the above-mentioned processing.

[31. Configuration to display multiple identification symbols]
By the way, in recent years, since a wide variety of productions have been required in order to enhance the interest of the game, the production contents on the production display device have become complicated and the drawing contents have become diversified. In the embodiment described so far, only one set of identification symbols for notifying the result of the variable display is displayed, and a relatively wide variety of effects are added to the variable display of the set of identification symbols for the game. Although it was mainly to proceed, there are some players who do not like a wide variety of productions, and the challenge is to develop a game machine that meets a wide range of player needs. In a configuration in which a wide variety of productions frequently appear, there is a risk of degrading the entertainment of the game. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that meets a wide range of player needs, a configuration capable of displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols having a peculiar aspect will be described below. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 allocates a plurality of display areas for variable display of the identification symbol to one or a plurality of display devices (display screens), and any player needs among different player needs. In order to deal with the above, it is decided to simultaneously proceed with the variable display of another set of identification symbols. Each display area is common in that the result of the variable display is notified by the identification symbol, but the display is performed in a different production mode such as the variation mode of the identification symbol.

[31-1. Aspects of the display area of the identification symbol]
FIG. 455 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of sets of identification symbols in a variable manner under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a in the present embodiment. (A) is a configuration example in which the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol are provided on one display screen of the effect display device 1600, and (B) is a configuration example in which the identification symbol is displayed on each display screen when the two display screens are provided. This is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B.

In the example shown in FIG. 455 (A), a display area A and a display area B of the identification symbol are provided on one screen, the display area A is assigned to the upper part of the screen, and the display area B is assigned to the lower part of the screen. The first identification symbol 8010 is displayed in the display area A, and the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed in the display area B. In the example shown in FIG. 455 (A), the display area A and the display area B are configured as display areas of the same size, and the display area A and the display area B are separated by a wavy boundary toward the center lateral direction. Has been done. Further, the first identification symbol 8010 is composed of a three-digit symbol of the first left symbol 8010a, the first middle symbol 8010b, and the first right symbol 8010c. Similarly, the second identification symbol 8020 is based on the three-digit symbols of the second left symbol 8020a, the second middle symbol 8020b, and the second right symbol 8020c, in accordance with the fact that the first identification symbol 8010 is a three-digit symbol. It is composed. The sizes of the display areas A and B are not limited to the same, and may be different.

The first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 start the variable display at the same time and stop at the same time. The stop timing of each symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is arbitrary, but the timing at which the stop mode of all identification symbols is finally determined is the same. Further, the final stop symbol is a combination of the same stop symbols (lottery result) so that the player does not misunderstand or give a sense of discomfort even if any of the identification symbols is recognized. For example, when the winning result is derived as a result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 are all the same symbol combination (for example, "777"), and the second identification symbol is synchronized with the combination. The individual identification symbols of the identification symbol 8020 also have the same symbol combination (such as "777" equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). Further, when deriving a non-reach loss result as a result of the lottery, a symbol combination (for example, "135") in which the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 do not constitute reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), (Such as "224"), and in synchronization with it, the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 do not form a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), and the symbol combination (equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). "135", "224", etc.). In addition, when deriving the result with or without reach as a result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 form the reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), but all of them are not the same. In addition to being a combination (for example, "131", "242", etc.), the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 do not form a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), and the symbol combination (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol are the same). It becomes "135", "224", etc. equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010).

It should be noted that the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B may be any symbol display mode in which the player can recognize that they have the same combination of symbols. For example, in one display area, a symbol display mode consisting of "Kanji numbers" (such as "123") is configured to display a combination of symbols, while in the other display area, a symbol consisting of "alphanumericals" or the like is displayed. It may be configured to display the symbol combination in the display mode (such as "123"). Further, both display areas may be configured to display the symbol combination in the same type of symbol display mode (for example, "123" is displayed in either display area). Further, when displaying the same type of symbol display mode, the display style (font) may be the same or different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is set to 3 digits, but it is possible to show the player an equivalent symbol combination as the finally derived symbol combination. For example, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may be composed of two digits, or the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may be four. It may be composed of the same number of digits or more. Although the details will be described later, in the first identification symbol 8010, the number of digits may be the same as that of the second identification symbol 8020 when the stop mode of the second identification symbol 8020 is finally determined. 1 In the process of displaying the variation of the identification symbol 8010, the number of digits may be temporarily changed to a number different from the final number of digits.

In this embodiment, the same type of symbol display mode (alphanumerical numerical symbol in this embodiment) is adopted in both the display areas of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, but each identification symbol is used. The mode of the additional decorative display added to each pattern is different. Specifically, the first identification symbol 8010 has an additional decorative display for each identification symbol, which has an impact on each identification symbol itself, and various effects are executed by the additional decorative display (these additional decorative symbols). Highly decorative dynamic display). On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 does not have an additional decoration display like the first identification symbol 8010, or at least has a simpler additional decoration display than the first identification symbol 8010 (low). Decorative dynamic display).

Further, the types of the symbols constituting the first identification symbol 8010 and the types of the symbols constituting the second identification symbol 8020 do not necessarily have to be exactly the same or have a strict one-to-one correspondence. For example, it is assumed that the first identification symbol 8010 has a number symbol (0 to 9) and a character symbol (for example, a symbol imitating an airplane) as symbols that are variablely displayed in each identification symbol according to the effect mode. The second symbol may be only a numerical symbol (0 to 9). Further, in this case, when the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped at the character symbol, the symbol is re-variated and the final stop symbol is controlled to be a numerical symbol. It is conceivable that the character symbol contains a special game element different from the numerical symbol, and while the numerical symbol is directly linked to the final lottery result, the character symbol is not the final lottery result but exclusively. It can be positioned as being used specifically for staging in the process of variable display.

In the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A, various effects are performed up to the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variation display (symbol variation) (highly decorative dynamic display). For example, in the variable display of the identification symbol, the high-speed display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the content of the identification symbol is switched to the low-speed display mode in which the player can recognize the content of the identification symbol at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as described above, by executing the callback based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, the identification symbol replacement table is based on the stop timing of the identification symbol and the stop timing of the identification symbol. And the reel index replacement work number table is used to replace the identification symbol, and the identification symbol is finely decorated until just before the stop, and the player who pays attention to the first identification symbol 8010 is given fun until just before the stop. It is supposed to be.

The first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A can change all or part of the identification symbols constituting the first identification symbol 8010 depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Therefore, the first identification symbol 8010 is variously changed in the progress of the game depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of symbol string data of the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A are provided (for example, symbol string data of 0 to 9, symbol string data of 0 to 9, etc.), and a gaming state. At the time of switching, switching of the effect mode, or selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the symbol string data selection effect SW corresponding to each of these multiple symbol string data types (for example, the symbol corresponding to the symbol string data of 0 to 9). By setting the column data selection effect SW1 and the symbol column data selection effect SW2) corresponding to the symbol column data of 0 to 9 to ON and setting the other effect SW to OFF, it is used for displaying the first identification symbol 8010. The design column data can be changed in various ways, making it possible to execute various effects.

Further, as described above, in the first identification symbol 8010, on the premise that the number of digits is the same as that of the second identification symbol 8020 at the time of final determination, the final digit is obtained in the variation display process. It may be configured to temporarily change to a number of digits different from the number. For example, although it will be 3 digits in the end, it will be displayed in 2 digits only for a specific period during variable display (for example, a reach fanning period that fuels whether or not the reach will be reached after the left symbol has stopped). Etc. can be exemplified. This may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like. For example, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like may be executed. As the defined effect SW, the digit number data selection effect SW corresponding to the digit number data (for example, the digit number data selection effect SW1 corresponding to the 3-digit digit number data, and the digit number data corresponding to the 2-digit digit number data). When displaying two digits using the selection effect SW2, etc.), various effects can be executed by setting the digit number data selection effect SW2 to ON and setting the other effect SW to OFF. ..

In the first identification symbol 8010, not only the identification symbol itself is changed to change the display mode, but also an effect using the additional decorative display made on the identification symbol is performed as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 455 (A), by displaying the star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010, a lottery result (hit, etc.) that is advantageous in the variable display during execution can be obtained. It may be suggested that it is likely to be derived. At this time, the degree of expectation may be notified according to the number and color of the additional decoration 8011 or the type of operation (for example, the number of the additional decoration 8011 is 1 → 3 → 5). The higher the expectation, the higher the color of the additional decoration 8011 in the order of white → blue → red, and the higher the expectation of the additional decoration 8011 in the order of stationary → vibration operation → rotation operation. Or). In addition, by displaying the same additional decoration 8011 on the right identification symbol 8010c, the player is made to pay more attention to the effect of the first identification symbol 8010, and it is more clearly suggested that the degree of expectation has increased. May be good. Further, different additional decorations may be applied to each identification symbol to notify the degree of expectation for deriving a more advantageous lottery result to any one of the first identification symbols 8010.

Further, as another example, an effect display control is performed in which a flame effect image (white, blue, red), which is an additional decoration display different from the above-mentioned star-shaped additional decoration 8011, is superimposed on each symbol included in the first identification symbol 8010. It may be executed and an effect of changing the color of the flame according to the degree of expectation may be executed (for example, the degree of expectation is high in the order of white → blue → red). In this way, when a plurality of additional decorative displays are provided for the first identification symbol 8010, a lottery is performed to determine which additional decorative display the peripheral control board 1510 displays based on the winning lottery result. Reflecting the determination result, the execution may be performed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like.

In the display area A, the additional decorative display added to the first identification symbol 8010 is drawn on a layer different from the layer on which the identification symbol is displayed. This makes it possible to control the display of the identification symbol in common regardless of the presence or absence and type of the additional decorative display. In addition, by drawing the identification symbol and the additional decoration display on different layers, it is possible to specify whether to display the additional decoration display on the front side or the back side of the identification symbol, which is set by the liquid crystal display scheduler data. If this is done, it can be automatically controlled when the production is executed. Further, as described above, whether or not to display the additional decoration display is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like, and the corresponding process is executed. It is possible to realize a more effective effect without complicating the effect control.

Further, in the display area A where the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, the character effect display may be executed independently of the identification symbol. For example, in a reach state where the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, an effect of displaying a character according to the degree of expectation (the possibility that an advantageous lottery result can be derived depending on the character type, action, etc.) It is also possible to execute the suggestion pattern effect).

Further, the background display of the display area A may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the lottery result in the variable display (design effect suggesting the possibility that an advantageous lottery result may be derived depending on the type of background display). Further, instead of changing the background display itself, an effect of changing only the background display color may be executed (for example, the degree of expectation is high in the order of white → blue → red).

As described above, in the display area A, the character effect display and the background display are also drawn on a layer different from the layer on which the identification symbol is drawn, so that the identification symbol is drawn on the front side of the identification symbol. It is possible to specify whether to display or display on the back side (for example, the character effect display is on the front side, the background display is on the back side, etc.), and if they are set in advance in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, when the effect is executed. It can be controlled automatically. As a result, the control for performing the variable display of the identification symbol can be made independent regardless of the mode of the character effect display, the presence / absence of change in the background display, and the type of the background display.

As another effect mode in the display area A, the operation instruction image of the operation unit is displayed on the front layer of the first identification symbol 8010 independently of the first identification symbol 8010, and the operation unit is operated by the player. An operation effect is executed according to the mode (a symbol effect suggesting that an advantageous lottery result may be derived from an operation-compatible image or the like). For example, when the player presses the effect button after displaying the button operation instruction image, the character is displayed according to the degree of expectation and the operation effect for performing a specific action is executed.

Further, in the display area A, an effect linked to the movable body provided in the game board 5a may be executed (an effect suggesting that an advantageous lottery result may be derived by the movement of the movable body). For example, by moving a movable body arranged at the upper part of the game area 5a to a position where a part or all of the first identification symbol 8010 is obstructed by the player's line of sight, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. May be good.

Subsequently, the display area B will be described. When the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B receives the variation start command and the variation display of the identification symbol is started, the variation display of the identification symbol is displayed after receiving the variation stop command or after the variation time has elapsed. Exits and stops at the specified stop symbol. While the identification symbol is variablely displayed, the display mode is such that it is difficult for the player to recognize the content of the identification symbol, and the stop symbol is displayed after the variation time elapses (low). Decorative dynamic display).

In the display area B, an additional decorative display made on the first identification symbol 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variable display of the identification symbol, and an operation effect are executed. There is no. Further, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, the control for changing the display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode is not executed. Further, even when the first identification symbol 8010 temporarily stops and re-variates, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 continues.

Therefore, in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for controlling the display of the second identification symbol 8020, the effect SW for changing the display mode such as replacement of the symbol is not defined, and the scheduler data is extremely simple. Since the staging control program only sequentially executes the contents defined in the liquid crystal staging scheduler data, the staging control similar to the case of performing highly decorative dynamic display is executed even with such simple scheduler data. Therefore, the execution of the effect by the effect SW or the like is only skipped.

If the display mode is not changed during the variable display, the mode of the second identification symbol 8020 may be changed. For example, the mode of the second identification symbol 8020 corresponding to the gaming state and the effect mode may be prepared in advance, and the mode corresponding to the start of fluctuation may be selected.

As for the background display, the background display for the display area B (background other than the display area A) may be drawn. In this case, a background corresponding to the gaming state and the effect mode may be prepared. In order to simplify the control aspect, the background portion of the display area B is made transparent, and the background display of the display area A is enlarged so that the background display common to the display area A is performed. You may.

As described above, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B is different from that of the first identification symbol 8010, and after the variation starts, a callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, or additional decoration is performed. Various effects such as display are not performed, but it is a simple one that specializes in waiting for which symbol combination is stopped and displayed. For this reason, in the display area B, the player does not feel uneasy about the type of various effects, and the game progresses with a game-like nature of watching over which symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the display area B, an additional decorative display made on the first identification symbol 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variable display of the identification symbol, and an operation effect can be executed. This is not necessary, and the background display may be set to be transparent, so that various layer settings such as the first identification symbol 8010 (display area A) are not required.

Further, in the upper left part of the screen shown in FIG. 455, a fourth symbol 8030 different from the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed. The fourth symbol 8030 indicates that the variation of the special symbol is from the start to the stop, and the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are displayed during the variation display of the special symbol. In the variable display, the special symbol fluctuation explicit display is performed to indicate that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped or stopped, the first identification symbol is displayed. While the 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are stopped and displayed, a special symbol stop explicit display indicating that the special symbol is stopped is performed. For example, even if the identification symbol is apparently stopped (temporary stop), the special symbol variation is clearly displayed in the fourth symbol 8030 until the result display of the variation display is completed. While the special symbol variation explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is rotated by 90 degrees at predetermined intervals and displayed as vertical stripes. Further, while the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is displayed in a state of being filled with a predetermined color. The fourth symbol 8030 is drawn on a higher layer independent of the layer for drawing on the display area A or the display area B described above. Further, unlike the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, the fourth symbol 8030 in the present embodiment is displayed so as to be recognizable from the outside under all situations including a customer waiting state. In the example shown in FIG. 455, the fourth symbol 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area A, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the fourth symbol 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area B. Alternatively, a display device (lamp device) other than the effect display device 1600 may be used to perform control corresponding to the special symbol change explicit display and the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030.

As described above, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 give the player what kind of lottery result was obtained, including the circumstances (hits, misses without reach, misses with reach, etc.). While it plays a role of transmitting, the fourth symbol is a game that tells what kind of game situation it is (whether it is in the variable display of the special symbol, in the stop display, or in the waiting state for customers). It plays a role of communicating to the designer and the game machine manager (or the player). That is, although the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 have similar roles, they have a role that cannot be played by the fourth symbol in terms of transmitting the details of the lottery result to the player. There is. Further, although the details will be described later, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of the special symbol or the waiting state for customers. On the other hand, the fourth symbol may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of the special symbol or the waiting state for customers in terms of always transmitting the game situation to the player. It has a role that cannot be played by the 1 identification symbol 8010 and the 2nd identification symbol 8020.

Further, a hold storage display 8040 is drawn at the lower part of the screen shown in FIG. 455. In the present embodiment, the hold storage display of the first special symbol is drawn in the lower left part of the screen, and although not shown, the hold storage display of the second special symbol is drawn in the lower right part of the screen. Further, in FIG. 455 (A), the hold storage display 8040 overlaps the display area B, but there is no problem as long as it does not overlap with the identification symbol. As described above, the hold storage display 8040 is drawn on an independent layer and is arranged on the front side of the layer corresponding to the display area B. As with the fourth symbol 8030, the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the hold storage display 8040 may be substituted with a display device (lamp device) different from the effect display device 1600.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the layer is defined for each display area. This makes it possible to execute the drawing effect independently for each display area, and the high-decorative dynamic display with a high effect effect executed in the display area A and the low-decorative dynamic display executed in the display area B. And can be executed in any combination. Since the combination of the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display can be defined by the liquid crystal display scheduler data, it is not necessary to change the staging control program itself, and the staging configuration can be easily created and changed. ..

Next, an example in which the identification symbol display area A and the display area B are provided on each display screen when the two display screens are provided with reference to FIG. 455 (B) will be described. In FIG. 455 (B), a display area is assigned to each physically different display device, and the display area A and the display area B are composed of display devices of the same size. The same reference numerals are given to the configurations having the same functions as the example shown in (A), and the description thereof will be omitted. The sizes of the display area A and the display area B are not limited to the same size, and may be different sizes.

In the example shown in FIG. 455 (B), a plurality of effect display devices are provided on the game board 5, a display area A is assigned to the main liquid crystal display device, and a display area B is assigned to the sub liquid crystal display device. In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, and the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 are drawn. On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed in the display area B.

In addition, instead of setting the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device as the display area A, the area for displaying the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 may be set as an area different from the display area A. Further, the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 may be assigned to the display area B.

In the example shown in FIG. 455 (B), the first identification symbol 8010 is in the reach state, and the decoration 8011 is drawn on the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c. Further, a preview image 8050 is displayed, which suggests that there is a high possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result in the fluctuation.

Further, in the second identification symbol 8020, all the identification symbols are displayed in a high-speed display mode during the variable display, so that the player cannot recognize all the identification symbols. In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is in the reach state, and the advance notice effect such that the advance notice image 8050 is displayed is executed. However, in the display area B, the above effect is not executed and the second identification symbol is executed. It only continues the low decorative dynamic display of 8020.

[31-2. Display area emphasis mode]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the display area A and the display area B perform variable display of the identification symbol in different display modes. In the following, one of them is performed by the player performing a selection operation (a switching operation unit (not shown) is operated) while the variable display of the identification symbol displayed in each display area is executed in parallel. A control for displaying a variable display executed in the display area of (highlight mode, large setting) with emphasis on the other display area will be described.

FIG. 456 is a diagram illustrating an emphasis mode of a display area for performing variable display of an identification symbol in the present embodiment, and FIG. 456 is a diagram showing a display area A and a display area B in a standard mode (specified size). The normal pattern to be displayed, (B) is the highlight pattern A for displaying the display area A in the highlight mode, and (C) is the highlight pattern B for displaying the display area B in the highlight mode. In the present embodiment, the display area on the non-emphasis side is set to a reduced wipe display (small setting, suppression mode), and the display area on the non-emphasis side is also in a state where the player can recognize it during the progress of the game. There is. It should be noted that the display area to be highlighted can be switched by operating a predetermined switching operation unit (switching button, etc.), and the special symbol changes even when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to switch even during display.

By operating the switching operation unit, the player can sequentially switch between (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasis pattern A, and (C) emphasis pattern B. As a switching mode, each time the player operates the switching operation unit, (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasis pattern A, and (C) emphasis pattern B may be switched in a predetermined order. However, the player may be able to immediately select the desired display pattern. As a configuration that allows the player to immediately select the desired display pattern, for example, a display pattern of the switching destination is set so as to correspond to each of a plurality of types of operation modes for the switching operation unit by the player. It is configured so that the player can immediately switch to the display mode desired by the player depending on the operation mode for the switching operation unit. Specifically, while setting a normal pattern for the display pattern of the switching destination corresponding to the first operation for the switching operation unit (for example, long press for 5 seconds or more), the second operation for the switching operation unit (for example, less than 2 seconds). The display pattern of the switching destination is emphasized in response to the short press of Emphasize the pattern Set the pattern B. For example, when the game is progressing in the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern B) of the display area B shown in FIG. 456 (C) by performing the third operation on the switching operation unit, the low decorative dynamic display is performed in a large area. The pattern change due to the above will progress. At this time, as shown in FIG. 456 (C), in the display area A displayed on the wipe, a display corresponding to a highly decorative dynamic display is made, and a "rare effect" is performed in the display area A. When the player recognizes that the pattern has been changed, the player can immediately change to the emphasis pattern A at the player's will by performing the second operation on the switching operation unit. An example of the "unusual effect" is a notice effect in which the character symbol (airplane) is temporarily stopped at the middle identification symbol 8010b, and when the character symbol can be confirmed in the display area A displayed on the wipe. By performing the second operation of the switching operation unit, it is possible to immediately change to the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern A) of the display area A. In addition, when shifting to the emphasis pattern A, character effects and character movements that were not displayed in the reduced area may be performed (FIGS. 456 (C) → (B)).

Further, even when the display area A as shown in FIG. 456 (C) is reduced (wipe) and displayed, it may be possible to execute an operation effect requiring a player operation in the display area A. .. When the display area A is reduced (wipe) and displayed, it is considered that the operation has been performed after a specified time from the start of the operation effect even if the player does not actually operate the switching operation unit. , The operation effect may be automatically advanced in the same manner as when the switching operation unit is operated. On the other hand, when the display area A as shown in FIG. 456 (C) is reduced (wipe) and displayed, an effect of driving an accessory corresponding to the display area A, for example, an identification symbol is temporarily displayed. Since it is necessary to change the operation mode of the accessory and the control becomes complicated in the effect of shielding and making it visible at a predetermined timing, the execution is suppressed (stopped).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 456 (B), when the mode for emphasizing the display area A (emphasis pattern A) is selected, the reduced (wipe) displayed display area B has a low decorative dynamic display and the symbol changes. As the above progresses, the above-mentioned "unusual production" will not be performed. Therefore, when the emphasis pattern A is selected, the background of the display area B is made transparent, and the effect of the display area B is also executed by performing the effect of the display area A. May be improved. Since it is necessary to maintain the visibility of the identification symbol in the display area B even when the display area B is wipe-displayed, the layer on which the identification symbol is drawn in the display area B is an image related to the display area A. It is preferable to set it as a higher layer than the displayed layer.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect sound effect is output corresponding to the variable display of the identification symbol in each display area. Specifically, since the first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A is subjected to variable display with various effects, an effect sound effect based on the effect mode, the game state, the variation pattern, etc. is output according to those effects. Will be done. Here, the sound (BGM, effect sound effect) output in association with the variable display of the identification symbol in the display area A and the effect to be executed is managed as one AUTO group, and the sound is controlled by the automatic channel method. As a result, even when the effects in the display area A are executed in duplicate, the upper limit of the channels used is limited, so that it is possible to suppress the consumption of resources due to the execution of the effects of the gaming machine. In addition, since it is possible to automatically output a sound having a high priority, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the staging control.

On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B is displayed in a high-speed display mode, and the output sound effect is simple (only the variable BGM and the stop sound). Therefore, when neither the display area A nor the display area B has a normal pattern (FIG. 456 (A)) that is not reduced (wipe) and displayed, the effect sound corresponding to the display area B is not output or the effect sound effect is not output. The output sound is controlled in such a manner as to suppress the output of the effect sound corresponding to the display area B by reducing the output sound. When one of the display areas is displayed in the emphasis pattern, only the effect sound effect in the display area displayed in the emphasis pattern is output, and the effect sound effect in the display area displayed in a reduced (wipe) manner is output. Is not output, or the output sound is reduced, and the output of the staging sound effect corresponding to the reduced (wipe) displayed display area is suppressed.

In the standby state in which the symbol variation is not displayed (starting memory is not held), one of the display areas is not reduced (wipe) as shown in FIGS. 456 (B) and 456 (C). , Each display area is displayed in a normal pattern as shown in FIG. 456 (A). This is because there is little significance in emphasizing one of the display areas when the variable display of the identification symbol is not performed, and the screen for attracting customers is designed on the premise of full-screen display.

In addition, when the power is turned off and then turned on while the special symbol variation display is being performed, each identification symbol is displayed in a predetermined manner. For example, it may be a highlight pattern A that highlights the display area A, or it may be a normal pattern. At this time, the symbol combination to be displayed is set to the symbol combination for the initial state (for example, "123") regardless of the result of the immediately preceding fluctuation. If the power is turned off without the symbol changing, and then the power is turned on, the wipe is not displayed until the symbol change starts (without displaying with the emphasis patterns A and B), and the normal pattern is used. Display the identification symbol. This is because, as described above, there is little significance in highlighting one of the display areas when the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.

In this embodiment, as described above, each display area is composed of different layers. In each display area, the area to be drawn differs depending on whether it is drawn in the emphasized mode or the reduced display. Specifically, the size of the entire layer is the same as the size of the entire display screen, and the drawing is performed in the designated display area (for example, the display area A). At this time, by converting the coordinate system of the drawing area, it is possible to draw by a common means even if the size of the area is different. Therefore, the display area is the same regardless of whether it is displayed in the default size (normal pattern), enlarged (emphasized), or reduced (wipe). Even if the actual size of is different, it can be drawn by a common means (program or data).

Therefore, only when a specific object (for example, a decorative image) is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, only the emphasis mode), a new object may be drawn. For example, when a decorative image is added to the identification symbol, a new layer for drawing the decorative image may be prepared and combined with the layer for drawing the identification symbol. At this time, by setting the priority of the layer on which the decorative image is drawn higher than the priority of the layer on which the identification symbol is drawn, the decorative image can be placed on the front side of the identification symbol when each layer is combined. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a common program or data is used for an object (for example, an identification symbol) to be displayed in the same image regardless of whether it is displayed in the emphasized mode or in the reduced display. On the other hand, when the decorative image is superimposed on the identification symbol, a layer having a higher priority than the identification symbol is prepared, and the decorative image is drawn on the layer to be on the front side of the identification symbol layer. By arranging it, the emphasis mode is drawn. As a result, for objects such as identification symbols that have the same drawing content in each display mode, it is not necessary to separately prepare programs and data for each display mode, and it is possible to use common programs and data. It suffices to prepare the minimum program and data that will be the difference. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the increase in image data due to the diversification of the effect contents, suppress the complexity of the effect control, and suppress the increase in the storage capacity.

[31-3. Screen transition]
Subsequently, an aspect of the variation display of the identification symbol from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 457 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition of a configuration in which the variation display of the identification symbol of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B, respectively, and the variation of a part of the identification symbol is stopped in the display area A. An example is shown in which the variation of the identification symbol stops in the display area B in conjunction with the above. FIG. 458 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition of a configuration in which the variation display of the identification symbol of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B, respectively, and the variation is stopped regardless of the display mode of the display area A. An example of displaying all the stop symbols in the display area B is shown. Each of the screens shown in FIGS. 457 and 458 is a screen showing the same state, and both are displayed in a normal mode. Hereinafter, each screen will be described.

(A) shows the state immediately after the variation display of the symbol is completed in the state where the starting memory number is 3. At this time, as described above, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 is stopped and displayed in a filled state. Further, the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area 2 are both stopped and displayed in a state where the identification symbol is "125".

(B) is a state in which the start memory is digested (start memory number 3 → 2) and the variable display of the symbol is started. The first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B are each displayed in a high-speed display mode. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 changes from the fill to the vertical stripe and is rotated and displayed.

(C) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped. In FIG. 457 (C), when the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is also stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 458 (C), even if the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, after the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 changes from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode, the variable display is stopped. On the other hand, when the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is stopped, the stop display is performed without shifting to the low-speed display mode. This is because the variable display of the identification symbol by the display area B is intended to notify the player that the identification symbol is changing rather than to enhance the effect of the effect, and to clearly display the stop symbol.

(D) shows a state in which the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (C). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, and the reach state is reached. In the display area A, the reach effect according to the variation pattern is executed, while in the display area B, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued without executing a special effect.

(E) shows a state in which the middle identification symbol 8010b of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the symbol (airplane) of the character (airplane) in the reach state. Here, the design of the airplane is a design indicating that the fluctuation display is restarted, and indicates the execution of so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation. Therefore, even when the middle identification symbol 8010b is stopped, the variable display of the fourth symbol 8030 continues, and as shown in FIG. 457 (E), the middle identification symbol 8020b of the second identification symbol 8020 is The variable display is continued in the high-speed display mode. When the first identification symbol 8010 continues to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time, then, as shown in (F), the re-variation of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is started. In the example shown in FIG. 458, the variation display by the high-speed display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued regardless of the display mode such as the re-variation of the first identification symbol 8010.

(G) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped after the re-variation of the first identification symbol 8010 is started. At this time, the decoration 8011 is overlaid on the left identification symbol 8010a, and it is notified that there is a high possibility (expectation) of obtaining an advantageous lottery result in the variation. As for the second identification symbol 8020, the effect according to the degree of expectation is not particularly executed, and in FIG. 457 (G), the left identification symbol 8020 is identified by the symbol corresponding to the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010. The symbol 8020a is stopped, and in FIG. 458 (G), the variable display according to the high-speed display mode is continued.

(H) shows a state in which the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (G). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c stop at the same symbol (“5”) to enter the reach state, and the decoration 8011 is also displayed on the right identification symbol 8010c. After that, as shown in (I), the middle identification symbol 8010b also stops at the same symbol (“5”) as the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c, and when the stop symbol is confirmed, the second identification symbol 8020 also becomes the first. It stops at the symbol corresponding to the identification symbol 8010, and the big hit effect is executed.

When the identification pattern is displayed by the highly decorative dynamic display, it is possible to realize a variety of effects and enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, when the identification symbol is displayed by the low-decorative dynamic display, it is possible to avoid the gorgeous effect and maximize the expectation for the symbol variation. In the present embodiment, a display area A for variablely displaying the identification symbol in a highly decorative dynamic display and a display area B for variablely displaying the identification symbol in a low decorative dynamic display are provided, and either one is selected or both are provided. By executing the variable display according to the display mode of the above in parallel, the player can play the game in a mode that suits his / her taste.

In addition, since the player can freely switch between the high-decorative dynamic display and the low-decorative dynamic display during the variable display, for example, an effect of notifying the degree of expectation is executed when a reach occurs. By highlighting the area A and highlighting the display area B in other states, the game can be played according to the situation.

In the above-described embodiment, the high-decorative dynamic display and the low-decorative dynamic display are executed in parallel, and the game is advanced in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player. You may. For example, while performing high-decorative dynamic display and low-decorative dynamic display in parallel, the player can see only one side of the display that the player wants, so that the player can see only the other side of the display. A movable body or the like (one-side concealing means) having a function of concealing the display so as not to be visible or difficult to see may be provided, and the display on the other side may be concealed by such a movable body. For example, the covering position that overlaps all or at least a part of the display area A in FIG. 455 (A) and the area where the movable body overlaps the display area A are smaller than the covering position, and the effect display performed in the display area A is easy to see. An upper covering movable body that can be moved to a retracted position (upper position of the display area A), a covering position that overlaps all or at least a part of the display area B in FIG. 455 (A), and a display area rather than the covering position. There is little area where the movable body overlaps with B, and the display is provided with a movable undercover movable body at the retracted position (lower position of the display area B) where the effect display performed in the display area B is easy to see. When the covering condition A for hiding the area A is satisfied (first specific operation for the switching operation unit by the player, etc.), the covering condition B for moving the upper covering movable body to the covering position and hiding the display area B is satisfied. By doing so (a second specific operation for the switching operation unit by the player, etc.), it is possible to exemplify the movement of the lower covering movable body to the covering position. As a result, for example, it is possible to concentrate the display on only one side desired by the player and proceed with the game without complicated control such as switching of the effect display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the progress process of the game, the high-decorative dynamic display and the low-decorative dynamic display are executed in parallel, but the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not necessary to execute the high-decorative dynamic display and the low-decorative dynamic display in parallel during the period, for example, leaving only the high-decorative dynamic display that can be positively appealed to the outside. The decorative dynamic display may be erased. For example, as shown in FIG. 456 (A) of the above-described embodiment, the game progress in the normal pattern of displaying the display area A and the display area B in a standard mode (specified size) is completed, and the customer waits after a predetermined time. Examples include erasing the display area B while leaving the display area A, erasing the display area B, and expanding the display area A to a large area when shifting to the state. If a new start condition is satisfied while waiting for a customer, the display of the display area B, which is a low-decorative dynamic display, may be restored.

[32. Applying the production block to the production that continues over multiple fluctuations]
Next, an example of applying the effect block to the effect that continues over a plurality of fluctuations will be described. In the above-mentioned example, the period from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is divided into a predetermined period, and the effect block corresponding to each period is defined. By combining these staging blocks, it is possible to suppress the complexity of staging control while realizing various staging. We also explained an example in which it is possible to define a staging block that exceeds a predetermined period, but it is limited to staging blocks that fit within one fluctuation, and for staging executed over multiple fluctuations. It was not enough to apply the staging block.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an example of applying the effect block to a series of effects executed over a plurality of fluctuations will be described. This is a mini character effect that is executed as a series of effects that are executed over multiple fluctuations, such as a timer effect that is executed as a look-ahead effect (advance notification effect) at the time of winning a prize, a background effect, and an effect mode that is executed and continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Will be explained.

[32-1. Control of look-ahead effect (advance notification effect)]
Before explaining the timer effect and the background effect executed as the look-ahead effect at the time of starting winning, the control of the look-ahead effect will be supplementarily explained.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening, the main control board 1310 executes the first starting opening passing process (FIG. 135) or the second starting opening passing process (FIG. 136) according to the starting opening that has won the starting winning, and starts. A random number value is extracted (acquired) as a memory (steps S5241 and S5251). Then, in the first special figure look-ahead process (S5245) or the second special figure look-ahead process (S5255), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or the special symbol is based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random number value. 2 The storage look-ahead effect command (see FIG. 90, hereinafter, “special figure look-ahead effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure look-ahead effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the received command. The command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (FIG. 98). Then, the received command is analyzed by the received command analysis process (S1022) of the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 95).

Upon receiving the special figure look-ahead effect command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the look-ahead effect control process in the receive command analysis process. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect for changing the start memory display and a process for executing the timer effect and the background effect described above are executed. The look-ahead effect control process may be called by the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95) by setting a flag indicating that the look-ahead effect command has been received in the receive command analysis process. good.

In the process for executing the normal look-ahead effect for changing the start memory display, a lottery is performed based on the special figure look-ahead effect command, and the mode of the changed start memory display is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the mode of the start memory display may be changed only when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure look-ahead effect command shifts to the reach state. The mode of the start memory display changes, for example, a color or a shape. Then, a normal look-ahead effect setting process for changing the mode of the start memory display is executed. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, a setting is made to change the display color of the start memory display, and a setting is made to output a sound effect, turn on a lamp, or move an accessory at the timing of the change. .. The processing for executing the timer effect and the background effect will be described later.

[32-2. Timer production]
The timer effect is a pre-suggestion effect that indicates by a countdown display that the execution time of the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result or the possibility of winning for a specific start memory is approaching. There are roughly two types of timer effects, which are controlled as one of the above-mentioned look-ahead effects, and the variation display for a specific start memory is performed before the variation display for the specific start memory is started. A timer effect that spans multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead timer effect) that counts down the period until a predetermined timing of A timer effect that does not span multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a timer effect within the fluctuation) that counts down the period from the predetermined timing after the fluctuation display for the specific start memory to another timing of the fluctuation display for this specific start memory. ,have. That is, both the look-ahead timer effect and the in-variation timer effect are pre-notification effects in which the symbol variation for a specific start memory is not completed, and a countdown display is performed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the count display is 0. However, the look-ahead timer effect is different from the variable timer effect because it displays a countdown on the display screen over a plurality of symbol variations. In addition, various values may be set for the initial value of the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer effect and the in-variation timer effect, but the average value of the initial values used in the look-ahead timer effect is used because it spans multiple fluctuations. The value is relatively larger than the average value of the initial values used in the variable timer effect. Since the present embodiment includes a characteristic element for the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the process for executing the look-ahead timer effect, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer effect. Since the look-ahead timer effect is a look-ahead effect that can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations as described above, it is sufficient to execute the look-ahead timer effect before the variation display corresponding to the received special figure look-ahead effect command is started. Determine if the time is secured. That is, it is determined whether the total of the fluctuation times of all the start storages reserved until the fluctuation is started is the specific time or more (40 seconds or more in this embodiment). Further, the effect content is determined together with whether or not the look-ahead timer effect can be executed, based on the hit of the start memory of the effect execution target and the fluctuation pattern of the start memory. In addition, the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is also determined when the effect content is determined. The execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is, for example, at the variable start time corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target, or before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. Either at the start of the reach of the variation corresponding to the stored start memory, or at the end of the variation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target is set.

The look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer count effect that displays a countdown and a timer end effect that is executed when the time is up. The timer counting effect and the timer end effect are executed continuously. Further, although the execution time of the timer counting effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer end effect differs depending on the length of the timer counting effect, it is in the process of being changed with respect to the start memory that is the read-ahead target, and is before or after the reach occurs. It will be various timings.

When the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, first, the execution time of the timer counting effect is determined. The execution time of the timer counting effect is determined based on the time from the start winning to the start of the variation corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. For example, in the present embodiment, 10 seconds is added to the total fluctuation time of the start memory held before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target, and it is set as the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect. The predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the time is set as the execution time (initial value of the countdown display) of the timer counting effect. Further, the content of the effect to be executed as the timer count effect (countdown effect pattern) is set. As the effect pattern during the countdown, for example, a pattern 1 in which the light emitting mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to a high-speed blinking as the countdown display progresses, or a specific pattern 1 provided on the game board 5 is provided. Examples include pattern 2 in which the emission color of the lamp is changed as the countdown display progresses, pattern 3 in which a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 is operated as the countdown display progresses, and these patterns 1 to 3 are pre-reading. It corresponds to the degree of expectation of the fluctuation of the production target, and is set by lottery. For example, it is set so that the degree of expectation for hitting increases in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, pattern 1 is easier to select in the case of hitting than in the case of hitting, and pattern 2 is different from the case of hitting. In both cases, both cases are selected at the same rate, and it is easier to select the case of hit than the case of out of pattern 3.

After setting the content of the effect to be executed as the timer counting effect (countdown effect pattern), the content of the timer end effect (countdown effect pattern) is set. In the timer end effect, for example, the characters "End !!" are superimposed on the identification symbol in the color according to the expectation (for example, the expectation increases in the order of black → blue → red) on the display screen. It displays for a predetermined time and makes sure that the player knows that the time has expired. As the post-countdown effect pattern, for example, the pattern 1 in which the character color of "End !!" is black, the pattern 2 in which the character color of "End !!" is blue, and the character color of "End !!" A red pattern 3 and the like can be exemplified. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the degree of expectation of a change in the look-ahead effect target, and are set by lottery. For example, it is set so that the degree of expectation for hitting increases in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, pattern 1 is easier to be selected in the case of hitting than in the case of hitting, and pattern 2 is easier to select in the case of hitting and hitting. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and the pattern 3 is easier to be selected in the case of hit than in the case of off. The post-countdown effect pattern is not limited to this, and not only the character color but also the character may be decorated or the character may be displayed, and the content of the message may be different for each. It may correspond to different expectations.

As described above, after making various settings related to the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect is executed (started) based on the condition that a predetermined start condition (the arrival of the start time of the look-ahead timer effect) is satisfied. As described above, the look-ahead timer effect is composed of the timer count effect and the timer end effect, and the effect blocks corresponding to the timer count effect and the timer end effect are individually defined. These effect blocks are defined in advance, and when the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, the effect block of the timer count effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are selected based on the execution time and the degree of expectation of the timer count effect. The effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer end effect may be selected individually, or the effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are managed as a set and selected for each set. You may do it. When the effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are selected, the effect block of the timer count effect is executed, and after the end of the effect block, the effect block of the timer end effect is executed.

Further, in the effect block of the timer counting effect, only the effect content is defined and the execution time can be set variably. As a result, it is not necessary to duplicately hold the effect blocks having the same content but different only in the execution time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity due to the diversification of the effect content. The look-ahead timer effect is not an effect in which the execution timing and the end timing are strictly determined as in the effect block corresponding to the fluctuation time described above, but is based on the execution time calculated based on various conditions as described above. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly respond to the calculated execution time of the effect. Specifically, the calculated execution time of the effect may be stored in a predetermined storage area, and the execution time of the effect stored in the predetermined storage area at the start of the effect block of the timer counting effect may be read out.

Further, if the execution time of the timer counting effect can be covered, an effect block may be prepared in advance so as to cover the execution time of the timer counting effect. Since the execution time of the timer counting effect may be within a predetermined range, it may be possible to limit the number of effect blocks to a realistic number even if all patterns are covered based on the number of holds and the fluctuation pattern (variation time). be. For example, if the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is one pattern, the time from the start winning to the start of the change of the look-ahead effect target is set as the lower limit, and the change time of the change is added to this time. Further, the range of the execution time of the timer counting effect can be specified by setting the upper limit of the time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the timer end effect. Since it is sufficient that there is at least one effect block having an execution time included in this range, it may be sufficient to prepare a minimum number of effect blocks. Further, only the staging blocks having a high execution frequency may be prepared in advance, and the number of staging blocks to be managed may be suppressed as the staging blocks in which the fluctuation time can be variably set for the staging blocks having a low execution frequency.

FIG. 459 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect block of the look-ahead timer effect of the present embodiment. FIG. 460 is a diagram showing an execution example of the look-ahead timer effect of the present embodiment. The execution example of the look-ahead timer effect shown in FIG. 460 corresponds to FIG. 459.

FIGS. 459 and 460 show an example in which the look-ahead timer effect is executed across the fluctuation 1 and the fluctuation 2. Fluctuation 1 is "normal fluctuation" in the first half and there is no reach, and fluctuation 2 is "normal fluctuation" in the first half and becomes a big hit after the reach occurs. It should be noted that the case where the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 460 (A), when variation 1 is started, variation display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol changes is 0. As described above, the variation 1 is a normal variation in which reach does not occur.

Further, the variable display of the symbol is continued, and the variable display of the left symbol is stopped at a predetermined timing. After that, a start prize is generated, and the number of pending symbol changes becomes 1. At the time of starting winning, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead timer effect can be executed. Here, the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, and the timer counting effect block and the timer end effect block are selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 460 (B), only the left symbol is stopped and the other symbols are in a variable display state, and the timer display unit is arranged at the lower right of the screen (time t1). In FIG. 460 (B), "START" indicating the start of the timer effect is displayed instead of the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 460 (C), the variation 1 ends, and the stop symbols of all the identification symbols are fixed (time t2). At this time, the timer counting effect continues, and the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect (timer counting effect) is displayed on the timer display unit.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 460 (D), the variation 2 to be read ahead is started, and the remaining time displayed on the timer display unit is continuously updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (E), when the execution of the timer counting effect is completed, the remaining time "0.00" is displayed on the timer display unit, the timer end effect block is executed, and the timer end effect is started. Is done (time t3). At this time, as the timer end effect, a message "end !!" indicating the end of the timer effect is displayed on the screen, or a notice image such as a character is displayed. As described above, the text color of the message displayed here is set according to the degree of expectation of the fluctuation. In addition, the content of the message may be set according to the degree of expectation of the fluctuation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (F), with the timer end effect continuing, the player stops at the same symbol "5" of the left symbol and the right symbol, and reach occurs. Further, as shown in FIG. 460 (G), the fluctuation of the middle symbol is stopped after the timer end effect is completed, and all the symbols are fixed. After that, as shown in FIG. 460 (H), the state shifts to the jackpot state.

In the example shown in FIGS. 459 and 460, the timer end effect is executed before the reach occurs, but the timer end effect may be executed after the reach occurs. At this time, since the reach effect and the timer end effect are executed in duplicate, the content of the timer end effect may be determined based on the content of the variation of the reach effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced due to the overlapping execution of the effect.

As described above, it is possible to define the effect to be executed over a plurality of fluctuations by the effect block, and it is possible to operate the common block more flexibly. By defining the effect that is executed as the look-ahead effect at the time of starting prize, such as the look-ahead timer effect, as in the above-mentioned common block, it is possible to standardize and simplify the effect control, and the development of the gaming machine is efficient. Can be transformed into.

Further, the control of the effect block that spans a plurality of fluctuations is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW, as in the case of other common blocks. As a result, it is possible to move the accessory and output the sound according to the progress of the look-ahead timer effect, and it is possible to realize a variety of effects.

[32-3. Background production]
Next, as with the look-ahead timer effect, a background effect, which is a pre-notification effect that suggests a lottery result for a start memory for which the symbol variation has not been completed, will be described. As an outline of the background effect, the background of the display screen is changed over a plurality of symbol variations, and the background effect is terminated at a predetermined timing during the change of the look-ahead target. In this embodiment, the background is restored when the reach is developed during the change of the look-ahead target.

FIG. 461 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect block for the background effect of the present embodiment. FIG. 462 is a diagram showing an execution example of the background effect of the present embodiment. The execution example of the background effect shown in FIG. 462 corresponds to FIG. 461.

FIGS. 461 and 462 show an example in which the background effect is executed across the variation 1, the variation 2, and the variation 3. Fluctuations 1 and 2 develop into reach when the first half fluctuation is "normal fluctuation" and no reach, and fluctuation 3 develops into reach when the first half fluctuation is "normal fluctuation". The description of the latter half fluctuation of fluctuation 3 is omitted. As with the look-ahead timer effect, the case where the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 462 (A), when variation 1 is started, variation display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol changes is 1. As described above, variation 1 is a normal variation in which reach does not occur. After that, the variable display of the symbol is continued, and the left symbol is stopped. Then, a start prize is generated at time t1, and the number of pending symbol changes is 2. Here, the execution of the background effect is determined at the start winning, and the background effect block is selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 462 (B), the background is changed from "mountain" to "sea".

After that, as shown in FIG. 462 (C), the variation 1 ends, and the stop symbol is determined (time t2). Further, as shown in FIG. 462 (D), variation 2 is started, and variation display of the identification symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462 (E), the variation 2 ends, and the stop symbol is determined (time t3). During this time, the background changed by executing the background effect is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 462 (F), the variation 3 to be read ahead is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462 (G), as the pattern changes to reach, the background effect ends, and the background of the "sea" returns to the background of the "mountain" (time t4).

The effect block for executing the background effect is selected and executed when the start prize to be read ahead occurs, as in the timer effect. The timing to end is the timing to reach the reach in the fluctuation to be read ahead, that is, the remaining time of the fluctuation being executed at the time of the start winning, the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation executed until the fluctuation of the look-ahead target is started, and the look-ahead. The total value of the first half fluctuation time of the target fluctuation may be calculated and set. Further, the execution time may not be set in the effect block for executing the background effect, and the background effect may be continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied. The end condition in this case is to detect that the read-ahead target has evolved into a reach state. The determination of the end condition is performed by a callback, and when the end condition is satisfied, the process for ending the background effect is called.

As described above, in the background effect of the present embodiment, the background display is continuously changed from the start of the background effect to the development of reach in the fluctuation targeted for the look-ahead effect. The player recognizes that the expectation of the fluctuation is high because the background returns to the original when the reach develops, and the attention to the latter half fluctuation becomes high.

On the other hand, if a reach occurs due to a change before the start of the change that is the target of the look-ahead effect, the background is temporarily restored when the reach occurs, and after the change is completed, the background display is switched and the background is displayed. Resume the production. As a result, even if the player is disappointed after the reach occurs, the expectation can be raised again and the interest of the game can be improved.

[32-4. Mini character production]
Next, the mini character production that is started when the production mode is switched will be described. The mini character effect is an effect in which a character (mini character) corresponding to the effect mode appears. Since the mini character displayed at this time is displayed only during the symbol change, the mini character is hidden when the symbol change ends with the number of pending changes being 0. The hidden mini character may be displayed again when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the mini character is continuously displayed over multiple fluctuations until it shifts to the customer waiting state. Hereinafter, the mini character production will be described with reference to FIG. 463.

FIG. 463 is a diagram showing an example of the mini character effect of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 463 (A), the game is continued in the "mountain" mode. In this state, as shown in FIG. 463 (B), when the "mountain" mode is changed to the "sea" mode, the mini character "whale" is displayed in the center left of the screen. To change the mode, switch the mode by operating an operation unit (effect button) (not shown).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 463 (C) and 463 (D), the reserved symbol change is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 463 (E), when all the reserved symbol changes are completed, the state shifts to the customer waiting state and the displayed mini character is hidden.

Since the execution condition of the mini character effect is that the symbol change is continuous, the mini character effect is continued as long as the symbol is changing even if there is no pending change. The execution condition of the mini character effect may be not only when the mode is changed, but also when a start prize is generated after the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period. By controlling in this way, a mini character appears even when the mode is not changed, which gives the player a surprise and enhances the interest. Further, the game state may be added to the determination condition as the execution condition of the mini character effect. For example, in a gaming state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, if the probability state is high, it is possible to suggest the current gaming state to the player by facilitating the appearance of a mini character.

Further, the end condition of the mini character effect may be, for example, a case where the display of the mini character continues for a predetermined time, in addition to the case where the state shifts to the customer waiting state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a premier feeling to the appearance of the mini character.

The mini character production is defined by the production block, and the end condition of the mini character production is determined by the callback during the execution of the mini character production, and when the end condition is satisfied, the mini character production is terminated. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the duration of the mini character effect in advance, and it is possible to flexibly determine whether or not the mini character effect can be continued depending on the conditions such as the transition to the customer waiting state and the game state. In this way, since the end condition of the mini character effect can be dynamically determined by the callback, it is not necessary to individually define the effect block corresponding to the execution time of the mini character effect, and the effect block is defined for each character. It can be easily managed.

It should be noted that the effect blocks for the effects that may span multiple fluctuations such as the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, and the mini character effect described above may be set in duplicate. In that case, the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, the mini character effect, and the like may be duplicated. Will be executed. Further, a plurality of effect blocks for an effect that can span a plurality of fluctuations may be overlapped at different timings. In that case, the start memory to be read ahead may be different in the look-ahead timer effect and the background effect, or the same start memory may be used. Even so, it is possible to make the start timing of each production different. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for subsequent fluctuations even after one of the effects is completed, and when the same start memory is a look-ahead target, the sense of expectation for the fluctuation is further increased. be able to.

In addition, when the automatic channel method is applied to output a staging sound effect in a staging that spans a plurality of fluctuations, it is different from the staging sound effect output in the staging executed by one fluctuation (for example, reach staging). The AUTO group may be assigned. For example, by making an AUTO group that can assign the sound effect of the effect executed by one variation to more channels, the output of the effect sound effect of the variation can be prioritized, but it is composed of a small number of channels. The sound effect of the effect that spans multiple fluctuations in the AUTO group (for example, the sound of "start!" Which is the start sound of the look-ahead timer effect, the counting sound which is the sound during the countdown (chitchitch, etc.), and the timer end effect sound. It is possible to prevent many channels from being occupied for a long period of time by allocating the sound effect of "End!").

Further, a different AUTO group may be set for each type of the effect that spans a plurality of fluctuations. For example, an AUTO group composed of two channels for the look-ahead timer effect and an AUTO group composed of two channels for the mini character effect are defined. As a result, even when the look-ahead timer effect and the mini character effect are executed in parallel, the effect sound effect of each effect can be output without being disturbed. Since the effect sound effect in the background effect is output constantly during the continuation of the effect like BGM, or is only output when the background is switched, the AUTO group for the background effect is not set for BGM. Channel (AUTO group) may be used instead.

It is possible to control the output of the staging sound effect, the operation of the movable accessory, the lighting of the lamp, etc. in the staging that spans multiple fluctuations such as the look-ahead timer staging, the background staging, and the mini character staging according to the liquid crystal display by the staging SW. Is. In particular, when the end timing of the effect cannot be specified at the start of the effect, it is difficult to control the effect device at the timing preset by the sub-effect block data. Therefore, the effect switch cooperates with the liquid crystal display to control the effect device. It is possible to realize a production with a sense of unity by controlling. In addition, when outputting the effect sound effect of the effect for which the end timing of the effect is not specified at the start of the effect, the sub-effect block data for outputting the corresponding effect sound effect is repeatedly executed during the continuation of the effect, and at the end of the effect. The execution of the sub-effect block data may be stopped.

On the other hand, when the end timing of the effect can be specified at the start of the effect, such as the look-ahead timer effect, the liquid crystal effect block data for displaying the effect and the sub-effect block data for producing the effect with sounds or characters are displayed in parallel. It is possible to execute. This makes it possible to independently define the display effect and the effect by sound, a character, or the like, and it is possible to freely combine various effect block data to configure the effect. For example, multiple types of liquid crystal effect block data that defines the display mode of the timer in the timer counting effect and sub-effect block data that defines the notification sound output when the timer counting effect is executed are prepared and freely combined. You can diversify the variations of the production.

[33. Configuration to display multiple identification symbols 2]
By the way, in recent game machines, a wide variety of effects are executed in the effect display device 1600 in order to enhance the interest of the game, but the identification symbols are displayed in order to make the player surely visually recognize the variable display of the identification symbols. There was a risk that the production area would be narrowed depending on the area. In order to prevent this, the area for displaying the identification symbol was temporarily reduced. However, continuing the variable display while changing the display area of the identification symbol may complicate the control or increase the load on the control. Further, it is necessary to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game by making the mode of reducing or enlarging the identification symbol suitable for the content of the production.

Therefore, the effect display device 1600 is provided with a plurality of display areas for displaying the variation of the identification symbol, and is configured to simultaneously proceed with the variation display of the plurality of sets of the identification symbols. The configuration for displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in different modes (highly decorative dynamic display, low decorative dynamic display) in order to meet the needs of the player has been described with reference to FIG. 455 and the like, but will be described below. In the embodiment, the variation display of the identification symbol is configured so that the player can visually recognize the variation display of the identification symbol in at least one of the display areas during the symbol variation. At this time, the decoration mode of the identification symbol in each display area may be the same or different.

[33-1. An example of a configuration in which identification symbols are displayed simultaneously in multiple areas]
FIG. 464A is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed in each of the plurality of display areas of the present embodiment. The display area A occupies about 70% of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 from the upper part. Further, the display area B occupies the lower right area when viewed from the front of the entire display area. In addition, the hold display is arranged at the lower left of the screen. Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is displayed by a light emitting body such as an LED or a lamp (not shown).

In the example shown in FIG. 464A, first, as shown in (A), the starting memory is digested and the variable display of the identification symbol is started. At this time, the variable display of the first identification symbol is started in the display area A (first display area), and the variable display of the second identification symbol is started in the display area B (second display area). In the present embodiment, the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol displayed in the display area B are displayed in substantially the same manner, but the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A is displayed. The second identification symbol displayed in the display area B may be any symbol display mode in which the player can recognize that the second identification symbol is an equivalent symbol combination.

Further, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol start variable display at the same time and stop at the same time, and the timing at which the stop mode of all the identification symbols is finally determined is the same. In the present embodiment, the stop timings of the individual symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol are also set at the same time, but if the confirmation timing of the symbols is the same, the stop timing of each symbol is arbitrary. May be good.

The screen layer shown in FIG. 464A is composed of a background layer, a symbol layer (first identification symbol), a symbol layer (second identification symbol), a notice layer, and the like. In the present embodiment, since the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are displayed in the same manner, it is possible to change the coordinates and size for displaying the identification symbol and divert other drawing information. As a result, drawing data can be shared and the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to standardize the drawing process, and it is possible to prevent the program structure from becoming complicated.

Similar to the above-mentioned example, the first identification symbol is subjected to various effects up to the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variation display (symbol variation, dynamic display). For example, when the identification symbol is switched from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode, the identification symbol can be replaced by executing a callback based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, and the identification symbol can be decorated until just before the stop. can. Further, in the present embodiment, the second identification symbol is also varied and displayed in the same manner as the first identification symbol, but it is also possible to change the effect content according to the display area. Further, the display mode of the second identification symbol may be changed based on the effect SW defined in the first identification symbol. As a result, the variable display of the first identification symbol and the variable display of the second identification symbol can be smoothly linked.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the symbol is started, the left identification symbol, the right identification symbol, and the middle identification symbol are stopped in this order. FIG. 464A (B) shows a state in which the left identification symbol of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol is stopped. At this time, a notice character in the shape of an airplane is displayed on the upper right side of the display area, and a notice character in the shape of a tree is displayed in the lower part of the display area. Each notice character is drawn on a different layer, and the image can be individually changed or deleted. This makes it possible to independently execute a plurality of advance notice effects according to the degree of expectation of the variable display.

The character of the airplane displayed as a notice effect is displayed while being enlarged by performing an effect in which the character of the airplane is visually recognized so as to approach the front of the screen according to the expectation of the big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 464A (B), the character of the airplane is displayed in a reduced state in the upper left portion of the display area, and is gradually enlarged as the variable display progresses. FIG. 464A (C) shows a state in which the variation display of the right identification symbol has stopped and reach has occurred. The character of the airplane has moved to the upper center and is displayed larger than the character shown in FIG. 464A (B). After that, as shown in FIG. 464A (D), in the reach state, the advance notice effect in which the additional decorative display is made on the first identification symbol is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 464A (E), the display of the character of the airplane is further enlarged and displayed on the front side of the first identification symbol. At this time, the middle identification symbol of the first identification symbol is hidden by the character of the airplane, and then the character of the airplane is further enlarged, and the display of the first identification symbol is interrupted as shown in FIG. 464A (F). Will be done. At this time, the variable display of the first identification symbol may be continuously displayed on the back side of the enlarged airplane character without stopping the variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 464A (G), the variable display of the identification symbol ends, and the final display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 464A (H), the result of the variation display becomes a big hit, and the game shifts to the big hit game state.

Subsequently, the second identification symbol will be further described. As shown in FIGS. 464A (A) and 464A (B), the second identification symbol is similarly variable-displayed as the first identification symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 464A (C), when the left identification symbol and the right identification symbol stop at the same identification symbol “5” and reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 464A (D), the first identification symbol Similarly, an additional decorative display is also made on the second identification symbol.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 464A (E) and 464A (F), even if the player cannot visually recognize the first identification symbol due to the advance notice effect in the variation display after the reach occurs, the variation display of the second identification symbol is performed. Is in a state where the player can visually recognize.

In the present embodiment, at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol can be visually recognized by the player during the variable display of the identification symbol. Therefore, even if the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol cannot be visually recognized, the additional decoration is displayed on the second identification symbol in the same manner as the first identification symbol, so that the decoration mode of the identification symbol changes. The expected degree of big hit can be surely notified to the player.

Further, the additional decoration of the first identification symbol and the additional decoration of the second identification symbol may be different. For example, the number of stars of the additional decoration is 5 for the first identification symbol having a wide display area, and the display area is narrow. In the second identification symbol, the maximum number of stars of the additional decoration may be set to 3 so that the player can easily recognize it. It is also possible for the player to determine that a notice image with a high expectation is displayed such that the first identification symbol is hidden while only the second identification symbol is displayed, and the second identification is also possible. If there is no additional decoration of the symbol, even if a preview image that hides the first identification symbol is displayed, it may be judged as a so-called ghosting effect with low expectation.

The first identification symbol and the second identification symbol may be drawn on the layer corresponding to each display area by using common image data, and the additional decoration may be set for each display area. In this way, by variablely displaying the identification symbol in multiple areas and sharing a part of the image data required for the variable display, the capacity for storing the image data can be saved and the variety of effects can be achieved. Can be done.

Further, not only the image data but also the liquid crystal display scheduler data for variablely displaying the identification symbol in each display area may be shared. For example, by parameterizing the display position (coordinates) of the identification symbol, layer-related information, etc. and processing them in a common procedure, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the production-related program and flexibly respond to changes in the production specifications. Is possible. Further, whether or not to display the additional decoration is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like, and the corresponding process is executed. It is possible to realize a more effective effect without complicating the effect control.

In the example shown in FIG. 464A, the notice image (character) is displayed on the front side of the identification symbol so that the visibility of the identification symbol is hindered. The same applies even when the visual recognition of the variable display of the identification symbol is obstructed by the operation of the accessory. For example, even if the accessory moves to the front side of the display area and it becomes difficult to see the accessory except for the lower part of the screen, the movable area of the accessory may be set so that the display area B can be visually recognized.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the notice effect makes it difficult to visually recognize the first identification symbol, and there is a period during which only the second identification symbol can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, a callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol of the second identification symbol, and the replacement table of the identification symbol and the reel index replacement work number are executed based on the stop timing of the stop symbol and the symbol at the switching timing of the identification symbol. By replacing not only the second identification symbol but also the first identification symbol using the table, the identification symbol is decorated until just before the stop. As a result, the decoration for the first identification symbol and the decoration for the second identification symbol can be executed at the same timing or at the timing of interlocking with each other, the effect of the effect can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the display area B for displaying the second identification symbol does not have to be fixed. The arrangement of the display area B may be changed according to the type of the advance notice effect, and the position where the second identification symbol is displayed may be changed. For example, the coordinates of the layer corresponding to the display area B are set to a value corresponding to the advance notice effect. Further, a plurality of layers corresponding to the display area B may be prepared. At this time, a plurality of types of layers are prepared corresponding to the positions where the second identification symbol is displayed, the parameter for displaying the corresponding layer according to the type of the preview effect is set to ON, and the parameter of the layer not to be displayed. Is set to OFF. With this configuration, it is possible to display the second identification symbol at a preset position, and it is also possible to display the identification symbol separately from the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol. By setting the parameters of all layers to OFF, it is possible to display only the first identification symbol.

The display of the layer corresponding to the display area may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect, and the like. For example, if the movable accessory moves to the front left of the screen, making it difficult to see the left side of the screen, the effect SW for setting the display area B on the right side of the screen is set to ON to display the second identification symbol. However, the effect SW displayed at another position may be set to OFF.

Further, the effect sound effect is output corresponding to the variable display of the identification symbol in each display area, but in the present embodiment, the variable display of the first identification symbol and the variable display of the second identification symbol are executed in a similar manner. Therefore, a common staging sound effect may be output. Further, when only the display area B having a narrow area is displayed due to the advance notice effect being executed in the front, the volume of the effect sound effect is lowered, the output of the effect sound effect is stopped, or the like. , The output related to the advance notice effect may be prioritized and the output of the sound related to the variable display may be suppressed.

Furthermore, the sound related to the variable display of the identification symbol (BGM, effect sound effect) is managed as one AUTO group, and the sound related to the advance notice effect (BGM, effect sound effect) is managed as another AUTO group, and the automatic channel method is used. Sound control is performed by. At this time, by setting a high priority of the AUTO group that outputs the sound related to the advance notice effect, it is possible to automatically give priority to the output of the sound output by the advance notice effect, which complicates the effect control. Can be suppressed. As described above, by setting parameters such as sound output availability and volume suppression value, it is possible to suppress the output of other effect sound effects that are output while the sound related to the preview effect is being output. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the identification symbol being displayed in a variable manner due to a notice effect or the like, the identification symbol is variablely displayed in a plurality of display areas. Since it is sufficient for the player to visually recognize the variable display of the identification symbol, it is possible to relax the limitation of the area where the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to relax the restrictions on the range in which the movable accessory can operate.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the variable display in a plurality of display areas is executed in the same manner, it is possible to draw using a common program or image data. On the other hand, even when the decorative image is superimposed on the identification symbol for each display area, a layer to be displayed on the front side of the identification symbol is prepared for each display area, and only the program and image data corresponding to the decorative image are prepared. Can be realized with. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare the minimum programs and data that will be the difference, and it is possible to suppress the increase in image data due to the diversification of the production contents, suppress the complexity of the production control, and suppress the increase in the storage capacity. Can be done.

[33-2. Modification example of a configuration in which identification symbols can be displayed simultaneously in multiple areas 1]
In the above-mentioned configuration example, the identification symbol is variablely displayed in the display area A and the display area B from the start to the stop of the change of the identification symbol, but here, the identification symbol is displayed in an independent manner in each display area. An example in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed and the variable display is performed in the same manner (synchronized) in each display area when a predetermined condition is satisfied will be described.

FIG. 464B is a diagram showing an example in which identification symbols are independently variablely displayed in a plurality of display areas of the present embodiment and are variablely displayed in the same manner at predetermined timings. In this modification, the variable display of the identification symbol is started at the same time in each display area, but as shown in (B), even if the left symbol is stopped in the display area A, the left symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area B. The variable display is continued without being done. Similarly, as shown in (C), even if the right symbol stops in the display area A and the left and right symbols form a reach mode, the variable display of all the identification symbols continues in the display area B.

Subsequently, after the reach mode is formed in (C), after the reach effect for a predetermined period has progressed, the identification symbols are re-variated as shown in (D) in order to re-variate all the symbols on the left, middle, and right. The symbol (“Next”) indicating the above is displayed in the middle symbol, and as shown in (E), the variable display of all the identification symbols is restarted. Subsequently, as shown in (F), the left and right symbols stop so as to form a reach mode. At the timing of reaching this reach, the reach mode is not formed in the second identification symbol in the display area B. As described above, after the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A forms the reach mode, the symbol indicating the re-variation of the identification symbol is displayed in the middle symbol, so that the re-variation is performed. Therefore, when the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A becomes the reach mode, the second identification symbol does not form the reach mode when the second identification symbol changes again, and the second identification symbol does not change again. When the symbol forms a reach mode, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the player is re-variable by looking at the display of the second identification symbol, which may lead to a decrease in interest (particularly, the above-mentioned re-variable symbol). It is necessary to maintain as much as possible the interest that players may be re-changed because of the game specifications that raise the expectation of big hits by stopping and repeating re-variation). Therefore, in this modification, such a problem is solved by preventing the second identification symbol from forming the reach mode at the timing when the first identification symbol forms the reach mode. Then, after the reach mode is formed in the first identification symbol and a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a high-expected effect reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit is performed after the reach is reached), as shown in (G), the second The display of the identification symbol is set to the reach mode as in the mode of the first identification symbol, and thereafter, the display area B is additionally decorated in the same manner as the display area A, and the display area B is also in the same display mode as the display area A. The identification symbol is displayed. (H) and (I) are the same as (G) and (H) in FIG. 464A. In FIG. 464B, for example, after the timing when the high expectation reach effect is performed, the display of the second identification symbol in the display area B has the same mode as the first identification symbol (in other words, the first identification symbol has the same mode. For a predetermined period after reaching the reach, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol have different display modes), and the display area B is also provided with the additional decorative display as in the display area A. , This timing can be triggered by other predetermined conditions.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, the time when the last re-variation is started while the temporary stop of the identification symbol is repeatedly executed, or the start timing of the re-variation after the last temporary stop in the pseudo-ream. You can also do it. Further, the start timing of the reach effect may be the timing at which the display modes of the respective display areas are the same.

As another predetermined condition, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the advance notice effect by the specific movable accessory is executed, for example, when there is a possibility that a part of the display area cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the display mode of each display area may be the same from the beginning assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied from the start of the fluctuation, or may be matched with the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the specific movable accessory. The execution timing of the advance notice effect is, for example, the elapsed time from a specific timing such as the start of fluctuation. Further, when the movable accessory is operated by the operation of the effect button, the display mode of each display area may be controlled to be the same with the operation of the effect button as a predetermined condition.

Further, when the expectation of a big hit is high, a predetermined condition may be satisfied. This is because there is a high possibility that a flashy production will be performed in addition to the production by the movable character. Also in this case, it may be assumed that the predetermined conditions are satisfied from the start of the fluctuation. Further, the various timings described above may be combined, and may be, for example, a timing for executing a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit or a timing for starting the final provisional variation when executing an effect with a movable accessory. ..

As described above, according to the present modification, as in the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the identification symbol in each display area is made equivalent while maintaining the effect of relaxing the limitation of the area for executing the advance notice effect. By adjusting the (synchronizing) timing, it is possible to realize various effects. In addition, the control load is reduced by simplifying the display mode of a part of the display area (low-decoration mode) in the first half when the production frequency of the effect by the movable accessory is low, and in the second half when the effect with high expectation is performed. By using the same display mode (highly decorative mode) in all display areas, it is possible to suppress restrictions on the content of the production, such as restricting the operating range of the movable accessory, and enhance the interest of the game. Can be done.

[33-3. Modification example 2 of the configuration that can display the identification symbol in multiple areas at the same time]
In the example described above, the identification symbols are variablely displayed in the same display mode in each display area, and then stopped and displayed with the same symbols. On the other hand, in the modification described here, it is possible to stop and display the identification symbol in a different mode (symbol) after the variable display of the identification symbol is performed in each display area.

FIG. 464C is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbols are variablely displayed in each of the plurality of display areas of the present embodiment and stopped at different symbols. Since (A) to (F) are the same as the example shown in FIG. 464A, the illustration of (C) to (E) is omitted. It should be noted that the identification symbol may be variablely displayed in the same manner as in the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 464B, and the stop symbol in each display area may be different as in the present modified example 2.

In this modification, when a plurality of types of hit types are prepared and the stop display is performed in the same mode (identification symbol) in each display area, "first hit" is shown, but different modes in each display area. When the stop display is displayed with (identification symbol), it indicates a "second hit" (for example, a "small hit") different from the "first hit". As shown in FIG. 464C (G), in the display area A, the identification symbols are all stopped and displayed at the same "5", "5", and "5", while in the display area B, the middle symbols are different and the identification symbols "5". "V" "5" is displayed as a stop. In this modification, when, for example, a small hit is prepared as the second hit, as shown in FIG. 464C (H), the result of the symbol variation becomes the "second hit", and when the "second hit" is won, The game ball can be accepted in the V zone arranged in the game area. When a game ball wins in the V zone, for example, it becomes possible to shift to a high probability state.

As described above, according to the present modification, it is possible to notify the player of the detailed contents of the hit by indicating the type of hit by the combination of the identification symbols stopped and displayed in the plurality of display areas. .. For example, it is also possible to indicate whether or not the stop symbol in the display area A is "hit" and to indicate the type of "hit" in the stop symbol in the display area B.

Further, the combination of the stop symbols in each display area makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand the result of the variable display. Specifically, when the stop symbol of the display area A indicates "hit", the stop display is displayed with the same identification symbol so that the player can clearly recognize that the hit is a hit. It is better not to misidentify the display area B as well. For example, when the result of the variable display is "off", the display area B may be stopped and displayed with the same identification symbol so as not to be misidentified by the player. In the case of so-called "big hit", the same identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area A, while in the case of "small hit", which is given less game value than "big hit", the same identification is made only in the display area B. It may be stopped and displayed by a symbol.

When suggesting the type of "hit" depending on the display mode of the display area B, for example, when the display is stopped and displayed with the same identification symbol as the display area A, it is regarded as a "probability variable big hit", or the same as the display area A. When the stop display is displayed with the identification symbol, it may be set as a "normal big hit" that does not shift to the probable change state. Further, only the middle symbol may be used as another identification symbol to recognize the type of big hit, and as described above, if the middle symbol is "V", it may be shown that the game ball can be accepted in the V zone. , The number of rounds may be suggested by stopping the symbol corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit game in the medium symbol.

Further, the display area B may be hidden when the identification symbol is stopped, and the player may be given a sense of expectation without notifying the type of "hit" while notifying that it is a "hit". For example, the player's expectation may be increased by making it ambiguous whether or not the probability fluctuates after the big hit. Further, the display area B may indicate an advantageous gaming state (probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, etc.) generated after the end of the big hit game.

Further, after notifying the player of the big hit in the display mode in the display area A, the display of the identification symbol may be continued only in the display area B. If the display of the display area B is continued, the player can recognize that it is a big hit, and after notifying the big hit, the identification symbol in the display area A is hidden to perform the subsequent effect. The area can be secured. Further, in this case, the display that was set to "5", "V", and "5" at the start of the big hit in the display area B was displayed in the display area A from the middle of the big hit game, "5", "5", and "5". It may be displayed so as to match. Further, this display may be displayed until the big hit game ends and the identification symbol starts to change in the game after the big hit game ends, or the display may be stopped at a predetermined timing in the middle of the big hit game. .. However, even if the display is stopped in the middle of the big hit game, it is preferable to display the display area A or the display area B corresponding to the hit symbol when the game after the big hit game is started. In this case, for example, in the display area B, "5", "V", and "5" are displayed at the hit timing, but after the big hit game is finished, they may be changed to "5", "V", and "5", and the big hit. The display may be changed to "5", "5", and "5" with the game in between.

According to this modification, as in the above-described embodiment, by performing variable display of the identification symbol in a plurality of display areas, it is possible to relax the limitation of the area for executing the advance notice effect, and the stop symbol in the plurality of display areas. It is possible to notify the player of the result of the game in detail by the combination of the above, and further, it is possible to realize various notification modes. As a result, the expectation of the player can be raised, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[34. Substrate that is a component of the decoration]
By the way, in recent game machines, in order to realize a wide variety of effects, the number of accessories (decorative bodies) mounted on the game machines has been increased, and the game has been improved by increasing the size and deformation. However, since the size of the gaming machine is set to a predetermined size, the gaming area is limited, and the size and arrangement of the accessory are limited due to factors such as the increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, there is a risk that the production will be monotonous and the interest in the game will be reduced. The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a means for increasing the size of the accessory and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

The accessory provided in the gaming machine is visible from the player or the front side, and a decorative part with a high degree of decoration is arranged to enhance the interest of the game, and a light emitting body such as an LED is provided inside. , It emits light in a mode according to the game state and the expected degree of variation display. If the illuminant is arranged on a substrate like an LED, the decorative portion includes a transmissive portion capable of transmitting the light output from the illuminant. The transmitting portion may be, for example, a transparent member capable of transmitting light, or may have holes formed in a mesh pattern so that light can pass through the holes.

On the other hand, by providing the transmissive portion, the substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs and resistors are mounted can be visually recognized by the player through the transmissive portion. Usually, the substrate is equipped with electronic components necessary for exhibiting the effect of the effect, and is not premised on being visually recognized by the player. However, in the decorative portion having a transmissive portion through which light can pass, the substrate arranged inside the decorative portion may be visually recognized by the player, and the decorative effect may be reduced.
On the other hand, if the substrate is made invisible by reducing the transparency of the transmissive portion or by using a material that reflects light from the outside on the surface of the transmissive portion, the expected effect may not be obtained. be. Further, if the LED is arranged at a position where the player cannot see from the outside of the decorative portion or the transparent portion, the size of the decorative portion may be unintentionally increased.

Therefore, it is an object of the present embodiment to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the reduction of the decorative effect even if the substrate is visually recognized from the transparent portion constituting the decorative portion.

[34-1. Game board]
FIG. 465 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the gaming board 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 465, the effect display device 1600 (on the game board side) is arranged in the central portion of the game area 5a. Further, although not shown, in the game area 5a, as in the game board 5 described above, a plurality of general winning openings and a plurality of general winning openings that are always open so that the hit game ball can be received, and a plurality of general winnings. The mouth is a start port that is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, a gate portion that detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball to the first start port or the second start port. It is equipped with a large winning slot that allows you to accept game balls according to the result of the lottery.

Further, in the upper right portion of the game area 5a, a character accessory 9100 having a character shape of "super heat" is arranged. FIG. 466 is a perspective view showing the shape of the character accessory 9100 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 466, the character accessory 9100 is a plate-shaped accessory that imitates the character shape of "super heat". The effect of the character accessory 9100 is executed in a manner corresponding to the degree of expectation of the symbol variation. For example, it may emit light in a color according to the degree of expectation, or may change the light emitting mode such as repeatedly turning on and off in a predetermined pattern. In addition, "Geki" and "Heat" are turned on alternately, and when the degree of expectation is high, both letters are turned on to notify the big hit, and finally both letters are turned off, so-called Gase production is executed. You may do it.

As will be described later, in the character accessory 9100, the cover member (cover body) 9110 visually recognized by the player is composed of the transparent portion 9111 and the non-transparent portion 9112, and the mode according to the progress of the game and the content of the effect. It is configured to be capable of emitting light from the transmissive portion 9111 by a light emitting body provided inside. In the present embodiment, the transparent portion (first region) 9111 is a portion corresponding to the character, the non-transparent portion (second region) 9112 is the outer edge portion of the character, and the transparent portion 9111 is substantially colorless and transparent. .. The non-transparent portion 9112 may also have transparency, and may be colored with a transparency different from that of the transmission portion 9111, for example. The details of the character accessory 9100 will be described with reference to the drawings after FIG. 468.

Further, a part of the character accessory 9100 overlaps the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 illuminates the back surface side of the character accessory 9100. At this time, by making the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 a reflective member, it is possible to execute an effect combined with the effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Further, a part of the character accessory 9100 may be configured to be able to transmit light, and the effect that the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 transmits the character accessory 9100 may be executed.

Further, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a on the front side, and a snowman accessory 9200 imitating the shape of a "snowman" on the lower left front side of the effect display device 1600. Is placed. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and the player can visually recognize a part of the side surface and the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 from the side.

FIG. 467 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 in the present embodiment, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed of a member having a transmissive appearance, and exhibits an effect by transmitting the light of a light emitting body (LED) provided inside to the outside.

The snowman accessory 9200 is apparently composed of a hat portion, a head portion, and a body portion. The head and body are made of transparent members so that the player can see the inside. The hat part is in the shape of a bucket and is provided on the upper side of the head. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in the present embodiment, the light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted. The details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with reference to the drawings after FIG. 480.

Like the character accessory 9100, the snowman accessory 9200 is executed in a mode according to the degree of expectation of the symbol variation. For example, it may be made to emit light in a color according to the degree of expectation, or it may be turned on and off repeatedly. Further, only the head may be lit, or only the body may be lit. Further, at the first stage of the advance notice effect, only the hat portion may be lit to raise the player's expectation, and the head portion may be lit sequentially from the head portion to the body portion.

[34-2. Character character (super heat)]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the character accessory 9100 will be described. FIG. 468 is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. The character accessory 9100 is a cover member (cover body) 9110 arranged on the front side visible to the player, and a character accessory board arranged on the back side of the cover member 9110 and equipped with a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED. It is composed of a 9120, a cover member 9110, and a base member 9130 attached to the back surface side of the character accessory board 9120.

[34-2-1. Cover member]
The cover member 9110 is formed with a peripheral wall portion 9113 protruding rearward from the outer periphery thereof, and the character accessory substrate 9120 can be accommodated in the space on the back surface side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113. FIG. 469 is a view of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment as viewed from the back surface side. The state in which the character accessory board 9120 is housed will be described later with reference to FIG. 471. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed by a transmissive portion 9111 capable of transmitting light imitating the characters of "extreme heat" and a non-transmissive portion 9112 formed on the peripheral edge of the transmissive portion 9111 and difficult to transmit light. ing.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character accessory 9100 is made of a material that does not easily transmit light like the non-transmissive portion 9112, and may be the same member as the non-transmissive portion 9112. When the characters are individually lit, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to separate the characters. At this time, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the substrate may be integrated.

The transparent portion 9111 is made of a colorless and transparent material so that the inside of the character accessory 9100 can be visually recognized. At the time of performing the production, the light emitting body 9301 provided inside transmits the light to the transmitting portion 9111 and the non-transmitting portion 9112 blocks the light to make the characters of "super heat" stand out and raise the expectation of the player. be able to. Further, not only the light from the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the character accessory board 9120 can be transmitted, but also the character accessory board 9120 itself can be visually recognized by the player. ..

In the present embodiment, a light diffusing portion for diffusing light is formed in the non-transmissive portion 9112 on the back surface side of the cover member 9110. Instead of forming the light diffusing portion, a light guide member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120, and the diffusing member is provided by guiding the light from the light emitting body 9301 to the transmitting portion 9111. The same effect as in the case of A modification using the light guide member will be described later.

With the above configuration, the light inside the accessory can be efficiently aggregated with a small number of light emitters, so that the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character accessory substrate 9120 can be reduced or light emission can be achieved. The degree of freedom in arranging the body 9301 can be increased.

Further, the non-transmitting portion 9112 may be formed of a transparent material having a lower transmittance than the transmitting portion 9111 without forming the light diffusing portion. For example, by using a colored material having transparency, the character accessory 9100 is made to emit light as a whole, and the effect is different from the case where the light diffusing part is used while making the character part stand out due to the difference in transmittance. be able to.

[34-2-2. Character board]
FIG. 470 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 471 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 470 and 471, the character accessory substrate 9120 is not in the general rectangular shape, but in the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. It has a similar shape. Further, the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color). Although various information is displayed on the character accessory substrate 9120, it may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

Further, the back surface side of the character accessory board 9120 is blocked by the base member 9130 when it is attached to the game board 5, so that the player cannot see it. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the color of the substrate to a specific color, but whether to apply the resist only on the front surface or on both sides in comparison with the manufacturing cost for processing the front surface and the back surface separately rather than the cost of the material. You just have to decide.

As described above, the character accessory substrate 9120 is visible from the transmission portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. Therefore, if the color of the substrate does not match the decorative mode of the accessory, the decorative effect may be reduced, or the decorative effect may be hindered by the electronic components arranged on the substrate. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character accessory board 9120 is colored not in general green but in a color (specific color) according to the decoration mode of the accessory, or the electronic component mounted on the character accessory board 9120 makes the pattern of the accessory. Arrange to make it. The color according to the decoration mode of the character is, for example, a color related to a character or a theme appearing in the production of the character (game machine). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings.

First, a specific embodiment for using the shape, color, and the like of a substrate provided for a decorative body such as an accessory as a decorative element will be described. As described above, the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment has the transmissive portion 9111, so that the character accessory substrate 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by coloring the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 to a specific color that matches the decoration mode of the character accessory 9100, the entire color of the character accessory 9100 is configured. For example, when the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120 is blue, the entire accessory is blue when the light emitting body 9301 does not emit light, and the light emitting color of the light emitting body 9301 is used when the light emitting body 9301 emits light. Can be given to a person. In particular, when the area occupied by the transparent portion 9111 in the entire accessory is large, a larger effect can be obtained.

[34-2-3. Luminous body / electronic component]
A plurality of light emitting bodies (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the surface (front surface) side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The light emitting bodies 9301 may all have the same light emitting color, or a plurality of different types of light emitting colors may be prepared. The light emitting body 9301 may be turned on according to the progress of the game, and the lighting location may be different depending on the content of the effect. When there are different types of emission colors, the colors may be emitted according to the degree of expectation, or different types of emission colors may be turned on at the same time.

Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored to a specific color. Therefore, since the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light emitting color of the light emitting body 9301, it is possible to realize various effects by making the light emitting body 9301 emit light in a plurality of kinds of colors. It will be possible.

Further, when the light emitting body 9301 is turned off, the specific color colored on the character accessory board 9120 is recognized. Therefore, even if the light emitting body 9301 is blinked, the character accessory board can be used as one effect expression. The specific color colored in 9120 and the emission color of the light emitter 9301 can be alternately recognized as different colors. For example, when the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored in blue as described above, when the light emitter 9301 is slowly blinked in red, the red character accessory and the blue character accessory are alternately given light and dark. It can be recognized as a character with a completely different color.

Electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. Specifically, the resistance 9302, the IC 9303, and the connector 9304. In the present embodiment, since these electronic components cannot be visually recognized by the player, the arrangement may be such that there is no technical problem. Further, as shown in FIG. 471, information regarding the light emitting body 9301 arranged on the front surface side is printed on the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120, and electronic components arranged on the front surface side even from the back surface side. Can recognize information about. The information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is indicated by a dotted line to prevent misidentification.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 470, only the light emitting body 9301 is arranged on the surface side, and information on the electronic components is not displayed. This is to prevent the decorative effect from being reduced by the player's visibility of the silk-printed characters (for example, the part number of the electronic component (“LED1” in FIG. 471)), but the assembly work. If necessary, the information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for the player to see. For example, when the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored in blue as described above, a similar color such as light blue and an identifiable shade-adjusted color is adopted as an information display, and silk printing is performed. Just do it. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etching characters.

Further, in the character accessory 9100 in the present embodiment, since the electronic parts other than the light emitting body 9301 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate which the player cannot see, the electronic parts such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. .. When the electronic components must be arranged on the front side, at least a part of the electronic components such as the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be arranged so as to be difficult for the player to see, or a color or a color that is difficult for the player to see. Shaped electronic components may be adopted. For example, if it is an electronic component having the same color as a specific color, it may be arranged on the front side.

On the other hand, as described above, in the present invention, the player can visually recognize the substrate provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example of using the electronic component arranged on the substrate as a decorative element of the accessory will be described.

An electronic component is arranged on the surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 at a position visible to the player from the transmission portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. At this time, the electronic components are arranged so as to form the pattern of the characters displayed by the character accessory 9100. For example, electronic components are placed in regular positions so that they can be used as decorations for letters.

Further, by arranging the light emitting body 9301, the player may not be able to recognize the character pattern at the time of light emission. Further, by selecting and emitting light from the light emitting body 9301 at a position where the electronic component can be recognized even when emitting light and the light emitting body 9301 at a position where the electronic component cannot be recognized at the time of light emission, the pattern can be emitted. It may be configured so that the presence or absence can be switched.

Further, an electronic component other than black may be arranged on the surface side to serve as a decorative element. Although the transmitting portion 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may be possible to transmit light as a lens member or a diffusing member, but it may be possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the electronic component as a pattern by making it indistinguishable. As for the mode in which the decorative effect is exhibited by arranging the electronic components, another specific example will be described with reference to the snowman accessory 9200, which will be described later.

It is also possible to use the characters printed on the surface side of the substrate as a pattern. Instead of printing characters in colors that are difficult for the player to recognize in order to prevent the decorative effect from being hindered, the characters that indicate information on electronic components and boards can be recognized by the player as decorative elements. It may be printed in an aspect (color, shape). As a result, it is possible to make the pattern of the accessory into a more complicated form, or to change the color by printing in a color different from that of the cover member 9110, and it is possible to enhance the decorative effect. In addition, by aggregating the characters to be printed on the board, the player is made to recognize that the cover member 9110 and the area of the color different from other parts on the board are formed on the board, so that the decorative effect of the entire accessory can be obtained. You may try to increase it.

[34-2-4. Arrangement of illuminants]
Subsequently, the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 472 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting body 9301 is also arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 and at a position behind the non-transmissive portion 9112 where it is difficult for the player to see. Here, the light emitting body 9301 arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is referred to as a light emitting body 9301a, and is referred to as a light emitting body 9301b arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112.

For example, when it is desired to emit strong light, the light emitting body 9301a is arranged at a position visible from the transmitting portion 9111 so as to directly irradiate the outside with light. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 469, since the light diffusing portion is provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112, the light is diffused and softened by arranging the light emitting body 9301b on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112. It is possible to emit light with light.

In this way, the position of the light emitting body 9301a may be determined according to the type of the accessory, and by selecting the light emitting body 9301 to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode with one accessory. Specifically, when it is desired to make the entire accessory emit strong light, only the light emitting body 9301a or all the light emitting bodies 9301 may be made to emit light, and when it is desired to make it emit light with soft light, only the light emitting body 9301b is made to emit light to diffuse the light. Just do it.

Further, the transmittance of the transmissive portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the light emitter 9301a is slightly difficult to see without making it completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmittance of the transmissive portion 9111 may be slightly lowered (colored transparent, for example, light blue) to make it difficult to see the inside, or the surface of the transmissive portion 9111 may be processed (for example, embossed) to diffuse light. It may be made difficult to see the inside in this way. With such a configuration, the light emitting body itself becomes difficult to see, but it is possible to emit light more strongly than when it is arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112. Further, since the degree of freedom in the position of the light emitter 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased and the development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself may not be a direct decorative element, but may indirectly enhance the staging effect. For example, when the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is white, it is possible to increase the reflectance even when the arranged light emitting body 9301 is not lit, and when the light emitting body 9301 is lit, it is possible to increase the reflectance. Of course, by reflecting the light from the outside, it is possible to prevent the inside of the character accessory 9100 from becoming too dark.

Further, since the specific color of the character accessory board 9120 is white, the character color of the character accessory 9100 can be recognized as white as a feature when the light is turned off. In this case, if a full-color LED (R, G, B color LED) is used for the light emitting body 9301, the character color can be expressed as various colors, but the light from the light emitting body 9301 and the back surface side of the non-transmitting portion 9112 side. By overlapping and fusing the light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusing unit provided in the above and the light reflected from the surface of the substrate, it is possible to perform a fantastic effect that cannot be expressed by a single type of light emitting body 9301. can. At this time, since various effects can be realized without using a plurality of types of light emitters 9301, the cost can be reduced.

As described above, in the character accessory of the present embodiment, the color of the board and the mounted electronic parts are used as decorative elements so that the player can see them, so that the board is hidden. Since there is no need to do so, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, the electronic components that do not serve as decorative elements may be arranged on the back surface side of the substrate, and by arranging the electronic components other than the light emitting body such as LEDs on the back surface side, only the color of the substrate may be arranged as the decorative element.

[34-2-5. Base member]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front at the time of attachment. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character accessory board 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character accessory board 9120 may be accommodated in the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 without being fixed. You may try to do it. The wiring for transmitting a signal or supplying electric power to the character accessory board 9120 is not shown. For example, a hole for wiring is provided in the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the base member 9130 and the cover member 9110. It should be formed.

It should be noted that the cover member 9110 may be provided with a mounting portion so as to be directly mounted on the game board 5 without using the base member 9130. In this case, the character accessory board 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110.

[34-3. Modification example of character accessory 1]
Subsequently, the shape of the character accessory board 9120 does not completely resemble the shape of the character accessory 9100, and the outer edge of the character accessory board 9120 matches the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. The case of not doing so will be described. In this case, since the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged on the entire character accessory 9100, the light guide member 9140 is arranged between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120, and the light emitting body is diffused by diffusing the light. It compensates for the lack of light intensity in the non-arranged portion of 9301. The cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as those described above.

FIG. 473 is a diagram showing an example of a light guide member 9140 that diffuses light from a light emitting body 9301 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by a peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 in the same manner as the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 described above in order to diffuse light over the entire back surface side of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100. The shape is similar to the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space.

FIG. 474 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 1 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 475 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 1 of the present embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The configuration other than the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 is the same as that of the above-described embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 474 and 475, the character accessory substrate 9120 is formed with a cutout portion 9122 in which a part of the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 is missing. Further, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the central portion of the character accessory board 9120. As shown in FIG. 475, the mounting portion of the cover member 9110 is mounted on the base member 9130 through the mounting hole 9121.

Similarly, the light guide member 9140 is also formed with a mounting hole so that the mounting portion of the base member 9130 can be inserted therethrough. If the proportion of the notch 9122 is small and the position of the substrate does not shift, the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 may be sandwiched and fixed without providing a mounting configuration.

FIG. 476 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the modified example of the present embodiment. In this modification, since the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged in the cutout portion 9122, the light guide member 9140 guides the light to cause the entire character accessory 9100 to emit light. At this time, a light diffusing portion may be provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140.

Therefore, in the character accessory 9100 of this modification, a portion to be decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 and a notch portion 9122 are formed by using the color of the character accessory substrate 9120, electronic components, and the like as decorative elements. Therefore, there will be a mixture of parts that are not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120. At this time, the decorative effect can be maintained by performing light decoration by the light diffusing portion provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the light guide member 9140 and the cover member 9110.

As described in this modification, the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 does not have to be similar to that of the character accessory 9100, and the portion not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 includes a light guide member 9140, a light diffusing portion, and the like. The reduction of the decoration effect may be suppressed by providing and performing light decoration. Further, the reduction of the decorative effect may be suppressed by making the color of the base member 9130 the same as the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120. This makes it possible to make the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 a relatively simple shape without making it a complicated shape, and by increasing the degree of freedom in the size of the substrate, the manufacturing cost such as processing of the substrate can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

Further, without using the base member 9130, the light emitting decorative portion arranged on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 allows the light from the decorative portion to be transmitted through the notch 9122 to produce the effect. good. For example, when the character accessory 9100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in the present embodiment, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character combination are displayed by displaying an image in the upper right part of the screen. An effect that is integrated with the light emission effect by the object 9100 may be executed. Further, the same effect can be performed by using a transparent member for the base member 9130. An example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modification 2.

[34-4. Deformation example 2 of character accessory]
In the first modification, the cutout portion 9122 is formed in a part of the substrate, but in the second modification, an example in which the above-mentioned character accessory substrate 9120 is about half the size of the character accessory 9100 will be described. Further, the cover member 9110 is configured to directly attach the game board 5 without using the base member 9130, and the configuration of the character accessory 9100 in this modification is the cover member 9110, the character accessory substrate 9120, and the light guide. It is composed of member 9140.

In this modification, as in the first modification, the light guide member 9140 guides light to a portion where the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged to perform light decoration. Further, in this modification, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if a light emitting body is provided on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100, the light of the light emitting body can be transmitted.

FIG. 477 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 2 of the present embodiment of the present embodiment, in which the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light guide member 9140 overlap each other. It shows the state. Further, FIG. 478 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 2 of the present embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 477 and 478, the character accessory substrate 9120 is configured to occupy about the upper half of the character accessory 9100. Therefore, when the character accessory 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with a specific color colored on the character accessory board 9120, but the lower half is not decorated with the character accessory board 9120. It becomes. On the other hand, since the lower half of the character accessory 9100 is transparent from the transparent portion 9111, the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 may be set to a specific color to suppress a sense of discomfort.

Further, different effects may be executed in the upper and lower areas. For example, in the case of a character accessory in which characters are written in two stages, a character accessory board 9120 is arranged on the upper stage side, and a light emitting body is arranged on the back surface side on the lower stage side to perform different effects in the upper stage and the lower stage. Further, if this accessory is movable, it is possible to perform different effects for each stop position by arranging different light emitters for each stop position on the back surface side.

Further, the light emitting body may be not only an LED or a lamp but also a liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. For example, an LED is arranged as a light emitting body on the upper part of the game board 5 and the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged. When moving downward to, the effect can be executed by transmitting light from the lower part of the accessory by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

The image displayed on the back side of the character accessory 9100 is the same color (character combination) that imitates the character accessory 9100 including the lower half (notch portion in the modification 1) regardless of the transparent portion 9111 and the non-transparent portion 9112. It is preferable to display an image having the same shape as the specific color for the part where the object substrate 9120 is shown). This is because the image is displayed even if some failure occurs in the character accessory 9100, so that the game can be advanced without giving the player anxiety due to the failure.

With the above configuration, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of effects with one character, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 479, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized by the player via the character accessory 9100. Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, the light from the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back surface side of the character accessory 9100, and the light emission effect by the character accessory substrate 9120. And, it becomes possible to execute the display effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 in cooperation with each other. With this configuration, the lower side portion of the character accessory board 9120 becomes a boundary, and it can be an element constituting the decoration.

FIG. 479 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory 9100 of the second modification of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. The upper part of the character accessory 9100 diffuses the light from the light emitting body 9301 mounted on the character accessory substrate 9120 by the light guide member 9140. On the other hand, the lower portion of the character accessory 9100 diffuses the light (displayed image) output by the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the light guide member 9140. At this time, by fusing the light from the light emitter 9301 and the light from the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to execute an effect in which the effect by the character accessory 9100 and the effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 are integrated.

It should be noted that an effect other than the character accessory 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be fused. For example, when the game board 5 is a transparent member and a light emitting body is placed on the back surface side or a sticker or the like is attached to enhance the decorative effect, the game board 5 is visually recognized and combined through the transmissive portion of the accessory. Can further enhance the decorative effect.

[34-5. Snowman character]
Next, the snowman character 9200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 467, the snowman accessory 9200 is an accessory (decorative body) that imitates a snowman, and has a spherical head resting on a spherical body slightly larger than the head. It has become. Furthermore, a bucket-shaped hat is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in the present embodiment, the light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted.

FIG. 480 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 accommodates a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) on which electronic components including a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED are mounted inside a cover member 9210 divided into a front side cover member 9210a and a back surface side cover member 9210b. Will be done.

The snowman accessory 9200 is used in an effect executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and for example, an effect such as causing an internal light emitting body to emit light according to the expected degree of symbol variation is executed. Further, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material that allows light to pass through and is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect of transmitting or reflecting the displayed image is executed. May be good. Hereinafter, each configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be specifically described.

FIG. 481 is a view of the front side cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. FIG. 482 is a diagram showing a back surface side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. FIG. 483 is a diagram showing the front side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 484 is a diagram showing the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment of the present embodiment.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, back side cover member 9210b) of the snowman accessory 9200 is substantially colorless and transparent except for a part, and has transparency, and is a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) housed from the front to the inside. ) Can be visually recognized on the surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, the snowman substrate 9220 has the shape of the snowman accessory 9200, and has a very design-rich shape. Further, the snowman substrate 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) in the same manner as the character accessory substrate 9120. In addition, the configuration of the substrate itself is the same as that of the character accessory substrate 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front surface side and the back surface side. As for the code of the electronic component on the substrate, the code common to the character accessory 9100 is used.

In the present embodiment, the shape of the snowman substrate 9220 occupies the inside of the snowman accessory 9200 so that the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 cannot be visually recognized from the front. As a result, the entire snowman accessory 9200 is recognized as a specific color colored on the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire accessory is determined. On the other hand, a notch or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized. At this time, an image may be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600 from the rear of the snowman accessory 9200, or a decorative body such as a light emitting body may be arranged to increase the variety of effects.

Further, the snowman accessory 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can visually recognize the side surface of the snowman accessory 9200 by simply tilting his / her line of sight from the front. Since the cover member 9210 has transparency, the player can visually recognize the snowman substrate 9220 beyond the side surface to the back surface. The character accessory 9100, which was configured so that the substrate could not be visually recognized from the back surface side, did not need to have a specific color up to the back side of the substrate, but the snowman substrate 9220 is also colored with a specific color on the back surface side. This makes it possible to suppress the reduction of the decorative effect even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and visually recognizes the snowman accessory 9200 from the side. As a result, the degree of freedom in the form of the character can be improved, the staging effect can be improved, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Since the player can visually recognize the snowman substrate 9220 beyond the side surface to the back surface, the light emitter 9301 may be arranged on the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 to make the entire snowman accessory 9200 emit light from the back surface side. .. Further, by coloring the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 in a color different from that of the front surface side, it is possible to give the player an impression different from that when only the light emitting body 9301 on the front surface side emits light. It should be noted that the same effect can be expected by arranging the light emitting bodies 9301 having a common color of the snowman substrate 9220 and different light emitting colors. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode of the accessory and enhance the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 480, an opening is provided in the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200, and a cord for transmitting electric power or a signal is inserted into the snowman substrate 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200. There is. Various effects are executed by causing the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 to emit light by the supplied electric power and the signal from the effect control device.

Further, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is colored (for example, red) and has transparency. The transparency of the hat portion is lower than that of other parts of the snowman accessory 9200, making it difficult to see the inside. Therefore, the connector 9304 arranged on the snowman board 9220 and the cord connected to the connector 9304 are arranged on the hat portion to make it difficult for the player to see.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a) is formed with a transmission portion B9211b having different transmittances at a portion corresponding to the eyes of a snowman when viewed from the front by the player. The transmissive portion other than the cap portion is referred to as a transmissive portion A9211a. In the present embodiment, the transmission portion B9211b is configured so that the inside of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized in a blurred state with aberrations remaining like a soft focus lens. Therefore, the contours of the electronic components arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 can be blurred and visually recognized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 483, in the present embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are integrated and arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 corresponding to the portion corresponding to the eyes of the snowman accessory 9200. The resistors 9302 are black electronic components that are densely arranged in a circle. When the player sees the snowman accessory 9200 during the game, the outline of the electronic component appears to be blurred because it is visually recognized through the transmission portion B9211b. As a result, the electronic components (resistors 9302) that are aggregated and arranged on the substrate are recognized as the black eyes of the snowman, and can form a decorative element.

In addition, the part numbers of electronic parts (part numbers silk-printed such as "R1") are silk-printed in the same color as white, which is the same specific color as the resist of the snowball substrate 9220, so that they can be identified. There is. In the present embodiment, since the resistors 9302 are printed densely, they can be identified and function as reflecting light because they are printed densely.

In the present embodiment, the part numbers of the electronic parts (part numbers silk-printed such as "R1") may be silk-printed in black in the same manner as the resistors. As described above, due to the effect of the lens, the resistance 9302 can be recognized as a snowman's eye.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 484, an electronic component (IC9303) that does not form a decorative element on the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 and at a position outside when the snowman accessory 9200 is installed on the game board 5. Etc.) are arranged. As a result, the electronic component having a low decorative effect or a possibility of reducing the decorative effect is placed at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the electronic component. .. At this time, by directing the snowman substrate 9220 toward the center side of the gaming machine, it is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize the electronic components arranged on the back surface side.

Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with a focus on the cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, rear surface side cover member 9210b). The front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b do not need to be evenly divided in the front-rear direction. For example, even if one of the front cover members 9210a is formed beyond the snowman substrate 9220 toward the rear. good. Hereinafter, an example in which one (inside) of the front side cover member 9210a is formed beyond the snowman substrate 9220 toward the rear will be described with reference to FIG. 485.

FIG. 485 is a view of the horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 485, when the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a is formed so as to extend rearward beyond the side surface of the snowman substrate 9220, most of the appearance of the snowman accessory 9200 visible to the player. Will be composed of the surface side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment point of the front cover member 9210a to the back cover member 9210b (the joint between the front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b) is on the back side behind the snowman substrate 9220, so that the decoration is high. It is possible to realize a cover.

Further, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front side cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman substrate 9220, the snowman substrate 9220 colored in white (specific color) is a snowman accessory 9200 not only on the front surface but also on the back surface. Is decorated in white. It is desirable that both sides are white as in the present embodiment, but since the player mainly sees from the front side, only the front side may be white.

Further, FIG. 485 shows a mode in which only the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220, but depending on the decoration of the accessory to be adopted, only the outer side may extend rearward of the substrate. A mode may be adopted in which both the inside and the outside extend to the rear of the substrate.

Further, a configuration for attaching each configuration of the accessory to each other and attaching the accessory to the game board will be described. In the snowman accessory 9200 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 485, the snowman substrate 9220 is attached by the substrate mounting portion 9213 and the mounting member 9214 formed on the back surface side cover member 9210b. At this time, it is preferable that the board mounting portion 9213 is provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200, which is difficult for the player to see. Further, the front surface side cover member 9210a is attached to the back surface side cover member 9210b by a cover attachment portion (not shown), but it is preferable that the cover attachment portion is provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200 as in the substrate attachment portion 9213. Further, it is preferable that the back surface side cover member 9210b is attached to the structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and the attachment portion to the structure is provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200 as in the board mounting portion 9213. In this way, by arranging the attachment portion of each configuration of the accessory and the attachment portion of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside which is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the accessory from being hindered. Can be done.

Not only the outside of the accessory, but also the location that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the portion made of colored members (the hat portion in the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment), the lens cut for decoration, etc.) provide visibility. By providing a mounting portion at a place where it is lowered, a part where the shape of the accessory is bent (the boundary portion between the head and the body portion in the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment), etc. Can be suppressed from being impaired.

In the example shown in FIG. 485, the snowman accessory 9200 is configured by the front side cover member 9210a and the back side cover member 9210b, but as shown in FIG. 486, one cover member 9210 forms the shape of the snowman. You may do so. FIG. 486 is a top view of the horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 in the modified example of the present embodiment.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 486, the cover member 9210 and the snowman substrate 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via the base body 9230. Also in this modified example, it is preferable that both sides of the snowman substrate 9220 are white as in the example shown in FIG. 485, but only the front surface side may be white.

In this modification, the inner cover member is provided not only extending rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 but also extending rearward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowman substrate 9220 but also the base body 9230 is provided by the player. It will be visible from. Therefore, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by using a specific color (for example, white) similar to that of the snowman substrate 9220. Regarding the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 to the base body 9230, as described above, the attachment portion is provided in a place where it is difficult for the player to see, and the attachment portion is attached by the attachment member or the like, depending on the attachment location. It is possible to prevent the decorativeness from being impaired.

In this modification, only the inside of the cover member 9210 extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 and the base body 9230, but the outside of the cover member depends on the decoration of the accessory to be adopted. A mode that extends to the rear of the substrate or the base body or a mode that extends to the rear of the substrate or the base body both inside and outside may be adopted.

[34-6. Effect, etc.]
Generally, an electronic circuit board has a raw board of a basic size, and the cost is greatly affected by how many boards can be taken from one raw board based on this raw board. Although it is designed to have a square shape in a very simple way, the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment has a very design-rich shape. In other words, it can be said that all the elements that make up the board, from the resist, the color of the board, to the electronic components, are used as the decorative performance of the accessory.

It should be noted that the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory described above has a substantially square shape. Compared to the snowman board 9220, it has a shape that fits into a simple design, but it can be said that the cover body that covers the board has more functions to have a design.

As described above, the substrate in which an electronic circuit consisting of not only a light emitting body (LED) but also an electronic component for controlling the light emitting body is formed inside the accessory, which has been seen in recent years, has almost the shape of the accessory. It is also prepared. In the first place, wiring that electrically connects the electronic components that make up the electronic circuit is drawn on the substrate on which the electronic circuit is formed, and a protective film (protective film) is drawn on the surface of the substrate to prevent oxidation of the wiring. It is covered with a resist).

Therefore, we focused on the color of the resist, which is the protective film, that is, the color of the substrate, to color the accessory. Even so, when the transmissive portion is provided on the front side, there is a risk that the decorative effect as an accessory may be reduced by visually recognizing the electronic components mounted on the substrate from the transmissive portion. As illustrated in the object 9100 and the snowman accessory 9200, the color of the board, all the elements that make up the board, and the mounted electronic components themselves are also used as decorative elements to prevent the reduction of the decorative effect and play games. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

In a gaming machine, a plurality of boards on which electronic components are mounted are mounted. Of these, the main board and the payout control board provided on the back side of the gaming machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, and their inspection and confirmation are easy. On the other hand, in the light emitting decorative substrate used for the movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on the game board panel, the lens that reflects and scatters the light from the light emitting decorative substrate on the surface facing the player side on the front side. A member or the like is provided, and the rear surface side is attached to the game board panel in a state facing the effect display device attached to the game board panel. In addition, on the rear surface side of the light emitting decoration board, there are connectors, control elements, drivers, resistors, capacitors, etc. for connecting a flat cable for receiving control signals from peripheral control means in order to realize the function of light emitting decoration. Electronic components are mounted. When such a gaming machine is installed in a gaming store, it is difficult to confirm whether or not a defect has occurred in the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the light emitting decorative substrate in the installed gaming machine. .. This is because the rear surface of the light emitting decorative substrate faces the surface forming the display area of the staging display device. Therefore, the means for solving such a problem is shown below.

FIG. 487 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in this embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100a is formed by providing the game panel 1100 with a physical opening in a punched shape. A space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 on the front side, and a plurality of accessories are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. There is. Further, a first grass accessory 6470 and a second grass accessory 6475 are provided behind them, a rabbit accessory 6000 is provided behind them, and a mountain accessory 6500 is provided behind them, and a mountain accessory is provided. A game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind the 6500. By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be obtained.

FIG. 488 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 488 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 488 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b as a face light emitting unit 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped to imitate the mouth of a rabbit. The left and right front legs of a rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, and the first arm portion 6016 and the second arm portion 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body portion 6030 which is a plate-shaped member made of a white opaque synthetic resin, which imitates a body portion of a rabbit, is provided.

FIG. 489 (A) is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. 489 (B) is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. The face substrate 6020 is a plate-shaped member composed of a printed circuit board, and the front surface and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting an electric circuit provided on the surface. .. Further, the LED constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LED constituting the second face light emitting unit 6023b are on the front side of the face substrate 6020, and the control element 6025, the driver 6026, and the first are on the rear surface side of the face substrate 6020. A resistor 6027a to a sixth resistor 6027f, a first capacitor 6028a, a second capacitor 6028b, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

As shown in FIG. 489 (A), the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and two rectangular portions extend upward as the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 on the upper side forming the rectangle. It has a rectangular shape. The horizontally long rectangular portion imitates the face of a rabbit, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 imitate the ears of a rabbit. In the state where the face cover portion 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are not covered by the face cover portion 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a first ear decoration portion 6021a and a second ear decoration portion 6022a that imitate the inside of a rabbit's ear, respectively. The first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing with brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are visible areas in brown. ing. In the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, the regions other than the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are covered with the white protective film described above. Further, electronic components such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. ..

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b. Specifically, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are each composed of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b can emit light by being controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, but the details will be described later.

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a mouth decoration portion 6024. Specifically, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is formed by printing with pink ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and the shape imitating the mouth of a rabbit can be visually recognized in pink. It has become. The front surface of the face substrate 6020 is configured so that the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is pink, and the other regions are white.

FIG. 489 (B) is a view showing the rear surface side of the face substrate 6020. As described above, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the circuit as in the front surface of the face substrate 6020. On the upper left and right of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are located at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front side. The dotted line indicating the mounting location and the character strings "LED1" and "LED2" indicating the name of the mounted member are formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film, respectively. .. Further, the driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character string "LED1" and the character string "LED2". Further, under the driver 6026, the character string "DR1" is formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink.

A capacitor 6028 (first capacitor 6028a and second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the second face light emitting unit 6023b. Further, corresponding to the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b, the character strings "C1" and "C2" are formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink.

Resistors 6027 (first resistance 6027a to sixth resistance 6027f) are surface-mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Further, corresponding to the first resistance 6027a to the sixth resistance 6027f, the character strings "R1" to "R6" are formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink.

A control element 6025 made of a microcomputer is surface-mounted on the right side of the region where the resistor 6027 is mounted. Further, corresponding to the control element 6025, the character string "IC1" is formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and controls the lighting of the LED constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LED constituting the second face light emitting unit 6023b.

The connector 6029 is surface-mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Further, corresponding to the connector 6029, the character string "CN1" is formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink. The control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the control element 6025 via the connector 6029, and the power from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the face board 6020. The electric power supplied to the face substrate 6020 via the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, and the like.

The control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 each have a black main body portion and a metal terminal portion. Further, the metal terminal portion of the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 is surface-mounted on the face substrate 6020 by soldering. In FIG. 489 (B), the main body of these electronic components is shown in black, and the metal terminals and solder included in these electronic components are shown in white.

FIG. 490 is a perspective view of the face cover portion 6010. The face cover portion 6010 has a box-shaped shape with an open rear, and is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover portion 6010 includes a face cover portion front portion 6011 constituting the front surface, a face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 constituting the upper surface, a face cover portion right surface portion 6013 constituting the right surface, and a face cover constituting the lower surface. It is composed of a lower surface portion 6014 and a left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion constituting the left surface.

As shown in FIGS. 488 to 490, on the front side of the face cover portion front portion 6011 constituting the front surface of the face cover portion 6010, a first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion 6011a imitating a rabbit's eyes are formed. A face light scattering unit 6011b is provided. The first face light scattering unit 6011a is provided at a position where it overlaps with the first face light emitting unit 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in front view. Further, the second face light scattering unit 6011b is provided at a position where it overlaps with the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in front view. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 488 (A), the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b are viewed from the front of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, respectively. The outer shape of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in front view is surrounded by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b, respectively. It is configured as follows.

The first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b emit light from the first face by forming a fine lens cut or performing a satin finish on the front side of the front surface portion 6011 of the face cover portion. When the light emitted from the portion 6023a or the second face light emitting portion 6023b is incident, it is formed by a rough surface capable of diffusely reflecting the light. The front surface portion 6011 of the face cover portion is the light incident on the portion other than the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b, such as the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b. There is no structure that diffusely reflects light, and the face substrate 6020 located at the rear is configured to be directly visible from the front. In the face substrate 6020, the rectangular portion forming the region excluding the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and the rectangular portion forming the face cover portion 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flow, and are exactly overlapped in the front view. It is provided at the position. The face substrate 6020 is screwed from behind to screw holes provided in the upper surface portion 6012 of the face cover portion, the right surface portion 6013 of the face cover portion, the lower surface portion 6014 of the face cover portion, the left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion, and the like. It is attached with.

The rear surface of the face cover portion front surface portion 6011 and the face light emitting portion 6023 are provided at a predetermined distance (about 1-2 mm). With such a configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the face light emitting unit 6023, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the face light emitting unit 6023 fails due to the heat generated by itself. Become. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted in relation to the light emitting portion and the member such as the cover provided corresponding to the light emitting portion.

As described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 is composed of a face substrate 6020, a face cover portion 6010 that covers the front of the face substrate 6020, and a body portion 6030 provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. On the front side of the face substrate 6020, LEDs functioning as the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b are surface-mounted, and the face cover portion constituting the front side of the face cover portion 6010 covering the front thereof, respectively. The first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b provided on the front surface portion 6011 are configured to irradiate light. Further, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, electronic components such as a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029, and a control signal for driving the LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020 is received from the peripheral control board 1510. Further, from the flat cable, electric power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face board 6020 is supplied. The control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 to control the light emitting mode of the LEDs constituting the face light emitting unit 6023.

The LED constituting the face light emitting portion 6023 is formed by enclosing three LEDs, a red light emitting LED chip, a green light emitting LED chip, and a blue light emitting LED chip, with a colorless and transparent resin. .. Further, the LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 is provided with three metal terminals serving as an anode of each LED chip and three metal terminals serving as a cathode. Further, when a current flows from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip, each LED chip can be in a light emitting state. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip by the driver 6026, it is possible to emit red, green, and blue independently.

Further, a resistor 6027 is provided between the circuit connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip as a limiting resistor for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, the first resistance 6027a to the third resistance 6027c constitute the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023b, respectively, between the circuits connecting the driver 2026 and the anode of each LED chip included in the LEDs constituting the face light emitting unit 6023a. The fourth resistance 6027d to the sixth resistance 6027f are provided between the circuits connecting the anodes of the respective LED chips included in the LEDs. By providing the first resistance 6027a to the sixth resistance 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip in this way, the current flowing through each LED chip is adjusted, and if a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit is overloaded. It prevents the flow of electric current.

Further, the first capacitor 6028a is provided in parallel with the power supply terminal provided in the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is provided in parallel with the power supply terminal provided in the driver 6026, so that the control element 6025 and the driver 6026 are stably provided. It has a function to operate it.

The rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled to move between the standby position on the lower front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movement position near the center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 by a drive mechanism (not shown). It is possible to do. This drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the predetermined game content is notified to the player according to the movement mode and the light emission mode of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, and the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b mounted on the face substrate 6020 are in a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position. Is lit in red to make the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b lit in red, so that the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit. It may be configured to suggest that expectations are higher than normal. In addition, also in another embodiment, an example is shown in which a part of the accessory or a member constituting the accessory is movable, and the light emitting portion included in the accessory is controlled to a predetermined light emitting mode. May function as an effect, and by the effect, a configuration may be adopted that suggests that the expected degree of stop display is higher than usual in a mode in which the stop mode of the changing decorative symbol indicates a big hit.

As described above, in the light emitting decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) provided in such a decorative member (rabbit accessory 6000), there is a possibility that a defect may occur in the light emitting function. For example, in the process of surface mounting on the printed circuit board constituting the face board 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface was insufficient, and the circuit on the printed circuit board and the mounted electronic components were not properly electrically connected. In some cases, there is a risk that the electronic components mounted on the back side of the printed circuit board will come into contact with other members or tools during assembly at the factory, and the mounted electronic components will be missing. In addition, there is a risk that electronic components may fail due to deterioration over time after the gaming machine is installed in a gaming store.

For example, in an LED that functions as a face light emitting unit 6023 capable of full-color light emission by emitting three colors of red, blue, and green in multiple gradations by a driver 6026, one of six metal terminals is electrically operated. When the connection is lost, one of the three colors is intended to emit light in a controlled manner, but in reality, only two colors are emitted and one color is emitted. Will cause a non-light emitting state. Such a state may occur when the LED chip fails and current does not flow, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is missing from the face substrate 6020 and the circuit is disconnected. ..
Such a situation may give the player who plays the game the impression that the movable decorative member does not look good. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light in the same color, a situation may occur in which only the defective LED emits light in different emission colors. In addition, there is a risk of causing a situation in which the player misunderstands the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face board 6020 is bent many times due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative member, so that the strength of the predetermined portion of the flat cable deteriorates. It is also conceivable that the flat cable will be disconnected and the signal transmission and power supply to the rabbit accessory 6000 will not be performed properly. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the connector 6029 may be damaged due to repeated stress applied to a part of the connector 6029 due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit character 6000, and an unintended light emitting mode is shown to the player, or the power supply is not completely performed. In that case, the face light emitting unit 6023 provided in the rabbit accessory 6000 moves from the standby position to the moving position or moves from the moving position to the standby position in the off state without taking the lighting mode. There is a risk that the appearance of the rabbit will be poor.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the gaming machine is turned off, the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is visible in black, and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 located in front is reflected on the surface thereof. It is configured to be reflected. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is configured to mirror-reflect the incident light. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflector (reflection sheet) is installed in the vicinity of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, this reflector may be configured to specularly reflect the incident light. With such a configuration, if there is any abnormality in the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 located in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 located in the rear. The content of the abnormality can be confirmed by visually recognizing. Alternatively, it can be confirmed whether or not an abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 491 (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 491 (A), the rabbit accessory 6000 is provided in the gaming machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown.

In this example, the rabbit accessory 6000 is arranged on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the front surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the face board 6020 provided on the rabbit accessory 6000. It is configured to be located at a predetermined distance (specifically, about several cm) from the back surface. In the example shown in FIG. 491 (A), a part of the driver 6026 mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020, the first resistance 6027a, and the entire second resistance 6027b are the display areas of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows the state reflected in.

Although FIG. 491 (A) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is visually recognized from an oblique upper right, it is also possible to visually recognize the mounting mode of other electronic components by looking into it from another angle. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is visually recognized as looking into the center of the left-right direction from above, it is possible to visually recognize the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b. Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is visually recognized from the diagonally upper left, it is also possible to visually recognize the entire connector 6029 or the flat cable connected to the connector 6029. In this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistance 6027e, and the sixth resistance 6027f, but this point will be described later.

FIG. 491 (B) is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 491 (B), the rabbit accessory 6000 is provided in the gaming machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown. In this example, it is difficult to visually recognize the electronic components such as the control element 6025, the first resistance 6027a to the sixth resistance 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, and the entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a are used. It is possible to confirm the mounting mode only for a part and a part of the second capacitor 6028b. The method of visually recognizing the electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

As described above, in the gaming machine in the power-off state, the back surface of the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 as a decorative means is configured to be reflected in the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to check the status of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face board 6020 even after the gaming machine is installed in the gaming store. Further, since the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a white protective film and can be visually recognized in white, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is visually recognized in black can be visually recognized. It is structured so that it is easy to do.

An example is shown in which the entire surface and the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film, but the circuit is configured to cover the circuit on the face substrate 6020 with a light-colored protective film such as cream, not limited to white. You may. This is because the difference between light and dark is clearer in the case where the light color protective film is adopted than in the case where the dark color protective film is adopted with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is black. Therefore, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized.

In the process of coloring the face board 6020, after creating a circuit structure by copper plating on the printed circuit board, a white protective agent is adopted as a protective agent to protect the wiring structure, and a place where a through hole is provided is provided. Except for this, it is desirable to apply this protective agent to the entire surface of both sides of the printed circuit board to form a white protective film so that the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 is white. When a protective agent other than white is used as the protective agent to protect the wiring structure, white ink is applied on the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes white. You may. Alternatively, by combining these aspects, a white protective agent is applied to form a protective film, and then a white ink is applied onto the white protective film to make the surface of the face substrate 6020 whiter. It may be configured as follows. By forming the face substrate 6020 in such an embodiment, it is possible to make the face substrate 6020 visible in white. The same method can be adopted not only when the substrate is white but also when it is desired to be visible in other colors such as black and green. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate has a specific color.
Although an example in which the entire surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are white is shown, only a part of the region where the color of the face substrate 6020 is white may be used. Only a predetermined area on which the electronic component on the rear surface is mounted may be white. The back of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a thin plate-shaped cover, and the cover is provided with a punched-shaped opening so that the electronic component whose mounting mode is to be confirmed can be visually recognized. Therefore, the rear surface of the face board 6020 and a specific electronic component whose mounting mode is to be confirmed may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. When a colorless and transparent cover is used as such a cover, light is diffusely reflected on the surface of the cover, and the visibility of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is lowered. Further, when a colored opaque cover is adopted as such a cover, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are hidden by the cover, and it becomes extremely difficult to confirm the mounting mode. .. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a punched opening so that at least a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, while protecting the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 with a cover, it is possible to confirm the mounting mode from the opening provided in the cover for the electronic components whose mounting mode is to be confirmed. can. Further, by providing such an opening, it is possible to release the heat generated from the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 to the outside, and the mounted electronic component may be damaged or deteriorated by the heat. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. It is preferable to configure the cover so that the electronic components do not protrude from the opening in a state of protruding rearward from the surface forming the back surface of the cover. Further, as the color of the cover, a black opaque or a dark opaque one may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

It is desirable that the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a difference in brightness from the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020. Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be a bright color such as white or cream, and the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be a dark color such as black or dark blue. With such a configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is black. Further, since the face board 6020 is light-colored and the mounted electronic components are dark-colored, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted on the face board 6020 and the face board 6020. It becomes visible separately from the electronic parts.

The LED capable of multicolor light emission is made of a white member in order to increase the reflectance. In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounting mode of the LED mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. As described above, when the mounted electronic component is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, the face board 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is difficult to see, but the LED mounted on the face board 6020 is easy to see. Alternatively, the mounted electronic component or the electronic component before mounting may be coated with black or dark ink so that the electronic component is mounted on the white or light-colored face substrate.

As used herein, white refers to a color that becomes visible when an object is uniformly (about 100 to 80%) diffusely reflected by visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light. Further, the bright color refers to a color that can be visually recognized as, for example, cream or light gray by absorbing a specific wavelength region to some extent and diffusely reflecting the remaining wavelength region. On the other hand, black refers to a color that becomes visible when an object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and diffusely reflects a part (about 20 to several%). There is. In addition, dark color is black because most of the visible light of all wavelengths is uniformly absorbed and only a part (about 20 to several%) is diffusely reflected, but the absorption rate of light is different in a specific wavelength region. It refers to a color that is close to the color, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as dark blue.

In the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 491 (A) and 491 (B), the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured so that it can be manually moved from the standby position to the upward moving position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not immovable by the lock mechanism at the time of power failure, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. It is configured as follows.

As a configuration for manually moving the rabbit accessory 6000, first, the immovable state will be described. In general, if the movable decoration is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, when a large acceleration is applied to the movable decoration when the gaming machine is transported or installed in a game store. In addition, the movable decoration may be damaged. Therefore, a mechanism is provided to lock the movable decoration when the movable decoration is in the standby position when the power is on, and when the power is turned off while the movable decoration is locked, the movable decoration is provided by the lock mechanism. A method of immobilizing the body is considered. However, when such a lock mechanism is provided, it becomes difficult to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body by hand. Therefore, it is possible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand by configuring it so as not to provide such a lock mechanism.

Next, a light guide plate will be described as a configuration for manually moving the rabbit accessory 6000. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that allows a player to visually recognize a mode in which a predetermined pattern is shining by diffusely reflecting light incident from a side surface in a predetermined pattern provided on the surface. Further, such a light emitting pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined effect. However, when such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, it becomes difficult or impossible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body by hand. Therefore, by configuring the opening 1100a of the game panel so as not to provide such a light guide plate, it is possible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand.

With such a configuration, the clerk can directly move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 at the time of power failure, and the face substrate can be used. It is possible to reflect different areas on the rear surface of the 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 491 (A), after moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized so as to look into the rabbit accessory 6000 from below. This makes it easy to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistance 6027e, and the sixth resistance 6027f, which were difficult to see until then. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 491 (B), by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand, the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which was previously invisible, Electronic components such as the first resistance 6027a to the sixth resistance 6027f can be visually recognized.

An example is shown in which the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, but when the light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the entire game panel opening 1100a is covered with the light guide plate. Instead, it may be configured to cover only a part of the game panel opening 1100a. Specifically, when the standby position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is the lower front of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is the center front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the guide is provided. It is preferable to arrange the light plate so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. In this way, even if the light guide plate is provided, since a part of the game panel opening 1100a is not covered with the light guide plate, the function of exerting the effect of the light guide plate and the rabbit character By manually moving the 6000, both functions such as being able to change the area in which the face board 6020 is reflected with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600 can be achieved at the same time.

An example was shown in which the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed by directly moving the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand, but the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate is guided so that the hand cannot be inserted. The light plate may be enlarged, and in this case, the rabbit character may be moved by an article smaller than the hand. For example, a rod-shaped member having a diameter of about 5 mm or a thin plate-shaped member having a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm can be inserted into a region of the game panel opening 1100a not covered by the light guide plate to move the rabbit accessory 6000. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate may be set to a size that allows such a rod-shaped member or a plate-shaped member to be inserted. It suffices if an opening of about 0.0 cm and a length of 1.0 cm is provided. With such a configuration, the area covered by the light guide plate of the game panel opening 1100a can be widened, and the area where the effect using the light guide plate can be produced can be expanded.

If the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not provided with a lock mechanism that makes it immovable at the time of power failure, and if the game panel opening 1100a is not provided with a light guide plate, the clerk is hand or elongated. An example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 can be directly moved by the member is shown, but when the accessory in the standby position is made immovable by the lock mechanism at the time of power failure, or the game panel opening 1100a is completely covered. When the light guide plate is provided as described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 cannot be manually moved, and the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Can't. Such a problem is a big problem in the case where the electronic component mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 is not reflected at all or hardly reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the rabbit character is in the standby position. Will be.

Therefore, in such an example, by turning off the power switch provided on the gaming machine while the initial check of the movable decorative body executed when the power is turned on is being performed, the control unit and the driving unit of the gaming machine are turned off. When a state is forcibly created in which power is not supplied to the machine, the movable decoration in a position other than the standby position does not return to the standby position due to its own weight, and the power switch is turned off. It is advisable to configure the switch so that it stops at a position slightly moved by its own weight from the position where. A specific example is shown below.

At the time of the initial check, the lock mechanism of the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is first released to move from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 starts moving to the upper moving position. do. After the rabbit character 6000 completes the movement to the upper movement position, it stays in the movement position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), then starts moving to the lower standby position, and then the rabbit character 6000 waits. It stops at the position, and the lock mechanism changes the movable state to the immovable state, and the initial check is completed. Even when the game is started and the rabbit character 6000 is moved as an effect according to the start prize etc., the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position first becomes movable from the immovable state, and then the rabbit character 6000 is moved. Is controlled to move between the standby position and the moving position in a predetermined movement mode, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled to be moved to the standby position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the unlocked state to the locked state. And.

In a gaming machine having such a configuration, by intentionally generating an electric power failure state, the clerk does not move the rabbit character 6000 directly by hand, but is mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000. It is possible to reflect the electronic components on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, since the rabbit character 6000 is configured to stay in the moving position for a predetermined time at the time of the initial check, the rabbit character 6000 is forcibly turned off at the timing when the rabbit character 6000 stays in the moving position. Can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing of turning off the power switch provided in the gaming machine and turning off the power is not severe. Further, since the rabbit accessory 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020.

In the initial check, not only does it stay at the moving position for a predetermined time, but also when moving from the waiting position to the moving position, a predetermined position between the waiting position and the moving position (for example, between the waiting position and the moving position). At the position), the rabbit accessory 6000 stays for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then moves to the moving position. If so, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to stay in a predetermined position. With such a configuration, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be easily stopped at different positions, and the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from different angles. Will be. Further, since the rabbit accessory 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020.

An example of keeping the rabbit accessory 6000 in a moving position or a predetermined position for a predetermined time at the time of initial check is shown. In these examples, the face substrate 6020 is in a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 stays in the moving position or a predetermined position. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided in the above may be configured to light in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, at the start of the initial check, the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, and the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are lit in a predetermined manner before starting the movement to the moving position. You may. For example, as a light emitting mode, it is preferable to light the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in the same color. In this case, white is desirable as the emission color. With such a configuration, the clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emitting mode of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, and if there is an abnormality in the light emitting mode, the rabbit. It is possible to visually check the back surface side of the face substrate 6020 with the gaming machine in which the accessory 6000 is in a predetermined position or a moving position in a power-off state, and confirm what kind of abnormality has occurred. In addition, when a player complains about the light emitting mode, it is possible to quickly identify the cause of the abnormality.

Although an example of lighting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in the same color is shown, it is preferable to provide three or more face light emitting units 6023 and configure each to emit light in the same color. Further, the emission color at this time may be configured to include at least white. In such a configuration, if any of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light emitting unit 6023 is different from the other plurality of face light emitting units 6023. It emits light in different colors (for example, if a resistor provided in series with an LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can only emit blue and red, which is a mixture of those colors. The aspect of emitting light in reddish purple can be visually recognized.) Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the defective face light emitting portion by the emission color.

When the power failure state is forcibly generated, the rabbit accessory 6000 is located in a state where it is not in the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be once moved to the standby position, and then controlled so as to start the initial operation check as described above again from the beginning. With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at an appropriate position where the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be easily visually recognized.

Various embodiments can be considered for the mode of the rabbit character 6000 itself, the movement mode of the rabbit character 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit character 6000 and the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of examples are shown below.

FIG. 492 shows an embodiment of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed by moving the rabbit accessory from the lower standby position to the upper moving position. In this example, the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 constitute the rabbit accessory 6000, and although it is possible to move between the standby position and the moving position, the body portion 6030 is a game panel. It is configured not to move relative to 1100. FIG. 492 (A) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, and in this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face board 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. Further, the control element 6025, the fifth resistance 6027e, and the sixth resistance 6027f are not reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 because the body portion 6030 is located immediately behind these electronic components. FIG. 492 (B) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position. In this state, almost the entire back surface of the face substrate is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is.

When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to slowly rotate about the front-rear direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be manually configured to rotate about the front-back direction. With such a configuration, it is extremely easy to visually recognize the control element 6025, the fifth resistance 6027e, and the sixth resistance 6027f, which are originally located below the face substrate 6020 and it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode. Become.

FIG. 493 shows an embodiment of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are provided as separate bodies with respect to the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000. The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a vertically elongated rectangular shape. During the operation of the rabbit accessory 6000, the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 move to the upper moving positions to perform a predetermined effect. Will be done.

FIG. 493 (A) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the standby position, and in this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 has the first ear portion 6021. Only a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 in a state of being hidden by the second ear portion 6022 is reflected. FIG. 493 (B) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the moving positions. The whole area is reflected. By moving the member between the member whose mounting mode of the electronic component is desired and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this way, the visual mode of the member whose mounting mode of the electronic component is to be confirmed is changed. Is possible. Although aspects of the rabbit accessory 6000 have been described in other examples, these aspects may be applied to the first selvage portion 6021 and the second selvage portion 6022 in the example shown in FIG. 493.

FIG. 494 shows an embodiment of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the body portion 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is vertically elongated. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the body portion 6030 is configured so that the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit accessory 6000 are invisible, and when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the body portion is configured. The rabbit character 6000 will be located above 6030. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected.

In the embodiments described so far, the area of the face cover portion 6010 of the rabbit accessory 6000 does not change, but the member corresponding to the face cover portion 6010 is composed of an opaque member in the state of being moved to the moving position. In addition, in the movable decorative member that expands in the horizontal direction with respect to the game panel 1100 to increase the area seen from the front view, the area seen from the front view increases, so that the effect display device 1600 on the game board side increases. It may be difficult to visually recognize the reflection of the substrate on the display area. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is adopted, the area of the front view may be manually reduced in a state where the power is forcibly cut off at the time of the initial check. Alternatively, the state before the area when viewed from the front is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area when viewed from the front does not increase when the area is moved to the moving position during the initial check. Later, it may be configured so that the area when viewed from the front is large. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to confirm the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

An example is shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. On the other hand, it is not preferable for the player to visually recognize the state in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected. For example, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, when an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed, the electronic mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 by the player. The parts will be visible, and there is a risk that the player will be in a state of excitement even though he is trying to excite by performing the production. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for the purpose of dividing the game when a so-called reach loss occurs, in which the decorative symbol stops in a manner showing a loss after forming a reach state. Even when the effect of darkening almost the entire surface is executed, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 are visually recognized by the player, and the player is in a disappointing state of being out of reach. In addition, there is a risk that the player will be in a state of excitement.

Therefore, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is located in the standby position at the timing of executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, such reflection is visually recognized. It is advisable to adopt a configuration that suppresses it. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, since the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are located between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6021 are located. It is hidden by the ear portion 6022, and the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is suppressed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, since the body portion 6030 is located between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is hidden by these members and is hidden by the game board side effect display device 1600. The reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 492, when performing an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, and the like are used by the player. It may be visible. Therefore, by displaying something only in the lower front part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is excited according to the effect of darkening the display area. Will be. In the lower front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, it may be configured to display a decorative pattern, display the number of holds, or display the hold image showing the expected degree of jackpot related to the change. .. In this case, the color of the image may be darker or the size of the image may be smaller than that of displaying the decorative pattern, the number of holdings, or the holding image. Further, instead of displaying these statically, they may be displayed dynamically like an animation. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection generated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 inconspicuous during the game.

After the blackout effect is started, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 492 (A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 492 (B) while the blackout effect is being performed. The first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 may be moved from the standby position shown in 493 (A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 493 (B), or from the standby position shown in FIG. 494 (A) to FIG. 494 (B). It may be configured to move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the movement position shown in 1. However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 are easily visible.

Therefore, when performing an effect of moving the rabbit character 6000 from the lower standby position to the upper movement position, the area overlaps with the rabbit character 6000 in the front view in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured to display the reflection suppression image which suppresses the reflection. In this way, when the rabbit accessory 6600 moves, the image on which it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the reflection of the face board 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed on the game board side effect. By displaying the image in the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is excited.

The size of the reflection suppression image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit character 6000 in front view, or one size larger (about 1-2 cm) than the rabbit character. It is assumed that the outer shape of the reflection-suppressed image and the outer shape of the rabbit accessory 6000 completely overlap each other in the front view, or the reflection-suppressed image is displayed in a manner of about 1-2 mm protruding from the periphery of the rabbit accessory in the front view. It is good to do it. Further, the reflection suppression image may be composed of white or light color. By making it white or bright, it is possible to make the reflection inconspicuous. In addition to white or light color, black or dark color may be used to form the reflection suppression image. Further, the reflection suppression image may be an image that is dynamically displayed.

The timing for starting the display of the reflection suppression image may be before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit character 6000 starts moving during the darkening effect. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, the reflection suppression image may be configured to be moved while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit accessory 6000. The reflection suppression image should be displayed until the darkening effect is completed. For example, if the rabbit accessory 6000 is stopped at the standby position during the darkening effect, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image. After that, even when the rabbit accessory 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image as long as the darkening effect is performed.

In addition to preparing a plurality of modes of such a reflection suppression image, assign different jackpot expectations to the mode of the reflection suppression image, and display one of the reflection suppression images when the rabbit character moves. Then, it may be configured to function as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, blue and red may be prepared as the colors of the reflection suppression image, and the red reflection suppression image may be configured to show that the expectation of a big hit is higher. In this case, since the player pays attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, even if some electronic components are reflected, it is possible to make such reflection less noticeable. ..

Although the point of displaying the reflection suppression image when moving the rabbit accessory 6000 has been described, the above-described embodiment may be applied even when the first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 are moved. good.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, it is desirable that the colors of the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are black or dark. Further, it is desirable not to mount electronic components on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022. When mounting electronic components on the back surfaces of the first selvage portion 6021 and the second selvage portion 6022, it is desirable to make the electronic components darker in color. With such a configuration, the rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, which are members for suppressing the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are the game board. Even if the reflection is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, the reflection can be made difficult for the player to notice.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, it is desirable that the color of the back surface of the body portion 6030 is dark. Further, it is desirable that no electronic component is mounted on the back surface of the body portion 6030. When mounting electronic components on the back surface of the body portion 6030, it is desirable to use a dark color. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body portion 6030, which is a member that suppresses the reflection of the face substrate 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the player due to the reflection. The effect on can be reduced.

The moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 at the time of the initial check may be configured to be in front of the central portion of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In this case, the reflection on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be confirmed from all the directions of up, down, left, and right, and the entire area on the rear surface of the face board 6020 can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, when performing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved to the front of the center of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving to the position, it may be configured to execute this effect. In this case, the rabbit character 6000 is located exactly in the middle of the direction of the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player moves his face to forcibly reflect the rabbit character 6000. Unless the aspect is visually recognized, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized by the player. When the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is finished, the rabbit character 6000 is waited from the moving position after brightening the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. By moving to the position, the influence on the player due to the reflection can be reduced.

As an example of the member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is shown, but the rear surface of the member other than the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is played. By reflecting the image on the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, the state of the rear surface of the member may be confirmed. For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided for transmitting a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 and supplying power from the power supply board 931 is an effect display on the game board side. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the device 1600. Further, on the back surface of the relay board, a connector or a control element to which a flat cable used for transmitting a control signal or supplying electric power is connected is surface-mounted. It is preferable to configure these so as to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is any abnormality in the electronic components mounted on the relay board.

An example is shown in which the relationship between the standby position and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the vertical direction. However, the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and is located between the rear standby position and the front moving position. It may be configured to move. Alternatively, the rabbit accessory 6000 provided below the front surface of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 rotates about the rotation axis provided below the rabbit accessory 6000, whereby the rabbit accessory 6000 is rotated. It may be configured to be movable so that the upper part of the 6000 is moved so as to be tilted forward. The rabbit character 6000 is configured to be movable between the standby position where the rabbit character 6000 is in a positional relationship parallel to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movement position where the upper part of the rabbit character 6000 is moved so as to tilt forward. You may. Even in such a configuration, by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the standby position to the moving position, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be widened. Is possible.

An example is shown in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, but the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be fixedly provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable rearward, or the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable around a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 fixedly provided in the moved direction may be positioned. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 even for a fixedly provided rabbit character. Become.

An example in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the game board side with respect to the fixedly provided rabbit accessory 6000. Although the example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable is shown, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to move backward, and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to move forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000, which are not overlapped in the front view, may be configured to move so as to approach each other in the horizontal direction so as to be in the overlapped state in the front view. good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Although an example in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided is shown, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided. Then, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices. Further, the surface formed by the display area of one effect display device and the surface formed by the display area of the other effect display device are configured to face different directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved to the front side thereof. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected from different angles in the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices, and it becomes easy to find the cause of the abnormality.

Further, by configuring a plurality of movable effect display devices to be provided and moving the effect display device, the display area of the effect display device or a plurality of effects in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 is at least one is provided. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the display device.

An example is shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is forcibly turned off, but during a so-called demonstration in which the player has not played the game for a predetermined time. By darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rear surface of the face board 6020 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 495 shows a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 487. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 487 to 494 is provided is not in the lower center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, but on the lower left front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become. Further, a stump accessory 6100 having a shape imitating a stump is provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a whole, a space is formed between the game board 5 and the game panel 1100 on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 487, and a plurality of spaces are formed in this space. The characters are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. There is. Further, a first grass accessory 6470 and a second grass accessory 6475 are provided behind them, and a third grass accessory 6480 is provided behind them so as to overlap the third grass accessory 6480 behind them. A fourth grass character 6485 is provided, a rabbit character 6000 and a stump character 6100 are provided behind them, a mountain character 6500 is provided behind these, and a game board side effect display is provided behind the mountain character 6500. A device 1600 is provided. By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be obtained.

A stump portion 6200 having a shape imitating a stump and a first grass movable portion 6360 and a second grass movable portion 6370 having a shape imitating grass are provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the stump portion 6200. The stump accessory 6100 is configured as a unit by the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370.

FIG. 496 shows the stump accessory 6100. A first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200, and a second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are each formed of a plate-shaped, green transparent synthetic resin. In the first grass movable portion 6360, the surface formed of the green transparent synthetic resin is exposed at the outer edge portion excluding the lower end portion thereof, and the member located at the rear is seen through and can be visually recognized. On the other hand, a first grass decoration portion 6360a coated with green ink is provided on a portion other than the lower end portion and the outer edge, and the rear portion of the first grass decoration portion 6360a is invisible. .. The second grass movable portion 6370 also has the same configuration as the first grass movable portion 6360, and includes a second grass decoration portion 6370a.

As shown in FIG. 496 (A), the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are in a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located in front of the stump portion 6200. As shown in 496 (B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200. It is possible to take the state of being moved to. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In the state shown in FIG. 496 (A), the end face forming the right end of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the end face forming the left end of the second grass movable portion 6370 are in contact with each other, and the stump portion 6200 located rearward. The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a part of the stump opening 6210a is provided with a region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided and a second grass decoration portion 6370a of the second grass movable portion 6370. It is configured to be visible through the non-existent area. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall substrate 6352 provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352. A part of the wall light emitting unit 6354 is configured to be visible.

In this state, as the first light emitting effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set as a light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is not provided with the first grass decorative portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360. The area and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided are irradiated, and the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the second grass movable part are irradiated. It may be configured so that the player can take a state of being irradiated to the player by passing through the area where the second grass decoration portion 6370a of the portion 6370 is not provided.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 496 (B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is positioned in front of the stump portion 6200. Since it is in a state of being moved to the right from the state of being in a stump portion, the visibility of the lower half of the stump portion 6200 is enhanced. In this state, the stump box portion 6300 is visible from the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump portion 6200. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The light emitting unit 6354 has changed from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it is easy to see, as compared with a state before the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move.

In this state, as the second light emitting effect, the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is set as a light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a and is directed toward the front where the player is located. It may be configured so that it can take a state of being directly irradiated. In the second light emitting effect, the first grass movable portion 6360 passes through the region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided and the second grass movable portion 6370 is not provided with the second grass decoration portion 6370a. Compared with the first light emission effect in which the player is irradiated with light, it is possible to give the player a visually stronger stimulus.

It should be noted that the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state) that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state). ) Is possible, in the case of the first gaming state, the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed is configured to be longer than the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed, and the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed is configured to be longer than the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the period in which the second light emission effect is executed longer than the period in which the first light emission effect is executed. Alternatively, the first light emitting effect is executed for a relatively long period in the first gaming state as compared with the second gaming state, and the second gaming state is relatively longer than the first gaming state. The second light emitting effect may be configured to be executed during the period. Further, even if only the first light emitting effect is performed in the first gaming state, both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are performed, or only the second light emitting effect is performed in the second gaming state. good. The second light emitting effect, which is visually more stimulating than the first light emitting effect, functions as an effect that gives the player a sense of interest (a production that gives a special feeling), and is therefore used only in an advantageous gaming state. Or, when the game is in an advantageous state, the effect period is used for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this way, in the second gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, the player will experience a visually strong stimulus for a longer period of time than in the first gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. , It is possible to further increase the excitement of the player who is in an excited state due to the occurrence of an advantageous state.

FIG. 497 (A) shows the stump portion 6200. The stump portion 6200 is composed of a stump plate portion 6210 which is a colored opaque plate-shaped member provided on the front side and a box-shaped stump box portion 6300 provided on the back side. The stump plate portion 6210 is a plate-shaped member having an outer shape imitating a wooden stump, and a stump opening 6210a is provided in the center thereof.

FIG. 497 (B) shows the positional relationship between the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump box portion 6300 in a front view. In the figure, the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump opening portion 6210a are shown by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box portion 6300 is arranged so as to correspond to the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210, and imitates a state in which a hole is formed on the side surface of the stump.

FIG. 498 (A) shows the stump box portion 6300. The stump box portion 6300 includes a box upper wall portion 6310 that constitutes the upper wall, a box right wall portion 6320 that constitutes the right wall, a box lower wall portion 6330 that constitutes the lower wall, and a box that constitutes the left wall. It is composed of a left wall portion 6340 and a box rear wall portion 6350 constituting the rear wall. The box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a trapezoidal shape in a plan view, the back side and the front side are parallel, and the length of the front side is longer than the back side. It is composed long. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided so that the front side is inclined outward. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, a sense of depth can be obtained.

FIG. 498 (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the stump box portion 6300 is disassembled. The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the rear side. In this figure, a dotted line with respect to the rear wall substrate 6352 schematically shows a location where the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 included in the rear wall cover 6356 is located.

FIG. 498 (C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. A rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 having a shape imitating a root vegetable is formed on the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 is composed of a first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a shaped like a root vegetable root and a second rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b shaped like a root vegetable leaf.

FIG. 498 (D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed circuit board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. A rear wall light emitting unit 6354 configured by surface-mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 has the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 when viewed from the front. The light emitted from the LED constituting the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is emitted toward the front perpendicular to the surface forming the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is provided at a position where it overlaps with the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 in front view. Specifically, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a corresponds to the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the roots of root vegetables, and the second rear wall cover light scattering having a shape imitating root vegetables leaves. A second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is provided corresponding to the portion 6358b. As shown in FIG. 496 (A), in a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located in front of the stump portion 6200, each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is used. 1 It is configured to be provided at a position that does not overlap with the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the grass movable part 6360 is not provided or the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided. It is good to do it. In this case, even if the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is set to emit light as an effect, the player is not directly irradiated with light, so that a visually weak stimulus is given to the player.

The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not completely in contact with each other, but are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b do not come into contact with the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the rear wall light emitting unit 6354, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 fails due to the heat generated by itself. It will be possible.

The stump accessory 6100 is used for an effect of notifying the expectation of a big hit in a gaming machine. Specifically, from the state where the stump opening 6210a is difficult to see, the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right, so that the stump opening 6210a becomes easy to see. Whether or not, then, when the stump opening 6210a is in a state where it is easy to see, the light emission of the box rear wall portion 6350 located on the back side of the stump box portion 6300 which becomes visible through the stump opening 6210a. What is the mode (for example, whether the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 appears to shine red or white, or the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located in the rear with the light turned off. It is configured to suggest that the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol is expected to be stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit, depending on whether it looks white. For example, in each of the light emitting modes of the rear wall substrate 6352, the expected degree of stop display may be set so that the stop mode of the changing decorative symbol indicates a big hit. With such a configuration, the player can be greatly interested in the light emitting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352.

An example was shown in which the light emitting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 informs the degree of expectation that the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol indicates a big hit, but the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting. Such notification may be performed by setting the light emitting mode different from that of the unit 6354b.

For example, by not emitting light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a but causing the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit light weakly in green, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables is white. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is shaped like a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player. Further, by causing the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a to emit light lightly in white and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit light weakly in green, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables is formed. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is white and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player. Further, by causing the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a to emit light weakly in red and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit light weakly in green, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables is formed. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is red and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player.

The reason why the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a emits light weakly is that the light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a does not strongly decorate the portion other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a. Because. Further, the reason why the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is weakly emitted is that the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b does not strongly decorate the portion other than the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b. Because. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if substantially only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is in the light emitting mode.

By adopting such a light emitting mode, it is possible to realize an expression imitating a root vegetable radish in the first light emitting example and the second light emitting example, and a root vegetable carrot in the third light emitting example. Further, in the first light emitting example, the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a and the color of the first rear wall substrate are not emitted even though the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a is not emitted. The shape of the wall cover light scattering portion 6358a makes it possible to express a predetermined motif (in this example, the root portion of the radish). Further, in the relationship between the second light emitting example and the third light emitting example, a plurality of motifs (radish and carrot in this example) are expressed by making the light emitting color of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a different. It is possible to do.

An example is shown in which by making the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b emit light weakly, it is possible to realize an effect as if substantially only the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 has a light emitting mode. However, in such an effect, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are made to emit strong light so that the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 is covered with the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall. It may be configured so that the light from the light emitting unit 6354b reaches strongly. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b may be configured to emit light in the same color (for example, white).

Even if the light from the rear wall substrate 6352 is reflected by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 so as to be visible to the player. good. For example, in the transparent synthetic resin constituting the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, a light scattering unit capable of scattering each inner surface constituting the stump box portion 6300. It may be configured to be. Alternatively, in the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, plating or the like forming a metal thin film such as aluminum on at least each inner surface constituting the stump box portion 6300. The reflective portion may be formed by subjecting the treatment. With such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently reflect the light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and radiated on the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 toward the player. Further, in this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has a function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

The rear wall substrate 6352 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white through the colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356. Therefore, when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move to the moving positions respectively and the box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized from the stump opening 6210a, the rear wall light emitting portion. Even when the 6354 is turned off, the player can visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as a state in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself. Further, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 that imitates the shape of a root vegetable, and even when the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 does not emit light, the shape of the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 allows the rear wall cover to emit light. The rear wall portion 6350 of the box can be visually recognized by the player as it is decorated.

Although the example in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 has a shape imitating the shape of a root vegetable is shown, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be a light scattering portion. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is made into a smooth shape without providing a portion for scattering the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. May be configured to pass as it is. Even with such a configuration, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as a decorated state as in the above-mentioned example.

An example is shown in which the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 is provided with the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, Either the box lower wall portion 6330 or the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to have a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356. Alternatively, with respect to at least one of the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 constituting the stump box portion 6300. It may be configured to provide a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330 constituting the stump box portion 6300 may be provided. , The box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be provided with a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356. Further, in these examples, when the predetermined wall portion is provided with the configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, the other wall portions are not provided with the configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. It may be configured to provide only the configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are formed of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate portion 6210 is transparent or Formed from a translucent synthetic resin, when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is put into a light emitting state, so that the rear wall light emitting part 6354 The rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 may be illuminated by the emitted light. With such a configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump plate portion 6210, and the player can visually recognize the state in which the stump plate portion 6210 is decorated with the light. Even if the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the stump plate portion 6210 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are formed of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. good. For example, these may be formed of a brown synthetic resin. Further, the rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 may be printed with a tree pattern shape with brown ink so as to form an opaque or translucent region in a part of the stump plate portion.

Although the example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white is shown, other colors may be adopted. For example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown as in the stump plate portion 6210. In such an embodiment, by turning off the light emitting portion 6354a on the first rear wall, the root vegetables to which soil is attached can be expressed in the light scattering portion 6358 on the rear wall cover.

When the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210 is exposed, and the box rear wall portion located rearward. An example in which the 6350 becomes visible is shown, but the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are rotated around the left and right directions of the lower ends of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370. It is configured to be driveable so that the upper part falls forward, and when the upper part of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 falls forward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed. , The box rear wall portion 6350 located at the rear may be configured to be visible.

An example is shown in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are provided in front of the stump portion 6200, but only one of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided in front of the stump portion 6200. The stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving to the right or left movement position. Alternatively, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are configured as an integral member, and the member moves to the right or left moving position so that the stump opening 6210a is exposed. It may be configured.

The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be rotatably configured. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 is used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) is configured to rotate the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 so as to be in contact with the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310. The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) may be used to rotate the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 so as to be in contact with the inner surface of the left wall portion 6340 of the box. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is located on the front side of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 can be visually recognized by the player via the rear wall cover 6356. The box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player in any of the embodiments in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not located on the front side of the 6352 and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. Further, since the stump accessory 6100 is located at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the player's point of view, the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated around the upper side or the left side to rotate the rear wall cover 6356 after movement. Cover 6356 becomes inconspicuous. It should be noted that the right side or the variable may be rotated as an axis.

The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a shape larger than that of the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured to have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210 so that the outer edges of the rear wall substrate 6352 overlap each other in front view. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that is enlarged from the original shape to the surroundings. In this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, it is irradiated from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall are irradiated. The light reflected backward by the unit 6340 or the like can be reflected again toward the player in front.

Further, the light emitting portion may be provided in a portion other than the region covered by the rear wall cover 6356. For example, a light emitting portion is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind the portion imitating the root or the portion imitating the cut end of the tree in the stump plate portion 6210, and the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is made to emit light at the same time. It may be configured as. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 to emit light. Alternatively, such a rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured so that no light emitting unit other than the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is provided. Also in this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the light reflected rearward by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the like is emitted. It becomes possible to reflect toward the player in front again.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 498, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the front side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the back side. On the other hand, in the example shown below using FIG. 499, the box rear wall portion 6350 is the rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side, the rear wall substrate 6352 located in the middle, and the rear wall plate portion 6380 located on the back side. I tried to compose from. In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape imitating root vegetables, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an outer shape imitating the roots of root vegetables, and the second rear having an outer shape imitating root vegetables leaves. A wall cover light scattering unit 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear can be visually recognized.

The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape imitating a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a imitating a root portion of a root vegetable and a second rear wall substrate 6352b imitating a leaf portion of a root vegetable. A white protective film is formed on the front surface and the rear surface of the first rear wall substrate 6352a by a white protective agent. Further, a green protective film is formed on the front surface and the rear surface of the second rear wall substrate 6352b by a green protective agent. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. Further, two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of such a rear wall substrate 6352. Further, the rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and the rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to the front surface thereof. Then, in this example, the rear wall of the stump box portion 6300 is formed by the rear wall plate portion 6380.

Even if the first rear wall board 6352a and the second rear wall board 6352b are configured as separate printed circuit boards and attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380, respectively, the first rear wall board 6352a and the second rear wall board 6352b can be configured to function as the rear wall board 6352. Alternatively, the printed circuit board 1 may be coated with a white protective agent and a green protective agent separately to form the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b.

In the stump box portion 6300 having such a configuration, it is preferable to perform an effect of moving the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 to the moving position as described above. Further, also in this embodiment, as the light emitting mode when the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b are used for the staging, a weak light emitting mode that makes it visible as if the root vegetables are emitting light and a weak light emitting mode are used. A strong light emitting mode may be adopted so that the entire stump box portion 6300 can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light.

Further, even when the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are turned off, the color and shape of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b cause the stump box portion 6300 to be in the stump box portion 6300. It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is white through the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a that imitates the root portion, and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b that imitates the leaf portion. The rear wall substrate 6352b is visible in green. In this way, one decorative body can be configured only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

In this example, a plurality of grass accessories 6400 are provided below and in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the front side of the rabbit accessory and the stump accessory.

In the example shown in FIG. 495, as described above, the first grass accessory 6470 to the fourth grass accessory 6485 are provided as the grass accessory 6400 between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a. There is. Hereinafter, a plurality of embodiments of such a herbaceous material 6400 will be shown.

The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 500 (A) is composed of a grass substrate 6420 having a colored opaque, plate-like shape, and an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. The light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 500 (B) includes a grass substrate 6420 having a colored opaque, plate-like shape, and an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424. The light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (A) and 500 (B), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 imitates grass, and the outer shape itself has a function of decoration. White may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit light in green or brown. As the color of the grass substrate 6420, green or brown may be adopted. Green can represent the color of living grass, and brown can represent the color of dead grass. Thereby, the decoration imitating the grass can be realized by both the color and the shape of the grass substrate 6420.

Further, as the LED mounted on the grass substrate 6420, an LED having the same color as the grass substrate 6420 is adopted. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, a white LED is adopted as the LED to be mounted. With such a configuration, the LED mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the LED is provided as the light emitting portion on the substrate.

The light emitted from the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is emitted toward the front perpendicular to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the effect that makes the player feel a strong image visually. When the grass front cover 6440, which will be described later, is provided, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is radiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. It may be configured to be implemented in. With such a configuration, the light is emitted toward the upper end portion of the grass front cover 6440, so that the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is transmitted to the entire grass front cover 6440. , The effect as if the entire grass front cover 6440 was shining can be visually recognized by the player. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light emitting portion is provided on the substrate.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the LED constituting the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the player can visually recognize the effect as if the halo was shining on the grass substrate 6420. When the grass back cover 6460, which will be described later, is provided, light is emitted toward the upper end of the grass back cover 6460. Therefore, the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 extends to the upper end of the grass back cover 6460. The light emitted from the cover is transmitted, and the player can visually recognize the effect as if the entire grass back cover 6460 was shining. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light emitting portion is provided on the substrate.

Through holes (not shown) constituting an electronic circuit are provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the metal constituting the electronic circuit provided on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through hole, and when copper is used as the metal, the through hole is visually recognized in brown, which is the color of copper. .. Here, if at least a part of the grass substrate 6420 is visible to the player, the through hole may also be visible to the player. In particular, when white is adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420, brown, which is the color of the through hole provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, is visually recognized by the player, and the function as a decoration of the grass substrate 6420. There is a problem that it is damaged. Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, the through holes may be arranged so as to be scattered on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 instead of being concentrated at a predetermined position on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, by arranging the through holes along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or by arranging them on an extension of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, the through holes have the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to visually recognize it as if it were a part. By arranging through holes linearly in the same shape as the outer shape inside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, a decorative shape imitating grass may be formed. Further, one or more patterns of similar colors to the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. For example, when the through holes are brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. It is desirable that the above-mentioned example be applied to all through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but it may be applied to at least a part of the through holes, and even in that case, the grass substrate 6420 may be applied. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the function as a decoration of the is impaired. In addition, a through hole may be provided in the substrate provided in the accessory in another example, and the embodiment relating to such a through hole may be applied.

FIGS. 500 (C) to 500 (E) show an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440. The grass front cover 6440 is made of synthetic resin, and the outer shape is a decorative shape that imitates grass. Further, the portion on which the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 included in the grass substrate 6420 is mounted is configured to be covered by the grass front cover 6440 in front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 500 (C), the size of the grass front cover 6440 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, and a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (D), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 have the same size, and the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (E), the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass is outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The front cover 6440 is in a protruding state.

In the example shown in FIG. 500 (C), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 both realize a decorative aspect imitating grass. In addition, it is possible to give a sense of depth. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (D) and 500 (E), the grass substrate 6420 located at the rear can be visually recognized by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin. May be. In that case, a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440. In addition, it is possible to give a sense of depth.

FIGS. 500 (F) to 500 (H) show an example in which the grass substrate 6460 is attached to the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass poster cover 6460. The grass back cover 6460 is made of synthetic resin, and the outer shape is a decorative shape that imitates grass. Further, the portion on which the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 included in the grass substrate 6420 is mounted is configured to be covered with the grass substrate cover 6460.

In the example shown in FIG. 500 (F), the size of the grass substrate 6460 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, and the back of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass substrate cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (G), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate cover 6460 have the same size, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass substrate cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (H), the size of the grass substrate 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass substrate 6460, and the grass is outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The rear cover 6460 is in a protruding state. In this example, the outer shape of the grass back cover 6460 is visible from the front.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (F) and 500 (G), the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction. For example, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured to enable the effect that the grass accessory 6400 is rotated 180 degrees and the grass back cover 6460 faces forward. With such a configuration, the visual mode as shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (D) can be obtained, and the same effect as the example shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (D) can be obtained. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (H), a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass back cover 6460. In addition, it is possible to give a sense of depth.

FIGS. 501 (A) to 501 (G) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 500 (C). In these examples, the size of the grass front cover 6440 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, but further, a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 501 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is configured so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. There is. The transparent portion 6442 of the grass front cover, which will be described later, is also configured to pass light without being diffusely reflected by the same configuration. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover 6440 can be directly visually recognized.

In this example, by setting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to a light emitting state, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be in a state of being decorated with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. For example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is made to emit green light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

In the example shown in FIG. 501 (B), the grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The colorless and transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the colored transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front thus formed. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent sticker is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 or a colored transparent printing is applied to the grass front cover colored transparent. Part 6442b may be formed. An example was shown in which a colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover is formed by attaching a colored transparent seal or printing a colored transparent portion on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440. A colored transparent seal may be attached to a part of the cover or a colored transparent printing may be performed to form the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover may be the same color as or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420, and in this case, it is possible to make the grass substrate 6420 less noticeable as a printed circuit board. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the colored transparent portion is provided.

In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. Further, by locating the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in front of the white grass substrate 6420, the white grass substrate 6420 can be made to appear green. Further, by locating the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 becomes difficult to see from the player, and the front of the grass substrate in the off state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes excited by directly viewing the light emitting unit 6422 by the player. On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned on, the intensity of the light from the light source is alleviated by the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, so that the player may feel dazzling. It becomes possible to deter. Further, by causing the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate to emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be in a state of being decorated with the emission color.

In FIG. 501 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 501 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. In this example, when the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the modes of white, green, and white from above in front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 501 (D), the grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 includes, in this example, the grass front cover light scattering section 6444. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is composed of a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a provided at the upper part and a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided at the lower part. Has been done. The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front surface or the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 to a lens cut or satin finish. Preferably, it is desirable to form the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a on the front surface or both the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Since the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made translucent by applying lens cut and satin finish, the shape of the member located at the rear is difficult or impossible to see, but its color. Is visible to the player without change. Although the example in which the light scattering portion is formed on the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is shown, the light scattering portion may be formed on the colored transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the member located at the rear is visually recognizable in a manner in which the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin located at the front is mixed. Further, the color of the colored light scattering portion 6444b of the grass front cover may be the same as or substantially the same as that of the grass substrate 6420, and in this case, it is possible to make the grass substrate 6420 less noticeable as a printed circuit board. Further, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge when viewed from the front. In this case, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the ends of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460, so that the grass accessory 6400 can be viewed from the front. The outer shape of the can be emphasized. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light scattering portion is provided.

In this example, since the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 becomes difficult to see from the player, and the light is turned off. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes excited by directly seeing the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned on, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a, so that the player feels dazzling. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of.

The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, but with such a configuration, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Compared to the case where the electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the electronic components (LEDs constituting the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate) appear to be blurred, so that the presence of the electronic components becomes less noticeable and the player It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes a mess. When the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover is formed on both the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440, the electronic component mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422). ) Can be made less noticeable. In addition, the color of the grass substrate 6420 at the rear can be visually recognized through the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, and while blurring the shape of the electronic component mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the color of the grass substrate 6420 is utilized as a decoration. It is a mode that plays the function of.

In FIG. 501 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 501 (D), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of being transformed into the part 6442a. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in the form of white, green, or white from above in front view.

The example shown in FIG. 501 (F) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (B) is modified. In this example, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided in place of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The colorless and transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the opaque synthetic resin forms the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 form the grass front. Cover 6440 may be configured. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a seal or printing that makes the rear invisible is applied to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 to form an opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. You may. In addition, by applying a sticker or printing on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear surface cannot be seen, the rear surface is not formed on the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 but on a part of the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. It may be configured to form the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 by applying a sticker or printing that makes it invisible. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440, the aspect of the front side of the part to which the seal or printing is applied becomes visible. For example, when the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible while making the rear of the grass front cover 6440 invisible. .. Further, when the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is provided on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is visible and the rear of the grass front cover 6440 is invisible. Is possible. Yellow or brown may be adopted as the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted even when the opaque portion is provided.

In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white, and the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is indirect through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. It is visually recognizable. On the other hand, with respect to the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can be visually recognized regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420. An example of adopting yellow or brown as the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover has been shown, but in this embodiment, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on the dead grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in a light emitting state, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emission color, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover with the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, and the mode in which grass grows. Can be expressed.

As the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light may be adopted. For example, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is composed of a synthetic resin whose whole is plated with an aluminum thin film, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 configured in this way and the grass front cover colorless and transparent composed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. By assembling the portion 6442a, the grass front cover 6440 may be configured. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a silver seal is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, printing is performed with a silver paint, or a part plated with an aluminum thin film is formed. By providing it, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed. The opaque portion formed in silver in this way has a function of reflecting light. In addition, a colored paint may be applied to the opaque portion formed in silver, or a colored transparent sticker may be attached. For example, by applying a thin layer of yellow paint, it is possible to make the opaque portion visible in gold. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the opaque portion and the reflective portion are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 501 (F), the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover is configured to be visible in silver. In this case, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the front surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover is visible in silver, and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the grass substrate 6420 are visible in white. It is possible to express the mode of frost or snow on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is set as the light emitting mode, the light emitted forward from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is reflected rearward by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected rearward in the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover is scattered by being incident on the grass substrate 6420, and finally the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. Will be decorated. In this way, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate can be efficiently used for decoration. By providing a colored transparent layer on the front layer of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can be visually recognized in silver and a predetermined color.

FIG. 501 (G) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 501 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in the form of white, silver, or white from above in front view.

FIG. 502 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass can be expressed by the portion that can be visually recognized in white by the grass substrate 6420 and the green aspect by the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. It has become.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as a light emitting mode, it is desirable that the light emitting color is the same as or the same as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, for example, green or yellowish green. It is desirable to emit light. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect in a dynamic manner while keeping the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover as it is. Further, the light reflected without passing through the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover decorates the white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized in green.

FIG. 502 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in FIG. 502 (A). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white, green, or green can be expressed from above. Further, since the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 mixed with the green color of the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b can be visually recognized. , The light emitting portion 6422 itself on the front surface of the grass substrate is configured to be difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is used as a light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It becomes possible to make it an aspect. Further, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

In FIG. 502 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 502 (B), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion. This is an example transformed into 6442b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white, green, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate passes through the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, and some of the light does not pass through. It reflects and scatters in the grass front cover light scattering section 6444, and the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 can be used as a decorative mode. Further, the diffusely reflected light reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

FIG. 502 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 502 (B). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, grass in the form of white, green, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set as the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed. It can be a decorative mode. Further, the reflected light decorates the exposed white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , Can express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 502 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 502 (D), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white, yellow, brown, silver, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover can be used as the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is scattered on the back surface of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover or reflected on the back surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, so that the exposed white color is obtained. By decorating the grass substrate 6420, it is possible to decorate the white grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , Can express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 503 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a white or white aspect from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover can be used as the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is scattered on the back surface of the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate can be decorated. It is possible to decorate the 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. It is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 503 (B) is an example in which a part of the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 503 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white, white, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, the light scattering portion 6444 on the front cover of the grass can be decorated by the light reflected on the back surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. Further, by scattering light on the back surface of the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. Will be. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and the mode in which grass grows can be obtained. Can be expressed.

FIG. 503 (C) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 503 (B), the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. This is a modified example. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of white, yellow or brown or silver or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated by the light scattered by the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, and the white grass. It is possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and the mode in which grass grows can be obtained. Can be expressed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 503 (A) to 503 (C), by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored light scattering is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Part 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 503 (D) is an example in which the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 503 (C). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of white, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated by the light reflected on the back surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, and the white grass. It is possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 501 (A) to 503 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured in. Further, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although it is provided in a position where only one of the members is covered by the front view, the LED constituting the front light emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate is configured to be arranged behind the position forming the boundary line of these members. You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it less noticeable to the player that the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is mounted on the grass substrate 6420 in the off state.

For example, in the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 501 (B), an LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is provided behind the boundary line formed by the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. When configured to be arranged, the presence of the LED constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate becomes inconspicuous. It will be possible for the player to clearly see it.

Similarly, the relationship between the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover and the colored front cover. Relationship with light scattering part 6444b, relationship between grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and grass front cover opaque part 6446, relationship between grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and grass front cover opaque part 6446, grass front cover colored light Even in the relationship between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind these boundary lines, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the above inconspicuous.

Further, the relationship between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover, the relationship between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, and the grass substrate 6420 are exposed. Relationship between the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the colorless light scattering part 6444a of the grass front cover, the relationship between the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the colored light scattering part 6444b of the grass front cover, the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front Even in relation to the cover opaque portion 6446, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind these boundary lines, the presence of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is present. Can be made inconspicuous.

In the above-mentioned combination, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the light of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is emitted. In combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, it is possible to efficiently transmit to the member forming the boundary line.

The light from the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 may be irradiated perpendicularly to the grass substrate 6420, or the boundary line at the position where the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is mounted. You may irradiate in the direction perpendicular to the tangent line of.

For example, when both are members capable of transmitting light, such as a combination of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the LED constituting the front light emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate is used. The light irradiation direction may be configured to irradiate the grass substrate 6420 perpendicularly. On the other hand, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the boundary line at the position where the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted is It may be configured to irradiate light in the direction of a member that is perpendicular to the tangent line and that forms a boundary line in combination with the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover.

When a rectangular LED is used as the LED constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, the longitudinal direction of the LED coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the close battle of the boundary line at the position where the LED is arranged. It is good to arrange it like this.

When the two parts forming the boundary line are formed by one member, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 does not protrude in the front view at the part corresponding to the boundary line and has a size of about the same width. It may be configured to provide a V-shaped groove. With such a configuration, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is visually recognized from the front, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is refracted and visually recognized by the V-shaped groove. Therefore, it is possible to make the presence of the LED constituting the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate inconspicuous. The shape is not limited to the V-shaped groove and may be any structure that can be refracted. On the other hand, when a boundary line is formed by combining a plurality of members, the LEDs constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate are refracted and visually recognized without providing such a groove. It is possible to make the presence of the LED constituting the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the substrate inconspicuous.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 501 (A) to 503 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured in. This gives a sense of depth. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated by the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. Will be. In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is white and light of a color other than white is irradiated from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color to make it visible.

Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in different colors can be used as a decorative mode when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off and when the light emitting unit is turned off. By mounting the LED constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate on the grass substrate 6420 so that the light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, the upper part of the grass substrate 6420 is formed. More light can reach the edges.

504 (A) to 506 (D) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 500 (D). In these examples, the size of the grass substrate 6420 and the size of the grass front cover 6440 are the same, but further, a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 504 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is configured so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. There is. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover can be directly visually recognized. Further, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a white form can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the grass substrate 6420 in green, expressing the mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 504 (B) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

In FIG. 504 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 504 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a green or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 504 (D) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a white or white aspect from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 504 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 504 (D), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of modification to the portion 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a white or white aspect from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 504 (F) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 504 (G), in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 505 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the green aspect can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 505 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (D). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express green or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 505 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (E). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express green or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 505 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in the form of green, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 505 (E) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (G). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 506 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a white form can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 506 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white or green, yellow or brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 506 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (G). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light scattering portion 6422, the grass substrate cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 are decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 506 (A) to 506 (C), by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored light scattering is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Part 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 506 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, or silver can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover to the end forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400. The light reaches and it becomes possible to decorate the end of the grass accessory 6400 with a predetermined color. More specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 is viewed from an angle, the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 appears to be exposed, so that the exposed portion can be visually recognized in a manner shining with a predetermined emission color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400 with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing. In addition, even in the case where another grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided, it can be visually recognized in such an embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 504 (A) to 506 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having the same size as the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. At the same time, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate also decorates the grass substrate 6420. Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the color of the grass front cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420. The decoration is performed by a color in which both of the above are mixed, and further, the decoration is performed on the grass substrate 6420 by the light emitted from the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in different colors can be used as a decorative mode when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off and when the light emitting unit is turned off.

507 (A) to 509 (D) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 500 (E). In these examples, the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass front cover 6440 is outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Although it is configured in a protruding state, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 507 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is configured so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. There is. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, expressing the mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 507 (B) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, and green from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

In FIG. 507 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 507 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of green transparent, green, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 507 (D) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

In FIG. 507 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of being transformed into the part 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless translucent, white, or white manner from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 507 (F) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, yellow or brown or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 507 (G), in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 508 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of green transparent and green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 508 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express grass in the form of green transparent, green, or green from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 508 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 508 (B), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6444b. This is an example of being transformed into a portion 6442b. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of green translucent, green, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored light diffusing portion 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 508 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in the form of green transparent, green, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 508 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 508 (D), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 509 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in a colorless transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 509 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, yellow or brown or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 509 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (G). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 509 (A) to 509 (C), by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored light scattering is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Part 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 509 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, or silver can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, so that the light reaches the end forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. Is reached, and it becomes possible to irradiate light upward or backward at the upper end of the grass substrate 6420. This makes it possible to decorate other members by irradiating them with light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the members located above and behind the end portion forming the outer peripheral portion of the grass substrate 6420 with green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided not to decorate the grass accessory 6400 itself but to decorate other members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D), the outer shape of at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible to the player as a decorative shape. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the light scattering portion 6444 of the grass front cover, the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself is used for decoration. The light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate also decorates the grass substrate 6420. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in different colors can be used as a decorative mode when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off and when the light emitting unit is turned off.

FIGS. 510 (A) to 510 (D) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 500 (H). In these examples, the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In addition, the size of the grass back cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass board 6420, the front surface of the grass back cover 6460 is covered by the grass board 6420, and the grass back cover 6460 protrudes outside the outer shape of the grass board 6420. Although it is configured, a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 510 (A), a colorless and transparent back cover 6460 is provided behind the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass cover 6460 is not treated with lens cuts or satin finishes, and is formed smoothly. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass posterior cover located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, it is possible to decorate the colorless transparent portion 6462a on the rear cover of the grass. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the exposed part of the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass substrate in front view with green, and grass is growing. The aspect can be expressed.

FIG. 510 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass back cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6462b of the grass back cover in the example shown in FIG. 510 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6462b of the grass back cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of green transparent and white from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to the light emitting mode, it is possible to decorate the colored transparent portion 6462b on the rear cover of the grass. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the exposed portion of the colored transparent portion 6462b of the grass posterior cover with green, and the grass is growing. The aspect can be expressed.

FIG. 510 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass back cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6464a of the grass back cover in the example shown in FIG. 510 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express a colorless translucent, white grass from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, it is possible to decorate the colorless light scattering portion 6464a on the rear cover of the grass substrate. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the exposed portion of the colorless light scattering portion 6464a of the grass substrate in front view with green, and grass grows. Can express a certain aspect.

FIG. 510 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass back cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6466 of the grass back cover in the example shown in FIG. 510 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6466 of the grass back cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion 6466 of the grass substrate, so that the light reaches the end forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to decorate the periphery of the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the periphery of the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express an aspect in which grass is growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 510 (A) to 510 (D), the outer shapes of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass back cover 6460 having a larger outer shape than the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. This gives a sense of depth.
Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. Further, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light in a predetermined color, the light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 reaches the upper end portion of the grass posterior cover 6460, and the upper end portion of the grass posterior cover 6460. Can be visually recognized as being decorated with a predetermined color.

FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G) show a modified example of the example shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 501 (G). Specifically, in the examples shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 511 (B), the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head, and the grass is grass. The rear part is visible through the substrate opening 6426.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 511 (C) to 511 (E) and FIGS. 512 (A) to 512 (G), the grass front cover 6440 is located in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover 6440 is located. Is provided with a decoratively shaped grass front cover opening 6448 that imitates the head of a rabbit, and the grass substrate 6420 is visibly configured via the grass front cover opening 6448.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 511 (F) to 511 (H), the grass posterior cover 6460 is located behind the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 has a decorative shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A board opening 6426 is provided and is provided. The grass posterior cover 6460 is visibly configured via the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 511 (A) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (A). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a punched-hole-shaped physical opening. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a decorative shape not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the rear can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 511 (B) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole, and a member located behind the grass substrate opening 6426 is directly visible. There is. The substrate grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a decorative shape not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the rear can be directly seen from the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 511 (C) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed in such a manner that the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a punched-hole-shaped physical opening, and the grass substrate 6420 located rearward is directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448. It is configured to be possible. The grass front cover opening 6448 is shaped to imitate the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass front cover openings 6448 may be provided. In this example, a grass front cover first opening 6448a and a grass front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is configured to be directly visible via the above. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is located at a position that does not overlap with the grass substrate front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view. It is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a decorative shape not only in the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 but also in the grass front cover opening 6448. Further, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized from the grass front cover opening 6448, and the shape of the grass front cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 visible from the grass front cover opening 6448 can be used. The decoration is done.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as a light emitting mode, the grass exposed at the end surface of the grass front cover 6440 forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated with the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c.

FIG. 511 (D) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is modified to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C). Further, FIG. 511 (E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C). Also in these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the same aspect as the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C).

FIG. 511 (F) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed by providing a punched-hole-shaped physical opening in the grass substrate 6420, and the grass posterior cover 6460 located rearward through the grass substrate opening 6426 can be directly seen. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and a grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the left and right sides of the grass substrate second opening 6426b.

With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a decorative shape not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the grass back cover 6460 can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426. Further, the decoration is performed by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass back cover 6460 visible from the grass substrate opening 6426.

When the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting unit 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting unit 6424b are set to emit light, the grass posterior cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b becomes the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting unit 6424a. It is decorated with the light emitted from the second light emitting portion 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, the grass posterior cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b, but the grass posterior cover 6460. The amount of light that reaches is smaller than that of the portion exposed from the second opening 6426b of the grass substrate. Therefore, the portion exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a of the grass back cover 6460 is decorated with a smaller amount of light than the portion exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b of the grass posterior cover 6460.

It should be noted that the first light emitting unit 6424a on the rear surface of the grass substrate may be turned off, and only the second light emitting unit 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate may be turned on in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a of the grass cover 6460 is not substantially decorated because light hardly reaches it, and the grass substrate second opening of the grass cover 6460 is not substantially decorated. Only the part exposed from 6426b can be decorated.

FIG. 511 (G) is an example in which the size of the grass back cover 6460 is modified to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F). Further, FIG. 511 (H) is an example in which the size of the grass back cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F). Also in these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the same embodiment as the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F).

FIG. 512 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is configured to be directly visible via the above. On the other hand, the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover does not overlap with the second light emitting portion 6422b on the front surface of the grass substrate and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate, which form a part of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. , Is provided at a position overlapping with the grass front cover 6440.

In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening portion 6448 of the grass front cover, and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is used. By interposing, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. Therefore, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the shape imitating a rabbit formed by the opening portion 6448 of the grass front cover is not conspicuous. Further, since the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is composed of white LEDs having the same color as the grass substrate 6420, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 stands out. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the existence of the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The end face of the grass is brown and is decorated, but the unexposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the end faces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the grass substrate 6420.

FIG. 512 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (B). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, but the grass front cover opening is formed in the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. 6448 is provided. Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening portion 6448 of the grass front cover, and the green grass front cover colored transparent portion. By passing through 6442b, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible as green. This makes it possible to express the aspect as if there is a white rabbit in the green grass.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. Although the end face of the grass is brown and is decorated, the white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as green in the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover. Alternatively, when green, which is the same color as the colored transparent portion of the grass front cover, is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass exposed at the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The end face forming the substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is decorated with a green emission color and has the same color as the colored transparent part of the grass front cover, so that the mode as if the rabbit was hidden in the grass is expressed. be able to.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the end faces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

In FIG. 512 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 512 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. In this example, it is possible to express white, green, and white grasses from above in front view. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment shown by exemplifying FIG. 512 (A).

FIG. 512 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (D). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, but the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by the grass front cover. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening portion 6448 of the grass front cover, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. The white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. This makes it possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit is hiding in white grass.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. Although the end face of the grass is green and is decorated, the white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white in the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the end faces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. This makes it possible to express an aspect as if there is a white rabbit in the green grass.

In FIG. 512 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 512 (D), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of being transformed into the part 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express white, white, and white grasses from above in front view. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment shown by exemplifying FIG. 512 (A).

FIG. 512 (F) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (F). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover opaque portion 6446, but the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. It is provided. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening 6448 of the grass front cover, and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover is yellow. It is visible in brown or silver. This makes it possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit is hiding in yellow, brown or silver grass.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when yellow or brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, or when the blinking mode of white is adopted as the emission mode, the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The end face forming the exposed grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is decorated in a yellow, brown or white blinking mode. Further, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. As a result, the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 have the same decorative mode, and when the light emitting mode is changed from the above-mentioned extinguished state, it is as if the white rabbit has disappeared. Aspects can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The end face is white and is decorated. Further, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. As a result, when the light emitting mode is changed from the above-mentioned extinguished state, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a, which was visually recognized as white only by the color of the substrate, is provided. The white color can also be obtained by the light emitting color of the first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a more emphasized manner.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when white is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the opening is bordered on the end face forming the grass front cover second opening portion 6448b. The grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. Thereby, it is possible to express the aspect as if the white rabbit is hidden in the yellow, brown or silver grass by emphasizing the aspect.

In FIG. 512 (G), in the example shown in FIG. 512 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, it is possible to represent white, yellow or brown or silvery, white grass from above in front view. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment shown by exemplifying FIG. 512 (A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G), an opening (grass substrate opening 6426 or grass) having a decorative shape is provided in the decorative member provided in the front (grass substrate 6420 or grass front cover 6440). By providing the front cover opening 6448) so that the member provided at the rear can be visually recognized, the decoratively shaped opening is configured to be visible to the player in a prominent state. Further, since the color, transparency, and the like are different between the member provided in the front and the member provided in the rear, the shape of the opening can be further emphasized. Further, it may be configured to use the fact that such an opening is in a decorative state as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 500 (H) and FIGS. 501 (A) to 501 (G), modifications in which an opening is provided are shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G). However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 502 (A) to 510 (D), the opening may be similarly provided.

An example was shown in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a punched physical opening to form a grass front cover opening 6448 to form a region in which the rear can be seen. Instead of the method of providing, the outer shape of the visible region may be formed by the boundary line between the region where the rear is invisible or difficult to see and the region where the rear is relatively easy to see.

For example, the outer invisible region may be composed of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inner easily visible region may be configured by the grass front cover transparent portion 6442. Alternatively, the outer hard-to-see area is made up of the colored grass-front cover opaque portion 6446, the inner easy-to-see area is made up of the grass-front cover light scattering section 6444, or the outer hard-to-see area is made up of colored grass. The front cover light scattering unit 6444 constitutes the inner easily visible area with the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, and the outer hard-to-see area is composed of the colorless grass front cover light scattering unit 6444, and the inner side is formed. The easily visible area is composed of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the outer difficult-to-see area is composed of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inner easily visible area is composed of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It may be configured by. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 is included in the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. At least two of them may be provided, and an inner easy-to-see area may be provided so as to straddle two or more of these areas. Even with such an embodiment, it is possible to provide an area having a decorative shape and having an easily visible rear portion.

In FIGS. 512B to 512G, the location where the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided is 1 such as the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although only the area was used, the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across a plurality of areas constituting the grass front cover 6440. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 has a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion. At least two of the 6446s may be provided, and the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across two or more of these areas.
FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) show examples in which the grass accessory 6400 can be visually recognized as a decorative mode in a light-off state or a light-emitting state, and these states are used as an effect in a game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event by changing when these states change from the above-mentioned one state to the above-mentioned other state. As a predetermined event, for example, a jackpot expectation degree may be indicated, or a notice indicating that the operation button 410 can be operated may be used.

In FIGS. 500 (C) to 500 (E), FIGS. 501 (A) to 509 (D), and FIGS. 511 (C) to 512 (G), an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. showed that. Further, in FIGS. 500 (F) to 500 (H) and FIGS. 510 (A) to 510 (D), an example in which the back cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 is shown, but the front of the grass substrate 6420 is shown. It is configured to combine any one embodiment of the embodiment in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with the grass substrate 6420 and any one embodiment of the embodiment in which the grass posterior cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420. You may.

When combining the embodiments, it is preferable to adopt the same size as the shape of the grass substrate 6420. Further, when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are configured to be smaller than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (F), the grass front cover 6440 is used. It is advisable to combine the examples with the grass back cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 just overlap each other in the front view. Further, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 have the same size as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500 (D) and 500 (G), they are regarded as the same size. , It is good to combine the examples. In this case, the front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6420, and the outer edge of the grass back cover 6460 just overlap each other in the front view. Further, when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are respectively larger than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500 (E) and 500 (H), the grass front cover 6440 is used. It is advisable to combine the examples with the grass back cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 just overlap each other in the front view. Further, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 may be made of a synthetic resin of the same color, and when the grass front cover 6440 is made of a colorless transparent synthetic resin, the grass back cover 6460 is colorless and transparent. It is preferable to form it from the synthetic resin of. When the grass front cover 6440 is made of a green transparent synthetic resin, the grass back cover 6460 may be made of a green transparent synthetic resin.

When the embodiments are combined, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424, but among the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424. One may be configured not to be provided. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (E) and 500 (H) are combined, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are larger in front view than the grass substrate 6420. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the back cover 6460 with the light from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. It is also possible to decorate the grass front cover 6440 with the light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, it is desirable to provide a light scattering portion so as to border the end at the end forming the outer peripheral edge when viewed from the front. It should be noted that both the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424 may be configured not to be provided. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to have a function of relaying a signal from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to another accessory, for example.

Any one example in the above-mentioned grass accessory 6400 may be applied to each of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 shown in FIG. 496. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed, and the region other than the first grass decorative portion 6360a constituting the outer region of the first grass movable portion 6360 is used. , A member constituting the outer region in any one example of the grass accessory 6400 and an inner region with respect to the first grass decorative portion 6360a constituting the inner region in the first grass movable portion 6360. It is good to apply it to the member. Further, with respect to the region other than the second grass decoration portion 6370a constituting the outer region in the second grass movable portion 6370 and the second grass decoration portion 6370a constituting the inner region in the second grass movable portion 6370. It is advisable to fit the member constituting the outer region and the member constituting the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400.

Further, any one example of the grass accessory 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. For example, the example shown in FIG. 510 (B) may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. In this case, the white grass substrates 6420 on the left and right are in contact with each other to form the decorative body 1. In addition, the left and right green transparent grass cover 6460 are in contact with each other to form the decorative body 1. On the other hand, even when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move to the left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass back covers 6460 each form one decorative body as a single body. is doing.

In FIG. 495, the third grass accessory 6480 is provided and the fourth grass accessory 6485 is provided behind it, but the left half of the fourth grass accessory 6485 is located in front of the third grass accessory 6485 when viewed from the front. It is configured to be hidden by the grass character 6480. Here, any one example in the above-mentioned grass accessory 6400 may be applied to each of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485. At this time, it is desirable that the size of the grass substrate 6420 included in the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 is the same. Further, one or both of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 that can be provided by the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 are simultaneously produced as a light emitting mode as in the above-mentioned example. It may be configured.

The following is an example in which the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 510 (A) is adopted as the third grass accessory 6480, and the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 507 (E) is adopted as the fourth grass accessory 6485. In this case, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 included in the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass accessory 6480 provided in front emits light, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass accessory 6485, It is possible to illuminate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 from the front side. Further, the 4th grass accessory 6485 can efficiently diffusely reflect the light emitted from the 3rd grass accessory 6480 forward and enhance the interest of the player as an effect.

On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the back cover 6460 of the third grass accessory 6480 by irradiating light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 included in the fourth grass accessory 6485. At this time, only the peripheral portion such as the upper part of the grass back cover 6460 can be visually recognized as a decorated aspect by the player, but the light passes through the grass back cover 6460 and the light is rearward by the white grass substrate 6420. It diffusely reflects and is irradiated toward the fourth grass accessory 6485, and decorates the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass accessory 6485.

In this way, the light is diffusely reflected alternately between the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear, so that the position of the light source cannot be seen by the player. It is possible to efficiently reflect light forward while arranging it. In particular, when a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light is adopted as the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466, it becomes possible to reflect light more efficiently.

An example was shown in which the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear partially overlap each other in front view, but the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory are shown. It may be configured so that it completely overlaps with 6485 in front view. Further, the third grass accessory 6480 may be configured to be larger than the fourth grass accessory 6485. Then, in front view, the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to be completely hidden behind the third grass accessory 6480. Alternatively, it may be configured to be arranged at a position where they are adjacent to each other but do not overlap in the front view.

One or both of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided behind may be movable as an effect. For example, an example was shown in which the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear partially overlap each other in front view. From this state, the third grass accessory 6480 And the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured so as to completely overlap each other in front view. In this case, one of the 3rd grass accessory 6480 and the 4th grass accessory 6485 moves in the left-right direction, so that the 3rd grass accessory 6480 and the 4th grass accessory 6485 completely overlap each other in the front view. The third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 move in the left-right direction so that the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 can be seen from the front. It may be configured so as to completely overlap with. In this case, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to be able to move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in front view to a state in which they overlap. Further, the moving direction may be configured to be movable not only in the left-right direction but also in the up-down direction. In this case, it may be configured so that the grass can be moved upward or downward by the height of the grass itself. Even with such a configuration, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 can be configured to be able to move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in front view to a state in which they overlap. Then, it is preferable to configure the structure so that the light emitting mode as in each of the above-mentioned examples can be taken in the state where the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 are overlapped with each other in the front view.

An example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable has been shown, but the movement of the grass accessory 6400 also causes the openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover opening 6448) to be difficult to see or invisible. The change to a visible state may be adopted as an effect. Specifically, in relation to the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear and provided with the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448, in front view. From the state where the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided in the 4th grass accessory 6485 are located behind the 3rd grass accessory 6480, the third grass accessory 6480 is rearward in front view. 4 The grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided in the grass accessory 6485 change to a state in which the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 can be visually recognized by the player. It is good to configure it so that.

Although the example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable is shown, the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be movable as an effect at a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, at this time, a predetermined image may be displayed as an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the outline of the grass accessory 6400 is imitated in accordance with the movement of the grass accessory 6400. The image may be configured to be moved and displayed upward. At this time, it is desirable to configure the plant so as to move while displaying an image imitating the outline of the grass accessory 6400 slightly above the grass accessory 6400 in front view. With such a configuration, an image imitating the outline of the grass accessory 6400, the outer shape of the grass accessory 6400 composed of the grass front cover 6440 or the grass substrate 6422 or the grass posterior cover 6460, and the grass front cover 6440 are configured. There are multiple grass-like shapes expressed by the grass substrate 6420, which is smaller than the boundary line between the plurality of members or the transparent grass front cover 6440 and can be seen through the grass front cover 6440, from the top to the bottom. The provided decoration mode can be made visible to the player. In this way, one decorative mode can be realized as an effect by the three of the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the accessory, and the shape provided in the accessory. As shown in FIGS. 502 (B) and 507 (B), when the grass accessory 6400 has two shapes when viewed from the front, a total of four shapes realize one decoration mode as an effect. be able to.

The back surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to mount the same electronic components as those included in the rabbit accessory 6000. Further, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive, and power is supplied to the LEDs. Similarly, the wiring to be used may be configured to be attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6424 is provided with a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b so that the wiring is difficult to see from the player. The LED and the wiring may be located behind these. In addition, by attaching a pattern of the same shape as the LED and wiring to the transparent grass substrate 6420 by printing or engraving, the LED and wiring will be difficult for the player to see while ensuring the transparency of the grass substrate 6420. It may be configured. In this case, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424 to emit light, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, or the LED A pattern having the same shape as the wiring may be illuminated to be in a decorative state. With such a configuration, both the function of hiding the existence of LEDs and wiring and the function of decoration can be realized by these members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (C) to 512 (G), 1 grass substrate 6420 and 1 grass front cover 6440, or 1 grass substrate 6420 and 1 grass posterior cover 6460, or 1 Although an example is shown in which the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 constitute 1 grass accessory 6400, the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 are shown. At least one member of the above may be increased to a plurality to form one grass accessory 6400. For example, two grass boards 6440 may be attached to one grass substrate 6420 to form one grass accessory 6400, or two grass boards 6420 may be attached to one grass substrate cover 6440. You may make up 1 grass cover 6400. Further, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 are made into a plurality of parts, the embodiments shown in FIGS. 500 (C) to 512 (G) are independently applied to each of the plurality of members. May be applied. For example, in the mountain accessory 6500 described later, the front cover of 2 is provided on the substrate of 1, and an opening is provided in the front cover of 1 of them so that the substrate located at the rear can be visually recognized and the substrate is also opened. This is an example in which a part is provided.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D), a grass front cover 6440 larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover 6440, but the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is viewed from the front so that the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is difficult to see or cannot be seen. The grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are provided at least in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion is provided in front of the portion other than the outer edge portion. 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even with such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in a band shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is expanded upward, and the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover colorless light scattering. It may be configured to be covered by the portion 6444b. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 507 (E), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is reduced upward, and the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover colorless light. It may be configured to be covered by the scattering portion 6444b. Further, also in FIGS. 507 (F) and 507 (G), similarly, by expanding or contracting the area occupied by the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover upward, the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass front cover. It may be configured to be covered by the opaque portion 6446. Alternatively, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion so that at least a part of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 having a decorative shape. The same effect can be obtained even when the portion 6446 is provided.

In FIGS. 487 and 495, an example in which the grass accessory 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 is shown, but the grass accessory 6400 is provided at a position other than this. It may be configured as follows. For example, the grass accessory 6400 may be provided in the area between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190. Alternatively, the grass accessory 6400 may be provided on the member constituting the door frame 3. For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to provide grass accessories. In addition, not only the grass accessory 6400 but also other accessories may be configured to be provided at the same position as the grass accessory 6400.

In this way, in the grass accessory 6400, it is possible to perform an effect of making it visible in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, etc. by a plurality of members constituting the grass accessory 6400. It is possible to express the appearance of frost and snow on lush grass, dead grass, and dead grass. In addition, it is possible to express how the grass has changed from one of these aspects to another.

In the example shown in FIG. 495, the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 are provided in front of the mountain accessory 6500. Further, in these examples, the rabbit accessory 6000 has a face light emitting portion 6023, and the stump accessory 6100 has a first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and a second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, and light is emitted from these light emitting portions. It is possible to take a staging state by irradiating the front. By the way, in these examples, the light from the light emitting portion is diffusely reflected by the member provided around the light emitting portion, and a part of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is directed to the rear, so that the light from the light emitting portion is emitted. There is a problem that the light cannot be efficiently irradiated forward and the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light is lowered. Therefore, the following is an example in which the utilization efficiency of the light from the light emitting portion can be improved by reflecting the light toward the rear on the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 which is a decorative body.

FIG. 513 shows a modified example of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like. FIG. 513 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 513 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 513 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b as a face light emitting unit 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped to imitate the mouth of a rabbit. The left and right front legs of a rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, and the first arm portion 6016 and the second arm portion 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body portion 6030 which is a plate-shaped member made of a white opaque synthetic resin, which imitates a body portion of a rabbit, is provided. Further, the face cover portion 6010 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the first face light scattering section 6011a and the second face light scattering section 6011a and the second face light scattering are performed at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b, respectively. A portion 6011b is provided. Up to this point, the configuration is the same as that of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 513 (A), the face substrate 6020 does not have the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the face substrate 6020 is concave toward the rear formed by the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012, the face cover portion right surface portion 6013, the face cover portion lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover portion left surface portion 6015 included in the face cover portion 6010. It is attached so that it fits into the part where it is. Further, in the face cover portion 6010, the upper surface of the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 has a shape that protrudes upward at two places on the left and right, so that the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are formed. Further, the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing on the front surface of the face cover portion 6010 with brown ink.

When the rabbit accessory 6000 takes such an embodiment, the light from the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b is diffusely reflected by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b. After that, the upper surface portion 6012 of the face cover portion, the right surface portion 6013 of the face cover portion, the lower surface portion 6014 of the face cover portion, the left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion, the first ear portion 6021, the first ear decoration portion 6021a, and the second ear portion 6022. In the second ear decoration portion 6022a or the like, there is a possibility that the light is reflected many times and the light is directed backward.

Further, even when the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a or the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b included in the stump accessory 6100 shown in FIGS. 496 to 499 emits light, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a or the second rear wall emits light. The light from the light emitting portion 6354b is diffusely reflected by the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, and then the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330. , There is a risk that the light will be reflected and directed backward at the box left wall portion 6340 or the like.

Therefore, an example of improving the light utilization efficiency by reflecting the light that has been directed backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 to the front again on the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 is shown below.

FIG. 514 (A) shows a mountain accessory 6500. The dotted line in the figure indicates the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 are provided. Further, for the rabbit accessory 6000, the outer shape of the face substrate 6020 is also shown by a dotted line. The mountain accessory 6500 is composed of a mountain board 6520, a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain board 6520, and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the front right side of the mountain board 6520.

The mountain board 6520 is composed of a printed circuit board whose front and rear surfaces are white. Further, on the front surface of the mountain board 6520, a plurality of LEDs constituting the mountain board front light emitting unit 6522 are mounted. Further, a mountain board opening 6524 is provided substantially in the center of the mountain board 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain board opening 6524 is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the mountain board 6520. Members located rearward can be visually recognized via the mountain substrate opening 6524.

The first Yamamae cover 6540 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first Yamamae cover colored transparent portion 6542, a first Yamamae cover colored light scattering portion 6544, and a first Yamamae cover opening 6548. There is. With such a configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be visually recognized by the color of the first mountain front cover 6540. Specifically, the color of the first Yamamae cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on the mountain or the mountain has a glacier. The first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the first mountain front cover 6540. Further, the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed so as to straddle the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. The mountain substrate 6520 located behind the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is visible in white. The second Yamamae cover 6560 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second Yamamae cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second Yamamae cover colorless light scattering portion 6564. With such a configuration, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on a mountain or a mountain has a glacier. Further, the mountain board opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 each decoratively express the aspect of having a cave in the mountain by its shape.

On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, a mountain substrate front surface light emitting unit 6522a to a mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting unit 6522i are provided as mountain substrate front light emitting units 6522. A colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the first light emitting portion 6522a on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A colored light scattering unit 6544 for the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the second light emitting unit 6522b on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A colored light scattering unit 6544 for the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 provided by the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is located in front of the first mountain front cover colored light scattering unit 6544. is doing. A colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the fourth light emitting portion 6522d on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 provided by the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is located in front of the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542. There is. A stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the fifth light emitting unit 6522e on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the sixth light emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover is provided in front of the seventh light emitting portion 6522g on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the colorless transparent portion 6562. A colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover is provided in front of the eighth light emitting portion 6522h on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A second mountain front cover colorless light scattering unit 6564 is provided in front of the ninth light emitting unit 6522i on the front surface of the mountain substrate.

The mountain accessory 6500 is a front view where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and is visible in white, and the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered by the colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover and is visible in light blue. The front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the colored light scattering part 6544 of the first mountain front cover and is visible in light blue, and the mountain board 6520 is not located behind the colored transparent part 6542 of the first mountain front cover and is transparent in blue. A region that can be visually recognized in blue, a region that can be visually recognized in blue translucently without the mountain substrate 6520 located behind the colored light scattering portion 6542b of the first mountain front cover, and a region that can be visually recognized by the mountain substrate opening 6524. The area where the rear member is visible in a hole shape, the area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and is visible in white, and the area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is visible are the first. It is composed of a region covered with the colorless light scattering portion 6564 of the 2 Yamamae cover and visually visible in white, and a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is not located behind the colorless transparent portion 6562 of the 2nd Yamamae cover and is visually visible. ing.

FIG. 514 (B) shows a state in which the above-mentioned rabbit accessory 6000 and stump accessory 6100 are provided in front of such a mountain accessory 6500. Behind the rabbit accessory 6000, there is an area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and visible in white, and an area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover and is visible in light blue. The front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the colored light scattering portion 6544 of the first mountain front cover to provide a region visible in light blue, and the first rabbit accessory 6000 provided in the front in these regions is provided. By diffusely reflecting the light from the face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b toward the front, it is possible to improve the efficiency of light utilization. Further, behind the stump accessory 6100, a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually visible in white, and the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with a colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover and is visually recognized in white. Regions are provided, and in these regions, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b provided in the stump accessory 6100 provided in front is diffusely reflected forward. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of light utilization. As described above, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to have a plurality of reflection regions corresponding to each of the plurality of members including the light emitting portion.

When the mountain substrate 6520 located behind the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 is configured to reflect the light from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 forward in this way, the rabbit role is used. It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in the substrate region hidden by the object 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. Specifically, it is desirable to adopt white or bright color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520. Further, in the substrate area hidden by the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 may be exposed without providing a cover in front, or a colorless transparent cover may be provided when a cover is provided. It is good to configure it so that it does. In the example shown in FIG. 514 (A), the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in the region corresponding to the right side of the front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. Further, in the region where the mountain board 6520 is exposed, electronic components such as the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 are not mounted on the front surface of the mountain board 6520. Further, in the region corresponding to the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is either exposed or covered with the colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to further increase the efficiency of light reflection to the front.

Of the mountain board front light emitting units 6522 provided on the mountain board 6520, the mountain board front first light emitting unit 6522a and the mountain board front fourth light emitting unit 6522d have the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 in front of the mountain substrate. For the front second light emitting unit 6522b and the mountain substrate front third light emitting unit 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering unit 6544 is in front, and for the mountain substrate front ninth light emitting unit 6522i, the second mountain front cover is in front. A colorless light scattering unit 6564 is provided. As described above, by providing a cover that is colored or scatters light in front of the light emitting portion 6522 on the front surface of the mountain substrate, the player is configured to prevent the light from the light emitting portion from being directly irradiated to the eyes of the player. On the other hand, the fifth light emitting unit 6522e on the front surface of the mountain substrate and the sixth light emitting unit 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate are not provided with a cover in the front and are exposed on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520. This is used to illuminate the stump accessory 6100 located in front of the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting unit 6522e and the mountain substrate front surface sixth light emitting unit 6522f, and the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting unit 6522e, This is because the light from the sixth light emitting unit 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate is not directly applied to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the light emitting portion 6522 on the front surface of the mountain substrate inconspicuous. As described above, in the mountain board 6500, the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 is not evenly arranged on the front surface of the mountain board 6500, but the first mountain front cover 6540 located in front of the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522. It is unevenly distributed corresponding to the second Yamamae cover 6560, the rabbit accessory 6000, and the stump accessory 6100.

FIG. 514 (C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of being moved from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. In this state, the mountain board front third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain board front fourth light emitting unit 6522d, which had been positioned to overlap behind the rabbit accessory 6000 in front view, are configured to be visible to the player in front view. Has been done. The rabbit accessory 6000 can not only emit light in the standby position as described above, but also emit light in a predetermined color as an effect even in the moving position. At this time, the game board side effect display device 1600 may display the effect with the same emission color as the emission color of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is made to emit white light, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured to perform an effect of displaying a white line extending radially from the position where the rabbit character 6000 is located. May be good.

FIG. 514 (C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of being moved from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. When viewed from the front, a third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain board and a fourth light emitting unit 6522d on the front surface of the mountain board are provided behind the rabbit character 6000, and even when the rabbit character 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit character is provided. Even when the 6000 is in the moving position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 may be configured to emit light in white at the same time as displaying the white line on the game board side effect display device 1600.

When the third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate and the fourth light emitting unit 6522d on the front surface of the mountain substrate are in the light emitting mode as the effect while the rabbit character 6000 is in the standby position, the upper surface of the face cover portion of the rabbit character 6000 Light emitted from the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting unit 6522d passes through 6012, the face cover portion right surface portion 6013, the face cover portion lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover portion left surface portion 6015. , The contour of the rabbit's face is the light emitting mode. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000, the light emitted from the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting unit 6522d is diffusely reflected backward. Then, this light is again diffusely reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain accessory 6500. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light.

In the example shown in FIG. 514, the mountain accessory 6500 is configured to be larger than the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 in the area in the front view, but the area in the front view is the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory. An accessory smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 so as to exhibit the same function as the mountain accessory 6500. For example, such an accessory may be arranged so as to fit within the region formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 in front view. Further, as such an accessory, for example, it is white like the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A), 501 (A), 504 (A), 510 (A) to 510 (D). The front surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be exposed, or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 may be covered with the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. Even in such a configuration, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the colorless transparent portion 6442a from the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100. It is possible to diffusely reflect light forward.

In the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 513, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely accommodated in the face cover portion 6010 when viewed from the front. Such an embodiment may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the above-mentioned grass accessory 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is accommodated in the grass front cover 6440 in a front view. Alternatively, it may be applied to the relationship between the grass cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is accommodated in the grass back cover 6460 in a front view. Specifically, for example, a plurality of substrates having a flower-like shape do not overlap with the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 or the front surface of the grass rear cover 6460 in front view, and further, the grass front. It may be configured to be attached to the cover 6440 or the grass cover 6460 so that the entire board is completely fitted. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize decoration by a combination of the substrate and the grass front cover 6440 or a combination of the substrate and the grass rear cover 6460. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate and the cover are provided.

As shown in FIG. 495, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. There are multiple accessories in the space. Among these characters, the first giant tree character 6600, the second giant tree character 6650, the first cloud character 6700, the second cloud character 6750, and the board back grass character are located close to the back surface of the game panel 1100. 6800 is provided. These are visible through a colorless and transparent synthetic resin gaming panel 1100, and have a function of decorating the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100.

The first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree accessory 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Specifically, it is composed of a first giant tree accessory 6600 located on the left side of the back surface of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree accessory 6650 located on the right side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630. The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is composed of a brown printed circuit board, and the first giant tree leaf board 6630 is composed of a green printed circuit board. A plurality of light sources composed of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the first giant tree trunk board 6610 and the first giant tree leaf board 6630, and the directions of these light sources are set to the right. The second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. The second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 is composed of a brown substrate, and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 is composed of a green substrate. A plurality of light sources composed of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the second giant tree trunk board 6660 and the first giant tree leaf board 6680, and the directions of these light sources are set to the left. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. However, for each of these substrates, the structure according to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) may be adopted.

The first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 are provided so as to cover above the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 are each composed of a white printed circuit board. For each of these substrates, the structure according to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) may be adopted.

The first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 that constitutes the first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 that constitutes the second giant tree accessory 6650 are from the end of the game panel 1100, within the game area 5a, and further to the game. It is configured to be continuously visible to the player over the panel opening 1100a. Further, the second cloud accessory 6750 is configured to be continuously visible to the player from the outside of the game area 5a to the inside of the game area 5a and further to the game panel opening 1100a. On the other hand, the first giant tree leaf board 6630 that constitutes the first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 that constitutes the second giant tree accessory 6650 so as to overtake the upper left and upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600. The game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so as not to look like a square. The mountain accessory 6500 is also provided so as to catch up with the lower left and lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, and is configured so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look like a square. Further, the mountain accessory 6500 is provided at a position closest to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the accessories provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 515 shows the board back grass accessory 6800. The board back grass accessory 6800 is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the lower part of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The board back grass accessory 6800 is composed of a board back grass substrate 6820 and a board back grass front cover 6840. The back cover 6840 may be made of, for example, a colored transparent synthetic resin, and specifically, a green transparent synthetic resin. Regarding the relationship between the board back grass substrate 6820 and the board back grass front cover 6840, the structures related to the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) are adopted. It may be configured to do so. Similarly, the structure related to the grass back cover 6460 may be adopted for the board back grass accessory 6800.

The board back grass accessory 6800 has a passing portion for passing a game ball that has passed through an opening provided in the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in a winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 located on the front side. As a result, a circular board back grass substrate opening 6824 and a board back grass front cover opening 6848 are provided. The game ball that has passed through the board back grass substrate opening 6824 and the board back grass front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided in the board back grass accessory 6800. Further, the sensor for detecting the game ball is attached below each passing portion and on the back surface of the board back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the existence of the sensor. As shown below, the board back grass substrate first opening 6824a to the board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d as the board back grass substrate opening 6824 are used as the board back grass front cover opening 6848 to cover the board back grass front cover. The first opening 6848a to the fourth opening 6848d of the back grass front cover are provided.

The first opening 6824a of the back grass substrate and the first opening 6848a of the front cover of the back grass are circular in the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping with each other in the board back grass accessory 6800 in front view. Then, the game ball moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate first opening 6824a and the board back grass front cover first opening 6848a. It forms a passing portion for passing through.

The front surface of the board back grass substrate second opening 6824b is not covered with the board back grass front cover 6840, and constitutes a passing portion for allowing the game ball to pass directly through the exposed board back grass board 6820.

The board back grass front cover second opening 6848b does not have the board back grass substrate 6820 located behind it, and only the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b constitutes a passing portion for directly passing the game ball. is doing. In this example, the shape of the board back grass substrate 6820 is formed along the contour below the second opening 6848b of the board back grass front cover. With such a configuration, while making the shape of the board back grass substrate 6820 a decorative outer shape, a passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b to the sensor located below. It is possible to make it as difficult to see as possible.

The third opening 6824c of the back grass substrate and the third opening 6848c of the front cover of the back grass are circular in the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping with each other in the board back grass accessory 6800 in front view. Then, the game ball moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c. It forms a passing portion for passing through. Then, in this example, two elliptical regions are formed on the board back grass front cover 6840 at the upper part of the passage portion formed by the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c. By doing so, the decorative shape imitating the head of a rabbit can be visually recognized. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the board back grass accessory 6800 can be made. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation as being damaged.

The fourth opening 6824d of the board back grass substrate and the fourth opening 6848d of the board back grass front cover have the same size and shape, respectively, and have a shape in which two elliptical portions protrude from the upper part of the circular outer shape. Nothing. Further, these are provided at positions where they overlap each other in the front view of the board back grass accessory 6800. Then, the game ball moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d and the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d. It forms a passing portion for passing through. In this example, the shapes of the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c themselves are visually recognizable as decorative shapes imitating the head of a rabbit. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the board back grass accessory 6800 can be made. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation as being damaged.

In addition, it is preferable to arrange a tubular member formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in the passing portion through which the game ball passes so that the game ball can pass through. Further, it may be formed from a colored transparent synthetic resin of the tubular member, and the color of the synthetic resin may be the same as that of the board back grass front cover 6840 or the same color as the board back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, the presence of the tubular member can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the board back grass accessory 6800 is impaired. ..

The 1st giant tree accessory 6600, the 2nd giant tree accessory 6650, the 1st cloud accessory 6700, the 2nd cloud accessory 6750, and the board back grass accessory 6800 are attached to the front of the game panel 1100, respectively. It is located behind the game panel 1100 in a manner straddling the rail member 5950. This makes it possible to visually recognize each accessory as a decoration without being aware of the existence of the rail member 5950. The entire rail member 5950 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be composed of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, and at least one of the members may be composed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, the visibility of each accessory located behind is improved, and it is possible to expand the range in which decoration is performed. Further, the rail member 5950 may be formed of a synthetic resin having the same color as the accessory located behind. For example, when the board back grass accessory 6800 is visible in green, the rail member 5950 provided at a position overlapping the board back grass accessory 6800 in front view may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

When the game ball driven into the game area 5a is charged, an electric discharge is generated at an unintended place, an electronic component is damaged due to a high voltage, or an electromagnetic pulse generated by the electric discharge causes an unintended illegal operation of the control element. There is a risk of controlling. In particular, a role provided with a printed circuit board on which electronic components are mounted, such as the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, the second cloud accessory 6750, and the board back grass accessory 6800. When an object is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, such a situation is more likely to occur in the electronic components mounted on these boards.

Therefore, in the case of these accessories having a front cover, at least a part of the front cover may be configured to have a silver opaque portion formed by the above-mentioned metal thin film. More specifically, the front cover may be provided so that such an opaque portion is located in front of the portion where the electronic component is mounted on the substrate. Further, each accessory may be provided so that the front surface of each accessory that may be affected by such a charged game ball does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100. Alternatively, in the area where the charged game ball rolls and falls and overlaps with the game area 5a in front view, at least the front surface of each accessory is provided so as not to touch the back surface of the game panel 1100. It may be configured.

Further, it is desirable that the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 and the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided on each accessory are as different paths as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 may be finally installed on the island equipment via a ground circuit provided on each accessory, or conversely, a ground wire on each accessory may be provided on the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to finally install it in the island facility via the grounding circuit. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a ground circuit board having a static elimination function at a predetermined position on the back surface of the gaming machine so that the ground path from the game panel 1100 and the ground path from each accessory merge on the ground circuit board. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of the charged game ball driven into the game area 5a.

In FIGS. 487 and 495, an example in which the board back grass accessory 6800 is provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100 is shown. The object 6100 may be configured to be provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100. Also in this case, the light diffusely reflected backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 can be reflected forward again to improve the efficiency of light utilization. In addition, using the function of reflection of the mountain board 6520, the winning opening unit equipped with other decorative accessories and the winning opening should be arranged in front of the mountain accessory in the same manner as the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. It may be configured as. Even in this case, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the decorative accessory or the winning school unit and diffusely reflected backward can be reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520.

Further, by providing a plurality of columnar spacers on the back surface of the front cover constituting these accessories, the front surface of the substrate does not come into direct contact with the top of the spacer and does not come into direct contact with the back surface of the front cover. You may. Specifically, as the structure of each spacer, it is preferable to adopt a columnar structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm perpendicular to the back surface of the front cover. In addition, the spacer may be integrally molded with the same material for the front cover. Further, when the front cover has a plurality of regions, the spacer may be configured to be provided in a region where the rear is more difficult to see. For example, it is preferable to integrally mold the colored transparent portion, the colored light scattering portion, and the spacer of the front cover with a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes transparent in green. Further, in this case, it is preferable not to provide a spacer in the colored transparent portion but to provide a spacer in the colored light scattering portion. By providing the spacer having such a configuration, the front cover and the substrate are arranged in parallel with the spacer height separated. With such a configuration, the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated by the front cover, and the substrate is decorated at a position several mm behind the front cover. At this time, since the substrate is located at the rear side as compared with the case where the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated with the substrate, the decorative effect is exhibited by the color of the substrate and the outer shape of the substrate. However, the presence of through holes and electronic components provided on the substrate can be made less noticeable to the player. Further, by separating the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the substrate, it is possible to reduce the influence of the electric discharge from the charged game ball and the electromagnetic pulse on the substrate.

The back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, and the second cloud role 6750 are each provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100. .. Specifically, it is arranged on the front side of the intermediate position between the surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100. Also, in the space between the board back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the game board side effect display device 1600. Is provided with a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 as movable accessories. The rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 600 may be provided at the lower part of the game panel 1100 on which the board back grass accessory 6800 is provided.

A light emitting part is provided on the front surface of the substrate in an accessory that does not have a front cover, such as the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, and the second cloud accessory 6750. In this case, a scattering portion that scatters the light emitted from the light emitting portion may be formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 that overlaps with the light emitting portion in front view. Alternatively, even when a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided at a position overlapping the light emitting portion in front view, the scattering portion is similarly formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100. You may.

Each effect example in the embodiment and each technical matter in each effect example may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Further, each technical item in each accessory configuration may be combined and applied to form an embodiment.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 1st special symbol indicator 1404 1st special hold number indicator 1405 2nd special symbol indicator 1406 2nd special hold number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side Direction display device 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Large winning opening 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit accessory 6010 Face cover part 6011 Face cover part Front part 6011a First face light scattering part 6011b No. 2 Face light scattering part 6012 Face cover part Top surface part 6013 Face cover part Right side part 6014 Face cover part Bottom part 6015 Face cover part Left side part 6016 First arm part 6017 Second arm part 6020 Face substrate 6021 First ear part 6021a First Ear decoration part 6022 Second ear decoration part 6022a Second ear decoration part 6023 Face light emitting part 6023a First face light emitting part 6023b Second face light emitting part 6024 Mouth decoration part 6025 Control element 6026 Driver 6027 Resistance 6027a First resistance 6027b Second resistance 6027c 3rd resistance 6027d 4th resistance 6027e 5th resistance 6027f 6th resistance 6028 Condenser 6028a 1st capacitor 6028b 2nd capacitor 6029 Connector 6030 Body part 6100 Stump accessory 6200 Stump part 6210 Stump plate part 6210a Stump box part 6300 Box upper wall part 6320 Box right wall part 6330 Box lower wall part 6340 Box left wall part 6350 Box rear wall part 6352 Rear wall board 6352a First rear wall board 6352b Second rear wall board 6354 Rear wall light emitting part 6354a First rear wall Light emitting part 6354b 2nd rear wall light emitting part 6356 Rear wall cover 6358 Rear wall cover light scattering part 6358a 1st rear wall cover light scattering part 6358b 2nd rear wall cover light scattering part 6360 1st grass movable part 6360a 1st grass decoration part 6370 2nd grass moving part 6370 a 2nd grass decoration part 6380 rear wall plate part 6400 grass accessory 6420 grass substrate 6422 grass substrate front light emitting part 6422a grass substrate front 1st light emitting part 6422b grass substrate front 2nd light emitting part 6422c grass substrate front 3rd light emitting part 6424 grass Substrate rear surface light emitting part 6424a Grass substrate rear surface first light emitting part 6424b Grass substrate rear surface second light emitting part 6426 Grass substrate opening 6426a Grass substrate first opening 6426b Grass substrate second opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover transparent part 6442a Grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442b Grass front cover colored transparent part 6444 Grass front cover light scattering part 6444a Grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444b Grass front cover colored light scattering part 6446 Grass front cover opaque part 6448 Grass front cover opening 6448a Grass Front cover 1st opening 6448b Grass front cover 2nd opening 6460 Grass back cover 6462 Grass back cover Transparent part 6462a Grass back cover colorless transparent part 6462b Grass back cover Colored transparent part 6464 Grass back cover Light scattering part 6464a Grass back cover colorless Light scattering part 6464b Grass back cover Colored light scattering part 6466 Grass back cover Opaque part 6470 1st grass role 6475 2nd grass role 6480 3rd grass role 6485 4th grass role 6500 Mountain role 6520 Mountain board 6522 Mountain Board front light emitting part 6522a Mountain board front first light emitting part 6522b Mountain board front second light emitting part 6522c Mountain board front third light emitting part 6522d Mountain board front fourth light emitting part 6522e Mountain board front fifth light emitting part 6522f Mountain board front 6th Light emitting part 6522g Mountain board front surface 7 light emitting part 6522h Mountain board front surface 8 light emitting part 6522i Mountain board front surface 9 light emitting part 6524 Mountain board opening 6540 1st mountain front cover 6542 1st mountain front cover Colored transparent part 6544 1st mountain Front cover Colored light scattering part 6548 1st mountain front cover opening 6560 2nd mountain front cover 6562 2nd mountain front cover Colorless transparent part 6564 2nd mountain front cover Colorless light scattering part 6600 1st giant tree accessory 6610 1st giant tree trunk Board 6630 1st giant tree leaf board 6650 2nd giant tree accessory 6660 2nd giant tree trunk board 6680 2nd giant tree leaf board 6700 1st cloud role 6750 2nd cloud role 6800 board back grass board 6820 board back grass board 6822 board Back grass substrate front light emitting part 6824 Board back grass substrate opening 682 4a Board back grass board first opening 6824b Board back grass board second opening 6824c Board back grass board third opening 6824d Board back grass board fourth opening 6840 Board back grass front cover 6842 Board back grass front cover Colored transparent Part 6844 Board back grass front cover Colored light scattering part 6848 Board back grass front cover opening 6848a Board back grass front cover 1st opening 6848b Board back grass front cover 2nd opening 6848c Board back grass front cover 3rd opening 6848d Board back grass front cover 4th opening 9100 Character accessory 9110 Cover member (cover body)
9111 Transmissive part (1st area)
9112 Non-transparent part (second area)
9120 Character accessory board 9130 Base member 9200 Snowman accessory 9210 Cover member 9210a Front side cover member 9210b Back side cover member 9220 Snowman board 9301 Light emitter (LED)
9302 resistance

Claims (1)

An effect display device that can display a predetermined image, and
An accessory that is provided in front of the staging display device and exhibits a predetermined external shape, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The accessory includes a printed circuit board whose front surface is colored with a specific color and a cover body provided so as to cover the front of the printed circuit board.
The cover body has a colorless transparent region in which the specific color can be identified so that the color of the printed circuit board can be used as a decorative element, and a difficult-to-identify region in which the specific color is difficult to identify.
A gaming machine characterized in that the transmission region and the difficult-to-identify region are adjacent to each other.

Images